IN071 Engineering & Technology 109/109A Renovate for Office Indiana University Purdue University Indianapolis

Transcription

1 IN071 Engineering & Technology 109/109A Renovate for Office Indiana University Purdue University Indianapolis IU Owner: Indiana University (IUPUI Campus) Engineering Technology Building (IN017) 799 W. Michigan St. Indianapolis, IN Architect/Interior Designer: DELV Design 212 W. Tenth St., Suite F125 Indianapolis, IN Mechanical And Electrical Engineer: Vector Consulting, LLC 1005 N. Senate Ave. Indianapolis, IN DELV Design Project No NOVEMBER 2015

2

3 DELV Design Studio, LLC TABLE OF CONTENTS - PAGE 1 DIVISION 00 PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS NOTICE TO BIDDERS BID FORM INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS CONTRACTORS BID FOR PUBLIC WORK FORM 96 (REVISED) MINORITY AND WOMEN S BUSINESS ENTERPRISE PARTICIPATION PLAN CONTRACTOR ASBESTOS CERTIFICATION ASBESTOS PROTOCOL FOR CONTRACTORS PERFORMANCE AND PAYMENT BOND CONSTRUCTION AGREEMENT ESCOW AGREEMENT FIRST FINANCIAL BANK BANK OF NEW YORK MELLON TRUST COMPANY, N.A. GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACTFOR CONSTRUCTION SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS PROJECT SITE REQUIREMENTS DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Summary Unit Pricing Alternates Submittal Procedures Quality Requirements References Temporary Facilities and Controls Product Requirements Execution DIVISION 02 EXISTING CONDITIONS NOT APPLICABLE DIVISION 03 - CONCRETE NOT APPLICABLE DIVISION 04 - MASONRY NOT APPLICABLE DIVISION 05 - METALS NOT APPLICABLE DIVISION 06 WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES Rough Carpentry DIVISION 07 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION Thermal Insulation 11/30/15 IN071 ET 109/109A RENO. FOR OFFICE SPACE (IU # )

4 DELV Design Studio, LLC TABLE OF CONTENTS - PAGE Penetration Fire-stopping Joint Sealants DIVISION 08 - OPENINGS Hollow Metal Doors and Frames Flush Wood Doors Door Hardware DIVISION 09 - FINISHES Non-Structural Metal Framing Gypsum Board Acoustical Tile Ceilings Resilient Base and Accessories Resilient Tile Flooring Tile Carpeting Interior Painting DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES Indiana University Signage DIVISION 11 - EQUIPMENT NOT APPLICABLE DIVISION 12 - FURNISHINGS NOT APPLICABLE DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION NOT APPLICABLE DIVISION 14 - CONVEYING EQUIPMENT NOT APPLICABLE DIVISION 20 NOT APPLICABLE DIVISION 21 FIRE SUPPRESSION NOT APPLICABLE DIVISION 22 PLUMBING HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT GENERAL SERVICE COMPRESSED AIR PIPING DIVISION 23 HVAC 11/30/15 IN071 ET 109/109A RENO. FOR OFFICE SPACE (IU # )

5 DELV Design Studio, LLC TABLE OF CONTENTS - PAGE COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT VIBRATION CONTROLS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING FOR HVAC DUCT INSULATION HVAC PIPING INSULATION HVAC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS HYDRONIC PIPING METAL DUCTS AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS AND GRILLES FAN COIL UNITS DIVISION 26 ELECTRICAL BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS CONDUCTORS AND CABLES GROUNDING AND BONDING ELECTRICAL SUPPORTS RACEWAYS AND BOXES ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION WIRING DEVICES DIVISION 27 COMMUNICATIONS INFORMATION SYSTEM DIVISION 28 ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY FIRE ALARM SYSTEM END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS 11/30/15 IN071 ET 109/109A RENO. FOR OFFICE SPACE (IU # )

6

7 NOTICE TO BIDDERS Notice is hereby given that sealed bids will be received: By: For: At: The Trustees of Indiana University Bloomington, Indiana IN071 Engineering & Technology, 109/109A - Renovate for Office Space Indiana University Purdue University Indianapolis IU Office of the Vice President for Capital Planning and Facilities Indiana University 1800 North Range Road Bloomington, IN Until: 2:00 P.M. (local time) on December 17 th, Bids received will then be publicly opened and read aloud. Bids received after that time will be returned unopened. A Unified Bid is requested for all work in this project and will include all General, Mechanical, and Electrical work. IU Project title and number shall be indicated on the sealed bid envelope as well as contractor s name and address. All bid proposals shall be in full accord with the Bidding Documents, which are on file with the Owner and may be examined by prospective Bidders at the following locations: Capital Projects Business Office Indiana University 1800 North Range Road Bloomington, IN Bidding documents will be available December 1 st, Please contact the Eastern Engineering Distribution Department, 9901 Allisonville Road, Fishers, Indiana 46038, Ph , for deposit and purchase information. Each bid must be accompanied by a bid security for 5% of the total bid; the contractor s written drug testing program, which must be in full compliance with IC ; and the contractor s Minority and Women s Business Enterprise Participation Plan, advising whether, and if so how, the contractor will utilize minority-, women- and veteran-owned enterprises as subcontractors or material suppliers on the Project. The Owner reserves the right to accept or reject any bid and to waive any irregularities in bidding. The Base Bid may be held for a period not to exceed sixty days before awarding

8 Contracts. All Alternate Bids may be held for a period not to exceed ninety days before award and incorporation into the contract by proper Change Directive. Should a successful Bidder withdraw his bid, or fail to execute a satisfactory Contract within ten days after notice of acceptance of bid, the Owner may declare the Bid Security forfeited as liquidated damages, not as penalty. A Pre-bid meeting is scheduled for 3:00 p.m. on December 8 th, All interested parties should assemble at the Engineering Technology Building Lobby (IN071) on the Indiana University Purdue University Indianapolis Campus. The Trustees of Indiana University By: Donald S. Lukes, University Treasurer IN071 Engineering & Technology, 109/109A - Renovate for Office Space Indiana University Purdue University Indianapolis IU

9 IN071 Engineering & Technology, 109/109A - Renovate for Office Space IU BID FORM for IN071 Engineering & Technology, 109/109A - Renovate for Office Space Indiana University Purdue University Indianapolis Indianapolis, Indiana IU TO: The Trustees of Indiana University Bloomington, Indiana FROM: Bidder's Name Address City and State Phone Number FAX Number Indicate if your firm is a certified minority-owned business If Yes, please attach a copy of certification Date FEIN Yes No FOR: Unified Bid to include General, Mechanical, and Electrical Construction Work Bidders: LUMP SUM BASE BID The undersigned Bidder, with a complete understanding of existing conditions at the Project Site and a complete understanding of the Bidding Documents, including any Addenda acknowledged hereinafter, for IN071 Engineering & Technology, 109/109A - Renovate for Office Space on the Indiana University Purdue University Indianapolis campus as prepared by DELV Design Studio, LLC, hereby proposes to complete the project, in full and complete accordance with the requirements of the Bidding documents, for the LUMP SUM BASE BID PRICE of: (written amount) Dollars $ (numerals) Page 1 of 5

10 IN071 Engineering & Technology, 109/109A - Renovate for Office Space IU MAJOR SUBCONTRACTORS The Contractor proposes to utilize the following primary subcontractors for the work indicated. Indicate which are certified by the State of Indiana as an MBE or WBE company by circling the M/WBE after the name. MECHANICAL: M/WBE ELECTRICAL: M/WBE INTERIOR FINISH: M/WBE : M/WBE ALTERNATE PROPOSALS 1. Alternate proposals are requested under Alternates of the Bidding Documents. (See Specification Index) 2. The alternate proposal shall indicate the amount to be added to or deducted from the Lump Sum Base Bid if the alternate proposal is accepted by the Owner. 3. The alternate proposal shall include all costs necessary for the complete installation of the materials or items indicated for the alternate proposal, including materials, labor, equipment, operations, administration, overhead, profit, and taxes (as applicable). 4. The alternate proposal shall also include all costs for changes in the work (including work of other Separate Contracts) that will be made necessary by acceptance of the alternate proposal. 5. The Bidder shall submit prices for all the alternates listed below in the manner indicated. Cross out (Add) or (Deduct) as applicable. If there is no change in price to the Lump Sum Base Bid, write in "No Change". Alternate No. 1: Re-use Vision Window from Lab Support 109 in Lab 109A (Add) (Deduct) (written amount) Dollars $ (numerals) UNIT PRICE 1. The following Unit Prices shall include all costs necessary for the complete installation of the materials or items indicated, including materials, labor, equipment, operations, administration, overhead, profit and taxes (if applicable). 2. These Unit Prices shall be used to determine the costs for changes in the work during the construction period, when agreed upon by the Owner. 3. The Bidder shall submit Unit Prices for the following, plus any other Unit Prices requested in the Bidding Documents, in the manner indicated. Page 2 of 5

11 IN071 Engineering & Technology, 109/109A - Renovate for Office Space IU Item Unit Price - add / deduct 1. Ceiling Tile Replacement (5) 30 x 60 Tiles $ TAX EXEMPTIONS The undersigned Bidder has informed himself and all his prospective sub-contractors and suppliers of the tax exempt status of the Owner, as set forth in the Special conditions, and therefore, has not included these taxes in his Lump Sum Base Bid price. SUBSTITUTIONS The undersigned Bidder has based his bid upon the materials, products, articles, equipment, brands, manufacturers and processes described in the Bidding Documents or upon approved equivalents. Proof of equivalency of substitutions is the responsibility of the Bidder, but the Architect/Engineer shall be the sole judge of equivalency. Proposed equivalent substitutions shall be equal in all respects to the requirements of the Bidding Documents, including but not limited to the design, quality, physical size, performance characteristics, strength, previous history of use, and to the method of installation, attachment, or connection to related or adjoining work. Determination of equivalency of proposed substitutions shall be by the Architect/Engineer, before the bid opening date, as described in paragraph entitled "Substitutions" in the Instructions to Bidders. COMPLETION DATE The Undersigned Bidder agrees to coordinate and expedite his work with all contractors and that this Work will be completed no later than April 15 th, ASSIGNMENT OF COORDINATION The undersigned Bidder agrees, to the assignment of Mechanical and Electrical work to the successful General Contractor for the responsibility of complete coordination of the work as stated in the Instructions to Bidders. PERFORMANCE AND PAYMENT BOND The undersigned Bidder agrees, if awarded the Contract, to deliver to the Owner a satisfactory Performance Bond, in the full amount (100%) of the total Contract price, not later than the date of execution of the contract. The cost of the Bond shall be included in the Lump Sum Base Bid contained in this Proposal. Page 3 of 5

12 IN071 Engineering & Technology, 109/109A - Renovate for Office Space IU SUPPLEMENTAL DOCUMENTS Bid Security, State Form 96 (Revised 2005), Financial Statements, Written Drug Testing Program, which must be in full compliance with IC ; Minority and Women s Business Enterprise Participation Plan; Contractor Asbestos Certification; Asbestos Protocol for Contractors. ADDENDA The following Addenda have been received by the undersigned Bidder; and all costs resulting from these Addenda have been included in the preparation of this Bid Form: Addendum No. Addendum No. Addendum No. Addendum No. Addendum No. Dated Dated Dated Dated Dated Page 4 of 5

13 IN071 Engineering & Technology, 109/109A - Renovate for Office Space IU SIGNATURES 1. When a Bidder is an Individual: Witness Bidder Date: Address: 2. When a Bidder is a Partnership: Date: Address: Name of Partnership Partner Partner 3. When Bidder is a Corporation: Date: Address: Name of Corporation By: President Attest: Secretary CORPORATE SEAL END Page 5 of 5

14

15 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS ARTICLE 1 - DEFINITIONS... 2 ARTICLE 2 MULTI-PRIME PROJECTS WITH OR WITHOUT CONSTRUCTION MANAGER AS ADVISOR... 2 ARTICLE 3 SINGLE PRIME PROJECTS... 4 ARTICLE 4 - PROCUREMENT OF BIDDING DOCUMENTS... 4 ARTICLE 5 - EXAMINATION OF SITE AND BIDDING DOCUMENTS... 4 ARTICLE 6 - QUALIFICATION OF BIDDERS... 5 ARTICLE 7 - INTERPRETATIONS AND ADDENDA... 5 ARTICLE 8 - SUBSTITUTIONS... 6 ARTICLE 9 - PRE-BID CONFERENCE... 6 ARTICLE 10 - WAGE SCALE... 6 ARTICLE 11 ASBESTOS... 6 ARTICLE 12 - DRUG FREE WORKPLACE; DRUG TESTING PROGRAM... 7 ARTICLE 13 - RECOMMENDED EMPLOYMENT OF APPRENTICES... 7 ARTICLE 14 MINORITY AND WOMEN S BUS INESS ENTERPRISES... 7 ARTICLE 15 BID SECURITY AND FORFEITURE... 8 ARTICLE 16 - BIDDING PROCEDURES... 9 ARTICLE 17 - BID OPENING ARTICLE 18 - REJECTION OF BIDS ARTICLE 19 - SUBMISSION OF POST-BID INFORMATION ARTICLE 20 PERFORMANCE AND PAYMENT BOND, ESCROW AGREEMENT, AND OTHER REQUIRED DOCUMENTS ARTICLE 21 - AWARD OF CONTRACTS AND FORM OF AGREEMENT ARTICLE 22 MISCELLANEOUS Revised January 9, Articles 10.1, 18.2, 20.1

16 ARTICLE 1 - DEFINITIONS 1.1 Bidding Documents include the Notice to Bidders, Instructions to Bidders, the Bid Form, other sample bidding and contract forms and the proposed Contract Documents (as defined in the General Conditions), including any Addenda issued prior to receipt of bids. 1.2 All definitions set forth in the General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, AIA Document A201, ( GENERAL Conditions ) and Supplementary General Conditions, Indiana University Project Site Requirements or in other Contract Documents are applicable to the Bidding Documents. 1.3 Addenda are written or graphic instruments issued by the Owner s Representative prior to the execution of the Contract which modify or interpret the Bidding Documents by addition, deletions, clarifications or corrections. Addenda become part of the Contract Documents when the Construction Contracts are executed. 1.4 A Bid is a complete and properly signed proposal to do the Work for the sum stipulated therein supported by data called for by the Bidding Documents. 1.5 Base Bid is the sum stated in the Bid for which the Bidder offers to perform the Work described as the base to which Work may be added or deducted for sums stated in Alternate Bids. 1.6 An Alternate Bid (or Alternate) is an amount stated in the Bid to be added to or deducted from the amount of the Base Bid if the corresponding change in project scope or materials or methods of construction described in the Bidding Documents is accepted. 1.7 A Unit Price is an amount stated in the Bid as a price per unit of measurement for materials or services as described in the Contract Documents. 1.8 A Bidder is one who submits a Bid for a prime contract with the Owner for the work described in the proposed Contract Documents. 1.9 A Sub-bidder is one who submits a bid to a Bidder for materials or labor for a portion of the Work A Day means a calendar day unless otherwise specified Contract Documents means these Instructions to Bidders, the General Conditions of the Contract for Construction Between Owner and Contractor, Supplementary General Conditions, Indiana University Project Site Requirements, Notice to Bidders, Bid Forms, Notice to Proceed, Drawings, Specifications, Construction Agreement, Addenda issued prior to execution of the Construction Agreement,, any other documents listed in the Agreement, approved Schedules (per General Conditions ), and Modifications issued after execution of the Construction Agreement. A Modification is (1) a written amendment to the Contract signed by both parties, (2) Construction Change Directive or (3) a written order for a minor change in the Work issued by the Owner s Representative. 2.1 Type of Bid ARTICLE 2 MULTI-PRIME PROJECTS WITH OR WITHOUT CONSTRUCTION MANAGER AS ADVISOR If this Project is bid as a multiple prime project with Construction Manager as Advisor, 2

17 Separate Contracts will be awarded to multiple Prime Contractors, as indicated below in Section 2.2 Division of the Work, and the requirements set forth in the remainder of this Article apply The Bid Proposals for each Prime Contract shall be on the basis of a Lump Sum Base Bid, plus furnishing supplementary information and supplementary documents as requested in the Bid Form. 2.2 Division of the Work The Work of this Project has been divided into the following parts, for which Separate Contracts will be awarded: ( ) General Construction Work ( ) Mechanical Construction Work ( ) Electrical Construction Work ( ) Other These Instructions to Bidders, Notice to Bidders, Bid Form, Agreement, Notice to Proceed, General Conditions of the Contract of Construction between Owner and Contractor, Supplementary General Conditions, Indiana University Project Site Requirements, Contract for Construction, Drawings and all the Specifications apply to each of the listed Prime Contracts. Also all Addenda issued during bidding apply to each of the listed Prime Contracts The scope of work for each Prime Contract is indicated on the Drawings and in the Specification Sections. 2.3 Assignment of Coordination and Authority to Approve Pay Applications If the Owner has hired a Construction Manager as Advisor ( CM ) for this Project, the Owner will assign the coordination of the work of the all Prime Contractors to the CM and each Prime Contractors shall accept assignment of coordination as a condition of its Contract Said assignment of coordination of the work of the Prime Contractors to the CM is for the purpose of placing with one entity, namely the CM, the full and complete responsibility for coordinating and expediting all the Work required for the construction of this Project Each Prime Contractor shall provide the Owner, and not to the CM, with insurance, bonds, and such other documents as may be required under the terms of its contract and Indiana law The Owner will make monthly progress payments directly to each Prime Contractor under the terms set forth in the General Conditions and Supplementary General Conditions and Addenda thereto, and upon the written approval of the CM and Owner s Representative of each monthly payment request submitted If there is no CM for this Project, the Owner will assign the coordination of the work for all other Prime Contractors (including but not limited to the Contractors for Mechanical and Electrical Construction Work) to the General Contractor, and each Prime Contractors shall accept assignment of coordination as a condition of its Contract. The 3

18 3.1 Type of Bid duties assigned to the CM in Sections through shall be assigned to the General Contractor. On a multiple-prime Project, the General Contractor shall report to the Owner s Representative any circumstances known to it that will assist the Owner s Representative in making a determination as to whether to withhold certification of an Application for Payment submitted by another Prime Contractor. ARTICLE 3 SINGLE PRIME PROJECTS If this Project is bid as a single prime project, the requirements set forth in the remainder of this Article apply The Bid Proposal shall be on the basis of a Lump Sum Base Bid, plus furnishing supplementary information and supplementary documents as requested in the Bid Form. 3.2 Division of the Work and Coordination The Contractor shall be responsible for performance of or the provision via subcontracts of all work (general, mechanical, electrical) necessary for the completion of the work in full and complete accordance with the Bidding documents. The Contractor shall ensure that subcontractors at every tier complies with the same requirements to which the Contractor is obligated The Contractor shall ensure that the requirements set forth in Instructions to Bidders, all Addenda issued prior to receipt of Bids, the Bid Form, Agreement, General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and all Sections of Division 1 - General Requirements of the Specifications apply to each subcontract for work on this Project The scope of work for each Separate Contract is indicated on the Drawings and in the Specification Sections listed below: The Contractor has the full and complete responsibility for coordinating and expediting all the Work, including that of all of its subcontractors, required for the construction of this Project. ARTICLE 4 - PROCUREMENT OF BIDDING DOCUMENTS 4.1 Bidding Documents are on file and may be examined and/or obtained for bidding purposes as stated in the Notice to Bidders. 4.2 Bidding Documents used for bidding purposes shall remain the property of the Owner. Bidding Documents should be returned to Eastern Engineering within 21 days after the date set for opening of bids or deposit will be forfeited. ARTICLE 5 - EXAMINATION OF SITE AND BIDDING DOCUMENTS 5.1 The site shall be carefully examined prior to bidding to ascertain the location of the work, existing conditions, and all other matters which may affect the work under this Contract. Each bidder by making his bid represents that he has visited the site and familiarized himself with the local conditions under which the Work is to be performed. 5.2 The Bidding Documents shall be carefully examined to ascertain the character, quality and 4

19 quantity of the work to be performed, of materials and items to be furnished, of equipment and facilities needed during construction, of utilities and of all other matters which may affect the work under the Contract. Each bidder by making his bid represents that he has read and fully understands the Bidding Documents. 5.3 Boring information, water levels, indications of surface and subsurface conditions and similar information given on the drawings or in the specifications are furnished only for the convenience of the Bidders. Logs of available subsurface explorations, borings and drawings of existing site conditions may be examined by arrangement with the Owner. The Owner, Owner s Representative and their Consultants make no representation regarding the character and extent of the soil data or other surface or subsurface data and conditions to be encountered during the work and assume no responsibility and make no guarantee as to the accuracy or completeness of the information. 5.4 Each Bidder by careful examination, shall inform itself as to the nature and location of the work, the conformation of the ground, subsoil and ground water conditions, the character, quality and quantity of the materials to be encountered, the character of equipment and the facilities needed preliminary to and during the prosecution of the work, the general and local conditions and all other matters which can in any way affect the work. Each Bidder shall make its own deductions of surface and subsurface conditions which may affect methods or cost of construction of the work and Bidder agrees that, if it is awarded the Contract, it will make no claim for damages or other compensation, should it encounter conditions during the progress of the work different from those as calculated and/or anticipated by it. ARTICLE 6 - QUALIFICATION OF BIDDERS 6.1 Each Bidder shall be thoroughly experienced in the work to be performed and capable of completing the work on schedule. 6.2 Each Bidder shall demonstrate that it is authorized to perform public works in the State of Indiana by submitting to the Owner a properly executed Contractor s Bid for Public Work Indiana State Form 96 (Revised 2005). 6.3 Each Bidder shall demonstrate that it is financially able to complete the Contract for this Project by submitting its most recent full-year audited, or Independently Reviewed, financial statement and subsequent quarterly financial statements, if any. NOTE: This financial information is a required attachment to Indiana State Form 96. ARTICLE 7 - INTERPRETATIONS AND ADDENDA 7.1 Each Bidder shall examine the Bidding Documents carefully and, not later than ten (10) days prior to the date of receipt of bids, shall make written request for interpretation or correction of any ambiguity, inconsistency or error therein which it may discover. Verbal questions will not be answered. 7.2 Request for interpretation, correction or clarification of the Bidding Documents shall be in writing to the Owner s Representative. 7.3 Interpretation of the Bidding Documents will be given by the Owner s Representative in the form of written Addenda no fewer than two (2) days before the bid opening date. Addenda will be distributed to each Bidder and shall become a part of the Bid Documents. 7.4 Bidders shall ascertain the status of Addenda two (2) days prior to the Bid opening date. Failure 5

20 of any Bidder to receive any Addenda shall not relieve the Bidder from the obligations of his bid, unless Bidder acknowledges in writing, prior to Bidding that he has not received the Addenda, in which case he is not liable therefore. ARTICLE 8 - SUBSTITUTIONS 8.1 Where one or more specific materials, trade names, or articles of certain manufacturers are mentioned, it is done to establish a basis of durability, efficiency, appearance, and simplification of maintenance, and not for the purpose of limiting competition. Other materials or articles may be used if approved in writing by Owner. Approval may be obtained during the bidding period only. After bids are opened substitutions will not be considered. However, the establishment of proof that said "equal" product is equal to the product specified, shall be the responsibility of the Contractor if said equality is questioned by the Owner. 8.2 Any proposed substitution of equipment or materials for that which is not specified shall first be approved in writing by the Owner not less than seven (7) days prior to the date established for receipt of bids by the Owner. ARTICLE 9 - PRE-BID CONFERENCE 9.1 A pre-bid conference will be held to answer Bidders questions regarding the Bidding Documents. 9.2 An Addendum will be issued confirming any information conveyed at pre-bid conference and no verbal response tendered during pre-bid conference shall have legal standing unless so confirmed by Addendum. ARTICLE 10 - WAGE SCALE 10.1 Indiana Law (IC & -2) provides that contractors and subcontractors pay common construction wages for projects estimated to be $350,000 or more in construction cost. All bids must be based on the common construction wage scale set for this work, if any, by the State Appointed Common Construction Wage Committee. If the estimated construction cost for this Project is under $350,000, the remainder of this Article 10 does not apply for this Bid The current State Appointed Common Construction Wage Committee s determination of the common construction rate of wages for this project is included in the Specifications. The Contractor and its subcontractors shall comply with all applicable common construction wage requirements, including but not limited to providing wage scale certifications to the Owner If a new common construction wage scale is determined for the county in which the Project is located after bids are received and prior to contract award, the awarded Contractor will be expected to comply with the updated wage determination. Common construction wage scale determinations are available online at (Project Owner = Indiana University) The Bidder shall submit with its Bid a completed Statement of Wages to be Paid. ARTICLE 11 ASBESTOS 11.1 Unless expressly included in Project Specifications, Bidder shall not include in its bid price the cost of removal of the asbestos or asbestos containing materials ( ACM ). 6

21 11.2 Each Bidder is expected to familiarize itself with Section 15.B. of the Indiana University Project Site Requirements regarding the required protocol should asbestos or ACM be encountered on the Project. ARTICLE 12 - DRUG FREE WORKPLACE; DRUG TESTING PROGRAM 12.1 Owner maintains a drug free workplace, as provided in the Drug-free Workplace Act of By entering into a Contract with Owner, Contractor acknowledges compliance with this Act and will maintain a drug-free workplace The laws of the State of Indiana (IC as amended) contain certain special provisions regarding drug testing of employees of public works Contractors and Subcontractors. Contracts entered into between a Contractor and the Trustees of Indiana University estimated to be in excess of $150, will be governed by these provisions. These provisions require, among other things, that a written plan for a program to test the Contractor s employees for drugs, which must be in full compliance with I.C must be submitted with the bid The successful Bidder will be required to comply with all applicable provisions of I.C with respect to each Bidder s Subcontractors, as the term Subcontractor is defined in the statute. In particular, the successful Contractor must require each of its subcontractors to furnish Contractor with the Subcontractor s I.C compliant drug plan and requiring each subcontractor to implement the employee drug testing program described in the subcontractor s plan The successful Bidder must submit, along with each application for payment under the Contract, an affidavit, dated and signed by the Contractor, substantially as follows: This is to certify that in the performance of this Contract, neither the undersigned Contractor, nor (so far as the undersigned has knowledge) any of its Subcontractors, has violated the Drug Testing Program provision of the General Conditions of the Contract. ARTICLE 13 - RECOMMENDED EMPLOYMENT OF APPRENTICES 13.1 Owner strongly recommends that Contractor employs apprentices from each building trades craft involved in the Project to the maximum extent feasible. In doing so, the Contractor shall consider whether such apprentices are indentured into a Joint Apprenticeship Training Program or other comparable bona fide apprenticeship training program, registered and certified with the U.S. Department of Labor, Bureau of Apprenticeship and Training and shall use as a guide the Apprenticeship Standards of the Labor-Management Contract for the appropriate jurisdictional area when determining the appropriate ratio of apprentices from each respective craft. ARTICLE 14 MINORITY AND WOMEN S BUS INESS ENTERPRISES 14.1 MBE/WBE Participation Plan Indiana University is committed to diversity and non-discrimination in all aspects of its operations. The Office of the President created the University Business Diversity Department and approved the Business Diversity Initiative to ensure that certified MBEs and WBEs are included in all invitations for quotes and bids, and that all prospective bidders are notified of Indiana University s expectation for diversity, including but not limited to MBE/WBE 7

22 participation in procurement contracts for professional services, materials, supplies and equipment, and in contracts for the construction, architectural services, renovation or repair of university facilities and equipment. This expectation extends to all tiers of contractor utilization. Each Prime contractor should actively solicit and include certified minority- and women-owned subcontractors in bid submissions. The Minority and Women s Business Enterprise Participation Plan (form included in specifications) must be submitted with the bid. This Participation Plan will be considered during the proposal evaluation process. Indiana University s annual MBE and WBE participation goals parallel those set by the Indiana Department of Administration for its own business diversity efforts. The State MBE/WBE participation goals may be found at Minority Business Enterprise (MBE) means an individual, partnership, corporation, limited liability company, or joint venture of any kind that is owned and controlled by (1) or more persons who are (a) United States citizens; and (b) members of a racial minority group: African American, American Indians, Hispanics, Asian Americans, or other similar minority group as defined by 13 CFR Women s Business Enterprise (WBE) means an individual, partnership, corporation, limited liability company, or joint venture of any kind that is owned and controlled by (1) or more persons who are (a) United States citizens; and (b) whose gender is female. In order to count toward participation goals, the MBEs and/or WBEs must be certified by the State of Indiana, the City of Indianapolis, or the Indiana Minority Supplier Development Council or other entity recognized by the state or federal government that provides certification of the sort. Owner retains the discretion to hold payment, and/or to reject future bids submitted by the successful Contractor in the event that Contractor misrepresents either MBE/WBE participation in this Project, or its efforts to obtain MBE/WBE participation in this project, or fails to report MBE/WBE spend on this project Mandatory Tier II Reporting Requirement The successful Contractor shall take all necessary and reasonable steps to ensure that MBE/WBEs have the maximum opportunity to compete for and perform work on this Contract. MBE/WBE utilization in the performance of this Contract must be reported monthly using the IU Online Tier II reporting System. Compliance with Owner s Mandatory Tier II Reporting Requirement is a pre-condition for approval of pay applications. (For more information and training, see and click on Tier II Reporting.) ARTICLE 15 BID SECURITY AND FORFEITURE 15.1 Bids shall be submitted with Bid Security in the form of a Bid Bond, Certified Bank Draft, or Cashier's Check, in the amount of five (5%) percent of the Bid, made payable to: "The Trustees of Indiana University, Bloomington, Indiana." 15.2 The Bid Security will be promptly returned to the unsuccessful Bidders, without interest, after signing of a Contract or the rejection of bids Should the successful Bidder refuse to enter into a Contract for the performance of the Work in 8

23 accordance with the terms of its Bid, the amount of the Bid Security shall be forfeited to the Owner as liquidated damages, not as a penalty. ARTICLE 16 - BIDDING PROCEDURES 16.1 All Bids must be prepared in the format provided by the Owner and submitted in accordance with these Instructions to Bidders The Bid Form must include the following information: Alternate Proposals Unit Prices Major Subcontractors Completion Date Addenda Acknowledgment 16.3 In order to be complete, the Bid must include the following: Contractor s Bid for Public Work Form 96 (Revised 2005) Most recent full-year audited, or Independently Reviewed, financial statement AND subsequent quarterly financial statements Bid Bond 5% of Bid Drug Testing Program, which must be in full compliance with Indiana Code Statement of Wages to be Paid Contractor Asbestos Certification Asbestos Protocol for Contractors MBE/WBE Participation Plan; Certification of MBE/WBE status if Bidder is itself an MBE/WBE Check boxes have been included above to assist the Bidder to ensure that its bid will not be rejected based on its failure meet these requirements One Bid Form and one copy of all other required documents shall be submitted, with all blank spaces appropriately filled in, with prices given in words and numerals, using ink or typewriter, with handwritten ink signature. The written prices shall govern where there is a discrepancy. Any modification shall be initialed Verbal proposals or modifications of proposals will not be considered for purposes of award of contract A Bid is invalid if it has not been deposited at the designated location prior to the time and date for receipt of bids indicated in the Notice to Bidders, or prior to any extension thereof issued to the Bidders No Bidder shall modify, withdraw or cancel its bid or any part thereof for sixty (60) days after the time designated for the receipt of bids in the Notice to Bidders Bids shall be delivered by hand, registered mail, or overnight service in a sealed opaque envelope with the project title and name and address of the Bidder clearly indicated on the outside of the envelope before 2 p.m. (local time) on the bid opening date to Indiana University, Office of the Vice President for Capital Planning and Facilities, 1800 North Range Road, Bloomington, IN

24 ARTICLE 17 - BID OPENING 17.1 Bids will be opened publicly and read aloud. Bids received after the time scheduled for receipt of Bids will be returned unopened to the Bidder Bids shall be valid and binding for a period of not less than sixty (60) days after the bid opening date Bid opening date shall be as indicated in the Notice to Bidders, or as changed by Addendum. Bids shall be received no later than 2:00 p.m. local prevailing time. ARTICLE 18 - REJECTION OF BIDS 18.1 The Bidder acknowledges the right of the Owner to reject any or all Bids and to waive any informality or irregularity in any Bid received The Bidder acknowledges and agrees that the Owner has the right to reject its bid if the bid is in any way incomplete, irregular, conditional, modified or obscure, or if the Bidder fails to furnish with its Bid any of the items identified in Sections 16.2 and ARTICLE 19 - SUBMISSION OF POST-BID INFORMATION 19.1 Upon request by the Owner s Representative and Owner, a selected Bidder(s) shall, within 48 hours thereafter, submit the following: A statement of costs for each major item of work included in its bid A designation of the work to be performed by the Bidder with its own forces A list of names of the subcontractors (firms doing work at the site) or other persons or organizations (including those who are to furnish materials or equipment) proposed for such portions of the work as may be designated in the bidding documents or, if no portions are so designated, the names of the subcontractors proposed for the principal portions of the work. The Bidder will be required to establish to the satisfaction of the Owner s Representative and the Owner the reliability and responsibility of the proposed Subcontractors to furnish and perform the work described in the Sections of the Specifications pertaining to such proposed Subcontractors' respective trades. The Owner s Representative will notify the Bidder in writing if either the Owner or the Owner s Representative, after due investigation, has reasonable and substantial objection to any person or organization on such list. If the Owner or Owner s Representative has a reasonable and substantial objection to any person or organization on such list, the Bidder shall submit the name of another person or organization, and continue to do so until all names of persons and organizations submitted are acceptable to the Owner and Owner s Representative/Engineer. Subcontractors and other persons and organizations proposed by the Bidder and accepted by the Owner and the Owner s Representative must be used on the work for which they were proposed and accepted and shall not be changed except with the written approval of the Owner and the Owner s Representative. 10

25 ARTICLE 20 PERFORMANCE AND PAYMENT BOND, ESCROW AGREEMENT, AND OTHER REQUIRED DOCUMENTS 20.1 A Bidder selected as a Prime Contractor shall be required to provide a Performance and Payment Bond in the full amount (100%) of its Total Contract price. The Bond shall be made with a Surety Company with a rating of A- or above in the most recent edition of the A.M. Best s Key Rating Guide. The Bond shall be written in the form provided by the Owner, "Performance and Payment Bond," and shall be delivered to the Owner within thirteen (13) calendar days of the date of the Notice to Proceed. Said Bond shall remain in full force and effect for a period of at least two (2) years after date of final acceptance of the Project. The bond shall be issued in the name of The Trustees of Indiana University and filed with the Capital Projects Business Office The Bidder shall require the attorney in fact who executes the required Bond on behalf of the surety to affix thereto a certified and current copy of its power of attorney indicating the monetary limit of such power If awarded the Contract, the Bidder shall execute, along with the Construction Agreement, a formal Escrow Agreement as contemplated by Section 1 of the Supplementary Conditions If awarded the Contract, the Bidder shall provide to the Owner its Corporate Authority Signature Certificate and its W9 at the same time it returns the executed Construction Agreement. ARTICLE 21 - AWARD OF CONTRACTS AND FORM OF AGREEMENT 21.1 The Owner will award the Contract(s) on the basis of the lowest and best bid(s) in accordance with Indiana law, utilizing any stated alternates accepted and shall issue to the successful Bidder(s) a Notice to Proceed No awards will be made on the day of opening bids The selected Bidder(s), upon notification, shall enter into written contracts by executing a Construction Agreement with the Owner; and, further, shall commence work within thirteen (13) days of the date of the Notice to Proceed The Construction Agreement shall be copy bound in with the Specifications. ARTICLE 22 MISCELLANEOUS 22.1 If the Owner has hired a Construction Manager for this Project, the successful Bidder will be required to execute the following Addenda with regard to insurance requirements: The Contractor shall add the Construction Manager as an additional insured on all insurance coverages required for this Project and shall provide Construction Manager with documentation that this coverage has been obtained. 11

26

27 State Form Prescribed by State Board of Accounts Form No. 96 (Revised 2005) CONTRACTOR'S BID FOR PUBLIC WORK FORM 96 PART I (To be completed for all bids. Please type or print) Date: 1. Governmental Unit (Owner): 2. County : 3. Bidder (Firm): Address: City/State: 4. Telephone Number: 5. Agent of Bidder (if applicable): Pursuant to notices given, the undersigned offers to furnish labor and/or material necessary to complete the public works project of (Governmental Unit) in accordance with plans and specifications prepared by and dated for the sum of $ The undersigned further agrees to furnish a bond or certified check with this bid for an amount specified in the notice of the letting. If alternative bids apply, the undersigned submits a proposal for each in accordance with the notice. Any addendums attached will be specifically referenced at the applicable page. If additional units of material included in the contract are needed, the cost of units must be the same as that shown in the original contract if accepted by the governmental unit. If the bid is to be awarded on a unit basis, the itemization of the units shall be shown on a separate attachment. The contractor and his subcontractors, if any, shall not discriminate against or intimidate any employee, or applicant for employment, to be employed in the performance of this contract, with respect to any matter directly or indirectly related to employment because of race, religion, color, sex, national origin or ancestry. Breach of this covenant may be regarded as a material breach of the contract. CERTIFICATION OF USE OF UNITED STATES STEEL PRODUCTS (If applicable) I, the undersigned bidder or agent as a contractor on a public works project, understand my statutory obligation to use steel products made in the United States (I.C ). I hereby certify that I and all subcontractors employed by me for this project will use U.S. steel products on this project if awarded. I understand that violations hereunder may result in forfeiture of contractual payments.

28 ACCEPTANCE The above bid is accepted this day of,, subject to the following conditions: Contracting Authority Members: PART II (For projects of $100,000 or more IC ) Governmental Unit: Bidder (Firm) Date: These statements to be submitted under oath by each bidder with and as a part of his bid. Attach additional pages for each section as needed. SECTION I EXPERIENCE QUESTIONNAIRE 1. What public works projects has your organization completed for the period of one (1) year prior to the date of the current bid? Contract Amount Class of Work Completion Date Name and Address of Owner 2. What public works projects are now in process of construction by your organization? Contract Amount Class of Work Expected Completion Date Name and Address of Owner

29 3. Have you ever failed to complete any work awarded to you? If so, where and why? 4. List references from private firms for which you have performed work. SECTION II PLAN AND EQUIPMENT QUESTIONNAIRE 1. Explain your plan or layout for performing proposed work. (Examples could include a narrative of when you could begin work, complete the project, number of workers, etc. and any other information which you believe would enable the governmental unit to consider your bid.) 2. Please list the names and addresses of all subcontractors (i.e. persons or firms outside your own firm who have performed part of the work) that you have used on public works projects during the past five (5) years along with a brief description of the work done by each subcontractor. 3. If you intend to sublet any portion of the work, state the name and address of each subcontractor, equipment to be used by the subcontractor, and whether you will require a bond. However, if you are unable to currently provide a listing, please understand a listing must be provided prior to contract approval. Until the completion of the proposed project, you are under a continuing obligation to immediately notify the governmental unit in the event that you subsequently determine that you will use a subcontractor on the proposed project. 4. What equipment do you have available to use for the proposed project? Any equipment to be used by subcontractors may also be required to be listed by the governmental unit. 5. Have you entered into contracts or received offers for all materials which substantiate the prices used in preparing your proposal? If not, please explain the rationale used which would corroborate the prices listed. SECTION III CONTRACTOR S FINANCIAL STATEMENT Attachment of bidder s financial statement is mandatory. Any bid submitted without said financial statement as required by statute shall thereby be rendered invalid. The financial statement provided hereunder to the governing body awarding the contract must be specific enough in detail so that said governing body can make a proper determination of the bidder s capability for completing the project if awarded.

30 SECTION IV CONTRACTOR'S NON COLLUSION AFFIDAVIT The undersigned bidder or agent, being duly sworn on oath, says that he has not, nor has any other member, representative, or agent of the firm, company, corporation or partnership represented by him, entered into any combination, collusion or agreement with any person relative to the price to be bid by anyone at such letting nor to prevent any person from bidding nor to include anyone to refrain from bidding, and that this bid is made without reference to any other bid and without any agreement, understanding or combination with any other person in reference to such bidding. He further says that no person or persons, firms, or corporation has, have or will receive directly or indirectly, any rebate, fee, gift, commission or thing of value on account of such sale. SECTION V OATH AND AFFIRMATION I HEREBY AFFIRM UNDER THE PENALTIES FOR PERJURY THAT THE FACTS AND INFORMATION CONTAINED IN THE FOREGOING BID FOR PUBLIC WORKS ARE TRUE AND CORRECT. Dated at this day of, (Name of Organization) By (Title of Person Signing) STATE OF ) ) ss COUNTY OF ) ACKNOWLEDGEMENT Before me, a Notary Public, personally appeared the above-named and swore that the statements contained in the foregoing document are true and correct. Subscribed and sworn to before me this day of,. Notary Public My Commission Expires: County of Residence:

31 Form No. 96 (Revised 2005) BID OF (Contractor) (Address) FOR PUBLIC WORKS PROJECTS OF Filed, Action taken

32

33 MINORITY AND WOMEN S BUSINESS ENTERPRISE PARTICIPATION PLAN The Bidder/Firm is expected to submit with its bid/proposal a Minority and Women s Business Enterprise Participation Plan. Minority Business Enterprise (MBE) and Women s Business Enterprise (WBE) are defined below. In this Plan, the Bidder/Firm must show that there are certified racial minority- and/or woman-owned enterprises participating in the project. Participation may be as a subcontractor or second tier participation with common suppliers (e.g., office suppliers, courier services). The Bidder/Firm must indicate the name of the MBE/WBE(s) with which it will work; the contact name and phone number at the MBE/WBE(s); the service supplied by the MBE/WBE(s); and the specific dollar amount from the project that will be directed toward each MBE/WBE. Please note: If the Trade is an overhead item for your entire business, please calculate the proportion of the business that will actually apply to the project in question. Documentation of the Bidder s/firm s good faith effort to meet the participation goal must be submitted at bid time; see Page 3 of this form. Failure to provide the Plan and evidence of a good faith effort at the time of bid/proposal submission will result in the rejection of the bid/proposal. Indiana University reserves the right to verify all information included in the Minority and Women s Business Enterprise Participation Plan before making final determination of the Bidder s/firm s responsiveness and responsibility. By submission of the bid/proposal, the Bidder/Firm thereby acknowledges and agrees to be bound by the IU Business Diversity Initiative. Questions involving the Minority and Women s Business Enterprise Participation Plan should be directed to the IU Business Diversity Department at 317/ Definitions: a. Minority Business Enterprise (MBE) means an individual, partnership, corporation, limited liability company, or joint venture of any kind that is owned and controlled by (1) or more persons who are (a) United States citizens; and (b) members of a racial minority group: African American, American Indians, Hispanics, Asian Americans, or other similar minority group as defined by 13 CFR b. Women s Business Enterprise (WBE) Minority Business Enterprise (MBE) means an individual, partnership, corporation, limited liability company, or joint venture of any kind that is owned and controlled by (1) or more persons who are (a) United States citizens; and (b) whose gender is female. MBE/WBE PARTICIPATION PLAN PROJECT # BID/PROPOSAL DUE DATE PROJECT NAME BIDDER/FIRM ADDRESS CITY/STATE/ZIP PHONE: ( ) URL: Page 1 of 3

34 MBE and WBE Participation Plan (Continued) BIDDER/FIRM PROJECT # PROJECT NAME The following certified minority- and/or women-owned firms will be participating in the project according to the following schedule. Indicate whether each firm is an MBE or a WBE by circling either MBE or WBE below. Submit each firm s certification document, within 48 hours post-bid, to the Owner via MBE/WBE TRADE AMOUNT CONTACT NAME PHONE 2. MBE/WBE TRADE AMOUNT CONTACT NAME PHONE 3. MBE/WBE TRADE AMOUNT CONTACT NAME PHONE 4. MBE/WBE TRADE AMOUNT CONTACT NAME PHONE If additional room is necessary, please attach a separate page. By my signature, I certify that the above statements are true and accurate, all as of the date below. I also understand that any changes to this plan must be approved by Indiana University and documented by Construction Change Directive. Agent of Bidder Date Page 2 of 3

35 MBE and WBE Participation Plan (Continued) BIDDER/FIRM PROJECT # PROJECT NAME Describe below your efforts to obtain minority and women s business enterprise participation for this project. Be sure to attach a copy of all solicitation efforts, e.g., ads that were published or networking events, etc. List below the MBE/WBE contractors you individually contacted to request a quote for this project. Check all that apply: Minority firms contacted (company name and commodity) Method of contact (i.e., phone number, fax number, address, mailing address AND contact name) MBE WBE Quote Received Not low No response If extra space is necessary, please attach additional pages. PAGES 1, 2, AND 3 OF THIS DOCUMENT MUST BE SUBMITTED WITH THE BID Page 3 of 3

36

37 CONTRACTOR ASBESTOS CERTIFICATlON TO: INDIANA UNNERSm The Contractor certifies that: No asbestos containing material was selected as a building material for this project. For all materials used on the project which were marked on the material or on the packaging the following or similar wording 'May contain mineral fibers" the contractor will have on file, with copies provided to the owner, either of the following - (1) The manufacturer's certification that the material does not contain asbestos or (2) Laboratory results from an EPA accredited laboratory indicatbg the material does not contain asbestos in accordance with EPA and OSHA requirements. IU Project Name and Number: Contractor Firm: Contractor Name: Contractor Signature: Date October 2003

38

39 Asbestos Protocol for Contractors Communication of Hazards Asbestos-containing materials (ACM) exist in many buildings constructed prior to January 1, Pursuant to the OSHA Construction Industry Asbestos Standard 29 CFR , Communication of Hazards, a building owner is required to inform contractors doing demolition or renovation of the presence, location and quantity of ACM found at the work sites in its buildings. The IU Environmental Health and Safety Department (EHS) performs the asbestos inspection of buildings on the IU campuses and, if necessary, will conduct or oversee the safe removal of all known and accessible ACM prior to renovation or demolition work. EHS generates a post-inspection Asbestos Notice of each work site, which identifies building materials that are visible or otherwise known to be present at the site at the time of inspection as being Non-ACM or ACM. The inspection, and therefore the information contained in the notice, is limited to what is visible to the inspector at the time of the inspection. This means that during the course of construction work, it is possible to encounter ACM that was not identified on the notice because of the physical limitations on the Asbestos Inspector s ability to see and identify ACM at the time of the inspection. Contractors are expected to have knowledge of the types and likely locations of ACM generally found in building materials and to be able to make visual identification of ACM and must provide documentation that each employee has attended Asbestos Awareness Training within the last calendar year. Under no circumstances are contractors permitted to disturb ACM. Contractors are required to stop work immediately upon discovering suspected ACM and to make a report to the owner s Project Manager. The Project Manager may direct the contractor to the EHS office if a disturbance has occurred and/or to coordinate additional surveying. For the Contractor I understand and agree that the employees and agents of my company and/or the employees and agents of my company s subcontractor(s) are prohibited from disturbing ACM. I understand and agree that, upon the discovery of ACM or suspected ACM at the worksite, work shall be stopped immediately and a report of the discovery made to the owner s Project Manager. I agree that my employees, agents and/or the employees and agents of my subcontractor(s) will comply with the directions of the Owner s Project Manager with regard to responding to the discovery or disturbance of ACT. I understand and agree that failure on the part of my employees and agents and/or the employees and agents of my subcontractor(s) to comply with the above requirements may result in fines being imposed against my company or the owner, or both, by the Indiana Department of Environmental Management (IDEM), or by other federal, state, county or municipal authorities. I agree I will reimburse the owner for any costs incurred by the owner based on violations of this protocol by my employees or agents and/or the employees or agents of my subcontractor(s), including but not limited to fines, penalties, attorneys fees and/or court costs. I have read and understand these requirements: Contractor Signature Date IU Project Number Printed Name IU Project Title

40

41 KNOW ALL MEN: That we Bond # PERFORMANCE AND PAYMENT BOND (Here insert the name and address or legal title of the Contractor) hereinafter called the Principal, and hereinafter called the Surety or Sureties, are held and firmly bound unto The Trustees of Indiana University, hereinafter called the Owner, in the sum of: for payment whereof the Principal and the Surety or Sureties bind themselves, their heirs, executors, administrators, successors, and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents. WHEREAS, the Principal has, by means of a written Agreement, dated: entered into a contract with the Owner for a copy of which Agreement is by reference made a part hereof: NOW THEREFORE, the condition of this Obligation is such that, if the Principal shall faithfully perform the Contract on its part and shall fully indemnify and save harmless the Owner from all cost and damage which the Owner may suffer by reason of failure to do so and shall fully reimburse and repay the Owner all outlay and expense which the Owner may incur in making good any such default, and further that, if the Principal shall pay all persons who have contracts directly with the Principal for labor or materials, and all employees, persons, firms, or corporations who have just claims and demands for labor or materials furnished or used in connection with the prosecution of the work under the contract, failing which such persons shall have a direct right of action against the Principal and Surety under this obligation, subject to the Owner s option and priority, then this obligation shall be null and void, otherwise it shall remain in full force and effect. The said surety for value received hereby stipulates and agrees that no change, extension of time, alteration or addition to the terms of the contract, or to the work to be performed thereunder, or the specifications accompanying them, shall in any way affect its obligations on this bond, and it Performance and Payment Bond Page - 1- of -2-

42 does hereby waive notice of any such change, extension of time, alteration or addition to the terms of the contract, or to the work or to the specifications. PROVIDED, however, that no suit, action or proceeding by reason of any default whatever shall be brought on this Bond after two years from the date of final payment. AND PROVIDED, that any alterations which may be made in the terms of the Contract, or in the work to be done under it, or the giving by the Owner of any extension of time for the performance of the Contract, or any other forbearance on the part of either the Owner or the Principal to the other shall not in any way release the Principal and the Surety or Sureties, or either or any of them, their heirs, executors, administrators, successors or assigns from their liability hereunder, notice to the Surety or Sureties of any such alterations, extension or forbearance being hereby waived. Signed and Sealed this day of 20 In presence of : ) )As to ) ) )As to ) ) )As to ) (SEAL) (SEAL) (SEAL) (SEAL) Performance and Payment Bond Page - 2- of -2-

43 CONSTRUCTION AGREEMENT This contract made the day of 201X, by and between ( Contractor ) and The Trustees of Indiana University, Bloomington, Indiana ( Owner ). Article I, Scope of Work: The Contractor shall perform all labor, furnish all materials and equipment necessary to complete the contract for all work, all in accordance with the Contract Documents prepared by, Titled: project title campus location project number which Contract Documents are made a part of this contract, and shall do everything required by this Agreement and Contract Documents. Article II, The Contract Documents: The Contract Documents are the Notice to Bidders, Instructions to Bidders, Bid Forms, the General Conditions of the Contract for Construction Between Owner and Contractor, Supplementary General Conditions, Indiana University Project Site Requirements, Notice to Proceed, Drawings, Specifications, this Construction Agreement, Addenda issued prior to execution of this Construction Agreement, any other documents listed in this Construction Agreement, approved Schedules (per General Conditions ), and Modifications issued after execution of this Construction Agreement. A Modification is (1) a written amendment to the Contract signed by both parties; (2) a Construction Change Directive; or (3) a written order for a minor change in the Work issued by the Owner s Representative. The following is an enumeration of the Specifications and Drawings: Specifications Owner - Contractor Agreement Conditions of the Contract (General and Supplementary) Specifications Sections of Divisions 0 through 33, all as listed on the Table of Contents in the Specification. Drawings All as listed on the Title Sheet of the Drawings. Page 1 of 3

44 Article III, Contract Price: The Owner shall pay to the Contractor for the performance of this contract, subject to any additions or deductions provided herein, in current funds as follows: Base Bid $ Alternate $ Total Contract Amount $ Article IV, Time of Completion: Project will be complete within calendar days of the date of the Notice to Proceed OR Project completion date will be. No project schedule extensions will be allowed unless approved by Indiana University via a CCD. Article V, Required Documents: Along with this executed Construction Agreement, the Contractor shall provide the Owner with an Executed Escrow Agreement, its Corporate Authority Signature Certificate, and its W9. The Contractor acknowledges and agrees that the insurance documentation required by the General Conditions, Section 3.1.5, was to be submitted to the Owner within thirteen (13) calendar days of the date of the Notice to Proceed. Article VI, Assignment of Coordination: The coordination of the work of all contractors shall be assigned to the General Contractor on this Project. Said assignment of coordination of the work of all Contractors to the General Contractor is for the purpose of placing with one contractor, namely, the full and complete responsibility for coordination of and expediting all the work required for the construction of this Project. The Contractor expressly accepts this assignment of coordination as a condition of its Contract. Article VII, Terms of Payments: The Owner will make monthly progress payments directly to the Contractor under the terms set forth in the General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions and Addenda thereto, and upon the written approval of the Owner's Representative for each monthly payment request submitted. On a multiple-prime Project, the General Contractor shall report to the Owner s Representative any circumstances known to it that will assist the Owner s Representative in making a determination as to whether to withhold certification of an Application for Payment submitted by another Prime Contractor based on any of the reasons set forth in Section of the General Conditions. Page 2 of 3

45 In witness whereof, the parties hereto have executed this Agreement, the Day and Year first above written: "Owner" "Contractor" The Trustees of Indiana University By: Donald S. Lukes Associate Vice President & Associate Treasurer By: Name/Title SEAL SEAL ATTEST: ATTEST: Deborah A. Lemon, Secretary Name/Title Page 3 of 3

46

47 ESCROW AGREEMENT THIS ESCROW AGREEMENT entered into this day of 20 between THE TRUSTEES OF INDIANA UNIVERSITY, (herein called Owner ), and (herein called Contractor ), and FIRST FINANCIAL BANK as Escrow Agent (herein called Escrow Agent ), WITNESSETH: WHEREAS, Owner contracted with Contractor on, to provide for the construction of a public building, work or improvement subject to the provisions of of the Indiana Code; and WHEREAS, the contract provides that portions of payments by Owner to the Contractor shall be retained by Owner (herein called Retainage) and placed in an escrow account. NOW, THEREFORE, it is agreed as follows: 1. Owner will deliver to Escrow Agent the Retainage, to be held in escrow in accordance with the terms of this Agreement. 2. The Escrow Agent shall promptly invest these funds in Treasury Bills, Money Market Funds restricted to direct government obligations, Certificates of Deposit or Savings Accounts to obtain the best interest rate consistent with safety of principal and availability of funds. 3. The Escrow Agent shall hold the escrowed principal until receipt of written authorization from Owner specifying the portion of the escrowed funds to be released to the Contractor. The Escrow Agent shall remit the designated portion of escrowed principal as directed in the notice. 4. Income shall be accrued until termination. 5. If there is a controversy, the Escrow Agent shall pay over the net sum held by it as follows: (a) Payment to Owner In absence of a written authorization from Contractor upon receipt from the Owner of a copy of the Architect s certificate to Article 14 or Article 46 of the General Conditions showing that the Owner has terminated the employment of the Contractor, the Escrow Agent shall pay over to the Owner the net sum held by it. (b) Payment by Court Order In the absence of joint written authorization and in the absence of the termination of the Contractors provided in (a) above, Escrow Agent will make distribution in the manner directed by a certified copy of a judgment of a Court of Record establishing the rights of the parties to the funds.

48 6. This Agreement and anything done or performed by either the Contractor or Owner shall not be construed to prejudice or limit the claims which either party may have against the other arising out of the contract. 7. The duties and responsibilities of the Escrow Agent shall be limited to those expressly set forth, to hold the money and to pay and deliver to the person and under the conditions as set forth. Escrow Agent shall act in good faith using its best judgment. Escrow Agent shall not be liable for any act taken or omitted in good faith and shall be fully protected when relying on any written notice, demand, certificate or document which it believes to be genuine. 8. The Escrow Agent shall be and hereby is, indemnified and saved harmless by the Contractor from all losses, liabilities, costs and expenses, including attorney fees and expenses, which may be incurred by it as a result of its acceptance of the Escrow Account or arising from the performance of its duties hereunder, unless such losses, liabilities, costs and expenses shall have been finally adjudicated to have resulted from the bad faith or negligence of the Escrow Agent, and such indemnification shall survive its resignation or removal, or the termination of this Agreement. In no event shall the Escrow Agent be liable for special or consequential damages. 9. The Escrow Agent may resign as such following the giving of thirty (30) days prior written notice to the other parties hereto. CONTRACTOR: OWNER: Trustees of Indiana University 1800 N. Range Road Bloomington, IN BY: ESCROW AGENT: FIRST FINANCIAL BANK BY: MaryFrances McCourt Treasurer BY: Authorized Officer Address: First Financial Bank 300 West Sixth Street Bloomington, IN Ph: Fax: Contact: Scott Trilling ( )

49 Project Name / Campus and IU number assigned ESCROW AGREEMENT THIS ESCROW AGREEMENT entered into this day of between THE TRUSTEES OF INDIANA UNIVERSITY, (herein called "Owner"), and of Indianapolis, Indiana, CONTRACTOR (herein called "Contractor"), and THE BANK OF NEW YORK MELLON TRUST COMPANY, N.A., as Escrow Agent (herein called "Escrow Agent"), WITNESSETH: WHEREAS, Owner contracted with Contractor on, to provide for the construction of a public building, work or improvement subject to the provisions of of the Indiana Code; and WHEREAS, the contract provides that portions of payments by Owner to the Contractor shall be retained by Owner (herein called Retainage) and placed in an escrow account. NOW, THEREFORE, it is agreed as follows: 1. Owner will deliver to Escrow Agent the Retainage, to be held in escrow in accordance with the terms of this Agreement. 2. The Escrow Agent shall, at the written direction of the Owner, promptly invest these funds in Treasury Bills, Money Market Funds restricted to direct government obligations, Certificates of Deposit or Savings Accounts to obtain the best interest rate consistent with safety of principal and availability of funds. 3. The Escrow Agent shall hold the escrowed principal until receipt of written authorization from Owner specifying the portion of the escrowed funds to be released to the Contractor. The Escrow Agent shall remit the designated portion of escrowed principal as directed in the notice. 4. Income shall be accrued until termination. The Escrow Agent shall deduct, before any payment from the income received hereunder, its fee as Escrow Agent, which fee shall be in accordance with the fee schedule attached in Exhibit A. 5. If there is a controversy, the Escrow Agent shall pay over the net sum held by it as follows: (a) Payment to Owner In absence of a written authorization from Contractor upon receipt from the Owner of a copy of the Architect's certificate to Article 14 or Article 46 of the General Conditions showing that the Owner has terminated the employment of the Contractor, the Escrow Agent shall pay over to the Owner the net sum held by it. (b) Payment by Court Order In the absence of joint written authorization and in the absence of the termination of the Contractors provided in (a) above, Escrow Agent will make distribution in the manner directed by a certified copy of a judgment of a court of competent jurisdiction establishing the rights of the parties to the funds. Project Name / Campus and IU number assigned

50 Project Name / Campus and IU number assigned 6. This Agreement and anything done or performed by either the Contractor or Owner shall not be construed to prejudice or limit the claims which either party may have against the other arising out of the contract. 7. The duties and responsibilities of the Escrow Agent shall be limited to those expressly set forth, to hold the money and to pay and deliver to the person and under the conditions as set forth. Escrow Agent shall act in good faith and without negligence using its best judgment. Escrow Agent shall not be liable for any act taken or omitted in good faith and without negligence and shall be fully protected when relying on any written notice, demand, certificate or document which it believes to be genuine. The Escrow Agent shall have the right to consult with counsel and shall not be liable for action taken or omitted to be taken in good faith and without negligence by the Escrow Agent. 8. The Escrow Agent shall be and hereby is, indemnified and saved harmless by the Contractor from all losses, liabilities, costs and expenses, including attorney fees and expenses, which may be incurred by it as a result of its acceptance of the Escrow Account or arising from the performance of its duties hereunder, unless such losses, liabilities, costs and expenses shall have been finally adjudicated to have resulted from the bad faith or negligence of the Escrow Agent, and such indemnification shall survive its resignation or removal, or the termination of this Agreement. In no event shall the Escrow Agent be liable for special or consequential damages, nor shall the Escrow Agent have an obligation to use or risk its own funds. 9. The Escrow Agent may resign as such following the giving of thirty (30) days prior written notice to the other parties hereto. On or before the end of the 30 days, the Escrow Agent shall deposit the escrow fund with a successor escrow agent appointed by the Owner or by depositing the escrow fund with the Owner. CONTRACTOR: OWNER: The Trustees of Indiana University 1800 N. Range Road Bloomington, IN BY: BY: MaryFrances McCourt Treasurer ESCROW AGENT: The Bank of New York Mellon Trust Company, N.A., 300 N. Meridian Street, Suite 910 Indianapolis, IN BY: Authorized Officer

51 Project Name / Campus and IU number assigned Exhibit A Indiana University Retainage Escrow Fee Schedule Upon appointment of BNYM as escrow agent, the Contractor shall be responsible for the payment of the fees, expenses and charges as set forth in this Fee Schedule. ACCEPTANCE FEE: WAIVED ANNUAL ADMINISTRATION FEE: $ Our annual administration fee is a flat fee billed annually in arrears. If the term of the escrow is less than one full year, a minimum fee of $ will be charged for the first year. If the term is greater than one year, the fee for additional partial years will be prorated based on the number of months open during the year. The Escrow Agent shall deduct the fee from the balance in the Escrow Account. The annual administration fee includes the below listed items, as applicable. Initial Account Set-up Routine Escrow Administration Statements of Account to Owner and Contractor Asset Principal & Income Collection Processing of Cash Receipts and Disbursements INVESTMENT COMPENSATION With respect to investments in money market mutual funds for which BNYM provides shareholder services BNYM (or its affiliates) may also receive and retain additional fees from the mutual funds (or their affiliates) for shareholder services as set forth in the Authorization and Direction to BNYM to Invest Cash Balances in Money Market Mutual Funds. MISCELLANEOUS FEES The fees for performing extraordinary or other services not contemplated at the time of the execution of the transaction or not specifically covered elsewhere in this schedule will be commensurate with the service to be provided and may be charged in BNYM s sole discretion. These extraordinary services may include, but are not limited to, supplemental agreements, unusual releases and the preparation of special or interim reports. The fee for non-interest bearing balances left uninvested with the Bank will be 10 basis points for the quarter, based on quarter-end spot balance levels, in excess of $1,000,000 (held in the U.S. offices of the Bank). Counsel, accountants, special agents and others will be charged at the actual amount of fees and expenses billed. OUT-OF-POCKET EXPENSES At Cost Additional out-of-pocket expenses may include, but are not limited to, telephone; facsimile; courier; copying; postage; supplies; statutory filing charges, and expenses of BNYM s representative(s) and Counsel for attending special meetings. Fees and expenses of BNYM s representatives and Counsel will be charged at the actual amount of fees and expenses charged and all other expenses will be charged at cost.

52 Project Name / Campus and IU number assigned TERMS AND DISCLOSURES TERMS OF PROPOSAL Final acceptance of the appointment as escrow agent under the Escrow Agreement is subject to approval of authorized officers of BNYM and full review and execution of all documentation related hereto. Please note that if this transaction does not close, you will be responsible for paying any expenses incurred, including Counsel fees. We reserve the right to terminate this offer if we do not enter into final written documents within three months from the date this document is first transmitted to you. Fees may be subject to adjustment during the life of the engagement. MISCELLANEOUS The terms of this Fee Schedule shall govern the matters set forth herein and shall not be superseded or modified by the terms of the Escrow Agreement. This Fee Schedule shall be governed by the laws of the State of Indiana without reference to laws governing conflicts. BNYM and the undersigned agree to jurisdiction of the federal and state courts located in the City of Indianapolis, State of Indiana. CUSTOMER NOTICE REQUIRED BY THE USA PATRIOT ACT To help the US government fight the funding of terrorism and money laundering activities, US Federal law requires all financial institutions to obtain, verify, and record information that identifies each person (whether an individual or organization) for which a relationship is established. What this means to you: When you establish a relationship with BNYM, we will ask you to provide certain information (and documents) that will help us to identify you. We will ask for your organization s name, physical address, tax identification or other government registration number and other information that will help us to identify you. We may also ask for a Certificate of Incorporation or similar document or other pertinent identifying documentation for your type of organization. We thank you for your assistance. Accepted By: Owner: The Trustees of Indiana University Escrow Agent: BNYMTC, N.A. Signature: Date: Name: Daryl F. Mergenthal Title: Authorized Officer Contractor: Signature: Date: Name: Title:

53 AIA Document A201 TM 2007 General Conditions of the Contract for Construction for the following PROJECT: (Name, and location or address) «THE TRUSTEES OF INDIANA UNIVERSITY» THE CONSTRUCTION MANAGER: (Name, legal status and address) THE OWNER: (Name, legal status and address) THE ARCHITECT: (Name, legal status and address) ADDITIONS AND DELETIONS: The author of this document has added information needed for its completion. The author may also have revised the text of the original AIA standard form. An Additions and Deletions Report that notes added information as well as revisions to the standard form text is available from the author and should be reviewed. This document has important legal consequences. Consultation with an attorney is encouraged with respect to its completion or modification. ELECTRONIC COPYING of any portion of this AIA Document to another electronic file is prohibited and constitutes a violation of copyright laws as set forth in the footer of this document. AIA Document A Copyright 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This draft was produced by AIA software at 15:33:56 on 09/17/2010 under Order No _1 which expires on 09/24/2011, and is not for resale. User Notes: ( ) 1

54 TABLE OF ARTICLES 1 GENERAL PROVISIONS 2 OWNER 3 CONTRACTOR 4 ARCHITECT 5 SUBCONTRACTORS 6 CONSTRUCTION BY OWNER OR BY SEPARATE CONTRACTORS 7 CHANGES IN THE WORK 8 TIME 9 PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION 10 PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY 11 INSURANCE AND BONDS 12 UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION OF WORK 13 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS 14 TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION OF THE CONTRACT 15 CLAIMS AND DISPUTES INDEX BEGINS ON NEXT PAGE (Topics and numbers in bold are section headings.) Additions and deletions have been made to these General Conditions which are not reflected in this Index. AIA Document A Copyright 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This draft was produced by AIA software at 15:33:56 on 09/17/2010 under Order No _1 which expires on 09/24/2011, and is not for resale. User Notes: ( ) 2

55 Acceptance of Nonconforming Work 9.6.6, 9.9.3, 12.3 Acceptance of Work 9.6.6, 9.8.2, 9.9.3, , , 12.3 Access to Work 3.16, 6.2.1, 12.1 Accident Prevention 10 Acts and Omissions 3.2, 3.3.2, , 3.18, 4.2.3, 8.3.1, 9.5.1, , , , 13.7, 14.1, 15.2 Addenda 1.1.1, Additional Costs, Claims for 3.7.4, 3.7.5, 6.1.1, , 10.3, Additional Inspections and Testing 9.4.2, 9.8.3, , 13.5 Additional Insured Additional Time, Claims for 3.2.4, 3.7.4, 3.7.5, , 8.3.2, Administration of the Contract 3.1.3, 4.2, 9.4, 9.5 Advertisement or Invitation to Bid Aesthetic Effect Allowances 3.8, All-risk Insurance , Applications for Payment 4.2.5, 7.3.9, 9.2, 9.3, 9.4, 9.5.1, 9.6.3, 9.7, 9.10, Approvals 2.1.1, 2.2.2, 2.4, 3.1.3, , , , , 4.2.7, 9.3.2, Arbitration 8.3.1, , , , 15.4 ARCHITECT 4 Architect, Definition of Architect, Extent of Authority 2.4.1, , 4.1, 4.2, 5.2, 6.3, 7.1.2, 7.3.7, 7.4, 9.2, 9.3.1, 9.4, 9.5, 9.6.3, 9.8, , , 12.1, , , , , , , Architect, Limitations of Authority and Responsibility 2.1.1, , , , 4.1.2, 4.2.1, 4.2.2, 4.2.3, 4.2.6, 4.2.7, , , , 5.2.1, 7.4, 9.4.2, 9.5.3, 9.6.4, , 15.2 Architect s Additional Services and Expenses 2.4.1, , , , , Architect s Administration of the Contract 3.1.3, 4.2, 3.7.4, 15.2, 9.4.1, 9.5 Architect s Approvals 2.4.1, 3.1.3, 3.5, , Architect s Authority to Reject Work 3.5, 4.2.6, , Architect s Copyright 1.1.7, 1.5 Architect s Decisions 3.7.4, 4.2.6, 4.2.7, , , , , 6.3, 7.3.7, 7.3.9, 8.1.3, 8.3.1, 9.2, 9.4.1, 9.5, 9.8.4, 9.9.1, , 15.2, 15.3 Architect s Inspections 3.7.4, 4.2.2, 4.2.9, 9.4.2, 9.8.3, 9.9.2, , 13.5 Architect s Instructions 3.2.4, 3.3.1, 4.2.6, 4.2.7, Architect s Interpretations , Architect s Project Representative Architect s Relationship with Contractor 1.1.2, 1.5, 3.1.3, 3.2.2, 3.2.3, 3.2.4, 3.3.1, 3.4.2, 3.5, 3.7.4, 3.7.5, 3.9.2, 3.9.3, 3.10, 3.11, 3.12, 3.16, 3.18, 4.1.2, 4.1.3, 4.2, 5.2, 6.2.2, 7, 8.3.1, 9.2, 9.3, 9.4, 9.5, 9.7, 9.8, 9.9, , 10.3, , 12, , 13.5, 15.2 Architect s Relationship with Subcontractors 1.1.2, 4.2.3, 4.2.4, 4.2.6, 9.6.3, 9.6.4, Architect s Representations 9.4.2, 9.5.1, Architect s Site Visits 3.7.4, 4.2.2, 4.2.9, 9.4.2, 9.5.1, 9.9.2, , 13.5 Asbestos Attorneys Fees , , Award of Separate Contracts 6.1.1, Award of Subcontracts and Other Contracts for Portions of the Work 5.2 Basic Definitions 1.1 Bidding Requirements 1.1.1, 5.2.1, Binding Dispute Resolution 9.7, , , , , , , , Boiler and Machinery Insurance Bonds, Lien , , Bonds, Performance, and Payment , 9.6.7, , , 11.4 AIA Document A Copyright 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This draft was produced by AIA software at 15:33:56 on 09/17/2010 under Order No _1 which expires on 09/24/2011, and is not for resale. User Notes: ( ) 3

56 Building Permit Capitalization 1.3 Certificate of Substantial Completion 9.8.3, 9.8.4, Certificates for Payment 4.2.1, 4.2.5, 4.2.9, 9.3.3, 9.4, 9.5, 9.6.1, 9.6.6, 9.7, , , , , Certificates of Inspection, Testing or Approval Certificates of Insurance , Change Orders 1.1.1, 2.4.1, 3.4.2, 3.7.4, , , , 4.2.8, 5.2.3, 7.1.2, 7.1.3, 7.2, 7.3.2, 7.3.6, 7.3.9, , 8.3.1, , , , , , , , Change Orders, Definition of CHANGES IN THE WORK 2.2.1, 3.11, 4.2.8, 7, 7.2.1, 7.3.1, 7.4, 7.4.1, 8.3.1, , Claims, Definition of CLAIMS AND DISPUTES 3.2.4, 6.1.1, 6.3, 7.3.9, 9.3.3, , , 15, 15.4 Claims and Timely Assertion of Claims Claims for Additional Cost 3.2.4, 3.7.4, 6.1.1, 7.3.9, , Claims for Additional Time 3.2.4, , 8.3.2, , Concealed or Unknown Conditions, Claims for Claims for Damages 3.2.4, 3.18, 6.1.1, 8.3.3, 9.5.1, 9.6.7, , , , , , , Claims Subject to Arbitration , Cleaning Up 3.15, 6.3 Commencement of the Work, Conditions Relating to 2.2.1, 3.2.2, 3.4.1, 3.7.1, , , 5.2.1, 5.2.3, 6.2.2, 8.1.2, 8.2.2, 8.3.1, 11.1, , , , Commencement of the Work, Definition of Communications Facilitating Contract Administration 3.9.1, Completion, Conditions Relating to 3.4.1, 3.11, 3.15, 4.2.2, 4.2.9, 8.2, 9.4.2, 9.8, 9.9.1, 9.10, 12.2, 13.7, COMPLETION, PAYMENTS AND 9 Completion, Substantial 4.2.9, 8.1.1, 8.1.3, 8.2.3, 9.4.2, 9.8, 9.9.1, , 12.2, 13.7 Compliance with Laws 1.6.1, 3.2.3, 3.6, 3.7, , 3.13, 4.1.1, 9.6.4, , 11.1, 11.3, 13.1, 13.4, , , 13.6, , , , , Concealed or Unknown Conditions 3.7.4, 4.2.8, 8.3.1, 10.3 Conditions of the Contract 1.1.1, 6.1.1, Consent, Written 3.4.2, 3.7.4, , , 4.1.2, 9.3.2, 9.8.5, 9.9.1, , , , 13.2, , Consolidation or Joinder CONSTRUCTION BY OWNER OR BY SEPARATE CONTRACTORS 1.1.4, 6 Construction Change Directive, Definition of Construction Change Directives 1.1.1, 3.4.2, , 4.2.8, 7.1.1, 7.1.2, 7.1.3, 7.3, Construction Schedules, Contractor s 3.10, , , 6.1.3, Contingent Assignment of Subcontracts 5.4, Continuing Contract Performance Contract, Definition of CONTRACT, TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION OF THE , , 14 Contract Administration 3.1.3, 4, 9.4, 9.5 Contract Award and Execution, Conditions Relating to 3.7.1, 3.10, 5.2, 6.1, , , Contract Documents, Copies Furnished and Use of 1.5.2, 2.2.5, 5.3 Contract Documents, Definition of Contract Sum 3.7.4, 3.8, 5.2.3, 7.2, 7.3, 7.4, 9.1, 9.4.2, , 9.6.7, 9.7, , , , , , Contract Sum, Definition of 9.1 Contract Time 3.7.4, 3.7.5, , 5.2.3, , 7.3.1, 7.3.5, 7.4, 8.1.1, 8.2.1, 8.3.1, 9.5.1, 9.7, , , , , Contract Time, Definition of AIA Document A Copyright 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This draft was produced by AIA software at 15:33:56 on 09/17/2010 under Order No _1 which expires on 09/24/2011, and is not for resale. User Notes: ( ) 4

57 CONTRACTOR 3 Contractor, Definition of 3.1, Contractor s Construction Schedules 3.10, , , 6.1.3, Contractor s Employees 3.3.2, 3.4.3, 3.8.1, 3.9, , 4.2.3, 4.2.6, 10.2, 10.3, , , 14.1, , Contractor s Liability Insurance 11.1 Contractor s Relationship with Separate Contractors and Owner s Forces , , 4.2.4, 6, , , Contractor s Relationship with Subcontractors 1.2.2, 3.3.2, , , 5, 9.6.2, 9.6.7, , , , Contractor s Relationship with the Architect 1.1.2, 1.5, 3.1.3, 3.2.2, 3.2.3, 3.2.4, 3.3.1, 3.4.2, 3.5, 3.7.4, 3.10, 3.11, 3.12, 3.16, 3.18, 4.1.3, 4.2, 5.2, 6.2.2, 7, 8.3.1, 9.2, 9.3, 9.4, 9.5, 9.7, 9.8, 9.9, , 10.3, , 12, 13.5, , Contractor s Representations 3.2.1, 3.2.2, 3.5, , 6.2.2, 8.2.1, 9.3.3, Contractor s Responsibility for Those Performing the Work 3.3.2, 3.18, 5.3.1, 6.1.3, 6.2, 9.5.1, Contractor s Review of Contract Documents 3.2 Contractor s Right to Stop the Work 9.7 Contractor s Right to Terminate the Contract 14.1, Contractor s Submittals 3.10, 3.11, , 4.2.7, 5.2.1, 5.2.3, 9.2, 9.3, 9.8.2, 9.8.3, 9.9.1, , , , Contractor s Superintendent 3.9, Contractor s Supervision and Construction Procedures 1.2.2, 3.3, 3.4, , 4.2.2, 4.2.7, 6.1.3, 6.2.4, 7.1.3, 7.3.5, 7.3.7, 8.2, 10, 12, 14, Contractual Liability Insurance , 11.2 Coordination and Correlation 1.2, 3.2.1, 3.3.1, 3.10, , 6.1.3, Copies Furnished of Drawings and Specifications 1.5, 2.2.5, 3.11 Copyrights 1.5, 3.17 Correction of Work 2.3, 2.4, 3.7.3, 9.4.2, 9.8.2, 9.8.3, 9.9.1, , 12.2 Correlation and Intent of the Contract Documents 1.2 Cost, Definition of Costs 2.4.1, 3.2.4, 3.7.3, 3.8.2, , 5.4.2, 6.1.1, 6.2.3, , 7.3.7, 7.3.8, 7.3.9, , , , 11.3, , , , 13.5, 14 Cutting and Patching 3.14, Damage to Construction of Owner or Separate Contractors , 6.2.4, , , 10.4, , 11.3, Damage to the Work , 9.9.1, , , , , Damages, Claims for 3.2.4, 3.18, 6.1.1, 8.3.3, 9.5.1, 9.6.7, , , , , , , Damages for Delay 6.1.1, 8.3.3, , 9.7, Date of Commencement of the Work, Definition of Date of Substantial Completion, Definition of Day, Definition of Decisions of the Architect 3.7.4, 4.2.6, 4.2.7, , , , 15.2, 6.3, 7.3.7, 7.3.9, 8.1.3, 8.3.1, 9.2, 9.4, 9.5.1, 9.8.4, 9.9.1, , , , 15.1, 15.2 Decisions to Withhold Certification 9.4.1, 9.5, 9.7, Defective or Nonconforming Work, Acceptance, Rejection and Correction of 2.3.1, 2.4.1, 3.5, 4.2.6, 6.2.5, 9.5.1, 9.5.2, 9.6.6, 9.8.2, 9.9.3, , Definitions 1.1, 2.1.1, 3.1.1, 3.5, , , , 4.1.1, , 5.1, 6.1.2, 7.2.1, 7.3.1, 8.1, 9.1, Delays and Extensions of Time 3.2, 3.7.4, 5.2.3, 7.2.1, 7.3.1, 7.4, 8.3, 9.5.1, 9.7, , , , , Disputes 6.3, 7.3.9, 15.1, 15.2 Documents and Samples at the Site 3.11 Drawings, Definition of Drawings and Specifications, Use and Ownership of 3.11 Effective Date of Insurance 8.2.2, Emergencies 10.4, , Employees, Contractor s 3.3.2, 3.4.3, 3.8.1, 3.9, , 4.2.3, 4.2.6, 10.2, , , , 14.1, AIA Document A Copyright 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This draft was produced by AIA software at 15:33:56 on 09/17/2010 under Order No _1 which expires on 09/24/2011, and is not for resale. User Notes: ( ) 5

58 Equipment, Labor, Materials or 1.1.3, 1.1.6, 3.4, 3.5, 3.8.2, 3.8.3, 3.12, , , 4.2.6, 4.2.7, 5.2.1, 6.2.1, 7.3.7, 9.3.2, 9.3.3, , , , , , Execution and Progress of the Work 1.1.3, 1.2.1, 1.2.2, 2.2.3, 2.2.5, 3.1, 3.3.1, 3.4.1, 3.5, 3.7.1, , 3.12, 3.14, 4.2, 6.2.2, 7.1.3, 7.3.5, 8.2, 9.5.1, 9.9.1, 10.2, 10.3, 12.2, 14.2, , Extensions of Time 3.2.4, 3.7.4, 5.2.3, 7.2.1, 7.3, 7.4, 9.5.1, 9.7, , , 14.3, , Failure of Payment , 9.7, , 13.6, , Faulty Work (See Defective or Nonconforming Work) Final Completion and Final Payment 4.2.1, 4.2.9, 9.8.2, 9.10, , , , , , , Financial Arrangements, Owner s 2.2.1, , Fire and Extended Coverage Insurance GENERAL PROVISIONS 1 Governing Law 13.1 Guarantees (See Warranty) Hazardous Materials , 10.3 Identification of Subcontractors and Suppliers Indemnification 3.17, 3.18, , , , , , Information and Services Required of the Owner 2.1.2, 2.2, 3.2.2, , , 6.1.3, 6.1.4, 6.2.5, 9.6.1, 9.6.4, 9.9.2, , , 11.2, 11.4, , , , , Initial Decision 15.2 Initial Decision Maker, Definition of Initial Decision Maker, Decisions , , , , , , Initial Decision Maker, Extent of Authority , , , , , , , Injury or Damage to Person or Property , Inspections 3.1.3, 3.3.3, 3.7.1, 4.2.2, 4.2.6, 4.2.9, 9.4.2, 9.8.3, 9.9.2, , , 13.5 Instructions to Bidders Instructions to the Contractor 3.2.4, 3.3.1, 3.8.1, 5.2.1, 7, 8.2.2, 12, Instruments of Service, Definition of Insurance , 6.1.1, 7.3.7, 9.3.2, 9.8.4, 9.9.1, , 11 Insurance, Boiler and Machinery Insurance, Contractor s Liability 11.1 Insurance, Effective Date of 8.2.2, Insurance, Loss of Use Insurance, Owner s Liability 11.2 Insurance, Property , 11.3 Insurance, Stored Materials INSURANCE AND BONDS 11 Insurance Companies, Consent to Partial Occupancy Intent of the Contract Documents 1.2.1, 4.2.7, , , 7.4 Interest 13.6 Interpretation 1.2.3, 1.4, 4.1.1, 5.1, 6.1.2, Interpretations, Written , , Judgment on Final Award Labor and Materials, Equipment 1.1.3, 1.1.6, 3.4, 3.5, 3.8.2, 3.8.3, 3.12, 3.13, , 4.2.6, 4.2.7, 5.2.1, 6.2.1, 7.3.7, 9.3.2, 9.3.3, , , , , , Labor Disputes Laws and Regulations 1.5, 3.2.3, 3.6, 3.7, , , 4.1.1, 9.6.4, 9.9.1, , , 11.3, , 13.4, , , , 14, , 15.4 Liens 2.1.2, 9.3.3, , , Limitations, Statutes of , 13.7, Limitations of Liability 2.3.1, 3.2.2, 3.5, , 3.17, , 4.2.6, 4.2.7, , 6.2.2, 9.4.2, 9.6.4, 9.6.7, , , , 11.2, , , Limitations of Time 2.1.2, 2.2, 2.4, 3.2.2, 3.10, 3.11, , , 4.2.7, 5.2, 5.3.1, 5.4.1, 6.2.4, 7.3, 7.4, 8.2, 9.2, 9.3.1, 9.3.3, 9.4.1, 9.5, 9.6, 9.7, 9.8, 9.9, 9.10, , , , , 12.2, 13.5, 13.7, 14, 15 Loss of Use Insurance AIA Document A Copyright 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This draft was produced by AIA software at 15:33:56 on 09/17/2010 under Order No _1 which expires on 09/24/2011, and is not for resale. User Notes: ( ) 6

59 Material Suppliers 1.5, , 4.2.4, 4.2.6, 5.2.1, 9.3, 9.4.2, 9.6, Materials, Hazardous , 10.3 Materials, Labor, Equipment and 1.1.3, 1.1.6, 1.5.1, 3.4.1, 3.5, 3.8.2, 3.8.3, 3.12, , , 4.2.6, 4.2.7, 5.2.1, 6.2.1, 7.3.7, 9.3.2, 9.3.3, , , , , , Means, Methods, Techniques, Sequences and Procedures of Construction 3.3.1, , 4.2.2, 4.2.7, Mechanic s Lien 2.1.2, Mediation 8.3.1, , , , , , 15.3, Minor Changes in the Work 1.1.1, , 4.2.8, 7.1, 7.4 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS 13 Modifications, Definition of Modifications to the Contract 1.1.1, 1.1.2, 3.11, 4.1.2, 4.2.1, 5.2.3, 7, 8.3.1, 9.7, , Mutual Responsibility 6.2 Nonconforming Work, Acceptance of 9.6.6, 9.9.3, 12.3 Nonconforming Work, Rejection and Correction of 2.3.1, 2.4.1, 3.5, 4.2.6, 6.2.4, 9.5.1, 9.8.2, 9.9.3, , Notice 2.2.1, 2.3.1, 2.4.1, 3.2.4, 3.3.1, 3.7.2, , 5.2.1, 9.7, 9.10, , , , 13.3, , , 14.1, 14.2, , Notice, Written 2.3.1, 2.4.1, 3.3.1, 3.9.2, , , 5.2.1, 9.7, 9.10, , 10.3, , , , 13.3, 14, , Notice of Claims 3.7.4, , , 15.4 Notice of Testing and Inspections , Observations, Contractor s 3.2, Occupancy 2.2.2, 9.6.6, 9.8, Orders, Written 1.1.1, 2.3, 3.9.2, 7, 8.2.2, , 12.1, , , OWNER 2 Owner, Definition of Owner, Information and Services Required of the 2.1.2, 2.2, 3.2.2, , 6.1.3, 6.1.4, 6.2.5, 9.3.2, 9.6.1, 9.6.4, 9.9.2, , , 11.2, 11.3, , , , , Owner s Authority 1.5, 2.1.1, 2.3.1, 2.4.1, 3.4.2, 3.8.1, , , 4.1.2, 4.1.3, 4.2.4, 4.2.9, 5.2.1, 5.2.4, 5.4.1, 6.1, 6.3, 7.2.1, 7.3.1, 8.2.2, 8.3.1, 9.3.1, 9.3.2, 9.5.1, 9.6.4, 9.9.1, , , , , , , , , 14.3, 14.4, Owner s Financial Capability 2.2.1, , Owner s Liability Insurance 11.2 Owner s Relationship with Subcontractors 1.1.2, 5.2, 5.3, 5.4, 9.6.4, , Owner s Right to Carry Out the Work 2.4, Owner s Right to Clean Up 6.3 Owner s Right to Perform Construction and to Award Separate Contracts 6.1 Owner s Right to Stop the Work 2.3 Owner s Right to Suspend the Work 14.3 Owner s Right to Terminate the Contract 14.2 Ownership and Use of Drawings, Specifications and Other Instruments of Service 1.1.1, 1.1.6, 1.1.7, 1.5, 2.2.5, 3.2.2, , 3.17, , Partial Occupancy or Use 9.6.6, 9.9, Patching, Cutting and 3.14, Patents 3.17 Payment, Applications for 4.2.5, 7.3.9, 9.2, 9.3, 9.4, 9.5, 9.6.3, 9.7, 9.8.5, , , , Payment, Certificates for 4.2.5, 4.2.9, 9.3.3, 9.4, 9.5, 9.6.1, 9.6.6, 9.7, , , 13.7, , Payment, Failure of , 9.7, , 13.6, , Payment, Final 4.2.1, 4.2.9, 9.8.2, 9.10, , , , , 13.7, , Payment Bond, Performance Bond and , 9.6.7, , 11.4 Payments, Progress 9.3, 9.6, 9.8.5, , 13.6, , PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION 9 AIA Document A Copyright 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This draft was produced by AIA software at 15:33:56 on 09/17/2010 under Order No _1 which expires on 09/24/2011, and is not for resale. User Notes: ( ) 7

60 Payments to Subcontractors 5.4.2, , 9.6.2, 9.6.3, 9.6.4, 9.6.7, PCB Performance Bond and Payment Bond , 9.6.7, , 11.4 Permits, Fees, Notices and Compliance with Laws 2.2.2, 3.7, 3.13, , PERSONS AND PROPERTY, PROTECTION OF 10 Polychlorinated Biphenyl Product Data, Definition of Product Data and Samples, Shop Drawings 3.11, 3.12, Progress and Completion 4.2.2, 8.2, 9.8, 9.9.1, , Progress Payments 9.3, 9.6, 9.8.5, , 13.6, , Project, Definition of Project Representatives Property Insurance , 11.3 PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY 10 Regulations and Laws 1.5, 3.2.3, 3.6, 3.7, , 3.13, 4.1.1, 9.6.4, 9.9.1, , 11.1, 11.4, 13.1, 13.4, , , 13.6, 14, , 15.4 Rejection of Work 3.5, 4.2.6, Releases and Waivers of Liens Representations 3.2.1, 3.5, , 6.2.2, 8.2.1, 9.3.3, 9.4.2, 9.5.1, 9.8.2, Representatives 2.1.1, 3.1.1, 3.9, 4.1.1, 4.2.1, 4.2.2, , 5.1.1, 5.1.2, Responsibility for Those Performing the Work 3.3.2, 3.18, 4.2.3, 5.3.1, 6.1.3, 6.2, 6.3, 9.5.1, 10 Retainage 9.3.1, 9.6.2, 9.8.5, 9.9.1, , Review of Contract Documents and Field Conditions by Contractor 3.2, , Review of Contractor s Submittals by Owner and Architect , , 3.11, 3.12, 4.2, 5.2, 6.1.3, 9.2, Review of Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples by Contractor 3.12 Rights and Remedies 1.1.2, 2.3, 2.4, 3.5, 3.7.4, , 4.2.6, 5.3, 5.4, 6.1, 6.3, 7.3.1, 8.3, 9.5.1, 9.7, , 10.3, , , 13.4, 14, 15.4 Royalties, Patents and Copyrights 3.17 Rules and Notices for Arbitration Safety of Persons and Property 10.2, 10.4 Safety Precautions and Programs 3.3.1, 4.2.2, 4.2.7, 5.3.1, 10.1, 10.2, 10.4 Samples, Definition of Samples, Shop Drawings, Product Data and 3.11, 3.12, Samples at the Site, Documents and 3.11 Schedule of Values 9.2, Schedules, Construction 3.10, , , 6.1.3, Separate Contracts and Contractors 1.1.4, , , 4.2.4, 4.2.7, 6, 8.3.1, Shop Drawings, Definition of Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples 3.11, 3.12, Site, Use of 3.13, 6.1.1, Site Inspections 3.2.2, 3.3.3, 3.7.1, 3.7.4, 4.2, 9.4.2, , 13.5 Site Visits, Architect s 3.7.4, 4.2.2, 4.2.9, 9.4.2, 9.5.1, 9.9.2, , 13.5 Special Inspections and Testing 4.2.6, , 13.5 Specifications, Definition of Specifications 1.1.1, 1.1.6, 1.2.2, 1.5, 3.11, , 3.17, Statute of Limitations 13.7, Stopping the Work 2.3, 9.7, 10.3, 14.1 Stored Materials 6.2.1, 9.3.2, , Subcontractor, Definition of SUBCONTRACTORS 5 Subcontractors, Work by 1.2.2, 3.3.2, , 4.2.3, 5.2.3, 5.3, 5.4, , Subcontractual Relations 5.3, 5.4, , 9.6, 9.10, , 14.1, AIA Document A Copyright 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This draft was produced by AIA software at 15:33:56 on 09/17/2010 under Order No _1 which expires on 09/24/2011, and is not for resale. User Notes: ( ) 8

61 Submittals 3.10, 3.11, 3.12, 4.2.7, 5.2.1, 5.2.3, 7.3.7, 9.2, 9.3, 9.8, 9.9.1, , , Submittal Schedule , , Subrogation, Waivers of 6.1.1, Substantial Completion 4.2.9, 8.1.1, 8.1.3, 8.2.3, 9.4.2, 9.8, 9.9.1, , 12.2, 13.7 Substantial Completion, Definition of Substitution of Subcontractors 5.2.3, Substitution of Architect Substitutions of Materials 3.4.2, 3.5, Sub-subcontractor, Definition of Subsurface Conditions Successors and Assigns 13.2 Superintendent 3.9, Supervision and Construction Procedures 1.2.2, 3.3, 3.4, , 4.2.2, 4.2.7, 6.1.3, 6.2.4, 7.1.3, 7.3.7, 8.2, 8.3.1, 9.4.2, 10, 12, 14, Surety , 9.8.5, , , , Surety, Consent of , Surveys Suspension by the Owner for Convenience 14.3 Suspension of the Work 5.4.2, 14.3 Suspension or Termination of the Contract , 14 Taxes 3.6, , Termination by the Contractor 14.1, Termination by the Owner for Cause , 14.2, Termination by the Owner for Convenience 14.4 Termination of the Architect Termination of the Contractor TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION OF THE CONTRACT 14 Tests and Inspections 3.1.3, 3.3.3, 4.2.2, 4.2.6, 4.2.9, 9.4.2, 9.8.3, 9.9.2, , , , , 13.5 TIME 8 Time, Delays and Extensions of 3.2.4, 3.7.4, 5.2.3, 7.2.1, 7.3.1, 7.4, 8.3, 9.5.1, 9.7, , , , , Time Limits 2.1.2, 2.2, 2.4, 3.2.2, 3.10, 3.11, , , 4.2, 5.2, 5.3, 5.4, 6.2.4, 7.3, 7.4, 8.2, 9.2, 9.3.1, 9.3.3, 9.4.1, 9.5, 9.6, 9.7, 9.8, 9.9, 9.10, , 12.2, 13.5, 13.7, 14, , 15.4 Time Limits on Claims 3.7.4, , 13.7, Title to Work 9.3.2, Transmission of Data in Digital Form 1.6 UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION OF WORK 12 Uncovering of Work 12.1 Unforeseen Conditions, Concealed or Unknown 3.7.4, 8.3.1, 10.3 Unit Prices , Use of Documents 1.1.1, 1.5, 2.2.5, , 5.3 Use of Site 3.13, 6.1.1, Values, Schedule of 9.2, Waiver of Claims by the Architect Waiver of Claims by the Contractor , , Waiver of Claims by the Owner 9.9.3, , , , , , Waiver of Consequential Damages , Waiver of Liens , Waivers of Subrogation 6.1.1, Warranty 3.5, 4.2.9, 9.3.3, 9.8.4, 9.9.1, , , 13.7 Weather Delays Work, Definition of Written Consent 1.5.2, 3.4.2, 3.7.4, , , 4.1.2, 9.3.2, 9.8.5, 9.9.1, , , , 13.2, , Written Interpretations , AIA Document A Copyright 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This draft was produced by AIA software at 15:33:56 on 09/17/2010 under Order No _1 which expires on 09/24/2011, and is not for resale. User Notes: ( ) 9

62 Written Notice 2.3, 2.4, 3.3.1, 3.9, , , 5.2.1, 8.2.2, 9.7, 9.10, , 10.3, , , , 13.3, 14, Written Orders 1.1.1, 2.3, 3.9, 7, 8.2.2, 12.1, 12.2, , , ARTICLE 1 GENERAL PROVISIONS 1.1 BASIC DEFINITIONS THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS The Contract Documents consist of these General Conditions of the Contract for Construction Between Owner and Contractor, Supplementary General Conditions Indiana University Project Site Requirements, Notice to Bidders, Instructions to Bidders, Bid Forms, Notice to Proceed, Drawings, Specifications, Construction Agreement, Addenda issued prior to execution of the Construction Agreement,, any other documents listed in the Agreement, approved Schedules (per ), and Modifications issued after execution of the Construction Agreement. A Modification is (1) a written amendment to the Contract signed by both parties, (2) a Construction Change Directive or (3) a written order for a minor change in the Work issued by the Owner s Representative THE CONTRACT The Contract Documents form the Contract for Construction. The Contract represents the entire and integrated agreement between the parties hereto and supersedes prior negotiations, representations or agreements, either written or oral. The Contract may be amended or modified only by a Modification. The Contract Documents shall not be construed to create a contractual relationship of any kind (1) between the Contractor and the Owner s Representative or the Owner s Representative s consultants, (2) between the Owner and a Subcontractor or a Sub-subcontractor, (3) between the Owner and the Owner s Representative or the Owner s Representative s consultants or (4) between any persons or entities other than the Owner and the Contractor. The Owner s Representative shall, however, be entitled to performance and enforcement of obligations under the Contract intended to facilitate performance of the Owner s Representative s duties THE WORK The term Work means the construction and services required by the Contract Documents, whether completed or partially completed, and includes all other labor, materials, equipment and services provided or to be provided by the Contractor to fulfill the Contractor s obligations. The Work also includes labor, materials and equipment necessary or identical to those tasks or activities which are not specifically described in, but are reasonably inferable from, the Drawings and Specifications. The Work may constitute the whole or a part of the Project THE PROJECT The Project is the total construction of which the Work performed under the Contract Documents may be the whole or a part and which may include construction by the Owner and by separate contractors THE DRAWINGS The Drawings are the graphic and pictorial portions of the Contract Documents showing the design, location and dimensions of the Work, generally including plans, elevations, sections, details, schedules and diagrams THE SPECIFICATIONS The Specifications are that portion of the Contract Documents consisting of the written requirements for materials, equipment, systems, standards and workmanship for the Work, and performance of related services INSTRUMENTS OF SERVICE Instruments of Service are representations, in any medium of expression now known or later developed, of the tangible and intangible creative work performed by the Owner s Representative and the Owner s Representative s consultants under their respective professional services agreements. Instruments of Service may include, without limitation, studies, surveys, models, sketches, drawings, specifications, and other similar materials INITIAL DECISION MAKER. The Initial Decision Maker for purposes of Section and Article 15 shall be the Owner s Representative. AIA Document A Copyright 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This draft was produced by AIA software at 15:33:56 on 09/17/2010 under Order No _1 which expires on 09/24/2011, and is not for resale. User Notes: ( ) 10

63 1.2 CORRELATION AND INTENT OF THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS The intent of the Contract Documents is to include all items necessary for the proper execution and completion of the Work by the Contractor. The Contract Documents are complementary, and what is required by one shall be as binding as if required by all; performance by the Contractor shall be required only to the extent consistent with the Contract Documents and reasonably inferable from them as being necessary to produce the indicated results. In the event of conflicts or inconsistencies within or among parts of the Contract Documents and applicable standards, codes, and ordinances, the provision granting the Owner the greater rights shall prevail and the Contractor shall either (i) provide the better quality or greater quantity of work or (ii) shall comply with the more stringent requirements; or both in accordance with the Owner s Representative s interpretation. Contractor s obligations in this regard shall in no way diminish the Contractor s obligations imposed by 3.2 or Organization of the Specifications into divisions, sections and articles, and arrangement of Drawings shall not control the Contractor in dividing the Work among Subcontractors or in establishing the extent of Work to be performed by any trade Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents, words that have well-known technical or construction industry meanings are used in the Contract Documents in accordance with such recognized meanings On the Drawings, given dimensions shall take precedence over scaled measurements, large scale drawings over small scale drawings, and drawings of a later date over drawings of an earlier date. Unless expressly authorized, drawings shall not be scaled for dimensions. If figured dimensions are not given on the Drawings, the Contractor shall timely request the same from the Owner s Representative When references to laws, codes, regulations or standards of technical associations or organizations are included in the Contract Documents, the most current edition is intended and shall govern unless otherwise specified Whenever a product is specified by proprietary designations, model numbers, catalog numbers, manufacturer trade names, or similar references, no substitution may be made unless it is accepted in writing by the Owner s Representative The layout of mechanical and electrical systems, equipment, fixtures, piping, ductwork, conduit, specialty items, accessories shown on the Drawings in diagrammatic, and all variations in alignment, elevation and details required to avoid interferences and satisfy all architectural and structural limitations are not necessarily shown. Actual layout of the Work shall be carried out without affecting the architectural or structural integrity and limitations of the Work and shall be performed in such sequence and manner as to avoid conflicts, provide clear access to all control points, including valves, strainers, control devices and specialty items of every nature related to such systems and equipment, obtain maximum headroom, and provide clearances as required for operation and maintenance A typical or representative detail on the Drawings shall constitute the standard for workmanship and material throughout corresponding parts of the Work. Where necessary, and where reasonably inferable from the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall adapt such representative detail for application to the Work subject to the prior approval of the Owner s Representative. 1.3 CAPITALIZATION Terms capitalized in these General Conditions include those that are (1) specifically defined, (2) the titles of numbered articles or (3) the titles of other documents published by the American Institute of Architects. 1.4 INTERPRETATION In the interest of brevity the Contract Documents frequently omit modifying words such as all and any and articles such as the and an, but the fact that a modifier or an article is absent from one statement and appears in another is not intended to affect the interpretation of either statement. 1.5 OWNERSHIP AND USE OF DRAWINGS, SPECIFICATIONS AND OTHER INSTRUMENTS OF SERVICE The Owner s Representative and the Owner s Representative s consultants shall be deemed the authors of their respective Instruments of Service, including the Drawings and Specifications. Pursuant to the contract between AIA Document A Copyright 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This draft was produced by AIA software at 15:33:56 on 09/17/2010 under Order No _1 which expires on 09/24/2011, and is not for resale. User Notes: ( ) 11

64 the Owner s Representative and the Owner, the Owner holds all right, title and interest, including copyright, and will retain all common law, statutory and other reserved rights, including copyrights. The Contractor, Subcontractors, Sub-subcontractors, and material or equipment suppliers shall not own or claim a copyright in the Instruments of Service. Submittal or distribution to meet official regulatory requirements or for other purposes in connection with this Project is not to be construed as publication in derogation of the Owner s or Owner s Representative s reserved rights or that of the Owner s Representative or its consultants The Contractor, Subcontractors, Sub-subcontractors and material or equipment suppliers are authorized to use and reproduce the Instruments of Service provided to them solely and exclusively for execution of the Work. All copies made under this authorization shall bear the copyright notice, if any, shown on the Instruments of Service. The Contractor, Subcontractors, Sub-subcontractors, and material or equipment suppliers may not use the Instruments of Service on other projects or for additions to this Project outside the scope of the Work without the specific written consent of the Owner, the Owner s Representative or the Owner s Representative s consultants. 1.6 TRANSMISSION OF DATA IN DIGITAL FORM If the parties intend to transmit Instruments of Service or any other information or documentation in digital form, they shall endeavor to establish necessary protocols governing such transmissions, unless otherwise already provided in the Agreement or the Contract Documents. ARTICLE 2 OWNER 2.1 GENERAL The Owner is The Trustees of Indiana University and is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as singular in number. The term Owner s Representative shall refer to the Owner s Representative, Engineer or other licensed design professional hired by the Owner for this Project and shall have express authority to bind the Owner with respect to all matters requiring the Owner s approval or authorization unless and until such authority is modified or a new representative is identified in writing by the Owner. Except as otherwise provided in Section 4.2.1, the Owner s Representative does not have such authority. The term Owner means the Owner or the Owner s authorized representative. 2.2 INFORMATION AND SERVICES REQUIRED OF THE OWNER Except for permits and fees that are the responsibility of the Contractor under the Contract Documents, including any required under Section 3.7.1, the Owner shall secure and pay for necessary approvals, easements, assessments and charges required for construction, use or occupancy of permanent structures or for permanent changes in existing facilities The Owner shall furnish surveys describing physical characteristics, legal limitations and utility locations for the site of the Project, and a legal description of the site. Subject to the limitations and qualifications of the Contract Documents, including but not limited to Section 3.1.4, the Contractor may reasonably rely on the accuracy of the information furnished by the Owner but shall exercise proper precautions relating to the safe performance of the Work The Owner shall furnish information or services required of the Owner by the Contract Documents with reasonable promptness. The Owner shall also furnish any other information or services under the Owner s control and relevant to the Contractor s performance of the Work with reasonable promptness after receiving the Contractor s written request for such information or services Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, the Owner shall furnish to the Contractor one copy of the Contract Documents for purposes of making reproductions pursuant to Section OWNER S RIGHT TO STOP THE WORK If the Contractor fails to correct Work which is not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents as required by Section 12, persistently fails to carry out the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents, or fails to clean up as required by Section 3.15 and Supplementary Conditions Paragraph 10, the Owner may issue a written order to the Contractor to stop the Work, or any portion thereof, until the cause thereof has been eliminated. However, the right of the Owner to stop the Work shall not give rise to a duty on the part of the Owner to exercise this right for the benefit of the Contractor or any other person or entity. The stoppage of Work pursuant to this AIA Document A Copyright 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This draft was produced by AIA software at 15:33:56 on 09/17/2010 under Order No _1 which expires on 09/24/2011, and is not for resale. User Notes: ( ) 12

65 Section 2.3 shall not entitle the Contractor to an adjustment of the Contract Sum, the Contract Time or the Contract Schedule. 2.4 OWNER S RIGHT TO CARRY OUT THE WORK If the Contractor defaults or neglects to carry out the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents and fails within a ten-day period after receipt of written notice from the Owner to commence and continue correction of such default or neglect with diligence and promptness, the Owner may, without prejudice to other remedies the Owner may have, correct such deficiencies. In such case an appropriate Construction Change Directive shall be issued deducting from payments then or thereafter due the Contractor the reasonable cost of correcting such deficiencies, including Owner s expenses and compensation for the Owner s Representative s additional services made necessary by such default, neglect or failure. Such action by the Owner and amounts charged to the Contractor are both subject to prior approval of the Owner s Representative. If payments then or thereafter due the Contractor are not sufficient to cover such amounts, the Contractor shall pay the difference to the Owner. 2.5 OWNER S RIGHT TO REJECT DEFECTIVE WORK The Owner shall have the right, but not the duty, to approve all materials and workmanship incorporated, or to be incorporated, into the Work and may reject as defective any work that is not, in the judgment of the Owner and the Owner s Representative, in strict accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. Work so rejected shall be promptly removed and corrected by the Contractor. No Work which the Owner expressed its intention to inspect shall be closed or covered by the Contractor until it has been duly inspected and approved by the Owner. Should the Contractor close or cover uninspected Work then the Contractor shall, at its own cost and expense, uncover all such Work so that it may be inspected. After Owner s inspection is complete, Contractor shall then properly repair or replace all affected Work. 2.6 OWNER S CONFIDENTIAL INFORMATION The Owner may designate to Contractor such information or documents that Owner wishes to be kept confidential in connection with the Work or the Project. Such designation shall be in writing. Information designated by the Owner as Confidential shall not be disclosed, communicated or transmitted to any person or entity other than Contractor s employees, agents or subcontractors as may be necessary for the performance of the Work. Contractor shall require its subcontractors, vendors, material suppliers and the like to comply with this requirement. Documents designated as Confidential (and all copies thereof) shall be immediately returned to the Owner upon request. The requirements of this Section 2.6 shall survive Owner s final acceptance of the Work or earlier termination of the Contract. ARTICLE 3 CONTRACTOR 3.1 GENERAL The Contractor is the person or entity identified as such in the Agreement and is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number. If the Work of the Project has been divided into the following parts, each part will be performed by the separate Prime Contractor indicated below: General construction work, by the General Contractor;.2 Mechanical construction work, by the Mechanical Contractor; and.3 Electrical construction work, by the Electrical Contractor..1 In the Instructions to Bidders, Bid Form, General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, Indiana University Project Site Requirements, all sections of Division 1 of the Specifications, and in all addenda and modifications to the Contract Documents, the term Contractor means each of them, unless specific reference is made to a particular Prime Contractor..2 In the Agreement for General Construction Work, the site development drawings, the architectural drawings, and all sections of the Specifications, the term Contractor means the General Contractor, unless specific reference is made to another Prime Contractor. AIA Document A Copyright 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This draft was produced by AIA software at 15:33:56 on 09/17/2010 under Order No _1 which expires on 09/24/2011, and is not for resale. User Notes: ( ) 13

66 .3 In the Agreement for Mechanical Construction Work, the mechanical drawings, and all sections of Division 23 of the Specifications, the term Contractor means the Mechanical Contractor, unless specific reference is made to another Prime Contractor..4 In the Agreement for Electrical Construction Work, the electrical drawings, and in all sections of Division 26 of the Specifications, the term Contractor means the Electrical Contractor, unless reference is made to another Prime Contractor..5 In any other Agreement with any other Prime Contractor for that Prime Contractor s scope of work, and any drawings and/or specifications related thereto, the term Contractor shall mean that specific Prime Contractor, unless specific reference is made to another Prime Contractor..6 All references in the Contract Documents to Contractor and/or to third parties under contract or control of the Contractor shall be deemed to be reference to the Contractor. The relationship between the Owner and the Contractor is that of independent contractor. The Contract Documents shall not be construed to make the Contractor the agent, servant or employee of the Owner or to create any joint venture, partnership or other association between the Owner other than that of independent contractor The Contractor shall perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents The Contractor shall not be relieved of obligations to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents either by activities or duties of the Owner s Representative in the Owner s Representative s administration of the Contract, or by tests, inspections or approvals required or performed by persons or entities other than the Contractor No later than thirteen (13) calendar days after the date of the Notice to Proceed, the Contractor shall deliver to the Owner certified as true and accurate and with no material changes as of the date of delivery: (i) Contractor s required payment and performance bond; (ii) all required Certificates of Insurance, including a Certificate of Compliance for worker s compensation insurance or, if applicable, a Worker s Compensation Exemption Certificate Clearance Contractor shall expeditiously execute the Construction Agreement with the Owner and shall, along with the executed Construction Agreement, provide the Owner with its executed Escrow Agreement, as contemplated in Section 1 of the Supplementary Conditions, and with its Corporate Authority Signature Certificate and W9, as contemplated by the Instructions to Bidders. 3.2 REVIEW OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND FIELD CONDITIONS BY CONTRACTOR By executing the Contract, the Contractor represents to the Owner that: (1) the Contractor has a high level of experience and expertise in the business administration construction, management, workplace health and safety supervision and superintendence of projects of similar size and complexity and that it will perform the Work with the care, skill and diligence of such a contractor; (2) Contractor and, to the best of its knowledge, its subcontractors are financially solvent, able to pay all debts as they mature and have sufficient working capital to complete the Work and all obligations thereunder; (3) Contractor is able to furnish the plant, tools, materials, supplies, equipment and labor required to complete the Work; (4) Contractor is authorized to do business in the State of Indiana; (5) Contractor s execution of the Contract and its performance thereof are within its authorized powers; (6) Contractor has (i) studied the Contract Documents, understands their provisions and confirmed that that they are sufficiently detailed and complete to permit the Contractor to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents, within the Contract Time and for the Contract Sum; (ii) inspected the Project site; and (iii) investigated and satisfied itself as to: (a) the site and locality where the Work is to be performed and the conditions and difficulties to be encountered, including access thereto; (b) in accordance with the provisions of the Instructions to Bidders Article 5 and Supplementary Conditions Section 2, the type and condition of the soil including the quality and quantity of the subsurface and surface materials or obstacles to be encountered; (c) the availability of utilities and access thereto; (d) conditions affecting transportation, disposal, handling and storage of materials, supplies and equipment; (e) any materials, supplies or equipment which are to be furnished by the Owner for the Contractor s use; (f) the type and availability of tools, equipment and facilities to perform the Work; (g) the availability and adequacy of labor and trades, local common construction wage scales and, if applicable, union wage scales, benefits, working conditions, AIA Document A Copyright 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This draft was produced by AIA software at 15:33:56 on 09/17/2010 under Order No _1 which expires on 09/24/2011, and is not for resale. User Notes: ( ) 14

67 craft jurisdictions, area practices and collective bargaining agreements affecting the Work; (h) prevailing weather and climatological conditions; (i) all laws applicable to the Work and to the Contractor; and (j) all other factors which may affect the Contractor s performance of the Work Contractor has executed the Contract based on its own examination, investigation and evaluation of the matters set forth in Section above and not in reliance on any representation of the Owner, Owner s Representative or any of their respective employees or agents which is not expressly set forth in the Contract Documents. No failure by the Contractor to consider or evaluate such matters shall relieve the Contractor from its responsibility to properly estimate the difficulty, cost and expense of performing the Work. Contractor shall not be entitled to, and Owner shall not be liable for, an adjustment to the Contract Sum, Contract Time or Contract Schedule which results directly or indirectly from Contractor s failure to properly examine, investigate or evaluate the matters set forth in Section Because the Contract Documents are complementary, the Contractor shall, before starting any portion of the Work, carefully study and compare the various Drawings and other Contract Documents relative to that portion of the Work, as well as the information furnished by the Owner pursuant to Section 2.2, shall take field measurements of any existing conditions related to that portion of the Work, and shall observe any conditions at the site affecting it. These obligations are for the purpose of facilitating construction by the Contractor and are not for the purpose of discovering errors, omissions, or inconsistencies in the Contract Documents; however, any errors, inconsistencies or omissions discovered by the Contractor shall be reported promptly to the Owner s Representative as a request for information in such form as the Owner s Representative may require The exactness of grades, elevations, dimensions or locations shown on Drawings issued by the Owner s Representative or Work installed by other Contractors is not guaranteed by the Owner s Representative or the Owner. Consequently, prior to ordering any materials or performing any work, Contractor shall satisfy itself as to the accuracy of all grades, elevations, dimensions, and locations and in all cases of interconnection of its Work with existing or other Work, shall verify, at the site, all dimensions relating to such existing or other Work. If a minor change in the Work is necessary because of actual field conditions, the Contractor shall submit detailed drawings of such change to the Owner s Representative for approval before making the change. Any significant dimensional differences shall be submitted to the Owner s Representative before proceeding with the Work. Any errors resulting from Contractor s failure to so verify shall be promptly rectified by Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner. No increase in the Contract Sum or the Contract Time shall be allowed because of differences between actual dimensions and dimensions on the Drawings Any design errors or omissions discovered by the Contractor during the exercise of its obligations pursuant to this Section 3.2 shall be reported promptly to the Owner s Representative in writing. The Contractor s review is made in its capacity as a contractor and not as a licensed design professional unless otherwise specifically provided in the Contract Documents If the Contractor believes that additional cost or time is involved because of clarifications or instructions the Owner s Representative issues in response to the Contractor s notices or requests for information pursuant to Sections or 3.2.3, the Contractor shall make Claims as provided in Article 15. If the Contractor fails to perform its obligations pursuant to this Section 3.2, the Contractor shall pay such costs and damages to the Owner as would have been avoided or mitigated if the Contractor had performed such obligations. If the Contractor performs those obligations, the Contractor shall not be liable to the Owner or Owner s Representative for damages resulting from errors, inconsistencies or omissions in the Contract Documents, for differences between field measurements or conditions and the Contract Documents, or for nonconformities of the Contract Documents to applicable laws, statutes, ordinances, codes, rules and regulations, and lawful orders of public authorities Except for errors, omissions, or inconsistencies reported by the Contractor, and concealed or unknown conditions in Section 3.7.4, by executing the Agreement, Contractor represents that:.1 The Contract Documents are sufficiently complete and detailed for Contractor to perform the Work required and to produce the results indicated by the Contract Documents; and.2 The Work as specified in the Contract Documents, including without limitation, use of materials, selection of equipment, requirements of product, manufacturers and Contractor s means, methods, AIA Document A Copyright 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This draft was produced by AIA software at 15:33:56 on 09/17/2010 under Order No _1 which expires on 09/24/2011, and is not for resale. User Notes: ( ) 15

68 procedures and techniques utilized to perform the Work are consistent with (i) good and proper practices within the construction industry, (ii) generally accepted or prevailing laws, regulations, ordinances and/or industry standards applicable to the Work, and (iii) the requirement of any warranties applicable to the Work. 3.3 SUPERVISION AND CONSTRUCTION PROCEDURES The Contractor shall supervise and direct the Work, using the Contractor s best skill and attention. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for, and have control over, construction means, methods, techniques, sequences and procedures and for coordinating all portions of the Work under the Contract, unless the Contract Documents give other specific instructions concerning these matters. If the Contract Documents give specific instructions concerning construction means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures, the Contractor shall evaluate the jobsite safety thereof and, except as stated below, shall be fully and solely responsible for the jobsite safety of such means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures. If the Contractor determines that such means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures may not be safe, the Contractor shall give timely written notice to the Owner and Owner s Representative and shall not proceed with that portion of the Work without further written instructions from the Owner s Representative The General Contractor shall be responsible for scheduling, coordinating and expediting the Work of its Subcontractors and the other Prime Contractors. All Prime Contractors shall cooperate with the General Contractor and comply with the General Contractor s directions with respect to scheduling and coordination of their work with the Work as a whole. The General Contractor shall make monthly reports to the Owner and Owner s Representative regarding the performance of each Prime Contractor. If a Prime Contractor fails or refuses to comply with its obligations under this Section , the Owner s Representative may withhold certification of its application for payment and such failure or refusal shall constitute a basis for termination for cause The General Contractor shall establish and maintain benchmarks and all other grades, lines and levels necessary for the Work, report errors, omissions or inconsistencies to the Owner and Owner s Representative before commencing the Work and, if applicable, review the placement of the building(s) and permanent facilities on the site with the Owner and Owner s Representative after all lines are staked out and before foundation work is started. If a survey reveals any encroachments by the Contractor or its Subcontractors or adjacent properties caused by construction (except for encroachments arising from errors or omissions in the Contract Documents, not reasonably discoverable by the Contractor) such encroachment shall be the sole responsibility of Contractor and Contractor shall correct such encroachment within thirty (30) days after discovery or as soon thereafter as is reasonably possible, at Contractor s sole cost and expense, either by removal of the encroachment and subsequent reconstruction on the Project Site, or agreement with the Owner if the adjacent property is owned by The Trustees of Indiana University or by agreement with any third party owner in a form and substance satisfactory to Owner The Contractor shall be responsible to the Owner for acts and omissions of the Contractor s employees, Subcontractors and their agents and employees, and other persons or entities performing portions of the Work for, or on behalf of, the Contractor or any of its Subcontractors. Contractor shall remove or cause to be removed from the Project any person or entity for whom Contractor is responsible, that the Owner or Owner s Representative determines to be detrimental to the Project Neither Contractor nor its employees, Subcontractors or agents shall engage in sexual harassment in violation of Title VII of the Civil Rights Act of 1964 or discrimination based on sexual orientation in violation of University policy. In addition, Contractor will ensure that Indiana University students, employees and guests are protected from lewd, offensive or harassing conduct by Contractor s employees, Subcontractors and agents. Additional requirements are set forth in Supplemental Conditions, Section The General Contractor shall be responsible for inspection of portions of Work already performed to determine that such portions are in proper condition to receive subsequent Work. 3.4 LABOR AND MATERIALS Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall provide and pay for labor, materials, equipment, tools, construction equipment and machinery, water, heat, utilities, transportation, and other facilities and services necessary for proper execution and completion of the Work, whether temporary or permanent and whether or not incorporated or to be incorporated in the Work. In the event that any Subcontractor, supplier, AIA Document A Copyright 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This draft was produced by AIA software at 15:33:56 on 09/17/2010 under Order No _1 which expires on 09/24/2011, and is not for resale. User Notes: ( ) 16

69 design professional or other entity for whom the Contractor is responsible asserts a verified statement, bond claim, mechanic s lien, if applicable, or other payment claim against the Owner and/or the Project, the Contractor shall promptly resolve said claim and shall defend, indemnify and hold harmless the Owner from all losses, damages or costs incurred in connection therewith, except to the extent the claim arises as a result of the Owner s failure to timely make payments to the Contractor under the terms of this Agreement. Should the Contractor fail to promptly resolve and/or bond over any such claim or lien, the Contractor shall pay the attorneys fees reasonably incurred by the Owner in connection with said claim or lien Except in the case of minor changes in the Work authorized by the Owner s Representative in accordance with Sections or 7.3, the Contractor may make substitutions only with the consent of the Owner, after evaluation by the Owner s Representative and in accordance with a Construction Change Directive The Contractor has based the Contract Price on the exact materials specified in the Contract Documents. The Contract Price is not contingent upon the approval of any substitute or equal product, material or method. If the Contractor proposes, in writing, an alternate product, material, equipment or method then:.1 The product, material or method called for in the Contract Documents is intended to establish the standard of quality and design; however, an equal product, material, equipment or method may be used if approved in writing as equal by the Owner s Representative..2 The terms or approved equal is deemed to be included after all products, materials, equipment or methods described in the Contract Documents..3 Proposed substitutions shall be supported by appropriate certifications or other materials necessary to support the proposed substitution. All costs associated with the evaluation of a proposed substitution (including but not limited to the cost of Additional Services rendered by the Owner s Representative) shall be borne by the Contractor..4 The Owner s Representative shall be the sole judge of equivalency..5 Acceptance of a proposed substitution shall not relieve the Contractor from responsibility for compliance with all the requirements of the Contract Documents. The Contractor shall be completely responsible for it the cost of any changes to other parts of its Work or the work of other Contractors caused by such substitution, including the cost of all necessary design or redesign services..6 The Contract Time shall not be extended and the Contract Price shall not be increased as the result of any substitution The Contractor shall enforce strict discipline and good order among Contractor s employees, Subcontractors and other persons or entities carrying out the Work. The Contractor shall employ or contract with only persons or entities fit and skilled in tasks assigned to them. Contractor shall use its best efforts to minimize the likelihood or impact of any strike, work stoppage or other disturbance..1 If the Work is to be performed by trade unions, Contractor shall make all necessary arrangements to reconcile, without delay, damage or cost to the Owner and without recourse to the Owner s Representative or the Owner, any conflict between the requirements of the Contract Documents and any labor agreements or regulation of any kind in force among members of councils that regulate or designate the work or activities of any particular trade or craft..2 If the progress of the Work is affected by an undue delay in furnishing or installing an item, material or equipment specified in the Contract Documents because of a conflict involving a labor agreement or regulation, the Owner may require that other material or equipment of equal kind and quality be substituted pursuant to a Construction Change Directive Contractor shall not be entitled to any adjustment in the Contract Sum or the Contract Time as the result of work stoppages, slow downs, disputes or strikes which result from or are caused by a wrongful act or unlawful act of AIA Document A Copyright 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This draft was produced by AIA software at 15:33:56 on 09/17/2010 under Order No _1 which expires on 09/24/2011, and is not for resale. User Notes: ( ) 17

70 Contractor, a Subcontractor or other person or entity for whom Contractor is responsible Except in the case of emergency, no substantial field operations shall be performed outside of regular working hours without the prior notifications of and approval by the Owner s Representative and Owner. Contractor will not be entitled to additional compensation for work performed outside of regular working hours except by the prior written approval of the Owner. Additional compensation for overtime work shall be limited to the direct cost of the premium portion of the overtime. 3.5 WARRANTY Contractor warrants to the Owner and Owner s Representative that materials and equipment furnished under the Contract will be of good quality and new unless otherwise required or permitted by the Contract Documents, that for a period of not less than two years the Work will be free from defects not inherent in the quality required or permitted, and that the Work will conform to the requirements of the Contract Documents. Work not conforming to these requirements, including substitutions not properly approved and authorized, shall be considered defective. Contractor s warranty excludes remedy for (i) damage or defect caused by abuse; (ii) modification not executed by the Contractor except modifications performed by the Owner pursuant to Section 2.4; and (iii) improper or insufficient maintenance, improper operation or normal wear and tear or usage. If required by the Owner s Representative, the Contractor shall furnish satisfactory evidence as to the kind and quality of materials and equipment At substantial completion, Contractor shall provide all operations and maintenance manuals to Owner and shall assign to Owner any and all manufacturers warranties relating to materials and labor used in the Work. Contractor shall perform the Work in such a manner as to preserve all manufacturers warranties No warranty of Contractor applicable to workmanship, material, product or equipment shall be voided or in any way diminished because a manufacturer, provider, material, product or equipment was specified or required by the Contract Documents. 3.6 TAXES Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall pay sales, consumer, use and similar taxes for the Work provided by the Contractor that are legally enacted when bids are received or negotiations concluded, whether or not yet effective or merely scheduled to go into effect Indiana Gross Income Tax. In accordance with Indiana Gross Income Tax, as amended, Owner is a withholding agent for the payment of Indiana Gross Income Tax on contracts with Indiana University and is required to withhold the Indiana Gross Income Tax from a Non-Resident Contractor at the current statutory rate, less an annual exemption of $1,000. The term Non-Resident Contractor does not include a contractor that is a corporation organized under the laws of a state other than Indiana but that is licensed, qualified and registered with the Indiana Secretary of State to do business in Indiana Indiana Gross Retail Tax. Materials and equipment purchased by Owner for incorporation into the Work are not subject to the Indiana Gross Retail Tax (sales tax). A general exemption certificate must be filed with the vendor by Contractor and Owner will furnish the certificate to Contractor upon request Federal Excise Tax. Owner is exempt from payment of Federal Excise Tax and will furnish Contractor an exemption certificate upon request. 3.7 PERMITS, FEES, NOTICES AND COMPLIANCE WITH LAWS Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall secure and pay for required permits, fees, licenses, and inspections by government agencies, if any, necessary for proper execution and completion of the Work that are customarily secured after execution of the Contract and legally required at the time bids are received or negotiations concluded. All connection charges, assessments or inspection fees imposed by any governmental agency or utility company are the Contractor s responsibility and shall be included in the Contract Sum The Contractor shall comply with and give notices required by applicable laws, statutes, ordinances, codes, rules and regulations, and lawful orders of public authorities applicable to performance of the Work. AIA Document A Copyright 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This draft was produced by AIA software at 15:33:56 on 09/17/2010 under Order No _1 which expires on 09/24/2011, and is not for resale. User Notes: ( ) 18

71 3.7.3 If the Contractor performs Work knowing it to be contrary to applicable laws, statutes, ordinances, codes, rules and regulations, or lawful orders of public authorities, the Contractor shall assume appropriate responsibility for such Work and shall bear the costs attributable to correction Claims for Concealed or Unknown Conditions. If conditions are encountered at the site which are (1) subsurface or otherwise concealed physical conditions which differ materially from those indicated in the Contract Documents or (2) unknown physical conditions of an unusual nature, which differ materially from those ordinarily found to exist and generally recognized as inherent in construction activities of the character provided for in the Contract Documents, then notice by the observing party shall be given to the other party promptly before conditions are disturbed and in no event later than 7 days after first observance of the conditions. The Owner s Representative will promptly investigate such conditions and, if they differ materially and cause an increase or decrease in the Contractor s cost of, or time required for, performance of any part of the Work, will recommend an equitable adjustment in the Contract Sum or extension of the Contract Time for such number of days as condition prevents Contractor from achieving Substantial Completion within the Contract Time, or both. Any adjustment in the Contract Time shall be in accordance with the provisions of Section If the Owner s Representative determines that the conditions at the site are not materially different from those indicated in the Contract Documents and that no change in the terms of the Contract is justified, the Owner s Representative shall so notify the Owner and Contractor in writing, stating the reasons. Claims by either party in opposition to such determination must be made within 7 days after the Owner s Representative has given notice of the decision. No adjustment in the Contract Time or Contract Sum shall be permitted for concealed or unknown conditions that do not differ materially from conditions indicated in the Contract Documents, or that reasonably should have been discovered by Contractor s prior inspections, tests, reviews, and pre-construction activities, or inspections, tests, reviews and preconstruction activities that the Contractor had the opportunity to perform, or should have performed, in connection with the Work If, in the course of the Work, the Contractor encounters human remains or recognizes the existence of burial markers, archaeological sites or wetlands not indicated in the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall immediately suspend any operations that would affect them and shall notify the Owner and Owner s Representative. Upon receipt of such notice, the Owner shall promptly take any action necessary to obtain governmental authorization required to resume the operations. The Contractor shall continue to suspend such operations until otherwise instructed by the Owner but shall continue with all other operations that do not affect those remains or features. Requests for adjustments in the Contract Sum and Contract Time arising from the existence of such remains or features may be made as provided in Article ALLOWANCES The Contractor shall include in the Contract Sum all allowances stated in the Contract Documents. Items covered by allowances shall be supplied for such amounts and by such persons or entities as the Owner may direct, but the Contractor shall not be required to employ persons or entities to whom the Contractor has reasonable objection Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents,.1 Allowances shall cover the cost to the Contractor of materials and equipment delivered at the site and all required taxes, less applicable trade discounts;.2 Contractor s costs for unloading and handling at the site, labor, installation costs, overhead, profit and other expenses contemplated for stated allowance amounts shall be included in the Contract Sum but not in the allowances; and.3 Whenever costs are more than or less than allowances, the Contract Sum shall be adjusted accordingly by Construction Change Directive. The amount of the Construction Change Directive shall reflect (1) the difference between actual costs and the allowances under Section and (2) changes in Contractor s costs under Section Materials and equipment under an allowance shall be selected by the Owner with reasonable promptness. AIA Document A Copyright 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This draft was produced by AIA software at 15:33:56 on 09/17/2010 under Order No _1 which expires on 09/24/2011, and is not for resale. User Notes: ( ) 19

72 3.9 SUPERINTENDENT The Contractor shall employ a competent superintendent and necessary assistants who shall be in attendance at the Project site during performance of the Work. The superintendent shall represent the Contractor, and communications given to the superintendent shall be as binding as if given to the Contractor The Contractor, as soon as practicable after award of the Contract, shall furnish in writing to the Owner through the Owner s Representative the name and qualifications of a proposed superintendent. The Owner s Representative may reply within 14 days to the Contractor in writing stating (1) whether the Owner or the Owner s Representative has reasonable objection to the proposed superintendent or (2) that the Owner s Representative requires additional time to review. Failure of the Owner s Representative to reply within the 14 day period shall constitute notice of no reasonable objection Contractor s superintendent shall be satisfactory to the Owner s Representative and the Owner and shall not be changed without the prior written consent of the Owner. Contractor s superintendent shall remain on site until completion of the Punch List work CONTRACTOR S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES Within 13 calendar days of the date of the Notice to Proceed, the General Contractor shall prepare and submit for the Owner s and Owner s Representative s information and approval a construction schedule for the Work ( Construction Schedule ) which shall incorporate the Work of other Prime Contractors. The Construction Schedule shall not exceed time limits current under the Contract Documents, shall be revised as required by the Contract Documents or at appropriate intervals as required by the conditions of the Work and Project; shall be coordinated with the entire Project to the extent required by the Contract Documents and shall provide for the expeditious and practicable execution of the Work. The Construction Schedule shall be modified only by a Construction Change Directive executed in accordance with Section 7.2. A submitted Construction Schedule not approved by the Owner and Owner s Representative that exceeds current time limits shall not relieve the Contractor of its obligation to meet those time limits, shall not make the Owner or Owner s Representative liable for any damages incurred by the Contractor as the result of extended performance or failure to meet time limits set forth in the most recent approved Construction Schedule. Similarly, a Construction Schedule showing completion of the Work prior to the date required by the Contract Documents shall not create any rights to early completion of the Work. Each Prime Contractor shall cooperate with the General Contractor in scheduling and performing the Contractor s Work to avoid conflict with, and as to cause no delay in, the work or activities of other Prime Contractors or the construction or operations of the Owner s own forces Each Prime Contractor shall cooperate in the General Contractor s development of the Construction Schedule by providing information as to the timing and sequencing of its Work and operations to conform to the General Contactor s overall Construction Schedule requirements. Each Prime Contractor continuously shall monitor the Construction Schedule so as to be fully familiar with the timing, phasing and sequencing of its Work and other Work on the Project Within 13 calendar days of the date of the Notice to Proceed, the Contractor shall prepare a submittal schedule, promptly after and thereafter as necessary to maintain a current submittal schedule, and shall submit the schedule(s) for the Owner s Representative s approval. The Owner s Representative s approval shall not unreasonably be delayed or withheld. The submittal schedule shall (1) be coordinated with the Contractor s construction schedule, and (2) allow the Owner s Representative reasonable time to review submittals. If the Contractor fails to submit a submittal schedule, the Contractor shall not be entitled to any increase in Contract Sum or extension of Contract Time based on the time required for review of submittals The Contractor shall perform the Work in general accordance with the most recent approved schedules submitted to the Owner and Owner s Representative The Construction Schedule shall be a detailed Critical Path Method (CPM) or other form satisfactory to the Owner and Owner s Representative and shall (i) provide graphic representation of all activities and events that will occur during the performance of the Work; (ii) identify each phase of construction and occupancy; and (iii) show critical Milestone Dates. Upon approval by the Owner, the Construction Schedule shall be deemed a Contract Document. If not approved, the General Contractor promptly shall revise the Construction Schedule in accordance with the requirements of the Owner and the Owner s Representative and resubmit for approval. The General AIA Document A Copyright 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This draft was produced by AIA software at 15:33:56 on 09/17/2010 under Order No _1 which expires on 09/24/2011, and is not for resale. User Notes: ( ) 20

73 Contractor shall monitor the progress of its Work and the Work of the other Prime Contractors for conformance with the Construction Schedule and promptly submit to the Owner and the Owner s Representative a written progress report of any delays or potential delays. Compliance with the Construction Schedule is a condition precedent to receiving payment pursuant to Article 9. The Construction Schedule shall be updated to reflect actual conditions or as requested by the Owner or the Owner s Representative. If any report indicates delays or potential delays, the General Contractor with the cooperation of affected Prime Contractors shall propose a plan to correct the delay, including overtime and/or additional labor. A progress report shall not constitute an adjustment in the Contract Time, any Milestone Date, or the Contract Sum If the Owner determines that (i) the Work has failed to progress or reach the level of completion required by the Contract Documents, and (ii) such failure is the fault of the Contractor, the Owner may, at no cost to the Owner, order the Contractor to take necessary corrective action to expedite the progress of the Work including without limitation (1) additional shifts or overtime; (2) additional manpower, equipment and facilities; and (3) similar measures. If so ordered, such measures shall continue until the Work is in conformance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. Contractor shall not be entitled to an adjustment of the Contract Sum for the cost of such corrective action The Owner may order a postponement or rescheduling of any date or time for the performance of any part of the Work that interferes with the operations of other Contractors, use of the Owner s premises by the Owner, its tenants or invitees. At the Owner s request, Contractor shall schedule or reschedule any portion of the Work which adversely affects other Contractors DOCUMENTS AND SAMPLES AT THE SITE The Contractor shall maintain at the site for the Owner one copy of the Drawings, Specifications, Addenda, Change Orders and other Modifications, in good order and marked currently to indicate field changes and selections made during construction, and one copy of approved Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples and similar required submittals. These shall be available to the Owner s Representative and shall be delivered to the Owner s Representative for submittal to the Owner upon completion of the Work as a record of the Work as constructed If any portion of the Work is to be joined to existing buildings or facilities and the Owner has furnished the Contractor with As-Built Drawings of said existing buildings or facilities in which the Contractor finds errors, omissions or inaccuracies, then Contractor shall, at no additional cost to the Owner, mark the Owner s As-Built Drawings to show the true and actual conditions and locations discovered during performance of the Work As to renovation projects or projects which require the Work to be joined to existing buildings or facilities, if the Owner has furnished to the Contractor As-Built Drawings with respect to such existing buildings or facilities and Contractor finds such As-Built Drawings to contain errors, then Contractor, at no additional cost to the Owner, shall mark such As-Built Drawings to show true and actual conditions and locations as discovered during the course of the Work The Contractor shall keep at the construction site a complete set of full size bluelined prints of the Contract drawings, reproduced at Contractor's expense. During construction, these prints shall be marked to show all deviations in actual construction from the Contract drawings. The color red shall be used to indicate all additions, and green to indicate all deletions. The drawings shall show the following information, but not be limited thereto: (a) the locations and description of any utility lines and other installations of an kind or description known to exist within the construction area (the location includes dimensions to permanent features ); (b) locations and dimensions of any changes within the building or structure, and the accurate location and the dimension of all underground utilities and facilities; (c) correct grade or alignment of roads, structures, and utilities if any changes were made from Contract plans; (d) correct elevations if changes were made in site grading from the Contract plans; (e) changes in details of design or additional information obtained from working drawings specified to be prepared and/or furnished by the Contractor including, but not limited to, fabrication, erection, installation, and placing details, pipe sizes, installation material, dimensions of equipment foundations, etc.; (f) the topography and grades of all drainage installed or effected as part of the Project construction; (g) all changes or modifications from the original design and from the final inspection; and (h) where Contract drawings or specifications allow options, only the option actually used in the construction shall be shown on the As-Built drawings. The option not used shall be deleted. These deviations shall be shown in the same general detail utilized in the Contract drawings. Marking of the prints shall be pursued continuously during construction to keep them up-to-date. This information shall be maintained in a current AIA Document A Copyright 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This draft was produced by AIA software at 15:33:56 on 09/17/2010 under Order No _1 which expires on 09/24/2011, and is not for resale. User Notes: ( ) 21

74 condition at all times until the completion of the Work. The resulting field marked data shall be referred to and marked as "As Built Field Data" and shall be used for no other purpose. They shall be made available for inspection by the Owner's representative whenever requested during construction and shall be jointly inspected for accuracy and completeness by the Owner's representative and responsible representative of the Contractor prior to submission of each monthly pay application. Failure to keep the As Built Field Data (including equipment and place lists) current shall be sufficient justification to withhold a retained percentage from the monthly pay application With regard to as-built, record documents and COBIE construction Data submittals, Contractor shall comply with the requirements set forth in Supplementary Conditions, Section SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA AND SAMPLES Shop Drawings are drawings, diagrams, schedules and other data specially prepared for the Work by the Contractor or a Subcontractor, Sub-subcontractor, manufacturer, supplier or distributor to illustrate some portion of the Work Product Data are illustrations, standard schedules, performance charts, instructions, brochures, diagrams and other information furnished by the Contractor to illustrate materials or equipment for some portion of the Work Samples are physical examples that illustrate materials, equipment or workmanship and establish standards by which the Work will be judged Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples and similar submittals are not Contract Documents. Their purpose is to demonstrate the way by which the Contractor proposes to conform to the information given and the design concept expressed in the Contract Documents for those portions of the Work for which the Contract Documents require submittals. Review by the Owner s Representative is subject to the limitations of Section Informational submittals upon which the Owner s Representative is not expected to take responsive action may be so identified in the Contract Documents. Submittals that are not required by the Contract Documents may be returned by the Owner s Representative without action The Contractor shall review for compliance with the Contract Documents, approve and submit to the Owner s Representative Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples and similar submittals required by the Contract Documents in accordance with the submittal schedule approved by the Owner s Representative or, in the absence of an approved submittal schedule, with reasonable promptness and in such sequence as to cause no delay in the Work or in the activities of the Owner or of separate contractors. Shop Drawings shall show: (i) the job title, names of Contractor or Subcontractor, the date and the location of each item shown; (ii) the design, dimensions, connections, and other details necessary to ensure that they accurately interpret the Drawings and Specifications; and (iii) adjoining work in sufficient detail to show proper connection with the same. Where adjoining work requires Shop Drawings, they shall be coordinated and submitted at the same time so that connections can be properly received By submitting Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples and similar submittals, the Contractor represents to the Owner and Owner s Representative that the Contractor has (1) reviewed and approved them, (2) determined and verified materials, field measurements and field construction criteria related thereto, or will do so and (3) checked and coordinated the information contained within such submittals with the requirements of the Work and of the Contract Documents The Contractor shall perform no portion of the Work for which the Contract Documents require submittal and review of Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples or similar submittals until the respective submittal has been approved by the Owner s Representative The Work shall be in accordance with approved submittals except that the Contractor shall not be relieved of responsibility for deviations from requirements of the Contract Documents by the Owner s Representative s approval of Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples or similar submittals unless the Contractor has specifically informed the Owner s Representative in writing of such deviation at the time of submittal and (1) the Owner s Representative has given written approval to the specific deviation as a minor change in the Work, or (2) a Construction Change Directive in accordance with Section 7.2. has been issued authorizing the deviation. The Contractor shall not be relieved of responsibility for errors or omissions in Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples or similar submittals by the Owner s Representative s approval thereof. AIA Document A Copyright 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This draft was produced by AIA software at 15:33:56 on 09/17/2010 under Order No _1 which expires on 09/24/2011, and is not for resale. User Notes: ( ) 22

75 The Contractor shall direct specific attention, in writing or on resubmitted Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples or similar submittals, to revisions other than those requested by the Owner s Representative on previous submittals. In the absence of such written notice, the Owner s Representative s approval of a resubmission shall not apply to such revisions The Contractor shall not be required to provide professional services which constitute the practice of architecture or engineering unless such services are specifically required by the Contract Documents for a portion of the Work or unless the Contractor needs to provide such services in order to carry out the Contractor s responsibilities for construction means, methods, techniques, sequences and procedures. In no event shall Contractor be required to provide professional services in violation of applicable law. If professional design services or certifications by a design professional related to systems, materials or equipment are specifically required of the Contractor by the Contract Documents ( Performance Specifications ), the Contract Documents shall specify all performance and design criteria that such services must satisfy. If the Contract Documents applicable to Contractor s Work include Performance Specifications, then Contractor agrees that (i) the Performance Specifications are achievable by Contractor; (ii) the Contract Sum includes all design services related to or required for achievement of Performance Specifications; (iii) unless the Owner otherwise agrees, all design services related to the Performance Specifications shall be performed by qualified design professionals selected and paid by Contractor, and in conjunction therewith, Contractor shall (a) submit to Owner and Owner s Representative the names and qualifications of each proposed design professional, (b) make no substitution of such design professional without the prior written consent of Owner and Owner s Representative, (c) if any such design professional is terminated, provide the services of another licensed design professional acceptable to Owner and Owner s Representative; and (iv) unless the Owner otherwise agrees, such design professional shall maintain professional liability insurance in amounts and upon terms and conditions satisfactory to Owner. The signature and seal of such design professional shall appear on all drawings, calculations, specifications, certifications, Shop Drawings and other submittals prepared by design professional. Shop Drawings or other Submittals related to the Work designed or certified by others shall bear design professional s written approval when submitted to the Owner s Representative. Contractor shall provide the design professional providing the certification with full information as to the relevant performance requirements and the conditions under which the materials, systems, or equipment will be expected to operate as a part of the completed Work. This certification shall be based on performance under the operating conditions at the Project Site and as a part of the completed Work. The Owner and the Owner s Representative shall be entitled to rely upon the adequacy, accuracy and completeness of the services, certifications or approvals performed by Contractor s design professionals, provided that the Owner and Owner s Representative have specified to the Contractor all performance and design criteria that such services must satisfy. Owner s Representative s review of such submittals shall be only for the limited purpose of checking for conformance with information given and design concept expressed in the Contract Documents. The Contractor shall not be responsible for the adequacy of the performance or design criteria required by the Contract Documents, but if Contractor discovers or is informed of any error or inadequacy in such criteria then Contractor shall promptly notify the Owner and Owner s Representative in writing The Electrical Contractor shall review, coordinate and approve its Shop Drawings and the Shop Drawings of its Subcontractors. The Mechanical Contractor shall review, coordinate and approve its Shop Drawings, the Shop Drawings of its Subcontractors and the mechanical Shop Drawings with the electrical Shop Drawings. The General Contractor shall review, coordinate and approve its Shop Drawings, the Shop Drawings of its Subcontractors and the Shop Drawings of the other Prime Contractors USE OF SITE The Contractor shall confine operations at the site to areas permitted by law, ordinances, permits and the Contract Documents and shall not unreasonably encumber the site with materials or equipment. The General Contractor shall prepare an overlay sketch of the construction areas indicating thereon spaces assigned for field offices, trailers, storage sheds, field shops and similar facilities and storage of materials for all trades. The sketch shall be submitted to the Owner and the Owner s Representative for their information and approval prior to moving any such equipment and materials onto the Project Site. All such overlying sketches must indicate that the Construction areas shown therein are in compliance with the Americans with Disabilities Act and other applicable law. AIA Document A Copyright 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This draft was produced by AIA software at 15:33:56 on 09/17/2010 under Order No _1 which expires on 09/24/2011, and is not for resale. User Notes: ( ) 23

76 Notwithstanding any designation of site limits or the indication of temporary fences or barricades, provisions of the Contract Documents governing portions or phases of the Work may require that certain operations be carried out beyond such designated limits. Trenching, utility work, site development, landscaping and other such work, if required beyond such designated limits, shall be scheduled in such manner as to cause a minimum of inconvenience, disturbance to or interference with the normal operations of the Owner, abutters, and the public. The Contractor shall obtain the Owner s Representative's prior approval for such operations, prosecute such operations expeditiously and restore the affected area and other areas needed for access to their original condition immediately upon completion of such operation unless the Contract Documents otherwise specify Pumping, draining and control of surface and groundwater shall be carried out so as to avoid endangering any adjacent facility or property, or interrupting, restricting or otherwise infringing, or interfering with the use thereof. All such work shall be performed in compliance with state and federal regulations and any other authority applicable to the site with respect to surface and groundwater and shall be at no additional cost to the Owner The discharge of any substance other than stormwater into any storm drain, inlet, creek, or ditch, including street gutters and curb inlets, is strictly prohibited, unless the substance is only of the following exempt discharges: water line flushing, landscape irrigation, diverted stream flows, rising groundwater infiltration, uncontaminated pumped groundwater, discharges from potable water sources, foundation drains, air conditioning condensation, irrigation water, springs, water from crawl space pumps, footing drains, lawn watering, individual residential car washing, flows from riparian, habitats and wetlands, dechlorinated swimming pool discharges, street wash water, or discharges from firefighting activities. The discharge of sediment-laden runoff waters from construction sites is included as a prohibited discharge. Contractor shall pay Owner for any costs Owner incurs based upon Contractor's noncompliance with this provision, including but not limited to repair or remediation costs, fines or penalties imposed on Owner by any regulating authority, and any fees or costs paid to attorneys or consultants arising out of a prohibited discharged. Failure to comply with this provision may also, at the Owner's sole option, result in Owner's termination of this Contract. In the event that Owner terminates the Contract based on a violation of this provision, Contractor agrees that Owner shall have no further liability to Contractor, with the exception of payment of any monies for work Contractor performed prior to the date of termination Only materials and equipment that are to be used in the Work shall be brought to and stored on the Project Site by the Contractor. Equipment no longer required for the Work shall be promptly removed from the Project Site. Contractor shall be solely responsible for protecting construction materials and equipment stored at the Project Site from weather, theft, damage and all other adversity. The Contractor shall ensure that at all times, the Work is performed in a manner that provides reasonable vehicular and pedestrian access to site of the Work and all adjacent areas. To the fullest extent reasonably possible, the Work shall be performed in such manner that public areas adjacent to the site of the Work shall be free from all debris, building materials, equipment or hazardous conditions Neither Contractor nor any entity for which the Contractor is responsible, shall erect any sign on the Project Site without the Owner's prior written consent. Such consent may be withheld in the Owner's sole discretion Without limiting any other provision of the Contract Documents, Contractor shall use its best efforts to minimize any interference with the occupancy or beneficial use of (i) any areas in buildings adjacent to the site of the Work and (ii) the Project itself in the event of Beneficial Occupancy, as permitted in Section 8.4. Without the Owner's prior written approval, Contractor shall not permit any workers to use any existing facilities at the Project Site, including without limitation, lavatories, toilets, entrances and parking areas other than those designated by the Owner for Contractor's use..1 Without limiting any other provision of the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall comply with all rules and regulations promulgated by the Owner and provided by the Owner at the preconstruction meeting regarding Contractor s use and occupancy of the Project Site during performance of the Work. The Contractor shall give the Owner immediate written notice if Contractor finds compliance with any portion of such rules and regulations to be impractical. Such notice shall set forth the problems caused by such compliance and suggest alternatives through which the same results intended by such rules and regulations can be achieved. The Owner, in its sole discretion, may adopt such alternatives, develop new alternatives, or require compliance with the existing rules and regulations. AIA Document A Copyright 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This draft was produced by AIA software at 15:33:56 on 09/17/2010 under Order No _1 which expires on 09/24/2011, and is not for resale. User Notes: ( ) 24

77 .2 The Contractor shall comply with all insurance requirements and collective bargaining agreements applicable to use and occupancy of the Project Site and the Work In addition to the requirements identified in this Section, Contractor shall comply with the requirements set forth in the Indiana University Project Site Requirements CUTTING AND PATCHING The Contractor shall be responsible for cutting, fitting or patching required to complete the Work or to make its parts fit together properly. All areas requiring cutting, fitting and patching shall be restored to the condition existing prior to the cutting, fitting and patching, unless otherwise required by the Contract Documents The Contractor shall not damage or endanger a portion of the Work or any fully or partially completed construction of the Owner or separate contractors by excavating, cutting, patching or otherwise altering such construction. The Contractor shall not cut or otherwise alter such construction by the Owner or a separate contractor except with written consent of the Owner and such contractor. Such consent shall not be unreasonably withheld. The Contractor shall not unreasonably withhold from the Owner or a separate contractor the Contractor s consent to cutting or otherwise altering the Work. All excavating, cutting and/or patching shall be performed in such a manner as to protect other structures, monuments, brick sidewalks, trees and other landscaping..1 Cutting and patching shall be performed by the proper trades or crafts necessary for the material involved, at the cost of the contractor requiring the cutting and patching..2 Patching shall mean the restoration of a surface or item to its original condition to match the existing adjoining surfaces unless otherwise indicated, noted, detailed or specified. When patching involves painting, special coating, vinyl fabric or other applied finishes, the entire surface affected (i.e. wall or ceiling) shall be refinished as a part of this requirement..3 Cutting and patching includes cleaning and restoration of all surfaces soiled by the cutting and patching work Contractor shall locate and protect from injury utilities of all kinds, either above or below grade, inside or outside of any structure, found in the area affected by its Work. Contractor shall be responsible for all damage caused to such utility by the operation of equipment or delivery of materials or as the direct or indirect result of any of its Work and shall repair all such damage at its expense and as a part of the Work included in the Contract Documents. The Contractor shall not be entitled to any increase in the Contract Sum or the Contract Time on account of such damage to any utility. Upon discovery of any utility by Contractor, such utility shall be indicated on the As Built Drawings CLEANING UP The Contractor shall daily keep the premises and surrounding area free from accumulation of waste materials or rubbish caused by its operations. At completion of the Work, the Contractor shall remove from and about the Project waste materials, rubbish and the Contractor s tools, construction equipment, machinery and surplus materials. Additional requirements are set forth in the Supplementary Conditions, Section The Contractor shall be responsible for keeping the site of the Work and adjacent premises as free from material, debris and rubbish as is practicable, and shall remove same from any portion of the Site, if, in the opinion of the Owner or Owner s Representative, such material debris or rubbish constitutes a health and safety issue, nuisance or is objectionable in any way to the Owner. The Contractor further agrees to remove all machinery, materials implements, barricades, staging, false work, debris and rubbish connected with or caused by its Work immediately upon completion of the Work and to clean all structures and Work under the Contract Documents to the satisfaction the Owner and the Owner s Representative and to leave the premises in perfect condition in so far as affected by the Work hereunder. With respect to renovation projects, the Contractor acknowledges that Owner in such cases, may continue to occupy and must maintain continuous operations in the building in which the Work is located. In such cases, it is critical that Owner's operations not suffer any significant interference, including, without limitation, any interruption in utilities or unreasonable noise, dust, odor, vibration or hazardous condition. The Contractor shall perform its Work and limit its use of the Project Site in such manner as to minimize any AIA Document A Copyright 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This draft was produced by AIA software at 15:33:56 on 09/17/2010 under Order No _1 which expires on 09/24/2011, and is not for resale. User Notes: ( ) 25

78 interference with Owner's occupancy and operations in the building consistent with applicable building rules and regulations Dust control shall be effectively maintained at all times whether or not specifically ordered by the Owner s Representative or Owner. The Contractor shall provide and apply continuous internal and external dust control, including holidays and weekends, as required, to prevent the spread of dust and to avoid the creation of a nuisance at the work site or in the surrounding areas as a result of construction activities. Internal dust control shall be accomplished by barrier, vacuum, filters or other approved methods and equipment. External dust control shall be by sprinkler water or other approved means, except that no chemicals or oil shall be used. Quantities and equipment shall be sufficient to control dust effectively. When weather conditions warrant, external sprinkling equipment shall be on hand and immediately available at all times. Owner s Representative and Owner shall have the authority to order dust control Work whenever required in its opinion; however, dust control shall be effectively maintained at all times whether or not specifically ordered by the Owner s Representative and Owner. Contractor shall also take proper measures at no additional cost to Owner to prevent tracking mud into the interior of buildings or onto public streets or roads or property of third persons. Such measures shall include but are not limited to covering muddy areas on the Site with clean dry sand. All ingress/egress from the Site shall be maintained in a dry condition, and any mud tracked onto the public streets or roads or any other areas of the building or property of third persons shall be immediately removed and the affected area cleaned. Owner s Representative or Owner may order such work at any time that conditions warrant The General Contractor shall be ultimately responsible for all daily cleanup of construction materials and debris and building dust control. Cleanup shall include removal of materials and debris from the building and placement in a debris box or other disposal. Special consideration is required for the immediate removal and/or protection of material or debris which pose a hazard to Owner's students, employees, invitees, fixtures and floor coverings (i.e. hazardous materials, broken glass, sawdust, materials that pose a tripping hazard, etc.), including utilization of protective coverings for newly installed floor covering and fixtures. Certain construction activities, including but not limited to drywall sanding, spray painting, sawing, etc., create dust which must be controlled to protect Owner's students, employees, invitees, equipment, facilities and property. Each Prime Contractor shall take steps as necessary to control the dust created by these operations, including but not limited to Visquine, ventilation, or a solid construction barrier. In addition to the requirements identified in this Section, Contractor shall comply with the requirements regarding airborne contaminants set forth in the Project Specifications If the General Contractor fails to clean up as required by the Contract Documents, the Owner may do so and the cost thereof shall be charged to the General Contractor. When reasonably necessary, Owner may exercise its right to clean up during evening, weekend and holiday hours and any premium time charges associated therewith will be charged to the General Contractor ACCESS TO WORK The Contractor shall provide the Owner and Owner s Representative access to the Work in preparation and progress wherever located. If Work is being performed at locations other than the Project Site, Contractor shall notify the Owner s Representative of such locations, and the time such work will be ready for observation prior to its delivery to the Project Site ROYALTIES, PATENTS AND COPYRIGHTS The Contractor shall pay all royalties and license fees. The Contractor shall defend suits or claims for infringement of copyrights and patent rights and shall hold the Owner and Owner s Representative harmless from loss on account thereof, but shall not be responsible for such defense or loss when a particular design, process or product of a particular manufacturer or manufacturers is required by the Contract Documents, or where the copyright violations are contained in Drawings, Specifications or other documents prepared by the Owner or Owner s Representative. However, if the Contractor has reason to believe that the required design, process or product is an infringement of a copyright or a patent, the Contractor shall be responsible for such loss unless such information is promptly furnished to the Owner s Representative INDEMNIFICATION To the fullest extent permitted by law the Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless the Owner, Owner s Representative, Owner s Representative s consultants, and agents and employees of any of them from and against claims, damages, losses and expenses, including but not limited to reasonable attorneys fees, arising out of or AIA Document A Copyright 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This draft was produced by AIA software at 15:33:56 on 09/17/2010 under Order No _1 which expires on 09/24/2011, and is not for resale. User Notes: ( ) 26

79 resulting from performance of the Work, provided that such claim, damage, loss or expense is attributable to bodily injury, sickness, disease or death, or injury to or destruction of tangible property (other than the Work itself) but only to the extent caused by the negligent acts or omissions of the Contractor, a Subcontractor, anyone directly or indirectly employed by them or anyone for whose acts they may be liable, regardless of whether or not such claim, damage, loss or expense is caused in part by a party indemnified hereunder. Such obligation shall not be construed to negate, abridge, or reduce other rights or obligations of indemnity which would otherwise exist as to a party or person described in this Section In claims against any person or entity indemnified under this Section 3.18 by an employee of the Contractor, a Subcontractor, anyone directly or indirectly employed by them or anyone for whose acts they may be liable, the indemnification obligation under Section shall not be limited by a limitation on amount or type of damages, compensation or benefits payable by or for the Contractor or a Subcontractor under workers compensation acts, disability benefit acts or other employee benefit acts The Contractor s indemnity obligations under this Section 3.18 specifically include, without limitation, all fines, penalties, damages, liability, cost, expenses (including without limitation reasonable attorneys fees), and punitive damages, if any, arising out of, or in connection with any (i) violation of or failure to comply with any law, statute, ordinance, rule, regulation, code, or requirement of a public authority that bears upon the performance of the Work by the Contractor, a Subcontractor or any person or entity for whom either is responsible, (ii) means, methods, procedures, techniques, or sequences of execution or performance of the Work, and (iii) failure to secure and pay for permits, fees, approvals, licenses, and inspections as required under the Contract Documents, or any violation of any permit or other approval of a public authority applicable to the Work by the Contractor, a subcontractor, or any person or entity for whom either is responsible The Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless all of the indemnitees from and against any costs and expenses (including reasonable attorneys fees) incurred by any of the Indemnitees in enforcing any of the Contractor s defense, indemnity, and hold harmless obligations under this Contract Whenever the Contract Documents entitle the Owner to recover its reasonable attorneys fees, the term "reasonable attorneys fees" shall inc1ude, without limitation, the following related expenses paid or incurred by the Owner: (i) attorneys fees; (ii) paralegal fees; (iii) documentary evidence and expert witness costs; (iv) court reporter charges; (v) filing fees, recording fees, copying charges and the like; and (vi) travel, lodging and meal expense. ARTICLE 4 OWNER S REPRESENTATIVE 4.1 GENERAL The Owner shall retain an architect or engineer lawfully licensed to practice architecture or engineering or an entity lawfully practicing architecture or engineering in the jurisdiction where the Project is located. That person or entity is identified as the Owner s Representative in the Agreement and is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number. To the extent that the Project does not involve the practice of architecture or engineering but instead involves the practice of another licensed profession, the term Owner s Representative, as used herein, shall refer to such other licensed design professional Duties, responsibilities and limitations of authority of the Owner s Representative as set forth in the Contract Documents shall not be restricted, modified or extended without written consent of the Owner, Contractor and Owner s Representative. Consent shall not be unreasonably withheld If the employment of the Owner s Representative is terminated, the Owner shall employ a successor Owner s Representative, as defined above in Section 4.1.1, whose status under the Contract Documents shall be that of the Owner s Representative. 4.2 ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT The Owner s Representative will provide administration of the Contract as described in the Contract Documents during construction until the date the Owner s Representative issues the final Certificate for Payment, and, with the Owner s concurrence, from time to time during the two-year period for correction of the Work. The Owner s Representative will have authority to act on behalf of the Owner only to the extent provided in the Contract Documents. AIA Document A Copyright 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This draft was produced by AIA software at 15:33:56 on 09/17/2010 under Order No _1 which expires on 09/24/2011, and is not for resale. User Notes: ( ) 27

80 4.2.2 The Owner s Representative will visit the site at intervals appropriate to the stage of construction, or as otherwise agreed with the Owner, to become generally familiar with the progress and quality of the portion of the Work completed, and to determine in general if the Work observed is being performed in a manner indicating that the Work, when fully completed, will be in accordance with the Contract Documents. However, the Owner s Representative will not be required to make exhaustive or continuous on-site inspections to check the quality or quantity of the Work. The Owner s Representative will not have control over, charge of, or responsibility for, the construction means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures, or for the safety precautions and programs in connection with the Work, since these are solely the Contractor s rights and responsibilities under the Contract Documents, except as provided in Section On the basis of the site visits, the Owner s Representative will keep the Owner reasonably informed about the progress and quality of the portion of the Work completed, and report to the Owner (1) known deviations from the Contract Documents and from the most recent construction schedule submitted by the Contractor, and (2) defects and deficiencies observed in the Work. The Owner s Representative will not be responsible for the Contractor s failure to perform the Work in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. The Owner s Representative will not have control over or charge of and will not be responsible for acts or omissions of the Contractor, Subcontractors, or their agents or employees, or any other persons or entities performing portions of the Work COMMUNICATIONS FACILITATING CONTRACT ADMINISTRATION Except as otherwise provided in the Contract Documents or when direct communications have been specially authorized, the Owner and Contractor shall endeavor to communicate with each other through the Owner s Representative about matters arising out of or relating to the Contract. Communications by and with the Owner s Representative s consultants shall be through the Owner s Representative. Communications by and with Subcontractors and material suppliers shall be through the Contractor. Communications by and with separate contractors shall be through the Owner Based on the Owner s Representative s evaluations of the Contractor s Applications for Payment, the Owner s Representative will review and certify the amounts due the Contractor and will issue Certificates for Payment in such amounts The Owner s Representative has authority to reject Work that does not conform to the Contract Documents. Whenever the Owner s Representative considers it necessary or advisable, the Owner s Representative will have authority to require inspection or testing of the Work in accordance with Sections and , whether or not such Work is fabricated, installed or completed. However, neither this authority of the Owner s Representative nor a decision made in good faith either to exercise or not to exercise such authority shall give rise to a duty or responsibility of the Owner s Representative to the Contractor, Subcontractors, material and equipment suppliers, their agents or employees, or other persons or entities performing portions of the Work The Owner s Representative will review and approve, or take other appropriate action upon, the Contractor s submittals such as Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples, but only for the limited purpose of checking for conformance with information given and the design concept expressed in the Contract Documents. The Owner s Representative s action will be taken in accordance with the submittal schedule approved by the Owner s Representative or, in the absence of an approved submittal schedule, with reasonable promptness while allowing sufficient time in the Owner s Representative s professional judgment to permit adequate review. Review of such submittals is not conducted for the purpose of determining the accuracy and completeness of other details such as dimensions and quantities, or for substantiating instructions for installation or performance of equipment or systems, all of which remain the responsibility of the Contractor as required by the Contract Documents. The Owner s Representative s review of the Contractor s submittals shall not relieve the Contractor of the obligations under Sections 3.3, 3.5 and The Owner s Representative s review shall not constitute approval of safety precautions or, unless otherwise specifically stated by the Owner s Representative, of any construction means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures. The Owner s Representative s approval of a specific item shall not indicate approval of an assembly of which the item is a component The Owner s Representative will prepare Construction Change Directives and may authorize minor changes in the Work as provided in Section 7.3. The Owner s Representative will investigate and make determinations and recommendations regarding concealed and unknown conditions as provided in Section AIA Document A Copyright 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This draft was produced by AIA software at 15:33:56 on 09/17/2010 under Order No _1 which expires on 09/24/2011, and is not for resale. User Notes: ( ) 28

81 4.2.9 The Owner s Representative will conduct inspections to determine the date or dates of Substantial Completion and the date of final completion, issue Certificates of Substantial Completion pursuant to Section 9.8, receive and forward to the Owner, for the Owner s review and records, written warranties and related documents required by the Contract and assembled by the Contractor; and issue a final Certificate for Payment pursuant to Section If the Owner and Owner s Representative agree, the Owner s Representative will provide one or more project representatives to assist in carrying out the Owner s Representative s responsibilities at the site. The duties, responsibilities and limitations of authority of such project representatives shall be as set forth in an exhibit to be incorporated in the Contract Documents The Owner s Representative will interpret and decide matters concerning performance under, and requirements of, the Contract Documents on written request of either the Owner or Contractor. The Owner s Representative s response to such requests will be made in writing within any time limits agreed upon or otherwise with reasonable promptness Interpretations and decisions of the Owner s Representative shall be made in writing or in the form of drawings and will be consistent with the intent of and reasonably inferable from the Contract Documents. When making such interpretations and decisions, the Owner s Representative will endeavor to secure faithful performance by both Owner and Contactor and will show partiality to neither The Owner s Representative s decisions on matters relating to aesthetic effect will be final if consistent with the intent expressed in the Contract Documents The Owner s Representative will review and respond to requests for information about the Contract Documents. The Owner s Representative s response to such requests will be made in writing within any time limits agreed upon or otherwise with reasonable promptness. If appropriate, the Owner s Representative will prepare and issue supplemental Drawings and Specifications in response to the requests for information. ARTICLE 5 SUBCONTRACTORS 5.1 DEFINITIONS A Subcontractor is a person or entity who has a direct contract with the Contractor to perform a portion of the Work at the site. The term Subcontractor is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number and means a Subcontractor or an authorized representative of the Subcontractor. The term Subcontractor does not include a separate contractor or subcontractors of a separate contractor A Sub-subcontractor is a person or entity who has a direct or indirect contract with a Subcontractor to perform a portion of the Work at the site. The term Sub-subcontractor is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number and means a Sub-subcontractor or an authorized representative of the Subsubcontractor. 5.2 AWARD OF SUBCONTRACTS AND OTHER CONTRACTS FOR PORTIONS OF THE WORK As part of its bid documents and where required by the bid form, Contractor shall furnish to the Owner and Owner s Representative in writing the name and trade for each proposed Subcontractor of all persons or entities proposed as manufacturers of the products identified in the Specifications (including those who are to furnish materials or equipment fabricated to a special design) and, where applicable, the name of the installing Subcontractor. If this information is not required to be provided on the bid date, then it shall be furnished to Owner as otherwise required by the Contract Documents. Contractor shall not propose or utilize a Subcontractor who has been disqualified under existing federal laws and regulations from participating in federally-assisted construction projects. The Contractor shall contract only with a Subcontractor approved in writing by the Owner and, after bid opening, substitution of any Subcontractor identified in the bid shall be made only by way of the Construction Change Directive process set forth in Article 7 of this Agreement. Additionally, the Contractor may not adjust its bid price, and may not seek a refund of its bid bond, based upon Owner's rejection of any Subcontractor or of a proposed substitution.. The Construction Manager may reply within 14 days to the Contractor in writing stating (1) whether the Owner, the Construction Manager or the Owner s Representative has reasonable objection to any such proposed person or entity or, (2) that the Construction Manager, Owner s Representative or Owner requires AIA Document A Copyright 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This draft was produced by AIA software at 15:33:56 on 09/17/2010 under Order No _1 which expires on 09/24/2011, and is not for resale. User Notes: ( ) 29

82 additional time for review. Failure of the Construction Manager, Owner, or Owner s Representative to reply within the 14-day period shall constitute notice of no reasonable objection Contractor shall not contract with any Subcontractor without the Owner s and Owner s Representative s prior written approval, which shall not be granted until Contractor submits a written statement concerning the proposed award to the Subcontractor that contains such information as the Owner may require. The Owner shall issue a written approval or rejection of each proposed award within ten (10) days of the Bid Opening. The Contractor shall not contract with a proposed person or entity whom the Owner and/or Owner s Representative has timely rejected If the Owner or Owner s Representative has reasonable objection to a person or entity proposed by the Contractor, the Contractor shall propose another to whom the Owner or Owner s Representative has no reasonable objection. In the event that the Contractor is required to substitute a Subcontractor during the course of the Work, such substitution shall be made only by way of the Construction Change Directive process set forth in Article 7 of this Agreement. The Contractor may not adjust its price based upon such a substitution or upon Owner s rejection of any proposed substitute Subcontractor The Contractor shall not substitute a Subcontractor, person or entity previously selected if the Owner or Owner s Representative makes reasonable objection to such substitution. 5.3 SUBCONTRACTUAL RELATIONS By written agreement, the Contractor shall require each Subcontractor, to the extent of the Work to be performed by the Subcontractor, to be bound to the Contractor by the terms of the Contract Documents, including but not limited to the process set forth in Section by which profit and overhead on Construction Change Directives is calculated, and to assume toward the Contractor all the obligations and responsibilities, including the responsibility for safety of the Subcontractor s Work, which the Contractor, by these Contract Documents, assumes toward the Owner and Owner s Representative. Each subcontract agreement shall preserve and protect the rights of the Owner and Owner s Representative with respect to the Work to be performed by the Subcontractor so that the subcontracting thereof will not prejudice such rights. Where appropriate, the Contractor will make available to each proposed Subcontractor, prior to the execution of the subcontract agreement, copies of the Contract Documents to which the Subcontractor will be bound. Subcontractors will similarly make copies of applicable portions of such documents available to their respective proposed Sub-subcontractors. The Contract Documents shall not create, or be construed to create, any contractual relationship between any Subcontractor and the Owner. 5.4 CONTINGENT ASSIGNMENT OF SUBCONTRACTS Each subcontract agreement for a portion of the Work is conditionally assigned by the Contractor to the Owner, provided that.1 assignment is effective only after termination of the Contract by the Owner for cause pursuant to Section 14.2 and only for those subcontract agreements that the Owner accepts by notifying the Subcontractor and Contractor in writing; and.2 assignment is subject to the prior rights of the surety, if any, obligated under bond relating to the Contract. When the Owner accepts the assignment of a subcontract agreement, the Owner assumes the Contractor s rights and obligations under the subcontract If a Subcontractor s Work has been suspended for more than thirty (30) days after termination of the Agreement by the Owner and the Owner accepts assignment of such Subcontract, the Subcontractor s compensation shall be equitably adjusted for any increase in direct costs incurred by such Subcontractor as a result of the suspension. In no event shall such adjustment include any consequential damages as that term is used in Section Upon such assignment to the Owner under this Section 5.4, the Owner may further assign the subcontract to a successor contractor or other entity. If the Owner assigns the subcontract to a successor contractor or other entity, the Owner shall nevertheless remain legally responsible for all of the successor contractor s obligations under the subcontract, unless otherwise agreed in writing. AIA Document A Copyright 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This draft was produced by AIA software at 15:33:56 on 09/17/2010 under Order No _1 which expires on 09/24/2011, and is not for resale. User Notes: ( ) 30

83 ARTICLE 6 CONSTRUCTION BY OWNER OR BY SEPARATE CONTRACTORS 6.1 OWNER S RIGHT TO PERFORM CONSTRUCTION AND TO AWARD SEPARATE CONTRACTS The Owner reserves the right to perform construction or operations related to the Project with the Owner s own forces, and to award separate contracts in connection with other portions of the Project or other construction or operations on the site under Conditions of the Contract identical or substantially similar to these including those portions related to insurance and waiver of subrogation. If the Contractor claims that delay or additional cost is involved because of such action by the Owner, the Contractor shall make such Claim as provided in Article When separate contracts are awarded for different portions of the Project or other construction or operations on the site, the term Contractor in the Contract Documents in each case shall mean the Contractor who executes each separate Owner-Contractor Agreement Except for Prime Contractors as provided in Sections and 6.1.6, the Owner shall provide for coordination of the activities of the Owner s own forces and of each separate contractor with the Work of the Contractor, who shall cooperate with them. The Contractor shall participate with other separate contractors and the Owner in reviewing their construction schedules. The Contractor shall make any revisions to the construction schedule deemed necessary after a joint review and mutual agreement. The construction schedules shall then constitute the schedules to be used by the Contractor, separate contractors and the Owner until subsequently revised Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, when the Owner performs construction or operations related to the Project with the Owner s own forces, the Owner shall be deemed to be subject to the same obligations and to have the same rights that apply to the Contractor under the Conditions of the Contract, including, without excluding others, those stated in Article 3, this Article 6 and Articles 10, 11 and The Contractor accepts assignment of, and liability for, all purchase orders and other agreements for procurement of materials and equipment that are identified as part of the Contract Documents. The Contractor shall be responsible for any such purchased items as if the Contractor were the original purchaser. The Contract sum includes, without limitation, all costs and expenses in connection with delivery, storage, insurance, installation, and testing of items covered in any assigned purchase orders or agreements. Unless the Contract Documents specifically provide otherwise, all warranty and correction of the Work obligations included in the Contract Documents shall apply to any pre-purchased items The Owner may elect to assign certain contractors to a single Prime Contractor or for coordination and scheduling purposes only. Such Prime Contractor as to such assigned contractors, shall be responsible, in accordance with Sections and , for all Project scheduling, construction, coordination, general superintendence and for reviewing and approving the assigned contractor s periodic applications for payment. The Owner shall make periodic payments directly to each assigned contractor after approval of the Prime Contractor, the Owner and the Owner s Representative. Approval of assigned contractor s periodic applications for payment shall not be unreasonably withheld by the Prime Contractor. 6.2 MUTUAL RESPONSIBILITY The Contractor shall afford the Owner and separate contractors reasonable opportunity for introduction and storage of their materials and equipment and performance of their activities, and shall connect and coordinate the Contractor s construction and operations with theirs as required by the Contract Documents If part of the Contractor s Work depends for proper execution or results upon construction or operations by the Owner or a separate contractor, the Contractor shall, prior to proceeding with that portion of the Work, promptly report to the Owner s Representative apparent discrepancies or defects in such other construction that would render it unsuitable for such proper execution and results. Failure of the Contractor so to report shall constitute an acknowledgment that the Owner s or separate contractor s completed or partially completed construction is fit and proper to receive the Contractor s Work, except as to defects not then reasonably discoverable The Contractor shall reimburse the Owner for costs the Owner incurs that are payable to a separate contractor because of the Contractor s delays, improperly timed activities or defective construction. The Owner shall be responsible to the Contractor for costs the Contractor incurs because of a separate contractor s damage to the Work or defective construction. AIA Document A Copyright 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This draft was produced by AIA software at 15:33:56 on 09/17/2010 under Order No _1 which expires on 09/24/2011, and is not for resale. User Notes: ( ) 31

84 6.2.4 The Contractor shall promptly remedy damage the Contractor wrongfully causes to completed or partially completed construction or to property of the Owner or separate contractors as provided in Section The Owner and each separate contractor shall have the same responsibilities for cutting and patching as are described for the Contractor in Section OWNER S RIGHT TO CLEAN UP If a dispute arises among the Contractor, separate contractors and the Owner as to the responsibility under their respective contracts for maintaining the premises and surrounding area free from waste materials and rubbish, the Owner may clean up and the Owner s Representative will allocate the cost among those responsible. ARTICLE 7 CHANGES IN THE WORK 7.1 GENERAL Changes in the Work may be accomplished after the Notice to Proceed is issued, and without invalidating the Contract, by Construction Change Directive or order for a minor change in the Work, subject to the limitations stated in this Article 7 and elsewhere in the Contract Documents When a contemplated change in the Work may affect the Contract Sum or the Contract Time, the Owner s Representative will issue a Construction Change Directive detailing the work involved in such proposed change. The Contractor shall promptly, but in no case longer than five (5) working days after receipt of such Construction Change Directive, issue a reply or Change Quotation itemizing the cost of such Construction Change Directive and any projected enlargement of the Contract Time or modification of the Project Schedule. Authorization to proceed with the Work shall be in accordance with To expedite the review and evaluation of Contractor s Change Quotations, all Change Quotations (except those so minor that their propriety is obvious on their face) shall include a complete itemization of costs showing quantities, with unit prices of labor and materials for each such quantity, including items furnished by Subcontractors. Where major cost items are provided by Subcontractors, such items also shall be itemized and a copy of the Subcontractor s quotations, itemized as indicated above, shall be included in the Construction Change Directive. In no case shall a change involving more than Three Thousand Dollars ($3,000) be approved without such itemization A Construction Change Directive requires agreement among the Owner, Contractor and Owner s Representative; an order for a minor change in the Work may be issued by the Owner s Representative alone Changes in the Work shall be performed under applicable provisions of the Contract Documents. The Contractor shall proceed promptly, unless otherwise provided in the Construction Change Directive or order for a minor change in the Work. Except as provided in Section 9.7.2, a change in the Contract Sum or Contract Time shall be accomplished only by Construction Change Directive. No course of conduct or dealing between the parties, no expressed or implied acceptance of alterations or additions to the Work, and no claim that Owner has been unjustly enriched by any alteration of or addition to the Work, whether or not there is any unjust enrichment to the Work, shall be the basis of any claim for an increase in the Contract Sum or for a change in the Contract Time in the absence of a Construction Change Directive. 7.2 CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVES A Construction Change Directive is a written instrument prepared by the Owner s Representative and signed by the Owner, Contractor and Owner s Representative, directing a change in the Work including agreement on adjustment, if any, in the scope of the work, Contract Sum or Contract Time, or both. The Owner may by Construction Change Directive, without invalidating the Contract, order changes in the Work within the general scope of the Contract consisting of additions, deletions or other revisions, the Contract Sum and Contract Time being adjusted accordingly If the Construction Change Directive provides for an adjustment to the Contract Sum, the adjustment shall be based on one of the following methods:.1 Mutual acceptance of a lump sum properly itemized and supported by sufficient substantiating data to permit evaluation; AIA Document A Copyright 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This draft was produced by AIA software at 15:33:56 on 09/17/2010 under Order No _1 which expires on 09/24/2011, and is not for resale. User Notes: ( ) 32

85 .2 Unit prices stated in the Contract Documents or subsequently agreed upon;.3 Cost to be determined in a manner agreed upon by the parties in a mutually acceptable fixed or percentage fee;.4 time and materials; or.5 As provided in Section Upon receipt of written confirmation of a Construction Change Directive, the Contractor shall promptly proceed with the change in the Work. An from Owner s Vice President, Assistant Vice President or Deputy Vice President for Capital Planning and Facilities shall constitute a written confirmation for purposes of this Section A Construction Change Directive signed by the Contractor indicates the Contractor s agreement therewith, including adjustment in Contract Sum and Contract Time or the method for determining them. Such agreement shall be effective immediately Upon Agreement of the Parties, the Owner s Representative shall determine the method and the adjustment on the basis of reasonable expenditures and savings of those performing the Work attributable to the change, including, in case of an increase in the Contract Sum, an amount for overhead and profit as set forth in the Agreement, or if no such amount is set forth in the Agreement, a reasonable amount. In such case, and also in cases where the cost adjustment is undertaken pursuant to Section 7.2.2, the Contractor shall keep and present, in such form as the Owner s Representative may prescribe, an itemized accounting together with appropriate supporting data. Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, costs for the purposes of this Section shall be limited to the following:.1 Costs of labor calculated on the Common Construction Wage set for this Project;.2 Costs of materials, supplies and equipment, including cost of transportation, whether incorporated or consumed;.3 Rental costs of machinery and equipment, exclusive of hand tools, whether rented from the Contractor or others. In accordance with Section 5.3, Subcontractors shall also be required to calculate cost adjustments attributable to the change in this manner The amount of credit to be allowed by the Contractor to the Owner for a deletion or change that results in a net decrease in the Contract Sum shall be actual net cost as confirmed by the Owner s Representative plus an amount equal to ten percent (10%) of such net cost to reflect Contractor s reduced overhead costs. When both additions and credits covering related Work or substitutions are involved in a change, the allowance for overhead and profit shall be figured on the basis of net increase, if any, with respect to that change The Owner shall not be obligated to make any partial payment until a Construction Change Directive has been fully executed The amount of credit to be allowed by the Contractor to the Owner for a deletion or change that results in a net decrease in the Contract Sum shall be actual net cost as confirmed by the Owner s Representative. When both additions and credits covering related Work or substitutions are involved in a change, the allowance for overhead and profit shall be figured on the basis of net increase, if any, with respect to that change. 7.3 MINOR CHANGES IN THE WORK The Owner s Representative will have authority to order minor changes in the Work not involving adjustment in the Contract Sum or extension of the Contract Time and not inconsistent with the intent of the Contract Documents. Such changes shall be effected by written order by the Owner s Representative and shall be binding on the Owner and Contractor. The Contractor shall carry out such written orders promptly. AIA Document A Copyright 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This draft was produced by AIA software at 15:33:56 on 09/17/2010 under Order No _1 which expires on 09/24/2011, and is not for resale. User Notes: ( ) 33

86 7.4 AGREED OVERHEAD AND PROFIT RATE For any adjustments in the Contract Sum, Contractor shall receive as payment for overhead and profit only the following percentages of costs attributable to the change in the work:.1 Costs of the 1abor payroll, set for this project as of the Notice to Proceed (base wage, plus fringe benefits), not to exceed the Common Construction Wage set for this Project/region, plus twentyfive percent (25%) of the cost of the labor payroll; plus Costs of the material, including rentals, plus ten percent (10%) of the material cost..2 For Work by Subcontractors, or by a lower tier Contractor with Owner s consent, the Contractor performing the Work shall be permitted to mark up its costs in accordance with Section and each succeeding Contractor, including the Prime Contractor, shall add five percent (5%) When specifically authorized by the Owner and not as an Extraordinary Measure, overtime shall be paid by Owner on the basis of premium costs only, plus the cost of insurance and taxes based on the premium cost. Overhead and profit will not be paid by the Owner for overtime. ARTICLE 8 TIME 8.1 DEFINITIONS Unless otherwise provided, Contract Time is the period of time, including authorized adjustments, allotted in the Contract Documents for Substantial Completion of the Work The date of commencement of the Work shall be no later than thirteen (13) calendar days after the date of the Notice to Proceed; provided, however, that Contractor cannot be on the Project site until the insurance requirements set forth in Section 11 and Supplementary Conditions Section 9 are met. No extension of time or adjustment to the Completion Date shall be allowed based on Contractor s failure to timely submit the required insurance documentation The date of Substantial Completion is the date certified by the Owner s Representative in accordance with Section The term day as used in the Contract Documents shall mean calendar day unless otherwise specifically defined. 8.2 PROGRESS AND COMPLETION Time limits stated in the Contract Documents are of the essence of the Contract. By executing the Agreement, the Contractor confirms that the Contract Time is a reasonable period for performing the Work Except by written agreement or written instruction of the Owner, Contractor shall not commence operation on the site or elsewhere prior to the commencement date of the effective date of insurance required by Article 11. The date of commencement of the Work shall not be changed by the effective date of such insurance Upon receipt of a written Notice to Proceed, the Contractor shall proceed expeditiously with adequate forces and shall achieve Substantial Completion within the Contract Time The number of days for Project duration as stated in the Contractor s bid shall be noted in the Notice to Proceed and shall be used to calculate the Completion Date on the initial Project Schedule. The Completion Date shall not thereafter be changed except by way of a Construction Change Directive in accordance with Article DELAYS AND EXTENSIONS OF TIME Claims relating to time shall be made in accordance with applicable provisions of Article If the Contractor is delayed at any time in the commencement or progress of the Work by a wrongful act or neglect of the Owner or Owner s Representative, or an employee of either, or of a separate contractor employed by the Owner, or by changes ordered in the Work or by labor disputes not caused by wrongful or unlawful acts of Contractor, fire, unusual delay in deliveries, unavoidable casualties or other causes beyond the Contractor s AIA Document A Copyright 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This draft was produced by AIA software at 15:33:56 on 09/17/2010 under Order No _1 which expires on 09/24/2011, and is not for resale. User Notes: ( ) 34

87 reasonable control, or by delay authorized by the Owner, or by such other causes which Owner s Representative determines may justify delay ( Excusable Delay ), then the Contract Time shall be extended for a number of days equal to the duration of the Excusable Delay, provided the Work is not, was not, or would not have been delayed by a cause for which the Contractor is responsible ( Concurrent Delay ). Extensions of the Contract Time will be permitted only to the extent that the duration of the Excusable Delay could not have been limited, avoided or mitigated Except as provided in Sections and , an extension of time for Excusable Delay, as defined above, shall be the Contractor s exclusive remedy in the event of such a delay, no matter how or by whom caused. Contractor further specifically acknowledges that it shall have no claim for increase in contract price or damages because of any delays whatsoever to all or any part of the Work whether foreseen or unforeseen, and whether caused by any person s hindrance or active interference Acceleration: In the event of an Excusable Delay which extends Schedule Completion Dates, the Owner, in its sole discretion, in lieu of granting an enlargement of the Contract Time, may direct Contractor to accelerate its performance to meet the Construction Schedule, in which case the Owner shall direct the Owner s Representative to issue a Construction Change Directive to increase the Contract Sum to include the additional costs of the Work, if any, reasonably incurred by Contractor to meet the Construction Schedule. Upon request, Contractor shall provide Owner with the options available for acceleration, including the costs and impact on the Construction Schedule. In presenting such costs, Contractor shall credit Owner for those costs which would not be incurred as the result of the Owner's willingness to invest extra funds to compress the Construction Schedule. Owner shall be responsible only for the actual premium costs of acceleration specifically authorized in advance for critical activity in order to offset an Excused Delay. Owner shall not be responsible for premium costs which do not accelerate critical path activities. 8.4 BENEFICIAL OCCUPANCY The Owner shall have the privilege of Beneficial Occupancy and the use and benefit of designated areas, subdivisions or portions of the Work prior to completion and acceptance of the entire Work, provided that, in the opinion of the Owner s Representative, such occupancy shall not unduly interfere with the Contractor's operations or unduly delay it in completing the entire Work. Such occupancy and use shall be further subject to the provisions as set forth herein In the event that the Owner desires to exercise the privilege of Beneficial Occupancy, it shall give reasonable notice to the Owner s Representative and Contractor. If the Owner s Representative determines that such proposed Beneficial Occupancy is reasonable and proper, the Contractor shall cooperate with the Owner in providing basic services and facilities reasonably required for the health, safety and comfort of the occupants and other parties lawfully present and/or entering or leaving the premises. Mutually acceptable arrangements shall be made between the Owner and the Contractor with regard to procedures, terms and conditions governing the operation and maintenance of such services and facilities as may be utilized for the benefit of the Owner, in accordance with Section 4 of the Supplementary Conditions, including but not limited to the provision of Operation and Maintenance manuals. The Owner will assume proportionate and reasonable responsibility for operation of systems, equipment and/or utilities required to provide such services, in part or in total, including proportionate and reasonable expenses of operation incidental thereto The Owner's occupancy or use of such designated areas, subdivisions, or portions of the Work shall not constitute acceptance of systems, materials, or elements of the Work which are not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents; nor relieve the Contractor from its obligations to complete the Work; nor for responsibility for loss or damage due to or arising out of defects in, or malfunctioning of, systems, materials, equipment, or elements of the Work; nor from other unfulfilled obligations or responsibilities of the Contractor under the Contract. If, however damage results from any act of the Owner, the Owner will assume its proportionate responsibility for such damage Notwithstanding the Owner's occupancy or use of such designated areas, subdivisions, or portions of the Work pursuant to this Article, the warranty period(s) referenced in Section 3.5 shall not begin to run until Substantial Completion and Owner will continue to hold retainage in accordance with Section until Substantial Completion. AIA Document A Copyright 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This draft was produced by AIA software at 15:33:56 on 09/17/2010 under Order No _1 which expires on 09/24/2011, and is not for resale. User Notes: ( ) 35

88 ARTICLE 9 PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION 9.1 CONTRACT SUM The Contract Sum is stated in the Agreement and, including authorized adjustments, is the total amount payable by the Owner to the Contractor for performance of the Work under the Contract Documents. 9.2 SCHEDULE OF VALUES Where the Contract is based on a stipulated sum or Guaranteed Maximum Price, the Contractor shall submit to the Owner s Representative, before the first Application for Payment, a schedule of values allocating the entire Contract Sum to the various portions of the Work and prepared in such form and supported by such data to substantiate its accuracy as the Owner s Representative may require. This schedule, unless objected to by the Owner s Representative, shall be used as a basis for reviewing the Contractor s Applications for Payment When O&M and As Built Drawings are required, they shall be listed as a separate item in the Schedule of Values with a value of 3% of Contract Sum. 9.3 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT Applications for Payment shall not include requests for payment for portions of the Work for which the Contractor does not intend to pay a Subcontractor or material supplier, unless such Work has been performed by others whom the Contractor intends to pay Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, payments shall be made on account of materials and equipment delivered and suitably stored at the site for subsequent incorporation in the Work. If approved in advance by the Owner, partial payment may be made for materials and equipment suitably stored off the site at a location agreed upon in writing. Payment for materials and equipment stored on the site shall be conditioned upon compliance by the Contractor with procedures satisfactory to the Owner to establish the Owner s title to such materials and equipment or otherwise protect the Owner s interest, and shall include the costs of applicable insurance, storage and transportation to the site for such materials and equipment stored off the site The Contractor warrants that title to all Work covered by an Application for Payment will pass to the Owner no later than the time of payment. The Contractor further warrants that upon submittal of an Application for Payment, all Work for which Certificates for Payment have been previously issued and payments received from the Owner shall, to the best of the Contractor s knowledge, information and belief, be free and clear of liens, claims, security interests or encumbrances in favor of the Contractor, Subcontractors, material suppliers, or other persons or entities making a claim by reason of having provided labor, materials and equipment relating to the Work The Contractor s Application for Payment will include the MBE/WBD Tier II Reporting as required by Supplementary Conditions, Section CERTIFICATES FOR PAYMENT The Owner s Representative will, within seven days after receipt of the Contractor s Application for Payment, either issue to the Owner a Certificate for Payment, with a copy to the Contractor, for such amount as the Owner s Representative determines is properly due, or notify the Contractor and Owner in writing of the Owner s Representative s reasons for withholding certification in whole or in part as provided in Section The issuance of a Certificate for Payment will constitute a representation by the Owner s Representative to the Owner, based on the Owner s Representative s evaluation of the Work and the data comprising the Application for Payment, that, to the best of the Owner s Representative s knowledge, information and belief, the Work has progressed to the point indicated and that the quality of the Work is in accordance with the Contract Documents. The foregoing representations are subject to an evaluation of the Work for conformance with the Contract Documents upon Substantial Completion, to results of subsequent tests and inspections, to correction of minor deviations from the Contract Documents prior to completion and to specific qualifications expressed by the Owner s Representative. The issuance of a Certificate for Payment will further constitute a representation that the Contractor is entitled to payment in the amount certified. However, the issuance of a Certificate for Payment will not be a representation that the Owner s Representative has (1) made exhaustive or continuous on-site inspections to check the quality or quantity of the Work, (2) reviewed construction means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures, (3) reviewed copies of requisitions received from Subcontractors and material suppliers and other data requested by AIA Document A Copyright 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This draft was produced by AIA software at 15:33:56 on 09/17/2010 under Order No _1 which expires on 09/24/2011, and is not for resale. User Notes: ( ) 36

89 the Owner to substantiate the Contractor s right to payment, or (4) made examination to ascertain how or for what purpose the Contractor has used money previously paid on account of the Contract Sum Certificate for Payment shall be issued monthly provided the work is processed diligently and to the satisfaction of the Owner s Representative and Owner and shall be in the amount 5% less than the value of the work completed and materials appropriately stored on the site to the date of application of the Certificate. If, upon Substantial Completion of the Work, there are any remaining uncompleted minor items and/or Punch List items, the Owner shall be entitled to retain up to two hundred percent (200%) of the dollar value of such items until those items are completed. In addition, Owner shall be entitled to retain up to one hundred percent (100%) of any unresolved claims against the project until Owner has received written notification that all claims have been resolved. Owner shall release all retainage after all items are complete and all claims are resolved At the time that the Owner withholds retainage, it shall place such retainage in an escrow account, with a bank, savings and loan institution, or the State of Indiana or an instrumentality thereof to be selected by mutual agreement between the Owner and the Contractor, as escrow agent, pursuant to a written agreement which shall provide that: (1) the escrow agent shall promptly invest all escrowed principal in such obligations as shall be selected by the escrow agent in its discretion; (2) the escrow agent shall hold the escrowed principal and income until receipt of notice from the Owner and the Contractor, specifying the portion or portions of the escrowed principal to be released from the escrow account, and the person or persons to whom such portion or portions are to be released and, upon receipt of such notice, the escrow agent shall promptly remit the designated portion of escrowed principal and the same proportion of then escrowed income to such person or persons; and (3) the escrow agent shall be compensated for its services as the parties may agree upon a commercially reasonable fee commensurate with fees then being charged for the handling of escrow accounts of like size and duration, which fee shall be paid from the escrowed income of the escrow account. 9.5 DECISIONS TO WITHHOLD CERTIFICATION The Owner s Representative may withhold a Certificate for Payment in whole or in part, to the extent reasonably necessary to protect the Owner, if in the Owner s Representative s opinion the representations to the Owner required by Section cannot be made. If the Owner s Representative is unable to certify payment in the amount of the Application, the Owner s Representative will notify the Contractor and Owner as provided in Section If the Contractor and Owner s Representative cannot agree on a revised amount, the Owner s Representative will promptly issue a Certificate for Payment for the amount for which the Owner s Representative is able to make such representations to the Owner. The Owner s Representative may also withhold a Certificate for Payment or, because of subsequently discovered evidence, may nullify the whole or a part of a Certificate for Payment previously issued or the Owner may withhold payment, to such extent as may be necessary in the Owner s Representative s opinion to protect the Owner from loss for which the Contractor is responsible, including loss resulting from acts or omissions described in 3.3.2, because of:.1 defective Work not remedied;.2 third party claim filed or reasonable evidence indicating probable filing of such claims unless security acceptable to the Owner is provided to the Contractor;.3 failure of the Contractor to make payments properly to Subcontractors for labor, materials or equipment;.4 reasonable evidence that the Work cannot be completed for the unpaid balance of the Contract Sum;.5 damage to the Owner or another Contractor in the event that this is a multi-prime Project;.6 reasonable evidence that the Work will not be completed within the Contract Time, and that the unpaid balance would not be adequate to cover the Owner s damages for the anticipated delay;.7 failure to carry out the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents;.8 failure to comply with obligations regarding schedule and coordination under or testing AIA Document A Copyright 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This draft was produced by AIA software at 15:33:56 on 09/17/2010 under Order No _1 which expires on 09/24/2011, and is not for resale. User Notes: ( ) 37

90 under Section ;.9 rejection of the Work or any part thereof by any governmental authority having jurisdiction over the Project; or.10 failure to defend, indemnify or hold harmless the Owner, the Owner s Representative and other required indemnitees as required by the Contract Documents. On a multiple-prime Project, the General Contractor shall report to the Owner s Representative any circumstances known to it that will assist the Owner s Representative in making a determination as to whether to withhold certification of an Application for Payment submitted by another Prime Contractor based on the any of the above reasons When the above reasons for withholding certification are removed, certification will be made for amounts previously withheld. The Owner shall not be in default by reason of withholding payment while any of the grounds set forth in remain uncured If the Owner s Representative withholds certification for payment under Section , the Owner may, at its sole option, issue joint checks to the Contractor and to any Subcontractor or material or equipment suppliers to whom the Contractor failed to make payment for Work properly performed or material or equipment suitably delivered. If the Owner makes payments by joint check, the Owner shall notify the Owner s Representative and the Owner s Representative will reflect such payment on the next Certificate for Payment If Contractor disputes the Owner s Representative s or Owner s determination with respect to any Application for Payment, it shall make a Claim as provided in Article 15 and shall nevertheless continue to diligently prosecute the Work. 9.6 PROGRESS PAYMENTS After the Owner s Representative has issued a Certificate for Payment, the Owner shall make payment in the manner and within the time provided in the Contract Documents, and shall so notify the Owner s Representative The Contractor shall pay each Subcontractor no later than seven days after receipt of payment from the Owner the amount to which the Subcontractor is entitled, reflecting percentages actually retained from payments to the Contractor on account of the Subcontractor s portion of the Work. The Contractor shall, by appropriate agreement with each Subcontractor, require each Subcontractor to make payments to Sub-subcontractors in a similar manner The Owner s Representative will, on request, furnish to a Subcontractor, if practicable, information regarding percentages of completion or amounts applied for by the Contractor and action taken thereon by the Owner s Representative and Owner on account of portions of the Work done by such Subcontractor The Owner has the right to request written evidence from the Contractor that the Contractor has properly paid Subcontractors and material and equipment suppliers amounts paid by the Owner to the Contractor for subcontracted Work. If the Contractor fails to furnish such evidence within seven days, the Owner shall have the right to contact Subcontractors to ascertain whether they have been properly paid. Neither the Owner nor Owner s Representative shall have an obligation to pay or to see to the payment of money to a Subcontractor, except as may otherwise be required by law Contractor payments to material and equipment suppliers shall be treated in a manner similar to that provided in Sections 9.6.2, and A Certificate for Payment, a progress payment, or partial or entire use or occupancy of the Project by the Owner shall not constitute acceptance of Work not in accordance with the Contract Documents. 9.7 FAILURE OF PAYMENT A final Certificate of Payment shall not be issued until all labor and materials required in the Contract Documents have been furnished, installed and completed, all claims have been disposed of and all claims for extra AIA Document A Copyright 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This draft was produced by AIA software at 15:33:56 on 09/17/2010 under Order No _1 which expires on 09/24/2011, and is not for resale. User Notes: ( ) 38

91 work materials and allowances for omissions have been rendered, considered, and, if agreed to, made a part of such Certificate of Payment If, pursuant to the Contract Documents, the Owner is entitled to any reimbursement or payment from the Contractor, Contractor shall make such payment within ten (10) days of demand by the Owner. Notwithstanding anything in the Contract Documents to the contrary, if Contractor fails to timely make any payment due the Owner, or if the Owner incurs any costs and expenses to cure any default of Contractor or to correct defective Work, the Owner shall have the right to either (i) deduct an amount equal to that which the Owner is entitled from any payment then or thereafter due Contractor from the Owner, or (ii) issue a written notice to the Contractor reducing the Contract Sum by an amount equal to that which the Owner is entitled. 9.8 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION Substantial Completion is the stage in the progress of the Work: (i) when the Work or designated portion thereof is sufficiently complete in accordance with the Contract Documents so that the Owner can occupy or utilize the Work for its intended use, (ii) the Owner has received from any governmental authority having jurisdiction thereof all certificates of occupancy and all other permits, approvals, licenses, or other documents necessary for Owner s beneficial occupancy of the Project, and (iii) Contractor submits Operating and Maintenance Manuals, As- Built Field Data Set Scans, and Interim Record Drawings When the Contractor considers that the Work, or a portion thereof which the Owner agrees to accept separately, is substantially complete, the Contractor shall prepare and submit to the Owner s Representative a comprehensive list of items to be completed or corrected prior to final payment ( punch list ). Failure to include an item of the punch list does not alter the responsibility of the Contractor to complete all Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. Additional preconditions for the Substantial Completion inspection are set forth in the Supplementary Conditions, Section Upon receipt of the Contractor s punch list and the other documentation required by Supplementary Conditions, Section 10, the Owner s Representative will make an inspection to determine whether the Work or designated portion thereof is substantially complete. If the Owner s Representative s inspection discloses any item, whether or not included on the Contractor s punch list, which is not sufficiently complete in accordance with the Contract Documents so that the Owner can occupy or utilize the Work or designated portion thereof for its intended use, the Contractor shall, before issuance of the Certificate of Substantial Completion, as defined below, complete or correct such item upon notification by the Owner s Representative. In such case, the Contractor shall then submit a request for another inspection by the Owner s Representative to determine Substantial Completion When the Work or designated portion thereof is substantially complete, the Owner s Representative will prepare an AIA Form G704 Certificate of Substantial Completion in its then-current form (the Certificate of Substantial Completion ) that shall establish the date of Substantial Completion, shall establish responsibilities of the Owner and Contractor for security, maintenance, heat, utilities, damage to the Work and insurance, and shall fix the time within which the Contractor shall finish all items on the list accompanying the Certificate. Warranties required by the Contract Documents shall commence on the date of Substantial Completion of the Work or designated portion thereof unless otherwise provided in the Certificate of Substantial Completion The Certificate of Substantial Completion shall be submitted to the Owner and Contractor for their written acceptance of responsibilities assigned to them in such Certificate. Upon such acceptance and consent of surety, if any, the Owner shall make payment of retainage applying to such Work or designated portion thereof. Such payment shall be adjusted for Work that is incomplete or not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents Operating & Maintenance Manuals and As-Built Field Data Set Scans, to the extent and in such form as may be designated by the Owner, shall be submitted to the Owner at Substantial Completion. 9.9 FINAL COMPLETION AND FINAL PAYMENT Upon receipt of the Contractor s written notice that the Work is ready for final inspection and acceptance and upon receipt of a final Application for Payment, the Owner s Representative will promptly make such inspection and, when the Owner s Representative finds the Work acceptable under the Contract Documents and the Contract fully performed, the Owner s Representative will promptly issue a final Certificate for Payment stating that to the AIA Document A Copyright 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This draft was produced by AIA software at 15:33:56 on 09/17/2010 under Order No _1 which expires on 09/24/2011, and is not for resale. User Notes: ( ) 39

92 best of the Owner s Representative s knowledge, information and belief, and on the basis of the Owner s Representative s on-site visits and inspections, the Work has been completed in accordance with terms and conditions of the Contract Documents and that the entire balance found to be due the Contractor and noted in the final Certificate is due and payable. The Owner s Representative s final Certificate for Payment will constitute a further representation that conditions listed in Section as precedent to the Contractor s being entitled to final payment have been fulfilled No less than fourteen (14) days prior to Substantial Completion, Contractor shall submit the following to the to the Owner s Representative:.1 an affidavit that all payrolls, bills for materials and equipment, and other indebtedness connected with the Work for which the Owner or the Owner s property might be responsible or encumbered (less amounts withheld by Owner) have been paid or otherwise satisfied;.2 a certificate evidencing that insurance required by the Contracts Documents to remain in force after final payment is currently in effect,, will remain in effect through the end of the warranty period, and will not be canceled or allowed to expire until at least 30 days prior written notice has been given to the Owner;.3 a written statement that the Contractor knows of no substantial reason that the insurance will not be renewable to cover the period required by the Contract Documents;.4 consent of surety, if any, to final payment; 5. the Owner s properly executed asbestos containing materials (ACM) certification form (included in front end documentation or available through Owner s Environmental Health & Safety Office);.6 if required by the Owner, other data establishing payment or satisfaction of obligations, such as receipts, releases and waivers of liens, claims, security interests or encumbrances arising out of the Contract. If a Subcontractor refuses to furnish a release or waiver required by the Owner, the Contractor may furnish a bond satisfactory to the Owner to indemnify the Owner against such lien or claim. If such lien or claim remains unsatisfied after payments are made, the Contractor shall refund to the Owner all money that the Owner may be compelled to pay in discharging such lien or claim, including all costs and reasonable attorneys fees;.7 COBIE to the extent and in such form as may be designated by the Owner;.8 Lock-Out/Tag-Out Manuals as required in the Project Specifications;.9 those documents required in Supplementary Conditions, Section 10. Neither final payment nor any remaining retained percentage shall become due until these submissions are made by Contractor Contractor shall provide a Final Waiver of Lien (one copy to Owner and one copy to Owner s Representative as a condition to receiving Final Payment The final Certificate for Payment shall constitute the acceptance of the Work by the Owner, except as to Work thereafter found to be defective. The date of such Certificate shall be regarded as the date of acceptance of the Work, and payment of the retained percentage shall be due sixty-one (61) days from the date of acceptance, providing that the Contractor has furnished written documentation that all claims filed with the Owner from subcontractors and materials suppliers have been resolved If, after Substantial Completion of the Work, final completion thereof is materially delayed through no fault of the Contractor or by issuance of Change Orders affecting final completion, and the Owner s Representative so confirms, the Owner shall, upon application by the Contractor and certification by the Owner s Representative, and without terminating the Contract, make payment of the balance due for that portion of the Work fully completed and AIA Document A Copyright 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This draft was produced by AIA software at 15:33:56 on 09/17/2010 under Order No _1 which expires on 09/24/2011, and is not for resale. User Notes: ( ) 40

93 accepted. If the remaining balance for Work not fully completed or corrected is less than retainage stipulated in the Contract Documents, and if bonds have been furnished, the written consent of surety to payment of the balance due for that portion of the Work fully completed and accepted shall be submitted by the Contractor to the Owner s Representative prior to certification of such payment. Such payment shall be made under terms and conditions governing final payment, except that it shall not constitute a waiver of claims The making of final payment shall constitute a waiver of Claims by the Owner except those arising from:.1 liens, Claims, security interests or encumbrances arising out of the Contract and unsettled;.2 failure of the Work to comply with the requirements of the Contract Documents; or.3 terms of special warranties required by the Contract Documents Acceptance of final payment by the Contractor, a Subcontractor or material supplier shall constitute a waiver of claims by that payee except those previously made in writing and identified by that payee as unsettled at the time of final Application for Payment. ARTICLE 10 PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY 10.1 HEALTH AND SAFETY PRECAUTIONS AND PROGRAMS The Contractor shall be responsible for initiating, maintaining and supervising all safety precautions and programs in connection with the performance of the Contract The General Contractor shall be responsible for initiating, coordinating, maintaining and supervising all health safety precautions and programs in connection with the performance of the Contract. Each Prime Contractor acknowledges that it remains the controlling employer as to its employees and subcontractors and that it individually must comply with the applicable safety laws, including but not limited to (CFR 1926) the Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA), Safety and Health Regulations for the Construction Industry and all General Industry standards applicable thereto. By executing the Contract, each Prime Contractor represents that it is knowledgeable with respect to such laws and will take all necessary measures to comply therewith. It is acknowledged that Owner does not possess expertise as to construction-related safety matters and programs and, therefore, Owner does not assume any duty to the Contractor, its Subcontractors or Suppliers, separate contractors or others involved with the Project as to the applicable safety standards or procedures with respect to their work or services SAFETY OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY The Contractor shall take reasonable precautions for safety of, and shall provide reasonable protection to prevent damage, injury or loss to.1 employees on the Work and other persons who may be affected thereby;.2 the Work and materials and equipment to be incorporated therein, whether in storage on or off the site, under care, custody or control of the Contractor or the Contractor s Subcontractors or Subsubcontractors; and.3 other property at the site or adjacent thereto, such as trees, shrubs, lawns, walks, pavements, roadways, structures and utilities not designated for removal, relocation or replacement in the course of construction The Contractor shall comply with and give notices required by applicable laws, statutes, ordinances, codes, rules and regulations, and lawful orders of public authorities bearing on safety of persons or property or their protection from damage, injury or loss. In the event of any conflict among the Contract Documents and any federal, state or local authorities, laws, rules, regulations or requirements, the most stringent requirement shall govern the Work If the Contractor fails to give such notices or fails to comply with such law, ordinances, rules, regulations, and unlawful orders, it shall be liable for and shall defend, indemnify and hold harmless the Owner and the Owner s AIA Document A Copyright 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This draft was produced by AIA software at 15:33:56 on 09/17/2010 under Order No _1 which expires on 09/24/2011, and is not for resale. User Notes: ( ) 41

94 Representative and their respective employees, officers and agents, against any resulting fines, penalties, judgments or damages, including reasonable attorney fees, imposed on or incurred by the parties indemnified herein The Contractor shall erect and maintain, as required by existing conditions and performance of the Contract, reasonable safeguards for safety and protection, including posting danger signs and other warnings against hazards, promulgating safety regulations and notifying owners and users of adjacent sites and utilities. The Contractor also shall be responsible, at the Contractor s sole cost and expense, for all measures necessary to protect any property adjacent to the Project and improvements thereon or therein. Any damage to such property or improvements shall be promptly and properly repaired by the Contractor When use or storage of explosives or other hazardous materials or equipment or unusual methods are necessary for execution of the Work, the Contractor shall exercise utmost care and carry on such activities under supervision of properly qualified personnel The Contractor shall promptly remedy damage and loss (other than damage or loss insured under property insurance required by the Contract Documents) to property referred to in Sections and caused in whole or in part by the Contractor, a Subcontractor, a Sub-subcontractor, or anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them, or by anyone for whose acts they may be liable and for which the Contractor is responsible under Sections and , except damage or loss attributable to acts or omissions of the Owner or Owner s Representative or anyone directly or indirectly employed by either of them, or by anyone for whose acts either of them may be liable, and not attributable to the fault or negligence of the Contractor. The foregoing obligations of the Contractor are in addition to the Contractor s obligations under Section The Contractor shall designate a member of the Contractor s organization who is knowledgeable in the management of environmental health and safety at the site whose duty shall be the prevention of accidents and health-related risks. This person shall be the Contractor s superintendent unless otherwise designated by the Contractor in writing to the Owner and Owner s Representative The Contractor shall not permit any part of the construction or site to be loaded so as to cause damage or create an unsafe condition INJURY OR DAMAGE TO PERSON OR PROPERTY If either party suffers injury or damage to person or property because of an act or omission of the other party, or of others for whose acts such party is legally responsible, written notice of such injury or damage, whether or not insured, shall be given to the other party within a reasonable time not exceeding 21 days after discovery. The notice shall provide sufficient detail to enable the other party to investigate the matter When all or a portion of the Work is suspended for any reason, Contractor shall securely fasten down all coverings and protect the Work from injury by any cause The Contractor promptly, and in no event later than required by applicable OSHA regulations, shall report in writing to the Owner and Owner s Representative all accidents arising out of or in connection with the Work that caused death, personal injury or property damage, giving full details and statements of any witnesses. Accidents causing death, serious personal injuries or serious property damage shall also be immediately reported by telephone or messenger to the Owner and Owner s Representative. Owner shall have the right, but not the duty, to investigate all accident reports HAZARDOUS MATERIALS/REGULATED SUBSTANCES Regulated Substance Definition: "Regulated Substance" includes oil, petroleum or any fraction thereof, a hazardous substance, a hazardous waste, a waste containing a hazardous substance, a contaminant, a pollution or a regulated chemical, as any of those terms may be defined by the United States Environmental Protection Agency or in any one of the following laws: The comprehensive Environmental Response, Compensation and Liability Act 42 USC Section 9601, et seq., (CERCLA), as amended, the Resource Conservation and Recovery Act (RCRA), as amended, the Emergency Planning and Community Right to Know Act of 1986, also known as SARA Title III or EPCRA, the Toxic Substance Control Act (TSCA), as amended, the Clean Water Act, as amended, the Clean Air Act, as amended, the Federal Insecticide, Fungicide, and Rodenticide Act, as amended, the Federal Water Pollution Control Act, as amended, the Oil Pollution Act of 1990, as amended, the Safe Drinking Water Act, as amended, the AIA Document A Copyright 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This draft was produced by AIA software at 15:33:56 on 09/17/2010 under Order No _1 which expires on 09/24/2011, and is not for resale. User Notes: ( ) 42

95 Occupational Safety and Health Act as amended or another federal state or local law rule ordinance statute regulation permit or other governmental restriction regulating environmental health or safety matters If Contractor encounters substances on the Project which Contractor reasonably believes to be polychlorinated biphenyls (PCBs) or regulated substances other than asbestos or asbestos-containing materials ( ACM ) in a form, location or quantity that requires Contractor or the Owner to take action under applicable law, Contractor immediately shall stop the Work in the affected area and report the condition to the Owner and Owner s Representative by telephone followed by written report. Work in the affected area shall not resume until the substance has been ruled harmless, as defined in Subparagraph , or until a ruling that the Work may proceed in accordance with applicable laws The Owner shall obtain the services of a licensed laboratory to verify the presence or absence of the material or substance reported by the Contractor and, in the event such material or substance is found to be present, to verify that it has been rendered harmless. Unless otherwise required by the Contract Documents, the Owner shall furnish in writing to the Contractor and Owner s Representative the names and qualifications of persons or entities who are to perform tests verifying the presence or absence of such material or substance or who are to perform the task of removal or safe containment of such material or substance. The Contractor and the Owner s Representative will promptly reply to the Owner in writing stating whether or not either has reasonable objection to the persons or entities proposed by the Owner. If either the Contractor or Owner s Representative has an objection to a person or entity proposed by the Owner, the Owner shall propose another to whom the Contractor and the Owner s Representative have no reasonable objection. When the material or substance has been rendered harmless, Work in the affected area shall resume upon written agreement of the Owner and Contractor. The Contract Time shall be extended appropriately and the Contract Sum shall be increased in the amount of the Contractor's reasonable additional costs of shut-down and start-up, if any, which adjustments shall be accomplished as provided in Article 7. "Rendered harmless" shall mean that levels of asbestos, PCBs or other regulated substances are less than any applicable exposure standards set forth in OSHA regulations. In no event, however, shall the Owner have any responsibility for any substance or material brought to the Project Site by the Contractor, any Subcontractor, any material supplier, or any entity for whom any of them is responsible. The Contractor shall not use any fill or other materials to be incorporated into the Work that are hazardous, toxic, or contaminated by any Regulated Substance If the Contract Documents permit the use of a Regulated Substance of a type which by law an employer must notify its employees is to be used on/the Project, then prior to exposure of any person on the Site to such Substance, Contractor shall notify the Owner s Representative in writing of the chemical composition thereof in sufficient detail and time, including, but not limited to providing a material safety data sheet for such Substance, to permit the Owner and other persons and entities to comply with any applicable laws. Contractor's activities regarding the use of any such Regulated Substance are to be coordinated with the activities of Owner and other persons or entities to avoid any cost or impact to the Owner or any other person or entity as the result of the use of such Regulated Substance Contractor shall not dispose of a Regulated Substance on the Project Site. Contractor shall not commingle Regulated Substances with materials or waste of the Owner, another Prime Contractor (in the event that the Project is a multi-prime Project) or any other person or entity performing Work on the Project Site. Contractor shall provide separate disposal receptacles approved by law for the particular regulated substance(s) which will be placed in them. Such receptacles shall be used exclusively for the storage or temporary disposal of Regulated Substances for which they are approved. When storing, working with, treating or disposing of regulated substances, Contractor and its waste hauler shall strictly comply with all applicable laws. Contractor shall identify its waste haulers and provide the Owner with a copy of each manifest or other document relating to the storage, transportation or disposal of any Regulated Substance taken from the Project Site If, without negligence on the part of the Contractor, the Contractor is held liable by a government agency for the cost of remediation of a hazardous material or substance solely by reason of performing Work as required by the Contract Documents, the Owner shall indemnify the Contractor for all cost and expense thereby incurred; provided, however, that Owner s obligations under this Section shall be limited in substance by statutes and constitutional provisions designed to protect the exposure and liability of Indiana University as an instrumentality of the State of Indiana (e.g., actions and conditions as to which the Owner is immunized by the Indiana Tort Claims Act, dollar limits stated in such Act, exemption from punitive damages, the continued ability to defeat a claim by reason of contributory negligence or fault of claimant), so that its liability to indemnify, defend and hold harmless shall not AIA Document A Copyright 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This draft was produced by AIA software at 15:33:56 on 09/17/2010 under Order No _1 which expires on 09/24/2011, and is not for resale. User Notes: ( ) 43

96 exceed what might have been its liability to a claimant if sued directly in Indiana by the claimant and all appropriate defenses had been raised by the Owner If Contractor encounters substances on the Project which Contractor reasonably believes to be asbestos or ACM, Contractor shall act in accordance with Indiana University Project Site Requirements, Section 15. B In addition to the requirements identified in this Section, Contractor shall comply with the requirements set forth in Section 15 of the Indiana University Project Site Requirements EMERGENCIES In an emergency affecting safety of persons or property, the Contractor shall act, at the Contractor s discretion, to prevent threatened damage, injury or loss. Additional compensation or extension of time claimed by the Contractor on account of an emergency shall be determined as provided in Article 15 and Article EQUAL EMPLOYMENT OPPORTUNITY AND NON-DISCRIMINATION The Contractor shall not discriminate against any employee or applicant for employment because of race, religion, color, sex, national origin, marital status, age, sexual orientation, veteran status or disability. The Contractor shall take affirmative action to ensure that applicants are employed and that employees are treated during employment without regard to their race, religion, color, sex, national origin, marital status, age, sexual orientation, veteran status or disability. Such action shall include, but not be limited to the following: employment, upgrading, demotion or transfer; recruitment or recruitment advertising; layoff or termination; rates of pay or other forms of compensation; and selection for training, including apprenticeship. The Contractor agrees to post in conspicuous places, available to all employees and applicants for employment, notices to be provided by an appropriate agency of the federal government setting forth the requirements of these non-discrimination provisions The Contractor shall, in all solicitations or advertisements for employees placed by or on behalf of the Contractor, state that all qualified applicants will receive consideration for employment without regard to race, religion, color, sex, national origin, marital status, age, sexual orientation, veteran status or disability The Contractor shall send to each labor union or representative of workers with which it has a collective bargaining agreement or other contract or understanding, a notice to be provided advising the labor union or workers representative of the Contractors' commitments under Section 202 of Executive Order No dated September 24, 1965, and shall post copies of the notice in conspicuous places available to employees and applicants for employment The Contractor shall comply with all provisions of Executive Order No dated September 24, 1965, and of the rules, regulations and relevant orders of the Secretary of Labor The Contractor shall furnish all information and reports required by Executive Order No dated September 24, 1965, and by the rules, regulations and order of the Secretary of Labor. or pursuant thereto, and will permit access to its books, records, and accounts by an appropriate agency of the federal government and by the Secretary of Labor for purposes of investigation to ascertain compliance with such rules, regulation and others In addition to the requirements identified in this Section, Contractor shall comply with the requirements set forth in Section 8 of the Supplementary Conditions. ARTICLE 11 INSURANCE AND BONDS 11.1 INSURANCE GENERAL The Contractor shall take out and maintain the insurance required in the Supplementary Conditions, Section 9, and as otherwise required in this Article 11 during the life of the Contract and until final acceptance of the work contemplated by this Contract Workers' Compensation, Occupational Disease and Employer's Liability: Types and amounts of required worker s compensation insurance are set forth in the Supplementary Conditions, Section 9. The Owner reserves the AIA Document A Copyright 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This draft was produced by AIA software at 15:33:56 on 09/17/2010 under Order No _1 which expires on 09/24/2011, and is not for resale. User Notes: ( ) 44

97 right to purchase this coverage as part of a "wraparound program" and, if Owner so elects, Contractor shall not provide this coverage nor include the cost of such coverage in any bid Liability Insurance: Types and amounts of required liability insurance are set forth in the Supplementary Conditions, Section 9. The Owner reserves the right to purchase coverage as part of a "wraparound program" and if Owner so elects, Contractor shall not provide this coverage or include the Cost of such coverage in any bid. It is agreed and understood that a combination of primary and excess (or umbrella) coverage to reach limits required for general liability and auto liability is acceptable [intentionally omitted] [intentionally omitted] [intentionally omitted] In no event shall any failure of the Owner to receive certified copies or certificates of policies required under this Article, or to demand receipt of such certified copies or certificates prior to Contractor commencing the work, be construed as a waiver by the Owner or the Owner's Representative of the Contractor's obligations to obtain insurance pursuant to this Article. The obligation to procure and maintain any insurance required by this Article is a separate responsibility of the Contractor and independent of the duty to furnish the certified copy or certificate of such insurance policies If Contractor fails to purchase and maintain any insurance required under this Article, the Owner may, but shall not be obligated to, upon five (5) days written notice to the Contractor, purchase such insurance on behalf of the Contractor and deduct the cost of such insurance from any amounts due and owing to the Contractor. If amounts due and owing the Contractor are not sufficient to reimburse the Owner for the cost of such insurance, the Contractor shall reimburse the Owner for the cost of such insurance upon written demand Within thirty (30) days of when any required insurance, due to the attainment of a normal expiration date or renewal date, shall expire, the Contractor shall supply the Owner with certificates of insurance and amendatory riders or endorsements that clearly evidence the continuance of all coverage in the same manner, limits of protection, and scope of coverage as was provided by the previous policy. In the event any renewal or replacement policy, for whatever reason obtained or required, is written by a carrier other than that with whom the coverage was previously placed, or the subsequent policy differs in any way from the previous policy, the Contractor shall also furnish the Owner with a certified copy of the renewal or replacement policy unless the Owner provides the Contractor with prior written consent to submit only a certificate of insurance for any such policy. All renewal and replacement policies shall be in form and substance satisfactory to the Owner and written by carriers acceptable to the Owner [intentionally omitted] 11.2 BUILDER S RISK INSURANCE The Owner s obligation to provide Builder s Risk Insurance is identified in the Supplementary Conditions, Section Beneficial Occupancy or use in accordance with Section 8.4 herein shall not commence until the insurance company or companies providing property insurance have consented to such Beneficial Occupancy or use by endorsement or otherwise. The Owner and the Contractor shall take reasonable steps to obtain consent of the insurance company or companies and shall not, without mutual written consent, take any action with respect to Beneficial Occupancy or use that would cause cancellation, lapse or reduction of insurance [intentionally omitted] [intentionally omitted] AIA Document A Copyright 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This draft was produced by AIA software at 15:33:56 on 09/17/2010 under Order No _1 which expires on 09/24/2011, and is not for resale. User Notes: ( ) 45

98 11.2.5[intentionally omitted] Waiver of Subrogation: Terms governing waiver of subrogation are set forth in the Supplementary Conditions, Section A loss insured under Owner s property insurance shall be adjusted by the Owner in good faith and made payable to the Owner as fiduciary in good faith for the insured, as their interest may appear, subject to requirements of bonding obligations associated with the Project. The Contractor shall pay subcontractors their just share of insurance proceeds received by the Contractor, and by appropriate agreements, written where legally required for validity, shall require subcontractors to make payments to their Sub-subcontractors in similar manner The Owner in good faith shall have power to adjust and settle a loss with insurers, unless one of the parties in interest shall object in writing within five (5) days after occurrence of loss to the Owners exercise of this power PERFORMANCE AND PAYMENT BOND The Owner shall have the right to require the Contractor to furnish bonds covering faithful performance of the Contract and payment of obligations arising thereunder as stipulated in bidding requirements or specifically required in the Contract documents on the date of execution of the Contract, or as required by applicable law. This bond shall be furnished using the form provided to Contractor by the Owner Upon the request of any person or entity appearing to be a potential beneficiary of bonds covering payment of obligations arising under the Contract, the Contractor shall promptly furnish a copy of the bonds or shall permit a copy to be made. ARTICLE 12 UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION OF WORK 12.1 UNCOVERING OF WORK If a portion of the Work is covered contrary to the Owner s Representative s request or to requirements specifically expressed in the Contract Documents, it must, if requested in writing by the Owner s Representative, be uncovered for the Owner s Representative s examination and be replaced at the Contractor s expense without change in the Contract Time If a portion of the Work has been covered that the Owner s Representative has not specifically requested to examine prior to its being covered, the Owner s Representative may request to see such Work and it shall be uncovered by the Contractor. If such Work is in accordance with the Contract Documents, costs of uncovering and replacement shall, by appropriate Construction Change Directive, be at the Owner s expense. If such Work is not in accordance with the Contract Documents, such costs and the cost of correction shall be at the Contractor s expense unless the condition was caused by the Owner or a separate contractor in which event the Owner shall be responsible for payment of such costs CORRECTION OF WORK BEFORE OR AFTER SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION The Contractor shall promptly correct Work rejected by the Owner s Representative or failing to conform to the requirements of the Contract Documents, whether discovered before or after Substantial Completion and whether or not fabricated, installed or completed. Costs of correcting such rejected Work, including additional testing and inspections, the cost of uncovering and replacement, and compensation for the Owner s Representative s services and expenses made necessary thereby, shall be at the Contractor s expense. If, prior to the date of final payment, the Contractor, a Subcontractor, or anyone for whom either is responsible, uses or damages any portion of the Work, including, without limitation, mechanical, electrical, plumbing, or other building systems, machinery, equipment, or other mechanical device, Contractor shall cause such item to be restored to like new condition at no expense to the Owner and shall not assert a claim for delay or request a Construction Change Directive on this basis AFTER SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION In addition to the Contractor's obligations under Section 3.5, if, within two years after the date of Substantial Completion of the Work or designated portion thereof or after the date for commencement of warranties established under Section 9.8.4, or by terms of an applicable special warranty required by the Contract Documents, any of the Work is found to be not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall correct it within the time provided in Paragraph 2.4 after receipt of written notice from the Owner to do so unless the Owner has previously given the Contractor a written acceptance of such condition. The Owner shall give AIA Document A Copyright 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This draft was produced by AIA software at 15:33:56 on 09/17/2010 under Order No _1 which expires on 09/24/2011, and is not for resale. User Notes: ( ) 46

99 such notice as provided in Paragraph 2.4 promptly after discovery of the condition. If within thirty (30) days following the two-year period for correction of Work, the Owner fails to notify the Contractor of a defective condition other than latent defects unknown to the Owner, and give the Contractor an opportunity to make the correction, the Owner waives the rights to require correction by the Contractor and to make a claim for breach of warranty. If the Contractor fails to correct nonconforming Work within a reasonable time after receipt of notice from the Owner or Owner s Representative, the Owner may correct it in accordance with Section 2.4. The Contractor s responsibility to correct such work within two years of Substantial Completion shall not be affected, diminished or restricted by the limitations, restrictions or conditions of a subcontractor, manufacturer, supplier, or installer s warranty, including the expiration of any Uniform Commercial Code statute of limitations. The inability or refusal of a subcontractor, manufacturer, supplier or installer responsible for defective Work to correct or warrant such Work shall not relieve the Contractor from its obligation to correct such Work within two years of Substantial Completion The two-year period for correction of Work shall be extended with respect to portions of Work first performed after Substantial Completion by the period of time between Substantial Completion and the actual completion of that portion of the Work Upon completion of any work under or pursuant to this Section 12.2, the two-year correction period in connection with the Work requiring correction shall be renewed and recommenced. The obligations under Paragraph 12.2 shall cover any repairs and replacements to any part of the Work or other property that is damaged by the defective Work During the two-year period for correction of the Work, Contractor shall, at its own cost, repair all interior and exterior masonry or drywall cracks and provide new control joints as required The Contractor shall remove from the site portions of the Work that are not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents and are neither corrected by the Contractor nor accepted by the Owner The Contractor shall bear the cost of correcting destroyed or damaged construction, whether completed or partially completed, of the Owner or separate contractors caused by the Contractor s correction or removal of Work that is not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents Nothing contained in this Section 12.2 shall be construed to establish a period of limitation with respect to other obligations the Contractor has under the Contract Documents. Establishment of the two-year period for correction of Work as described in Section relates only to the specific obligation of the Contractor to correct the Work, and has no relationship to the time within which the obligation to comply with the Contract Documents may be sought to be enforced, nor to the time within which proceedings may be commenced to establish the Contractor s liability with respect to the Contractor s obligations other than specifically to correct the Work ACCEPTANCE OF NONCONFORMING WORK If the Owner prefers to accept Work that is not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents, the Owner may do so instead of requiring its removal and correction, in which case the Contract Sum will be reduced as appropriate and equitable. Such adjustment shall be effected whether or not final payment has been made. ARTICLE 13 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS 13.1 GOVERNING LAW AND VENUE The Contract shall be governed by the laws of the State of Indiana and the sole and exclusive venue of any claims or disputes arising out of this Agreement (including counterclaims, cross-claims, third party claims and claims for indemnity) shall be Monroe County, Indiana SUCCESSORS AND ASSIGNS The Owner and Contractor respectively bind themselves, their partner, successors, assigns and legal representatives to the other party hereto and to partners, successors, assigns and legal representatives of such other party in respect to covenants, agreements and obligations contained in the Contract Documents. Except as provided elsewhere in the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall not assign the Contract in whole or in part, or any rights whatsoever (including the right to payment or to present or assert claims arising out of the Project) without prior AIA Document A Copyright 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This draft was produced by AIA software at 15:33:56 on 09/17/2010 under Order No _1 which expires on 09/24/2011, and is not for resale. User Notes: ( ) 47

100 written consent of the Owner. If the Contractor attempts to make such an assignment without prior written consent it shall be void and of no effect WRITTEN NOTICE Written notice shall be deemed to have been duly served if delivered in person to the individual or a member of the firm or entity or to an officer of the corporation for which it was intended; or if delivered by facsimile transmission, registered or certified mail or express carrier to persons designated in the Agreement. shall constitute valid notification only in those circumstances identified in Section RIGHTS AND REMEDIES Duties and obligations imposed by the Contract Documents and rights and remedies available thereunder shall be in addition to and not a limitation of duties, obligations, rights and remedies otherwise imposed or available by law The waiver by the Owner of any breach or default of the Contract by the Contractor shall not be construed as a waiver of any other breach or default of the same or any other terms or conditions of the Contract. Forbearance from demanding strict compliance with any term or provision of the Contract shall not operate as a waiver and shall not prevent the Owner from subsequently demanding strict compliance therewith TESTS AND INSPECTIONS Tests, inspections and approvals of portions of the Work shall be made as required by the Contract Documents and by applicable laws, statutes, ordinances, codes, rules and regulations or lawful orders of public authorities. Unless otherwise provided, the Contractor shall make arrangements for such tests, inspections and approvals with an independent testing laboratory or entity acceptable to the Owner, or with the appropriate public authority, and shall bear all related costs of tests, inspections and approvals. The Contractor shall give the Owner s Representative timely notice of when and where tests and inspections are to be made so that the Owner s Representative may be present for such procedures. The Owner shall bear costs of (1) tests, inspections or approvals that do not become requirements until after bids are received or negotiations concluded, and (2) tests, inspections or approvals where building codes or applicable laws or regulations prohibit the Owner from delegating their cost to the Contractor If the Owner s Representative, Owner or public authorities having jurisdiction determine that portions of the Work require additional testing, inspection or approval not included under Section , the Owner s Representative will, upon written authorization from the Owner, instruct the Contractor to make arrangements for such additional testing, inspection or approval by an entity acceptable to the Owner, and the Contractor shall give timely notice to the Owner s Representative of when and where tests and inspections are to be made so that the Owner s Representative may be present for such procedures. Such costs, except as provided in Section , shall be at the Owner s expense If such procedures for testing, inspection or approval under Sections and reveal failure of the portions of the Work to comply with requirements established by the Contract Documents, all costs made necessary by such failure including those of repeated procedures and compensation for the Owner s Representative s services and expenses shall be at the Contractor s expense Required certificates of testing, inspection or approval shall, unless otherwise required by the Contract Documents, be secured by the Contractor and promptly delivered to the Owner s Representative If the Owner s Representative is to observe tests, inspections or approvals required by the Contract Documents, the Owner s Representative will do so promptly and, where practicable, at the normal place of testing Tests or inspections conducted pursuant to the Contract Documents shall be made promptly to avoid unreasonable delay in the Work The Owner reserves the right to allocate, reallocate or modify the scope of any of the testing and inspection services specified in the Contract Documents to be performed by a testing laboratory, testing agency or consultant retained by the Owner in connection with the Work if such adjustment and scope is consistent with the intent of the AIA Document A Copyright 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This draft was produced by AIA software at 15:33:56 on 09/17/2010 under Order No _1 which expires on 09/24/2011, and is not for resale. User Notes: ( ) 48

101 Contract Documents. In the event that the Contractor does not concur with such modification of scope or reallocation of such services, Contractor shall immediately notify the Owner s Representative and Owner in writing TIME LIMITS ON CLAIMS The Owner and Contractor shall commence all claims and causes of action, whether in contract, tort, breach of warranty or otherwise, against the other arising out of or related to the Contract in accordance with the requirements of the final dispute resolution method selected in the Agreement within the time period specified by applicable law, but in any case not more than 10 years after the date of Substantial Completion of the Work. The Owner and Contractor waive all claims and causes of action not commenced in accordance with this Section INTERPRETATION All personal pronouns used in the Contract Documents, whether used in the masculine, feminine or neuter gender shall include all other genders; and the singular shall include the plural and vice versa. Titles of articles, paragraphs, and subparagraphs are for convenience only and neither limit nor amplify the provisions of such articles, paragraphs and subparagraphs SEVERABILITY Whenever possible, each provision of the Contract Documents shall be interpreted in a manner to be effective and valid under applicable law. If, however, any provision of the Contract Documents, or a portion thereof, is prohibited by law or found invalid under a new law, only such provision or portion thereof shall be ineffective, without any manner invalidating or affecting the remaining portions of the Contract Documents or valid portions of such provision, which are hereby deemed severable FUTURE COOPERATION Each party hereto agrees to do all acts and things and to make, execute and deliver such written instruments, as from time to time shall be reasonably required to carry out the terms and provisions of the Contract Documents. ARTICLE 14 TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION OF THE CONTRACT 14.1 TERMINATION BY THE CONTRACTOR The Contractor may terminate the Contract if the Work is stopped for a period of 30 consecutive days through no act or fault of the Contractor or a Subcontractor, Sub-subcontractor or their agents or employees or any other persons or entities performing portions of the Work under direct or indirect contract with the Contractor, for any of the following reasons:.1 Issuance of an order of a court or other public authority having jurisdiction that requires all Work to be stopped;.2 An act of government, such as a declaration of national emergency that requires all Work to be stopped; or.3 Because the Owner s Representative has not issued a Certificate for Payment and has not notified the Contractor of the reason for withholding certification as provided in Section 9.4.1, or because the Owner has not made payment on a Certificate for Payment within the time stated in the Contract Documents If one of the reasons described in Section exists, the Contractor may, upon seven days written notice to the Owner and Owner s Representative, terminate the Contract and recover from the Owner payment for Work executed, including reasonable overhead and profit, costs incurred by reason of such termination, and damages TERMINATION BY THE OWNER FOR CAUSE The Owner may terminate the Contract if the Contractor.1 repeatedly refuses or fails to supply enough properly skilled workers or proper materials;.2 fails to make payment to Subcontractors for materials or labor in accordance with the respective agreements between the Contractor and the Subcontractors;.3 repeatedly disregards applicable laws, statutes, ordinances, codes, rules and regulations, or lawful orders of a public authority; or AIA Document A Copyright 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This draft was produced by AIA software at 15:33:56 on 09/17/2010 under Order No _1 which expires on 09/24/2011, and is not for resale. User Notes: ( ) 49

102 .4 otherwise is guilty of substantial breach of a provision of the Contract Documents When any of the above reasons exist, the Owner, upon certification by the Initial Decision Maker that sufficient cause exists to justify such action, may without prejudice to any other rights or remedies of the Owner and after giving the Contractor and the Contractor s surety, if any, seven days written notice, terminate employment of the Contractor and may, subject to any prior rights of the surety:.1 Exclude the Contractor from the site and take possession of all materials, equipment, tools, and construction equipment and machinery thereon owned by the Contractor;.2 Accept assignment of subcontracts pursuant to Section 5.4; and.3 Finish the Work by whatever reasonable method the Owner may deem expedient. Upon written request of the Contractor, the Owner shall furnish to the Contractor a detailed accounting of the costs incurred by the Owner in finishing the Work When the Owner terminates the Contract for one of the reasons stated in Section , the Contractor shall not be entitled to receive further payment until all claims and disputes are resolved If the unpaid balance of the Contract Sum exceeds costs of finishing the Work, including compensation for the Owner s Representative s services and expenses made necessary thereby, and other damages incurred by the Owner and not expressly waived, such excess shall be paid to the Contractor. If such costs and damages exceed the unpaid balance, the Contractor shall pay the difference to the Owner. The amount to be paid to the Contractor or Owner, as the case may be, shall be certified by the Initial Decision Maker, upon application, and this obligation for payment shall survive termination of the Contract SUSPENSION BY THE OWNER FOR CONVENIENCE The Owner may, without cause, order the Contractor in writing to suspend, delay or interrupt the Work in whole or in part for such period of time as the Owner may determine TERMINATION BY THE OWNER FOR CONVENIENCE The Owner may, at any time, terminate the Contract for the Owner s convenience and without cause Upon receipt of written notice from the Owner of such termination for the Owner s convenience, the Contractor shall.1 cease operations as directed by the Owner in the notice;.2 take actions necessary, or that the Owner may direct, for the protection and preservation of the Work; and.3 except for Work directed to be performed prior to the effective date of termination stated in the notice, terminate all existing subcontracts and purchase orders and enter into no further subcontracts and purchase orders Upon such termination, the Contractor shall recover as its sole remedy payment for Work properly performed prior to the effective date of termination and for items properly and timely fabricated off the Project Site, delivered and stored in accordance with the Owner s instructions plus profit and overhead on the foregoing items not previously paid. Contractor hereby waives and forfeits all other claims for payment and damages, including, without limitation, anticipated profits. The Owner shall be credited for (i) payments previously made to Contractor for the terminated portion of the Work, (ii) claims that the Owner has against the Contractor under the Contract and (iii) the value of the materials, supplies, equipment, or other terms that are to be disposed of by the Contractor that are part of the Contract Sum SURVIVAL OF WARRANTIES All warranties made to the Owner by Contractor, and all obligations of Contractor to defend, indemnify, and hold harmless the Owner, shall survive any termination of the employment of Contractor for any reason. AIA Document A Copyright 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This draft was produced by AIA software at 15:33:56 on 09/17/2010 under Order No _1 which expires on 09/24/2011, and is not for resale. User Notes: ( ) 50

103 ARTICLE 15 CLAIMS AND DISPUTES 15.1 CLAIMS DEFINITION A Claim is a demand or assertion by one of the parties seeking, as a matter of right, adjustment or interpretation of the Contract terms, payment of money, extension of time or other relief with respect to the terms of the Contract. The term Claim also includes other disputes and matters in question between the Owner and Contractor arising out of or relating to the Contract. The responsibility to substantiate Claims shall rest with the party making the Claim NOTICE OF CLAIMS Claims by either the Owner or Contractor must be initiated by written notice to the other party and to the Initial Decision Maker with a copy sent to the Owner s Representative. Claims by either party must be initiated within 7 days after occurrence of the event giving rise to such Claim or within 7 days after the claimant first recognizes the condition giving rise to the Claim, whichever is later. Claims must be initiated by written notice to the Owner s Representative and the other party. Once a Claim is recognized, the claimant shall use its best efforts to give the Owner s Representative and the other party notice of any such Claim as expeditiously as possible, including, without limitation, Claims in connection with concealed or unknown conditions. Claimant shall cooperate with the Owner s Representative and the party against whom the Claim is made in any reasonable effort to mitigate alleged or potential damages, delays or other adverse consequences arising out of the condition that is the subject of such Claim. Unless the other party objects, Claims may be reserved in writing within the time limits set forth in this Section If a claim is reserved, procedures for the resolution of claims and disputes shall not commence until a written notice from the claimant is received by the Owner s Representative. Any notice of Claim or reservation of Claim must clearly identify the alleged cause and the nature of the Claim and include data and information not available to the claimant that will facilitate prompt verification and evaluation of the Claim. Contractor s timely written notice of Claim is a condition precedent to its entitlement to an adjustment of the Contract Sum, Contract Time or Contract Schedule CONTINUING CONTRACT PERFORMANCE Pending final resolution of a Claim, except as otherwise agreed in writing or as provided in Section 9.7 and Article 14, the Contractor shall proceed diligently with performance of the Contract and the Owner shall continue to make payments in accordance with the Contract Documents CLAIMS FOR ADDITIONAL COST If the Contractor wishes to make Claim for an increase in the Contract Sum based on extra work, written notice as provided herein shall be given before proceeding to execute such Work. Extra work performed by Contractor without prior written notice to, and authorization by, Owner shall be at Contractor s sole risk and expense. Prior written notice is not required for Claims relating to an emergency endangering life or property CLAIMS FOR ADDITIONAL TIME If the Contractor wishes to make a Claim for an increase in the Contract Time, written notice as provided herein shall be given. The Contractor s Claim shall include an estimate of cost and of probable effect of delay on progress of the Work. In the case of a continuing delay, only one Claim is necessary If adverse weather conditions are the basis for a Claim for additional time, such Claim shall be documented by data substantiating that weather conditions were abnormal for the period of time, could not have been reasonably anticipated and had an adverse effect on the scheduled construction CLAIMS FOR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES The Contractor and Owner waive Claims against each other for consequential damages arising out of or relating to this Contract. This mutual waiver includes.1 damages incurred by the Owner for rental expenses, for losses of use, income, profit, financing, business and reputation, and for loss of management or employee productivity or of the services of such persons; and.2 damages incurred by the Contractor for principal office expenses including the compensation of personnel stationed there, for losses of financing, business and reputation, and for loss of profit except anticipated profit arising directly from the Work. AIA Document A Copyright 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This draft was produced by AIA software at 15:33:56 on 09/17/2010 under Order No _1 which expires on 09/24/2011, and is not for resale. User Notes: ( ) 51

104 This mutual waiver is applicable, without limitation, to all consequential damages due to either party s termination in accordance with Article 14. Nothing contained in this Section shall be deemed to preclude an award of liquidated damages, when applicable, in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents RESOLUTION OF CLAIMS AND DISPUTES Decision of Owner s Representative. Claims, including those alleging an error or omission by the Owner s Representative but excluding those arising under Sections 10.3 through 10.5, shall be referred initially to the Owner s Representative for decision. An initial decision by the Owner s Representative shall be required as a condition precedent to litigation of all Claims between the Contractor and Owner arising prior to the date final payment is due, unless 30 days have passed after the Claim has been referred to the Owner s Representative with no decision having been rendered by the Owner s Representative. The Owner s Representative will not decide disputes between the Contractor and persons or entities other than the Owner The Owner s Representative will review Claims and within ten days of the receipt of a Claim take one or more of the following actions: (1) request additional supporting data from the claimant or a response with supporting data from the other party, (2) reject the Claim in whole or in part, (3) approve the Claim, (4) suggest a compromise, or (5) advise the parties that the Owner s Representative is unable to resolve the Claim if the Owner s Representative lacks sufficient information to evaluate the merits of the Claim or if the Owner s Representative concludes that, in the Owner s Representative s sole discretion, it would be inappropriate for the Owner s Representative to resolve the Claim In evaluating Claims, the Owner s Representative may, but shall not be obligated to, consult with or seek information from either party or from persons with special knowledge or expertise who may assist the Owner s Representative in rendering a decision. The Owner s Representative may request the Owner to authorize retention of such persons at the Owner s expense If the Owner s Representative requests a party to provide a response to a Claim or to furnish additional supporting data, such party shall respond, within ten days after receipt of such request, and shall either (1) provide a response on the requested supporting data, (2) advise the Owner s Representative when the response or supporting data will be furnished or (3) advise the Owner s Representative that no supporting data will be furnished. Upon receipt of the response or supporting data, if any, the Owner s Representative will either reject or approve the Claim in whole or in part The Owner s Representative will render an initial decision approving or rejecting the Claim, or indicating that the Owner s Representative is unable to resolve the Claim. This initial decision shall (1) be in writing; (2) state the reasons therefore; and (3) notify the parties and the Owner s Representative of any change in the Contract Sum or Contract Time or both [intentionally omitted] In the event of a Claim against the Contractor, the Owner may, but is not obligated to, notify the surety, if any, of the nature and amount of the Claim. If the Claim relates to a possibility of a Contractor s default, the Owner may, but is not obligated to, notify the surety and request the surety s assistance in resolving the controversy If a Claim relates to or is the subject of a mechanic s lien, the party asserting such Claim may proceed in accordance with applicable law to comply with the lien notice or filing deadlines [intentionally omitted] AIA Document A Copyright 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This draft was produced by AIA software at 15:33:56 on 09/17/2010 under Order No _1 which expires on 09/24/2011, and is not for resale. User Notes: ( ) 52

105 # AIA Document A Copyright 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This draft was produced by AIA software at 15:33:56 on 09/17/2010 under Order No _1 which expires on 09/24/2011, and is not for resale. User Notes: ( ) 53

106

107 SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS Index 1. ESCROW AGREEMENT SUBSURFACE CONDITIONS REQUIREMENTS FOR CONTRACTORS ON PUBLIC WORKS PROJECTS INDIANA UNIVERSITY DELIVERABLES REQUIREMENTS FOR CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS AND AS-BUILT & RECORD DOCUMENTS (Updated June 2014) LABOR CONDITIONS OWNER- FURNISHED MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT CONTRACTOR FURNISHED MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT EQUAL EMPLOYMENT OPPORTUNITY AND UNLAWFUL HARASSMENT INSURANCE REQUIREMENTS CLOSE-OUT PROCEDURES ESCROW AGREEMENT Pursuant to IC , Contractor and Owner agree that Owner shall retain from progress payments and place in an escrow account under the control of a bank, savings and loan institution or the State of Indiana or an instrumentality thereof, selected by mutual agreement of the parties ( Escrow Agent ), for the purpose of accumulating and sharing the benefits which might accrue through normal interest payments. The parties shall execute a formal Escrow Agreement with the Escrow Agent, and the retainage shall be promptly invested with the Escrow Agent until such retainage is ordered released by the Owner or by other legal action, at which time the amount withheld plus accrued interest shall be paid to the Contractor, less service charges as specified in the Escrow Agreement. The Escrow Agreement shall be executed by the Contractor in accordance with Section of the General Conditions and shall be one of the Contract Documents. 2. SUBSURFACE CONDITIONS Cross-Reference to Instructions to Bidders, Article 5, and General Conditions, Section A. Boring information, water levels, indications of surface and subsurface conditions and similar information given on the drawings or in the specifications are furnished only for the convenience of the Prime Contractors. Logs of available subsurface explorations, borings and drawings of existing site conditions may be examined by arrangement with the Owner. The Owner, Owner s Representative and their Consultants make no representation regarding the character and extent of the soil data or other surface or subsurface data and conditions to be encountered during the work and assume no 1

108 responsibility and make no guarantee as to the accuracy or completeness of the information. B. Each Contractor by careful examination, shall inform itself as to the nature and location of the work, the conformation of the ground, subsoil and ground water conditions, the character, quality and quantity of the materials to be encountered, the character of equipment and the facilities needed preliminary to and during the prosecution of the work, the general and local conditions and all other matters which can in any way affect the work under his Contract. Each Contractor shall make its own deductions of surface and subsurface conditions which may affect methods or cost of construction of the work of its Contract and Contractor agrees that it will make no claim for damages or other compensation, should it encounter conditions during the progress of the work different from those as calculated and/or anticipated by it. 3. REQUIREMENTS FOR CONTRACTORS ON PUBLIC WORKS PROJECTS A. E-Verify. 1. Contractor shall enroll in and verify the work eligibility status of all newly hired employees of the Contractor through the E-Verify program as described in IC Contractor is not required to verify the work eligibility status of all newly hired employees through the E-Verify program if the E-Verify program no longer exists. Prior to commencing the Work, Contractor shall sign and provide an affidavit, in a form acceptable to Owner, affirming that the Contractor does not knowingly employ any unauthorized aliens. Neither Contractor nor any of its Subcontractors may knowingly (a) employ or contract with an unauthorized alien or (b) retain an employee or contract with a person that the Contractor or Subcontractor subsequently learns is an unauthorized alien. If Contractor uses a Subcontractor to provide work or services for any portion of the Work, Contractor must obtain certification from the Subcontractor that the Subcontractor, at the time of certification (a) does not knowingly employ or contract with any unauthorized aliens, and (b) has enrolled and is participating in the E-Verify program. 2. Prior to commencing any work, Contractor agrees, and represents to Owner, that Contractor and all subcontractors of any tier that furnishes any portion of the Work, either directly or indirectly to Contractor (collectively referred to herein as Subcontractors ), will submit the E-Verify case verification number for each individual who is required to be verified under IC prior to commencing work in connection with the Project. B. Contractor agrees, and represents to Owner, that at least 15% of the Contract Price (at the time this Agreement is executed) is comprised of any combination of the following: 1. Work performed by Contractor s employees; 2. Services supplied directly by Contractor s employees; or 3. Materials supplied directly by Contractor. C. Contractor agrees, and represents to Owner, that Contractor and Subcontractors will comply with the following employee related programs and laws during the Project: 1. Contractor and Subcontractors will not pay cash to any employee for any work 2

109 performed on the Project. 2. Contractor and Subcontractors are, and will continue to be during the Project, in compliance with the following: (a) The Federal Fair Labor Standards Act of 1938, as amended and IC through IC ; (b) IC and IC ; and (c) IC through IC INDIANA UNIVERSITY DELIVERABLES REQUIREMENTS FOR CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS AND AS-BUILT & RECORD DOCUMENTS Cross-Reference to General Conditions, Section Overview of Project Document Deliverables PROJECT SIZE CATEGORIES: Deliverable requirements of construction projects for Indiana University are based on estimated projected costs associated within the scope of work. There are three categories: 1. Projects with an estimated cost at or over $5,000,000 and which would be publicly bid; 2. Projects with an estimated cost under $5,000,000 while also greater than $150,000 and which would be publicly bid; 3. Projects with an estimated cost at or under $150,000 for which invitational bidding would be solicited from pre-qualified contractors; and projects for which pricing was procured through Job Order Contracting (JOC) or other methods not qualifying for categories 1 or 2 above. STANDARD TIME POINTS: While specific requirements for deliverables associated with each of the three above categories vary, the time points establishing the submission of contractual document deliverables for these categories do not. The following time points are based on long-standing practices followed by architects, engineers and contractors. Contract Documents: The process begins with review and acceptance of the construction design documents, known as Contract Documents, or commonly referred to as CD s ; these being either prepared by architectural and or engineering design consultants performing under contract to the University, or by IU s in-house design professionals. Bid Documents: The CD documents (construction drawings, plans, specifications) along with bidding documents and any addendums, are presented as the project s bid documents to construction contractors for competitive bidding. Then the selected contractor will use these documents to effect the project s defined construction. As-built and Record Documents: During the construction phase, changes to the project that modify intent described in original Bid Documents (bid-upon set of plans and specifications) may arise. 1. As-built (or Field Data Set): Changes are recorded by the contractor, resulting in an as-built set (paper or electronic) documents, which are maintained by the contractor through the project s construction and then submitted by the contractor to the designer. 2. Record Drawings: The designer compiles all As-builts submitted by contractor(s) into Record Drawings and/or Record BIM model(s), with the design consultant s 3

110 concurring review of what changes were denoted, why they were made (such as accepted alternate or a found condition, etc.), and where they occurred. Bid Document Deliverables are prepared for the University by a design professional (either consultants performing under contract to the University, or by the University s in-house design professionals when there is no consultant under contract for the project). Bid documents consist of construction drawings, plans, specifications, along with bidding directions and any addendums, in either or both of written and graphic formats. The design professional electronically transmits in.pdf format the full set of construction drawings, specification sections and the addenda to those documents. The University s printing contractor is responsible for paper reproduction and distribution to contractors who have registered to receive the bid documents in order to publically offer a bid proposal for construction of the project. Contract or Construction Documents Deliverables are the same issue of documents cited in the paragraph above, however these deliverables are to be submitted to the University as they were natively created - in Revit.rvt and/or AutoCAD.dwg format and in Word.docx format. These file types are commonly required for public and invitational bid contracts. Within 10 days following award of bid for contract for construction, the design consultant must provide the UAO with one set of files in digital/electronic format as follows: 1. CAD Files; one file each - representing every sheet in the bid documents and with Addenda incorporated. Native CAD files shall be in.dwg format, one file for each sheet in the complete set with all xrefs fully bound. These documents must comply with University Architects Office CAD Standards. Use of AutoCAD e-transmit is recommended to bind each file. 2. Word processing files: all specifications shall be in native Word docx format (other than those provided by IU Business Office for Divisions 0 & 1). 3. Revit files: a design model for each discipline. Refer to Indiana University BIM Guidelines and standards for Architects, Engineers and Contractors. 4. COBie design submittal: When the design of scope of work designates installation of operating building equipment requiring on-going regular maintenance, a COBIE Design submittal is also required to be submitted in standard COBie xlsx workbook format with worksheet info completed for each of the following tabs at a minimum: (Tab2) Facility-ies referenced in the design; (Tab3)(Floor) description of vertical levels; (Tab4) Spaces referenced in the project; (Tab5) System- systems referenced in the project; referenced in the project; (Tab6) Register-material or equipment types(submittal register); (Tab7) Component Individually named materials and equipment. As-Built Deliverables are revisions to the construction documents based on changes that occur in the field. Contractor marks changes onto a field set of prints of the construction plans (required by their contract to be kept on site) as a log, denoting what and where the changes were made. The entire field set of plans denoting the changes are either scanned or created electronically by the contractor such that they clearly show and differentiate changed elements from originally intended. The resultant contractor s field set drawing files (.pdf format file) must then be submitted to the design professional for review and to allow for producing necessary revisions to the native design program, 4

111 whether created in a Revit Model or AutoCAD.dwg files. Changes may be indicated by either graphics or notations. The revised version recording all the changes in the field to the original construction documents is called a Record Drawing, created by the design professional. The submission of the contractor s field set scans and the revised native design files must be in accord for acceptance by the University of these two as-built documents. The University requires electronic project deliverables be submitted via hard copy (CD or DVD). The deliverable should include:.dwg files for each document sheet, and all addenda & specification files. Use of AutoCAD e-transmit to bind all.dwg files is recommended to insure that no x-ref files, text files, or plot styles are lost in the submittal. Refer to the Document Deliverables Matrix below for additional deliverables and their format(s). Specific requirements for Contractor s field record of changes to contract drawings: The Contractor shall keep at the construction site a complete set of full size prints of the contract drawings, reproduced at Contractor expense. During construction, these prints shall be marked to show all deviations in actual construction from the contract drawings. The color red shall be used to indicate all additions and green to indicate all deletions. The drawings shall show the following information but not be limited thereto: a. The locations and description of any utility lines and other installations of any kind or description known to exist within the construction area. The location includes dimensions and elevations of permanent features. b. The locations and dimension of any changes within the building or structure, and the accurate location and dimension of all underground utilities and facilities. c. Correct grade or alignment of roads, structures, and utilities if any changes were made from contract plans. d. Correct elevations if changes were made in site grading from the contract plans. e. Changes in details of design or additional information obtained from working drawings specified to be prepared and/or furnished by the Contractor including, but not limited to, fabrication erection, installation, and placing details, pipe sizes, insulation material, dimensions of equipment foundations, etc. f. The topography and grades of all drainage installed or affected as part of the project construction. g. All changes or modifications from the original design and from the final inspection. h. Where contract drawings or specifications allow options, only the option actually used in the construction shall be shown on the as-built drawings. The option not used shall be indicated as deleted. These deviations shall be shown in the same general detail utilized in the contract 5

112 drawings. Markings of the prints shall be pursued continuously during construction to keep them up to date. This information shall be maintained in a current condition at all times until the completion of the work. The resulting field-marked data shall be referred to and marked as As-Built Field Data and shall be used for no other purpose. They shall be made available for inspection by IU s representative whenever requested during construction and shall be jointly inspected for accuracy and completeness by IU s representative and a responsible representative of the Contractor prior to submission of each monthly pay estimate. Failure to keep the As-Built Field Data (including Equipmentin-Place lists in the COBIE spreadsheet) current shall be sufficient justification to withhold a retained percentage from the monthly pay estimate. Close-out / As-Built Documents Deliverable Requirements Indiana University requires that the As-Built Documents Deliverable be submitted via hard copy (CD or DVD and Paper). The electronic portion of this deliverable should include:.dwg files for each document sheet,.pdf files for each document sheet, As-built Field Data Set (a.pdf of each sheet), and O & M Manuals. When a sheet has no changes, it still must be included along with a notation of no changes on it. Use AutoCAD e-transmit to bind all.dwg files; this is the best way to insure that no x- ref files, text files, or plot styles are lost in the submittal. Follow the As-Built Document Matrix below to determine the responsible party for each deliverable, and in what format. O&M (Operations & Maintenance) Manuals The contractor shall submit to Indiana University one pdf of the O&M manuals along with the Construction Operations Building Information Exchange (COBIE) file; which shall include: (1) the make, model and serial number of each piece of installed equipment, (2) the location of any equipment installed in the building. As-Built and Record Document Deliverable Matrix The following matrix outlines the various As-Built and Record Documents deliverables that are required on two different project categories with the associated responsible parties that will be in place for contracts entered into as of February 1, All deliverables identified in this article are to be provided as indicated. Document Deliverables Matrix The following matrix outlines the Document deliverables required on three different project categories; indicating the associated responsible parties. All deliverables identified in this article are to be provided as indicated. Responsible Parties A/E = Architect/Engineer C = Contractor Category 1: for Bid Projects with an estimated project cost at or over $5 million: Construction Documents Deliverables Resp. Party Quantity Format Due Date IU BIM Proficiency Matrix A/E 1 set.xlsx Prior to selection as required IU BIM Execution Plan A/E, C 1 set.docx 30 days after contract awarded Design BIM Model(s) A/E 1 set.rvt 10 days after construction contract is awarded 6

113 Construction Document CAD Drawings A/E 1 set.dwg &.pdf Addenda A/E 1 set.docx &.pdf 10 days after construction contract is awarded 10 days after construction contract is awarded Category 1 (continued): Specifications A/E 1 set.docx &.pdf 10 days after construction contract is awarded COBie Data (COBie setup) A/E 1 set.xlsx 10 days after construction contract is awarded As-built and Record Documents Deliverables Record Document CAD Drawings and all project Affidavit(s) As-Built Field Mark-ups - Files and/or Scans Operations & Maintenance Manuals (O&M) Resp. Party Quantity Format Due Date A/E (see note) (see note) * 1 set each.pdf &.dwg on CD or DVD as well as 2 sets hard copy (paper). Prior to Final Payment C 1 set.pdf & hard At Substantial Completion & Prior to Final Payment C 1 set.pdf & hard At Substantial Completion & Prior to Final Payment COBie Construction Data C 1 set.xlsx Prior to Final Payment As-Built BIM Model(s) A/E 1 set.rvt Prior to Final Payment Category 2: for Bid Projects with an estimated project cost under $5 million: 7

114 Construction Documents Deliverables Construction Document CAD Drawings Resp. Party Quantity Format A/E 1 set.dwg &.pdf Addenda A/E 1 set.docx &.pdf Specifications A/E 1 set.docx &.pdf Due Date 10 days after construction contract is awarded 10 days after construction contract is awarded 10 days after construction contract is awarded COBie Data (COBie setup) A/E 1 set.xlsx 10 days after construction contract is awarded As-built and Record Documents Deliverables Record Document CAD Drawings and all project Affidavit(s) As-Built Field Mark-ups - Files and/or Scans Resp. Party Quantity Format Due Date A/E (see note) (see note) * 1 set each.pdf &.dwg on CD or DVD as well as 2 sets hard copy (paper). Prior to Final Payment C 1 set.pdf & hard At Substantial Completion & Prior to Final Payment 8

115 Category 2 (continued): Operations & Maintenance Manuals (O&M) C 1 set.pdf & hard At Substantial Completion & Prior to Final Payment COBie Construction Data C 1 set.xlsx Prior to Final Payment Category 3: non-public bid Projects at or under $150,000 of invitational bidding from contractors, or procured through job order contracting (JOC), or other methods not qualifying for categories 1 or 2: Construction Documents Deliverables Resp. Party Quantity Format Due Date Construction Document CAD Drawings A/E 1 set.dwg &.pdf Addenda A/E 1 set.docx &.pdf Specifications A/E 1 set.docx &.pdf As-built and Record Documents Deliverables Record Document CAD Drawings and all project Affidavit(s) As-Built Field Mark-ups - Files and/or Scans Operations & Maintenance Manuals (O&M) Resp. Party A/E (see note) (see note) Quantity Format Due Date C 1 set.pdf & hard 10 days after construction contract is awarded 10 days after construction contract is awarded 10 days after construction contract is awarded * 1 set each.pdf &.dwg on CD or DVD as well as 2 sets hard copy (paper). Prior to Final Payment At Substantial Completion & Prior to Final Payment C 1 set.pdf At Substantial Completion & Prior to Final Payment Responsible Parties A/E = Architect/Engineer C = Contractor Responsible Party shall not be relieved of responsibility when files delivered do not meet established requirements or are defective. Indiana University shall verify all files and the Owner s Representative shall be notified of acceptance. Submittal Standards BIM (Building Information Modeling) - refer to requirements in The Indiana University Building Information Modeling (BIM) Guidelines For Architects, Engineers, and Contractors at: CAD (Computer Aided Design) - refer to the Indiana University and National CAD Standards as outlined at: COBIE (Construction Operations Building Information Exchange) - for spreadsheets, 9

116 instructions, and guidance go to: (COBie2.6 is the version to be used) GIS/SITE for Site, Civil, Landscape and Utilities guidance go to: File Format Standards BIM - Autodesk Revit.rvt - Revit version should closely be coordinated with entire team and Owner and indicated in IU BIM Execution Plan CAD - Autodesk AutoCAD.dwg - format should be AutoCAD version 2014.dwg (AutoCAD release 2014) and each file named for each individual drawing sheet PDF - Adobe pdf format should be configured to allow for text searches and printing. Pdfs should also be rotated to drawing/sheet orientation. Files should be named to match the individual sheet/drawing number. RVT (see BIM above). Definitions Affidavit Signed letter affirmation to the University. A Code Affidavit would be the Architect/Engineer s assurance of project s design meeting current required restrictive codes and laws (such as ADA), and will also list any/all unique deviations allowed by the State to be taken, such as any variance(s). Environmental Affidavit would be the Architect/Engineer s assurance of project s design meeting current required environmental codes and laws, and will also list any and all unique deviations that may have been allowed by the legal jurisdiction. Check with Team Leader for required affidavits on project. As-Built Documents - As-built documents are the collection of paper drawings or electronic drawings that typically reside in the contractor s onsite trailer that contain mark-ups, annotations, and comments about changes that have been made to the contract documents during the construction phase. As-Built Model - Design Intent Models that have been updated throughout the construction process. These changes and updates have been communicated from the Contractor to the Design Team through the comments, annotations, and mark-ups from the As-Built Documents. These typically, but not always, are discipline-specific models. Building Information Model (BIM) - A digital representation of physical and functional characteristics of a facility; a shared knowledge resource for information about a facility forming a reliable basis of decisions during life-cycle, which is defined as existing conception to demolition. BIM Execution Plan (BEP) - A plan that is created from Indiana Universities BIM Execution Plan Template that is to be submitted thirty (30) days after contract award. The BEP helps to define roles and responsibilities within a project team. BIM Proficiency Matrix (BPM) - A matrix that was designed to measure the expertise of a firm as it 10

117 relates to using a BIM process on projects. It will be used by Indiana University as one of the many selection criteria during the selection process. C.O.B.i.e. Construction Operations Building Information Exchange COBIE spreadsheet replaces submission of multiple copies of paper documents delivered at the conclusion of construction. The data required by COBIE is the same information as is currently required by project handover/o&m data. The contractor is to insert installed equipment data in the spreadsheet that will link into designer provided space, and installation information. Operations and Maintenance Manuals (O&M s) Includes all manufacturers warrantee information, product data and maintenance requirements and recommendations as would be required to properly and safely maintain installed building elements and equipment and maintain the warrantee status of same. Also shall include all temperature control drawings, fire protection system documents, security system documents, and Interior Finishes binders (in format as required by UAO Interiors Dept.) Record Drawing - The production of Record Drawings is the capturing of the As-Built Documents annotations, comments, and mark-ups in a drawing format only. This requirement is separate of any updating of any models. Related Documents (for others see VPCPF website: Building Design Standards - CADD Standards G.I.S. Deliverables - Engineering Deliverables Interiors Standards (web page under construction as of date of this edition of this document) Site and Landscape Standards - Space Planning Guidelines - Guidelines-Office-Space.pdf [End of Article 4] THE REMAINDER OF THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 11

118 5. LABOR CONDITIONS A. Each Contractor shall take all steps necessary to avoid any labor disputes or jurisdictional disputes, and strikes or delays resulting therefrom. B. Each Contractor shall install in the work, and use in the prosecution of the work, only such materials, equipment and appliances as are produced and installed or applied without involvement in labor jurisdictional disputes, infractions or interferences, and strikes or delays resulting therefrom. C. Each Contractor shall take all necessary steps to insure labor harmony on the Project and to perform work in accordance with federal, state and local labor regulations. No extra payment shall be due for doing work under this provision, or for delays or damages for failure to observe such requirements. 6. OWNER- FURNISHED MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT Cross-Reference General Conditions, Sections 3.2.1(6)(iii)(d) and Article 6 A. Self-Performance by Owner Each Contractor shall permit the Owner to place and install equipment in accordance with a mutually-agreeable schedule before the completion of its work. The placing and installation of equipment shall not in any way be construed as evidence of the completion or acceptance of the work or any portion thereof. B. Contractor Installation of Owner-Furnished Materials and Equipment In the event that Owner elects to furnish materials or equipment to the Contractor for installation, such equipment or materials shall be noted, indicated or scheduled by the Owner and notice provided to the Contractor, and shall be carefully examined by the Contractor immediately after delivery to the site, and any and all conditions which would prohibit the proper installation or operation of this equipment shall be noted and the Owner informed thereof before acceptance of the materials or equipment for installation. The Contractor shall assume responsibility for such equipment and materials upon receipt thereof, and shall pay for any damage occurring after delivery. 7. CONTRACTOR FURNISHED MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT Cross-Reference General Conditions, Section 3.2.1(6)(iii)(d) Contractor, subcontractors, manufacturers and suppliers furnishing materials and equipment under the various Prime Contracts shall identify, ship, address, consign, etc., all such materials and equipment to the appropriate Prime Contractor who may be charged therewith by giving the name of the Contractor, name of the Project, the street or post office address and the city and under no circumstances may shipments be directed to, or in care of Indiana University. It shall be the sole responsibility of all contractors, etc., to observe this 12

119 requirement, and failure to do so shall in no way be construed as a justifiable construction delay. 8. EQUAL EMPLOYMENT OPPORTUNITY AND UNLAWFUL HARASSMENT Cross-Reference General Conditions, General Conditions, Section and Article 10.5 A. EQUAL EMPLOYMENT OPPORTUNITY 1. During the performance of this Contract, each Contractor agrees as follows: a. The Contractor will not discriminate against any employee or applicant for employment because of race, religion, color, sex, national origin, marital status, age, sexual orientation, veteran status or disability. The Contractor will take affirmative action to ensure that applicants are employed and that employees are treated during employment without regard to their race, religion, color, sex, national origin, marital status, age, sexual orientation, veteran status or disability. Such action shall include, but not be limited to the following: employment, upgrading, demotion or transfer; recruitment or recruitment advertising; layoff or termination; rates of pay or other forms of compensation; and selection for training, including apprenticeship. The Contractor agrees to post in conspicuous places, available to employees and applicants for employment, notices to be provided by an appropriate agency of the Federal Government setting forth the requirements of these nondiscrimination provisions. b. The Contractor will, in all solicitations or advertisements for employees placed by or on the behalf of the Contractor, state that all qualified applicants will receive consideration for employment without regard to race, religion, color, sex, national origin, marital status, age, sexual orientation, veteran status or disability. c. The Contractor will send to each labor union or representative of workers with which he has a collective bargaining agreement or other Contract or understanding a notice to be provided advising the labor union or worker's representative of the contractor's commitments under Section 202 of Executive Order #11246 of September 24, 1965, and shall post copies of the notice in conspicuous places available to employees and applicants for employment. d. The Contractor will comply with all provisions of Executive Order #11246 of September 24, 1965, and of the rules, regulations and relevant orders of the Secretary of Labor. e. The Contractor will furnish all information and reports required by Executive Order #11246 of September 24, 1965, and by the rules, 13

120 regulations and orders of the Secretary of Labor, or pursuant thereto, and will permit access to his books, records, and accounts by an appropriate agency of the Federal Government and by the Secretary of Labor for purposes of investigation to ascertain compliance with such rules, regulations and orders. f. In the event of the Contractor's non-compliance with the Equal Opportunity conditions of this Contract or with any of such rules, regulations or orders, this Contract may be cancelled, terminated or suspended in whole or in part, and the Contractor may be declared ineligible for further Government Contracts, in accordance with procedures, authorized in Executive Order #11246 of September 24, 1965, and such other sanctions may be imposed and remedies invoked as provided in said Executive Order, or by rule, regulation or order of the Secretary of Labor, or as otherwise provided by law. 2. The Contractor will include all of Clauses (1 thru 4 inclusive, of this article) in every subcontract of purchase order unless exempted by rules, regulations or orders of the Secretary of Labor issued pursuant to Section 204 of Executive Order # of September 24, 1965, so that such provision will be binding upon each subcontractor or vendor. The Contractor will take such action with respect to any subcontractor or vendor as the appropriate agency of the Federal Government may direct as a means of enforcing such provisions, including sanctions for noncompliance; provided, however, in the event the contractor becomes involved in, or is threatened with, litigation with a subcontractor or vendor as a result of such direction by the appropriate agency of the Federal Government, the contractor may request the United States to enter into such litigation to protect the interests of the United States. 3. Exempted from the above Equal Employment Opportunity conditions are construction contracts and subcontracts not exceeding $10,000, suppliers, contracts, and material and equipment contracts not exceeding $10,000 for standard commercial supplies or raw materials, and contracts and subcontracts under which work is performed outside of the United States where no recruitment of workers within the United States is involved. 4. In addition to the requirements set forth in Article 14 of the Instructions to Bidders regarding the participation of Minority and Women s Business Enterprises ( MBE/WBE ), the Contractor is required to comply with the following Mandatory Tier II Reporting Requirement: The Contractor shall take all necessary and reasonable steps to ensure that MBE/WBEs have the maximum opportunity to compete for and perform work on this Contract. MBE/WBE utilization in the performance of this Contract must be reported monthly using the IU Online Tier II reporting System. Compliance with Owner s Mandatory Tier II Reporting Requirement is a pre- 14

121 condition for approval of pay applications. (For more information and training, see and click on Tier II Reporting.) The Contractor shall, upon Owner s written request, provide documentation that contracts have been entered into and payments made to Tier II MBE/WBE firms as reported by Contractor. B. UNLAWFUL HARASSMENT 1. The Contractor will not engage in, or tolerate by its employees, subcontractors or agents, any unlawful harassment, including sexual harassment as defined in this section. Harassment on the basis of race, color, religion, sex or national origin is a violation of Section 703 of Title VII of the Civil Rights Act of Sexual harassment is defined as unwelcome sexual advances-requests for sexual favors and other verbal or physical conduct of a sexual nature when: a. Submission to such conduct is made either explicitly or implicitly a term or condition of an individual's employment, or b. Submission to or rejection of such conduct by an individual is used as the basis for employment decisions affecting such individual, or c. Such conduct has the effect of unreasonably interfering with an individual's work or academic performance or creating an intimidating, hostile or offensive working or learning environment. 3. The Contractor will ensure dissemination of this harassment policy to its employees and agents. THE REMAINDER OF THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 15

122 9. INSURANCE REQUIREMENTS Cross-Reference General Conditions, Article 11 INDIANA UNIVERSITY MINIMUM INSURANCE REQUIREMENTS FOR CONSTRUCTION, NON-CONSTRUCTION AND PROFESSIONAL DESIGN CONTRACTS Obligations of Contractors and Consultants Contractors and Consultants (whether corporation, sole proprietorship or partnership) shall procure and maintain during the term of the contract and until final acceptance of the completed work under the contract, insurance of the types of coverages and minimum limits as identified here and shall provide the Owner with Certificate(s) of Insurance evidencing these coverages prior to beginning work. Contractors and Consultants shall be referred to herein as Contractor, irrespective of their area of expertise. It is the responsibility of the Contractor and Subcontractors to become familiar with Owner s insurance requirements and to ensure that they can meet these requirements prior to submitting a bid to perform the work. Please provide this exhibit to your insurance agent so the correct certificate can be issued without delay. No Contractor or Subcontractor of any tier shall be on the jobsite or proceed with work, and shall not be paid for any work performed, until proper certificate(s) of insurance have been submitted to and approved by the Owner. All required insurance policies shall be written by a company(s) authorized to do business in Indiana. The Owner shall not be liable to any person for the failure of the Contractor or any Subcontractor to carry specified insurance. It is the responsibility of all Contractors to ensure that all of its Subcontractors maintain general liability insurance in the minimum amounts required by I.C (b). If any part of any coverage includes a deductible, self insurance, a captive insurance company or a fronting arrangement, the amount so covered must be disclosed on the certificate or in a separate letter from the Contractor. Owner reserves the right to approve of this coverage. NOTE: Contractor is required to meet the insurance specifications during the time of construction and during the warranty period, usually two years after the project is accepted by Owner. THE REMAINDER OF THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 16

123 CERTIFICATE HOLDER: The Trustees of Indiana University 1800 N. Range Road Bloomington, In Insurance Requirements 1. General Liability Construction Contracts o o o o o o Each occurrence: $1 million General aggregate: $2 million Products and Completed Operations: $1 million The "COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY" box must be checked The "OCCUR" box must be checked Per Project box must be checked Design/Consultant Contracts o Each occurrence: $1 million o General aggregate: $2 million o The "COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY" box must be checked o The "OCCUR" box must be checked 2. Automobile Liability The box(es) that is/are checked must include a check in the box for Any Auto or All Owned, Hired and Non-Owned Autos Combined Single Limit coverage: $1 million. If separate Bodily Injury and Property Damage limits are purchased, each must be $1 million. 3. Excess/Umbrella Excess coverage per se is not required. However, any of the dollar amount requirements can be met by a combination of primary and excess coverage. Excess/umbrella coverage must be per occurrence coverage. 17

124 4. Professional Liability Any type of design or consulting contract requires Professional Liability coverage of at least $1 million. Owner reserves the right to require increased limits of coverage if, in the opinion of the Owner, project is hazardous in nature or poses a higher than usual risk. 5. Worker s Compensation The Contractor shall procure and maintain a Workers Compensation policy to cover its obligation under the applicable laws of any state or federal government to its employees employed on the jobsite or elsewhere on this project, including its liability as an employer under common law (commonly known as Employer s Liability Coverage B ) with limits of not less than that listed below. Before commencing work, Contractor shall submit to the Owner a valid State Form (Certificate of Compliance Worker s Compensation and Occupational Diseases) or a facsimile thereof at Owner s option. If the Contractor has no employees (i.e., a one-person shop) then a Certificate of Exception must be obtained from the State. Worker s Compensation: Statutory Employer s Liability: $ 500,000 each accident or disease $ 500,000 policy limit $ 500,000 each employee 6. Builder s Risk Insurance The Owner shall maintain during the course of construction Builder s Risk Insurance in an amount of not less than one hundred percent (100%) of the insurable value of the completed work, including materials, equipment, and supplies on the site and to become a part of the completed work, subject to a $25,000 deductible. The Contractor shall bear responsibility for that deductible. The insured shall be the Owner and the Contractor(s) as their respective interests may appear. The Contractor s loss, if any, is to be adjusted with and payable to the Contractor upon written request to the Owner. The Contractor shall be responsible for and shall insure, if required by the Owner, all materials, equipment, supplies not on the site and to become a part of the completed work, Contractor s equipment, tools, scaffolding, staging, towers, forms and temporary buildings, and other materials, equipment and supplies not intended to become a part of the completed work. 18

125 This provision shall not release the Contractor from its obligation to complete, according to plans and specifications, the work covered by the Contract and the Contractor and its Surety shall be obligated to the full performance of the Contractor s undertaking. NOTE: Prompt notice of potential claims is required. In the advent of a n occurrence that might be covered by Builders Risk insurance, notice must be given to the University within one work day of the occurrence. Except for emergency repairs, no changes to damaged property will be made until an inspection is made. Insurance Policy Endorsements All insurance policies must provide the following endorsements to the policy and must be noted on the certificate(s): 1 1. Additional Insured Endorsement (CG and CG2037) or equivalent form required on General Liability, Automobile Liability and Excess/Umbrella Liability policies naming the Owner and/or Other Parties as defined in Owner s Contract and including coverage for completed operations. Owner shall be identified as: The Trustees of Indiana University, its officers, agents and employees. If additional insured status is automatically granted by the insurance form where required by written contract then it is sufficient to note that on the certificate with a reference to the form number. This must include information about the Excess/Umbrella coverage, e.g., Excess coverage is following form. 2. Aggregate Per Project Endorsement (CG2503) to the General Liability Policy indicating that the general aggregate applies separately to each project. 3. Waiver of Subrogation on General Liability, Automobile Liability, and Employer s Liability/Workers Compensation Policies in favor of the Owner. 4. All insurance policies shall be primary and non-contributing with respect to any insurance carried by the Owner, and shall contain a severability of interests clause in respect to liability, protecting each insured as though a separate policy had been issued to each. 5. All policies shall contain a covenant requiring (30) days written notice by the insurer to the Indiana University Office of Risk Management before cancellation, reduction or other modifications of coverage for any reason, whenever possible. Certificate Details Description of Operations The DOO must include the Indiana University project name and project number to which this coverage applies. 1 An addendum to the COI can be used if additional space is needed. 19

126 Insurance Companies All insurance carriers selected by contractor must be rated A- or above in the most recent edition of the A.M. Best s Key Rating Guide. Hold Harmless Agreement Contractor shall indemnify and save harmless the Owner from any and all losses, costs, damages, liability and expenses, including reasonable attorney fees, arising out of or in conjunction with claims or suits for damage to any property not included in the scope of work and/or injury to persons, including Contractor s employees and all Subcontractor s employees of any tier, including death, alleged or claimed to have been caused by or through the performance of the work or operations incidental to the work by the Contractor, its agents or employees, or by its Subcontractors of any tier, their agents or employees, whether through negligence or willful act; and Contractor shall, at the request of Owner, undertake to investigate and defend any and all such claims or suits against Owner. Hold Harmless Agreement Consultants With regard to losses, costs, damages, liability and expenses, including reasonable attorney fees ( Losses ) that may be covered by Consultant s professional liability insurance, Consultant shall indemnify and save harmless the Owner from any and all Losses arising out of or in conjunction with claims or suits for damage to any property not included in the scope of work and/or injury to persons, including Consultant s employees and all employees of a Sub-Consultant, if any, of any tier, including death, caused by or through the performance of the work or operations incidental to the work by the Consultant, its agents or employees, or by its Sub-Consultants, if any, of any tier, their agents or employees, whether through negligence or willful act and Consultant. With regard to losses, costs, damages, liability and expenses, including reasonable attorney fees ( Losses ) that may be covered by Consultant s other liability insurance programs, Consultant shall indemnify and save harmless the Owner from any and all losses, costs, damages, liability and expenses, including reasonable attorney fees ( Losses ), arising out of or in conjunction with claims or suits for damage to any property not included in the scope of work and/or injury to persons, including Consultant s employees and all employees of a Sub-Consultant, if any, of any tier, including death, alleged or claimed to have been caused by or through the performance of the work or operations incidental to the work by the Consultant, its agents or employees, or by its Sub-Consultants, if any, of any tier, their agents or employees, whether through negligence or willful act and Consultant shall, at the request of Owner, undertake to investigate and defend any and all such claims or suits against Owner. 20

127 10. CLOSE-OUT PROCEDURES Cross-Reference General Conditions, Section 9.8 and, 9.9 These Close-out Procedures are governed by Project Drawings, General Conditions, these Supplementary Conditions and provide the administrative and procedural requirements for contract closeout. At Substantial Completion A. Before requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion, Contractor shall complete the following: 1. Prepare a list of items to be completed and corrected (punch list), the value of items on the list, and reasons why the Work is not complete. 2. Advise Owner of pending insurance changeover requirements. 3. Furnish to the Owner a pdf version, searchable and printable, of the Maintenance and Operating Instructions and parts lists for all operating, general, mechanical, electrical, and control equipment and all other manufactured items installed by the Contractor. The operating instructions shall integrate each piece of equipment in any one system in to a numbered step by step sequence of operation. The parts listed shall consist of exploded views or parts listing, with all component parts numbered, for each piece of operating or expandable equipment. These operating instructions and parts lists must be furnished to the Owner prior to the time when the equipment is checked out and turned over to the Owner for operation or before the final payment on the Contract will be processed. 4. Submit As-Built Field Data Set Scans. 5. Submit specific warranties, workmanship bonds, maintenance service agreements, final certifications, and similar documents. 6. Obtain and submit releases permitting Owner unrestricted use of the Work and access to services and utilities. Include occupancy permits, operating certificates, and similar releases. 7. Deliver tools, spare parts, extra materials, and similar items to location designated by Owner. 8. Label with manufacturer's name and model number where applicable. 9. Make final changeover of permanent locks and deliver keys to Owner. Advise Owner's personnel of changeover in security provisions. 10. Complete startup testing of systems. 11. Submit testing, adjusting and balancing records. 12. Terminate and remove temporary facilities from Project site, along with mockups, construction tools, and similar elements. 13. Advise Owner of changeover in heat and other utilities. 14. Submit changeover information related to Owner's occupancy, use, operation, and maintenance. 15. Complete final cleaning requirements. 21

128 16. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes to eliminate visual defects, including touchup painting. B. Submit a written request for inspection for Substantial Completion. On receipt of request, Owner s Representative will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Owner may assign its own staff to accompany Owner s Representative on the inspection and may require Owner s Representative and Consultants to provide additional inspections. Owner s Representative will prepare the Certificate of Substantial Completion after inspection or will notify Contractor of items, either on Contractor's list or additional items identified by Owner s Representative that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued. C. Reinspection: Contractor shall request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected. D. Results of completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for Final Completion. List of Incomplete Items (Punch List) A. Preparation: Submit one (1) copy of list in PDF format. Include name and identification of each space and area affected by construction operations for incomplete items and items needing correction including, if necessary, areas disturbed by Contractor that are outside the limits of construction. 1. Organize list of spaces in sequential order, starting with exterior areas first and proceeding from lowest floor to highest floor. 2. Organize items applying to each space by major element, including categories for sitework, building exterior, roof, ceiling, individual walls, floors, equipment, and building systems. 3. Include date for completion of each incomplete item. 4. Include the following information at the top of each page: a. Project name. b. Date. c. Indiana University Project Number: d. Name of Owner s Representative. e. Name of Contractor. f. Page number. B. All Punch List items shall be complete within sixty (60) days from original date of punch list inspection. C. Do not use extra materials required by Contract Documents to be delivered to Owner to repair or correct Punch List items. 22

129 Prior to Final Completion and Final Payment Before requesting final inspection for determining date of Final Completion, Contractor shall complete the following: A. Submit a final Application for Payment. B. Prepare and submit Project Record Documents, Record Drawings, Record Specifications, Final Completion construction photographs, damage or settlement surveys, and similar final record information. C. Orient and instruct the maintenance personnel designated by the Owner in the operation and maintenance of all equipment installed by the Contractor. D. Submit the following: 2. Final approved Lock-Out/Tag-Out manuals as identified in the Project Specifications. 3. Certified copy of Owner s Representative's Substantial Completion inspection list Punch List items, endorsed and dated by Owner s Representative. The certified copy of the list shall state that each item has been completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance. 4. Evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage complying with insurance requirements. 5. Pest-control final inspection report and warranty. 6. Demonstration and training DVDs. 7. Evidence of completion of Contractor documentation submittals for LEED credits that involve Contractor input. E. Submit a written request for final inspection for acceptance. On receipt of request, Owner s Representative will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Owner s Representative will conduct the inspection to verify that construction is in compliance with Contract Documents and authorities having jurisdiction. Owner may assign its own staff to accompany Owner s Representative on the inspection and may require Owner s Representative and Consultants to provide additional inspections. Owner s Representative will prepare a final Certificate for Payment after inspection or will notify Contractor of construction that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued. F. Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected 23

130

131 Indiana University Project Site Requirements Index to Sections 1. Temporary Structures, Signs, Fences, Field Offices and Phones. 2. Temporary Hoists, Chutes, Derricks, Scaffold, Stairs, Etc. 3. Temporary Services (General) 4. Temporary Toilets 5. Temporary Water and Fire Protection 6. Temporary Light and Power 7. Temporary Heating/Cooling 8. Temporary Use of Elevators 9. Temporary Enclosures and Ventilation 10. Protective Coverings and Measures 11. Temporary Material Storage 12. Existing Utilities 13. Construction Loads on Building Structures 14. Site Drainage, Pumping and Storm Water Management 15. Waste Disposal and Asbestos Handling 16. Mandatory Environmental Health and Safety Training 17. Temporary Access to Site and Parking The following Site Requirements shall be observed on all Indiana University Projects. These requirements are articulated as if the project is a multi-prime project. In the event that this is a single Prime project, all references to Each Contractor shall be construed to mean the General Contractor. 1. TEMPORARY STRUCTURES, SIGNS, FENCES, FIELD OFFICES AND PHONES A. Structures Each Contractor shall construct and maintain, in locations approved by the Owner s Representative, all temporary structures, material sheds, storage sheds, or other similar enclosed structures required for the performance of this Contract. All temporary structures are to be removed from the site by the Contractor upon completion of the Project, or sooner, if so requested by Owner s Representative. B. Construction Sign The General Contractor shall construct and maintain one construction sign 4 high by 8 long, or 32 square feet, constructed of plywood properly mounted and framed. The information appearing on this sign shall be as directed by the Owner s Representative and will, in general, include the following: Owner's Name Name of Project Owner s Representative's Name Engineer's Name Consultant's Name General Contractor's Name Mechanical Contractor's Name Electrical Contractor's Name 1. No additional signs will be permitted without the written consent and approval of the Owner and Owner s Representative. Project Site Requirements Page 1 of 14 January 2012

132 2. Signs shall be provided with treated wood posts and 3/4 thick exterior grade (A-C faces) plywood panels, all substantially constructed and adequately braced. 3. All lumber, plywood and bracing shall be painted two coats of exterior paint on all exposed surfaces, in colors designated by the Owner s Representative. 4. All lettering, graphics and colors shall be in accordance with the designs furnished by the Owner s Representative. 5. General Contractor shall remove construction sign from site when directed by Owner s Representative. C. Construction Fence The General Contractor shall furnish, erect and properly maintain a temporary chain link fence, 6 0 high, complete with privacy fabric, top and bottom horizontal support, man and vehicle gates as appropriate for the project conditions, which shall remain in place until such time as directed by the Owner to be removed. The fence shall be located on the Contract Limit Line or where the progress of work dictates. D. Contractors' Field Offices Each Contractor shall provide at all times, for his own use, an adequate, weather tight temporary field office, located on the site in a location approved by the Owner s Representative. E. Owner s Representative's and Owner's Field Offices The General Contractor shall provide late model field office trailers of not less than 600 total square feet, for the use of the Owner s Representative, Owner, and their representatives. These spaces shall be heated (thermostatically controlled), air conditioned, and lighted. Each shall be provided with clean and adequate toilet facilities, including water and sanitary services. When directed, the Contractor shall move the Owner s Representative's and Owner's Field Offices into suitable space in the building. 1. The General Contractor shall provide a desk with chair and 8-foot long plan table, two plan racks, one 4-drawer legal size file with locks, one table adequate for seating 12 persons and 12 folding chairs, a telephone, and fire extinguishers. 2. The General Contractor shall supply and pay for all maintenance, janitorial services in connection with the Owner s Representative's & Owner's Field Offices. The General Contractor shall provide and pay for the installation of telephones, using the Owner's telephone system, where possible, for use by the representatives of the Owner and the Owner s Representative. The Owner will pay for the use of the telephones to be used by the Owner and the Owner s Representative. Project Site Requirements Page 2 of 14 January 2012

133 F. Temporary Phones Telephone services are available in the vicinity of the construction site, and each Contractor shall deal directly with the local telephone company for its individual needs. The General Contractor shall have installed and maintained one or more field telephones for the use of its personnel during the entire construction period. G. Internet Access The Contractor is required to have internet access, as well as printing capabilities, on site at all times during construction operations. 2. TEMPORARY HOISTS, CHUTES, DERRICKS, SCAFFOLD, STAIRS, ETC. A. Contractor to Provide Each Contractor shall furnish and maintain all equipment such as temporary hoists, chutes, derricks, scaffolds, staging, stairs, ramps, runways, ladders, and similar items required for the proper execution of its work, and shall provide or arrange for the use of such facilities by all its subcontractors or trades as required to carry out its work, and shall remove or arrange for the removal of all such items when no longer required. B. Legal Requirements All such apparatus, equipment and construction shall meet the requirements of the labor laws and regulations applicable thereto and of the authorities having jurisdiction over same. C. Removal of Rubbish--General No materials, rubbish or debris will be permitted to drop free, but shall be removed by use of the material hoist, rubbish chute (closed, dust-tight type) or other method approved by the Owner s Representative. Rubbish shall be removed frequently; daily from the building, weekly from the site. Specific requirements related to waste disposal and stormwater management are set forth in Section 17. D. Protection of the Work No materials will be permitted to be passed through the finished openings of the exterior walls without proper protection of the openings in a manner approved by the Owner s Representative. Hoists and chutes shall be so protected as to prevent damage, staining or marring of any permanent work. E. Temporary Stairs Permanent stairs shall be erected as soon as possible and the General Contractor shall provide same with temporary protective treads, risers, handrails and shaft protection. The General Contractor shall provide safe, convenient access from floor to floor as the construction progresses. Permanent ladders and stairs may be used when available, providing same shall be safely prepared for such use. All devices so used shall conform to the Standards prescribed in the Safety Code for the Construction Industry, State of Indiana, to OSHA, and such other codes as are applicable. F. Temporary Sidewalks The General Contractor shall erect temporary sidewalks as required where existing sidewalks are rendered inadequate by work on the Project site. Temporary sidewalks shall be complete with all necessary timber uprights, braces, crossbeams, plank walk, railings and the like, all installed in such manner so Project Site Requirements Page 3 of 14 January 2012

134 as not to interfere with the execution of the work, or safety and convenience of all persons using walks. G. Temporary Sidewalk and Materials Bridges The General Contractor shall erect temporary sidewalks and materials bridges, if required, where building operations are conducted within 30 feet of public sidewalks in order to provide adequate protection to the public and the Owner during the execution of the work of all Prime Contracts. The General Contractor shall construct bridges complete with necessary up-rights, braces, cross beams, plank top and screened guard rails on all sides and ends, and with watertight ceiling, lighting, signs and safety barricades, all in strict accordance with the requirements of local ordinances and regulations. 3. TEMPORARY SERVICES (GENERAL) On projects for new construction, the General Contractor shall arrange for and pay all costs in connection with the furnishing and maintaining of all temporary toilets, water supply, light and power, heating, cooling, natural gas, chilled water, steam and local telephone service as required for the proper and expeditious prosecution of the work of all Prime Contracts. The General Contractor shall provide metering for temporary water and electrical utilities. The General Contractor shall make all connections to existing services and sources of supply, shall provide all necessary installations, labor, materials, and the like, in a manner subject to the approval of the Owner s Representative and shall remove the temporary installations and connections when no longer required, or when so directed by the Owner s Representative. 4. TEMPORARY TOILETS A. The General Contractor shall provide, erect, service and maintain temporary toilets of an approved type at convenient locations on the premises, and through the building as construction progresses, for use by all Contractors and their workers on the Project. The General Contractor shall connect same to existing sanitary sewer lines or to the building sanitary sewers as completed. Toilets shall be maintained in a sanitary condition and equipped for the use of all workers. B. When permanent toilet facilities can be provided within the building, the temporary structures and facilities shall be removed and disposed of by the General Contractor, closing all temporary openings in an acceptable permanent manner. Workers on-site after the temporary toilet facilities are removed may use those permanent toilet facilities identified by the Owner. These permanent toilet facilities shall be serviced regularly and returned to the Owner in first class condition when the Project is completed. 5. TEMPORARY WATER AND FIRE PROTECTION A. The General Contractor shall provide and pay for the installation, maintenance and removal of a 2-1/2 combination temporary fire protection and service water stand pipe at 1/4 points of the building - total of four stand pipes, for use by all Project Site Requirements Page 4 of 14 January 2012

135 Contractors on the Project. Each stand pipe, at each floor, shall be equipped with 1 1-1/2 valve, 100 ft. of fire hose in an enclosure painted red, plainly marked for fire only, plus two 3/4 hose bibs not enclosed. The fire hose shall be maintained in operable condition at all times and shall be used only for fire protection. Any Contractor requiring water at points other than those identified in this Paragraph shall be responsible for, and pay for any extension necessary. B. The stand pipes shall be installed as quickly as construction permits and shall be extended floor by floor as the building construction progresses. C. In addition to the fire hose, the General Contractor shall provide, install and pay for one ABC type fire extinguisher and one CO2 type fire extinguisher at each fire hose location. The extinguishers shall be in an enclosure, painted red, and plainly marked for fire only. D. In addition to the fire protection described above, wherever and whenever any soldering, cutting, burning or welding operations are in progress or any equipment is in use, or any work is being performed that involves a fire hazard, the Prime Contractor that is responsible for such operation shall be responsible for maintaining an acceptable fire extinguisher within five feet of such an operation. At all times when any of the previously described operations are being performed that might result in flying sparks, hot slag, etc., the Contractor responsible for the operator's performance shall furnish a fire blanket of sufficient size to prevent the sparks, hot slag, etc., from coming in contact with combustible material. In particular, guard against passing of sparks, heated slag, etc., through pipe sleeves, duct openings, conduit openings or similar apertures by the use of an asbestos blanket. E. The General Contractor shall pay for all service deposits and water used for construction, and shall furnish and install all materials and equipment necessary for a metered water service, for use by all Contractors on the Project. Further, the General Contractor shall fully inform itself as to connection point or points and water pressure available. F. Contractor shall comply with owner s hot work permitting requirements, which will be addressed in the mandatory Environmental Health and Safety training required by Section 16 of these Project Site Requirements. G. Temporary Fire Alarm The General Contractors shall install, maintain and remove a temporary wireless fire detection system to be provided by the Owner as quickly as construction permits and in accordance with guidance from the local Authority Having Jurisdiction. Temporary devices shall be located in the same general locations as indicated for permanent devices. The system shall be returned to the Owner after removal. The fire detection system must be connected through the MDF Room and report to the local Indiana University Police Department. H. The permanent fire detection and controls equipment associated with the HVAC systems must be completely installed and programmed 120 days before substantial Project Site Requirements Page 5 of 14 January 2012

136 completion. The permanent fire detection system throughout the building must be operating 90 days prior to substantial completion. I. Temporary Building Data Network The General Contractor shall be responsible for furnishing and installing sufficient facilities to provide access to the IU data network. This network access is required to serve alarm systems such as fire and security during construction. IU will provide a network switch in the MDF of buildings under construction. The room housing the temporary service (this can be the MDF) must be secured with the key lock, it must contain a UPS with 4-hour run time, line power must be available, and the space must be conditioned with AC and filtered air to prevent dust entrainment. Permanent pathways from the source of the IU network to the MDF is preferred, and may be used for temporary network access. Temporary pathways from the source of the IU network to the temporary room is allowed, and must be removed and replaced with permanent pathways as part of the project. 6. TEMPORARY LIGHT AND POWER A. The General Contractor shall arrange for and pay for all metered temporary electric light and power for the work of all Prime Contractors and their trades and subcontractors as required throughout the work by the Prime Contractors. The General Contractor shall pay all costs for the installation, maintenance and use of equipment for such temporary light and power, including metering of temporary electrical power. 1. The General Contractor shall make all necessary arrangements to provide temporary electrical power, to arrange for its distribution, to continue its service throughout construction, to remove same, and to pay for all costs incidental thereto, all as identified herein. 2. Electrical power at 120/208/480 volts - 3 phase, 4 wire capability is available within convenient reach of the project. 3. Temporary lighting that complies with applicable federal and state codes shall be continuously provided in all stairways, corridors, and in all other work areas for all Contractors on the project. The General Contractor shall also provide as needed; area flood lights, guard lights at barricades, obstructions in streets, drives, walks and at all trenches or pits adjacent to public areas within the area of construction by any Contractor on this project. 4. The service entrance shall terminate in a minimum of two 400 ampere fused NEMA 3R rain tight main switches. From the service entrance location there shall be a minimum of two 400 ampere feeders to a minimum of two fused distribution panel boards on each floor. Such distribution panel boards shall be located at third points of the building and shall contain proper fusing for all temporary wiring extensions. Transformers required for the service outlined shall be provided as a part of the service entrance. Project Site Requirements Page 6 of 14 January 2012

137 5. Temporary distribution from these panels shall provide single phase, 120 volt, 20 ampere service to outlets within 50 feet of any portion of the building, and a single phase, 208 volts, for a 10 horsepower maximum capacity within 200 feet of any portion of the building. Outlets and bulbs shall be provided by the General Contractor to produce not less than 1/5 watt per square foot of floor area throughout the building. 6. All temporary wiring shall include a green equipment grounding conductor and the entire temporary system shall have equipment grounding continuity. All outlets for the connection of portable electrical equipment shall be of the grounding type. All elements of the temporary electric service shall conform to the regulations of the National Electric Code, the National Electric Safety Code, the Safety Code for the Construction Industry, and O.S.H.A., which shall include such ground fault service as required to protect operating personnel. 7. Each Contractor and/or subcontractor shall furnish any necessary wiring and extension cords to reach from the nearest outlet to its point of operation. All such devices shall conform to the above provisions or be rejected for use by the Owner s Representative or Owner. 8. No permanent power from permanent sources shall be used without the Owner's written permission indicating the conditions whereby it may be used. Consideration will not be given for the use of lights, wiring devices or other electric equipment until the building is in the finishing stages or unless it is in the Owner's interests. 9. The General Contractor shall maintain strict supervision over the use of the temporary electric service and shall be responsible for damages caused by misuse of same. Violation of safe practices, abuse of the service, or failure to conform to the above standards shall be sufficient cause for the Owner s Representative or Owner to take such action as will correct the condition. 10. Upon completion of the Project or when directed by the Owner s Representative, all temporary light and power equipment shall be removed by the General Contractor. 7. TEMPORARY HEATING/COOLING A. The General Contractor shall be responsible for furnishing and installing and subsequent removal of a temporary metered heating/cooling system for use by all Contractors on the Project, within the new building as weather and construction conditions demand, and as required for the installation of any material or for working conditions required by any trade or trades within the building. Temporary heat shall Project Site Requirements Page 7 of 14 January 2012

138 be provided to prevent freezing within the building, to provide suitable working conditions, to assure progress of the operation within the established schedule time, and to conform to specific requirements of the Contract Documents. In areas where finishing trades are working or have completed their work, temporary heat shall be maintained at a uniform temperature of 70 F until the completion of the Project. B. The General Contractor shall provide and pay for all materials, labor, water, tools, electric wiring, fuel, and electric power, operating services and any items incidental and required for a complete and operable system of temporary heat, so long as any system of temporary heating/cooling is in operation and required by any trade or crafts within the building. C. The General Contractor shall maintain a system of temporary heating/cooling until total completion and final acceptance by the Owner, even if the Owner exercises its right, pursuant to Section of the General Conditions to take Beneficial Occupancy of some or all of the building. The entire cost of providing temporary heating/cooling shall be the responsibility of the General Contractor until substantial completion. D. Equipment shall be oil or gas fired, electric blower operated, and shall not require a vent from the heated/cooled space. Open flame type units similar to Salamanders shall not be used. E. All spaces where temporary heating/cooling is required shall be maintained at a minimum of 50 F. during working hours and at a minimum of 40 F. during nonworking hours, or as required for building construction or any trade requirements. Also, for a minimum of seven days prior to any interior finishing, (wood, painting, varnishing, resilient tile, acoustical ceilings, etc.) and until final acceptance by Owner or during partial occupancy by Owner, spaces shall be maintained according to design conditions on a 24 hour, 7 days basis. F. None of the permanent heating/cooling systems nor any of their component parts shall be available for temporary heating/cooling until the building is in the finishing stages, (finish painting, varnishing, paneling, wood, resilient tile, acoustical ceiling, etc.). At the point at which the permanent heating/cooling system is completely installed as designed, including permanent wiring connections to a permanent power source, the Contractor may make a request, in writing, to the Owner to use the permanent heating/cooling systems to supply temporary heating/cooling for the remainder of the Project. The Owner shall be sole judge of building conditions and heating/cooling system conditions concerning the permission to use the permanent heating/cooling systems for supplying temporary heating/cooling. Furthermore, if Owner grants permission for Contractor to use the permanent heating/cooling systems for temporary heating/cooling, the warranty on such permanent heating/cooling systems, including their component parts, shall not start to run until Contractor ceases its use of the permanent heating/cooling systems. Project Site Requirements Page 8 of 14 January 2012

139 G. The General Contractor shall be responsible for all phases of operation, maintenance, and items of like nature during the time the permanent heating/cooling system is used to furnish temporary heating/cooling. The General Contractor shall assume all responsibility of coordination among other Contractors and/or trades concerning the installation of their permanent systems for use for temporary heating/cooling and extension of the warmth/cooling. H. At the termination of the use of the permanent systems as a temporary heating system, the systems shall be cleaned, equipped with new filters, equipped with new belts if required, etc., and any damage repaired or replaced at the expense of the General Contractor. 8. TEMPORARY USE OF ELEVATORS A. Temporary Use The General Contractor may arrange for the temporary use of elevators by all Prime Contractors, if required, during the construction period, to transport equipment and materials only during the finishing stages of the Project. B. Temporary Cars The General Contractor shall furnish the required cars with car switch, gate contact, and all necessary operating and safety devices, city and state tests and certificates. C. Temporary Cab Enclosures, Etc. The General Contractor shall provide the required cab enclosures, temporary hoistway entrances and hoistway doors, temporary protection of hoistway openings, protection of permanent hoistway entrances or other installed finished work, and such other items as are necessary to permit temporary operation in accordance with local, state and national codes. The General Contractor shall provide all necessary maintenance of the elevators during the period of temporary operation. The General Contractor shall restore elevators to their original perfect condition and furnish guarantee as specified. All costs in connection with operation of the temporary elevators shall be paid by the General Contractor. The General Contractor shall extend all guarantees and warranties for two (2) years from date of acceptance of the Project by the Owner. 9. TEMPORARY ENCLOSURES AND VENTILATION A. The General Contractor shall provide temporary enclosures for all exterior openings, as soon as the building structure is erected and otherwise made weather-tight, or whenever necessary in order to provide suitable working conditions within the building. The General Contractor shall provide suitable means for ventilation of the building and to permit the exit of water vapor from the building at all times. The permanent door enclosures shall not be used as temporary enclosures, but temporary doors with proper hardware to make them self-closing shall be provided. 10. PROTECTIVE COVERINGS AND MEASURES Project Site Requirements Page 9 of 14 January 2012

140 A. Finished Surfaces The General Contractor shall protect all finished surfaces, including the jambs and soffits of all openings used as passageways or through which materials are handled, against any possible damage resulting from the conduct of work by all Prime Contractors and their trades and subcontractors. 1. The finished surfaces shall be clean and not marred upon delivery of the Project to the Owner. The General Contractor shall, without extra compensation, replace, repair or refinish (as determined by the Owner s Representative) all such spaces where painted or finished surfaces prove to have been inadequately protected and are damaged. B. Materials Stored on Finished Surfaces The General Contractor shall provide tight, non-staining wood sheathing under any materials that are stored on finished surfaces and shall provide planking on finished surfaces before moving any materials over those finished areas. C. Roof and Waterproof Surfaces Roof and waterproof surfaces shall not be subjected to traffic, nor shall they be used for storage of material. Where some activity must take place in order to carry out the work of the Prime Contracts, adequate protection, subject to approval by the Owner s Representative, shall be provided by the General Contractor. D. Glass All glass shall be protected and kept clean during the entire construction period by the General Contractor. All damaged, etched, defaced or broken glass shall be replaced at the General Contractor's expense. 11. TEMPORARY MATERIAL STORAGE A. The General Contractor shall be responsible for and shall cooperate and coordinate with other Contractors requiring storage at the site. B. All Contractors on this Project shall be restricted to the Contract Limit Lines of the construction site and/or to any additional area as shown on the Site Plan and shall verify locations with the Owner s Representative prior to storing any materials. C. All Contractors on this Project shall confine equipment, storage of materials, and the operations of workers to limits indicated on the drawings. Any area indicated on drawings or designated elsewhere by the Owner for storage of materials shall be returned to its original condition upon completion of the Project at no cost to the Owner. D. Should any Contractor require additional storage area, acquisition of such additional storage shall be at that Contractor's expense, shall not be on Owner s property and shall not be invoiced or otherwise charged to Owner on monthly pay applications. Project Site Requirements Page 10 of 14 January 2012

141 12. EXISTING UTILITIES A. Notification of Utility Companies The General Contractor, in accordance with local laws and ordinances, shall notify appropriate utilities, with copy to the Owner s Representative and Owner, not less than 48 hours in advance of any excavation or work in, around or on utility lines. B. Protection and Maintenance of Existing Utilities Existing utilities are shown in the Contract Documents in their approximate locations from available information. The General Contractor shall ascertain exact locations of utilities that may be affected by the work of all Prime Contractors on this Project, and shall be responsible for the protection and maintenance of such utilities, and shall be responsible for any damage or injury that may result from working on or near these utilities. C. Utilities Not Indicated If existing utilities are encountered which are not indicated on the drawings, the General Contractor shall protect such utilities and notify the Owner s Representative and the Owner of their presence. If any such utilities not indicated on the drawings which are to remain in service are damaged by any of the Prime Contractors, the General Contractor shall take such action as reasonably required to minimize the damage and shall promptly restore the system to operating condition as directed by the Project Engineer and the Owner s Representative. D. Owner-Provided Systems - The Contractor shall in no circumstances tap into Ownerprovided systems, including but not limited to steam, without prior notice to the Owner. Upon obtaining the Owner s consent, the Contractor shall schedule the tap-in at a time when Owner s personnel can be present. If Contractor fails to comply with this provision, Contractor shall be reimburse the Owner for all costs incurred, including but not limited to all damages incurred and not covered by Builders Risk insurance for any reason, whether to property included or not included within the original scope of work. 13. CONSTRUCTION LOADS ON BUILDING STRUCTURES The structure is designed to support the loads of the finished building. No provision is included for stresses or loads imposed by construction operations. If the Contractor desires to place such loads in excess of the design load (shown on drawings), it shall submit drawings and calculations prepared by, and bearing the seal of a Professional Engineer of the proposed method for supporting such loads for the Owner s Representative's review and approval. No loading of any kind in excess of design loads shall be placed on any part of the building structure prior to Owner s Representative's approval of submitted drawings and calculations. The costs of the Owner s Representative's review shall be borne by the Contractor. 14. SITE DRAINAGE, PUMPING, STORM WATER MANAGEMENT A. Site Drainage The General Contractor shall take over the responsibility for site drainage upon entering the premises and shall maintain such drainage during the term of all Prime Contracts in a manner approved by the Owner s Representative and so as Project Site Requirements Page 11 of 14 January 2012

142 not to adversely affect the construction, the building during various stages and the adjacent areas. B. Pumping The General Contractor shall, during the progress of the work of all Prime Contracts, provide and maintain all required pumps, suction and discharge lines, power, etc., in sufficient number, capacity, and configurations to keep all excavations, pits, trenches, footings, foundations, and the entire property area free from accumulation of water from any source whatsoever, and also keep the Project dry and free of water, at all times and under any and all circumstances and contingencies that may arise. C. Stormwater Management The Contractor shall be responsible for the management of storm water run-off from the worksite in accordance with Indiana Administrative Code Rule 5, Storm Water Run-Off Associated with Construction Activity, 327 IAC 15-5 et seq. The Contractor shall use the Indiana Storm Water Quality Manual published by the Indiana Department of Environmental Management, /4988.htm, as a guidance document when choosing best management practices for sediment and erosion control at the site. D. Contractor shall pay Owner for any costs Owner incurs based on Contractor s noncompliance with this Section, including but not limited to repair or remediation costs, fines or penalties imposed on Owner by any regulating authority, and any fees or costs paid to attorneys or consultants arising out of a prohibited stormwater discharge WASTE DISPOSAL AND ASBESTOS HANDLING A. Waste Disposal The Contractor shall be responsible for disposal, recycling or reclamation of all solid or hazardous waste generated by its performance of the Work. The Contractor shall comply with all applicable state and federal regulations in handling, storing, transporting and disposing of solid or hazardous waste. 1. The Contractor acknowledges its recognition and understanding that clean fill is defined by 329 IAC (1) to consist only of uncontaminated rocks, brick, concrete, road demolition waste materials or dirt, and expressly does not include painted material and treated wood. Contractor shall dispose of any waste that contains painted materials and treated wood as solid waste. 2. Prior to the removal from the site of any solid waste or clean fill, the Contractor shall inform the Owner s Representative of the intended disposal site for the material. The Owner has the right, but not the responsibility, to reject a site as suitable for the disposal of the material, and the Contractor shall bear any cost or expense associated with identifying an appropriate alternative disposal site. 3. The Contractor shall provide the Owner s Representative with a copy of all transport and material acceptance documents related to the disposal of solid Project Site Requirements Page 12 of 14 January 2012

143 waste or clean fill, such as tare weights and bills of lading, upon receipt by the Contractor. 4. Within 10 days of shipment off-site of any hazardous waste, the Contractor shall provide the Owner s Representative with a copy of all hazardous waste manifests. The Contractor shall provide Owner s Representative with a copy of the manifest signed by the TSD (Treatment Storage and Disposal) company within 10 days of receipt by the Contractor. B. Asbestos Handling Contractor is expected to be familiar with the appearance and likely locations of asbestos and asbestos containing materials ( ACM ), even if demolition and/or asbestos abatement is not a contracted-for part of the Work. 1. Technical specifications prepared by the Owner or the Owner's Representative may identify the nature and extent of asbestos to the extent known at the time of issuance of the specifications, but site conditions as of the time of the preparation of specifications may prevent complete and accurate identification the exact nature and extent of asbestos or ACM at the Project site. 2. Contractor may encounter asbestos or ACM during the course of the work. In the event that Contractor observes material that is suspected to be asbestos or ACM, Contractor shall stop work immediately and notify the Owner s Representative, who shall direct next steps in terms of testing, removal and disposal. If the suspicious material is determined to be asbestos or ACM, Contractor may be directed to undertake the removal and disposal of the material by way of a Construction Change Directive or, at the Owner s discretion, a third party may be hired to undertake this work. C. Contractor shall pay Owner for any costs Owner incurs based on Contractor s noncompliance with this Section, including but not limited to repair or remediation costs, fines or penalties imposed on Owner by any regulating authority, and any fees or costs paid to attorneys or consultants arising out of a prohibited storm water discharge or improper disposal of solid or hazardous waste, including but not limited to asbestos or ACM. 16. MANDATORY ENVIRONMENTAL HEALTH AND SAFETY TRAINING The Contractor shall ensure that appropriate personnel, preferably at least two, attend and participate in Environmental Health and Safety training conducted through the Owner s Office of Environmental Health & Safety. The Assistant Director of Environmental Health & Safety at IUPUI coordinates this training for projects on all campuses, and the Contractor should call to schedule this mandatory training. 17. TEMPORARY ACCESS TO SITE AND PARKING Project Site Requirements Page 13 of 14 January 2012

144 A. Existing Roadways, Temporary Roadways 1. Access to the project site shall be identified on a per project basis. 2. As required, the Contractor shall provide access to the building by temporary roads and walks in the area indicated by the Owner. The Contractor shall maintain the temporary roads and walks in continuous serviceable and clean condition throughout the course of the project. The main roads must remain open to vehicle and pedestrian traffic at all times. Materials so used for the temporary roads and walks shall be removed from the site, and the location of same shall revert to the schedule of construction in such a manner as may provide for completion of the work on schedule, unless same are a portion of the permanent construction and completed later. 3. The Contractor shall keep adjacent city streets free from mud or debris deposited thereon as a result of operations under this Contract. Contractor shall maintain and restore such streets to their original condition. B. Parking 1. Owner shall either identify parking facilities that may be used by the Contractor for its equipment, personnel, and workmen or shall notify Contractor that is no project-related parking available on University property. 2. In general, parking of cars shall be restricted to the limits of the site or on streets where public parking is permitted. Parking of cars will not be permitted on other parking lots, drives or roads of academic or residential buildings. 3. On IUPUI projects, free shuttle service is provided from the designated Contractor parking area at 1302 N. Indiana Avenue., Contractors are prohibited from parking in any IUPUI campus visitor facility. 4. On Bloomington projects, Contractor s employees are to park at the Purple Lot at the Athletics complex. A fee for parking at this lot will be charged to Contractor. Unless otherwise agreed by the parties, Contractor is responsible for transporting its employees from the Purple Lot to the jobsite. 5. On projects at all other campuses, free parking areas will be designated for Contractor s employees and hang tags will be provided to Contractor by campus parking operations. Project Site Requirements Page 14 of 14 January 2012

145 DELV Design Studio, LLC SECTION PAGE 1 SUMMARY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Project information. 2. Work covered by Contract Documents. 3. Phased construction. 4. Owner-furnished products. 5. Contractor-furnished, Owner-installed products. 6. Access to site. 7. Coordination with occupants. 8. Work restrictions. 9. Specification and drawing conventions. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for limitations and procedures governing temporary use of Owner's facilities. 1.3 PROJECT INFORMATION A. Project Identification: IUPUI ET 109/109A Renovations (IU # ). 1. Project Location: IUPUI Campus, Engineering Technology (IN017), 799 W. Michigan St., Indianapolis, IN B. Owner: Indiana University Purdue University Indianapolis (IUPUI). 1. Owner's Representative: Matt Bartlett C. Architect: Chris Lake, AIA DELV Design, 212 W. Tenth St., Indianapolis, IN ( ). D. Architect's Consultants: The Architect has retained the following design professionals who have prepared designated portions of the Contract Documents: 1. MEP Engineering: Vector Consulting, LLC, 1005 N. Senate Ave, Indianapolis, IN ( ) 1.4 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS A. The Work for the Project is defined by the Contract Documents and consists of the following: 1. This project consists of the phased renovation of 1,875 SF. The current space is utilized as lab/testing space for a propulsion experiment and associated grad student work area. These functions will remain in the new construction (in different locations) with 6 additional offices and work/copy space added into the project. 11/30/15 IN071 ET 109/109A RENO. FOROFFICE SPACE (IU# )

146 DELV Design Studio, LLC SECTION PAGE 2 SUMMARY B. Type of Contract: 1. Project will be constructed under a single prime contract. 1.5 PHASED CONSTRUCTION A. The Work shall be conducted in 3 phases, with each phase substantially complete as indicated: 1. Phase 1: This phase includes the addition of a new wall to subdivide a portion of current Lab 125 to allow for expansion of 109/109A. The bench systems in Lab 125 will need to be reconfigured as part of this phase (including their utility connections). This work needs to be completed over IUPUI fall break (December 21 st to January 10 th ) with the space substantially complete and ready for occupancy 8 th of January. 2. Phase 2: This phase includes renovation of the current grad student work space. The space will get reconfigured into a shared Lab space as well as a smaller grad work area. 3. Phase 3: This phase consists of taking the existing Lab 109A space and converting it into 6 offices and a work/copy space. B. Before commencing Work of each phase, submit an updated copy of Contractor's construction schedule showing the sequence, commencement and completion dates and move-out and -in dates of Owner's personnel for all phases of the Work. 1.6 OWNER-FURNISHED PRODUCTS A. Owner will furnish products indicated as such in the drawings. The Work includes receiving, unloading, handling, storing, protecting, and installing Owner-furnished products and making building services connections. 1.7 CONTRACTOR-FURNISHED, OWNER-INSTALLED PRODUCTS A. Contractor shall furnish products indicated as such in the drawings. The Work includes unloading, handling, storing, and protecting Contractor-furnished products as directed and turning them over to Owner at Project closeout. 1.8 ACCESS TO SITE A. General: Contractor shall have limited use of Project area for construction operations during construction period (space within future phases will continue to be occupied during construction of adjacent phases). B. Use of Area: Limit use of Project area to areas within the Contract limits indicated. Do not disturb portions of Project site beyond areas in which the Work is indicated. C. Condition of Existing Building: Maintain portions of existing building affected by construction operations in a weathertight condition throughout construction period. Repair damage caused by construction operations. 1.9 COORDINATION WITH OCCUPANTS A. Partial Owner Occupancy: Owner will occupy areas within the building adjacent to this area during entire construction period. Cooperate with Owner during construction operations to minimize conflicts and facilitate Owner usage. Perform the Work so as not to interfere with Owner's day-to-day operations. Maintain existing exits unless otherwise indicated. 11/30/15 IN071 ET 109/109A RENO. FOROFFICE SPACE (IU# )

147 DELV Design Studio, LLC SECTION PAGE 3 SUMMARY 1. Maintain access to existing walkways, corridors, and other adjacent occupied or used facilities. Do not close or obstruct walkways, corridors, or other occupied or used facilities without written permission from Owner and approval of authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Notify Owner not less than 72 hours in advance of activities that will affect Owner's operations WORK RESTRICTIONS A. Work Restrictions, General: Comply with restrictions on construction operations. 1. Comply with limitations on use of public streets and with other requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. B. On-Site Work Hours: Limit normal (non-disruptive) work in the existing building to normal business working hours of 8:00 a.m. to 6:00 p.m., Monday through Friday, unless otherwise indicated (coordinate with ongoing class schedules). 1. Weekend Hours: Friday at 6:00 p.m. Monday at 8:00 a.m. (disruptive work to occur during this time). 2. Off Hours: 6:00 p.m. to 8:00 a.m. daily on week days (disruptive work to occur during this time). 3. Hours for Utility Shutdowns: Off Hours and Weekend Hours with prior coordination with and approval by owner. C. Existing Utility Interruptions: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after providing temporary utility services according to requirements indicated: 1. Notify Owner not less than 2 days in advance of proposed utility interruptions. 2. Obtain Owner's written permission before proceeding with utility interruptions. D. Noise, Vibration, and Odors: Coordinate operations that may result in high levels of noise and vibration, odors, or other disruption to Owner occupancy with Owner. 1. Notify Owner not less than 2 days in advance of proposed disruptive operations. 2. Obtain Owner's written permission before proceeding with disruptive operations. E. Nonsmoking Building: Smoking is not permitted within the building or within 25 feet of entrances, operable windows, or outdoor-air intakes. F. Controlled Substances: Use of tobacco products and other controlled substances within the existing building and on Project site as a whole are not permitted. G. Employee Identification: Contractor must provide identification tags for all Contractor personnel working on Project. After hours, personnel will be required to use identification tags to access the project site. H. Employee Screening: Comply with Owner's requirements for drug and background screening of Contractor personnel working on Project site. 1. Maintain list of approved screened personnel with Owner's representative SPECIFICATION AND DRAWING CONVENTIONS A. Specification Content: The Specifications use certain conventions for the style of language and the intended meaning of certain terms, words, and phrases when used in particular situations. These conventions are as follows: 11/30/15 IN071 ET 109/109A RENO. FOROFFICE SPACE (IU# )

148 DELV Design Studio, LLC SECTION PAGE 4 SUMMARY 1. Imperative mood and streamlined language are generally used in the Specifications. The words "shall," "shall be," or "shall comply with," depending on the context, are implied where a colon (:) is used within a sentence or phrase. 2. Specification requirements are to be performed by Contractor unless specifically stated otherwise. B. Division 01 General Requirements: Requirements of Sections in Division 01 apply to the Work of all Sections in the Specifications. C. Drawing Coordination: Requirements for materials and products identified on Drawings are described in detail in the Specifications. One or more of the following are used on Drawings to identify materials and products: 1. Terminology: Materials and products are identified by the typical generic terms used in the individual Specifications Sections. 2. Abbreviations: Materials and products are identified by abbreviations as scheduled on Drawings. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION /30/15 IN071 ET 109/109A RENO. FOROFFICE SPACE (IU# )

149 DELV Design Studio, LLC SECTION PAGE 1 UNIT PRICES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for unit prices. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section "Contract Modification Procedures" for procedures for submitting and handling Change Orders. 2. Section "Quality Requirements" for general testing and inspecting requirements. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Unit price is an amount incorporated in the Agreement, applicable during the duration of the Work as a price per unit of measurement for materials, equipment, or services, or a portion of the Work, added to or deducted from the Contract Sum by appropriate modification, if the scope of Work or estimated quantities of Work required by the Contract Documents are increased or decreased. 1.4 PROCEDURES A. Unit prices include all necessary material, plus cost for delivery, installation, insurance, overhead, and profit. B. Measurement and Payment: See individual Specification Sections for work that requires establishment of unit prices. Methods of measurement and payment for unit prices are specified in those Sections. C. Owner reserves the right to reject Contractor's measurement of work-in-place that involves use of established unit prices and to have this work measured, at Owner's expense, by an independent surveyor acceptable to Contractor. D. List of Unit Prices: A schedule of unit prices is included in Part 3. Specification Sections referenced in the schedule contain requirements for materials described under each unit price. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 SCHEDULE OF UNIT PRICES A. Unit Price 1: Replacement of 5 existing ceiling tiles (size 30 x 60 ). 1. Description: as part of the base bid we have asked the contractor to assume that 5% of the existing ceiling tiles will need to be replaced. In case the quantity exceeds the 5%, the owner is requesting a cost to replace additional tiles. 2. Unit of Measurement: (5) 30 x 60 per unit. END OF SECTION /30/15 IN071 ET 109/109A RENO. FOR OFFICE SPACE (IU# )

150

151 DELV Design Studio, LLC SECTION PAGE 1 ALTERNATES SECTION ALTERNATES 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for alternates. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Alternate: An amount proposed by bidders and stated on the Bid Form for certain work defined in the bidding requirements that may be added to or deducted from the base bid amount if Owner decides to accept a corresponding change either in the amount of construction to be completed or in the products, materials, equipment, systems, or installation methods described in the Contract Documents. 1. Alternates described in this Section are part of the Work only if enumerated in the Agreement. 2. The cost or credit for each alternate is the net addition to or deduction from the Contract Sum to incorporate alternate into the Work. No other adjustments are made to the Contract Sum. 1.4 PROCEDURES A. Coordination: Revise or adjust affected adjacent work as necessary to completely integrate work of the alternate into Project. 1. Include as part of each alternate, miscellaneous devices, accessory objects, and similar items incidental to or required for a complete installation whether or not indicated as part of alternate. B. Notification: Immediately following award of the Contract, notify each party involved, in writing, of the status of each alternate. Indicate if alternates have been accepted, rejected, or deferred for later consideration. Include a complete description of negotiated revisions to alternates. C. Execute accepted alternates under the same conditions as other work of the Contract. D. Schedule: A schedule of alternates is included at the end of this Section. Specification Sections referenced in schedule contain requirements for materials necessary to achieve the work described under each alternate. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 SCHEDULE OF ALTERNATES A. Alternate No. 1 >: Re-use Vision Window from Lab Support 109 in Lab 109A. 1. Base Bid: Install new hollow metal window with tempered clear vision glass. 2. Alternate: Modify and re-install existing knock-down steel window with wired glass to be demolished between Lab Support 109 and Conference 101N. END OF SECTION /30/15 IN071 ET 109/109A RENO. FOR OFFICE SPACE (IU# )

152

153 DELV Design Studio, LLC SECTION PAGE 1 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES SECTION SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes requirements for the submittal schedule and administrative and procedural requirements for submitting Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, and other submittals. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Action Submittals: Written and graphic information and physical samples that require Architect's responsive action. Action submittals are those submittals indicated in individual Specification Sections as "action submittals." B. Informational Submittals: Written and graphic information and physical samples that do not require Architect's responsive action. Submittals may be rejected for not complying with requirements. Informational submittals are those submittals indicated in individual Specification Sections as "informational submittals." C. Portable Document Format (PDF): An open standard file format licensed by Adobe Systems used for representing documents in a device-independent and display resolution-independent fixed-layout document format. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Submittal Schedule: Submit a schedule of submittals, arranged in chronological order by dates required by construction schedule. Include time required for review, ordering, manufacturing, fabrication, and delivery when establishing dates. Include additional time required for making corrections or revisions to submittals noted by Architect and additional time for handling and reviewing submittals required by those corrections. 1. Coordinate submittal schedule with list of subcontracts, the schedule of values, and Contractor's construction schedule. 2. Initial Submittal: Submit concurrently with startup construction schedule. Include submittals required during the first 60 days of construction. List those submittals required to maintain orderly progress of the Work and those required early because of long lead time for manufacture or fabrication. 3. Final Submittal: Submit concurrently with the first complete submittal of Contractor's construction schedule. a. Submit revised submittal schedule to reflect changes in current status and timing for submittals. 4. Format: Arrange the following information in a tabular format: a. Scheduled date for first submittal. b. Specification Section number and title. c. Submittal category: Action; informational. 11/30/15 IN071 ET 109/109A RENO. FOR OFFICE SPACE (IU# )

154 DELV Design Studio, LLC SECTION PAGE 2 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES d. Name of subcontractor. e. Description of the Work covered. f. Scheduled date for Architect's final release or approval. g. Scheduled date of fabrication. h. Scheduled dates for purchasing. i. Scheduled dates for installation. j. Activity or event number. 1.5 SUBMITTAL ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Architect's Digital Data Files: Electronic digital data files of the Contract Drawings will be provided by Architect for Contractor's use in preparing submittals. 1. Architect will furnish Contractor one set of digital data drawing files of the Contract Drawings for use in preparing Shop Drawings and Project record drawings. a. Architect makes no representations as to the accuracy or completeness of digital data drawing files as they relate to the Contract Drawings. b. Digital Drawing Software Program: The Contract Drawings are available in REVIT and AutoCAD. c. Contractor shall execute a data licensing agreement in the form of an Agreement acceptable to Owner and Architect. d. The following digital data files will by furnished for each appropriate discipline: 1) Floor plans. 2) Reflected ceiling plans. B. Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of construction activities. 1. Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other submittals, and related activities that require sequential activity. 2. Submit all submittal items required for each Specification Section concurrently unless partial submittals for portions of the Work are indicated on approved submittal schedule. 3. Submit action submittals and informational submittals required by the same Specification Section as separate packages under separate transmittals. 4. Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related parts of the Work so processing will not be delayed because of need to review submittals concurrently for coordination. a. Architect reserves the right to withhold action on a submittal requiring coordination with other submittals until related submittals are received. C. Processing Time: Allow time for submittal review, including time for resubmittals, as follows. Time for review shall commence on Architect's receipt of submittal. No extension of the Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit submittals enough in advance of the Work to permit processing, including resubmittals. 1. Initial Review: Allow 5 days for initial review of each submittal. Allow additional time if coordination with subsequent submittals is required. Architect will advise Contractor when a submittal being processed must be delayed for coordination. 2. Intermediate Review: If intermediate submittal is necessary, process it in same manner as initial submittal. 3. Resubmittal Review: Allow 3 days for review of each resubmittal. 4. Sequential Review: Where sequential review of submittals by Architect's consultants, Owner, or other parties is indicated, allow 10 days for initial review of each submittal. 11/30/15 IN071 ET 109/109A RENO. FOR OFFICE SPACE (IU# )

155 DELV Design Studio, LLC SECTION PAGE 3 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 5. Concurrent Consultant Review: Where the Contract Documents indicate that submittals may be transmitted simultaneously to Architect and to Architect's consultants, allow 7 days for review of each submittal. Submittal will be returned to Architect before being returned to Contractor. D. Paper Submittals: Place a permanent label or title block on each submittal item for identification. 1. Indicate name of firm or entity that prepared each submittal on label or title block. 2. Provide a space approximately 6 by 8 inches on label or beside title block to record Contractor's review and approval markings and action taken by Architect. 3. Include the following information for processing and recording action taken: a. Project name. b. Date. c. Name of Architect. d. Name of Construction Manager. e. Name of Contractor. f. Name of subcontractor. g. Name of supplier. h. Name of manufacturer. i. Submittal number or other unique identifier, including revision identifier. 1) Submittal number shall use Specification Section number followed by a decimal point and then a sequential number (e.g., ). Resubmittals shall include an alphabetic suffix after another decimal point (e.g., A). j. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section. k. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. l. Location(s) where product is to be installed, as appropriate. m. Other necessary identification. 4. Additional Paper Copies: Unless additional copies are required for final submittal, and unless Architect observes noncompliance with provisions in the Contract Documents, initial submittal may serve as final submittal. a. Submit one copy of submittal to concurrent reviewer in addition to specified number of copies to Architect. 5. Transmittal for Paper Submittals: Assemble each submittal individually and appropriately for transmittal and handling. Transmit each submittal using a transmittal form. Architect will return without review submittals received from sources other than Contractor. a. Transmittal Form for Paper Submittals: Use AIA Document G810. b. Transmittal Form for Paper Submittals: Provide locations on form for the following information: 1) Project name. 2) Date. 3) Destination (To:). 4) Source (From:). 5) Name and address of Architect. 6) Name of Construction Manager. 7) Name of Contractor. 8) Name of firm or entity that prepared submittal. 9) Names of subcontractor, manufacturer, and supplier. 10) Category and type of submittal. 11/30/15 IN071 ET 109/109A RENO. FOR OFFICE SPACE (IU# )

156 DELV Design Studio, LLC SECTION PAGE 4 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 11) Submittal purpose and description. 12) Specification Section number and title. 13) Specification paragraph number or drawing designation and generic name for each of multiple items. 14) Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. 15) Indication of full or partial submittal. 16) Transmittal number, numbered consecutively. 17) Submittal and transmittal distribution record. 18) Remarks. 19) Signature of transmitter. E. Electronic Submittals: Identify and incorporate information in each electronic submittal file as follows: 1. Assemble complete submittal package into a single indexed file incorporating submittal requirements of a single Specification Section and transmittal form with links enabling navigation to each item. 2. Name file with submittal number or other unique identifier, including revision identifier. a. File name shall use project identifier and Specification Section number followed by a decimal point and then a sequential number (e.g., LNHS ). Resubmittals shall include an alphabetic suffix after another decimal point (e.g., LNHS A). 3. Provide means for insertion to permanently record Contractor's review and approval markings and action taken by Architect. 4. Transmittal Form for Electronic Submittals: Use software-generated form from electronic project management software acceptable to Owner, containing the following information: a. Project name. b. Date. c. Name and address of Architect. d. Name of Construction Manager. e. Name of Contractor. f. Name of firm or entity that prepared submittal. g. Names of subcontractor, manufacturer, and supplier. h. Category and type of submittal. i. Submittal purpose and description. j. Specification Section number and title. k. Specification paragraph number or drawing designation and generic name for each of multiple items. l. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. m. Location(s) where product is to be installed, as appropriate. n. Related physical samples submitted directly. o. Indication of full or partial submittal. p. Transmittal number, numbered consecutively. q. Submittal and transmittal distribution record. r. Other necessary identification. s. Remarks. 5. Metadata: Include the following information as keywords in the electronic submittal file metadata: a. Project name. b. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section. c. Manufacturer name. d. Product name. 11/30/15 IN071 ET 109/109A RENO. FOR OFFICE SPACE (IU# )

157 DELV Design Studio, LLC SECTION PAGE 5 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES F. Options: Identify options requiring selection by Architect. G. Deviations and Additional Information: On an attached separate sheet, prepared on Contractor's letterhead, record relevant information, requests for data, revisions other than those requested by Architect on previous submittals, and deviations from requirements in the Contract Documents, including minor variations and limitations. Include same identification information as related submittal. H. Resubmittals: Make resubmittals in same form and number of copies as initial submittal. 1. Note date and content of previous submittal. 2. Note date and content of revision in label or title block and clearly indicate extent of revision. 3. Resubmit submittals until they are marked with approval notation from Architect's action stamp. I. Distribution: Furnish copies of final submittals to manufacturers, subcontractors, suppliers, fabricators, installers, authorities having jurisdiction, and others as necessary for performance of construction activities. Show distribution on transmittal forms. J. Use for Construction: Retain complete copies of submittals on Project site. Use only final action submittals that are marked with approval notation from Architect's action stamp. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES A. General Submittal Procedure Requirements: Prepare and submit submittals required by individual Specification Sections. Types of submittals are indicated in individual Specification Sections. 1. Post electronic submittals as PDF electronic files directly to Owner s Project Web site specifically established for Project. a. Architect will return annotated file. Annotate and retain one copy of file as an electronic Project record document file. 2. Submit electronic submittals via as PDF electronic files. a. Architect will return annotated file. Annotate and retain one copy of file as an electronic Project record document file. 3. Action Submittals: Submit 3 paper copies of each submittal unless otherwise indicated. Architect will return 2 copies. 4. Informational Submittals: Submit 2 paper copies of each submittal unless otherwise indicated. Architect will not return copies. 5. Certificates and Certifications Submittals: Provide a statement that includes signature of entity responsible for preparing certification. Certificates and certifications shall be signed by an officer or other individual authorized to sign documents on behalf of that entity. a. Provide a digital signature with digital certificate on electronically submitted certificates and certifications where indicated. b. Provide a notarized statement on original paper copy certificates and certifications where indicated. B. Product Data: Collect information into a single submittal for each element of construction and type of product or equipment. 11/30/15 IN071 ET 109/109A RENO. FOR OFFICE SPACE (IU# )

158 DELV Design Studio, LLC SECTION PAGE 6 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 1. If information must be specially prepared for submittal because standard published data are not suitable for use, submit as Shop Drawings, not as Product Data. 2. Mark each copy of each submittal to show which products and options are applicable. 3. Include the following information, as applicable: a. Manufacturer's catalog cuts. b. Manufacturer's product specifications. c. Standard color charts. d. Statement of compliance with specified referenced standards. e. Testing by recognized testing agency. f. Application of testing agency labels and seals. g. Notation of coordination requirements. h. Availability and delivery time information. 4. For equipment, include the following in addition to the above, as applicable: a. Wiring diagrams showing factory-installed wiring. b. Printed performance curves. c. Operational range diagrams. d. Clearances required to other construction, if not indicated on accompanying Shop Drawings. 5. Submit Product Data before or concurrent with Samples. 6. Submit Product Data in the following format: a. PDF electronic file. b. 2 paper copies of Product Data unless otherwise indicated. Architect will return 1 copies. C. Shop Drawings: Prepare Project-specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not base Shop Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed data. 1. Preparation: Fully illustrate requirements in the Contract Documents. Include the following information, as applicable: a. Identification of products. b. Schedules. c. Compliance with specified standards. d. Notation of coordination requirements. e. Notation of dimensions established by field measurement. f. Relationship and attachment to adjoining construction clearly indicated. g. Seal and signature of professional engineer if specified. 2. Sheet Size: Except for templates, patterns, and similar full-size drawings, submit Shop Drawings on sheets at least 8-1/2 by 11 inches, but no larger than 30 by 42 inches. 3. Submit Shop Drawings in the following format: a. PDF electronic file. D. Samples: Submit Samples for review of kind, color, pattern, and texture for a check of these characteristics with other elements and for a comparison of these characteristics between submittal and actual component as delivered and installed. 1. Transmit Samples that contain multiple, related components such as accessories together in one submittal package. 2. Identification: Attach label on unexposed side of Samples that includes the following: 11/30/15 IN071 ET 109/109A RENO. FOR OFFICE SPACE (IU# )

159 DELV Design Studio, LLC SECTION PAGE 7 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES a. Generic description of Sample. b. Product name and name of manufacturer. c. Sample source. d. Number and title of applicable Specification Section. e. Specification paragraph number and generic name of each item. 3. For projects where electronic submittals are required, provide corresponding electronic submittal of Sample transmittal, digital image file illustrating Sample characteristics, and identification information for record. 4. Disposition: Maintain sets of approved Samples at Project site, available for quality-control comparisons throughout the course of construction activity. Sample sets may be used to determine final acceptance of construction associated with each set. a. Samples that may be incorporated into the Work are indicated in individual Specification Sections. Such Samples must be in an undamaged condition at time of use. b. Samples not incorporated into the Work, or otherwise designated as Owner's property, are the property of Contractor. 5. Samples for Initial Selection: Submit manufacturer's color charts consisting of units or sections of units showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available. a. Number of Samples: Submit 1 full set(s) of available choices where color, pattern, texture, or similar characteristics are required to be selected from manufacturer's product line. Architect will return submittal with options selected. 6. Samples for Verification: Submit full-size units or Samples of size indicated, prepared from same material to be used for the Work, cured and finished in manner specified, and physically identical with material or product proposed for use, and that show full range of color and texture variations expected. Samples include, but are not limited to, the following: partial sections of manufactured or fabricated components; small cuts or containers of materials; complete units of repetitively used materials; swatches showing color, texture, and pattern; color range sets; and components used for independent testing and inspection. a. Number of Samples: Submit 3 sets of Samples. Architect will retain 1 Sample set; remainder will be returned. 1) Submit a single Sample where assembly details, workmanship, fabrication techniques, connections, operation, and other similar characteristics are to be demonstrated. 2) If variation in color, pattern, texture, or other characteristic is inherent in material or product represented by a Sample, submit at least 3 sets of paired units that show approximate limits of variations. E. Product Schedule: As required in individual Specification Sections, prepare a written summary indicating types of products required for the Work and their intended location. Include the following information in tabular form: 1. Type of product. Include unique identifier for each product indicated in the Contract Documents or assigned by Contractor if none is indicated. 2. Manufacturer and product name, and model number if applicable. 3. Number and name of room or space. 4. Location within room or space. 5. Submit product schedule in the following format: a. PDF electronic file. 11/30/15 IN071 ET 109/109A RENO. FOR OFFICE SPACE (IU# )

160 DELV Design Studio, LLC SECTION PAGE 8 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES F. Coordination Drawing Submittals: Comply with requirements specified in Section "Project Management and Coordination." G. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Comply with requirements specified in Section "Construction Progress Documentation." H. Application for Payment and Schedule of Values: Comply with requirements specified in Section "Payment Procedures." I. Test and Inspection Reports and Schedule of Tests and Inspections Submittals: Comply with requirements specified in Section "Quality Requirements." J. Closeout Submittals and Maintenance Material Submittals: Comply with requirements specified in Section "Closeout Procedures." K. Maintenance Data: Comply with requirements specified in Section "Operation and Maintenance Data." L. Qualification Data: Prepare written information that demonstrates capabilities and experience of firm or person. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, contact information of architects and owners, and other information specified. M. Welding Certificates: Prepare written certification that welding procedures and personnel comply with requirements in the Contract Documents. Submit record of Welding Procedure Specification and Procedure Qualification Record on AWS forms. Include names of firms and personnel certified. N. Installer Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that Installer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents and, where required, is authorized by manufacturer for this specific Project. O. Manufacturer Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Include evidence of manufacturing experience where required. P. Product Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that product complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Q. Material Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that material complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. R. Material Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting test results of material for compliance with requirements in the Contract Documents. S. Product Test Reports: Submit written reports indicating that current product produced by manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Base reports on evaluation of tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, or on comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency. T. Research Reports: Submit written evidence, from a model code organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, that product complies with building code in effect for Project. Include the following information: 1. Name of evaluation organization. 2. Date of evaluation. 11/30/15 IN071 ET 109/109A RENO. FOR OFFICE SPACE (IU# )

161 DELV Design Studio, LLC SECTION PAGE 9 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 3. Time period when report is in effect. 4. Product and manufacturers' names. 5. Description of product. 6. Test procedures and results. 7. Limitations of use. U. Preconstruction Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of tests performed before installation of product, for compliance with performance requirements in the Contract Documents. V. Compatibility Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of compatibility tests performed before installation of product. Include written recommendations for primers and substrate preparation needed for adhesion. W. Field Test Reports: Submit written reports indicating and interpreting results of field tests performed either during installation of product or after product is installed in its final location, for compliance with requirements in the Contract Documents. X. Design Data: Prepare and submit written and graphic information, including, but not limited to, performance and design criteria, list of applicable codes and regulations, and calculations. Include list of assumptions and other performance and design criteria and a summary of loads. Include load diagrams if applicable. Provide name and version of software, if any, used for calculations. Include page numbers. 2.2 DELEGATED-DESIGN SERVICES A. Performance and Design Criteria: Where professional design services or certifications by a design professional are specifically required of Contractor by the Contract Documents, provide products and systems complying with specific performance and design criteria indicated. 1. If criteria indicated are not sufficient to perform services or certification required, submit a written request for additional information to Architect. B. Delegated-Design Services Certification: In addition to Shop Drawings, Product Data, and other required submittals, submit digitally signed PDF electronic file and 1 paper copies of certificate, signed and sealed by the responsible design professional, for each product and system specifically assigned to Contractor to be designed or certified by a design professional. 1. Indicate that products and systems comply with performance and design criteria in the Contract Documents. Include list of codes, loads, and other factors used in performing these services. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 CONTRACTOR'S REVIEW A. Action and Informational Submittals: Review each submittal and check for coordination with other Work of the Contract and for compliance with the Contract Documents. Note corrections and field dimensions. Mark with approval stamp before submitting to Architect. B. Project Closeout and Maintenance Material Submittals: See requirements in Section "Closeout Procedures." C. Approval Stamp: Stamp each submittal with a uniform, approval stamp. Include Project name and location, submittal number, Specification Section title and number, name of reviewer, date of Contractor's approval, and statement certifying that submittal has been reviewed, checked, and approved for compliance with the Contract Documents. 11/30/15 IN071 ET 109/109A RENO. FOR OFFICE SPACE (IU# )

162 DELV Design Studio, LLC SECTION PAGE 10 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 3.2 ARCHITECT'S ACTION A. Action Submittals: Architect will review each submittal, make marks to indicate corrections or revisions required, and return it. Architectwill stamp each submittal with an action stamp and will mark stamp appropriately to indicate action. B. Informational Submittals: Architect will review each submittal and will not return it, or will return it if it does not comply with requirements. Architect will forward each submittal to appropriate party. C. Partial submittals prepared for a portion of the Work will be reviewed when use of partial submittals has received prior approval from Architect. D. Incomplete submittals are unacceptable, will be considered nonresponsive, and will be returned for resubmittal without review. E. Submittals not required by the Contract Documents may be returned by the Architect without action. END OF SECTION /30/15 IN071 ET 109/109A RENO. FOR OFFICE SPACE (IU# )

163 DELV Design Studio, LLC SECTION PAGE 1 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS SECTION QUALITY REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for quality assurance and quality control. B. Testing and inspecting services are required to verify compliance with requirements specified or indicated. These services do not relieve Contractor of responsibility for compliance with the Contract Document requirements. 1. Specific quality-assurance and -control requirements for individual construction activities are specified in the Sections that specify those activities. Requirements in those Sections may also cover production of standard products. 2. Specified tests, inspections, and related actions do not limit Contractor's other quality-assurance and -control procedures that facilitate compliance with the Contract Document requirements. 3. Requirements for Contractor to provide quality-assurance and -control services required by Architect, Owner, or authorities having jurisdiction are not limited by provisions of this Section. 4. Specific test and inspection requirements are not specified in this Section. C. Related Requirements: 1. Section "Allowances" for testing and inspecting allowances. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Quality-Assurance Services: Activities, actions, and procedures performed before and during execution of the Work to guard against defects and deficiencies and substantiate that proposed construction will comply with requirements. B. Quality-Control Services: Tests, inspections, procedures, and related actions during and after execution of the Work to evaluate that actual products incorporated into the Work and completed construction comply with requirements. Services do not include contract enforcement activities performed by Architect. C. Mockups: Full-size physical assemblies that are constructed on-site. Mockups are constructed to verify selections made under Sample submittals; to demonstrate aesthetic effects and, where indicated, qualities of materials and execution; to review coordination, testing, or operation; to show interface between dissimilar materials; and to demonstrate compliance with specified installation tolerances. Mockups are not Samples. Unless otherwise indicated, approved mockups establish the standard by which the Work will be judged. 1. Laboratory Mockups: Full-size physical assemblies constructed at testing facility to verify performance characteristics. 2. Integrated Exterior Mockups: Mockups of the exterior envelope erected separately from the building but on Project site, consisting of multiple products, assemblies, and subassemblies. 11/30/15 IN071 ET 109/109A RENO. FOR OFFICE SPACE (IU# )

164 DELV Design Studio, LLC SECTION PAGE 2 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 3. Room Mockups: Mockups of typical interior spaces complete with wall, floor, and ceiling finishes, doors, windows, millwork, casework, specialties, furnishings and equipment, and lighting. D. Preconstruction Testing: Tests and inspections performed specifically for Project before products and materials are incorporated into the Work, to verify performance or compliance with specified criteria. E. Product Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed by an NRTL, an NVLAP, or a testing agency qualified to conduct product testing and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, to establish product performance and compliance with specified requirements. F. Source Quality-Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed at the source, e.g., plant, mill, factory, or shop. G. Field Quality-Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed on-site for installation of the Work and for completed Work. H. Testing Agency: An entity engaged to perform specific tests, inspections, or both. Testing laboratory shall mean the same as testing agency. I. Installer/Applicator/Erector: Contractor or another entity engaged by Contractor as an employee, Subcontractor, or Sub-subcontractor, to perform a particular construction operation, including installation, erection, application, and similar operations. 1. Use of trade-specific terminology in referring to a trade or entity does not require that certain construction activities be performed by accredited or unionized individuals, or that requirements specified apply exclusively to specific trade(s). J. Experienced: When used with an entity or individual, "experienced" means having successfully completed a minimum of 3 previous projects similar in nature, size, and extent to this Project; being familiar with special requirements indicated; and having complied with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 1.4 CONFLICTING REQUIREMENTS A. Referenced Standards: If compliance with two or more standards is specified and the standards establish different or conflicting requirements for minimum quantities or quality levels, comply with the most stringent requirement. Refer conflicting requirements that are different, but apparently equal, to Architect for a decision before proceeding. B. Minimum Quantity or Quality Levels: The quantity or quality level shown or specified shall be the minimum provided or performed. The actual installation may comply exactly with the minimum quantity or quality specified, or it may exceed the minimum within reasonable limits. To comply with these requirements, indicated numeric values are minimum or maximum, as appropriate, for the context of requirements. Refer uncertainties to Architect for a decision before proceeding. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Contractor's Quality-Control Plan: For quality-assurance and quality-control activities and responsibilities. B. Qualification Data : For Contractor's quality-control personnel. 11/30/15 IN071 ET 109/109A RENO. FOR OFFICE SPACE (IU# )

165 DELV Design Studio, LLC SECTION PAGE 3 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS C. Contractor's Statement of Responsibility: When required by authorities having jurisdiction, submit copy of written statement of responsibility sent to authorities having jurisdiction before starting work on the following systems: 1. Seismic-force-resisting system, designated seismic system, or component listed in the designated seismic system quality-assurance plan prepared by Architect. 2. Main wind-force-resisting system or a wind-resisting component listed in the wind-force-resisting system quality-assurance plan prepared by Architect. D. Testing Agency Qualifications: For testing agencies specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include proof of qualifications in the form of a recent report on the inspection of the testing agency by a recognized authority. E. Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Prepare in tabular form and include the following: 1. Specification Section number and title. 2. Entity responsible for performing tests and inspections. 3. Description of test and inspection. 4. Identification of applicable standards. 5. Identification of test and inspection methods. 6. Number of tests and inspections required. 7. Time schedule or time span for tests and inspections. 8. Requirements for obtaining samples. 9. Unique characteristics of each quality-control service. 1.6 CONTRACTOR'S QUALITY-CONTROL PLAN A. Quality-Control Plan, General: Submit quality-control plan within 5 days of Notice of Award, and not less than 2 days prior to preconstruction conference. Submit in format acceptable to Architect. Identify personnel, procedures, controls, instructions, tests, records, and forms to be used to carry out Contractor's quality-assurance and quality-control responsibilities. Coordinate with Contractor's construction schedule. B. Quality-Control Personnel Qualifications: Engage qualified full-time personnel trained and experienced in managing and executing quality-assurance and quality-control procedures similar in nature and extent to those required for Project. 1. Project quality-control manager may also serve as Project superintendent. C. Submittal Procedure: Describe procedures for ensuring compliance with requirements through review and management of submittal process. Indicate qualifications of personnel responsible for submittal review. D. Testing and Inspection: In quality-control plan, include a comprehensive schedule of Work requiring testing or inspection, including the following: 1. Contractor-performed tests and inspections including subcontractor-performed tests and inspections. Include required tests and inspections and Contractor-elected tests and inspections. 2. Special inspections required by authorities having jurisdiction and indicated on the "Statement of Special Inspections." 3. Owner-performed tests and inspections indicated in the Contract Documents. E. Continuous Inspection of Workmanship: Describe process for continuous inspection during construction to identify and correct deficiencies in workmanship in addition to testing and inspection specified. 11/30/15 IN071 ET 109/109A RENO. FOR OFFICE SPACE (IU# )

166 DELV Design Studio, LLC SECTION PAGE 4 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS Indicate types of corrective actions to be required to bring work into compliance with standards of workmanship established by Contract requirements and approved mockups. F. Monitoring and Documentation: Maintain testing and inspection reports including log of approved and rejected results. Include work Architect has indicated as nonconforming or defective. Indicate corrective actions taken to bring nonconforming work into compliance with requirements. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 1.7 REPORTS AND DOCUMENTS A. Test and Inspection Reports: Prepare and submit certified written reports specified in other Sections. Include the following: 1. Date of issue. 2. Project title and number. 3. Name, address, and telephone number of testing agency. 4. Dates and locations of samples and tests or inspections. 5. Names of individuals making tests and inspections. 6. Description of the Work and test and inspection method. 7. Identification of product and Specification Section. 8. Complete test or inspection data. 9. Test and inspection results and an interpretation of test results. 10. Record of temperature and weather conditions at time of sample taking and testing and inspecting. 11. Comments or professional opinion on whether tested or inspected Work complies with the Contract Document requirements. 12. Name and signature of laboratory inspector. 13. Recommendations on retesting and re-inspecting. B. Manufacturer's Technical Representative's Field Reports: Prepare written information documenting manufacturer's technical representative's tests and inspections specified in other Sections. Include the following: 1. Name, address, and telephone number of technical representative making report. 2. Statement on condition of substrates and their acceptability for installation of product. 3. Statement that products at Project site comply with requirements. 4. Summary of installation procedures being followed, whether they comply with requirements and, if not, what corrective action was taken. 5. Results of operational and other tests and a statement of whether observed performance complies with requirements. 6. Statement whether conditions, products, and installation will affect warranty. 7. Other required items indicated in individual Specification Sections. C. Factory-Authorized Service Representative's Reports: Prepare written information documenting manufacturer's factory-authorized service representative's tests and inspections specified in other Sections. Include the following: 1. Name, address, and telephone number of factory-authorized service representative making report. 2. Statement that equipment complies with requirements. 3. Results of operational and other tests and a statement of whether observed performance complies with requirements. 4. Statement whether conditions, products, and installation will affect warranty. 5. Other required items indicated in individual Specification Sections. D. Permits, Licenses, and Certificates: For Owner's records, submit copies of permits, licenses, certifications, inspection reports, releases, jurisdictional settlements, notices, receipts for fee payments, 11/30/15 IN071 ET 109/109A RENO. FOR OFFICE SPACE (IU# )

167 DELV Design Studio, LLC SECTION PAGE 5 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS judgments, correspondence, records, and similar documents, established for compliance with standards and regulations bearing on performance of the Work. 1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. General: Qualifications paragraphs in this article establish the minimum qualification levels required; individual Specification Sections specify additional requirements. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing products or systems similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units. C. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing products similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units. D. Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in installing, erecting, or assembling work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance. E. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for installations of the system, assembly, or product that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project. F. Specialists: Certain Specification Sections require that specific construction activities shall be performed by entities who are recognized experts in those operations. Specialists shall satisfy qualification requirements indicated and shall be engaged for the activities indicated. 1. Requirements of authorities having jurisdiction shall supersede requirements for specialists. G. Testing Agency Qualifications: An NRTL, an NVLAP, or an independent agency with the experience and capability to conduct testing and inspecting indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 329; and with additional qualifications specified in individual Sections; and, where required by authorities having jurisdiction, that is acceptable to authorities. 1. NRTL: A nationally recognized testing laboratory according to 29 CFR NVLAP: A testing agency accredited according to NIST's National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program. H. Manufacturer's Technical Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative of manufacturer who is trained and approved by manufacturer to observe and inspect installation of manufacturer's products that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project. I. Factory-Authorized Service Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative of manufacturer who is trained and approved by manufacturer to inspect installation of manufacturer's products that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project. J. Preconstruction Testing: Where testing agency is indicated to perform preconstruction testing for compliance with specified requirements for performance and test methods, comply with the following: 1. Contractor responsibilities include the following: a. Provide test specimens representative of proposed products and construction. 11/30/15 IN071 ET 109/109A RENO. FOR OFFICE SPACE (IU# )

168 DELV Design Studio, LLC SECTION PAGE 6 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS b. Submit specimens in a timely manner with sufficient time for testing and analyzing results to prevent delaying the Work. c. Provide sizes and configurations of test assemblies, mockups, and laboratory mockups to adequately demonstrate capability of products to comply with performance requirements. d. Build site-assembled test assemblies and mockups using installers who will perform same tasks for Project. e. Build laboratory mockups at testing facility using personnel, products, and methods of construction indicated for the completed Work. f. When testing is complete, remove test specimens; do not reuse products on Project. 2. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Submit a certified written report of each test, inspection, and similar quality-assurance service to Architect with copy to Contractor. Interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from the Contract Documents. K. Mockups: Before installing portions of the Work requiring mockups, build mockups for each form of construction and finish required to comply with the following requirements, using materials indicated for the completed Work: 1. Build mockups in location and of size indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect. 2. Notify Architect 5 days in advance of dates and times when mockups will be constructed. 3. Employ supervisory personnel who will oversee mockup construction. Employ workers that will be employed during the construction at Project. 4. Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship. 5. Obtain Architect's approval of mockups before starting work, fabrication, or construction. a. Allow 7 days for initial review and each re-review of each mockup. 6. Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for judging the completed Work. 7. Demolish and remove mockups when directed unless otherwise indicated. 1.9 QUALITY CONTROL A. Owner Responsibilities: Where quality-control services are indicated as Owner's responsibility, Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform these services. 1. Owner will furnish Contractor with names, addresses, and telephone numbers of testing agencies engaged and a description of types of testing and inspecting they are engaged to perform. 2. Payment for these services will be made from testing and inspecting allowances, as authorized by Change Orders. 3. Costs for retesting and re-inspecting construction that replaces or is necessitated by work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents will be charged to Contractor. B. Contractor Responsibilities: Tests and inspections not explicitly assigned to Owner are Contractor's responsibility. Perform additional quality-control activities required to verify that the Work complies with requirements, whether specified or not. 1. Unless otherwise indicated, provide quality-control services specified and those required by authorities having jurisdiction. Perform quality-control services required of Contractor by authorities having jurisdiction, whether specified or not. 2. Where services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, engage a qualified testing agency to perform these quality-control services. 11/30/15 IN071 ET 109/109A RENO. FOR OFFICE SPACE (IU# )

169 DELV Design Studio, LLC SECTION PAGE 7 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS a. Contractor shall not employ same entity engaged by Owner, unless agreed to in writing by Owner. 3. Notify testing agencies at least 24 hours in advance of time when Work that requires testing or inspecting will be performed. 4. Where quality-control services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each quality-control service. 5. Testing and inspecting requested by Contractor and not required by the Contract Documents are Contractor's responsibility. 6. Submit additional copies of each written report directly to authorities having jurisdiction, when they so direct. C. Manufacturer's Field Services: Where indicated, engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect field-assembled components and equipment installation, including service connections. Report results in writing as specified in Section "Submittal Procedures." D. Manufacturer's Technical Services: Where indicated, engage a manufacturer's technical representative to observe and inspect the Work. Manufacturer's technical representative's services include participation in pre-installation conferences, examination of substrates and conditions, verification of materials, observation of Installer activities, inspection of completed portions of the Work, and submittal of written reports. E. Retesting/Re-inspecting: Regardless of whether original tests or inspections were Contractor's responsibility, provide quality-control services, including retesting and re-inspecting, for construction that replaced Work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents. F. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Cooperate with Architect and Contractor in performance of duties. Provide qualified personnel to perform required tests and inspections. 1. Notify Architect and Contractor promptly of irregularities or deficiencies observed in the Work during performance of its services. 2. Determine the location from which test samples will be taken and in which in-situ tests are conducted. 3. Conduct and interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from requirements. 4. Submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each test, inspection, and similar quality-control service through Contractor. 5. Do not release, revoke, alter, or increase the Contract Document requirements or approve or accept any portion of the Work. 6. Do not perform any duties of Contractor. G. Associated Services: Cooperate with agencies performing required tests, inspections, and similar qualitycontrol services, and provide reasonable auxiliary services as requested. Notify agency sufficiently in advance of operations to permit assignment of personnel. Provide the following: 1. Access to the Work. 2. Incidental labor and facilities necessary to facilitate tests and inspections. 3. Adequate quantities of representative samples of materials that require testing and inspecting. Assist agency in obtaining samples. 4. Facilities for storage and field curing of test samples. 5. Delivery of samples to testing agencies. 6. Preliminary design mix proposed for use for material mixes that require control by testing agency. 7. Security and protection for samples and for testing and inspecting equipment at Project site. 11/30/15 IN071 ET 109/109A RENO. FOR OFFICE SPACE (IU# )

170 DELV Design Studio, LLC SECTION PAGE 8 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS H. Coordination: Coordinate sequence of activities to accommodate required quality-assurance and -control services with a minimum of delay and to avoid necessity of removing and replacing construction to accommodate testing and inspecting. 1. Schedule times for tests, inspections, obtaining samples, and similar activities. I. Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Prepare a schedule of tests, inspections, and similar quality-control services required by the Contract Documents as a component of Contractor's quality-control plan. Coordinate and submit concurrently with Contractor's construction schedule. Update as the Work progresses. 1. Distribution: Distribute schedule to Owner, Architect, testing agencies and each party involved in performance of portions of the Work where tests and inspections are required SPECIAL TESTS AND INSPECTIONS A. Special Tests and Inspections: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to conduct special tests and inspections required by authorities having jurisdiction as the responsibility of Owner as follows: B. Special Tests and Inspections: : 1. Verifying that manufacturer maintains detailed fabrication and quality-control procedures and reviews the completeness and adequacy of those procedures to perform the Work. 2. Notifying Architect and Contractor promptly of irregularities and deficiencies observed in the Work during performance of its services. 3. Submitting a certified written report of each test, inspection, and similar quality-control service to Architect and Commissioning Authority with copy to Contractor and to authorities having jurisdiction. 4. Submitting a final report of special tests and inspections at Substantial Completion, which includes a list of unresolved deficiencies. 5. Interpreting tests and inspections and stating in each report whether tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from the Contract Documents. 6. Retesting and reinspecting corrected work. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 ACCEPTABLE TESTING AGENCIES A. Obtain a list from owner after Notice of Award of Contract. 3.2 TEST AND INSPECTION LOG A. Test and Inspection Log: Prepare a record of tests and inspections. Include the following: 1. Date test or inspection was conducted. 2. Description of the Work tested or inspected. 3. Date test or inspection results were transmitted to Architect. 4. Identification of testing agency or special inspector conducting test or inspection. B. Maintain log at Project site. Post changes and revisions as they occur. Provide access to test and inspection log for Architect's reference during normal working hours. 11/30/15 IN071 ET 109/109A RENO. FOR OFFICE SPACE (IU# )

171 DELV Design Studio, LLC SECTION PAGE 9 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 3.3 REPAIR AND PROTECTION A. General: On completion of testing, inspecting, sample taking, and similar services, repair damaged construction and restore substrates and finishes. 1. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Specification Sections or matching existing substrates and finishes. Restore patched areas and extend restoration into adjoining areas with durable seams that are as invisible as possible. Comply with the Contract Document requirements for cutting and patching in Section "Execution." B. Protect construction exposed by or for quality-control service activities. C. Repair and protection are Contractor's responsibility, regardless of the assignment of responsibility for quality-control services. END OF SECTION /30/15 IN071 ET 109/109A RENO. FOR OFFICE SPACE (IU# )

172

173 DELV Design Studio, LLC SECTION PAGE 1 REFERENCES SECTION REFERENCES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. General: Basic Contract definitions are included in the Conditions of the Contract. B. "Approved": When used to convey Architect's action on Contractor's submittals, applications, and requests, "approved" is limited to Architect's duties and responsibilities as stated in the Conditions of the Contract. C. "Directed": A command or instruction by Architect. Other terms including "requested," "authorized," "selected," "required," and "permitted" have the same meaning as "directed." D. "Indicated": Requirements expressed by graphic representations or in written form on Drawings, in Specifications, and in other Contract Documents. Other terms including "shown," "noted," "scheduled," and "specified" have the same meaning as "indicated." E. "Regulations": Laws, ordinances, statutes, and lawful orders issued by authorities having jurisdiction, and rules, conventions, and agreements within the construction industry that control performance of the Work. F. "Furnish": Supply and deliver to Project site, ready for unloading, unpacking, assembly, installation, and similar operations. G. "Install": Operations at Project site including unloading, temporarily storing, unpacking, assembling, erecting, placing, anchoring, applying, working to dimension, finishing, curing, protecting, cleaning, and similar operations. H. "Provide": Furnish and install, complete and ready for the intended use. I. "Project Site": Space available for performing construction activities. The extent of Project site is shown on Drawings and may or may not be identical with the description of the land on which Project is to be built. 1.3 INDUSTRY STANDARDS A. Applicability of Standards: Unless the Contract Documents include more stringent requirements, applicable construction industry standards have the same force and effect as if bound or copied directly into the Contract Documents to the extent referenced. Such standards are made a part of the Contract Documents by reference. B. Publication Dates: Comply with standards in effect as of date of the Contract Documents unless otherwise indicated. C. Copies of Standards: Each entity engaged in construction on Project should be familiar with industry standards applicable to its construction activity. Copies of applicable standards are not bound with the Contract Documents. 11/30/15 IN071 ET 109/109A RENO. FOR OFFICE SPACE (IU# )

174 DELV Design Studio, LLC SECTION PAGE 2 REFERENCES 1. Where copies of standards are needed to perform a required construction activity, obtain copies directly from publication source. 1.4 ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS A. Industry Organizations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities indicated in Thomson Gale's "Encyclopedia of Associations" or in Columbia Books' "National Trade & Professional Associations of the U.S." B. Industry Organizations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web sites are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents. AA Aluminum Association (The) (703) AABC Associated Air Balance Council (202) AAMA American Architectural Manufacturers Association (847) AASHTO American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (202) AATCC American Association of Textile Chemists and Colorists (919) ABAA Air Barrier Association of America (866) ABMA American Bearing Manufacturers Association (202) ACI American Concrete Institute (248) ACPA American Concrete Pipe Association (972) AEIC Association of Edison Illuminating Companies, Inc. (The) (205) AF&PA American Forest & Paper Association (800) (202) AGA American Gas Association (202) AHAM Association of Home Appliance Manufacturers (202) AHRI Air-Conditioning, Heating, andrefrigeration Institute, The (703) /30/15 IN071 ET 109/109A RENO. FOR OFFICE SPACE (IU# )

175 DELV Design Studio, LLC SECTION PAGE 3 REFERENCES AI Asphalt Institute (859) AIA American Institute of Architects (The) (800) (202) AISC American Institute of Steel Construction (800) (312) AISI American Iron and Steel Institute (202) AITC American Institute of Timber Construction (303) ALSC American Lumber Standard Committee, Incorporated (301) AMCA Air Movement and Control Association International, Inc. (847) ANSI American National Standards Institute (202) AOSA Association of Official Seed Analysts, Inc. (405) APA APA - The Engineered Wood Association (253) APA Architectural Precast Association (239) API American Petroleum Institute (202) ARI Air-Conditioning & Refrigeration Institute (703) ARMA Asphalt Roofing Manufacturers Association (202) ASCE American Society of Civil Engineers (800) (703) ASCE/SEI ASHRAE American Society of Civil Engineers/Structural Engineering Institute (See ASCE) American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning (800) Engineers (404) ASME ASME International (800) /30/15 IN071 ET 109/109A RENO. FOR OFFICE SPACE (IU# )

176 DELV Design Studio, LLC SECTION PAGE 4 REFERENCES (American Society of Mechanical Engineers International) (973) ASSE American Society of Sanitary Engineering (440) ASTM ASTM International (610) (American Society for Testing and Materials International) ATIS Alliance for Telecommunications Industry Solutions (202) AWCMA American Window Covering Manufacturers Association (Now WCMA) AWCI Association of the Wall and Ceiling Industry (703) AWI Architectural Woodwork Institute (571) AWPA American Wood Protection Association (205) (Formerly: American Wood Preservers' Association) AWS American Welding Society (800) (305) AWWA American Water Works Association (800) (303) BHMA Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association (212) BIA Brick Industry Association (The) (703) BICSI BICSI, Inc. (800) (813) BIFMA BIFMA International (616) (Business and Institutional Furniture Manufacturer's Association International) BISSC Baking Industry Sanitation Standards Committee (866) CCC Carpet Cushion Council (610) CDA Copper Development Association (800) (212) CEA Canadian Electricity Association (613) /30/15 IN071 ET 109/109A RENO. FOR OFFICE SPACE (IU# )

177 DELV Design Studio, LLC SECTION PAGE 5 REFERENCES CEA Consumer Electronics Association (866) (703) CFFA Chemical Fabrics & Film Association, Inc. (216) CGA Compressed Gas Association (703) CIMA Cellulose Insulation Manufacturers Association (888) (937) CISCA Ceilings & Interior Systems Construction Association (630) CISPI Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute (423) CLFMI Chain Link Fence Manufacturers Institute (301) CPA Composite Panel Association (703) CRI Carpet and Rug Institute (The) (800) (706) CRRC Cool Roof Rating Council (866) (510) CRSI Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute (847) (800) CRRC Cool Roof Rating Council (866) (510) CSA Canadian Standards Association (800) (416) CSA CSA International (866) (Formerly: IAS - International Approval Services) (416) CSI Construction Specifications Institute (The) (800) (703) CSSB Cedar Shake & Shingle Bureau (604) CTI Cooling Technology Institute (281) (Formerly: Cooling Tower Institute) DHI Door and Hardware Institute (703) /30/15 IN071 ET 109/109A RENO. FOR OFFICE SPACE (IU# )

178 DELV Design Studio, LLC SECTION PAGE 6 REFERENCES ECA Electrical Components Association (703) EIA Electronic Industries Alliance (703) EIMA EIFS Industry Members Association (800) (770) EJCDC Engineers Joint Contract Documents Committee (703) EJMA Expansion Joint Manufacturers Association, Inc. (914) ESD ESD Association (315) (Electrostatic Discharge Association) ETL SEMCO Intertek ETL SEMCO (800) (Formerly: ITS - Intertek Testing Service NA) FIBA Federation Internationale de Basketball (The International Basketball Federation) FIVB Federation Internationale de Volleyball (The International Volleyball Federation) FM Approvals FM Approvals LLC (781) FM Global FM Global (401) (Formerly: FMG - FM Global) FRSA Florida Roofing, Sheet Metal & Air Conditioning Contractors Association, Inc. (407) FSA Fluid Sealing Association (610) FSC Forest Stewardship Council GA Gypsum Association (301) GANA Glass Association of North America (785) /30/15 IN071 ET 109/109A RENO. FOR OFFICE SPACE (IU# )

179 DELV Design Studio, LLC SECTION PAGE 7 REFERENCES GRI (Part of GSI) GS Green Seal (202) GSI Geosynthetic Institute (610) HI Hydronics Institute (908) HI/GAMA Hydronics Institute/Gas Appliance Manufacturers Association (908) Division of Air-Conditioning, Heating, and Refrigeration Institute (AHRI) HMMA Hollow Metal Manufacturers Association (Part of NAAMM) HPVA Hardwood Plywood & Veneer Association (703) HPW H. P. White Laboratory, Inc. (410) IAPSC International Association of Professional Security Consultants (515) ICBO International Conference of Building Officials (888) ICEA Insulated Cable Engineers Association, Inc. (770) ICRI International Concrete Repair Institute, Inc. (847) ICPA International Cast Polymer Association (703) IEC International Electrotechnical Commission IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. (The) (212) IES Illuminating Engineering Society of North America (703) IEST Institute of Environmental Sciences and Technology (847) IGMA Insulating Glass Manufacturers Alliance (613) ILI Indiana Limestone Institute of America, Inc. (812) /30/15 IN071 ET 109/109A RENO. FOR OFFICE SPACE (IU# )

180 DELV Design Studio, LLC SECTION PAGE 8 REFERENCES ISA Instrumentation, Systems, and Automation Society, The (919) ISO International Organization for Standardization ISSFA International Solid Surface Fabricators Association (877) (801) ITS Intertek Testing Service NA (Now ETL SEMCO) ITU International Telecommunication Union KCMA Kitchen Cabinet Manufacturers Association (703) LGSEA Light Gauge Steel Engineers Association (202) LMA Laminating Materials Association (Now part of CPA) LPI Lightning Protection Institute (800) MBMA Metal Building Manufacturers Association (216) MCA Metal Construction Association (847) MFMA Maple Flooring Manufacturers Association, Inc. (888) MFMA Metal Framing Manufacturers Association, Inc. (312) MH Material Handling (Now MHIA) MHIA Material Handling Industry of America (800) (704) MIA Marble Institute of America (440) MPI Master Painters Institute (888) (604) MSS Manufacturers Standardization Society of The Valve and Fittings Industry Inc. (703) /30/15 IN071 ET 109/109A RENO. FOR OFFICE SPACE (IU# )

181 DELV Design Studio, LLC SECTION PAGE 9 REFERENCES NAAMM National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers (630) NACE NACE International (800) (National Association of Corrosion Engineers International) (281) NADCA National Air Duct Cleaners Association (202) NAGWS National Association for Girls and Women in Sport (800) , ext NAIMA North American Insulation Manufacturers Association (703) NBGQA National Building Granite Quarries Association, Inc. (800) NCAA National Collegiate Athletic Association (The) (317) NCMA National Concrete Masonry Association (703) NCTA National Cable & Telecommunications Association (202) NEBB National Environmental Balancing Bureau (301) NECA National Electrical Contractors Association (301) NeLMA Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers' Association (207) NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association (703) NETA InterNational Electrical Testing Association (888) (269) NFHS National Federation of State High School Associations (317) NFPA NFPA (800) (National Fire Protection Association) (617) NFRC National Fenestration Rating Council (301) NGA National Glass Association (866) /30/15 IN071 ET 109/109A RENO. FOR OFFICE SPACE (IU# )

182 DELV Design Studio, LLC SECTION PAGE 10 REFERENCES (703) NHLA National Hardwood Lumber Association (800) (901) NLGA National Lumber Grades Authority (604) NOFMA NOFMA: The Wood Flooring Manufacturers Association (901) (Formerly: National Oak Flooring Manufacturers Association) NOMMA National Ornamental & Miscellaneous Metals Association (888) NRCA National Roofing Contractors Association (800) (847) NRMCA National Ready Mixed Concrete Association (888) (301) NSF NSF International (800) (National Sanitation Foundation International) (734) NSSGA National Stone, Sand & Gravel Association (800) (703) NTMA National Terrazzo & Mosaic Association, Inc. (The) (800) (540) NWFA National Wood Flooring Association (800) (636) PCI Precast/Prestressed Concrete Institute (312) PDI Plumbing & Drainage Institute (800) (978) PGI PVC Geomembrane Institute (217) PTI Post-Tensioning Institute (248) RCSC RFCI RIS Research Council on Structural Connections Resilient Floor Covering Institute (706) Redwood Inspection Service (925) SAE SAE International (877) /30/15 IN071 ET 109/109A RENO. FOR OFFICE SPACE (IU# )

183 DELV Design Studio, LLC SECTION PAGE 11 REFERENCES (724) SCAQMD South Coast Air Quality Management District (909) SCTE Society of Cable Telecommunications Engineers (800) (610) SDI Steel Deck Institute (847) SDI Steel Door Institute (440) SEFA Scientific Equipment and Furniture Association (877) (516) SEI/ASCE Structural Engineering Institute/American Society of Civil Engineers (See ASCE) SIA Security Industry Association (866) (703) SJI Steel Joist Institute (843) SMA Screen Manufacturers Association (561) SMACNA Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' (703) National Association SMPTE Society of Motion Picture and Television Engineers (914) SPFA Spray Polyurethane Foam Alliance (800) (Formerly: SPI/SPFD - The Society of the Plastics Industry, Inc.; Spray Polyurethane Foam Division) SPIB Southern Pine Inspection Bureau (The) (850) SPRI Single Ply Roofing Industry (781) SSINA Specialty Steel Industry of North America (800) (202) SSPC SSPC: The Society for Protective Coatings (877) (412) STI Steel Tank Institute (847) /30/15 IN071 ET 109/109A RENO. FOR OFFICE SPACE (IU# )

184 DELV Design Studio, LLC SECTION PAGE 12 REFERENCES SWI Steel Window Institute (216) SWPA Submersible Wastewater Pump Association (847) TCA Tilt-Up Concrete Association (319) TCNA Tile Council of North America, Inc. (864) TEMA Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association (914) TIA/EIA Telecommunications Industry Association/Electronic Industries Alliance (703) TMS The Masonry Society (303) TPI Truss Plate Institute, Inc. (703) TPI Turfgrass Producers International (800) (847) TRI Tile Roofing Institute (312) UL Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (877) (847) UNI Uni-Bell PVC Pipe Association (972) USAV USA Volleyball (888) (719) USGBC U.S. Green Building Council (800) USITT United States Institute for Theatre Technology, Inc. (800) (315) WASTEC Waste Equipment Technology Association (800) (202) WCLIB West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau (800) (503) WCMA Window Covering Manufacturers Association (212) /30/15 IN071 ET 109/109A RENO. FOR OFFICE SPACE (IU# )

185 DELV Design Studio, LLC SECTION PAGE 13 REFERENCES WDMA Window & Door Manufacturers Association (800) (Formerly: NWWDA - National Wood Window and Door (312) Association) WI Woodwork Institute (Formerly: WIC - Woodwork Institute of California) (916) WMMPA Wood Moulding & Millwork Producers Association (800) (530) WSRCA Western States Roofing Contractors Association (800) (650) WWPA Western Wood Products Association (503) C. Code Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web sites are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents. DIN Deutsches Institut fur Normung e.v IAPMO International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical Officials (909) ICC International Code Council (888) ICC-ES ICC Evaluation Service, Inc. (800) (562) D. Federal Government Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web sites are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents. COE Army Corps of Engineers (202) CPSC Consumer Product Safety Commission (800) (301) DOC Department of Commerce (202) DOD Department of Defense (215) DOE Department of Energy (202) /30/15 IN071 ET 109/109A RENO. FOR OFFICE SPACE (IU# )

186 DELV Design Studio, LLC SECTION PAGE 14 REFERENCES EPA Environmental Protection Agency (202) FAA Federal Aviation Administration (866) FCC Federal Communications Commission (888) FDA Food and Drug Administration (888) GSA General Services Administration (800) HUD Department of Housing and Urban Development (202) LBL Lawrence Berkeley National Laboratory (510) NCHRP National Cooperative Highway Research Program (See TRB) NIST National Institute of Standards and Technology (301) OSHA Occupational Safety & Health Administration (800) (202) PBS Public Buildings Service (See GSA) PHS Office of Public Health and Science (202) RUS Rural Utilities Service (202) (See USDA) SD State Department (202) TRB Transportation Research Board (202) USDA Department of Agriculture (202) USP U.S. Pharmacopeia (800) USPS Postal Service (202) E. Standards and Regulations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the standards and regulations in the 11/30/15 IN071 ET 109/109A RENO. FOR OFFICE SPACE (IU# )

187 DELV Design Studio, LLC SECTION PAGE 15 REFERENCES following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web sites are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents. ADAAG Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) (800) Architectural Barriers Act (ABA) (202) Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities Available from U.S. Access Board CFR Code of Federal Regulations (866) Available from Government Printing Office (202) DOD Department of Defense Military Specifications and Standards (215) Available from Department of Defense Single Stock Point DSCC FED-STD Defense Supply Center Columbus (See FS) Federal Standard (See FS) FS Federal Specification (215) Available from Department of Defense Single Stock Point Available from Defense Standardization Program Available from General Services Administration (202) Available from National Institute of Building Sciences (202) FTMS MIL MIL-STD Federal Test Method Standard (See FS) (See MILSPEC) (See MILSPEC) MILSPEC Military Specification and Standards (215) Available from Department of Defense Single Stock Point UFAS Uniform Federal Accessibility Standards (800) Available from Access Board (202) F. State Government Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web sites are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents. 11/30/15 IN071 ET 109/109A RENO. FOR OFFICE SPACE (IU# )

188 DELV Design Studio, LLC SECTION PAGE 16 REFERENCES CBHF State of California, Department of Consumer Affairs Bureau of Home Furnishings (800) and Thermal Insulation (916) CCR California Code of Regulations (916) CDHS California Department of Health Services (916) CDPH California Department of Public Health, Indoor Air Quality Section CPUC California Public Utilities Commission (415) TFS Texas Forest Service Forest Resource Development (979) PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION /30/15 IN071 ET 109/109A RENO. FOR OFFICE SPACE (IU# )

189 DELV Design Studio, LLC SECTION PAGE 1 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS SECTION TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes requirements for temporary utilities, support facilities, and security and protection facilities. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section "Summary" for work restrictions and limitations on utility interruptions. 1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Site Plan: Show temporary facilities, utility hookups, staging areas, and parking areas for construction personnel. B. Fire-Safety Program: Show compliance with requirements of NFPA 241 and authorities having jurisdiction. Indicate Contractor personnel responsible for management of fire-prevention program. C. Dust- and HVAC-Control Plan: Submit coordination drawing and narrative that indicates the dust- and HVAC-control measures proposed for use, proposed locations, and proposed time frame for their operation. Identify further options if proposed measures are later determined to be inadequate. Include the following: 1. Locations of dust-control partitions at each phase of work. 2. HVAC system isolation schematic drawing. 3. Location of proposed air-filtration system discharge. 4. Waste handling procedures. 5. Other dust-control measures. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electric Service: Comply with NECA, NEMA, and UL standards and regulations for temporary electric service. Install service to comply with NFPA 70. B. Tests and Inspections: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to test and inspect each temporary utility before use. Obtain required certifications and permits. C. Accessible Temporary Egress: Comply with applicable provisions in [the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines] [and] [ICC/ANSI A117.1]. 11/30/15 IN071 ET 109/109A RENO. FOR OFFICE SPACE (IU# )

190 DELV Design Studio, LLC SECTION PAGE 2 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Portable Chain-Link Fencing: Minimum 2-inch, inch- thick, galvanized-steel, chain-link fabric fencing; minimum 6 feet high with galvanized-steel pipe posts; minimum 2-3/8-inch- OD line posts and 2-7/8-inch- OD corner and pull posts, with 1-5/8-inch- OD top and bottom rails. Provide galvanized-steel bases for supporting posts. B. Dust-Control Adhesive-Surface Walk-off Mats: Provide mats minimum 36 by 60 inches. 2.2 TEMPORARY FACILITIES A. Field Offices, General: Not required for this project. B. Storage and Fabrication Sheds: Not required/allowed for this project. 2.3 EQUIPMENT A. Fire Extinguishers: Portable, UL rated; with class and extinguishing agent as required by locations and classes of fire exposures. B. Air-Filtration Units: Primary and secondary HEPA-filter-equipped portable units with four-stage filtration. Provide single switch for emergency shutoff. Configure to run continuously. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Locate facilities where they will serve Project adequately and result in minimum interference with performance of the Work. Relocate and modify facilities as required by progress of the Work. 1. Locate facilities to limit site disturbance as specified in Section "Summary." B. Provide each facility ready for use when needed to avoid delay. Do not remove until facilities are no longer needed or are replaced by authorized use of completed permanent facilities. 3.2 TEMPORARY UTILITY INSTALLATION A. Isolation of Work Areas in Occupied Facilities: Prevent dust, fumes, and odors from entering occupied areas. 1. Prior to commencing work, isolate the HVAC system in area where work is to be performed according to coordination drawings. a. Disconnect supply and return ductwork in work area from HVAC systems servicing occupied areas. b. Maintain negative air pressure within work area using HEPA-equipped air-filtration units, starting with commencement of temporary partition construction, and continuing until removal of temporary partitions is complete. 2. Maintain dust partitions during the Work. Use vacuum collection attachments on dust-producing equipment. Isolate limited work within occupied areas using portable dust-containment devices. 11/30/15 IN071 ET 109/109A RENO. FOR OFFICE SPACE (IU# )

191 DELV Design Studio, LLC SECTION PAGE 3 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 3. Perform daily construction cleanup and final cleanup using approved, HEPA-filter-equipped vacuum equipment. B. Lighting: Provide temporary lighting with local switching that provides adequate illumination for construction operations, observations, inspections, and traffic conditions. 1. Install and operate temporary lighting that fulfills security and protection requirements without operating entire system. 2. Install lighting for Project identification sign. 3.3 SUPPORT FACILITIES INSTALLATION A. Parking: Use public on-street parking or parking garages on or around campus for construction personnel. Contractors can purchase one Vendor permit per project for surface parking near the project site. Additional parking permits for the (NC) North Campus lot can be purchased from the Office of Transportation and Parking Services. These (NC) permits are good for surface lots closer to the project site after regular parking hours. B. Waste Disposal Facilities: Provide waste-collection containers in sizes adequate to handle waste from construction operations. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Comply with progress cleaning requirements in Section "Execution." 3.4 SECURITY AND PROTECTION FACILITIES INSTALLATION A. Protection of Existing Facilities: Protect existing vegetation, equipment, structures, utilities, and other improvements at Project site and on adjacent properties, except those indicated to be removed or altered. Repair damage to existing facilities. B. Barricades, Warning Signs, and Lights: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction for erecting structurally adequate barricades, including warning signs and lighting. C. Temporary Egress: Maintain temporary egress from existing occupied facilities as indicated and as required by authorities having jurisdiction. D. Temporary Partitions: Provide floor-to-ceiling dustproof partitions to limit dust and dirt migration and to separate areas occupied by Owner from fumes and noise. 1. Construct dustproof partitions with gypsum wallboard with joints taped on occupied side, and fireretardant-treated plywood on construction operations side. 2. Construct dustproof partitions with two layers of 6-mil polyethylene sheet on each side. Cover floor with two layers of 6-mil polyethylene sheet, extending sheets 18 inches up the sidewalls. Overlap and tape full length of joints. Cover floor with fire-retardant-treated plywood. a. Construct vestibule and airlock at each entrance through temporary partition with not less than 48 inches between doors. Maintain water-dampened foot mats in vestibule. 3. Where fire-resistance-rated temporary partitions are indicated or are required by authorities having jurisdiction, construct partitions according to the rated assemblies. 4. Insulate partitions to control noise transmission to occupied areas. 5. Seal joints and perimeter. Equip partitions with gasketed dustproof doors and security locks where openings are required. 6. Protect air-handling equipment. 7. Provide walk-off mats at each entrance through temporary partition. 11/30/15 IN071 ET 109/109A RENO. FOR OFFICE SPACE (IU# )

192 DELV Design Studio, LLC SECTION PAGE 4 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS E. Temporary Fire Protection: Install and maintain temporary fire-protection facilities of types needed to protect against reasonably predictable and controllable fire losses. Comply with NFPA 241; manage fireprevention program. 1. Prohibit smoking in construction areas. 2. Supervise welding operations, combustion-type temporary heating units, and similar sources of fire ignition according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 3. Develop and supervise an overall fire-prevention and -protection program for personnel at Project site. Review needs with local fire department and establish procedures to be followed. Instruct personnel in methods and procedures. Post warnings and information. 4. Provide temporary standpipes and hoses for fire protection. Hang hoses with a warning sign stating that hoses are for fire-protection purposes only and are not to be removed. Match hose size with outlet size and equip with suitable nozzles. 3.5 OPERATION, TERMINATION, AND REMOVAL A. Supervision: Enforce strict discipline in use of temporary facilities. To minimize waste and abuse, limit availability of temporary facilities to essential and intended uses. B. Maintenance: Maintain facilities in good operating condition until removal. 1. Maintain operation of temporary enclosures, heating, cooling, humidity control, ventilation, and similar facilities on a 24-hour basis where required to achieve indicated results and to avoid possibility of damage. END OF SECTION /30/15 IN071 ET 109/109A RENO. FOR OFFICE SPACE (IU# )

193 DELV Design Studio, LLC SECTION PAGE 1 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS SECTION PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for selection of products for use in Project; product delivery, storage, and handling; manufacturers' standard warranties on products; special warranties; and comparable products. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section "Alternates" for products selected under an alternate. 2. Section "References" for applicable industry standards for products specified. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Products: Items obtained for incorporating into the Work, whether purchased for Project or taken from previously purchased stock. The term "product" includes the terms "material," "equipment," "system," and terms of similar intent. 1. Named Products: Items identified by manufacturer's product name, including make or model number or other designation shown or listed in manufacturer's published product literature, which is current as of date of the Contract Documents. 2. New Products: Items that have not previously been incorporated into another project or facility. Products salvaged or recycled from other projects are not considered new products. 3. Comparable Product: Product that is demonstrated and approved through submittal process to have the indicated qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics that equal or exceed those of specified product. B. Basis-of-Design Product Specification: A specification in which a specific manufacturer's product is named and accompanied by the words "basis-of-design product," including make or model number or other designation, to establish the significant qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics for purposes of evaluating comparable products of additional manufacturers named in the specification. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Comparable Product Requests: Submit request for consideration of each comparable product. Identify product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles. 1. Include data to indicate compliance with the requirements specified in "Comparable Products" Article. 2. Architect's Action: If necessary, Architect will request additional information or documentation for evaluation within one week of receipt of a comparable product request. Architect will notify Contractor of approval or rejection of proposed comparable product request within 5 days of receipt of request, or 2 days of receipt of additional information or documentation, whichever is later. 11/30/15 IN /109A RENO. FOR OFFICE SPACE (IU# )

194 DELV Design Studio, LLC SECTION PAGE 2 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS a. Form of Approval: As specified in Section "Submittal Procedures." b. Use product specified if Architect does not issue a decision on use of a comparable product request within time allocated. B. Basis-of-Design Product Specification Submittal: Comply with requirements in Section "Submittal Procedures." Show compliance with requirements. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Compatibility of Options: If Contractor is given option of selecting between two or more products for use on Project, select product compatible with products previously selected, even if previously selected products were also options. 1. Each contractor is responsible for providing products and construction methods compatible with products and construction methods of other contractors. 2. If a dispute arises between contractors over concurrently selectable but incompatible products, Architect will determine which products shall be used. 1.6 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, and handle products using means and methods that will prevent damage, deterioration, and loss, including theft and vandalism. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. B. Delivery and Handling: 1. Schedule delivery to minimize long-term storage at Project site and to prevent overcrowding of construction spaces. 2. Coordinate delivery with installation time to ensure minimum holding time for items that are flammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive to deterioration, theft, and other losses. 3. Deliver products to Project site in an undamaged condition in manufacturer's original sealed container or other packaging system, complete with labels and instructions for handling, storing, unpacking, protecting, and installing. 4. Inspect products on delivery to determine compliance with the Contract Documents and to determine that products are undamaged and properly protected. C. Storage: 1. Store products to allow for inspection and measurement of quantity or counting of units. 2. Store materials in a manner that will not endanger Project structure. 3. Store products that are subject to damage by the elements, under cover in a weathertight enclosure above ground, with ventilation adequate to prevent condensation. 4. Protect foam plastic from exposure to sunlight, except to extent necessary for period of installation and concealment. 5. Comply with product manufacturer's written instructions for temperature, humidity, ventilation, and weather-protection requirements for storage. 6. Protect stored products from damage and liquids from freezing. 7. Provide a secure location and enclosure at Project site for storage of materials and equipment by Owner's construction forces. Coordinate location with Owner. 1.7 PRODUCT WARRANTIES A. Warranties specified in other Sections shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties required by the Contract Documents. Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on product warranties do not relieve Contractor of obligations under requirements of the Contract Documents. 11/30/15 IN /109A RENO. FOR OFFICE SPACE (IU# )

195 DELV Design Studio, LLC SECTION PAGE 3 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 1. Manufacturer's Warranty: Written warranty furnished by individual manufacturer for a particular product and specifically endorsed by manufacturer to Owner. 2. Special Warranty: Written warranty required by the Contract Documents to provide specific rights for Owner. B. Special Warranties: Prepare a written document that contains appropriate terms and identification, ready for execution. 1. Manufacturer's Standard Form: Modified to include Project-specific information and properly executed. 2. Specified Form: When specified forms are included with the Specifications, prepare a written document using indicated form properly executed. 3. See other Sections for specific content requirements and particular requirements for submitting special warranties. C. Submittal Time: Comply with requirements in Section "Closeout Procedures." PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PRODUCT SELECTION PROCEDURES A. General Product Requirements: Provide products that comply with the Contract Documents, are undamaged and, unless otherwise indicated, are new at time of installation. 1. Provide products complete with accessories, trim, finish, fasteners, and other items needed for a complete installation and indicated use and effect. 2. Standard Products: If available, and unless custom products or nonstandard options are specified, provide standard products of types that have been produced and used successfully in similar situations on other projects. 3. Owner reserves the right to limit selection to products with warranties not in conflict with requirements of the Contract Documents. 4. Where products are accompanied by the term "as selected," Architect will make selection. 5. Descriptive, performance, and reference standard requirements in the Specifications establish salient characteristics of products. 6. Or Equal: For products specified by name and accompanied by the term "or equal," or "or approved equal," or "or approved," comply with requirements in "Comparable Products" Article to obtain approval for use of an unnamed product. B. Product Selection Procedures: 1. Product: Where Specifications name a single manufacturer and product, provide the named product that complies with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience will not be considered. 2. Manufacturer/Source: Where Specifications name a single manufacturer or source, provide a product by the named manufacturer or source that complies with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience will not be considered. 3. Products: a. Restricted List: Where Specifications include a list of names of both manufacturers and products, provide one of the products listed that complies with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience will not be considered unless otherwise indicated. b. Non-restricted List: Where Specifications include a list of names of both available manufacturers and products, provide one of the products listed, or an unnamed product, 11/30/15 IN /109A RENO. FOR OFFICE SPACE (IU# )

196 DELV Design Studio, LLC SECTION PAGE 4 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 4. Manufacturers: that complies with requirements. Comply with requirements in "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed product. a. Restricted List: Where Specifications include a list of manufacturers' names, provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed that complies with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience will be considered unless otherwise indicated. b. Non-restricted List: Where Specifications include a list of available manufacturers, provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed, or a product by an unnamed manufacturer, that complies with requirements. Comply with requirements in "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed manufacturer's product. 5. Basis-of-Design Product: Where Specifications name a product, or refer to a product indicated on Drawings, and include a list of manufacturers, provide the specified or indicated product or a comparable product by one of the other named manufacturers. Drawings and Specifications indicate sizes, profiles, dimensions, and other characteristics that are based on the product named. Comply with requirements in "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed product by one of the other named manufacturers. C. Visual Matching Specification: Where Specifications require "match Architect's sample", provide a product that complies with requirements and matches Architect's sample. Architect's decision will be final on whether a proposed product matches. 1. If no product available within specified category matches and complies with other specified requirements, comply with requirements in Section "Substitution Procedures" for proposal of product. D. Visual Selection Specification: Where Specifications include the phrase "as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range" or similar phrase, select a product that complies with requirements. Architect will select color, gloss, pattern, density, or texture from manufacturer's product line that includes both standard and premium items. 2.2 COMPARABLE PRODUCTS A. Conditions for Consideration: Architect will consider Contractor's request for comparable product when the following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect may return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements: 1. Evidence that the proposed product does not require revisions to the Contract Documents, that it is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce the indicated results, and that it is compatible with other portions of the Work. 2. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed product with those named in the Specifications. Significant qualities include attributes such as performance, weight, size, durability, visual effect, and specific features and requirements indicated. 3. Evidence that proposed product provides specified warranty. 4. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and addresses and names and addresses of architects and owners, if requested. 5. Samples, if requested. PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION /30/15 IN /109A RENO. FOR OFFICE SPACE (IU# )

197 DELV Design Studio, LLC SECTION PAGE 1 EXECUTION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes general administrative and procedural requirements governing execution of the Work including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Construction layout. 2. Field engineering and surveying. 3. Installation of the Work. 4. Cutting and patching. 5. Coordination of Owner-installed products. 6. Progress cleaning. 7. Starting and adjusting. 8. Protection of installed construction. 9. Correction of the Work. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section "Summary" for limits on use of Project site. 2. Section "Submittal Procedures" for submitting surveys. 3. Section "Penetration Firestopping" for patching penetrations in fire-rated construction. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Cutting: Removal of in-place construction necessary to permit installation or performance of other work. B. Patching: Fitting and repair work required to restore construction to original conditions after installation of other work. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Cutting and Patching Plan: Submit plan describing procedures at least 5 days prior to the time cutting and patching will be performed. Include the following information: 1. Extent: Describe reason for and extent of each occurrence of cutting and patching. 2. Changes to In-Place Construction: Describe anticipated results. Include changes to structural elements and operating components as well as changes in building appearance and other significant visual elements. 3. Products: List products to be used for patching and firms or entities that will perform patching work. 4. Dates: Indicate when cutting and patching will be performed. 5. Utilities and Mechanical and Electrical Systems: List services and systems that cutting and patching procedures will disturb or affect. List services and systems that will be relocated and those that will be temporarily out of service. Indicate length of time permanent services and systems will be disrupted. a. Include description of provisions for temporary services and systems during interruption of permanent services and systems. 11/30/15 IN071 ET 109/109A RENO. FOR OFFICE SPACE (IU# )

198 DELV Design Studio, LLC SECTION PAGE 2 EXECUTION 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Cutting and Patching: Comply with requirements for and limitations on cutting and patching of construction elements. 1. Structural Elements: When cutting and patching structural elements, notify Architect of locations and details of cutting and await directions from Architect before proceeding. Shore, brace, and support structural elements during cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch structural elements in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity or increase deflection. 2. Operational Elements: Do not cut and patch operating elements and related components in a manner that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended or that results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety. Operational elements include the following: a. Primary operational systems and equipment. b. Fire separation assemblies. c. Air or smoke barriers. d. Fire-suppression systems. e. Mechanical systems piping and ducts. f. Control systems. g. Communication systems. h. Fire-detection and -alarm systems. i. Conveying systems. j. Electrical wiring systems. k. Operating systems of special construction. 3. Other Construction Elements: Do not cut and patch other construction elements or components in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity, that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended, or that results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety. Other construction elements include but are not limited to the following: a. Water, moisture, or vapor barriers. b. Membranes and flashings. c. Exterior curtain-wall construction. d. Sprayed fire-resistive material. e. Equipment supports. f. Piping, ductwork, vessels, and equipment. g. Noise- and vibration-control elements and systems. 4. Visual Elements: Do not cut and patch construction in a manner that results in visual evidence of cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch exposed construction in a manner that would, in Architect's opinion, reduce the building's aesthetic qualities. Remove and replace construction that has been cut and patched in a visually unsatisfactory manner. B. Cutting and Patching Conference: Before proceeding, meet at Project site with parties involved in cutting and patching, including mechanical and electrical trades. Review areas of potential interference and conflict. Coordinate procedures and resolve potential conflicts before proceeding. C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Obtain and maintain on-site manufacturer's written recommendations and instructions for installation of products and equipment. 11/30/15 IN071 ET 109/109A RENO. FOR OFFICE SPACE (IU# )

199 DELV Design Studio, LLC SECTION PAGE 3 EXECUTION PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. In-Place Materials: Use materials for patching identical to in-place materials. For exposed surfaces, use materials that visually match in-place adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible. 1. If identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used, use materials that, when installed, will provide a match acceptable to Architect for the visual and functional performance of in-place materials. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examination and Acceptance of Conditions: Before proceeding with each component of the Work, examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer or Applicator present where indicated, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. Record observations. 1. Examine roughing-in for mechanical and electrical systems to verify actual locations of connections before equipment and fixture installation. 2. Examine walls, floors, and roofs for suitable conditions where products and systems are to be installed. 3. Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with existing finishes or primers. B. Written Report: Where a written report listing conditions detrimental to performance of the Work is required by other Sections, include the following: 1. Description of the Work. 2. List of detrimental conditions, including substrates. 3. List of unacceptable installation tolerances. 4. Recommended corrections. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Proceeding with the Work indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Existing Utility Information: Furnish information to Owner that is necessary to adjust, move, or relocate existing utility structures, utility poles, lines, services, or other utility appurtenances located in or affected by construction. Coordinate with authorities having jurisdiction. B. Field Measurements: Take field measurements as required to fit the Work properly. Recheck measurements before installing each product. Where portions of the Work are indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. C. Space Requirements: Verify space requirements and dimensions of items shown diagrammatically on Drawings. D. Review of Contract Documents and Field Conditions: Immediately on discovery of the need for clarification of the Contract Documents caused by differing field conditions outside the control of 11/30/15 IN071 ET 109/109A RENO. FOR OFFICE SPACE (IU# )

200 DELV Design Studio, LLC SECTION PAGE 4 EXECUTION Contractor, submit a request for information to Architect according to requirements in Section "Project Management and Coordination." 3.3 CONSTRUCTION LAYOUT A. Verification: Before proceeding to lay out the Work, verify layout information shown on Drawings, in relation to the property survey and existing benchmarks. If discrepancies are discovered, notify Architect promptly. 3.4 INSTALLATION A. General: Locate the Work and components of the Work accurately, in correct alignment and elevation, as indicated. 1. Make vertical work plumb and make horizontal work level. 2. Where space is limited, install components to maximize space available for maintenance and ease of removal for replacement. 3. Conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring in finished areas unless otherwise indicated. 4. Maintain minimum headroom clearance of 96 in occupied spaces and 90 in unoccupied spaces. B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations for installing products in applications indicated. C. Install products at the time and under conditions that will ensure the best possible results. Maintain conditions required for product performance until Substantial Completion. D. Conduct construction operations so no part of the Work is subjected to damaging operations or loading in excess of that expected during normal conditions of occupancy. E. Sequence the Work and allow adequate clearances to accommodate movement of construction items on site and placement in permanent locations. F. Tools and Equipment: Do not use tools or equipment that produce harmful noise levels. G. Templates: Obtain and distribute to the parties involved templates for work specified to be factory prepared and field installed. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing products to comply with indicated requirements. H. Attachment: Provide blocking and attachment plates and anchors and fasteners of adequate size and number to securely anchor each component in place, accurately located and aligned with other portions of the Work. Where size and type of attachments are not indicated, verify size and type required for load conditions. 1. Mounting Heights: Where mounting heights are not indicated, mount components at heights directed by Architect. 2. Allow for building movement, including thermal expansion and contraction. 3. Coordinate installation of anchorages. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation. I. Joints: Make joints of uniform width. Where joint locations in exposed work are not indicated, arrange joints for the best visual effect. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. 11/30/15 IN071 ET 109/109A RENO. FOR OFFICE SPACE (IU# )

201 DELV Design Studio, LLC SECTION PAGE 5 EXECUTION J. Hazardous Materials: Use products, cleaners, and installation materials that are not considered hazardous. 3.5 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Cutting and Patching, General: Employ skilled workers to perform cutting and patching. Proceed with cutting and patching at the earliest feasible time, and complete without delay. 1. Cut in-place construction to provide for installation of other components or performance of other construction, and subsequently patch as required to restore surfaces to their original condition. B. Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged during installation or cutting and patching operations, by methods and with materials so as not to void existing warranties. C. Temporary Support: Provide temporary support of work to be cut. D. Protection: Protect in-place construction during cutting and patching to prevent damage. Provide protection from adverse weather conditions for portions of Project that might be exposed during cutting and patching operations. E. Adjacent Occupied Areas: Where interference with use of adjoining areas or interruption of free passage to adjoining areas is unavoidable, coordinate cutting and patching according to requirements in Section "Summary." F. Existing Utility Services and Mechanical/Electrical Systems: Where existing services/systems are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, bypass such services/systems before cutting to prevent interruption to occupied areas. G. Cutting: Cut in-place construction by sawing, drilling, breaking, chipping, grinding, and similar operations, including excavation, using methods least likely to damage elements retained or adjoining construction. If possible, review proposed procedures with original Installer; comply with original Installer's written recommendations. 1. In general, use hand or small power tools designed for sawing and grinding, not hammering and chopping. Cut holes and slots neatly to minimum size required, and with minimum disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings when not in use. 2. Finished Surfaces: Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces. 3. Concrete: Cut using a cutting machine, such as an abrasive saw or a diamond-core drill. 4. Excavating and Backfilling: Comply with requirements in applicable Sections where required by cutting and patching operations. 5. Mechanical and Electrical Services: Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be removed. Cap, valve, or plug and seal remaining portion of pipe or conduit to prevent entrance of moisture or other foreign matter after cutting. 6. Proceed with patching after construction operations requiring cutting are complete. H. Patching: Patch construction by filling, repairing, refinishing, closing up, and similar operations following performance of other work. Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as practicable. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Sections, where applicable. 1. Inspection: Where feasible, test and inspect patched areas after completion to demonstrate physical integrity of installation. 11/30/15 IN071 ET 109/109A RENO. FOR OFFICE SPACE (IU# )

202 DELV Design Studio, LLC SECTION PAGE 6 EXECUTION 2. Exposed Finishes: Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish restoration into retained adjoining construction in a manner that will minimize evidence of patching and refinishing. a. Clean piping, conduit, and similar features before applying paint or other finishing materials. b. Restore damaged pipe covering to its original condition. 3. Floors and Walls: Where walls or partitions that are removed extend one finished area into another, patch and repair floor and wall surfaces in the new space. Provide an even surface of uniform finish, color, texture, and appearance. Remove in-place floor and wall coverings and replace with new materials, if necessary, to achieve uniform color and appearance. a. Where patching occurs in a painted surface, prepare substrate and apply primer and intermediate paint coats appropriate for substrate over the patch, and apply final paint coat over entire unbroken surface containing the patch. Provide additional coats until patch blends with adjacent surfaces. 4. Ceilings: Patch, repair, or rehang in-place ceilings as necessary to provide an even-plane surface of uniform appearance. 5. Exterior Building Enclosure: Patch components in a manner that restores enclosure to a weathertight condition and ensures thermal and moisture integrity of building enclosure. I. Cleaning: Clean areas and spaces where cutting and patching are performed. Remove paint, mortar, oils, putty, and similar materials from adjacent finished surfaces. 3.6 OWNER-INSTALLED PRODUCTS A. Site Access: Provide access to Project site for Owner's construction personnel. B. Coordination: Coordinate construction and operations of the Work with work performed by Owner's construction personnel. 1. Construction Schedule: Inform Owner of Contractor's preferred construction schedule for Owner's portion of the Work. Adjust construction schedule based on a mutually agreeable timetable. Notify Owner if changes to schedule are required due to differences in actual construction progress. 2. Preinstallation Conferences: Include Owner's construction personnel at preinstallation conferences covering portions of the Work that are to receive Owner's work. Attend preinstallation conferences conducted by Owner's construction personnel if portions of the Work depend on Owner's construction. 3.7 PROGRESS CLEANING A. General: Clean Project site and work areas daily, including common areas. Enforce requirements strictly. Dispose of materials lawfully. 1. Comply with requirements in NFPA 241 for removal of combustible waste materials and debris. 2. Do not hold waste materials more than seven days during normal weather or three days if the temperature is expected to rise above 80 deg F. 3. Containerize hazardous and unsanitary waste materials separately from other waste. Mark containers appropriately and dispose of legally, according to regulations. a. Use containers intended for holding waste materials of type to be stored. 11/30/15 IN071 ET 109/109A RENO. FOR OFFICE SPACE (IU# )

203 DELV Design Studio, LLC SECTION PAGE 7 EXECUTION 4. Coordinate progress cleaning for joint-use areas where Contractor and other contractors are working concurrently. B. Site: Maintain Project site free of waste materials and debris. C. Work Areas: Clean areas where work is in progress to the level of cleanliness necessary for proper execution of the Work. 1. Remove liquid spills promptly. 2. Where dust would impair proper execution of the Work, broom-clean or vacuum the entire work area, as appropriate. D. Installed Work: Keep installed work clean. Clean installed surfaces according to written instructions of manufacturer or fabricator of product installed, using only cleaning materials specifically recommended. If specific cleaning materials are not recommended, use cleaning materials that are not hazardous to health or property and that will not damage exposed surfaces. E. Concealed Spaces: Remove debris from concealed spaces before enclosing the space. F. Exposed Surfaces in Finished Areas: Clean exposed surfaces and protect as necessary to ensure freedom from damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. G. During handling and installation, clean and protect construction in progress and adjoining materials already in place. Apply protective covering where required to ensure protection from damage or deterioration at Substantial Completion. H. Clean and provide maintenance on completed construction as frequently as necessary through the remainder of the construction period. Adjust and lubricate operable components to ensure operability without damaging effects. I. Limiting Exposures: Supervise construction operations to assure that no part of the construction, completed or in progress, is subject to harmful, dangerous, damaging, or otherwise deleterious exposure during the construction period. 3.8 STARTING AND ADJUSTING A. Start equipment and operating components to confirm proper operation. Remove malfunctioning units, replace with new units, and retest. B. Adjust equipment for proper operation. Adjust operating components for proper operation without binding. C. Test each piece of equipment to verify proper operation. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. D. Manufacturer's Field Service: Comply with qualification requirements in Section "Quality Requirements." 3.9 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure installed Work is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION /30/15 IN071 ET 109/109A RENO. FOR OFFICE SPACE (IU# )

204

205 DELV Design Studio, LLC SECTION PAGE 1 ROUGH CARPENTRY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Wood blocking and nailers. 2. Wood furring. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Exposed Framing: Framing not concealed by other construction. B. Dimension Lumber: Lumber of 2 inches nominal or greater but less than 5 inches nominal in least dimension. C. Timber: Lumber of 5 inches nominal or greater in least dimension. D. Lumber grading agencies, and the abbreviations used to reference them, include the following: 1. NeLMA: Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers' Association. 2. NLGA: National Lumber Grades Authority. 3. RIS: Redwood Inspection Service. 4. SPIB: The Southern Pine Inspection Bureau. 5. WCLIB: West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau. 6. WWPA: Western Wood Products Association. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product. Indicate component materials and dimensions and include construction and application details. 1. Include data for wood-preservative treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. Indicate type of preservative used and net amount of preservative retained. 2. Include data for fire-retardant treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. Include physical properties of treated materials based on testing by a qualified independent testing agency. 3. For fire-retardant treatments, include physical properties of treated lumber both before and after exposure to elevated temperatures, based on testing by a qualified independent testing agency according to ASTM D For products receiving a waterborne treatment, include statement that moisture content of treated materials was reduced to levels specified before shipment to Project site. 5. Include copies of warranties from chemical treatment manufacturers for each type of treatment. B. Fastener Patterns: Full-size templates for fasteners in exposed framing. 11/30/15 IN071 ET 109/109A RENO. FOR OFFICE SPACE (IU# )

206 DELV Design Studio, LLC SECTION PAGE 2 ROUGH CARPENTRY 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Material Certificates: For dimension lumber specified to comply with minimum allowable unit stresses. Indicate species and grade selected for each use and design values approved by the ALSC Board of Review. B. Evaluation Reports: For the following, from ICC-ES: 1. Wood-preservative-treated wood. 2. Fire-retardant-treated wood. 3. Power-driven fasteners. 4. Powder-actuated fasteners. 5. Expansion anchors. 6. Metal framing anchors. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Testing Agency Qualifications: For testing agency providing classification marking for fire-retardant treated material, an inspection agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction that periodically performs inspections to verify that the material bearing the classification marking is representative of the material tested. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Stack lumber flat with spacers beneath and between each bundle to provide air circulation. Protect lumber from weather by covering with waterproof sheeting, securely anchored. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 FIRE-RETARDANT-TREATED MATERIALS A. General: Where fire-retardant-treated materials are indicated, use materials complying with requirements in this article, that are acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and with fire-test-response characteristics specified as determined by testing identical products per test method indicated by a qualified testing agency. B. Fire-Retardant-Treated Lumber and Plywood by Pressure Process: Products with a flame spread index of 25 or less when tested according to ASTM E 84, and with no evidence of significant progressive combustion when the test is extended an additional 20 minutes, and with the flame front not extending more than 10.5 feet beyond the centerline of the burners at any time during the test. 1. Use treatment that does not promote corrosion of metal fasteners. 2. Exterior Type: Treated materials shall comply with requirements specified above for fireretardant-treated lumber and plywood by pressure process after being subjected to accelerated weathering according to ASTM D Use for exterior locations and where indicated. 3. Interior Type A: Treated materials shall have a moisture content of 28 percent or less when tested according to ASTM D 3201 at 92 percent relative humidity. Use where exterior type is not indicated. 4. Design Value Adjustment Factors: Treated lumber shall be tested according ASTM D 5664 and design value adjustment factors shall be calculated according to ASTM D 6841Retain option in first paragraph below if required for plywood backing panels. C. Identify fire-retardant-treated wood with appropriate classification marking of qualified testing agency. 11/30/15 IN071 ET 109/109A RENO. FOR OFFICE SPACE (IU# )

207 DELV Design Studio, LLC SECTION PAGE 3 ROUGH CARPENTRY 2.2 MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER A. General: Provide miscellaneous lumber indicated and lumber for support or attachment of other construction, including the following: 1. Blocking. 2. Nailers. 3. Furring. B. For items of dimension lumber size, provide Construction or No. 2 grade lumber of any species. C. For blocking not used for attachment of other construction, Utility, Stud, or No. 3 grade lumber of any species may be used provided that it is cut and selected to eliminate defects that will interfere with its attachment and purpose. D. For blocking and nailers used for attachment of other construction, select and cut lumber to eliminate knots and other defects that will interfere with attachment of other work. E. For furring strips for installing plywood or hardboard paneling, select boards with no knots capable of producing bent-over nails and damage to paneling. 2.3 PLYWOOD BACKING PANELS A. Equipment Backing Panels: DOC PS 1, fire-retardant treated, in thickness indicated or, if not indicated, not less than 1/2-inch nominal thickness. 1. Plywood shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers." 2.4 FASTENERS A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified in this article for material and manufacture. B. Nails, Brads, and Staples: ASTM F C. Power-Driven Fasteners: NES NER-272. D. Wood Screws: ASME B E. Lag Bolts: ASME B F. Bolts: Steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A; with ASTM A 563 hex nuts and, where indicated, flat washers. G. Expansion Anchors: Anchor bolt and sleeve assembly of material indicated below with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to six times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry assemblies and equal to four times the load imposed when installed in concrete as determined by testing per ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency. 1. Material: Carbon-steel components, zinc plated to comply with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn Material: Stainless steel with bolts and nuts complying with ASTM F 593 and ASTM F 594, Alloy Group 1 or 2. 11/30/15 IN071 ET 109/109A RENO. FOR OFFICE SPACE (IU# )

208 DELV Design Studio, LLC SECTION PAGE 4 ROUGH CARPENTRY PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Set rough carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and fitted. Fit rough carpentry to other construction; scribe and cope as needed for accurate fit. Locate furring, nailers, blocking and similar supports to comply with requirements for attaching other construction. B. Framing Standard: Comply with AF&PA's WCD 1, "Details for Conventional Wood Frame Construction," unless otherwise indicated. C. Install plywood backing panels by fastening to studs; coordinate locations with utilities requiring backing panels. Install fire-retardant treated plywood backing panels with classification marking of testing agency exposed to view. D. Do not splice structural members between supports unless otherwise indicated. E. Provide blocking and framing as indicated and as required to support facing materials, fixtures, specialty items, and trim. 1. Provide metal clips for fastening gypsum board or lath at corners and intersections where framing or blocking does not provide a surface for fastening edges of panels. Space clips not more than 16 inches o.c. F. Provide fire blocking in furred spaces, stud spaces, and other concealed cavities as indicated and as follows: 1. Fire block furred spaces of walls, at each floor level, at ceiling, and at not more than 96 inches o.c. with solid wood blocking or noncombustible materials accurately fitted to close furred spaces. 2. Fire block concealed spaces of wood-framed walls and partitions at each floor level, at ceiling line of top story, and at not more than 96 inches o.c. Where fire blocking is not inherent in framing system used, provide closely fitted solid wood blocks of same width as framing members and 2- inch nominal- thickness. 3. Fire block concealed spaces between floor sleepers with same material as sleepers to limit concealed spaces to not more than 100 sq. ft. and to solidly fill space below partitions. 4. Fire block concealed spaces behind combustible cornices and exterior trim at not more than 20 feet o.c. G. Sort and select lumber so that natural characteristics will not interfere with installation or with fastening other materials to lumber. Do not use materials with defects that interfere with function of member or pieces that are too small to use with minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement. H. Comply with AWPA M4 for applying field treatment to cut surfaces of preservative-treated lumber. 1. Use inorganic boron for items that are continuously protected from liquid water. 2. Use copper naphthenate for items not continuously protected from liquid water. I. Securely attach rough carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated, complying with the following: 1. NES NER-272 for power-driven fasteners. 2. Table , "Fastening Schedule," in ICC's International Building Code. 3. Table R602.3(1), "Fastener Schedule for Structural Members," and Table R602.3(2), "Alternate Attachments," in ICC's International Residential Code for One- and Two-Family Dwellings. 11/30/15 IN071 ET 109/109A RENO. FOR OFFICE SPACE (IU# )

209 DELV Design Studio, LLC SECTION PAGE 5 ROUGH CARPENTRY J. Use steel common nails unless otherwise indicated. Select fasteners of size that will not fully penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials. Make tight connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting wood. Drive nails snug but do not countersink nail heads unless otherwise indicated. K. For exposed work, arrange fasteners in straight rows parallel with edges of members, with fasteners evenly spaced, and with adjacent rows staggered. 1. Use finishing nails unless otherwise indicated. Countersink nail heads and fill holes with wood filler. 2. Use common nails unless otherwise indicated. Drive nails snug but do not countersink nail heads. 3.2 PROTECTION A. Protect wood that has been treated with inorganic boron (SBX) from weather. If, despite protection, inorganic boron-treated wood becomes wet, apply EPA-registered borate treatment. Apply borate solution by spraying to comply with EPA-registered label. END OF SECTION /30/15 IN071 ET 109/109A RENO. FOR OFFICE SPACE (IU# )

210

211 DELV Design Studio, LLC SECTION PAGE 1 THERMAL INSULATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Mineral-wool blanket insulation. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, for each product. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Surface-Burning Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 84 by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration due to moisture, soiling, and other sources. Store inside and in a dry location. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for handling, storing, and protecting during installation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MINERAL-WOOL BLANKET INSULATION A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Fibrex Insulations Inc. 2. Owens Corning. 3. Roxul Inc. 4. Thermafiber. B. Unfaced, Mineral-Wool Blanket Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing); consisting of fibers; with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively, per ASTM E 84; passing ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions applicable to products and applications indicated. 11/30/15 IN071 ET 109/109A RENO. FOR OFFICE SPACE (IU# )

212 DELV Design Studio, LLC SECTION PAGE 2 THERMAL INSULATION B. Install insulation that is undamaged, dry, and unsoiled and that has not been left exposed to ice, rain, or snow at any time. C. Extend insulation to envelop entire area to be insulated. Cut and fit tightly around obstructions and fill voids with insulation. Remove projections that interfere with placement. D. Provide sizes to fit applications indicated and selected from manufacturer's standard thicknesses, widths, and lengths. Apply single layer of insulation units to produce thickness indicated unless multiple layers are otherwise shown or required to make up total thickness. 3.2 INSTALLATION OF INSULATION FOR FRAMED CONSTRUCTION A. Apply insulation units to substrates by method indicated, complying with manufacturer's written instructions. If no specific method is indicated, bond units to substrate with adhesive or use mechanical anchorage to provide permanent placement and support of units. B. Mineral-Wool Blanket Insulation: Install in cavities formed by framing members according to the following requirements: 1. Use insulation widths and lengths that fill the cavities formed by framing members. If more than one length is required to fill the cavities, provide lengths that will produce a snug fit between ends. 2. Place insulation in cavities formed by framing members to produce a friction fit between edges of insulation and adjoining framing members. 3. Maintain 3-inch clearance of insulation around recessed lighting fixtures not rated for or protected from contact with insulation. 4. Install eave ventilation troughs between roof framing members in insulated attic spaces at vented eaves. 5. For metal-framed wall cavities where cavity heights exceed 96 inches, support unfaced blankets mechanically and support faced blankets by taping flanges of insulation to flanges of metal studs. 3.3 PROTECTION A. Protect installed insulation from damage due to harmful weather exposures, physical abuse, and other causes. Provide temporary coverings or enclosures where insulation is subject to abuse and cannot be concealed and protected by permanent construction immediately after installation. END OF SECTION /30/15 IN071 ET 109/109A RENO. FOR OFFICE SPACE (IU# )

213 DELV Design Studio, LLC SECTION PAGE 1 PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Penetrations in fire-resistance-rated walls. 2. Penetrations in horizontal assemblies. 3. Penetrations in smoke barriers. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Product Schedule: For each penetration firestopping system. Include location and design designation of qualified testing and inspecting agency. 1. Where Project conditions require modification to a qualified testing and inspecting agency's illustration for a particular penetration firestopping condition, submit illustration, with modifications marked, approved by penetration firestopping manufacturer's fire-protection engineer as an engineering judgment or equivalent fire-resistance-rated assembly. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer. B. Installer Certificates: From Installer indicating penetration firestopping has been installed in compliance with requirements and manufacturer's written recommendations. C. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, for penetration firestopping. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: A firm that has been approved by FM Global according to FM Global 4991, "Approval of Firestop Contractors," or been evaluated by UL and found to comply with its "Qualified Firestop Contractor Program Requirements." B. Installer Qualifications: A firm experienced in installing penetration firestopping similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful performance. Qualifications include having the necessary experience, staff, and training to install manufacturer's products per specified requirements. Manufacturer's willingness to sell its penetration firestopping products to Contractor or to Installer engaged by Contractor does not in itself confer qualification on buyer. C. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Penetration firestopping shall comply with the following requirements: 11/30/15 IN071 ET 109/109A RENO. FOR OFFICE SPACE (IU# )

214 DELV Design Studio, LLC SECTION PAGE 2 PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING 1. Penetration firestopping tests are performed by a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Penetration firestopping is identical to those tested per testing standard referenced in "Penetration Firestopping" Article. Provide rated systems complying with the following requirements: a. Penetration firestopping products bear classification marking of qualified testing and inspecting agency. b. Classification markings on penetration firestopping correspond to designations listed by the following: 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS 1) UL in its "Fire Resistance Directory." 2) Intertek ETL SEMKO in its "Directory of Listed Building Products." 3) FM Global in its "Building Materials Approval Guide." A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install penetration firestopping when ambient or substrate temperatures are outside limits permitted by penetration firestopping manufacturers or when substrates are wet because of rain, frost, condensation, or other causes. B. Install and cure penetration firestopping per manufacturer's written instructions using natural means of ventilations or, where this is inadequate, forced-air circulation. 1.7 COORDINATION A. Coordinate construction of openings and penetrating items to ensure that penetration firestopping is installed according to specified requirements. B. Coordinate sizing of sleeves, openings, core-drilled holes, or cut openings to accommodate penetration firestopping. C. Notify Owner's testing agency at least seven days in advance of penetration firestopping installations; confirm dates and times on day preceding each series of installations. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. A/D Fire Protection Systems Inc. 2. Grace Construction Products. 3. Hilti, Inc. 4. Johns Manville. 5. Nelson Firestop Products. 6. NUCO Inc. 7. Passive Fire Protection Partners. 8. RectorSeal Corporation. 9. Specified Technologies Inc M Fire Protection Products. 11. Tremco, Inc.; Tremco Fire Protection Systems Group. 12. USG Corporation. 11/30/15 IN071 ET 109/109A RENO. FOR OFFICE SPACE (IU# )

215 DELV Design Studio, LLC SECTION PAGE 3 PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING 2.2 PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING A. Provide penetration firestopping that is produced and installed to resist spread of fire according to requirements indicated, resist passage of smoke and other gases, and maintain original fire-resistance rating of construction penetrated. Penetration firestopping systems shall be compatible with one another, with the substrates forming openings, and with penetrating items if any. B. Penetrations in Fire-Resistance-Rated Walls: Provide penetration firestopping with ratings determined per ASTM E 814 or UL 1479, based on testing at a positive pressure differential of 0.01-inch wg. 1. Fire-resistance-rated walls include fire-barrier walls. 2. F-Rating: Not less than the fire-resistance rating of constructions penetrated. C. Penetrations in Horizontal Assemblies: Provide penetration firestopping with ratings determined per ASTM E 814 or UL 1479, based on testing at a positive pressure differential of 0.01-inch wg. 1. Horizontal assemblies include floors. 2. F-Rating: At least 1 hour, but not less than the fire-resistance rating of constructions penetrated. 3. T-Rating: At least 1 hour, but not less than the fire-resistance rating of constructions penetrated except for floor penetrations within the cavity of a wall. D. W-Rating: Provide penetration firestopping showing no evidence of water leakage when tested according to UL E. Exposed Penetration Firestopping: Provide products with flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of less than 25 and 450, respectively, as determined per ASTM E 84. F. VOC Content: Penetration firestopping sealants and sealant primers shall comply with the following limits for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24): 1. Sealants: 250 g/l. 2. Sealant Primers for Nonporous Substrates: 250 g/l. 3. Sealant Primers for Porous Substrates: 775 g/l. G. Low-Emitting Materials: Penetration firestopping sealants and sealant primers shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers." H. Accessories: Provide components for each penetration firestopping system that are needed to install fill materials and to maintain ratings required. Use only those components specified by penetration firestopping manufacturer and approved by qualified testing and inspecting agency for firestopping indicated. 1. Permanent forming/damming/backing materials, including the following: a. Slag-wool-fiber or rock-wool-fiber insulation. b. Sealants used in combination with other forming/damming/backing materials to prevent leakage of fill materials in liquid state. c. Fire-rated form board. d. Fillers for sealants. 2. Temporary forming materials. 3. Substrate primers. 4. Collars. 11/30/15 IN071 ET 109/109A RENO. FOR OFFICE SPACE (IU# )

216 DELV Design Studio, LLC SECTION PAGE 4 PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING 5. Steel sleeves. 2.3 FILL MATERIALS A. Cast-in-Place Firestop Devices: Factory-assembled devices for use in cast-in-place concrete floors and consisting of an outer metallic sleeve lined with an intumescent strip, a radial extended flange attached to one end of the sleeve for fastening to concrete formwork, and a neoprene gasket. B. Latex Sealants: Single-component latex formulations that do not re-emulsify after cure during exposure to moisture. C. Firestop Devices: Factory-assembled collars formed from galvanized steel and lined with intumescent material sized to fit specific diameter of penetrant. D. Intumescent Composite Sheets: Rigid panels consisting of aluminum-foil-faced elastomeric sheet bonded to galvanized-steel sheet. E. Intumescent Putties: Nonhardening dielectric, water-resistant putties containing no solvents, inorganic fibers, or silicone compounds. F. Intumescent Wrap Strips: Single-component intumescent elastomeric sheets with aluminum foil on one side. G. Mortars: Prepackaged dry mixes consisting of a blend of inorganic binders, hydraulic cement, fillers, and lightweight aggregate formulated for mixing with water at Project site to form a nonshrinking, homogeneous mortar. H. Pillows/Bags: Reusable heat-expanding pillows/bags consisting of glass-fiber cloth cases filled with a combination of mineral-fiber, water-insoluble expansion agents, and fire-retardant additives. Where exposed, cover openings with steel-reinforcing wire mesh to protect pillows/bags from being easily removed. I. Silicone Foams: Multicomponent, silicone-based liquid elastomers that, when mixed, expand and cure in place to produce a flexible, nonshrinking foam. J. Silicone Sealants: Single-component, silicone-based, neutral-curing elastomeric sealants of grade indicated below: 2.4 MIXING 1. Grade: Pourable (self-leveling) formulation for openings in floors and other horizontal surfaces, and nonsag formulation for openings in vertical and sloped surfaces, unless indicated firestopping limits use of nonsag grade for both opening conditions. A. For those products requiring mixing before application, comply with penetration firestopping manufacturer's written instructions for accurate proportioning of materials, water (if required), type of mixing equipment, selection of mixer speeds, mixing containers, mixing time, and other items or procedures needed to produce products of uniform quality with optimum performance characteristics for application indicated. 11/30/15 IN071 ET 109/109A RENO. FOR OFFICE SPACE (IU# )

217 DELV Design Studio, LLC SECTION PAGE 5 PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for opening configurations, penetrating items, substrates, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Surface Cleaning: Clean out openings immediately before installing penetration firestopping to comply with manufacturer's written instructions and with the following requirements: 1. Remove from surfaces of opening substrates and from penetrating items foreign materials that could interfere with adhesion of penetration firestopping. 2. Clean opening substrates and penetrating items to produce clean, sound surfaces capable of developing optimum bond with penetration firestopping. Remove loose particles remaining from cleaning operation. 3. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete. B. Priming: Prime substrates where recommended in writing by manufacturer using that manufacturer's recommended products and methods. Confine primers to areas of bond; do not allow spillage and migration onto exposed surfaces. C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape to prevent penetration firestopping from contacting adjoining surfaces that will remain exposed on completion of the Work and that would otherwise be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods used to remove stains. Remove tape as soon as possible without disturbing firestopping's seal with substrates. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General: Install penetration firestopping to comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions and published drawings for products and applications indicated. B. Install forming materials and other accessories of types required to support fill materials during their application and in the position needed to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths required to achieve fire ratings indicated. 1. After installing fill materials and allowing them to fully cure, remove combustible forming materials and other accessories not indicated as permanent components of firestopping. C. Install fill materials for firestopping by proven techniques to produce the following results: 1. Fill voids and cavities formed by openings, forming materials, accessories, and penetrating items as required to achieve fire-resistance ratings indicated. 2. Apply materials so they contact and adhere to substrates formed by openings and penetrating items. 3. For fill materials that will remain exposed after completing the Work, finish to produce smooth, uniform surfaces that are flush with adjoining finishes. 3.4 IDENTIFICATION A. Identify penetration firestopping with preprinted metal or plastic labels. Attach labels permanently to surfaces adjacent to and within 6 inches of firestopping edge so labels will be visible to anyone seeking to 11/30/15 IN071 ET 109/109A RENO. FOR OFFICE SPACE (IU# )

218 DELV Design Studio, LLC SECTION PAGE 6 PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING remove penetrating items or firestopping. Use mechanical fasteners or self-adhering-type labels with adhesives capable of permanently bonding labels to surfaces on which labels are placed. Include the following information on labels: 1. The words "Warning - Penetration Firestopping - Do Not Disturb. Notify Building Management of Any Damage." 2. Contractor's name, address, and phone number. 3. Designation of applicable testing and inspecting agency. 4. Date of installation. 5. Manufacturer's name. 6. Installer's name. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections. B. Where deficiencies are found or penetration firestopping is damaged or removed because of testing, repair or replace penetration firestopping to comply with requirements. C. Proceed with enclosing penetration firestopping with other construction only after inspection reports are issued and installations comply with requirements. 3.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Clean off excess fill materials adjacent to openings as the Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials that are approved in writing by penetration firestopping manufacturers and that do not damage materials in which openings occur. B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions during and after installation that ensure that penetration firestopping is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, immediately cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated penetration firestopping and install new materials to produce systems complying with specified requirements. END OF SECTION /30/15 IN071 ET 109/109A RENO. FOR OFFICE SPACE (IU# )

219 DELV Design Studio, LLC SECTION PAGE 1 JOINT SEALANTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Silicone joint sealants. 2. Latex joint sealants. 3. Preformed joint sealants. B. Related Sections: 1. Section "Gypsum Board" for sealing perimeter joints. 1.3 PRECONSTRUCTION TESTING A. Preconstruction Compatibility and Adhesion Testing: Submit to joint-sealant manufacturers, for testing indicated below, samples of materials that will contact or affect joint sealants. 1. Use manufacturer's standard test method to determine whether priming and other specific joint preparation techniques are required to obtain rapid, optimum adhesion of joint sealants to joint substrates. 2. Submit not fewer than 3 pieces of each kind of material, including joint substrates, shims, jointsealant backings, secondary seals, and miscellaneous materials. 3. Schedule sufficient time for testing and analyzing results to prevent delaying the Work. 4. For materials failing tests, obtain joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions for corrective measures including use of specially formulated primers. 5. Testing will not be required if joint-sealant manufacturers submit joint preparation data that are based on previous testing, not older than 24 months, of sealant products for adhesion to, and compatibility with, joint substrates and other materials matching those submitted. B. Preconstruction Field-Adhesion Testing: Before installing sealants, field test their adhesion to Project joint substrates as follows: 1. Locate test joints where indicated on Project or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect. 2. Conduct field tests for each application indicated below: a. Each kind of sealant and joint substrate indicated. 3. Notify Architect seven days in advance of dates and times when test joints will be erected. 4. Arrange for tests to take place with joint-sealant manufacturer's technical representative present. a. Test Method: Test joint sealants according to Method A, Field-Applied Sealant Joint Hand Pull Tab, in Appendix X1 in ASTM C 1193 or Method A, Tail Procedure, in ASTM C ) For joints with dissimilar substrates, verify adhesion to each substrate separately; extend cut along one side, verifying adhesion to opposite side. Repeat procedure for opposite side. 11/30/15 IN071 ET 109/109A RENO. FOR OFFICE SPACE (IU# )

220 DELV Design Studio, LLC SECTION PAGE 2 JOINT SEALANTS 5. Report whether sealant failed to adhere to joint substrates or tore cohesively. Include data on pull distance used to test each kind of product and joint substrate. For sealants that fail adhesively, retest until satisfactory adhesion is obtained. 6. Evaluation of Preconstruction Field-Adhesion-Test Results: Sealants not evidencing adhesive failure from testing, in absence of other indications of noncompliance with requirements, will be considered satisfactory. Do not use sealants that fail to adhere to joint substrates during testing. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each joint-sealant product indicated. B. LEED Submittals: 1. Product Data for Credit IEQ 4.1: For sealants and sealant primers used inside the weatherproofing system, documentation including printed statement of VOC content. 2. Laboratory Test Reports for Credit IEQ 4: For sealants and sealant primers used inside the weatherproofing system, documentation indicating that products comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers." C. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of strips of cured sealants showing the full range of colors available for each product exposed to view. D. Samples for Verification: For each kind and color of joint sealant required, provide Samples with joint sealants in 1/2-inch- wide joints formed between two 6-inch- long strips of material matching the appearance of exposed surfaces adjacent to joint sealants. E. Joint-Sealant Schedule: Include the following information: 1. Joint-sealant application, joint location, and designation. 2. Joint-sealant manufacturer and product name. 3. Joint-sealant formulation. 4. Joint-sealant color. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer. B. Product Certificates: For each kind of joint sealant and accessory, from manufacturer. C. Sealant, Waterproofing, and Restoration Institute (SWRI) Validation Certificate: For each sealant specified to be validated by SWRI's Sealant Validation Program. D. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, indicating that sealants comply with requirements. E. Preconstruction Compatibility and Adhesion Test Reports: From sealant manufacturer, indicating the following: 1. Materials forming joint substrates and joint-sealant backings have been tested for compatibility and adhesion with joint sealants. 2. Interpretation of test results and written recommendations for primers and substrate preparation needed for adhesion. 11/30/15 IN071 ET 109/109A RENO. FOR OFFICE SPACE (IU# )

221 DELV Design Studio, LLC SECTION PAGE 3 JOINT SEALANTS F. Preconstruction Field-Adhesion Test Reports: Indicate which sealants and joint preparation methods resulted in optimum adhesion to joint substrates based on testing specified in "Preconstruction Testing" Article. G. Field-Adhesion Test Reports: For each sealant application tested. H. Warranties: Sample of special warranties. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved for installation of units required for this Project. B. Source Limitations: Obtain each kind of joint sealant from single source from single manufacturer. C. Product Testing: Test joint sealants using a qualified testing agency. 1. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency qualified according to ASTM C 1021 to conduct the testing indicated. 2. Test according to SWRI's Sealant Validation Program for compliance with requirements specified by reference to ASTM C 920 for adhesion and cohesion under cyclic movement, adhesion-in-peel, and indentation hardness. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the following conditions: 1. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by joint-sealant manufacturer or are below 40 deg F. 2. When joint substrates are wet. 3. Where joint widths are less than those allowed by joint-sealant manufacturer for applications indicated. 4. Where contaminants capable of interfering with adhesion have not yet been removed from joint substrates. 1.8 WARRANTY A. Special Installer's Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which Installer agrees to repair or replace joint sealants that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: 2 years from date of Substantial Completion. B. Special Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which joint-sealant manufacturer agrees to furnish joint sealants to repair or replace those that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: 5 years from date of Substantial Completion. C. Special warranties specified in this article exclude deterioration or failure of joint sealants from the following: 1. Movement of the structure caused by structural settlement or errors attributable to design or construction resulting in stresses on the sealant exceeding sealant manufacturer's written specifications for sealant elongation and compression. 11/30/15 IN071 ET 109/109A RENO. FOR OFFICE SPACE (IU# )

222 DELV Design Studio, LLC SECTION PAGE 4 JOINT SEALANTS 2. Disintegration of joint substrates from natural causes exceeding design specifications. 3. Mechanical damage caused by individuals, tools, or other outside agents. 4. Changes in sealant appearance caused by accumulation of dirt or other atmospheric contaminants. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backings, and other related materials that are compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by jointsealant manufacturer, based on testing and field experience. B. VOC Content of Interior Sealants: Sealants and sealant primers used inside the weatherproofing system shall comply with the following limits for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24): 1. Architectural Sealants: 250 g/l. 2. Sealant Primers for Nonporous Substrates: 250 g/l. 3. Sealant Primers for Porous Substrates: 775 g/l. C. Low-Emitting Interior Sealants: Sealants and sealant primers used inside the weatherproofing system shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small- Scale Environmental Chambers." D. Liquid-Applied Joint Sealants: Comply with ASTM C 920 and other requirements indicated for each liquid-applied joint sealant specified, including those referencing ASTM C 920 classifications for type, grade, class, and uses related to exposure and joint substrates. 1. Suitability for Immersion in Liquids. Where sealants are indicated for Use I for joints that will be continuously immersed in liquids, provide products that have undergone testing according to ASTM C Liquid used for testing sealants is deionized water, unless otherwise indicated. E. Stain-Test-Response Characteristics: Where sealants are specified to be nonstaining to porous substrates, provide products that have undergone testing according to ASTM C 1248 and have not stained porous joint substrates indicated for Project. F. Suitability for Contact with Food: Where sealants are indicated for joints that will come in repeated contact with food, provide products that comply with 21 CFR G. Colors of Exposed Joint Sealants: [As indicated by manufacturer's designations] [Match Architect's samples] [As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range]. 2.2 SILICONE JOINT SEALANTS A. Single-Component, Nonsag, Traffic-Grade, Neutral-Curing Silicone Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 100/50, for Use T. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Dow Corning Corporation; 790. b. Tremco Incorporated; Spectrem /30/15 IN071 ET 109/109A RENO. FOR OFFICE SPACE (IU# )

223 DELV Design Studio, LLC SECTION PAGE 5 JOINT SEALANTS 2.3 LATEX JOINT SEALANTS A. Latex Joint Sealant: Acrylic latex or siliconized acrylic latex, ASTM C 834, Type OP, Grade NF. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. BASF Building Systems; Sonolac. b. Bostik, Inc.; Chem-Calk 600. c. Pecora Corporation; AC-20+. d. Schnee-Morehead, Inc.; SM e. Tremco Incorporated; Tremflex PREFORMED JOINT SEALANTS A. Preformed Foam Joint Sealant: Manufacturer's standard preformed, precompressed, open-cell foam sealant manufactured from urethane foam with minimum density of 10 lb/cu. ft. and impregnated with a nondrying, water-repellent agent. Factory produce in precompressed sizes in roll or stick form to fit joint widths indicated; coated on one side with a pressure-sensitive adhesive and covered with protective wrapping. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Dayton Superior Specialty Chemicals; Polytite Standard. b. EMSEAL Joint Systems, Ltd.; Emseal 25V. c. Sandell Manufacturing Co., Inc.; Polyseal. 2.5 JOINT SEALANT BACKING A. General: Provide sealant backings of material that are nonstaining; are compatible with joint substrates, sealants, primers, and other joint fillers; and are approved for applications indicated by sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing. B. Cylindrical Sealant Backings: ASTM C 1330, [Type C (closed-cell material with a surface skin)] [Type O (open-cell material)] [Type B (bicellular material with a surface skin)] [ or any of the preceding types, as approved in writing by joint-sealant manufacturer for joint application indicated], and of size and density to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing optimum sealant performance. C. Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recommended by sealant manufacturer for preventing sealant from adhering to rigid, inflexible joint-filler materials or joint surfaces at back of joint. Provide self-adhesive tape where applicable. 2.6 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Primer: Material recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests and field tests. B. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants and sealant backing materials, free of oily residues or other substances capable of staining or harming joint substrates and adjacent nonporous surfaces in any way, and formulated to promote optimum adhesion of sealants to joint substrates. C. Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and surfaces adjacent to joints. 11/30/15 IN071 ET 109/109A RENO. FOR OFFICE SPACE (IU# )

224 DELV Design Studio, LLC SECTION PAGE 6 JOINT SEALANTS PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting joint-sealant performance. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions and the following requirements: 1. Remove all foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with adhesion of joint sealant, including dust, paints (except for permanent, protective coatings tested and approved for sealant adhesion and compatibility by sealant manufacturer), old joint sealants, oil, grease, waterproofing, water repellents, water, surface dirt, and frost. 2. Clean porous joint substrate surfaces by brushing, grinding, mechanical abrading, or a combination of these methods to produce a clean, sound substrate capable of developing optimum bond with joint sealants. Remove loose particles remaining after cleaning operations above by vacuuming or blowing out joints with oil-free compressed air. Porous joint substrates include the following: a. Concrete. b. Masonry. 3. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete. 4. Clean nonporous joint substrate surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do not stain, harm substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint sealants. Nonporous joint substrates include the following: a. Metal. b. Glass. B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer or as indicated by preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests or prior experience. Apply primer to comply with jointsealant manufacturer's written instructions. Confine primers to areas of joint-sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces. C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant or primer with adjoining surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS A. General: Comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written installation instructions for products and applications indicated, unless more stringent requirements apply. B. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 1193 for use of joint sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated. 11/30/15 IN071 ET 109/109A RENO. FOR OFFICE SPACE (IU# )

225 DELV Design Studio, LLC SECTION PAGE 7 JOINT SEALANTS C. Install sealant backings of kind indicated to support sealants during application and at position required to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability. 1. Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings. 2. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear sealant backings. 3. Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before sealant application and replace them with dry materials. D. Install bond-breaker tape behind sealants where sealant backings are not used between sealants and backs of joints. E. Install sealants using proven techniques that comply with the following and at the same time backings are installed: 1. Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates. 2. Completely fill recesses in each joint configuration. 3. Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability. F. Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or curing begins, tool sealants according to requirements specified in subparagraphs below to form smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint. 1. Remove excess sealant from surfaces adjacent to joints. 2. Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by sealant manufacturer and that do not discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces. 3. Provide concave joint profile per Figure 8A in ASTM C 1193, unless otherwise indicated. 4. Provide flush joint profile where indicated per Figure 8B in ASTM C Provide recessed joint configuration of recess depth and at locations indicated per Figure 8C in ASTM C a. Use masking tape to protect surfaces adjacent to recessed tooled joints. G. Installation of Preformed Foam Sealants: Install each length of sealant immediately after removing protective wrapping. Do not pull or stretch material. Produce seal continuity at ends, turns, and intersections of joints. For applications at low ambient temperatures, apply heat to sealant in compliance with sealant manufacturer's written instructions. H. Acoustical Sealant Installation: At sound-rated assemblies and elsewhere as indicated, seal construction at perimeters, behind control joints, and at openings and penetrations with a continuous bead of acoustical sealant. Install acoustical sealant at both faces of partitions at perimeters and through penetrations. Comply with ASTM C 919 and with manufacturer's written recommendations. 3.4 CLEANING A. Clean off excess sealant or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint sealants and of products in which joints occur. 3.5 PROTECTION A. Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances and from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so sealants are without deterioration or 11/30/15 IN071 ET 109/109A RENO. FOR OFFICE SPACE (IU# )

226 DELV Design Studio, LLC SECTION PAGE 8 JOINT SEALANTS damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated joint sealants immediately so installations with repaired areas are indistinguishable from original work. 3.6 JOINT-SEALANT SCHEDULE A. Joint-Sealant Application: Interior joints in horizontal traffic surfaces JS Joint Locations: a. Isolation joints in cast-in-place concrete slabs. b. Other joints as indicated. 2. Silicone Joint Sealant: Single component, nonsag, traffic grade, neutral curing 3. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors. B. Joint-Sealant Application: Interior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal non-traffic surfaces JS Joint Locations: a. Control and expansion joints on exposed interior surfaces of exterior walls. b. Vertical joints on exposed surfaces of walls and partitions. c. Perimeter joints between interior wall surfaces and frames of interior doors and windows. 2. Joint Sealant: Latex. 3. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors. END OF SECTION /30/15 IN071 ET 109/109A RENO. FOR OFFICE SPACE (IU# )

227 DELV Design Studio, LLC SECTION PAGE 1 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes hollow-metal work. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section Door Hardware for door hardware for hollow-metal doors. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Minimum Thickness: Minimum thickness of base metal without coatings according to NAAMM- HMMA 803 or SDI A COORDINATION A. Coordinate anchorage installation for hollow-metal frames. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation. 1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Include construction details, material descriptions, core descriptions, fire-resistance ratings and finishes. B. Shop Drawings: Include the following: 1. Elevations of each door type. 2. Details of doors, including vertical- and horizontal-edge details and metal thicknesses. 3. Frame details for each frame type, including dimensioned profiles and metal thicknesses. 4. Locations of reinforcement and preparations for hardware. 5. Details of each different wall opening condition. 6. Details of anchorages, joints, field splices, and connections. 7. Details of accessories. 8. Details of moldings, removable stops, and glazing. 9. Details of conduit and preparations for power, signal, and control systems. C. Schedule: Provide a schedule of hollow-metal work prepared by or under the supervision of supplier, using same reference numbers for details and openings as those on Drawings. Coordinate with final Door Hardware Schedule. 1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Product Test Reports: For each type of hollow-metal door and frame assembly, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency. 11/30/15 IN071 ET 109/109A RENO. FOR OFFICE SPACE (IU# )

228 DELV Design Studio, LLC SECTION PAGE 2 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES B. Oversize Construction Certification: For assemblies required to be fire rated and exceeding limitations of labeled assemblies. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver hollow-metal work palletized, packaged, or crated to provide protection during transit and Project-site storage. Do not use non-vented plastic. 1. Provide additional protection to prevent damage to factory-finished units. B. Deliver welded frames with two removable spreader bars across bottom of frames, tack welded to jambs and mullions. C. Store hollow-metal work vertically under cover at Project site with head up. Place on minimum 4-inchhigh wood blocking. Provide minimum 1/4-inch space between each stacked door to permit air circulation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Amweld International, LLC. 2. Apex Industries, Inc. 3. Ceco Door Products; an Assa Abloy Group company. 4. Commercial Door & Hardware Inc. 5. Concept Frames, Inc. 6. Curries Company; an Assa Abloy Group company. 7. Custom Metal Products. 8. Daybar. 9. Deansteel. 10. de La Fontaine Industries. 11. DKS Steel Door & Frame Sys. Inc. 12. Door Components, Inc. 13. Fleming-Baron Door Products. 14. Gensteel Doors Inc. 15. Greensteel Industries, Ltd. 16. HMF Express. 17. Hollow Metal Inc. 18. Hollow Metal Xpress. 19. J/R Metal Frames Manufacturing, Inc. 20. Karpen Steel Custom Doors & Frames. 21. L.I.F. Industries, Inc. 22. LaForce, Inc. 23. Megamet Industries, Inc. 24. Mesker Door Inc. 25. Michbi Doors Inc. 26. MPI Group, LLC (The). 27. National Custom Hollow Metal. 28. North American Door Corp. 29. Philipp Manufacturing Co (The). 30. Pioneer Industries, Inc. 31. Premier Products, Inc. 32. Republic Doors and Frames. 11/30/15 IN071 ET 109/109A RENO. FOR OFFICE SPACE (IU# )

229 DELV Design Studio, LLC SECTION PAGE 3 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 33. Rocky Mountain Metals, Inc. 34. Security Metal Products Corp. 35. Shanahans Manufacturing Ltd. 36. Steelcraft; an Ingersoll-Rand company. 37. Steward Steel; Door Division. 38. Stiles Custom Metal, Inc. 39. Titan Metal Products, Inc. 40. Trillium Steel Doors Limited. 41. West Central Mfg. Inc. B. Source Limitations: Obtain hollow-metal work from single source from single manufacturer. 2.2 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Fire-Rated Assemblies: Complying with NFPA 80 and listed and labeled by a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing at positive pressure according to NFPA 252 or UL 10C. 1. Smoke- and Draft-Control Assemblies: Provide an assembly with gaskets listed and labeled for smoke and draft control by a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, based on testing according to UL 1784 and installed in compliance with NFPA 105. B. Fire-Rated, Borrowed-Light Assemblies: Complying with NFPA 80 and listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 257 or UL INTERIOR DOORS AND FRAMES A. Construct interior doors and frames to comply with the standards indicated for materials, fabrication, hardware locations, hardware reinforcement, tolerances, and clearances, and as specified. B. Standard-Duty Frames: SDI A250.8, Level Physical Performance: Level C according to SDI A Frames: a. Materials: Uncoated cold-rolled steel sheet, minimum thickness of inch. b. Construction: Face welded. 3. Exposed Finish: Prime. 2.4 MATERIALS A. Recycled Content of Steel Products: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of pre-consumer recycled content not less than 25 percent. B. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; suitable for exposed applications. C. Hot-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; free of scale, pitting, or surface defects; pickled and oiled. D. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B. 11/30/15 IN071 ET 109/109A RENO. FOR OFFICE SPACE (IU# )

230 DELV Design Studio, LLC SECTION PAGE 4 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES E. Frame Anchors: ASTM A 879/A 879M, Commercial Steel (CS), 04Z coating designation; mill phosphatized. 1. For anchors built into exterior walls, steel sheet complying with ASTM A 1008/A 1008M or ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B. F. Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M. G. Power-Actuated Fasteners in Concrete: Fastener system of type suitable for application indicated, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with clips or other accessory devices for attaching hollowmetal frames of type indicated. H. Grout: ASTM C 476, except with a maximum slump of 4 inches, as measured according to ASTM C 143/C 143M. I. Mineral-Fiber Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing); consisting of fibers manufactured from slag or rock wool; with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively; passing ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics. J. Glazing: Comply with requirements in Section "Glazing." K. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt mastic, compounded for 15-mil dry film thickness per coat. Provide inert-type noncorrosive compound free of asbestos fibers, sulfur components, and other deleterious impurities. 2.5 FABRICATION A. Fabricate hollow-metal work to be rigid and free of defects, warp, or buckle. Accurately form metal to required sizes and profiles, with minimum radius for metal thickness. Where practical, fit and assemble units in manufacturer's plant. To ensure proper assembly at Project site, clearly identify work that cannot be permanently factory assembled before shipment. B. Hollow-Metal Frames: Where frames are fabricated in sections due to shipping or handling limitations, provide alignment plates or angles at each joint, fabricated of same thickness metal as frames. 1. Provide countersunk, flat- or oval-head exposed screws and bolts for exposed fasteners unless otherwise indicated. 2. Floor Anchors: Weld anchors to bottoms of jambs with at least four spot welds per anchor; however, for slip-on drywall frames, provide anchor clips or countersunk holes at bottoms of jambs. 3. Jamb Anchors: Provide number and spacing of anchors as follows: a. Stud-Wall Type: Locate anchors not more than 18 inches from top and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches o.c. and as follows: 1) Three anchors per jamb up to 60 inches high. 2) Four anchors per jamb from 60 to 90 inches high. 3) Five anchors per jamb from 90 to 96 inches high. 4) Five anchors per jamb plus one additional anchor per jamb for each 24 inches or fraction thereof above 96 inches high. b. Compression Type: Not less than two anchors in each frame. c. Post-installed Expansion Type: Locate anchors not more than 6 inches from top and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 26 inches o.c. 11/30/15 IN071 ET 109/109A RENO. FOR OFFICE SPACE (IU# )

231 DELV Design Studio, LLC SECTION PAGE 5 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES d. Filled Frames: Stuff frame cavity with mineral-fiber insulation prior to closing up drywall. Insulation is for sound deadening. 4. Head Anchors: Two anchors per head for frames more than 42 inches wide and mounted in metalstud partitions. 5. Door Silencers: Except on weather-stripped frames, drill stops to receive door silencers as follows. Keep holes clear during construction. a. Single-Door Frames: Drill stop in strike jamb to receive three door silencers. b. Double-Door Frames: Drill stop in head jamb to receive two door silencers. C. Fabricate concealed stiffeners and edge channels from either cold- or hot-rolled steel sheet. D. Hardware Preparation: Factory prepare hollow-metal work to receive templated mortised hardware; include cutouts, reinforcement, mortising, drilling, and tapping according to SDI A250.6, the Door Hardware Schedule, and templates. 1. Reinforce doors and frames to receive non-templated, mortised, and surface-mounted door hardware. 2. Comply with applicable requirements in SDI A250.6 and BHMA A for preparation of hollow-metal work for hardware. E. Stops and Moldings: Provide stops and moldings around glazed lites and louvers where indicated. Form corners of stops and moldings with mitered hairline joints. 1. Single Glazed Lites: Provide fixed stops and moldings welded on secure side of hollow-metal work. 2. Multiple Glazed Lites: Provide fixed and removable stops and moldings so that each glazed lite is capable of being removed independently. 3. Provide fixed frame moldings on outside of exterior and on secure side of interior doors and frames. 4. Provide loose stops and moldings on inside of hollow-metal work. 5. Coordinate rabbet width between fixed and removable stops with glazing and installation types indicated. 2.6 STEEL FINISHES A. Prime Finish: Clean, pretreat, and apply manufacturer's standard primer. 1. Shop Primer: Manufacturer's standard, fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free primer complying with SDI A250.10; recommended by primer manufacturer for substrate; compatible with substrate and field-applied coatings despite prolonged exposure. 2.7 ACCESSORIES A. Mullions and Transom Bars: Join to adjacent members by welding or rigid mechanical anchors. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. 11/30/15 IN071 ET 109/109A RENO. FOR OFFICE SPACE (IU# )

232 DELV Design Studio, LLC SECTION PAGE 6 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES B. Examine roughing-in for embedded and built-in anchors to verify actual locations before frame installation. C. Prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of the Work. D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Remove welded-in shipping spreaders installed at factory. Restore exposed finish by grinding, filling, and dressing, as required to make repaired area smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces. B. Drill and tap doors and frames to receive non-templated, mortised, and surface-mounted door hardware. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General: Install hollow-metal work plumb, rigid, properly aligned, and securely fastened in place. Comply with Drawings and manufacturer's written instructions. B. Hollow-Metal Frames: Install hollow-metal frames of size and profile indicated. Comply with SDI A or NAAMM-HMMA 840 as required by standards specified. 1. Set frames accurately in position; plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent anchors are set. After wall construction is complete, remove temporary braces, leaving surfaces smooth and undamaged. a. At fire-rated openings, install frames according to NFPA 80. b. Where frames are fabricated in sections because of shipping or handling limitations, field splice at approved locations by welding face joint continuously; grind, fill, dress, and make splice smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces. c. Install frames with removable stops located on secure side of opening. d. Install door silencers in frames before grouting. e. Remove temporary braces necessary for installation only after frames have been properly set and secured. f. Check plumb, square, and twist of frames as walls are constructed. Shim as necessary to comply with installation tolerances. g. Field apply bituminous coating to backs of frames that will be filled with grout containing antifreezing agents. 2. Floor Anchors: Provide floor anchors for each jamb and mullion that extends to floor, and secure with postinstalled expansion anchors. a. Floor anchors may be set with power-actuated fasteners instead of postinstalled expansion anchors if so indicated and approved on Shop Drawings. 3. Metal-Stud Partitions: Solidly pack mineral-fiber insulation inside frames. 4. Installation Tolerances: Adjust hollow-metal door frames for squareness, alignment, twist, and plumb to the following tolerances: a. Squareness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at door rabbet on a line 90 degrees from jamb perpendicular to frame head. b. Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs on a horizontal line parallel to plane of wall. c. Twist: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at opposite face corners of jambs on parallel lines, and perpendicular to plane of wall. 11/30/15 IN071 ET 109/109A RENO. FOR OFFICE SPACE (IU# )

233 DELV Design Studio, LLC SECTION PAGE 7 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES d. Plumbness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs at floor. C. Glazing: Comply with installation requirements in Section "Glazing" and with hollow-metal manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Secure stops with countersunk flat- or oval-head machine screws spaced uniformly not more than 9 inches o.c. and not more than 2 inches o.c. from each corner. 3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Final Adjustments: Check and readjust operating hardware items immediately before final inspection. Leave work in complete and proper operating condition. Remove and replace defective work, including hollow-metal work that is warped, bowed, or otherwise unacceptable. B. Remove grout and other bonding material from hollow-metal work immediately after installation. C. Prime-Coat Touchup: Immediately after erection, sand smooth rusted or damaged areas of prime coat and apply touchup of compatible air-drying, rust-inhibitive primer. D. Touchup Painting: Cleaning and touchup painting of abraded areas of paint are specified in painting Sections. END OF SECTION /30/15 IN071 ET 109/109A RENO. FOR OFFICE SPACE (IU# )

234

235 DELV Design Studio, LLC SECTION PAGE 1 FLUSH WOOD DOORS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Solid-core doors. 2. Factory fitting flush wood doors to frames and factory machining for hardware. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section "Interior Painting for field finishing doors. 2. Section "Radiation Protection" for lead-lined flush wood doors. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of door. Include details of core and edge construction and trim for openings. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate location, size, and hand of each door; elevation of each kind of door; construction details not covered in Product Data; and the following: 1. Dimensions and locations of blocking. 2. Dimensions and locations of mortises and holes for hardware. 3. Dimensions and locations of cutouts. 4. Undercuts. 5. Requirements for veneer matching. 6. Doors to be factory finished and finish requirements. 7. Fire-protection ratings for fire-rated doors. C. Samples for Initial Selection: For [plastic-laminate door faces] [and] [factory-finished doors]. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Sample Warranty: For special warranty. B. Quality Standard Compliance Certificates: AWI Quality Certification Program certificates. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer that is certified for chain of custody by an FSCaccredited certification body and is a certified participant in AWI's Quality Certification Program. B. Vendor Qualifications: A vendor that is certified for chain of custody by an FSC-accredited certification body. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Comply with requirements of referenced standard and manufacturer's written instructions. 11/30/15 IN071 ET 109/109A RENO. FOR OFFICE SPACE (IU# )

236 DELV Design Studio, LLC SECTION PAGE 2 FLUSH WOOD DOORS B. Package doors individually in plastic bags or cardboard cartons or cardboard cartons and wrap bundles of doors in plastic sheeting. C. Mark each door on top and bottom rail with opening number used on Shop Drawings. D. Label each door on top with manufacturer name, wood veneer type and finish. 1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install doors until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions at occupancy levels during remainder of construction period. B. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install doors until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature between 60 and 90 deg F and relative humidity between 25 and 55 percent during remainder of construction period. 1.8 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace doors that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Warping (bow, cup, or twist) more than 1/4 inch in a 42-by-84-inch section. b. Telegraphing of core construction in face veneers exceeding 0.01 inch in a 3-inch span. 2. Warranty shall also include installation and finishing that may be required due to repair or replacement of defective doors. 3. Warranty Period for Solid-Core Interior Doors: Life of installation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Algoma Hardwoods, Inc. 2. Ampco. 3. Chappell Door Co. 4. Eggers Industries. 5. General Veneer Manufacturing Co. 6. Graham Wood Doors; an Assa Abloy Group company. 7. Haley Brothers, Inc. 8. Ipik Door Company. 9. Lambton Doors. 11/30/15 IN071 ET 109/109A RENO. FOR OFFICE SPACE (IU# )

237 DELV Design Studio, LLC SECTION PAGE 3 FLUSH WOOD DOORS 10. Marlite. 11. Marshfield Door Systems, Inc. 12. Mohawk Doors; a Masonite company. 13. Oshkosh Door Company. 14. Poncraft Door Company. 15. Vancouver Door Company. 16. VT Industries, Inc. B. Source Limitations: Obtain flush wood doors indicated to be blueprint matched with paneling from single manufacturer. 2.2 FLUSH WOOD DOORS, GENERAL A. Quality Standard: In addition to requirements specified, comply with [AWI's, AWMAC's, and WI's "Architectural Woodwork Standards] [WDMA I.S.1-A, "Architectural Wood Flush Doors]." 1. Provide labels indicating that doors comply with requirements of grades specified. 2. Contract Documents contain selections chosen from options in quality standard and additional requirements beyond those of quality standard. Comply with those selections and requirements in addition to quality standard. B. Regional Materials: Flush wood doors shall be manufactured within 500 miles of Project site from materials that have been extracted, harvested, or recovered, as well as manufactured, within 500 miles of Project site. C. Regional Materials: Flush wood doors shall be manufactured within 500 miles of Project site. D. Certified Wood: Flush wood doors shall be certified as "FSC Pure according to FSC STD , "FSC Principles and Criteria for Forest Stewardship," and to FSC STD , "FSC Standard for Chain of Custody Certification." E. Low-Emitting Materials: Fabricate doors with adhesives and composite wood products that do not contain urea formaldehyde. F. Low-Emitting Materials: Fabricate doors with adhesives and composite wood products that comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers." 2.3 VENEER-FACED DOORS FOR TRANSPARENT FINISH A. Interior Solid-Core Doors: 1. Grade: Premium, with Grade A faces. 2. Species: Red oak. 3. Cut: Plain sliced (flat sliced). 4. Match between Veneer Leaves: Book match. 5. Assembly of Veneer Leaves on Door Faces: Center-balance match. 6. Pair and Set Match: Provide for doors hung in same opening. 11/30/15 IN071 ET 109/109A RENO. FOR OFFICE SPACE (IU# )

238 DELV Design Studio, LLC SECTION PAGE 4 FLUSH WOOD DOORS 7. Room Match: Provide door faces of compatible color and grain within each separate room or area of building. 8. Exposed Vertical Edges: Same species as faces or a compatible species - edge Type A. 9. Finish: Unfinished. 10. Core: Either glued wood stave or structural composite lumber. 11. Construction: Five plies. Stiles and rails are bonded to core, then entire unit is abrasive planed before veneering. 12. WDMA I.S.1-A Performance Grade: Heavy Duty. 2.4 FABRICATION A. Factory fit doors to suit frame-opening sizes indicated. Comply with clearance requirements of referenced quality standard for fitting unless otherwise indicated. 1. Comply with NFPA 80 requirements for fire-rated doors. B. Factory machine doors for hardware that is not surface applied. Locate hardware to comply with DHI- WDHS-3. Comply with final hardware schedules, door frame Shop Drawings, BHMA W, and hardware templates. 1. Coordinate with hardware mortises in metal frames to verify dimensions and alignment before factory machining. 2. Metal Astragals: Factory machine astragals and formed-steel edges for hardware for pairs of firerated doors. C. Transom and Side Panels: Fabricate matching panels with same construction, exposed surfaces, and finish as specified for associated doors. Finish bottom edges of transoms and top edges of rabbeted doors same as door stiles. 1. Fabricate door and transom panels with full-width, solid-lumber meeting rails. Provide factoryinstalled spring bolts for concealed attachment into jambs of metal door frames. D. Openings: Factory cut and trim openings through doors. 1. Light Openings: Trim openings with moldings of material and profile indicated. 2. Glazing: Factory install glazing in doors indicated to be factory finished. Comply with applicable requirements in Section "Glazing." 3. Louvers: Factory install louvers in prepared openings. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine doors and installed door frames, with Installer present, before hanging doors. 1. Verify that installed frames comply with indicated requirements for type, size, location, and swing characteristics and have been installed with level heads and plumb jambs. 2. Reject doors with defects. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Hardware: For installation, see Section "Door Hardware 11/30/15 IN071 ET 109/109A RENO. FOR OFFICE SPACE (IU# )

239 DELV Design Studio, LLC SECTION PAGE 5 FLUSH WOOD DOORS B. Installation Instructions: Install doors to comply with manufacturer's written instructions and referenced quality standard, and as indicated. 1. Install fire-rated doors according to NFPA Install smoke- and draft-control doors according to NFPA 105. C. Job-Fitted Doors: Align and fit doors in frames with uniform clearances and bevels as indicated below; do not trim stiles and rails in excess of limits set by manufacturer or permitted for fire-rated doors. Machine doors for hardware. Seal edges of doors, edges of cutouts, and mortises after fitting and machining. 1. Clearances: Provide 1/8 inch at heads, jambs, and between pairs of doors. Provide 1/8 inch from bottom of door to top of decorative floor finish or covering unless otherwise indicated. Where threshold is shown or scheduled, provide 1/4 inch from bottom of door to top of threshold unless otherwise indicated. a. Comply with NFPA 80 for fire-rated doors. 2. Bevel non-fire-rated doors 1/8 inch in 2 inches at lock and hinge edges. 3. Bevel fire-rated doors 1/8 inch in 2 inches at lock edge; trim stiles and rails only to extent permitted by labeling agency. D. Factory-Fitted Doors: Align in frames for uniform clearance at each edge. E. Factory-Finished Doors: Restore finish before installation if fitting or machining is required at Project site. 3.3 ADJUSTING A. Operation: Rehang or replace doors that do not swing or operate freely. B. Finished Doors: Replace doors that are damaged or that do not comply with requirements. Doors may be repaired or refinished if Work complies with requirements and shows no evidence of repair or refinishing. END OF SECTION /30/15 IN071 ET 109/109A RENO. FOR OFFICE SPACE (IU# )

240

241 DELV Design Studio, LLC SECTION DOOR HARDWARE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 Refer to "General and Special Conditions", and "Instructions to Bidders", Division 1 of Specifications. Requirements of these Sections and the project drawings shall govern work in this section. 1.2 Summary: A. Section Includes: 1. Furnish all items of Finish Hardware specified, scheduled, shown or required herein except those items specifically excluded from this section of the specification. B. Related work: 1. Division 1 General Requirements 2. Division 6 Rough Carpentry 3. Division 6 Finish Carpentry: Installation of Finish Hardware 4. Division 8 Steel Doors and Frames 5. Division 8 Wood Doors C. Specific Omissions: Hardware for the following is specified or indicated elsewhere, unless specifically listed in the hardware sets: 1. Cabinet Hardware 2. Signs 3. Access doors and panels 1.3 Submittals: A. Hardware Schedule 1. Submit number of Hardware Schedules as directed in Division Follow guidelines established in Door & Hardware Institute Handbook (DHI) Sequence and Format for the Hardware Schedule unless noted otherwise. 3. Schedule will include the following: a. Door Index including opening numbers and the assigned Finish Hardware set. b. Preface sheet listing category only and manufacturer's names of items being furnished as follows: CATEGORY SPECIFIED SCHEDULED Hinges Manufacturer A Manufacturer B Lock sets Manufacturer X Manufacturer X Kick Plates Open Manufacturer Z c. Hardware Locations: Refer to Article 3.1.B.2 Locations. d. Opening Description: Single or pair, number, room locations, hand, active leaf, degree of swing, size, door material, frame material, and UL listing. e. Hardware Description: Quantity, category, product number, fasteners, and finish. f. Headings that refer to the specified Hardware Set Numbers. 11/30/15 IN071 ET 109/109A RENO. FOR OFFICE SPACE (IU # )

242 DELV Design Studio, LLC SECTION DOOR HARDWARE B. Product Data: g. Scheduling Sequence shown in Hardware Sets. h. Product data of each hardware item, and shop drawings where required, for special conditions and specialty hardware. i. Electrified Hardware system operation description. j. "Vertical" scheduling format only. "Horizontal" schedules will be returned "Not Approved." k. Typed Copy. l. Double-Spacing. m. 8-1/2 x 11 inch sheets n. U.S. Standard Finish symbols or BHMA Finish symbols. 1. Submit, in booklet form Manufacturers Catalog cut sheets of scheduled hardware. 2. Submit product data with hardware schedule. C. Key Schedule: 1. Submit detailed schedule indicating clearly how the Owner's final keying instructions have been followed. 2. Submit as a separate schedule. D. Samples: 1. Prior to submittal of the final hardware schedule and prior to final ordering of finish hardware, submit one sample, if required, of each type of exposed hardware unit, finished as required and tagged with full description for coordination with schedule. 2. Samples will be returned to the supplier. Units, which are acceptable and remain undamaged through submittal, review and field comparison procedures, may, after final check of operation, be used in the work, within limitations of keying coordination requirements. E. Operations and Maintenance Manuals 1. Provide operations and maintenance manuals for each type of door hardware. 1.4 Quality Assurance A. Requirements of Regulatory Agencies: 1. Furnish finish hardware to comply with the requirements of laws, codes, ordinances, and regulations of the governmental authorities having jurisdiction where such requirements exceed the requirements of the Specifications. 2. Furnish finish hardware to comply with the requirements of the regulations for public building accommodations for physically handicapped persons of the governmental authority having jurisdiction and to comply with Americans with Disabilities Act. 3. Provide hardware for fire rated openings in compliance with NFPA 80 and state and local building code requirements. Provide only hardware that has been tested and listed by UL for types and sizes of doors required and complies with requirements of door and door frame labels. B. Supplier: 1. Mechanical Hardware 11/30/15 IN071 ET 109/109A RENO. FOR OFFICE SPACE (IU # )

243 DELV Design Studio, LLC SECTION DOOR HARDWARE a. Shall be an established firm dealing in contract builders hardware. He must have adequate inventory, qualified personnel on staff and be located within 100 miles of the project. The distributor must be a factory-authorized dealer for all materials required. The supplier shall be or have in employment an Architectural Hardware Consultant (AHC). C. Installer Qualifications: 1. Qualified tradesmen, skilled in application of commercial grade hardware with record of successful in-service performance for installing door hardware similar in quantity, type, and quality to that indicated for this Project. D. Pre-installation Meeting: 1. Before hardware installation, General Contractor/Construction Manager will request a hardware installation meeting be conducted on the installation of hardware; specifically that of locksets, closers, exit devices, overhead stops and coordinators. Manufacturer's representatives of the above products, in conjunction with the hardware supplier for the project, shall conduct the meeting. Meeting to be held at job site and attended by installers of hardware for aluminum, hollow metal and wood doors. Meeting to address proper coordination and installation of hardware, per finish hardware schedule for this specific project, by using installation manuals, hardware schedule, templates, physical product samples and installation videos. 2. When any electrical or pneumatic hardware is specified this meeting shall also include the following trades/installers: Electrical, Security, Alarm systems and Architect. E. Manufacturer: 1. Obtain each type of hardware (latch and locksets, hinges, closers, etc.) from a single manufacturer, although several may be indicated as offering products complying with requirements. 2. Provide electrified door hardware from same manufacturer as mechanical door hardware, unless otherwise indicated. 1.5 Product Delivery, Storage, and Handling: A. Inventory door hardware on receipt. B. Label each item of hardware with the appropriate door number and Hardware Schedule heading number, and deliver to the installer so designated by the contractor. C. Provide secure lock-up for door hardware delivered to Project site. 1.6 Warranties: A. Refer to Division 1 for warranty requirements. B. During the warranty period, replace defective work, including labor, materials and other costs incidental to the work. Replace work found to be defective as defined in the General Conditions. 1.7 Maintenance and Service: 11/30/15 IN071 ET 109/109A RENO. FOR OFFICE SPACE (IU # )

244 DELV Design Studio, LLC SECTION DOOR HARDWARE A. Furnish a complete set of specialized tools for the Owner s continued adjustment, maintenance, and removal/replacement of door hardware. PART 2 - PRODUCT 2.1 Manufacturers: A. Furnish each category with the products of only one manufacturer unless specified otherwise; this requirement is mandatory whether various manufacturers are listed or not. B. Provide the products of manufacturer designated or if more than one manufacturer is listed, the comparable product of one of the other manufacturers listed. Where only one manufacturer or product is listed, it is understood that this is the owner s Building Standard and "no substitution" is allowed. C. The first manufacture listed for each product is the manufacture used in the hardware sets. 2.2 Materials: A. Screws and Fasteners: 1. Furnish fasteners of the proper type, size, quantity and finish. Use machine screws and expansion shields for attaching hardware to concrete or masonry, and wall grip inserts at hollow wall construction. Furnish machine screws for attachment to reinforced hollow metal doors and frames and reinforced aluminum doors and frames. Furnish full thread wood screws for attachment to solid wood doors and frames. "TEK" type screws are not acceptable. 2. Sex bolts will not be permitted on reinforced metal doors and blocked wood doors but are required for wood doors with door closers. B. Hinges: 1. Quantity: Provide the following, unless otherwise indicated: a. Two Hinges: For doors with heights up to 60 inches (1524 mm). b. Three Hinges: For doors with heights 61 to 90 inches (1549 to 2286 mm). c. Four Hinges: For doors with heights 91 to 120 inches (2311 to 3048 mm). d. For doors with heights more than 120 inches (3048 mm), provide 4 hinges, plus 1 hinge for every 30 inches (750 mm) of door height greater than 120 inches (3048 mm). 2. Hinge Sizes: Provide the following, unless otherwise indicated: a. 4-1/2 inches high: For all doors with widths of 36 inches or less. b. 5 inches high: For all doors with widths greater than 36 inches. 3. Hinge Base Metal Thickness: Provide the following, unless otherwise indicated: a. Medium Weight Doors with Medium Frequency: inches thick. b. Heavy Weight Doors with High Frequency: inches thick. 4. Hinge Base Metal: Unless otherwise indicated, provide the following: a. Exterior Hinges: Stainless steel, with stainless-steel pin. b. Interior Hinges: Steel, with steel pin. c. Hinges for Fire-Rated Assemblies: Steel, with steel pin. 5. Hinge Options: Where indicated in door hardware sets or on Drawings: 11/30/15 IN071 ET 109/109A RENO. FOR OFFICE SPACE (IU # )

245 DELV Design Studio, LLC SECTION DOOR HARDWARE a. Nonremovable Pins: Provide set screw in hinge barrel that, when tightened into a groove in hinge pin, prevents removal of pin while door is closed; for out-swinging exterior doors and out-swinging corridor doors with locks. b. Corners: Square. c. Width of Hinges: Shall be sufficient to clear all trim. 6. Fasteners: Provide Phillips flat-head screws comply with the following:: a. Machine Screws: For metal doors and frames. Install into drilled and tapped holes. b. Wood Screws: For wood doors and frames. c. Threaded-to-the-Head Wood Screws: For fire-rated wood doors. d. Finish screw heads to match surface of hinges. 7. Manufacturers: a. Ives; an Allegion Company (IVE). b. Hager Companies (HAG). c. Stanley; a Stanley Black and Decker Company (STA). d. McKinney; an Assa Abloy Company (MCK). C. Door Bolts: 1. Flush Bolts a. Constant - wood doors: 1) Ives; an Allegion Company, FB61 series (IVE). 2) Rockwood; an Assa Abloy Company (ROC). 2. Dust Proof Strikes - furnish with all flush bolts, except at openings having thresholds: a. Manufacturers: 1) Ives; an Allegion Company, DP2 (IVE). 2) Rockwood; an Assa Abloy Company (ROC). D. Locks and Latches: 1. Bored Locks, Heavy Duty: a. All Bored Locks shall be designed to meet BHMA A156.2, Grade 1 test standards and certified by an independent testing laboratory. b. Provide 2-3/4 inch backset. c. Provide strikes with extended lips where required to protect trim from being marred by latch bolt. Provide strike lips that do not project more than 1/8" beyond doorframe trim at single doors and have 7/8" lip to center at pairs of 1-3/4" doors. d. Manufacturers: 1) Schlage; an Allegion Company, ND series (SCH). e. Lockset Trim: 1) Schlage, Sparta E. Surface Door Closers: 1. All Surface Door Closers shall be designed to meet BHMA A156.4, Grade 1 test standards and certified by an independent testing laboratory. 2. Door closers shall have fully hydraulic, full rack and pinion action with a high strength cast iron cylinder. Cylinder body shall be 1 ½ in diameter, and double heat treated pinion shall be 11/16 in diameter with double D slab drive arm connection. 3. Hydraulic fluid shall be of a type requiring no seasonal closer adjustment for temperatures ranging from 120 degrees F to 30 degrees F. 4. Spring power shall be continuously adjustable over the full range of closer sizes, and allow for reduced opening force for the physically handicapped. Hydraulic regulation shall be by tamper-proof, non-critical valves. Closers shall have separate adjustment for latch speed, general speed, and backcheck. 5. All closers shall have solid forged steel main arms (and forged forearms for parallel arm closers). 11/30/15 IN071 ET 109/109A RENO. FOR OFFICE SPACE (IU # )

246 DELV Design Studio, LLC SECTION DOOR HARDWARE 6. All surface mounted mechanical closers shall be certified to exceed ten million (10,000,000) full load cycles by a recognized independent testing laboratory. 7. Closers will have Powder coating finish certified to exceed 100 hours salt spray testing by ETL, an independent testing laboratory used by BHMA for ANSI certification. 8. Refer to door and frame details and furnish accessories such as drop plates, panel adapters, spacers and supports as required to correctly install door closers. State degree of door swing in the hardware schedule. 9. Provide type of arm required for closer to be located on non-public side of door, unless otherwise indicated. 10. Manufacturers: a. LCN; an Allegion Company, 4040XP series (LCN). F. Protection Plates: 1. Kick Plates: a. Furnish beveled on 4 edges, countersink fasteners,.050 thick x 10" high x 1-1/2" less door width for the push side on single doors and 1 less door width for the pull side on single doors and push or pull side on pairs. 2. Manufacturers: a. Ives; an Allegion Company, 8400 series and 8402 series for rated openings for plates over 16 high (IVE). b. Brookline, (BRO). c. Rockwood; an Assa Abloy Company, (ROC). G. Door Stops: 1. Wall Bumpers: a. Cast, approximately 2-1/2 inch diameter, convex or concave rubber center, concealed fasteners. 1) Ives; an Allegion Company, WS401/402 (IVE). 2) Equals by Sargent, Rockwood and ABH 2. Overhead Stops and Holders: a. Size per manufacturer's selector chart. Plastic end caps, hold open mechanisms and shock blocks are not allowed. End caps must be finished same as balance of unit. b. Manufacture products using base material of Brass/Bronze for US3, US4, & US10B finished products and 300 Stainless Steel for US32 & US32D finished products. c. Manufacturers: 1) Glynn-Johnson; an Allegion Company, series as listed in sets (GLY). 2) Equals by Sargent, Rockwood and ABH H. Miscellaneous Hardware: 1. Silencers: a. Provide silencers for all interior doors without gasketing. 1) Ives; an Allegion Company, SR series (IVE). 2) Equal product of any BHMA manufacturer I. Furnish items not categorized in the above descriptions but specified by manufacturer s names in Hardware Sets. 2.3 Finishes: A. Generally, Dull Chrome, US26D / BHMA 626. Provide finish for each item as indicated in sets. 11/30/15 IN071 ET 109/109A RENO. FOR OFFICE SPACE (IU # )

247 DELV Design Studio, LLC SECTION DOOR HARDWARE 2.4 Cylinders, Cores, Keying, and Keys: A. Cylinders and Cylinder Housings: 1. Cylinder housings to be for small format interchangeable cores (SFIC). 2. To be the same manufacturer as the lock manufacturer. 3. Provide cylinder housings for all hardware components capable of being locked. 4. Manufacturers: a. Schlage; an Allegion Company (SCH). B. Construction Cores and Keys: 1. Provide cylinder housings with construction cores for use during the construction period. Construction, control and operating keys and cores shall not be part of the Owner's permanent keying system or furnished on the same keyway as the Owner's permanent keying system. 2. Provide the following keys for use during construction: a. 25 each Temporary construction Operating keys. b. 2 each Temporary construction Control Keys. C. Permanent Cores, Keying, and Keys: 1. Permanent cores shall be 7 pin, interchangeable core and keyed to owner s requirements. 2. Permanent cores are to be shipped directly to the Owner. At no time is the Contractor to furnish or possess permanent cores and keys. 3. The Owner will install the permanent cores at their own expense. 4. Provide the following blank keys: 3 each Keys per cylinder. 5. Manufacturers: Schlage; an Allegion Company (SCH). 2.5 Templates and Hardware Location: A. Furnish hardware made to template. Supply required templates and hardware locations to the door and frame manufacturers. B. Furnish metal template to frame/door supplier for continuous hinge. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 Installation A. General: 1. Install hardware according to manufacturer s installations and template dimensions. Attach all items of finish hardware to doors, frames, walls, etc. with fasteners furnished and required by the manufacture of the item. 2. Provide blocking/reinforcement for all wall mounted Hardware. 3. Reinforced hollow metal doors and frames and reinforced aluminum door and frames will be drilled and tapped for machine screws. 4. Solid wood doors and frames: full thread wood screws. Drill pilot holes before inserting screws. 5. Overhead stops shall be templated to allow doors widest opening possible with surrounding wall configuration; default shall be set at 110 degree opening. a. Contractor shall verify in field if 110 degree opening stop setting is achievable prior to fabrication of door and frames. 11/30/15 IN071 ET 109/109A RENO. FOR OFFICE SPACE (IU # )

248 DELV Design Studio, LLC SECTION DOOR HARDWARE b. Indicate on submittals where overhead stops are set to less than 110 degree opening and request Architect s approval for each instance. 6. Door closers shall be templated to allow doors widest opening possible with surrounding wall configuration. B. Locations: 1. Dimensions are from finish floor to center line of items. 2. Include this list in Hardware Schedule. CATEGORY DIMENSION C. Final Adjustment: Hinges Door Manufacturer's Standard Flush Bolt Levers 72" and 12" Levers Door Manufacturer's Standard 1. The general contractor shall provide the services of a representative to inspect material furnished and its installation and adjustment, and to instruct the Owner's personnel in adjustment, care and maintenance of hardware. 2. Locksets, closers and exit devices shall be inspected by the factory representative to insure correct installation and proper adjustment in operation. The manufacturer's representative shall prepare a written report stating compliance, and also recording locations and kinds of non-compliance. The original report shall be forwarded to the Architect with copies to the Contractor, hardware supplier, hardware installer and building owner. D. Technical and Warranty Information: 1. At the completion of the project, the technical and warranty information coalesced and kept on file by the General Contractor/Construction Manager shall be given to the Owner or Owner s Agent. In addition to both the technical and warranty information, all factory order acknowledgement numbers supplied to the General Contractor/Construction Manager during the construction period shall be given to the Owner or Owner s Agent. The warranty information and factory order acknowledgement numbers shall serve to both expedite and properly execute any warranty work that may be required on the various hardware items supplied on the project. 3.2 Hardware Sets: 11/30/15 IN071 ET 109/109A RENO. FOR OFFICE SPACE (IU # )

249 DELV Design Studio, LLC SECTION DOOR HARDWARE Hardware Group No. 01 For use on mark/door #(s): Provide each SGL door(s) with the following: Qty Description Catalog Number Finish Mfr 3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X IVE 1 EA OFFICE/ENTRY LOCK L9050BD 17B L SCH 1 EA SFIC EVEREST CORE SCH 1 EA WALL STOP WS401/402CVX 626 IVE 3 EA SILENCER SR64 GRY IVE Hardware Group No. 02 For use on mark/door #(s): 27 Provide each SGL door(s) with the following: Qty Description Catalog Number Finish Mfr 3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X IVE 1 EA STOREROOM LOCK L9080BD 17B 626 SCH 1 EA SFIC EVEREST CORE SCH 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4040XP 689 LCN 1 EA KICK PLATE " X 1 1/2" LDW B4E CS 630 IVE 1 EA WALL STOP WS401/402CVX 626 IVE 3 EA SILENCER SR64 GRY IVE Hardware Group No. 03 For use on mark/door #(s): 40 Provide each PR door(s) with the following: Qty Description Catalog Number Finish Mfr 6 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 NRP 652 IVE 1 SET CONST LATCHING FB61P 630 IVE BOLT 1 EA DUST PROOF STRIKE DP2 626 IVE 1 EA STOREROOM LOCK L9080BD 17B 626 SCH 1 EA SFIC EVEREST CORE SCH 1 EA OH STOP 410S 652 GLY 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4040XP SHCUSH 689 LCN 2 EA KICK PLATE " X 1" LDW B4E CS 630 IVE 2 EA SILENCER SR64 GRY IVE 11/30/15 IN071 ET 109/109A RENO. FOR OFFICE SPACE (IU # )

250 DELV Design Studio, LLC SECTION DOOR HARDWARE Door # HWSet # Door/Hardware Index END OF SECTION 11/30/15 IN071 ET 109/109A RENO. FOR OFFICE SPACE (IU # )

251 DELV Design Studio, LLC SECTION PAGE 1 NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Non-load-bearing steel framing systems for interior gypsum board assemblies. 2. Suspension systems for interior gypsum ceilings, soffits, and grid systems. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section "Cold-Formed Metal Framing" for exterior and interior load-bearing and exterior non-load-bearing wall studs; floor joists; roof rafters and ceiling joists; and roof trusses. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. LEED Submittals: 1. Product Data for Credit MR 4: For products having recycled content, documentation indicating percentages by weight of postconsumer and pre-consumer recycled content. Include statement indicating cost for each product having recycled content. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Evaluation Reports: For dimpled steel studs and runners, from ICC-ES. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies that incorporate non-loadbearing steel framing, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated, according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing agency. B. STC-Rated Assemblies: For STC-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated, according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to ASTM E 413 by an independent testing agency. 2.2 FRAMING SYSTEMS A. Recycled Content of Steel Products: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of pre-consumer recycled content not less than 25 percent. B. Framing Members, General: Comply with ASTM C 754 for conditions indicated. 1. Steel Sheet Components: Comply with ASTM C 645 requirements for metal unless otherwise indicated. 11/30/15 IN071 ET 109/109A RENO. FOR OFFICE SPACE (IU # )

252 DELV Design Studio, LLC SECTION PAGE 2 NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING C. Studs and Runners: ASTM C Steel Studs and Runners: a. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: inch, 25 gauge. b. Depth: As indicated on Drawings. D. Flat Strap and Backing Plate: Steel sheet for blocking and bracing in length and width indicated. 1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: inch. 2.3 SUSPENSION SYSTEMS A. Tie Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, inch- diameter wire, or double strand of inch- diameter wire. B. Hanger Attachments to Concrete: 1. Anchors: Fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials with holes or loops for attaching wire hangers and capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to 5 times that imposed by construction as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488 by an independent testing agency. 2. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Suitable for application indicated, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials with clips or other devices for attaching hangers of type indicated, and capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to 10 times that imposed by construction as determined by testing according to ASTM E 1190 by an independent testing agency. C. Wire Hangers: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.16 inch in diameter. 2.4 AUXILIARY MATERIALS A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards. 1. Fasteners for Metal Framing: Of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding power, and other properties required to fasten steel members to substrates. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas and substrates, with Installer present, and including welded hollow-metal frames, cast-in anchors, and structural framing, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Suspended Assemblies: Coordinate installation of suspension systems with installation of overhead structure to ensure that inserts and other provisions for anchorages to building structure have been installed to receive hangers at spacing required to support the Work and that hangers will develop their full strength. 11/30/15 IN071 ET 109/109A RENO. FOR OFFICE SPACE (IU # )

253 DELV Design Studio, LLC SECTION PAGE 3 NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 1. Furnish concrete inserts and other devices indicated to other trades for installation in advance of time needed for coordination and construction. 3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Installation Standard: ASTM C Gypsum Plaster Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 841 that apply to framing installation. 2. Portland Cement Plaster Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 1063 that apply to framing installation. 3. Gypsum Veneer Plaster Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 844 that apply to framing installation. 4. Gypsum Board Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 840 that apply to framing installation. B. Install supplementary framing, and blocking to support fixtures, equipment services, heavy trim, grab bars, toilet accessories, furnishings, or similar construction. C. Install bracing at terminations in assemblies. D. Do not bridge building control and expansion joints with non-load-bearing steel framing members. Frame both sides of joints independently. 3.4 INSTALLING FRAMED ASSEMBLIES A. Install framing system components according to spacings indicated, but not greater than spacings required by referenced installation standards for assembly types. 1. Single-Layer Application: 16 inches o.c. unless otherwise indicated. B. Install studs so flanges within framing system point in same direction. C. Install tracks (runners) at floors and overhead supports. Extend framing full height to structural supports or substrates above suspended ceilings except where partitions are indicated to terminate at suspended ceilings. Continue framing around ducts penetrating partitions above ceiling. 1. Door Openings: Screw vertical studs at jambs to jamb anchor clips on door frames; install runner track section (for cripple studs) at head and secure to jamb studs. a. Install two studs at each jamb unless otherwise indicated. b. Install cripple studs at head adjacent to each jamb stud, with a minimum 1/2-inch clearance from jamb stud to allow for installation of control joint in finished assembly. c. Extend jamb studs through suspended ceilings and attach to underside of overhead structure. 2. Other Framed Openings: Frame openings other than door openings the same as required for door openings unless otherwise indicated. Install framing below sills of openings to match framing required above door heads. 3. Sound-Rated Partitions: Install framing to comply with sound-rated assembly indicated. D. Installation Tolerance: Install each framing member so fastening surfaces vary not more than 1/8 inch from the plane formed by faces of adjacent framing. 11/30/15 IN071 ET 109/109A RENO. FOR OFFICE SPACE (IU # )

254 DELV Design Studio, LLC SECTION PAGE 4 NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 3.5 INSTALLING SUSPENSION SYSTEMS A. Install suspension system components according to spacings indicated, but not greater than spacings required by referenced installation standards for assembly types. 1. Hangers: 48 inches o.c. B. Isolate suspension systems from building structure where they abut or are penetrated by building structure to prevent transfer of loading imposed by structural movement. C. Suspend hangers from building structure as follows: 1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structural or suspension system. a. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions and offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, counter-splaying, or other equally effective means. 2. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings that interfere with locations of hangers required to support standard suspension system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in the form of trapezes or equivalent devices. 3. Wire Hangers: Secure by looping and wire tying, either directly to structures or to inserts, eye screws, or other devices and fasteners that are secure and appropriate for substrate, and in a manner that will not cause hangers to deteriorate or otherwise fail. 4. Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck. 5. Do not attach hangers to permanent metal forms. Furnish cast-in-place hanger inserts that extend through forms. 6. Do not attach hangers to rolled-in hanger tabs of composite steel floor deck. 7. Do not connect or suspend steel framing from ducts, pipes, or conduit. D. Grid Suspension Systems: Attach perimeter wall track or angle where grid suspension systems meet vertical surfaces. Mechanically join main beam and cross-furring members to each other and butt-cut to fit into wall track. E. Installation Tolerances: Install suspension systems that are level to within 1/8 inch in 12 feet measured lengthwise on each member that will receive finishes and transversely between parallel members that will receive finishes. END OF SECTION /30/15 IN071 ET 109/109A RENO. FOR OFFICE SPACE (IU # )

255 DELV Design Studio, LLC SECTION PAGE 1 GYPSUM BOARD PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Interior gypsum board. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section "Non-Structural Metal Framing" for non-structural framing and suspension systems that support gypsum board panels. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction traffic, and other potential causes of damage. Stack panels flat and supported on risers on a flat platform to prevent sagging. 1.5 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Comply with ASTM C 840 requirements or gypsum board manufacturer's written recommendations, whichever are more stringent. B. Do not install paper-faced gypsum panels until installation areas are enclosed and conditioned. C. Do not install panels that are wet, those that are moisture damaged, and those that are mold damaged. 1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape. 2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing agency. B. STC-Rated Assemblies: For STC-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to ASTM E 413 by an independent testing agency. 11/30/15 IN071 ET 109/109A RENO. FOR OFFICE SPACE (IU # )

256 DELV Design Studio, LLC SECTION PAGE 2 GYPSUM BOARD C. Low-Emitting Materials: For ceiling and wall assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly and complying with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers." 2.2 GYPSUM BOARD, GENERAL A. Regional Materials: Gypsum panel products shall be manufactured within 500 miles of Project site from materials that have been extracted, harvested, or recovered, as well as manufactured, within 500 miles of Project site. B. Regional Materials: Gypsum panel products shall be manufactured within 500 miles of Project site. C. Size: Provide maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize joints in each area and that correspond with support system indicated. 2.3 INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements provide products by one of the following: 1. American Gypsum. 2. CertainTeed Corp. 3. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum LLC. 4. Lafarge North America Inc. 5. National Gypsum Company. 6. PABCO Gypsum. 7. Temple-Inland. 8. USG Corporation. B. Gypsum Board, Type X: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M. 1. Thickness: 5/8 inch. 2. Long Edges: Tapered. 2.4 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS A. General: Comply with ASTM C 475/C 475M. B. Joint Tape: 1. Interior Gypsum Board: Paper. C. Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Board: For each coat use formulation that is compatible with other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats. 1. Prefilling: At open joints and damaged surface areas, use setting-type taping compound. 2. Embedding and First Coat: For embedding tape and first coat on joints, fasteners, and trim flanges, use setting-type taping compound. a. Use setting-type compound for installing paper-faced metal trim accessories. 3. Fill Coat: For second coat, use drying-type, all-purpose compound. 4. Finish Coat: For third coat, use drying-type, all-purpose compound. 11/30/15 IN071 ET 109/109A RENO. FOR OFFICE SPACE (IU # )

257 DELV Design Studio, LLC SECTION PAGE 3 GYPSUM BOARD 2.5 AUXILIARY MATERIALS A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards and manufacturer's written recommendations. B. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Use screws complying with ASTM C 954 for fastening panels to steel members from to inch thick. 2. For fastening cementitious backer units, use screws of type and size recommended by panel manufacturer. C. Sound Attenuation Blankets: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing) produced by combining thermosetting resins with mineral fibers manufactured from glass, slag wool, or rock wool. 1. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Comply with mineral-fiber requirements of assembly. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas and substrates including welded hollow-metal frames and framing, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance. B. Examine panels before installation. Reject panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 APPLYING AND FINISHING PANELS, GENERAL A. Comply with ASTM C 840. B. Install ceiling panels across framing to minimize the number of abutting end joints and to avoid abutting end joints in central area of each ceiling. Stagger abutting end joints of adjacent panels not less than one framing member. C. Install panels with face side out. Butt panels together for a light contact at edges and ends with not more than 1/16 inch of open space between panels. Do not force into place. D. Locate edge and end joints over supports, except in ceiling applications where intermediate supports or gypsum board back-blocking is provided behind end joints. Do not place tapered edges against cut edges or ends. Stagger vertical joints on opposite sides of partitions. Do not make joints other than control joints at corners of framed openings. E. Form control and expansion joints with space between edges of adjoining gypsum panels. F. Cover both faces of support framing with gypsum panels in concealed spaces (above ceilings, etc.), except in chases braced internally. 1. Unless concealed application is indicated or required for sound, fire, air, or smoke ratings, coverage may be accomplished with scraps of not less than 8 sq. ft. in area. 2. Fit gypsum panels around ducts, pipes, and conduits. 3. Where partitions intersect structural members projecting below underside of floor/roof slabs and decks, cut gypsum panels to fit profile formed by structural members; allow 1/4- to 3/8-inch- wide joints to install sealant. 11/30/15 IN071 ET 109/109A RENO. FOR OFFICE SPACE (IU # )

258 DELV Design Studio, LLC SECTION PAGE 4 GYPSUM BOARD G. Isolate perimeter of gypsum board applied to non-load-bearing partitions at structural abutments, except floors. Provide 1/4- to 1/2-inch- wide spaces at these locations and trim edges with edge trim where edges of panels are exposed. Seal joints between edges and abutting structural surfaces with acoustical sealant. H. Attachment to Steel Framing: Attach panels so leading edge or end of each panel is attached to open (unsupported) edges of stud flanges first. I. STC-Rated Assemblies: Seal construction at perimeters, behind control joints, and at openings and penetrations with a continuous bead of acoustical sealant. Install acoustical sealant at both faces of partitions at perimeters and through penetrations. Comply with ASTM C 919 and with manufacturer's written recommendations for locating edge trim and closing off sound-flanking paths around or through assemblies, including sealing partitions above acoustical ceilings. J. Install sound attenuation blankets before installing gypsum panels unless blankets are readily installed after panels have been installed on one side. 3.3 APPLYING INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD A. Install interior gypsum board in the following locations: 1. Type X: At all locations. B. Single-Layer Application: 1. On ceilings, apply gypsum panels before wall/partition board application to greatest extent possible and at right angles to framing unless otherwise indicated. 2. On partitions/walls, apply gypsum panels horizontally (perpendicular to framing) unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly, and minimize end joints. a. Stagger abutting end joints not less than one framing member in alternate courses of panels. 3. Fastening Methods: Apply gypsum panels to supports with steel drill screws. 3.4 INSTALLING TRIM ACCESSORIES A. General: For trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same fasteners used for panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturer's written instructions. B. Control Joints: Install control joints [at locations indicated on Drawings] [according to ASTM C 840 and in specific locations approved by Architect for visual effect]. C. Interior Trim: Install in the following locations: 1. Cornerbead: Use at outside corners. 3.5 FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD A. General: Treat gypsum board joints, interior angles, edge trim, control joints, penetrations, fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare gypsum board surfaces for decoration. Promptly remove residual joint compound from adjacent surfaces. B. Prefill open joints and damaged surface areas. 11/30/15 IN071 ET 109/109A RENO. FOR OFFICE SPACE (IU # )

259 DELV Design Studio, LLC SECTION PAGE 5 GYPSUM BOARD C. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except for trim products specifically indicated as not intended to receive tape. D. Gypsum Board Finish Levels: Finish panels to levels indicated below and according to ASTM C 840: 1. Level 1: Ceiling plenum areas, concealed areas, and where indicated. 2. Level 4: At panel surfaces that will be exposed to view unless otherwise indicated. 3.6 PROTECTION a. Primer and its application to surfaces are specified in other Section "Interior Painting." A. Protect adjacent surfaces from drywall compound and promptly remove from floors and other nondrywall surfaces. Repair surfaces stained, marred, or otherwise damaged during drywall application. B. Protect installed products from damage from weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction, and other causes during remainder of the construction period. C. Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged. 1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape. 2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration. END OF SECTION /30/15 IN071 ET 109/109A RENO. FOR OFFICE SPACE (IU # )

260

261 DELV Design Studio, LLC SECTION PAGE 1 ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Acoustical tiles for ceilings. 2. Concealed suspension systems. 3. Direct attachment of tiles to substrates with adhesive. 4. Direct attachment of tiles to substrates with staples. B. Products furnished, but not installed under this Section, include anchors, clips, and other ceiling attachment devices to be cast in concrete. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified, 6-inches- in size. C. Samples for Initial Selection: For components with factory-applied color finishes. D. Samples for Verification: For each component indicated and for each exposed finish required, prepared on Samples of size indicated below. 1. Acoustical Tile: Set of full-size Samples of each type, color, pattern, and texture. 2. Concealed Suspension-System Members: 6-inch- long Sample of each type. 3. Exposed Moldings and Trim: Set of 6-inch- long Samples of each type and color. E. Qualification Data: For testing agency. F. Product Test Reports: For each acoustical tile ceiling, for tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency. G. Evaluation Reports: For each acoustical tile ceiling suspension system and anchor and fastener type, from ICC-ES. H. Field quality-control reports. 1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance Data: For finishes to include in maintenance manuals. 1.5 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 11/30/15 IN071 ET 109/109A RENO. FOR OFFICE SPACE (IU # )

262 DELV Design Studio, LLC SECTION PAGE 2 ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS 1. Acoustical Ceiling Units: Full-size tiles equal to 5 percent of quantity installed. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to the National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program (NVLAP) for testing indicated. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver acoustical tiles, suspension-system components, and accessories to Project site in original, unopened packages and store them in a fully enclosed, conditioned space where they will be protected against damage from moisture, humidity, temperature extremes, direct sunlight, surface contamination, and other causes. B. Before installing acoustical tiles, permit them to reach room temperature and a stabilized moisture content. C. Handle acoustical tiles carefully to avoid chipping edges or damaging units in any way. 1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install acoustical tile ceilings until spaces are enclosed and weatherproof, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, work above ceilings is complete, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use. 1. Pressurized Plenums: Operate ventilation system for not less than 48 hours before beginning acoustical tile ceiling installation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Seismic Performance: Acoustical ceiling shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7. B. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E 84; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. 1. Flame-Spread Index: Comply with ASTM E 1264 for Class A materials. 2. Smoke-Developed Index: 50 or less. C. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Comply with ASTM E 119; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. 1. Indicate design designations from UL's "Fire Resistance Directory" or from the listings of another qualified testing agency. 2.2 ACOUSTICAL TILES, GENERAL A. Low-Emitting Materials: Acoustical tile ceilings shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers." B. Source Limitations: 11/30/15 IN071 ET 109/109A RENO. FOR OFFICE SPACE (IU # )

263 DELV Design Studio, LLC SECTION PAGE 3 ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS 1. Acoustical Ceiling Tile: Obtain each type from single source from single manufacturer. 2. Suspension System: Obtain each type from single source from single manufacturer. C. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of acoustical ceiling tile and supporting suspension system from single source from single manufacturer. D. Acoustical Tile Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard tiles of configuration indicated that comply with ASTM E 1264 classifications as designated by types, patterns, acoustical ratings, and light reflectances unless otherwise indicated. 1. Mounting Method for Measuring NRC: Type E-400; plenum mounting in which face of test specimen is 15-3/4 inches away from test surface according to ASTM E 795. E. Acoustical Tile Colors and Patterns: Match appearance characteristics indicated for each product type. 1. Where appearance characteristics of acoustical tiles are indicated by referencing pattern designations in ASTM E 1264 and not manufacturers' proprietary product designations, provide products selected by Architect from each manufacturer's full range that comply with requirements indicated for type, pattern, color, light reflectance, acoustical performance, edge detail, and size. 2.3 ACOUSTICAL TILES <Insert drawing designation> A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, [provide products by the following] [provide products by one of the following] [available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following]: B. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings from: 1. USG Interiors, Inc.; Subsidiary of USG Corporation. 2. C. Color: White. D. Edge/Joint Detail: Square. E. Thickness: 3/4 inch. F. Modular Size: As indicated on Drawings. 2.4 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEMS, GENERAL A. Metal Suspension-System Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard metal suspension systems of types, structural classifications, and finishes indicated that comply with applicable requirements in ASTM C 635/C 635M. B. Attachment Devices: Size for five times the design load indicated in ASTM C 635/C 635M, Table 1, "Direct Hung," unless otherwise indicated. Comply with seismic design requirements. 1. Anchors in Concrete: Anchors of type and material indicated below, with holes or loops for attaching hangers of type indicated and with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 5 times that imposed by ceiling construction, as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488 or ASTM E 1512 as applicable, conducted by a qualified testing and inspecting agency. 11/30/15 IN071 ET 109/109A RENO. FOR OFFICE SPACE (IU # )

264 DELV Design Studio, LLC SECTION PAGE 4 ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS a. Corrosion Protection: Carbon-steel components zinc plated to comply with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5 for Class SC 1 service condition. b. Corrosion Protection: Stainless-steel components complying with ASTM F 593 and ASTM F 594, Group 1 Alloy 304 or 316 for bolts; Alloy 304 or 316 for anchors. 2. Power-Actuated Fasteners in Concrete: Fastener system of type suitable for application indicated, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with clips or other accessory devices for attaching hangers of type indicated, and with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 10 times that imposed by ceiling construction, as determined by testing according to ASTM E 1190, conducted by a qualified testing and inspecting agency. C. Wire Hangers, Braces, and Ties: Provide wires complying with the following requirements: 1. Zinc-Coated, Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper. 2. Size: Select wire diameter so its stress at three times hanger design load (ASTM C 635/C 635M, Table 1, "Direct Hung") will be less than yield stress of wire, but provide not less than inch diameter wire. D. Seismic Struts: Manufacturer's standard compression struts designed to accommodate lateral forces. E. Seismic Clips: Manufacturer's standard seismic clips designed and spaced to secure acoustical tiles inplace. 2.5 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEM (EXISTING) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, including structural framing and substrates to which acoustical tile ceilings attach or abut, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements specified in this and other Sections that affect ceiling installation and anchorage and for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Examine acoustical tiles before installation. Reject acoustical tiles that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Testing Substrates: Before installing adhesively applied tiles on wet-placed substrates such as cast-inplace concrete or plaster, test and verify that moisture level is below tile manufacturer's recommended limits. B. Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical tiles to balance border widths at opposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid using less-than-half-width tiles at borders, and comply with layout shown on reflected ceiling plans. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF SUSPENDED ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS A. General: Install acoustical panel ceilings to comply with ASTM C 636/C 636M and seismic design requirements indicated, according to manufacturer's written instructions and CISCA's "Ceiling Systems Handbook." 11/30/15 IN071 ET 109/109A RENO. FOR OFFICE SPACE (IU # )

265 DELV Design Studio, LLC SECTION PAGE 5 ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS B. Suspend ceiling hangers from building's structural members and as follows: 1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structure or of ceiling suspension system. 2. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings that interfere with location of hangers at spacings required to support standard suspension-system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in form of trapezes or equivalent devices. 3. Secure wire hangers to ceiling suspension members and to supports above with a minimum of three tight turns. Connect hangers directly either to structures or to inserts, eye screws, or other devices that are secure and appropriate for substrate and that will not deteriorate or otherwise fail due to age, corrosion, or elevated temperatures. 4. Secure flat, angle, channel, and rod hangers to structure, including intermediate framing members, by attaching to inserts, eye screws, or other devices that are secure and appropriate for both the structure to which hangers are attached and the type of hanger involved. Install hangers in a manner that will not cause them to deteriorate or fail due to age, corrosion, or elevated temperatures. 5. Do not support ceilings directly from permanent metal forms or floor deck. Fasten hangers to cast-in-place hanger inserts, postinstalled mechanical or adhesive anchors, or power-actuated fasteners that extend through forms into concrete. 6. When steel framing does not permit installation of hanger wires at spacing required, install carrying channels or other supplemental support for attachment of hanger wires. 7. Do not attach hangers to steel deck tabs. 8. Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck. Attach hangers to structural members. 9. Space hangers not more than 48 inches o.c. along each member supported directly from hangers unless otherwise indicated; provide hangers not more than 8 inches from ends of each member. 10. Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads within performance limits established by referenced standards and publications. C. Secure bracing wires to ceiling suspension members and to supports with a minimum of four tight turns. Suspend bracing from building's structural members as required for hangers without attaching to permanent metal forms, steel deck, or steel deck tabs. Fasten bracing wires into concrete with cast-inplace or post-installed anchors. 3.4 CLEANING A. Clean exposed surfaces of acoustical tile ceilings, including trim and edge moldings. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and touchup of minor finish damage. Remove and replace tiles and other ceiling components that cannot be successfully cleaned and repaired to permanently eliminate evidence of damage. END OF SECTION /30/15 IN071 ET 109/109A RENO. FOR OFFICE SPACE (IU # )

266

267 DELV Design Studio, LLC SECTION PAGE 1 RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Resilient base. B. Related Sections: 1. Section "Resilient Tile Flooring" for resilient floor tile. 2. Section Tile Carpeting 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of product indicated. C. Samples for Verification: For each type of product indicated, in manufacturer's standard-size Samples but not less than 12 inches long, of each resilient product color, texture, and pattern required. D. Product Schedule: For resilient products. 1.4 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Furnish not less than 10 linear feet for every 500 linear feet or fraction thereof, of each type, color, pattern, and size of resilient product installed. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 648 or NFPA 253 by a qualified testing agency. 1. Critical Radiant Flux Classification: Class I, not less than 0.45 W/sq. cm. B. Mockups: Provide resilient products with mockups specified in other Sections. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store resilient products and installation materials in dry spaces protected from the weather, with ambient temperatures maintained within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 50 deg F or more than 90 deg F. 11/30/15 IN 071 ET 109/109A RENO. FOR OFFICE SPACE (IU # )

268 DELV Design Studio, LLC SECTION PAGE 2 RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 70 deg F or more than 95 deg F, in spaces to receive resilient products during the following time periods: hours before installation. 2. During installation hours after installation. B. Install resilient products after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 RESILIENT BASE <Insert drawing designation> A. Resilient Base: 1. Manufacturers: Per IU standards for this building, provide products by the following: a. Johnsonite. B. Resilient Base Standard: ASTM F Style: Cove (base with toe). C. Minimum Thickness: inch. D. Height: 4 inches. E. Lengths: Coils in manufacturer's standard length. F. Outside Corners: Preformed. G. Inside Corners: Job formed or preformed. H. Finish: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. I. Colors and Patterns: As selected by Architect from full range of industry colors. 2.2 INSTALLATION MATERIALS A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement based or blended hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or approved by manufacturer for applications indicated. B. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by manufacturer to suit resilient products and substrate conditions indicated. 1. Adhesives shall have a VOC content of 50 g/l or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). 2. Adhesives shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers." 11/30/15 IN 071 ET 109/109A RENO. FOR OFFICE SPACE (IU # )

269 DELV Design Studio, LLC SECTION PAGE 3 RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Verify that finishes of substrates comply with tolerances and other requirements specified in other Sections and that substrates are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits that might interfere with adhesion of resilient products. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion of resilient products. B. Do not install resilient products until they are same temperature as the space where they are to be installed. 1. Move resilient products and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed at least 48 hours in advance of installation. 3.3 RESILIENT BASE INSTALLATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient base. B. Apply resilient base to walls, columns, pilasters, casework and cabinets in toe spaces, and other permanent fixtures in rooms and areas where base is required. C. Install resilient base in lengths as long as practicable without gaps at seams and with tops of adjacent pieces aligned. D. Tightly adhere resilient base to substrate throughout length of each piece, with base in continuous contact with horizontal and vertical substrates. E. Do not stretch resilient base during installation. F. On masonry surfaces or other similar irregular substrates, fill voids along top edge of resilient base with manufacturer's recommended adhesive filler material. G. Preformed Corners: Install preformed corners before installing straight pieces. H. Job-Formed Corners: 1. Outside Corners: Use straight pieces of maximum lengths possible. Form without producing discoloration (whitening) at bends. 2. Inside Corners: Use straight pieces of maximum lengths possible. 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protection of resilient products. 11/30/15 IN 071 ET 109/109A RENO. FOR OFFICE SPACE (IU # )

270 DELV Design Studio, LLC SECTION PAGE 4 RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES B. Protect resilient products from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period. C. Cover resilient products until Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION /30/15 IN 071 ET 109/109A RENO. FOR OFFICE SPACE (IU # )

271 DELV Design Studio, LLC SECTION PAGE 1 RESILIENT TILE FLOORING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Vinyl composition floor tile. B. Related Sections: 1. Section "Resilient Base and Accessories" for resilient base, reducer strips, and other accessories installed with resilient floor coverings. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: For each type of floor tile. Include floor tile layouts, edges, columns, doorways, enclosing partitions, built-in furniture, cabinets, and cutouts. 1. Show details of special patterns. C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of floor tile indicated. D. Samples for Verification: Full-size units of each color and pattern of floor tile required. E. Product Schedule: For Vinyl Composition Tile VCT. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer. 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance Data: For each type of floor tile to include in maintenance manuals. 1.6 MATERIALS MAINTENANCE SUBMITTALS A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Floor Tile: Furnish 1 box for every 50 boxes or fraction thereof, of each type, color, and pattern of floor tile installed. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs workers for this Project who are competent in techniques required by manufacturer for floor tile installation indicated. 11/30/15 IN071 ET 109/109A RENO. FOR OFFICE SPACE (IU # )

272 DELV Design Studio, LLC SECTION PAGE 2 RESILIENT TILE FLOORING 1. Engage an installer who employs workers for this Project who are trained or certified by manufacturer for installation techniques required. B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 648 or NFPA 253 by a qualified testing agency. 1. Critical Radiant Flux Classification: Class I, not less than 0.45 W/sq. cm. 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store floor tile and installation materials in dry spaces protected from the weather, with ambient temperatures maintained within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 50 deg F or more than 90 deg F. Store floor tiles on flat surfaces. 1.9 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 70 deg F or more than 95 deg F, in spaces to receive floor tile during the following time periods: hours before installation. 2. During installation hours after installation. B. Until Substantial Completion, maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 55 deg F or more than 95 deg F. C. Close spaces to traffic during floor tile installation. D. Close spaces to traffic for 48 hours after floor tile installation. E. Install floor tile after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. FloorScore Compliance: Resilient tile flooring shall comply with requirements of FloorScore Standard. B. Low-Emitting Materials: Flooring system shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers." 2.2 VINYL COMPOSITION FLOOR TILE (VCT) A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: 1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.; Migrations. B. Tile Standard: ASTM F C. Wearing Surface: Smooth. D. Thickness: inch. E. Size: 12 by 12 inches. 11/30/15 IN071 ET 109/109A RENO. FOR OFFICE SPACE (IU # )

273 DELV Design Studio, LLC SECTION PAGE 3 RESILIENT TILE FLOORING F. Colors and Patterns: As selected by Architect from full range of industry colors. 2.3 INSTALLATION MATERIALS A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement based or blended hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or approved by manufacturer for applications indicated. B. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by manufacturer to suit floor tile and substrate conditions indicated. 1. Adhesives shall comply with the following limits for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24): a. VCT and Asphalt Tile Adhesives: Not more than 50 g/l. b. Rubber Floor Adhesives: Not more than 60 g/l. c. Terrazzo Floor Tile Adhesives: Not more than [65] <Insert value> g/l. 2. Adhesives shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers." C. Floor Polish: Provide protective liquid floor polish products as recommended by manufacturer and approved by Indiana University. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Verify that finishes of substrates comply with tolerances and other requirements specified in other Sections and that substrates are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits that might interfere with adhesion of floor tile. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion of resilient products. B. Concrete Substrates: Prepare according to ASTM F Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, and hardeners. 2. Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods recommended by manufacturer. Do not use solvents. 3. Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Perform tests recommended by manufacturer. Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing. 4. Moisture Testing: Perform tests recommended by manufacturer. Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing. C. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patching compound and remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate. 11/30/15 IN071 ET 109/109A RENO. FOR OFFICE SPACE (IU # )

274 DELV Design Studio, LLC SECTION PAGE 4 RESILIENT TILE FLOORING D. Do not install floor tiles until they are same temperature as space where they are to be installed. 1. Move resilient products and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed at least 48 hours in advance of installation. E. Sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient products immediately before installation. 3.3 FLOOR TILE INSTALLATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing floor tile. B. Lay out floor tiles from center marks established with principal walls, discounting minor offsets, so tiles at opposite edges of room are of equal width. Adjust as necessary to avoid using cut widths that equal less than one-half tile at perimeter. 1. Lay tiles square with room axis. C. Match floor tiles for color and pattern by selecting tiles from cartons in the same sequence as manufactured and packaged, if so numbered. Discard broken, cracked, chipped, or deformed tiles. 1. Lay tiles with grain running in one direction, lengthwise with the room. D. Scribe, cut, and fit floor tiles to butt neatly and tightly to vertical surfaces and permanent fixtures including built-in furniture, cabinets, pipes, outlets, and door frames. E. Extend floor tiles into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, and similar openings. Extend floor tiles to center of door openings. F. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting by repeating on floor tiles as marked on substrates. Use chalk or other nonpermanent, nonstaining marking device. G. Install floor tiles on covers for telephone and electrical ducts, building expansion-joint covers, and similar items in finished floor areas. Maintain overall continuity of color and pattern between pieces of tile installed on covers and adjoining tiles. Tightly adhere tile edges to substrates that abut covers and to cover perimeters. H. Adhere floor tiles to flooring substrates using a full spread of adhesive applied to substrate to produce a completed installation without open cracks, voids, raising and puckering at joints, telegraphing of adhesive spreader marks, and other surface imperfections. 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protection of floor tile. B. Perform the following operations immediately after completing floor tile installation: 1. Remove adhesive and other blemishes from exposed surfaces. 2. Sweep and vacuum surfaces thoroughly. 3. Damp-mop surfaces to remove marks and soil. C. Protect floor tile products from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period. 11/30/15 IN071 ET 109/109A RENO. FOR OFFICE SPACE (IU # )

275 DELV Design Studio, LLC SECTION PAGE 5 RESILIENT TILE FLOORING D. Floor Polish: Remove soil, visible adhesive, and surface blemishes from floor tile surfaces before applying liquid floor polish. 1. Apply three coat(s). E. Joint Sealant: Apply sealant to resilient terrazzo floor tile perimeter and around columns, at door frames, and at other joints and penetrations. F. Cover floor tile until Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION /30/15 IN071 ET 109/109A RENO. FOR OFFICE SPACE (IU # )

276

277 DELV Design Studio, LLC SECTION PAGE 1 TILE CARPETING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes modular, tufted textured loop carpet tile. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section "Resilient Base and Accessories" for resilient wall base and accessories installed with carpet tile. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Include manufacturer's written data on physical characteristics, durability, and fade resistance. 2. Include installation recommendations for each type of substrate. B. Shop Drawings: Show the following: 1. Columns, doorways, enclosing walls or partitions, built-in cabinets, and locations where cutouts are required in carpet tiles. 2. Carpet tile type, color, and dye lot. 3. Type of subfloor. 4. Type of installation. 5. Pattern of installation. 6. Pattern type, location, and direction. 7. Pile direction. 8. Type, color, and location of insets and borders. 9. Type, color, and location of edge, transition, and other accessory strips. 10. Transition details to other flooring materials. C. Samples: For each of the following products and for each color and texture required. Label each Sample with manufacturer's name, material description, color, pattern, and designation indicated on Drawings and in schedules. 1. Carpet Tile: Full-size Sample. 2. Exposed Edge, Transition, and Other Accessory Stripping: 12-inch- long Samples. D. Product Schedule: For carpet tile. Use same designations indicated on Drawings. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For Installer. B. Product Test Reports: For carpet tile, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency. C. Sample Warranty: For special warranty. 11/30/15 IN071 ET109/109A RENO. FOR OFFICE SPACE (IU # )

278 DELV Design Studio, LLC SECTION PAGE 2 TILE CARPETING 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance Data: For carpet tiles to include in maintenance manuals. Include the following: 1. Methods for maintaining carpet tile, including cleaning and stain-removal products and procedures and manufacturer's recommended maintenance schedule. 2. Precautions for cleaning materials and methods that could be detrimental to carpet tile. 1.6 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Furnish extra materials, from the same product run, that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Carpet Tile: Full-size units equal to 5 percent of amount installed for each type indicated, but not less than 10 sq. yd QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who is certified by the International Certified Floorcovering Installers Association at the Commercial II certification level. B. Fire-Test-Response Ratings: Where indicated, provide carpet tile identical to those of assemblies tested for fire response according to NFPA 253 by a qualified testing agency. 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Comply with CRI FIELD CONDITIONS A. Comply with CRI 104 for temperature, humidity, and ventilation limitations. B. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install carpet tiles until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period. C. Do not install carpet tiles over concrete slabs until slabs have cured and are sufficiently dry to bond with adhesive and concrete slabs have ph range recommended by carpet tile manufacturer. D. Where demountable partitions or other items are indicated for installation on top of carpet tiles, install carpet tiles before installing these items WARRANTY A. Special Warranty for Carpet Tiles: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of carpet tile installation that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty does not include deterioration or failure of carpet tile due to unusual traffic, failure of substrate, vandalism, or abuse. 2. Failures include, but are not limited to, more than 10 percent edge raveling, snags, runs, loss of tuft bind strength, loss of face fiber, and delamination. 3. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. 11/30/15 IN071 ET109/109A RENO. FOR OFFICE SPACE (IU # )

279 DELV Design Studio, LLC SECTION PAGE 3 TILE CARPETING PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 CARPET TILE (CPT) A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: 1. Interface - Earth II. B. Color: 9246 Pampa C. Pattern: Quarter Turn. D. Size: 24 by 24 inches. E. Performance Characteristics: As follows: 1. Appearance Retention Rating: Moderate traffic, 2.5 minimum according to ASTM D Dry Breaking Strength: Not less than 100 lbf according to ASTM D Dimensional Tolerance: Within 1/32 inch of specified size dimensions, as determined by physical measurement. 4. Dimensional Stability: 0.2 percent or less according to ISO 2551 (Aachen Test). 5. Resistance to Insects: Comply with AATCC Colorfastness to Crocking: Not less than 4, wet and dry, according to AATCC Antimicrobial Activity: Not less than 2-mm halo of inhibition for gram-positive bacteria, not less than 1-mm halo of inhibition for gram-negative bacteria, and no fungal growth, according to AATCC INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or recommended by carpet tile manufacturer. B. Adhesives: Water-resistant, mildew-resistant, nonstaining, pressure-sensitive type to suit products and subfloor conditions indicated, that complies with flammability requirements for installed carpet tile and is recommended by carpet tile manufacturer for releasable installation. 1. Adhesives shall have a VOC content of 50 g/l or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). 2. Adhesives shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers." PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content, alkalinity range, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting carpet tile performance. Examine carpet tile for type, color, pattern, and potential defects. B. Concrete Subfloors: Verify that concrete slabs comply with ASTM F 710 and the following: 1. Slab substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, hardeners, and other materials that may interfere with adhesive bond. Determine adhesion and dryness characteristics by performing bond and moisture tests recommended by carpet tile manufacturer. 11/30/15 IN071 ET109/109A RENO. FOR OFFICE SPACE (IU # )

280 DELV Design Studio, LLC SECTION PAGE 4 TILE CARPETING 2. Subfloor finishes comply with requirements specified in Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for slabs receiving carpet tile. 3. Subfloors are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. General: Comply with CRI 104, Section 6.2, "Site Conditions; Floor Preparation," and with carpet tile manufacturer's written installation instructions for preparing substrates indicated to receive carpet tile installation. B. Use trowelable leveling and patching compounds, according to manufacturer's written instructions, to fill cracks, holes, depressions, and protrusions in substrates. Fill or level cracks, holes and depressions 1/8 inch wide or wider and protrusions more than 1/32 inch unless more stringent requirements are required by manufacturer's written instructions. C. Remove coatings, including curing compounds, and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, without using solvents. Use mechanical methods recommended in writing by carpet tile manufacturer. D. Clean metal substrates of grease, oil, soil and rust, and prime if directed by adhesive manufacturer. Rough sand painted metal surfaces and remove loose paint. Sand aluminum surfaces, to remove metal oxides, immediately before applying adhesive. E. Broom and vacuum clean substrates to be covered immediately before installing carpet tile. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with CRI 104, Section 14, "Carpet Modules," and with carpet tile manufacturer's written installation instructions. B. Installation Method: [As recommended in writing by carpet tile manufacturer] [Glue down; install every tile with full-spread, releasable, pressure-sensitive adhesive] [Partial glue down; install periodic tiles with releasable, pressure-sensitive adhesive] [Free lay; install carpet tiles without adhesive]. C. Maintain dye lot integrity. Do not mix dye lots in same area. D. Cut and fit carpet tile to butt tightly to vertical surfaces, permanent fixtures, and built-in furniture including cabinets, pipes, outlets, edgings, thresholds, and nosings. Bind or seal cut edges as recommended by carpet tile manufacturer. E. Extend carpet tile into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, open-bottomed obstructions, removable flanges, alcoves, and similar openings. F. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting by repeating on finish flooring as marked on subfloor. Use nonpermanent, nonstaining marking device. G. Install pattern parallel to walls and borders. H. Stagger joints of carpet tiles so carpet tile grid is offset from access flooring panel grid. Do not fill seams of access flooring panels with carpet adhesive; keep seams free of adhesive. 11/30/15 IN071 ET109/109A RENO. FOR OFFICE SPACE (IU # )

281 DELV Design Studio, LLC SECTION PAGE 5 TILE CARPETING 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Perform the following operations immediately after installing carpet tile: 1. Remove excess adhesive, seam sealer, and other surface blemishes using cleaner recommended by carpet tile manufacturer. 2. Remove yarns that protrude from carpet tile surface. 3. Vacuum carpet tile using commercial machine with face-beater element. B. Protect installed carpet tile to comply with CRI 104, Section 16, "Protecting Indoor Installations." C. Protect carpet tile against damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during the remainder of construction period. Use protection methods indicated or recommended in writing by carpet tile manufacturer. END OF SECTION /30/15 IN071 ET109/109A RENO. FOR OFFICE SPACE (IU # )

282

283 DELV Design Studio, LLC SECTION PAGE 1 INTERIOR PAINTING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes surface preparation and the application of paint systems on the following interior substrates: 1. Wood. 2. Gypsum board. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Gloss Level 1: Not more than 5 units at 60 degrees and 10 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523. B. Gloss Level 2: Not more than 10 units at 60 degrees and 10 to 35 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523. C. Gloss Level 3: 10 to 25 units at 60 degrees and 10 to 35 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523. D. Gloss Level 4: 20 to 35 units at 60 degrees and not less than 35 units at 85 degrees, according to ASTM D 523. E. Gloss Level 5: 35 to 70 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523. F. Gloss Level 6: 70 to 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523. G. Gloss Level 7: More than 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. Include preparation requirements and application instructions. B. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of topcoat product. C. Samples for Verification: For each type of paint system and in each color and gloss of topcoat. 1. Submit Samples on rigid backing, 8 inches square. 2. Step coats on Samples to show each coat required for system. 3. Label each coat of each Sample. 4. Label each Sample for location and application area. D. Product List: For each product indicated, include the following: 1. Cross-reference to paint system and locations of application areas. Use same designations indicated on Drawings and in schedules. 2. Printout of current "MPI Approved Products List" for each product category specified in Part 2, with the proposed product highlighted. 3. VOC content. 11/30/15 IN 071 ET 109/109 Reno. For Office (IU # )

284 DELV Design Studio, LLC SECTION PAGE 2 INTERIOR PAINTING 1.5 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Furnish extra materials from the same product run that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Paint: 10 percent, but not less than 1 gal. of each material and color applied. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well-ventilated areas with ambient temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 45 deg F. 1. Maintain containers in clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. 2. Remove rags and waste from storage areas daily. 1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Apply paints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted and ambient air temperatures are between 50 and 95 deg F. B. Do not apply paints when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; at temperatures less than 5 deg F above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements provide products by the following: 1. Sherwin-Williams Company (The). B. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, [provide product] [provide one of the products] [available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to products] listed in other Part 2 articles for the paint category indicated. 2.2 PAINT, GENERAL A. MPI Standards: Provide products that comply with MPI standards indicated and that are listed in its "MPI Approved Products List." B. Material Compatibility: 1. Provide materials for use within each paint system that are compatible with one another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience. 2. For each coat in a paint system, provide products recommended in writing by manufacturers of topcoat for use in paint system and on substrate indicated. C. VOC Content: Products shall comply with VOC limits of authorities having jurisdiction[ and, for interior paints and coatings applied at Project site, the following VOC limits, exclusive of colorants added to a tint base, when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24)]. 1. Flat Paints and Coatings: 50 g/l. 2. Nonflat Paints and Coatings: 150 g/l. 3. Dry-Fog Coatings: 400 g/l. 11/30/15 IN 071 ET 109/109 Reno. For Office (IU # )

285 DELV Design Studio, LLC SECTION PAGE 3 INTERIOR PAINTING 4. Primers, Sealers, and Undercoaters: 200 g/l. 5. Anticorrosive and Antirust Paints Applied to Ferrous Metals: 250 g/l. 6. Zinc-Rich Industrial Maintenance Primers: 340 g/l. 7. Pretreatment Wash Primers: 420 g/l. 8. Floor Coatings: 100 g/l. 9. Shellacs, Clear: 730 g/l. 10. Shellacs, Pigmented: 550 g/l. D. Low-Emitting Materials: Interior paints and coatings shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers." E. Colors: As indicated in a color schedule. 2.3 PRIMERS/SEALERS A. Primer Sealer, Latex, Interior: MPI # ProMar 200 Zero VOC Interior Latex Primer. B. Primer, Latex, for Interior Wood: MPI # Multi-Purpose Latex Primer/Sealer. 2.4 WATER-BASED PAINTS 1. Product designations noted on drawings. 2.5 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing of Paint Materials: Owner reserves the right to invoke the following procedure: 1. Owner will engage the services of a qualified testing agency to sample paint materials. Contractor will be notified in advance and may be present when samples are taken. If paint materials have already been delivered to Project site, samples may be taken at Project site. Samples will be identified, sealed, and certified by testing agency. 2. Testing agency will perform tests for compliance with product requirements. 3. Owner may direct Contractor to stop applying coatings if test results show materials being used do not comply with product requirements. Contractor shall remove noncomplying paint materials from Project site, pay for testing, and repaint surfaces painted with rejected materials. Contractor will be required to remove rejected materials from previously painted surfaces if, on repainting with complying materials, the two paints are incompatible. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic moisture meter as follows: 1. Concrete: 12 percent. 2. Masonry (Clay and CMU): 12 percent. 3. Wood: 15 percent. 11/30/15 IN 071 ET 109/109 Reno. For Office (IU # )

286 DELV Design Studio, LLC SECTION PAGE 4 INTERIOR PAINTING 4. Gypsum Board: 12 percent. 5. Plaster: 12 percent. C. Gypsum Board Substrates: Verify that finishing compound is sanded smooth. D. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility with existing finishes and primers. E. Proceed with coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 1. Application of coating indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Manual" applicable to substrates indicated. B. Remove hardware, covers, plates, and similar items already in place that are removable and are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item, provide surfaceapplied protection before surface preparation and painting. 1. After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface-applied protection if any. C. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dust, dirt, oil, grease, and incompatible paints and encapsulants. 1. Remove incompatible primers and re-prime substrate with compatible primers or apply tie coat as required to produce paint systems indicated. 3.3 APPLICATION A. Apply paints according to manufacturer's written instructions and to recommendations in "MPI Manual." 1. Use applicators and techniques suited for paint and substrate indicated. 2. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture same as similar exposed surfaces. Before final installation, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat only. 3. Paint front and backsides of access panels, removable or hinged covers, and similar hinged items to match exposed surfaces. 4. Do not paint over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates. 5. Primers specified in painting schedules may be omitted on items that are factory primed or factory finished if acceptable to topcoat manufacturers. B. Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to facilitate identification of each coat if multiple coats of same material are to be applied. Tint undercoats to match color of topcoat, but provide sufficient difference in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat. C. If undercoats or other conditions show through topcoat, apply additional coats until cured film has a uniform paint finish, color, and appearance. D. Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and color breaks. 11/30/15 IN 071 ET 109/109 Reno. For Office (IU # )

287 DELV Design Studio, LLC SECTION PAGE 5 INTERIOR PAINTING E. Painting Fire Suppression, Plumbing, HVAC, Electrical, Communication, and Electronic Safety and Security Work: 1. Paint the following work where exposed in occupied spaces: a. Equipment, including panelboards. b. Uninsulated metal piping. c. Uninsulated plastic piping. d. Pipe hangers and supports. e. Metal conduit. f. Plastic conduit. g. Duct, equipment, and pipe insulation having cotton or canvas insulation covering or other paintable jacket material. h. Other items as directed by Architect. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Dry Film Thickness Testing: Owner may engage the services of a qualified testing and inspecting agency to inspect and test paint for dry film thickness. 1. Contractor shall touch up and restore painted surfaces damaged by testing. 2. If test results show that dry film thickness of applied paint does not comply with paint manufacturer's written recommendations, Contractor shall pay for testing and apply additional coats as needed to provide dry film thickness that complies with paint manufacturer's written recommendations. 3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials from Project site. B. After completing paint application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paints by washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces. C. Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to work of other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition. D. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces. 3.6 INTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE A. Wood Substrates: Including doors. 1. Latex System: a. Prime Coat: Primer, latex, for interior wood, MPI #39. b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Latex, interior, (Gloss Level 3), MPI #52. B. Gypsum Board Substrates: 1. Latex System: 11/30/15 IN 071 ET 109/109 Reno. For Office (IU # )

288 DELV Design Studio, LLC SECTION PAGE 6 INTERIOR PAINTING END OF SECTION a. Prime Coat: Primer sealer, latex, interior, MPI #50. b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Latex, interior, (Gloss Level 3), MPI #52. 11/30/15 IN 071 ET 109/109 Reno. For Office (IU # )

289 INTERIOR SIGNAGE STANDARDS FOR INDIANA UNIVERSITY CONSTRUCTION PROJECTS PREPARED BY: UNIVERSITY ARCHITECT'S OFFICE 1800 NORTH RANGE ROAD BLOOMINGTON, INDIANA Revised MARCH 12, 2014

290

291 SECTION INTERIOR SIGNAGE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following panel signs: 1. IU sign type A to G and K to L. 2. IU sign type H1 to H3 and J. 3. Site (Project Construction) Sign 4. Dedication Plaques 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. ADA, Accessibility Guidelines (2010): U.S. Department of Justice Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) Accessibility Guidelines : ADA Standards for Accessible Design (REVISED, 2010 Standards), for scoping and technical requirements for new construction and alterations; result of the adoption of revised 2010 Standards in the final rules for Title II (28 CFR part 35) and Title III (28 CFR part 36). 1.2 LEED REQUIREMENTS A. Work performed and materials provided under this Section shall comply with Division 1 Sections and LEED credit goals established for project. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of the Contract and Division1 Specification Sections. B. Product Data: For each type of product indicated, include construction details relative to materials, dimensions of individual components, profiles, and finishes for each type of sign. C. LEED Submittal Requirements: Provide the following which represents some of the submittal requirements. Please refer to Division 1 for additional requirements. 1. Construction Waste Management Credits MR 2.1 and 2.2: Comply with Construction Waste Management Program. Provide documentation for waste and excess materials taken off site. a. Comply with construction waste management procedures as indicated in Division 1 Specification Sections regarding Construction Waste Management to achieve LEED Project goals. 2. Materials and Resources Credits MR 4.1, MR 4.2, MR 5.1, and MR 5.2: Provide the following, either on schedule of values material cost breakdown or by separate written documentation: a. Statement indicating material costs for each product. Information may be included on schedule of values material cost breakdown or by separate written documentation. b. Credits MR 4.1 and MR 4.2: Product Data or manufacturer s statement indicating percentages by weight of post-consumer and post-industrial recycled content. Provide separate totals for post-consumer and post-industrial recycled content. c. Credit MR 5.1: Address and phone number of location of manufacturer for each product. d. Credit MR 5.2: Manufacturer s statement indicating the locations where the base materials of each product were extracted, mined, quarried, harvested, etc. INDIANA UNIVERSITY ARCHITECTURAL STANDARDS DIVISION 10 INTERIOR SIGNAGE PAGE 1 OF 4 MARCH 2014

292 3. Low-Emitting Materials a. Credit EQ 4.1: Manufacturers' product data for sealants, adhesives, and primers including printed statement of VOC content. C. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for signs. 1. Show sign mounting heights, locations of supplementary supports to be provided by others, and accessories. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE 2. Provide message list, typestyles, graphic elements, including tactile characters and Braille, and layout for each sign. Provide photo-realistic type proof document of Dedication Plaque for UAO and Board of Trustees review and approval. 3. Wiring Diagram: Power, signal, and control wiring. A.Single Source Responsibility: For each sign type indicated from one source from a single manufacturer. B. B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with most stringent of applicable provisions in ADA Accessibility Guidelines, ICC/ANSI A117.1, and Indiana Building Code. C. Product Options: Drawings and Specifications indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of panel signs and are based on the specific type indicated. Signs by other manufacturers may be considered provided that deviations in dimensions and profiles are minor and do not change the design concept as judged solely by the University Architect s Office. Burden of proof of equality is on the proposer. 1.5 COORDINATION A.Coordinate placement of anchorage devices with templates for installing signs. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE & HANDLING A.Deliver components correctly packed to prevent damage. 1.7 WARRANTY B.Store in secure areas, out of weather and protected from work of other trades. A. Provide Manufacturer s standard two year limited warranty covering manufacturing defects. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Panel Signs: a. ASI-Modulex, Inc W. 18 th Street, Indianapolis, IN b. Essential Architectural Signs, Inc Rucker Road, Indianapolis, IN c. MD Designs Mystic Rock Drive, Carmel, IN d. Sign Solutions, Inc., 505 Commerce Parkway West Dr., Greenwood, IN INDIANA UNIVERSITY ARCHITECTURAL STANDARDS DIVISION 10 INTERIOR SIGNAGE PAGE 2 OF 4 MARCH 2014

293 2.2 MATERIALS A. Panel Signs: 1. Plaque Material for Signs A to G and K to L: Monolithic, stratified, polymide resin. 2. Plaque Material for Signs H1 to H3 and J: inch thick Lexan. 3. Laminating Base: inch polyester laminated to 1/8 inch thick acrylic. 4. Fastener for Signs A to G and K to L, and Signs H1 to H3 and J:.030 thick double face tape B. Building Plaques: 1. Plaque Material should be either cast bronze or cast aluminum, unless special approval is granted by UAO for another design. The metal shall coordinate with the hardware finish of the facility. 2.3 PANEL SIGNS A. Sign Types A to G and K to L: Manufacturer s standard monolithic tactile plaque sign construction meeting accessibility requirement and as indicated for materials, thickness,finish, colors, design, shapes, sizes, and details of construction. 1. Type: Unframed. 2. Fabrication Tolerance: Plus or minus 1/16 inch. 3. Plaque Color: White. B. Sign Types H1 to H3 and J: Manufacturer s standard monolithic plaque sign construction meeting accessibility requirement and as indicated for materials, thickness, finish, colors, design, shapes, sizes, and details of construction. 1. Type: Unframed 2. Edge Condition: Straight edges, free from saw marks or other imperfections. 3. Corners: ½ inch radius, unless otherwise indicated. 4. Fabrication Tolerances: Plus or minus 1/16 inch. 5. Plaque Color: ADA Blue. C. Graphics: Precisely formed, uniformly opaque graphics to comply with accessibility requirements indicated for size, spacing, content, position, and colors. Graphic is subsurface applied by the ASP Process onto a vinyl plastic face prior to the application of the background color and adhesive. Body copy to be Helvetica Regular, upper and lower case, sized as proposed on standard. Body copy shall be color as indicated. 1. Text: Helvetica Regular, upper and lower case, sized as indicated in Signage Schedule. Text shall be accompanied by Grade 2 Braille for all signs, raised 1/32 inch (0.8 mm) above surface with contrasting colors where indicated. Translation of sign copy shall be the responsibility of the manufacturer. 2. Color: As indicated in Signage Schedule. 3. Room Numbers: Assigned by Indiana University Bureau of Facilities, Programming, and Utilization. 4. Surface Finish: Matte. 5. Pictograms: Pictograms are to be raised 1/32 above surrounding surfaces. Where required, pictograms will be placed within an area 6 in height in which no other information will be displayed. All symbols and pictograms shown in drawings are for reference only and shall be reproduced from AIGA/DOT Symbols Signs book or electronic file published by AIGA. 2.4 DEDICATION PLAQUE A building dedication plaque shall be included for any new construction and major building addition/renovation projects. The layout shown in the Signage Standards should be considered a typical layout; as example only. The text and layout for this specific project will be decided by the University Architect s Office and a representative from the IU Board of Trustees. This layout will be given to the Architect of Record on the project for inclusion in the project s interior signage specifications. The dedication plaque location and finish shall be determined by the Architect of Record and approved by the University Architect s Office. INDIANA UNIVERSITY ARCHITECTURAL STANDARDS DIVISION 10 INTERIOR SIGNAGE PAGE 3 OF 4 MARCH 2014

294 2.5 FINISHES, GENERAL A. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping. B. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations in the same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. 2.6 ACRYLIC SHEET FINISHES A. Colored Coatings for Acrylic Sheet: For copy and background colors, provide colored coatings, including inks, dyes, and paints, that are recommended by acrylic manufacturersfor optimum adherence to acrylic surface and that are UV and water resistant for three years for application intended. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of work. B.Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Locate signs and accessories according to accessibility requirements indicated, following IU standards and using mounting methods of types described and complying with manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Install signs level, plumb, and at heights indicated, with sign surfaces free of distortion and other defects in appearance. B. Wall-Mounted Signs: Install panel signs with inch thick double face tape manufactured for the specific purpose of permanently mounting signage. 1. Single Door Application: 2-inch offset from lever side of door. 2. Double Door and Sidelight Applications: 2-inch offset from frame in right hand door of pair. 3. Mounting Height: 61 inches above finish floor to top edge of sign. Signs in entire project shall be mounted at same height throughout. C. Glass-Mounted Signs: Provide matching opaque plate on opposite side of glass to conceal mounting materials. 3.3 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. After installation, clean soiled sign surfaces according to manufacturer's written instructions. Protect signs from damage until acceptance by Owner. 3.4 SIGNAGE SCHEDULE A. All Signage projects are to have a Signage Schedule and Signage Location Plans. INDIANA UNIVERSITY ARCHITECTURAL STANDARDS DIVISION 10 INTERIOR SIGNAGE PAGE 4 OF 4 MARCH 2014

295 Character Spacing between individual characters shall be 10 percent minimum and 35 percent maximum of character height. Follow current ADA standards " 0.75" Helvetica Regular 0.375" " 0.375" 0.5" 050 White Braille 6" wide " Type A Sign Sign face to be matte white/black 1/8" thick 2-ply rotary engraveable laminated impact acrylic or similar product. Room number text to be Helvetica Regular or Helvetica Neue Regular upper case 3/4" character height with 1/32" depth raised tactile lettering using Black ADA Alt Applique. Room number text should be duplicated below tactile type in White domed or round Braille (Grade 2) per current ADA standards. Note to follow ADA Specifications that Braille shall be separated 3/8" from any other tactile characters, raised elements or borders. The outside edge of sign base is beveled at a 45 degree one half the depth of the laminate. Signage to be mounted with 0.030" thick double face foam tape. Install sign 61" from floor to top of sign. Sign shall be installed on the wall next to the latch side of the door so that a clear floor space of 18" by 18" minimum, centered on the tactile characters, is provided beyond the arc of any door swing between the closed position and 45 degree open position. Follow current ADA guidelines for alternate locations if space is not available per this designation. Revised December 4, 2012

296 0.375" 0.75" Helvetica Regular 0.375" White Braille 0.375" " 0.5" 0.5" Helvetica Regular Example of descriptive text 0.5" 407 Character Spacing between individual characters shall be 10 percent minimum and 35 percent maximum of character height. Follow current ADA standards. 6" wide Classroom " Type B Sign Sign face to be matte white/black 1/8" thick 2-ply rotary engraveable laminated impact acrylic or similar product. Room number text to be Helvetica Regular or Helvetica Neue Regular upper case 3/4" character height with 1/32" depth raised tactile lettering using Black ADA Alt Applique. Room number text should be duplicated below tactile type in White domed or round Braille (Grade 2) per current ADA standards. Note to follow ADA Specifications that Braille shall be separated 3/8" from any other tactile characters, raised elements or borders. Descriptive text is engraved 1/2" tall Helvetica Regular or Helvetica Neue Regular cap and lower case with a flush left alignment. The outside edge of sign base is beveled at a 45 degree one half the depth of the laminate. Signage to be mounted with 0.030" thick double face foam tape. Install sign 61" from floor to top of sign. Sign shall be installed on the wall next to the latch side of the door so that a clear floor space of 18" by 18" minimum, centered on the tactile characters, is provided beyond the arc of any door swing between the closed position and 45 degree open position. Follow current ADA guidelines and attain UAO approval for alternate locations if space is not available per this designation " Revised December 4, 2012

297 3.9" " 0.375" 0.75" Helvetica Regular 0.375" White Braille 0.375" 6" wide STAIRS " " Type B1 Sign Sign face to be matte white/black 1/8" thick 2-ply rotary engraveable laminated impact acrylic or similar product. Pictogram is centered in a 6" x 6" area above text and braille. Font for text is Helvetica Regular or Helvetica Neue Regular upper case 3/4" character height. Create 1/32" depth raised tactile lettering and Pictogram using Black ADA Alt Applique. Raised Text should be duplicated below tactile type in White domed or round Braille (Grade 2) per current ADA standards. Note to follow ADA Specifications that Braille shall be separated 3/8" from any other tactile characters, raised elements or borders. The outside edge of sign base is beveled at a 45 degree one half the depth of the laminate. Signage to be mounted with 0.030" thick double face foam tape. Install sign 61" from floor to top of sign. Sign shall be installed on the wall next to the latch side of the door so that a clear floor space of 18" by 18" minimum, centered on the tactile characters, is provided beyond the arc of any door swing between the closed position and 45 degree open position. Follow current ADA guidelines and attain UAO approval for alternate locations if space is not available per this designation. Flush Left Braille with Tactile Text Center Type & Pictogram Character Spacing between individual characters shall be 10 percent minimum and 35 percent maximum of character height. Follow current ADA standards. Revised December 4, 2012

298 4.5" " 0.375" 0.75" Helvetica Regular 0.375" White Braille 0.375" 6" wide MEN " " Type C1 Sign Sign face to be matte white/black 1/8" thick 2-ply rotary engraveable laminated impact acrylic or similar product. Pictogram is centered in a 6" x 6" area above text and braille. Font for text is Helvetica Regular or Helvetica Neue Regular upper case 3/4" character height. Create 1/32" depth raised tactile lettering and Pictogram using Black ADA Alt Applique. Raised Text should be duplicated below tactile type in White domed or round Braille (Grade 2) per current ADA standards. Note to follow ADA Specifications that Braille shall be separated 3/8" from any other tactile characters, raised elements or borders. The outside edge of sign base is beveled at a 45 degree one half the depth of the laminate. Signage to be mounted with 0.030" thick double face foam tape. Install sign 61" from floor to top of sign. Sign shall be installed on the wall next to the latch side of the door so that a clear floor space of 18" by 18" minimum, centered on the tactile characters, is provided beyond the arc of any door swing between the closed position and 45 degree open position. Follow current ADA guidelines and attain UAO approval for alternate locations if space is not available per this designation. Flush Left Braille with Tactile Text Center Type & Pictogram Character Spacing between individual characters shall be 10 percent minimum and 35 percent maximum of character height. Follow current ADA standards. Revised December 4, 2012

299 4.5" " 0.375" 0.75" Helvetica Regular 0.375" White Braille 0.375" 6" wide MEN " " Type C2 Sign Sign face to be matte white/black 1/8" thick 2-ply rotary engraveable laminated impact acrylic or similar product. Pictogram is centered in a 6" x 6" area above text and braille. Font for text is Helvetica Regular or Helvetica Neue Regular upper case 3/4" character height. Create 1/32" depth raised tactile lettering and Pictogram using Black ADA Alt Applique. Raised Text should be duplicated below tactile type in White domed or round Braille (Grade 2) per current ADA standards. Note to follow ADA Specifications that Braille shall be separated 3/8" from any other tactile characters, raised elements or borders. The outside edge of sign base is beveled at a 45 degree one half the depth of the laminate. Signage to be mounted with 0.030" thick double face foam tape. Install sign 61" from floor to top of sign. Sign shall be installed on the wall next to the latch side of the door so that a clear floor space of 18" by 18" minimum, centered on the tactile characters, is provided beyond the arc of any door swing between the closed position and 45 degree open position. Follow current ADA guidelines and attain UAO approval for alternate locations if space is not available per this designation. Flush Left Braille with Tactile Text Center Type & Pictogram 0.5" Character Spacing between individual characters shall be 10 percent minimum and 35 percent maximum of character height. Follow current ADA standards. Revised December 4, 2012

300 4.5" " 0.375" 0.75" Helvetica Regular 0.375" White Braille 0.375" 6" wide WOMEN " " Type C3 Sign Sign face to be matte white/black 1/8" thick 2-ply rotary engraveable laminated impact acrylic or similar product. Pictogram is centered in a 6" x 6" area above text and braille. Font for text is Helvetica Regular or Helvetica Neue Regular upper case 3/4" character height. Create 1/32" depth raised tactile lettering and Pictogram using Black ADA Alt Applique. Raised Text should be duplicated below tactile type in White domed or round Braille (Grade 2) per current ADA standards. Note to follow ADA Specifications that Braille shall be separated 3/8" from any other tactile characters, raised elements or borders. The outside edge of sign base is beveled at a 45 degree one half the depth of the laminate. Signage to be mounted with 0.030" thick double face foam tape. Install sign 61" from floor to top of sign. Sign shall be installed on the wall next to the latch side of the door so that a clear floor space of 18" by 18" minimum, centered on the tactile characters, is provided beyond the arc of any door swing between the closed position and 45 degree open position. Follow current ADA guidelines and attain UAO approval for alternate locations if space is not available per this designation. Flush Left Braille with Tactile Text Center Type & Pictogram Character Spacing between individual characters shall be 10 percent minimum and 35 percent maximum of character height. Follow current ADA standards. Revised December 4, 2012

301 Type C4 Sign 4.5" " 0.375" 0.75" Helvetica Regular 0.375" White Braille 0.375" 6" wide WOMEN " " Sign face to be matte white/black 1/8" thick 2-ply rotary engraveable laminated impact acrylic or similar product. Pictogram is centered in a 6" x 6" area above text and braille. Font for text is Helvetica Regular or Helvetica Neue Regular upper case 3/4" character height. Create 1/32" depth raised tactile lettering and Pictogram using Black ADA Alt Applique. Raised Text should be duplicated below tactile type in White domed or round Braille (Grade 2) per current ADA standards. Note to follow ADA Specifications that Braille shall be separated 3/8" from any other tactile characters, raised elements or borders. The outside edge of sign base is beveled at a 45 degree one half the depth of the laminate. Signage to be mounted with 0.030" thick double face foam tape. Install sign 61" from floor to top of sign. Sign shall be installed on the wall next to the latch side of the door so that a clear floor space of 18" by 18" minimum, centered on the tactile characters, is provided beyond the arc of any door swing between the closed position and 45 degree open position. Follow current ADA guidelines and attain UAO approval for alternate locations if space is not available per this designation. Flush Left Braille with Tactile Text Center Type & Pictogram 0.5" Character Spacing between individual characters shall be 10 percent minimum and 35 percent maximum of character height. Follow current ADA standards. Revised December 4, 2012

302 4.5" " 0.375" 0.75" Helvetica Regular 0.375" White Braille 0.375" 6" wide RESTROOM " " Type C5 Sign Sign face to be matte white/black 1/8" thick 2-ply rotary engraveable laminated impact acrylic or similar product. Pictogram is centered in a 6" x 6" area above text and braille. Font for text is Helvetica Regular or Helvetica Neue Regular upper case 3/4" character height. Create 1/32" depth raised tactile lettering and Pictogram using Black ADA Alt Applique. Raised Text should be duplicated below tactile type in White domed or round Braille (Grade 2) per current ADA standards. Note to follow ADA Specifications that Braille shall be separated 3/8" from any other tactile characters, raised elements or borders. The outside edge of sign base is beveled at a 45 degree one half the depth of the laminate. Signage to be mounted with 0.030" thick double face foam tape. Install sign 61" from floor to top of sign. Sign shall be installed on the wall next to the latch side of the door so that a clear floor space of 18" by 18" minimum, centered on the tactile characters, is provided beyond the arc of any door swing between the closed position and 45 degree open position. Follow current ADA guidelines and attain UAO approval for alternate locations if space is not available per this designation. 0.5" Center Type & Pictogram 0.5" Flush Left Braille with Tactile Text Character Spacing between individual characters shall be 10 percent minimum and 35 percent maximum of character height. Follow current ADA standards. Revised December 4, 2012

303 Type C6 Sign 6" wide Sign face to be matte white/black 1/8" thick 2-ply rotary engraveable laminated impact acrylic or similar product. 4.5" 0.5" " 0.375" 0.75" Helvetica Regular 0.375" RESTROOM " White Braille 0.375" Pictogram is centered in a 6" x 6" area above text and braille. Font for text is Helvetica Regular or Helvetica Neue Regular upper case 3/4" character height. Create 1/32" depth raised tactile lettering and Pictogram using Black ADA Alt Applique. Raised Text should be duplicated below tactile type in White domed or round Braille (Grade 2) per current ADA standards. Note to follow ADA Specifications that Braille shall be separated 3/8" from any other tactile characters, raised elements or borders. The outside edge of sign base is beveled at a 45 degree one half the depth of the laminate. Signage to be mounted with 0.030" thick double face foam tape. Install sign 61" from floor to top of sign. Sign shall be installed on the wall next to the latch side of the door so that a clear floor space of 18" by 18" minimum, centered on the tactile characters, is provided beyond the arc of any door swing between the closed position and 45 degree open position. Follow current ADA guidelines and attain UAO approval for alternate locations if space is not available per this designation. 0.5" " Center Type & 0.5" Pictogram 0.5" Flush Left Braille with Tactile Text Character Spacing between individual characters shall be 10 percent minimum and 35 percent maximum of character height. Follow current ADA standards. Revised December 4, 2012

304 0.375" 0.75" Helvetica Regular 0.375" White Braille 0.375" " 0.5" " 0.5" Helvetica Regular 0.5" 006 Character Spacing between individual characters shall be 10 percent minimum and 35 percent maximum of character height. Follow current ADA standards. 12" wide Halls of Residence All Visitors please check-in with Room 137 Type D Sign Sign face to be matte white/black 1/8" thick 2-ply rotary engraveable laminated impact acrylic or similar product. Room number text to be Helvetica Regular or Helvetica Neue Regular upper case 3/4" character height with 1/32" depth raised tactile lettering using Black ADA Alt Applique. Room number text should be duplicated below tactile type in White domed or round Braille (Grade 2) per current ADA standards. Note to follow ADA Specifications that Braille shall be separated 3/8" from any other tactile characters, raised elements or borders. Descriptive text is engraved 1/2" tall Helvetica Regular or Helvetica Neue Regular cap and lower case with a flush left alignment. The outside edge of sign base is beveled at a 45 degree one half the depth of the laminate. Signage to be mounted with 0.030" thick double face foam tape. Install sign 61" from floor to top of sign. Sign shall be installed on the wall next to the latch side of the door so that a clear floor space of 18" by 18" minimum, centered on the tactile characters, is provided beyond the arc of any door swing between the closed position and 45 degree open position. Follow current ADA guidelines and attain UAO approval for alternate locations if space is not available per this designation. Example of descriptive text Revised December 4, 2012

305 Type D1 Sign " 0.5" 0.5" Helvetica Regular " 2.125" 0.5" 12" wide This room may be subject to electronic proctoring. Cameras are not actively monitored at all times. Sign face to be matte white/black 1/8" thick 2-ply rotary engraveable laminated impact acrylic or similar product. Any ADA text will be specified by the University Architect s Office per application. Descriptive text is engraved 1/2" tall Helvetica Regular or Helvetica Neue Regular cap and lower case with a flush left alignment. The outside edge of sign base is beveled at a 45 degree one half the depth of the laminate. Signage to be mounted with 0.030" thick double face foam tape. Install sign 61" from floor to top of sign. Install sign 61" from floor to top of sign. Sign shall be installed on the wall next to the latch side of the door so that a clear floor space of 18" by 18" minimum, centered on the tactile characters, is provided beyond the arc of any door swing between the closed position and 45 degree open position. Follow current ADA guidelines and attain UAO approval for alternate locations if space is not available per this designation.y Example of descriptive text AED Oxygen First Aid Room 127 This sign may also be used as a directional sign when designated by the University Architect s Office. Revised December 4, 2012

306 Type E Sign 0.375" 0.75" Helvetica Regular " 0.375" " 0.375" 0.5" Character Spacing between individual characters shall be 10 percent minimum and 35 percent maximum of character height. Follow current ADA standards. 6" wide 107 White Braille Sign back is 0.125" black acrylic with a header to be.010" thick white polyester laminated to clear 0.060" acrylic with.125" spacer. Base front in window opening must be white. Tackable surface to be self-healing cork, color: desert sand. Contractors outside the University should submit cork sample for approval to the University Architects Office. Room number text mimic the visual representation of Helvetica Regular or Helvetica Neue Regular upper case 3/4" character height. Create 1/32" depth raised tactile lettering using Black ADA Alt Applique. Raised Text should be duplicated below tactile type in White domed or round Braille (Grade 2) per current ADA standards. Note to follow ADA Specifications that Braille shall be separated 3/8" from any other tactile characters, raised elements or borders " " Clear Window 2.125" Opening " Signage to be mounted with 0.030" thick double face foam tape. Install sign 61" from floor to top of sign. Sign shall be installed on the wall next to the latch side of the door so that a clear floor space of 18" by 18" minimum, centered on the tactile characters, is provided beyond the arc of any door swing between the closed position and 45 degree open position. Follow current ADA guidelines and attain UAO approval for alternate locations if space is not available per this designation " Tackable Surface Revised May 9, 2012

307 Type E 1 Sign 0.375" 0.75" Helvetica Regular " 0.375" " 0.375" 0.5" Character Spacing between individual characters shall be 10 percent minimum and 35 percent maximum of character height. Follow current ADA standards. 6" wide White Braille 4.5" Sign back is 0.125" black acrylic with a header to be.010" thick white polyester laminated to clear.060" acrylic with.060" spacer. Face of sign to be white matte except for 1.875" clear window. Base behind window opening must be white. Room number text mimic the visual representation of Helvetica Regular or Helvetica Neue Regular upper case 3/4" character height. Create 1/32" depth raised tactile lettering using Black ADA Alt Applique. Raised Text should be duplicated below tactile type in White domed or round Braille (Grade 2) per current ADA standards. Note to follow ADA Specifications that Braille shall be separated 3/8" from any other tactile characters, raised elements or borders. Signage to be mounted with 0.030" thick double face foam tape or magnetic tape depending on installation location. Install sign 61" from floor to top of sign. Sign shall be installed on the wall next to the latch side of the door so that a clear floor space of 18" by 18" minimum, centered on the tactile characters, is provided beyond the arc of any door swing between the closed position and 45 degree open position. Follow current ADA guidelines and attain UAO approval for alternate locations if space is not available per this designation " Clear Window 2.125" Opening " Revised December 4, 2012

308 8" 0.5" Helvetica Regular 0.375" White Braille 0.375" " 0.5" 0.75" Helvetica Regular 0.375" 12" wide Maximum Occupancy: 36 No Smoking, Food Or Drink 206 Revised December 4, 2012 Example of descriptive text 0.5" Character Spacing between individual characters shall be 10 percent minimum and 35 percent maximum of character height. Follow current ADA standards. Install sign 61" from floor to top of sign. Sign shall be installed on the wall next to the latch side of the door so that a clear floor space of 18" by 18" minimum, centered on the tactile characters, is provided beyond the arc of any door swing between the closed position and 45 degree open position. Follow current ADA guidelines and attain UAO approval for alternate locations if space is not available per this designation. Signage to be mounted with 0.030" thick double face foam tape. The outside edge of sign base is beveled at a 45 degree one half the depth of the laminate. Descriptive text is engraved 1/2" tall Helvetica Regular or Helvetica Neue Regular cap and lower case with a flush left alignment. Room number text should be duplicated below tactile type in White domed or round Braille (Grade 2) per current ADA standards. Note to follow ADA Specifications that Braille shall be separated 3/8" from any other tactile characters, raised elements or borders. Room number text to be Helvetica Regular or Helvetica Neue Regular upper case 3/4" character height with 1/32" depth raised tactile lettering using Black ADA Alt Applique. Sign face to be matte white/black 1/8" thick 2-ply rotary engraveable laminated impact acrylic or similar product. Type F Sign

309 Type G Sign 0.75" Stair Location: 1" Helvetica Regular 85% Condensed 0.375" Upper Terminus: 1" Helvetica Regular 85% Condensed 0.84" Floor Number: 5.00" Helvetica Bold No Condensed type " min. Character Spacing between individual characters shall be 10 percent minimum and 35 percent maximum of character height. Follow current ADA standards. EAST STAIR ROOF ACCESS 11 13" Sign face to be matte white/black 1/8" thick 2-ply rotary engraveable laminated impact acrylic or similar product. All text to be 1/32" depth raised tactile lettering using Black ADA Alt Applique. The outside edge of sign base is beveled at a 45 degree one half the depth of the laminate. Signage to be mounted with 0.030" thick double face foam tape. Mount sign 61 from floor to top of sign on wall facing stairwell when possible. If not possible, then mount sign on wall parallel to stair adjacent to first ascending stair step. Note: all verbiage must be approved by University Architect s Office prior to sign production. Floor Number: 1 Helvetica Regular 85% Condensed 0.375" Lower Terminus: 1" Helvetica Regular 85% Condensed 0.75" ELEVENTH FLOOR LEVEL 11 OF 12 Revised December 4, "

310 2.00" 0.50" 1" Helvetica Roman 0.50" 0.50" Character Spacing between individual characters shall be 10 percent minimum and 35 percent maximum of character height. Follow current ADA standards. 2 pt. thick line 12" wide EXIT: FLOOR 1 EAST STAIR ROOF ACCESS 11 ELEVENTH FLOOR LEVEL 11 OF " 1.36" diameter 0.30" Type G1 Exit Sign Sign face to be matte white/black 1/8" thick 2-ply rotary engraveable laminated impact acrylic or similar product. All text to be Helvetica Regular or Helvetica Neue Regular upper case with 1/32" depth raised tactile lettering using Black ADA Alt Applique. The outside edge of sign base is beveled at a 45 degree one half the depth of the laminate. Install sign 1" below standard Type G sign in stairwell. This sign designates on which floor to exit (ascending or descending) from your current location. Signage to be mounted with 0.030" thick double face foam tape. Note: All verbiage must be approved by University Architect s Office prior to sign production. EXIT: FLOOR 1 Revised December 4, 2012

311 Type H1 Sign 6" Signs shall be.020 matte Lexan with all purpose pressure sensitive adhesive applied to second surface. Sign edges to be straight and free of any imperfections. Corners to be rounded. Finish to be gloss or in the natural condition of the material. 6" Graphic images are to be subsurface applied by the ASP Process onto the vinyl face prior to application of the background color and adhesive. Sign shall be typical of University Standards in size, color and Font. All purpose pressure sensitive adhesive to be applied to entire mounting surface.

312 Type H2 6" Signs shall be.020 matte Lexan with all purpose pressure sensitive adhesive applied to second surface. Sign edges to be straight and free of any imperfections. Corners to be rounded. Finish to be gloss or in the natural condition of the material. 6" Graphic images are to be subsurface applied by the ASP Process onto the vinyl face prior to application of the background color and adhesive. Sign shall be typical of University Standards in size, color and Font. All purpose pressure sensitive adhesive to be applied to entire mounting surface.

313 Type H3 Sign 6" Signs shall be.020 matte Lexan with all purpose pressure sensitive adhesive applied to second surface. Sign edges to be straight and free of any imperfections. Corners to be rounded. Finish to be gloss or in the natural condition of the material. 6" Graphic images are to be subsurface applied by the ASP Process onto the vinyl face prior to application of the background color and adhesive. Sign shall be typical of University Standards in size, color and Font. All purpose pressure sensitive adhesive to be applied to entire mounting surface.

314 Type J Sign 6" Signs shall be.020 matte Lexan with all purpose pressure sensitive adhesive applied to second surface. Sign edges to be straight and free of any imperfections. Corners to be rounded. Finish to be gloss or in the natural condition of the material. 6" Graphic images are to be subsurface applied by the ASP Process onto the vinyl face prior to application of the background color and adhesive. Sign shall be typical of University Standards in size, color and Font. All purpose pressure sensitive adhesive to be applied to entire mounting surface. NO SMOKING

315 2 pt. thick line Type K Sign Sign face to be matte white/black 1/8" thick 2-ply rotary engraveable laminated impact acrylic or similar product. 0.30" 1.36" dia. 0.30" 0.50" RIGHT 14" wide Room " 0.50" 1" Helvetica Roman 0.50" 2.00" All text to be Helvetica Regular or Helvetica Neue Regular upper case with 1/32" depth raised tactile lettering using Black ADA Alt Applique. The outside edge of sign base is beveled at a 45 degree one half the depth of the laminate. Signage to be mounted with 0.030" thick double face foam tape. Mount sign on wall 61" from floor. LEFT FORWARD Revised December 4, 2012

316 Type L Sign Overhead Directional Sign for interior or exterior. Panel size will vary according to amount of copy. Panel thickness is 1". Signage to hang no lower than 80" A.F.F. Copy to be Helvetica Medium, 3" High and centered. Graphics to be Munsell Color #2.5Y 8.5/2, Cream. Background and border color to be Munsell #5R 3/6, Red. VARIES VARIES Material Management Example of directional text

317 5" 3/8" 3/16" 3/16" 3/4" 1/2" 1/2" 5/8" 1/2" 1/2" 1/2" Example Copy: Provide as needed for each elevator 9" Elevator Cab Signage Standard 16 Gauge brushed stainless steel with black fill engraved letters To be mounted with adhesive and tamper proof screws of the same finish Text to be Helvetica Medium, upper and lower case.

318 Site Signage 4-1/2" 9" 9" 9" 9" 9" 4-1/2" 6" 3"MARGIN Indiana University Project Title 4" x 4" Frame with 3/4 Exterior Grade Plywood both sides Diecut Vinyl Text/Graphics to be Munsell Color #2.5Y 8.5/2, Cream on Munsell Color #5R 3/6, Red background 3'-0" 1' 8' MIN. IU Project Number Owner: Trustees of Indiana University Architects/Engineers Design Firm Name Contractors: GRADE Text to be Helvetica Medium, upper and lower case Upper case text 3/4" high General Contractor to furnish and install all text including other prime contractors.

319 Vector Consulting, LLC SECTION PAGE 1 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Steel Pipe Hangers and Supports. 2. Trapeze Pipe Hangers. 3. Metal Framing Systems. 4. Thermal-Hanger Shield Inserts. 5. Fastener Systems. 6. Equipment Supports. B. See Section "Metal Fabrications" for structural-steel shapes and plates for trapeze hangers for pipe and equipment supports. C. See Section "Fire Protection" for fire protection piping. D. See Section "Mechanical Vibration" for vibration isolation devices. E. See Section(s) "Metal Ducts" and "Nonmetal Ducts" for duct hangers and supports. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Terminology: As defined in MSS SP-90, "Guidelines on Terminology for Pipe Hangers and Supports." 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Design supports for multiple pipes capable of supporting combined weight of supported systems, system contents, and test water. B. Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight of supported equipment and connected systems and components. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For the following: 1. Steel pipe hangers and supports. 2. Thermal-hanger shield inserts. 3. Powder-actuated fastener systems. B. Shop Drawings: Signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer. Show fabrication and installation details and include calculations for the following: 10/26/15 ET 109/109A (IU# )

320 Vector Consulting, LLC SECTION PAGE 2 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 1. Trapeze pipe hangers. Include Product Data for components. 2. Metal framing systems. Include Product Data for components. 3. Equipment supports. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, manufacturers specified. 2.2 STEEL PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Description: MSS SP-58, Types 1 through 58, factory-fabricated components. Refer to Part 3 "Hanger and Support Applications" Article for where to use specific hanger and support types. B. Available Manufacturers: 1. B-Line Systems, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries. 2. Grinnell Corp. 3. (Approved equal). C. Furnish hanger rods complete with adjusting and lock nuts. D. Hanger rods shall have electro-plated zinc or hot dip galvanized finish. E. Bolts, Nuts, Studs and Washers shall be electro-plated zinc finish. Comply with ASTM A307. F. Rod attachments shall have galvanized finish. G. U-bolts shall have galvanized finish. H. Nonmetallic Coatings: Plastic coating, jacket, or liner. I. Padded Hangers: Hanger with fiberglass or other pipe insulation pad or cushion for support of bearing surface of piping. 2.3 TRAPEZE PIPE HANGERS A. Description: MSS SP-69, Type 59, shop- or field-fabricated pipe-support assembly made from structural-steel shapes with MSS SP-58 hanger rods, nuts, saddles, and U-bolts. 10/26/15 ET 109/109A (IU# )

321 Vector Consulting, LLC SECTION PAGE 3 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 2.4 METAL FRAMING SYSTEMS A. Description: MFMA-3, shop- or field-fabricated pipe-support assembly made of steel channels and other components. B. Available Manufacturers: 1. B-Line Systems, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries. 2. Unistrut Corp.; Tyco International, Ltd. 3. (Approved equal). C. Coatings: Channels shall have epoxy paint or electro-galvanized finish. D. Channels shall not be lighter than 12 ga. E. Nonmetallic Coatings: Plastic coating, jacket, or liner. 2.5 FASTENER SYSTEMS A. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Threaded-steel stud, for use in hardened portland cement concrete with pullout, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used. 1. Available Manufacturers: a. Hilti, Inc. b. ITW Ramset/Red Head. c. Masterset Fastening Systems, Inc. d. MKT Fastening, LLC. e. Powers Fasteners. B. Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type zinc-coated steel, for use in hardened portland cement concrete with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used. 1. Available Manufacturers: a. B-Line Systems, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries. b. Empire Industries, Inc. c. Hilti, Inc. d. ITW Ramset/Red Head. e. MKT Fastening, LLC. f. Powers Fasteners. 2.6 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Structural Steel: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates, shapes, and bars; primed/painted or galvanized finish. 10/26/15 ET 109/109A (IU# )

322 Vector Consulting, LLC SECTION PAGE 4 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 HANGER AND SUPPORT APPLICATIONS A. Specific hanger and support requirements are specified in Sections specifying piping systems and equipment. B. Comply with MSS SP-69 for pipe hanger selections and applications that are not specified in piping system Sections. C. Use hangers and supports with galvanized, metallic coatings for piping and equipment that will not have field-applied finish. D. Use nonmetallic coatings on attachments for electrolytic protection where attachments are in direct contact with copper tubing. E. Use padded hangers for piping that is subject to scratching. F. Horizontal-Piping Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types: 1. Adjustable, Steel Clevis Hangers (MSS Type 1): For suspension of noninsulated or insulated stationary pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS Yoke-Type Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 2): For suspension of 120 to 450 deg F pipes, NPS 4 to NPS 16, requiring up to 4 inches of insulation. 3. Carbon- or Alloy-Steel, Double-Bolt Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 3): For suspension of pipes, NPS 3/4 to NPS 24, requiring clamp flexibility and up to 4 inches of insulation. 4. Adjustable, Steel Band Hangers (MSS Type 7): For suspension of noninsulated stationary pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS U-Bolts (MSS Type 24): For support of heavy pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS Pipe Saddle Supports (MSS Type 36): For support of pipes, NPS 4 to NPS 36, with steel pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange. 7. Single Pipe Rolls (MSS Type 41): For suspension of pipes, NPS 1 to NPS 30, from 2 rods if longitudinal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur. 8. Complete Pipe Rolls (MSS Type 44): For support of pipes, NPS 2 to NPS 42, if longitudinal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur but vertical adjustment is not necessary. G. Vertical-Piping Clamps: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types: 1. Extension Pipe or Riser Clamps (MSS Type 8): For support of pipe risers, NPS 3/4 to NPS Carbon- or Alloy-Steel Riser Clamps (MSS Type 42): For support of pipe risers, NPS 3/4 to NPS 20, if longer ends are required for riser clamps. H. Hanger-Rod Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types: 1. Steel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 13): For adjustment up to 6 inches for heavy loads. 2. Steel Clevises (MSS Type 14): For 120 to 450 deg F piping installations. 10/26/15 ET 109/109A (IU# )

323 Vector Consulting, LLC SECTION PAGE 5 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT I. Building Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types: 1. Steel or Malleable Concrete Inserts (MSS Type 18): For upper attachment to suspend pipe hangers from concrete ceiling. 2. Top-Beam C-Clamps (MSS Type 19): For use under roof installations with bar-joist construction to attach to top flange of structural shape. 3. Side-Beam or Channel Clamps (MSS Type 20): For attaching to bottom flange of beams, channels, or angles. 4. Center-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 21): For attaching to center of bottom flange of beams. 5. Welded Beam Attachments (MSS Type 22): For attaching to bottom of beams if loads are considerable and rod sizes are large. 6. C-Clamps (MSS Type 23): For structural shapes. 7. Welded-Steel Brackets: For support of pipes from below, or for suspending from above by using clip and rod. Use one of the following for indicated loads: a. Light (MSS Type 31): 750 lb. b. Medium (MSS Type 32): 1500 lb. c. Heavy (MSS Type 33): 3000 lb. 8. Side-Beam Brackets (MSS Type 34): For sides of steel or wooden beams. 9. Plate Lugs (MSS Type 57): For attaching to steel beams if flexibility at beam is required. J. Saddles and Shields: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types: 1. Steel Pipe-Covering Protection Saddles (MSS Type 39): To fill interior voids with insulation that matches adjoining insulation. 2. Protection Shields (MSS Type 40): Of length recommended in writing by manufacturer to prevent crushing insulation. 3. Thermal-Hanger Shield Inserts: For supporting insulated pipe. K. Spring Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types: 1. Spring Cushions (MSS Type 48): For light loads if vertical movement does not exceed 1-1/4 inches. 2. Spring-Cushion Roll Hangers (MSS Type 49): For equipping Type 41 roll hanger with springs. 3. Variable-Spring Base Supports (MSS Type 52): Preset to indicated load and limit variability factor to 25 percent to absorb expansion and contraction of piping system from base support. L. Comply with MSS SP-69 for trapeze pipe hanger selections and applications that are not specified in piping system Sections. M. Comply with MFMA-102 for metal framing system selections and applications that are not specified in piping system Sections. N. Use mechanical-expansion anchors instead of building attachments where required in concrete construction. 10/26/15 ET 109/109A (IU# )

324 Vector Consulting, LLC SECTION PAGE 6 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 3.2 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION A. Steel Pipe Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Install hangers, supports, clamps, and attachments as required to properly support piping from building structure. B. Trapeze Pipe Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of horizontal piping and support together on field-fabricated trapeze pipe hangers. 1. Pipes of Various Sizes: Support together and space trapezes for smallest pipe size or install intermediate supports for smaller diameter pipes as specified above for individual pipe hangers. 2. Field fabricate from ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel shapes selected for loads being supported. Weld steel according to AWS D1.1. C. Metal Framing System Installation: Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of piping and support together on field-assembled metal framing systems. D. Thermal-Hanger Shield Installation: Install in pipe hanger or shield for insulated piping. E. Fastener System Installation: 1. Install powder-actuated fasteners in concrete after concrete is placed and completely cured. Use operators that are licensed by powder-actuated tool manufacturer. Install fasteners according to powder-actuated tool manufacturer's operating manual. 2. Install mechanical-expansion anchors in concrete after concrete is placed and completely cured. Install fasteners according to manufacturer's written instructions. F. Install hangers and supports complete with necessary inserts, bolts, rods, nuts, washers, and other accessories. G. Equipment Support Installation: Fabricate from welded-structural-steel shapes. H. Install hangers and supports to allow controlled thermal and seismic movement of piping systems, to permit freedom of movement between pipe anchors, and to facilitate action of expansion joints, expansion loops, expansion bends, and similar units. I. Install lateral bracing with pipe hangers and supports to prevent swaying. J. Install building attachments within concrete slabs or attach to structural steel. Install additional attachments at concentrated loads, including valves, flanges, and strainers, NPS 2-1/2 and larger and at changes in direction of piping. Install concrete inserts before concrete is placed; fasten inserts to forms and install reinforcing bars through openings at top of inserts. K. Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so piping live and dead loads and stresses from movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment. L. Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes and so maximum pipe deflections allowed by ASME B31.1 (for power piping) and ASME B31.9 (for building services piping) are not exceeded. M. Insulated Piping: Comply with the following: 10/26/15 ET 109/109A (IU# )

325 Vector Consulting, LLC SECTION PAGE 7 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 1. Attach clamps and spacers to piping. a. Piping Operating above Ambient Air Temperature: Clamp may project through insulation. b. Piping Operating below Ambient Air Temperature: Use thermal-hanger shield insert with clamp sized to match OD of insert. c. Do not exceed pipe stress limits according to ASME B31.1 for power piping and ASME B31.9 for building services piping. 2. Install MSS SP-58, Type 39, protection saddles if insulation without vapor barrier is indicated. Fill interior voids with insulation that matches adjoining insulation. 3. Install MSS SP-58, Type 40, protective shields on cold piping with vapor barrier. Shields shall span an arc of 180 degrees. 4. Shield Dimensions for Pipe: Not less than the following: a. NPS 1/4 to NPS 3-1/2: 12 inches long and inch thick. b. NPS 4: 12 inches long and 0.06 inch thick. c. NPS 5 and NPS 6: 18 inches long and 0.06 inch thick. d. NPS 8 to NPS 14: 24 inches long and inch thick. e. NPS 16 to NPS 24: 24 inches long and inch thick. 5. Pipes NPS 8 and Larger: Include wood inserts. 6. Insert Material: Length at least as long as protective shield. 7. Thermal-Hanger Shields: Install with insulation same thickness as piping insulation. 3.3 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS A. Fabricate structural-steel stands to suspend equipment from structure overhead or to support equipment above floor. B. Grouting: Place grout under supports for equipment and make smooth bearing surface. C. Provide lateral bracing, to prevent swaying, for equipment supports. 3.4 ADJUSTING A. Hanger Adjustments: Adjust hangers to distribute loads equally on attachments and to achieve indicated slope of pipe. END OF SECTION /26/15 ET 109/109A (IU# )

326 .

327 Vector Consulting, LLC SECTION PAGE 1 GENERAL-SERVICE COMPRESSED-AIR PIPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes piping and related specialties for general-service compressed-air systems operating at 150 psigor less. B. Air compressor provided by Owner. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For the following: 1. Pressure regulators. Include rated capacities and operating characteristics. 2. Automatic drain valves. 3. Filters. Include rated capacities and operating characteristics. 1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Field quality-control test reports. 1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and maintenance data. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. ASME Compliance: Comply with ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping," for low-pressure compressed-air piping. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PIPES, TUBES, AND FITTINGS A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E or S, Grade B, black with ends threaded according to ASME B Steel Nipples: ASTM A 733, made of ASTM A 53/A 53M or ASTM A 106, Schedule 40, galvanized seamless steel pipe. Include ends matching joining method. 2. Malleable-Iron Fittings: ASME B16.3, Class 150 or 300, threaded. 3. Malleable-Iron Unions: ASME B16.39, Class 150 or 300, threaded. 4. Steel Flanges: ASME B16.5, Class 150 or 300, carbon steel, threaded. 5. Wrought-Steel Butt-Welding Fittings: ASME B16.9, Schedule Steel Flanges: ASME B16.5, Class 150 or 300, carbon steel. 10/26/15 ET 109/109A (IU# )

328 Vector Consulting, LLC SECTION PAGE 2 GENERAL-SERVICE COMPRESSED-AIR PIPING B. Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Type K or Lseamless, drawn-temper, water tube. 1. Wrought-Copper Fittings: ASME B16.22, wrought copper with dimensions for brazed joints. 2. Cast-Copper-Alloy Flanges: ASME B16.24, Class 150 or Copper Unions: ASME B16.22 or MSS SP-123. C. Transition Couplings for Metal Piping: Metal coupling or other manufactured fitting same size as, with pressure rating at least equal to and ends compatible with, piping to be joined. 2.2 JOINING MATERIALS A. Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: Suitable for compressed-air piping system contents. 1. ASME B16.21, nonmetallic, flat, full-face, asbestos free, 1/8-inchmaximum thickness. B. Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel, unless otherwise indicated. C. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8/A5.8M, BCuP Series, copper-phosphorus alloys for general-duty brazing, unless otherwise indicated. 2.3 VALVES A. Metal Ball, Butterfly, Check, and Gate Valves: Comply with requirements in Section "l Valves for Plumbing Piping." 2.4 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS A. General Requirements for Dielectric Fittings: Combination fitting of copper alloy and ferrous materials with insulating material; suitable for system fluid, pressure, and temperature. Include threaded, solderjoint, plain, or weld-neck end connections that match piping system materials. B. Dielectric Unions: Factory-fabricated union assembly, for 250-psig minimum working pressure at 180 deg F. 2.5 SPECIALTIES A. Air-Main Pressure Regulators: Bronze body, pilot-operated direct acting, spring-loaded manual pressuresetting adjustment, and rated for 250-psig inlet pressure, unless otherwise indicated. B. Air-Line Pressure Regulators: Diaphragm or pilot operated, bronze body, direct acting, spring-loaded manual pressure-setting adjustment, and rated for 200-psig minimum inlet pressure, unless otherwise indicated. C. Coalescing Filters: Coalescing type with activated carbon capable of removing water and oil aerosols; with color-change dye to indicate when carbon is saturated and warning light to indicate when selected maximum pressure drop has been exceeded. Include mounting bracket if wall mounting is indicated. D. Mechanical Filters: Two-stage, mechanical-separation-type, air-line filters. Equip with deflector plates, resin-impregnated-ribbon-type filters with edge filtration, and drain cock. Include mounting bracket if wall mounting is indicated. 10/26/15 ET 109/109A (IU# )

329 Vector Consulting, LLC SECTION PAGE 3 GENERAL-SERVICE COMPRESSED-AIR PIPING 2.6 QUICK COUPLINGS A. General Requirements for Quick Couplings: Assembly with locking-mechanism feature for quick connection and disconnection of compressed-air hose. B. Automatic-Shutoff Quick Couplings: Straight-through brass body with O-ring or gasket seal and stainless-steel or nickel-plated-steel operating parts. 1. Socket End: With one-way valve and threaded inlet for connection to piping or threaded hose fitting. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PIPING APPLICATIONS A. Low-Pressure Compressed-Air Distribution Piping: Use one of the following piping materials for each size range: 1. NPS 2 and Smaller: Steel pipe; threaded, malleable-iron fittings; and threaded joints. 2. NPS 2and Smaller: Type K or L, copper tube; wrought-copper fittings; and brazed joints. 3.2 VALVE APPLICATIONS A. Comply with requirements in "Valve Applications" Article in Section Valves for Plumbing Piping." 3.3 PIPING INSTALLATION A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of compressed-air piping. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, air-compressor sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings. B. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited, unless otherwise indicated. C. Install piping adjacent to equipment and machines to allow service and maintenance. D. Install air and drain piping with 1 percent slope downward in direction of flow. E. Install nipples, flanges, unions, transition and special fittings, and valves with pressure ratings same as or higher than system pressure rating, unless otherwise indicated. F. Equipment and Specialty Flanged Connections: 1. Use steel companion flange with gasket for connection to steel pipe. 2. Use cast-copper-alloy companion flange with gasket and brazed joint for connection to copper tube. Do not use soldered joints for connection to air compressors or to equipment or machines producing shock or vibration. G. Install branch connections to compressed-air mains from top of main. Provide drain leg and drain trap at end of each main and branch and at low points. 10/26/15 ET 109/109A (IU# )

330 Vector Consulting, LLC SECTION PAGE 4 GENERAL-SERVICE COMPRESSED-AIR PIPING H. Install piping to permit valve servicing. I. Install piping free of sags and bends. J. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections. K. Install unions, adjacent to each valve and at final connection to each piece of equipment and machine. L. Install sleeves for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. M. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. 3.4 JOINT CONSTRUCTION A. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe. B. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from pipe and fittings before assembly. C. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads. D. Brazed Joints for Copper Tubing: Join according to AWS's "Brazing Handbook," "Pipe and Tube" Chapter. E. Flanged Joints: Use asbestos-free, nonmetallic gasket suitable for compressed air. Join flanges with gasket and bolts according to ASME B31.9 for bolting procedure. F. Dissimilar Metal Piping Material Joints: Use dielectric fittings. 3.5 VALVE INSTALLATION A. General-Duty Valves: Comply with requirements in Section Valves for Plumbing Piping." B. Install shutoff valves and unions or flanged joints at compressed-air piping to air compressors. C. Install check valves to maintain correct direction of compressed-air flow to and from compressed-air piping specialties and equipment. 3.6 DIELECTRIC FITTING INSTALLATION A. Install dielectric unions in piping at connections of dissimilar metal piping and tubing. 3.7 SPECIALTY INSTALLATION A. Install air-main pressure regulators in compressed-air piping at or near air compressors. B. Install air-line pressure regulators in branch piping to equipment. C. Install automatic drain valves on after-coolers, receivers, and dryers. Discharge condensate onto nearest floor drain. 10/26/15 ET 109/109A (IU# )

331 Vector Consulting, LLC SECTION PAGE 5 GENERAL-SERVICE COMPRESSED-AIR PIPING D. Install coalescing filters in compressed-air piping at or near air compressors and upstream from mechanical filters. E. Install mechanical filters in compressed-air piping at or near air compressors and downstream from coalescing filters. F. Install quick couplings at piping terminals for hose connections. 3.8 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION A. Comply with requirements in Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping and Equipment" for seismic-restraint devices. B. Comply with requirements in Section "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment" for pipe hanger and support devices. C. Vertical Piping: MSS Type 8 or 42, clamps. D. Individual, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs: Feet or Less: MSS Type 1, adjustable, steel clevis hangers. 2. Longer Than 100 Feet: MSS Type 43, adjustable roller hangers. E. Multiple, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs 100 Feetor Longer: MSS Type 44, pipe rolls. Support pipe rolls on trapeze. F. Base of Vertical Piping: MSS Type 52, spring hangers. G. Support horizontal piping within 12 inches of each fitting and coupling. H. Rod diameter may be reduced 1 size for double-rod hangers, with 3/8-inchminimum rods. I. Install hangers for Schedule 40, steel piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod diameters: 1. NPS 1/4 to NPS 1/2: 96 inches with 3/8-inch rod. 2. NPS 3/4 to NPS 1-1/4: 84 inches with 3/8-inch rod. 3. NPS 1-1/2: 12 feet with 3/8-inchrod. 4. NPS 2: 13 feet with 3/8-inchrod. J. Install supports for vertical, Schedule 40, steel piping every 15 feet. K. Install hangers for copper tubing with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod diameters: 1. NPS 1/4: 60 inches with 3/8-inchrod. 2. NPS 3/8 and NPS 1/2: 72 inches with 3/8-inch rod. 3. NPS 3/4: 84 inches with 3/8-inch rod. 4. NPS 1: 96 inches with 3/8-inch rod. 5. NPS 1-1/4: 108 inches with 3/8-inch rod. 6. NPS 1-1/2: 10 feet with 3/8-inch rod. 7. NPS 2: 11 feetwith 3/8-inchrod. L. Install supports for vertical copper tubing every 10 feet. 10/26/15 ET 109/109A (IU# )

332 Vector Consulting, LLC SECTION PAGE 6 GENERAL-SERVICE COMPRESSED-AIR PIPING 3.9 LABELING AND IDENTIFICATION A. Install identifying labels and devices for general-service compressed-air piping, valves, and specialties. Comply with requirements in Section "Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment." 3.10 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform field tests and inspections. B. Tests and Inspections: 1. Piping Leak Tests: Test new and modified parts of existing piping. Cap and fill general-service compressed-air piping with oil-free dry air or gaseous nitrogen to pressure of 50 psig above system operating pressure, but not less than 150 psig. Isolate test source and let stand for four hours to equalize temperature. Refill system, if required, to test pressure; hold for two hours with no drop in pressure. 2. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist. 3. Inspect filters and pressure regulators for proper operation. END OF SECTION /26/15 ET 109/109A (IU# )

333 Vector Consulting, LLC SECTION PAGE 1 COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes general requirements for single-phase and polyphase, general-purpose, horizontal, small and medium, squirrel-cage induction motors for use on ac power systems up to 600 V and installed at equipment manufacturer's factory or shipped separately by equipment manufacturer for field installation. 1.2 COORDINATION A. Coordinate features of motors, installed units, and accessory devices to be compatible with the following: 1. Motor controllers. 2. Torque, speed, and horsepower requirements of the load. 3. Ratings and characteristics of supply circuit and required control sequence. 4. Ambient and environmental conditions of installation location. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL MOTOR REQUIREMENTS A. Comply with requirements in this Section except when stricter requirements are specified in HVAC equipment schedules or Sections. B. Comply with NEMA MG 1 unless otherwise indicated. 2.2 MOTOR CHARACTERISTICS A. Duty: Continuous duty at ambient temperature of 105 deg F and at altitude of 3300 feet above sea level. B. Capacity and Torque Characteristics: Sufficient to start, accelerate, and operate connected loads at designated speeds, at installed altitude and environment, with indicated operating sequence, and without exceeding nameplate ratings or considering service factor. 2.3 POLYPHASE MOTORS A. Description: NEMA MG 1, Design B, medium induction motor. B. Efficiency: Premium, as defined in NEMA MG 1. C. Service Factor: D. Rotor: Random-wound, squirrel cage. E. Bearings: Grease lubricated anti-friction ball bearings with housings equipped with plugged provision for relubrication, rated for minimum AFBMA 9, L-10 life of 200,000 hours. Calculate bearing load with NEMA minimum V-belt pulley with belt center line at end of NEMA standard shaft extension. Stamp bearing sizes on nameplate. 10/26/15 ET 109/109A (IU# )

334 Vector Consulting, LLC SECTION PAGE 2 COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT F. Temperature Rise: Match insulation rating. G. Insulation: Class B or better. H. Code Letter Designation: 1. Motors 15 HP and Larger: NEMA starting Code F or Code G. 2. Motors Smaller than 15 HP: Manufacturer's standard starting characteristic. I. Enclosure Material: Cast iron for motor frame sizes 324T and larger; rolled steel for motor frame sizes smaller than 324T. 2.4 POLYPHASE MOTORS WITH ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS A. Motors Used with Variable Frequency Controllers: Ratings, characteristics, and features coordinated with and approved by controller manufacturer. 1. Windings: Copper magnet wire with moisture-resistant insulation varnish, designed and tested to resist transient spikes, high frequencies, and short time rise pulses produced by pulse-width modulated inverters. 2. Inverter-Duty Motors: Class F temperature rise; Class H insulation. 3. Thermal Protection: Comply with NEMA MG 1 requirements for thermally protected motors. 4. Provide shaft grounding ring. B. Motors located outdoors: Totally enclosed, weatherproof, epoxy-sealed type. Epoxy seal windings using vacuum and pressure with rotor and starter surfaces protected with epoxy enamel; bearings double shielded with waterproof non-washing grease; cast termination housing. 2.5 SINGLE-PHASE MOTORS A. Motors larger than 1/20 hp shall be one of the following, to suit starting torque and requirements of specific motor application: 1. Permanent-split capacitor. 2. Split phase. 3. Capacitor start, inductor run. 4. Capacitor start, capacitor run. 5. Electrically commutated motor (ECM). B. Multispeed Motors: Variable-torque, permanent-split-capacitor type or ECM. C. Bearings: Prelubricated, antifriction ball bearings or sleeve bearings suitable for radial and thrust loading. D. Motors 1/20 HP and Smaller: Shaded-pole type. E. Thermal Protection: Internal protection to automatically open power supply circuit to motor when winding temperature exceeds a safe value calibrated to temperature rating of motor insulation. Thermalprotection device shall automatically reset when motor temperature returns to normal range. PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Applicable) END OF SECTION /26/15 ET 109/109A (IU# )

335 Vector Consulting, LLC SECTION PAGE 1 GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Bronze Ball Valves. 2. Iron, Single-Flange Butterfly Valves. 3. Bronze Swing Check Valves. 4. Iron Swing Check Valves. 5. Iron, Center-Guided Check Valves 6. Bronze Gate Valves. 7. Iron Gate Valves. 8. Bronze Globe Valves. 9. Iron Globe Valves. B. Related Sections: 1. Section "Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment" for valve tags and schedules DEFINITIONS A. CWP: Cold working pressure. B. EPDM: Ethylene propylene copolymer rubber. C. NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene, Buna-N, or nitrile rubber. D. NRS: Nonrising stem. E. OS&Y: Outside screw and yoke. F. RS: Rising stem. G. SWP: Steam working pressure ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of valve indicated QUALITY ASSURANCE A. ASME Compliance: 1. ASME B16.10 and ASME B16.34 for ferrous valve dimensions and design criteria. 2. ASME B31.1 for power piping valves. 3. ASME B31.9 for building services piping valves. 10/26/15 ET 109/109A (IU# )

336 Vector Consulting, LLC SECTION PAGE 2 GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Prepare valves for shipping as follows: 1. Protect internal parts against rust and corrosion. 2. Protect threads, flange faces, grooves, and weld ends. 3. Set angle, gate, and globe valves closed to prevent rattling. 4. Block check valves in either closed or open position. B. Use the following precautions during storage: 1. Maintain valve end protection. 2. Store valves indoors and maintain at higher than ambient dew point temperature. If outdoor storage is necessary, store valves off the ground in watertight enclosures. C. Use sling to handle large valves; rig sling to avoid damage to exposed parts. Do not use handwheels or stems as lifting or rigging points. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR VALVES A. Valve Pressure and Temperature Ratings: Not less than indicated and as required for system pressures and temperatures. B. Valve Sizes: Same as upstream piping unless otherwise indicated. C. Valve Actuator Types: 1. Gear Actuator: For quarter-turn valves NPS 8 and larger. 2. Handwheel: For valves other than quarter-turn types. 3. Handlever: For quarter-turn valves NPS 6 and smaller. D. Valves in Insulated Piping: With 2-inch stem extensions and the following features: 1. Gate Valves: With rising stem. 2. Ball Valves: With extended operating handle of non-thermal-conductive material, and protective sleeve that allows operation of valve without breaking the vapor seal or disturbing insulation. 3. Butterfly Valves: With extended neck. E. Valve-End Connections: 1. Flanged: With flanges according to ASME B16.1 for iron valves. 2. Threaded: With threads according to ASME B Solder Joint: With sockets according to ASME B F. Valve Bypass and Drain Connections: MSS SP BRONZE BALL VALVES A. Two-Piece, Regular-Port, Bronze Ball Valves with Bronze Trim: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Conbraco Industries, Inc.; Apollo Valves. b. Crane Co. 10/26/15 ET 109/109A (IU# )

337 Vector Consulting, LLC SECTION PAGE 3 GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING c. Hammond Valve. d. Milwaukee Valve Company. e. NIBCO INC. 2. Description: a. Standard: MSS SP-110. b. SWP Rating: 150 psig (1035 kpa). c. CWP Rating: 600 psig (4140 kpa). d. Body Design: Two piece. e. Body Material: Bronze. f. Ends: Threaded. g. Seats: PTFE or TFE. h. Stem: Bronze. i. Ball: Chrome-plated brass. j. Port: Regular IRON, SINGLE-FLANGE BUTTERFLY VALVES A. 200 CWP, Iron, Single-Flange Butterfly Valves with EPDM Seat and Ductile-Iron Disc: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Bray Controls. b. Conbraco Industries, Inc.; Apollo Valves. c. Crane Co. d. Hammond Valve. e. Milwaukee Valve Company. f. NIBCO INC. 2. Description: a. Standard: MSS SP-67, Type I. b. CWP Rating: 200 psig (1380 kpa). c. Body Design: Lug type; suitable for bidirectional dead-end service at rated pressure without use of downstream flange. d. Body Material: ASTM A 126, cast iron. e. Seat: EPDM. f. Stem: One- or two-piece stainless steel. g. Disc: Nickel-plated or Nylon 11-coated ductile iron BRONZE SWING CHECK VALVES A. Class 125, Bronze Swing Check Valves with Bronze Disc: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Crane Co. b. Hammond Valve. c. Milwaukee Valve Company. d. NIBCO INC. 2. Description: a. Standard: MSS SP-80, Type 3. 10/26/15 ET 109/109A (IU# )

338 Vector Consulting, LLC SECTION PAGE 4 GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING b. CWP Rating: 200 psig. c. Body Design: Horizontal flow. d. Body Material: ASTM B 62, bronze. e. Ends: Threaded. f. Disc: Bronze IRON SWING CHECK VALVES A. Class 125, Iron Swing Check Valves with Metal Seats: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Crane Co. b. Hammond Valve. c. Milwaukee Valve Company. d. NIBCO INC. 2. Description: a. Standard: MSS SP-71, Type I. b. NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 12, CWP Rating: 200 psig. c. NPS 14 to NPS 24, CWP Rating: 150 psig. d. Body Design: Clear or full waterway. e. Body Material: ASTM A 126, gray iron with bolted bonnet. f. Ends: Flanged. g. Trim: Bronze. h. Gasket: Asbestos free IRON, CENTER-GUIDED CHECK VALVES A. Class 125, Iron, Compact-Wafer, Center-Guided Check Valves with Metal Seat: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Hammond Valve. b. Metraflex, Inc. c. Milwaukee Valve Company. d. NIBCO INC. 2. Description: a. Standard: MSS SP-125. b. NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 12 (DN 65 to DN 300), CWP Rating: 200 psig (1380 kpa). c. NPS 14 to NPS 24 (DN 350 to DN 600), CWP Rating: 150 psig (1035 kpa). d. Body Material: ASTM A 126, Class B, cast iron. e. Style: Compact wafer, spring loaded. f. Seat: Buna-N BRONZE GATE VALVES A. Class 125, NRS Bronze Gate Valves: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 10/26/15 ET 109/109A (IU# )

339 Vector Consulting, LLC SECTION PAGE 5 GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING a. Crane Co. b. Hammond Valve. c. Milwaukee Valve Company. d. NIBCO INC. 2. Description: 2.08 IRON GATE VALVES a. Standard: MSS SP-80, Type 1. b. CWP Rating: 200 psig. c. Body Material: ASTM B 62, bronze with integral seat and screw-in bonnet. d. Ends: Threaded. e. Stem: Bronze. f. Disc: Solid wedge; bronze. g. Packing: Asbestos free. h. Handwheel: Malleable iron. A. Class 125, OS&Y, Iron Gate Valves: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Crane Co. b. Hammond Valve. c. Milwaukee Valve Company. d. NIBCO INC. 2. Description: a. Standard: MSS SP-70, Type I. b. NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 12, CWP Rating: 200 psig. c. NPS 14 to NPS 24, CWP Rating: 150 psig. d. Body Material: ASTM A 126, cast iron with bolted bonnet. e. Ends: Flanged. f. Trim: Bronze. g. Disc: Solid wedge. h. Packing and Gasket: Asbestos free BRONZE GLOBE VALVES A. Class 125, Bronze Globe Valves with Bronze Disc: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Crane Co. b. Hammond Valve. c. Milwaukee Valve Company. d. NIBCO INC. 2. Description: a. Standard: MSS SP-80, Type 1. b. CWP Rating: 200 psig. c. Body Material: ASTM B 62, bronze with integral seat and screw-in bonnet. d. Ends: Threaded. 10/26/15 ET 109/109A (IU# )

340 Vector Consulting, LLC SECTION PAGE 6 GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING e. Stem and Disc: Bronze. f. Packing: Asbestos free. g. Handwheel: Malleable iron IRON GLOBE VALVES A. Class 125, Iron Globe Valves: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Crane Co. b. Hammond Valve. c. Milwaukee Valve Company. d. NIBCO INC. 2. Description: PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION a. Standard: MSS SP-85, Type I. b. CWP Rating: 200 psig. c. Body Material: ASTM A 126, cast iron with bolted bonnet. d. Ends: Flanged. e. Trim: Bronze. f. Packing and Gasket: Asbestos free. A. Examine valve interior for cleanliness, freedom from foreign matter, and corrosion. Remove special packing materials, such as blocks, used to prevent disc movement during shipping and handling. B. Operate valves in positions from fully open to fully closed. Examine guides and seats made accessible by such operations. C. Examine threads on valve and mating pipe for form and cleanliness. D. Examine mating flange faces for conditions that might cause leakage. Check bolting for proper size, length, and material. Verify that gasket is of proper size, that its material composition is suitable for service, and that it is free from defects and damage. E. Do not attempt to repair defective valves; replace with new valves VALVE INSTALLATION A. Install valves with unions or flanges at each piece of equipment arranged to allow service, maintenance, and equipment removal without system shutdown. B. Locate valves for easy access and provide separate support where necessary. C. Install valves in horizontal piping with stem at or above center of pipe. D. Install valves in position to allow full stem movement. E. Install check valves for proper direction of flow and as follows: 1. Swing Check Valves: In horizontal position with hinge pin level. 10/26/15 ET 109/109A (IU# )

341 Vector Consulting, LLC SECTION PAGE 7 GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING 3.03 ADJUSTING A. Adjust or replace valve packing after piping systems have been tested and put into service but before final adjusting and balancing. Replace valves if persistent leaking occurs GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR VALVE APPLICATIONS A. If valve applications are not indicated, use the following: 1. Shutoff Service: Ball, butterfly, or gate valves. 2. Butterfly Valve Dead-End Service: Single-flange (lug) type. 3. Throttling Service except Steam: Globe or butterfly valves. 4. Pump-Discharge Check Valves: a. NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Bronze swing check valves with bronze disc. b. NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger: Iron swing check valves with lever and weight or with spring or iron, center-guided, resilient-seat check valves. B. Select valves with the following end connections: 1. For Steel Piping, NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded ends. 2. For Steel Piping, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: Flanged end. 3. For Steel Piping, NPS 5 and Larger: Flanged ends CHILLED-WATER VALVE SCHEDULE A. Pipe NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: 1. Bronze Valves: May be provided with solder-joint ends instead of threaded ends. 2. Ball Valves: Two piece, regular port, bronze with bronze trim. 3. Bronze Swing Check Valves: Class 125, bronze disc. 4. Bronze Gate Valves: Class 125, NRS, bronze. END OF SECTION /26/15 ET 109/109A (IU# )

342 .

343 Vector Consulting, LLC SECTION PAGE 1 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Metal pipe hangers and supports. 2. Trapeze pipe hangers. 3. Thermal-hanger shield inserts. 4. Fastener systems. 5. Equipment supports. 1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Delegated Design: Design trapeze pipe hangers and equipment supports, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated. B. Structural Performance: Hangers and supports for HVAC piping and equipment shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated according to ASCE/SEI Design supports for multiple pipes capable of supporting combined weight of supported systems, system contents, and test water. 2. Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight of supported equipment and connected systems and components. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details and include calculations for the following; include Product Data for components: 1. Trapeze pipe hangers. 2. Equipment supports. C. Welding certificates. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Structural Steel Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel." B. Pipe Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code. 10/26/15 ET 109/109A (IU# )

344 Vector Consulting, LLC SECTION PAGE 2 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 METAL PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Carbon-Steel Pipe Hangers and Supports: 1. Description: MSS SP-58, Types 1 through 58, factory-fabricated components. 2. Galvanized Metallic Coatings: Pregalvanized or hot dipped. 3. Nonmetallic Coatings: Plastic coating, jacket, or liner. 4. Padded Hangers: Hanger with fiberglass or other pipe insulation pad or cushion to support bearing surface of piping. 5. Hanger Rods: Continuous-thread rod, nuts, and washer made of carbon steel. 2.2 TRAPEZE PIPE HANGERS A. Description: MSS SP-69, Type 59, shop- or field-fabricated pipe-support assembly made from structural carbon-steel shapes with MSS SP-58 carbon-steel hanger rods, nuts, saddles, and U-bolts. 2.3 THERMAL-HANGER SHIELD INSERTS A. Insulation-Insert Material for Cold Piping: ASTM C 552, Type II cellular glass with 100-psig or ASTM C 591, Type VI, Grade 1 polyisocyanurate with 125-psig minimum compressive strength and vapor barrier. B. Insulation-Insert Material for Hot Piping: Water-repellent treated, ASTM C 533, Type I calcium silicate with 100-psig ASTM C 552, Type II cellular glass with 100-psig or ASTM C 591, Type VI, Grade 1 polyisocyanurate with 125-psig minimum compressive strength. C. For Trapeze or Clamped Systems: Insert and shield shall cover entire circumference of pipe. D. For Clevis or Band Hangers: Insert and shield shall cover lower 180 degrees of pipe. E. Insert Length: Extend 2 inches beyond sheet metal shield for piping operating below ambient air temperature. 2.4 FASTENER SYSTEMS A. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Threaded-steel stud, for use in hardened portland cement concrete with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used. B. Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type, zinc-coated steel anchors, for use in hardened portland cement concrete; with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used. 2.5 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS A. Description: Welded, shop- or field-fabricated equipment support made from structural carbon-steel shapes. 10/26/15 ET 109/109A (IU# )

345 Vector Consulting, LLC SECTION PAGE 3 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 2.6 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Structural Steel: ASTM A 36/A 36M, carbon-steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and galvanized. B. Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory-mixed and -packaged, dry, hydraulic-cement, nonshrink and nonmetallic grout; suitable for interior and exterior applications. 1. Properties: Nonstaining, noncorrosive, and nongaseous. 2. Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION A. Metal Pipe-Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Install hangers, supports, clamps, and attachments as required to properly support piping from the building structure. B. Metal Trapeze Pipe-Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of horizontal piping, and support together on field-fabricated trapeze pipe hangers. 1. Pipes of Various Sizes: Support together and space trapezes for smallest pipe size or install intermediate supports for smaller diameter pipes as specified for individual pipe hangers. 2. Field fabricate from ASTM A 36/A 36M, carbon-steel shapes selected for loads being supported. Weld steel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M. C. Thermal-Hanger Shield Installation: Install in pipe hanger or shield for insulated piping. D. Fastener System Installation: 1. Install powder-actuated fasteners for use in lightweight concrete or concrete slabs less than 4-inches thick in concrete after concrete is placed and completely cured. Use operators that are licensed by powder-actuated tool manufacturer. Install fasteners according to powder-actuated tool manufacturer's operating manual. 2. Install mechanical-expansion anchors in concrete after concrete is placed and completely cured. Install fasteners according to manufacturer's written instructions. E. Install hangers and supports complete with necessary attachments, inserts, bolts, rods, nuts, washers, and other accessories. F. Equipment Support Installation: Fabricate from welded-structural-steel shapes. G. Install hangers and supports to allow controlled thermal and seismic movement of piping systems, to permit freedom of movement between pipe anchors, and to facilitate action of expansion joints, expansion loops, expansion bends, and similar units. H. Install lateral bracing with pipe hangers and supports to prevent swaying. I. Install building attachments within concrete slabs or attach to structural steel. Install additional attachments at concentrated loads, including valves, flanges, and strainers, NPS 2-1/2 and larger and at changes in direction of piping. Install concrete inserts before concrete is placed; fasten inserts to forms and install reinforcing bars through openings at top of inserts. 10/26/15 ET 109/109A (IU# )

346 Vector Consulting, LLC SECTION PAGE 4 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT J. Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so that piping live and dead loads and stresses from movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment. K. Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes and to not exceed maximum pipe deflections allowed by ASME B31.9 for building services piping. L. Insulated Piping: 1. Attach clamps and spacers to piping: a. Piping Operating above Ambient Air Temperature: Clamp may project through insulation. b. Piping Operating below Ambient Air Temperature: Use thermal-hanger shield insert with clamp sized to match OD of insert. c. Do not exceed pipe stress limits allowed by ASME B31.9 for building services piping. 2. Install MSS SP-58, Type 39, protection saddles if insulation without vapor barrier is indicated. Fill interior voids with insulation that matches adjoining insulation. a. Option: Thermal-hanger shield inserts may be used. Include steel weight-distribution plate for pipe NPS 4 and larger if pipe is installed on rollers. 3. Install MSS SP-58, Type 40, protective shields on cold piping with vapor barrier. Shields shall span an arc of 180 degrees. a. Option: Thermal-hanger shield inserts may be used. Include steel weight-distribution plate for pipe NPS 4 and larger if pipe is installed on rollers. 4. Shield Dimensions for Pipe: Not less than the following: a. NPS 1/4 to NPS 3-1/2: 12-inches long and inch thick. b. NPS 4: 12-inches long and 0.06-inch thick. c. NPS 5 and NPS 6: 18-inches long and 0.06-inch thick. d. NPS 8 to NPS 14: 24-inches long and inch thick. e. NPS 16 to NPS 24: 24-inches long and inch thick. 5. Pipes NPS 8 and Larger: Include wood or reinforced calcium-silicate-insulation inserts of length at least as long as protective shield. 6. Thermal-Hanger Shields: Install with insulation same thickness as piping insulation. 3.2 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS A. Fabricate structural-steel stands to suspend equipment from structure overhead or to support equipment above floor. B. Grouting: Place grout under supports for equipment and make bearing surface smooth. C. Provide lateral bracing, to prevent swaying, for equipment supports. 3.3 METAL FABRICATIONS A. Cut, drill, and fit miscellaneous metal fabrications for trapeze pipe hangers and equipment supports. 10/26/15 ET 109/109A (IU# )

347 Vector Consulting, LLC SECTION PAGE 5 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT B. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. Field weld connections that cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations. C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M procedures for shielded, metal arc welding; appearance and quality of welds; and methods used in correcting welding work; and with the following: 1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. 2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. Finish welds at exposed connections so no roughness shows after finishing and so contours of welded surfaces match adjacent contours. 3.4 ADJUSTING A. Hanger Adjustments: Adjust hangers to distribute loads equally on attachments and to achieve indicated slope of pipe. B. Trim excess length of continuous-thread hanger and support rods to 1-1/2 inches. 3.5 PAINTING A. Touchup: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areas immediately after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop painting. Comply with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up field-painted surfaces. 1. Apply paint by brush or spray to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils. B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A HANGER AND SUPPORT SCHEDULE A. Specific hanger and support requirements are in Sections specifying piping systems and equipment. B. Comply with MSS SP-69 for pipe-hanger selections and applications that are not specified in piping system Sections. C. Use hangers and supports with galvanized metallic coatings for piping and equipment that will not have field-applied finish. D. Use nonmetallic coatings on attachments for electrolytic protection where attachments are in direct contact with copper tubing. E. Use carbon-steel pipe hangers and supports and metal trapeze pipe hangers and attachments for general service applications. F. Use stainless-steel pipe hangers and stainless-steel or corrosion-resistant attachments for hostile environment applications. G. Use copper-plated pipe hangers and copper or stainless-steel attachments for copper piping and tubing. 10/26/15 ET 109/109A (IU# )

348 Vector Consulting, LLC SECTION PAGE 6 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT H. Use padded hangers for piping that is subject to scratching. I. Use thermal-hanger shield inserts for insulated piping and tubing. J. Horizontal-Piping Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types: 1. Adjustable, Steel Clevis Hangers (MSS Type 1): For suspension of noninsulated or insulated, stationary pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS Yoke-Type Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 2): For suspension of up to 1050 deg F, pipes NPS 4 to NPS 24, requiring up to 4 inches of insulation. 3. Carbon- or Alloy-Steel, Double-Bolt Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 3): For suspension of pipes NPS 3/4 to NPS 36, requiring clamp flexibility and up to 4 inches of insulation. 4. Adjustable, Steel Band Hangers (MSS Type 7): For suspension of noninsulated, stationary pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS U-Bolts (MSS Type 24): For support of heavy pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS Pipe Saddle Supports (MSS Type 36): For support of pipes NPS 4 to NPS 36, with steel-pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange or carbon-steel plate. 7. Pipe Stanchion Saddles (MSS Type 37): For support of pipes NPS 4 to NPS 36, with steel-pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange or carbon-steel plate, and with U-bolt to retain pipe. 8. Single-Pipe Rolls (MSS Type 41): For suspension of pipes NPS 1 to NPS 30, from two rods if longitudinal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur. 9. Complete Pipe Rolls (MSS Type 44): For support of pipes NPS 2 to NPS 42 if longitudinal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur but vertical adjustment is not necessary. K. Vertical-Piping Clamps: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in Piping System Sections, install the following types: 1. Extension Pipe or Riser Clamps (MSS Type 8): For support of pipe risers NPS 3/4 to NPS Carbon- or Alloy-Steel Riser Clamps (MSS Type 42): For support of pipe risers NPS 3/4 to NPS 24 if longer ends are required for riser clamps. L. Hanger-Rod Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in Piping System Sections, install the following types: 1. Steel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 13): For adjustment up to 6 inches for heavy loads. 2. Steel Clevises (MSS Type 14): For 120 to 450 deg F piping installations. M. Building Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in Piping System Sections, install the following types: 1. Steel or Malleable Concrete Inserts (MSS Type 18): For upper attachment to suspend pipe hangers from concrete ceiling. 2. Top-Beam C-Clamps (MSS Type 19): For use under roof installations with bar-joist construction, to attach to top flange of structural shape. 3. Side-Beam or Channel Clamps (MSS Type 20): For attaching to bottom flange of beams, channels, or angles. 4. Center-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 21): For attaching to center of bottom flange of beams. 5. Welded Beam Attachments (MSS Type 22): For attaching to bottom of beams if loads are considerable and rod sizes are large. 6. C-Clamps (MSS Type 23): For structural shapes. 7. Welded-Steel Brackets: For support of pipes from below, or for suspending from above by using clip and rod. Use one of the following for indicated loads: 10/26/15 ET 109/109A (IU# )

349 Vector Consulting, LLC SECTION PAGE 7 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT a. Light (MSS Type 31): 750 lb. b. Medium (MSS Type 32): 1500 lb. c. Heavy (MSS Type 33): 3000 lb. 8. Side-Beam Brackets (MSS Type 34): For sides of steel or wooden beams. 9. Plate Lugs (MSS Type 57): For attaching to steel beams if flexibility at beam is required. N. Saddles and Shields: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types: 1. Steel-Pipe-Covering Protection Saddles (MSS Type 39): To fill interior voids with insulation that matches adjoining insulation. 2. Protection Shields (MSS Type 40): Of length recommended in writing by manufacturer to prevent crushing insulation. 3. Thermal-Hanger Shield Inserts: For supporting insulated pipe. O. Spring Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types: 1. Spring Cushions (MSS Type 48): For light loads if vertical movement does not exceed 1-1/4 inches. 2. Spring-Cushion Roll Hangers (MSS Type 49): For equipping Type 41, roll hanger with springs. 3. Variable-Spring Base Supports (MSS Type 52): Preset to indicated load and limit variability factor to 25 percent to allow expansion and contraction of piping system from base support. P. Comply with MSS SP-69 for trapeze pipe-hanger selections and applications that are not specified in piping system Sections. Q. Use powder-actuated fasteners or mechanical-expansion anchors instead of building attachments where required in concrete construction. END OF SECTION /26/15 ET 109/109A (IU# )

350 .

351 Vector Consulting, LLC SECTION PAGE 1 VIBRATION CONTROLS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Elastomeric hangers. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each product indicated. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 VIBRATION ISOLATORS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Amber/Booth Company, Inc. 2. Kinetics Noise Control. 3. Mason Industries. 4. Vibration Mountings & Controls, Inc. 5. Vibration Eliminator. B. Elastomeric Hangers: 1. Elastomeric Mount in a Steel Frame with Upper and Lower Steel Hanger Rods. a. Frame: Steel, fabricated with a connection for an upper threaded hanger rod and an opening on the underside to allow for a maximum of 30 degrees of angular lower hangerrod misalignment without binding or reducing isolation efficiency. b. Dampening Element: Molded, oil-resistant rubber, neoprene, or other elastomeric material with a projecting bushing for the underside opening preventing steel to steel contact. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 VIBRATION-CONTROL DEVICE INSTALLATION A. Install bushing assemblies for anchor bolts for floor-mounted equipment, arranged to provide resilient media between anchor bolt and mounting hole in concrete base. 3.2 HVAC VIBRATION-CONTROL DEVICE SCHEDULE A. Suspended fan coil units: 1. Elastomeric Hangers: a. Material: Neoprene. 10/26/15 ET 109/109A (IU# )

352 Vector Consulting, LLC SECTION PAGE 2 VIBRATION CONTROLS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT END OF SECTION /26/15 ET 109/109A (IU# )

353 Vector Consulting, LLC SECTION PAGE 1 IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Equipment Labels. 2. Pipe Labels. 3. Duct Labels. 1.2 SUBMITTAL A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 EQUIPMENT LABELS A. Plastic Labels for Equipment: 1. Material and Thickness: Multilayer, multicolor, plastic labels for mechanical engraving, 1/16-inch thick, and having predrilled holes for attachment hardware. 2. Letter Color: Black. 3. Background Color: White. 4. Maximum Temperature: Able to withstand temperatures up to 160 deg F. 5. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than 2-1/2 by 3/4 inch. 6. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24 inches, 1/2 inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-fourths the size of principal lettering. 7. Fasteners: Stainless-steel rivets or self-tapping screws. 8. Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate. B. Label Content: Include equipment's Drawing designation or unique equipment number, Drawing numbers where equipment is indicated (plans, details, and schedules), plus the Specification Section number and title where equipment is specified. 2.2 PIPE LABELS A. General Requirements for Manufactured Pipe Labels: Preprinted, color-coded, with lettering indicating service, and showing flow direction. B. Self-Adhesive Pipe Labels: Printed plastic with contact-type, permanent-adhesive backing. C. Pipe Label Contents: Include identification of piping service using same designations or abbreviations as used on Drawings, pipe size, and an arrow indicating flow direction. 1. Flow-Direction Arrows: Integral with piping system service lettering to accommodate both directions, or as separate unit on each pipe label to indicate flow direction. 2. Lettering Size: At least 1-1/2 inches high. 10/26/15 ET 109/109A (IU# )

354 Vector Consulting, LLC SECTION PAGE 2 IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Clean piping and equipment surfaces of substances that could impair bond of identification devices, including dirt, oil, grease, release agents, and incompatible primers, paints, and encapsulants. 3.2 EQUIPMENT LABEL INSTALLATION A. Install or permanently fasten labels on each major item of mechanical equipment. B. Locate equipment labels where accessible and visible. 3.3 PIPE LABEL INSTALLATION A. Piping Color-Coding: Painting of piping is specified in Division 09 Section "Interior Painting." B. Locate pipe labels where piping is exposed or above accessible ceilings in finished spaces; machine rooms; accessible maintenance spaces such as shafts, tunnels, and plenums; and exterior exposed locations as follows: 1. Near each valve and control device. 2. Near each branch connection, excluding short takeoffs for fixtures and terminal units. Where flow pattern is not obvious, mark each pipe at branch. 3. Near penetrations through walls, floors, ceilings, and inaccessible enclosures. 4. At access doors, manholes, and similar access points that permit view of concealed piping. 5. Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination. 6. Spaced at maximum intervals of 50 feet along each run. Reduce intervals to 25 feet in areas of congested piping and equipment. 7. On piping above removable acoustical ceilings. Omit intermediately spaced labels. C. Pipe Label Color Schedule for all piping: a. Background Color: Green. b. Letter Color: White. 3.4 DUCT LABEL INSTALLATION A. Install self-adhesive duct labels with permanent adhesive on air ducts in the following color codes: 1. Blue: For cold-air supply ducts. 2. Yellow: For hot-air supply ducts. 3. Green: For exhaust-, outside-, relief-, return-, and mixed-air ducts. 4. ASME A13.1 Colors and Designs: For hazardous material exhaust. B. Locate labels near points where ducts enter into concealed spaces and at maximum intervals of 50 feet in each space where ducts are exposed or concealed by removable ceiling system. END OF SECTION /26/15 ET 109/109A (IU# )

355 Vector Consulting, LLC SECTION PAGE 1 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Balancing Air Systems: a. Constant-Volume Air Systems. b. Variable-Volume Air Systems. 2. Balancing Hydronic Systems: a. Variable-Flow Hydronic Systems. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. NEBB: National Environmental Balancing Bureau. B. TAB: Testing, adjusting, and balancing. C. TAB Specialist: An entity engaged to perform TAB Work. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Certified TAB reports. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Balancing of the HVAC systems shall be performed by either of the following: 1. Contractor registered in Indiana and a current member of NEBB or AABC with 5 years of experience. 2. Registered professional engineer licensed in Indiana that specializes in the adjusting and balancing of systems specified with a minimum of 10 years documented experience. 3. TABIC Certified Contractor. B. Testing, adjusting, and balancing shall be performed under direct field supervision of a Certified NEBB Supervisor, a Certified AABC Supervisor, Mechanical Engineer, or TABIC Certified Contractor. C. Work shall be performed only by a Contractor which employs Certified Testing and Balancing Technicians. If Contractor cannot meet this criterion, then the following information shall be provided for each technician before contract is awarded: 1. Identify each Technician by name. 2. The Technicians shall have successfully completed testing, adjusting, and balancing classes and shall present for review their certification of training. 3. The Technician's previous work experiences shall not be less than five years. 4. Technician's references (including contact names and phone numbers) from all jobs during the past 12 months shall be presented. 10/26/15 ET 109/109A (IU# )

356 Vector Consulting, LLC SECTION PAGE 2 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 5. No Technician substitutions will be made without prior approval from the owner. D. Instrumentation Type, Quantity, Accuracy, and Calibration: As described in ASHRAE 111, Section 5, "Instrumentation." Instruments shall be in first class state of repair and have been calibrated with a period of six months prior to starting the job. E. Test and Balance Contractor shall not be owned by any of the prime contractors on this project which includes the General, Mechanical, and Electrical contractors, and the Temperature Controls supplier. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine the Contract Documents to become familiar with Project requirements and to discover conditions in systems' designs that may preclude proper TAB of systems and equipment. B. Examine systems for installed balancing devices, such as test ports, gage cocks, thermometer wells, flowcontrol devices, balancing valves and fittings, and manual volume dampers. Verify that locations of these balancing devices are accessible. C. Examine the approved submittals for HVAC systems and equipment. D. Examine design data including HVAC system descriptions, statements of design assumptions for environmental conditions and systems' output, and statements of philosophies and assumptions about HVAC system and equipment controls. E. Examine ceiling plenums and underfloor air plenums used for supply, return, or relief air to verify that they meet the leakage class of connected ducts as specified in Division 23 Section "Metal Ducts" and are properly separated from adjacent areas. Verify that penetrations in plenum walls are sealed and fire-stopped if required. F. Examine equipment performance data including fan and pump curves. 1. Relate performance data to Project conditions and requirements, including system effects that can create undesired or unpredicted conditions that cause reduced capacities in all or part of a system. 2. Calculate system-effect factors to reduce performance ratings of HVAC equipment when installed under conditions different from the conditions used to rate equipment performance. To calculate system effects for air systems, use tables and charts found in AMCA 201, "Fans and Systems," or in SMACNA's "HVAC Systems - Duct Design." Compare results with the design data and installed conditions. G. Examine system and equipment installations and verify that field quality-control testing, cleaning, and adjusting specified in individual Sections have been performed. H. Examine test reports specified in individual system and equipment Sections. I. Examine HVAC equipment and filters and verify that bearings are greased, belts are aligned and tight, and equipment with functioning controls is ready for operation. J. Examine terminal units, such as variable-air-volume boxes, and verify that they are accessible and their controls are connected and functioning. 10/26/15 ET 109/109A (IU# )

357 Vector Consulting, LLC SECTION PAGE 3 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC K. Examine strainers. Verify that startup screens are replaced by permanent screens with indicated perforations. L. Examine three-way valves for proper installation for their intended function of diverting or mixing fluid flows. M. Examine heat-transfer coils for correct piping connections and for clean and straight fins. N. Examine system pumps to ensure absence of entrained air in the suction piping. O. Examine operating safety interlocks and controls on HVAC equipment. P. Report deficiencies discovered before and during performance of TAB procedures. Observe and record system reactions to changes in conditions. Record default set points if different from indicated values. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Prepare a TAB plan that includes strategies and step-by-step procedures. B. Complete system-readiness checks and prepare reports. Verify the following: 1. Permanent electrical-power wiring is complete. 2. Hydronic systems are filled, clean, and free of air. 3. Automatic temperature-control systems are operational. 4. Equipment and duct access doors are securely closed. 5. Balance, smoke, and fire dampers are open. 6. Isolating and balancing valves are open and control valves are operational. 7. Ceilings are installed in critical areas where air-pattern adjustments are required and access to balancing devices is provided. 8. Windows and doors can be closed so indicated conditions for system operations can be met. 3.3 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR TESTING AND BALANCING A. Perform testing and balancing procedures on each system according to the procedures contained in NEBB's "Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of Environmental Systems. 1. Comply with requirements in ASHRAE , Section 7.2.2, "Air Balancing." B. Cut insulation, ducts, pipes, and equipment cabinets for installation of test probes to the minimum extent necessary for TAB procedures. 1. After testing and balancing, patch probe holes in ducts with same material and thickness as used to construct ducts. 2. Install and join new insulation that matches removed materials. Restore insulation, coverings, vapor barrier, and finish according to Division 23 Section "HVAC Insulation." C. Mark equipment and balancing devices, including damper-control positions, valve position indicators, fan-speed-control levers, and similar controls and devices, with paint or other suitable, permanent identification material to show final settings. D. Take and report testing and balancing measurements in inch-pound (IP) units. 10/26/15 ET 109/109A (IU# )

358 Vector Consulting, LLC SECTION PAGE 4 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 3.4 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR BALANCING AIR SYSTEMS A. Prepare test reports for both fans and outlets. Obtain manufacturer's outlet factors and recommended testing procedures. Crosscheck the summation of required outlet volumes with required fan volumes. B. Prepare schematic diagrams of systems' "as-built" duct layouts. C. For variable-air-volume systems, develop a plan to simulate diversity. D. Determine the best locations in main and branch ducts for accurate duct-airflow measurements. E. Check airflow patterns from the outdoor-air louvers and dampers and the return- and exhaust-air dampers through the supply-fan discharge and mixing dampers. F. Locate start-stop and disconnect switches, electrical interlocks, and motor starters. G. Verify that motor starters are equipped with properly sized thermal protection. H. Check dampers for proper position to achieve desired airflow path. I. Check for airflow blockages. J. Check condensate drains for proper connections and functioning. K. Check for proper sealing of air-handling-unit components. L. Verify that air duct system is sealed as specified in Division 23 Section "Metal Ducts." 3.5 PROCEDURES FOR CONSTANT-VOLUME AIR SYSTEMS A. Adjust fans to deliver total indicated airflows within the maximum allowable fan speed listed by fan manufacturer. 1. Measure total airflow: a. Where sufficient space in ducts is unavailable for Pitot-tube traverse measurements, measure airflow at terminal outlets and inlets and calculate the total airflow. 2. Measure fan static pressures as follows to determine actual static pressure: a. Measure outlet static pressure as far downstream from the fan as practical and upstream from restrictions in ducts such as elbows and transitions. b. Measure static pressure directly at the fan outlet or through the flexible connection. c. Measure inlet static pressure of single-inlet fans in the inlet duct as near the fan as possible, upstream from the flexible connection, and downstream from duct restrictions. d. Measure inlet static pressure of double-inlet fans through the wall of the plenum that houses the fan. 3. Measure static pressure across each component that makes up an air-handling unit, rooftop unit, and other air-handling and -treating equipment. a. Report the cleanliness status of filters and the time static pressures are measured. 4. Measure static pressures entering and leaving other devices, such as sound traps, heat-recovery equipment, and air washers, under final balanced conditions. 10/26/15 ET 109/109A (IU# )

359 Vector Consulting, LLC SECTION PAGE 5 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 5. Review Record Documents to determine variations in design static pressures versus actual static pressures. Calculate actual system-effect factors. Recommend adjustments to accommodate actual conditions. 6. Obtain approval from Owner for adjustment of fan speed higher or lower than indicated speed. Comply with requirements in Division 23 Sections for air-handling units for adjustment of fans, belts, and pulley sizes to achieve indicated air-handling-unit performance. 7. Do not make fan-speed adjustments that result in motor overload. Consult equipment manufacturers about fan-speed safety factors. Modulate dampers and measure fan-motor amperage to ensure that no overload will occur. Measure amperage in full-cooling, full-heating, economizer, and any other operating mode to determine the maximum required brake horsepower. B. Adjust volume dampers for main duct, submain ducts, and major branch ducts to indicated airflows within specified tolerances: 1. Measure airflow of submain and branch ducts: a. Where sufficient space in submain and branch ducts is unavailable for Pitot-tube traverse measurements, measure airflow at terminal outlets and inlets and calculate the total airflow for that zone. 2. Measure static pressure at a point downstream from the balancing damper, and adjust volume dampers until the proper static pressure is achieved. 3. Remeasure each submain and branch duct after all have been adjusted. Continue to adjust submain and branch ducts to indicated airflows within specified tolerances. C. Measure air outlets and inlets without making adjustments: 1. Measure terminal outlets using a direct-reading hood or outlet manufacturer's written instructions and calculating factors. D. Adjust air outlets and inlets for each space to indicated airflows within specified tolerances of indicated values. Make adjustments using branch volume dampers rather than extractors and the dampers at air terminals. 1. Adjust each outlet in same room or space to within specified tolerances of indicated quantities without generating noise levels above the limitations prescribed by the Contract Documents. 2. Adjust patterns of adjustable outlets for proper distribution without drafts. 3.6 PROCEDURES FOR VARIABLE-AIR-VOLUME SYSTEMS A. Adjust the variable-air-volume systems as follows: 1. Select the terminal unit that is most critical to the supply-fan airflow. Measure inlet static pressure, and adjust system static pressure control set point so the entering static pressure for the critical terminal unit is not less than the sum of the terminal-unit manufacturer's recommended minimum inlet static pressure plus the static pressure needed to overcome terminal-unit discharge system losses. 2. Calibrate and balance each terminal unit for maximum and minimum design airflow as follows: a. Adjust controls so that terminal is calling for maximum airflow. Some controllers require starting with minimum airflow. Verify calibration procedure for specific project. b. Measure airflow and adjust calibration factor as required for design maximum airflow. Record calibration factor. 10/26/15 ET 109/109A (IU# )

360 Vector Consulting, LLC SECTION PAGE 6 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC c. When maximum airflow is correct, balance the air outlets downstream from terminal units. d. Adjust controls so that terminal is calling for minimum airflow. e. Measure airflow and adjust calibration factor as required for design minimum airflow. Record calibration factor. If no minimum calibration is available, note any deviation from design airflow. f. When in full cooling or full heating, ensure that there is no mixing of hot-deck and colddeck airstreams unless so designed. g. On constant volume terminals, in critical areas where room pressure is to be maintained, verify that the airflow remains constant over the full range of full cooling to full heating. Note any deviation from design airflow or room pressure. 3.7 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR HYDRONIC SYSTEMS A. Prepare test reports with pertinent design data, and number in sequence starting at pump to end of system. Check the sum of branch-circuit flows against the approved pump flow rate. Correct variations that exceed plus or minus 5 percent. B. Prepare schematic diagrams of systems' "as-built" piping layouts. C. Prepare hydronic systems for testing and balancing according to the following, in addition to the general preparation procedures specified above: 1. Open all manual valves for maximum flow. 2. Check liquid level in expansion tank. 3. Check makeup water-station pressure gage for adequate pressure for highest vent. 4. Check flow-control valves for specified sequence of operation, and set at indicated flow. 5. Set differential-pressure control valves at the specified differential pressure. Do not set at fully closed position when pump is positive-displacement type unless several terminal valves are kept open. 6. Set system controls so automatic valves are wide open to heat exchangers. 7. Check pump-motor load. If motor is overloaded, throttle main flow-balancing device so motor nameplate rating is not exceeded. 8. Check air vents for a forceful liquid flow exiting from vents when manually operated. 3.8 PROCEDURES FOR VARIABLE-FLOW HYDRONIC SYSTEMS A. Balance systems with automatic two- and three-way control valves by setting systems at maximum flow through heat-exchange terminals and proceed as specified above for hydronic systems. 3.9 PROCEDURES FOR HEAT-TRANSFER COILS A. Measure, adjust, and record the following data for each water coil: 1. Entering- and leaving-water temperature. 2. Water flow rate. 3. Water pressure drop. 4. Dry-bulb temperature of entering and leaving air. 5. Airflow. 6. Air pressure drop. 10/26/15 ET 109/109A (IU# )

361 Vector Consulting, LLC SECTION PAGE 7 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 3.10 TOLERANCES A. Set HVAC system's air flow rates and water flow rates within the following tolerances: 1. Supply Fans: Plus or minus 10 percent. 2. Air Outlets and Inlets: Plus or minus 10 percent. 3. Cooling-Water Flow Rate: Plus or minus 10 percent REPORTING A. Initial Construction-Phase Report: Based on examination of the Contract Documents as specified in "Examination" Article, prepare a report on the adequacy of design for systems' balancing devices. Recommend changes and additions to systems' balancing devices to facilitate proper performance measuring and balancing. Recommend changes and additions to HVAC systems and general construction to allow access for performance measuring and balancing devices FINAL REPORT A. General: Prepare a certified written report; tabulate and divide the report into separate sections for tested systems and balanced systems. 1. Include a certification sheet at the front of the report's binder, signed and sealed by the certified testing and balancing engineer. 2. Include a list of instruments used for procedures, along with proof of calibration. B. Final Report Contents: In addition to certified field-report data, include the following: 1. Field test reports prepared by system and equipment installers. 2. Other information relative to equipment performance; do not include Shop Drawings and product data. C. General Report Data: In addition to form titles and entries, include the following data: 1. Title page. 2. Name and address of the TAB contractor. 3. Project name. 4. Project location. 5. Architect's name and address. 6. Engineer's name and address. 7. Contractor's name and address. 8. Report date. 9. Signature of TAB supervisor who certifies the report. 10. Table of Contents with the total number of pages defined for each section of the report. Number each page in the report. 11. Summary of contents including the following: a. Indicated versus final performance. b. Notable characteristics of systems. c. Description of system operation sequence if it varies from the Contract Documents. 12. Nomenclature sheets for each item of equipment. 13. Data for terminal units, including manufacturer's name, type, size, and fittings. 14. Notes to explain why certain final data in the body of reports vary from indicated values. 10/26/15 ET 109/109A (IU# )

362 Vector Consulting, LLC SECTION PAGE 8 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 15. Test conditions for fan performance forms including the following: a. Settings for outdoor-, return-, and exhaust-air dampers. b. Conditions of filters. c. Cooling coil, wet- and dry-bulb conditions. d. Fan drive settings including settings and percentage of maximum pitch diameter. e. Other system operating conditions that affect performance. END OF SECTION /26/15 ET 109/109A (IU# )

363 Vector Consulting, LLC SECTION PAGE 1 DUCT INSULATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes insulating the following duct services: 1. Indoor, concealed supply, outdoor air and exhaust air. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 23 Section "HVAC Piping Insulation." 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include thermal conductivity, water-vapor permeance thickness, and jackets (both factory- and field-applied if any). B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 1. Detail application of protective shields, saddles, and inserts at hangers for each type of insulation and hanger. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Packaging: Insulation material containers shall be marked by manufacturer with appropriate ASTM standard designation, type and grade, and maximum use temperature. 1.5 COORDINATION A. Coordinate sizes and locations of supports, hangers, and insulation shields specified in Division 23 Section "Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment." B. Coordinate clearance requirements with duct Installer for duct insulation application. Before preparing ductwork Shop Drawings, establish and maintain clearance requirements for installation of insulation and field-applied jackets and finishes and for space required for maintenance. 1.6 SCHEDULING A. Schedule insulation application after pressure testing systems. Insulation application may begin on segments that have satisfactory test results. 10/26/15 ET 109/109A (IU# )

364 Vector Consulting, LLC SECTION PAGE 2 DUCT INSULATION PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 INSULATION MATERIALS A. Comply with requirements in "Duct Insulation Schedule, General," "Indoor Duct and Plenum Insulation Schedule," and "Aboveground, Outdoor Duct and Plenum Insulation Schedule" articles for where insulating materials shall be applied. B. Products shall not contain asbestos, lead, mercury, or mercury compounds. C. Products that come in contact with stainless steel shall have a leachable chloride content of less than 50 ppm when tested according to ASTM C 871. D. Insulation materials for use on austenitic stainless steel shall be qualified as acceptable according to ASTM C 795. E. Foam insulation materials shall not use CFC or HCFC blowing agents in the manufacturing process. F. Mineral-Fiber Blanket Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C 553, Type II and ASTM C 1290, Type III with factory-applied FSK jacket. Factoryapplied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. CertainTeed Corp.; SoftTouch Duct Wrap. b. Johns Manville; Microlite. c. Knauf Insulation; Friendly Feel Duct Wrap. d. Manson Insulation Inc.; Alley Wrap. e. Owens Corning; SOFTR All-Service Duct Wrap. 2.2 ADHESIVES A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates and for bonding insulation to itself and to surfaces to be insulated unless otherwise indicated. B. Mineral-Fiber Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Childers Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller Company; CP-127. b. Eagle Bridges - Marathon Industries; 225. c. Foster Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller Company; 85-60/ d. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; For indoor applications, adhesive shall have a VOC content of 80 g/l or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). C. ASJ Adhesive, and FSK Jacket Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A for bonding insulation jacket lap seams and joints. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: 10/26/15 ET 109/109A (IU# )

365 Vector Consulting, LLC SECTION PAGE 3 DUCT INSULATION a. Childers Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller Company; CP-82. b. Eagle Bridges - Marathon Industries; 225. c. Foster Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller Company; d. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; For indoor applications, adhesive shall have a VOC content of 50 g/l or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). 2.3 MASTICS A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates; comply with MIL-PRF-19565C, Type II. 1. For indoor applications, use mastics that have a VOC content of 50 g/l or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). B. Vapor-Barrier Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor use on below ambient services. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Foster Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller Company; 30-80/ b. Vimasco Corporation; Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM E 96/E 96M, Procedure B, perm at 43-mil dry film thickness. 3. Service Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 180 deg F. 4. Solids Content: ASTM D 1644, 58 percent by volume and 70 percent by weight. 5. Color: White. 2.4 LAGGING ADHESIVES A. Description: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class I, Grade A and shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates. 1. For indoor applications, use lagging adhesives that have a VOC content of 50 g/l or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). 2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Childers Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller Company; CP-50 AHV2. b. Foster Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller Company; c. Vimasco Corporation; 713 and Fire-resistant, water-based lagging adhesive and coating for use indoors to adhere fire-resistant lagging cloths over duct insulation. 4. Service Temperature Range: 0 to plus 180 deg F. 5. Color: White. 10/26/15 ET 109/109A (IU# )

366 Vector Consulting, LLC SECTION PAGE 4 DUCT INSULATION 2.5 SEALANTS A. FSK and Metal Jacket Flashing Sealants: 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Childers Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller Company; CP-76. b. Eagle Bridges - Marathon Industries; 405. c. Foster Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller Company; d. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates. 3. Fire- and water-resistant, flexible, elastomeric sealant. 4. Service Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 250 deg F. 5. Color: Aluminum. 6. For indoor applications, sealants shall have a VOC content of 420 g/l or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). 2.6 FACTORY-APPLIED JACKETS A. Insulation system schedules indicate factory-applied jackets on various applications. When factoryapplied jackets are indicated, comply with the following: 1. FSK Jacket: Aluminum-foil, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with kraft-paper backing; complying with ASTM C 1136, Type II. 2.7 TAPES A. Aluminum-Foil Tape: Vapor-retarder tape with acrylic adhesive. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. ABI, Ideal Tape Division; 488 AWF. b. Avery Dennison Corporation, Specialty Tapes Division; Fasson c. Compac Corporation; 120. d. Venture Tape; 3520 CW. 2. Width: 2 inches. 3. Thickness: 3.7 mils. 4. Adhesion: 100 ounces force/inch in width. 5. Elongation: 5 percent. 6. Tensile Strength: 34 lbf/inch in width. 2.8 SECUREMENTS A. Bands: 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. ITW Insulation Systems; Gerrard Strapping and Seals. b. RPR Products, Inc.; Insul-Mate Strapping, Seals, and Springs. 10/26/15 ET 109/109A (IU# )

367 Vector Consulting, LLC SECTION PAGE 5 DUCT INSULATION 2. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 167 or ASTM A 240/A 240M, Type 304 or Type 316; inch thick, 1/2 inch wide with wing seal or closed seal. 3. Aluminum: ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003, 3005, 3105, or 5005; Temper H-14, inch thick, 1/2 inch wide with wing seal or closed seal. B. Insulation Pins and Hangers: 1. Capacitor-Discharge-Weld Pins: Copper- or zinc-coated steel pin, fully annealed for capacitordischarge welding, inch-diameter shank, length to suit depth of insulation indicated. a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: 1) AGM Industries, Inc.; CWP-1. 2) GEMCO; CD. 3) Midwest Fasteners, Inc.; CD. 4) Nelson Stud Welding; TPA, TPC, and TPS. 2. Cupped-Head, Capacitor-Discharge-Weld Pins: Copper- or zinc-coated steel pin, fully annealed for capacitor-discharge welding, inch-diameter shank, length to suit depth of insulation indicated with integral 1-1/2-inch galvanized carbon-steel washer. a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: 1) AGM Industries, Inc.; CHP-1. 2) GEMCO; Cupped Head Weld Pin. 3) Midwest Fasteners, Inc.; Cupped Head. 4) Nelson Stud Welding; CHP. 3. Metal, Adhesively Attached, Perforated-Base Insulation Hangers: Baseplate welded to projecting spindle that is capable of holding insulation, of thickness indicated, securely in position indicated when self-locking washer is in place. Comply with the following requirements: a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: 1) AGM Industries, Inc.; Tactoo Perforated Base Insul-Hangers. 2) GEMCO; Perforated Base. 3) Midwest Fasteners, Inc.; Spindle. b. Baseplate: Perforated, galvanized carbon-steel sheet, inch thick by 2 inches square. c. Spindle: Copper- or zinc-coated, low-carbon steel, fully annealed, inch-diameter shank, length to suit depth of insulation indicated. d. Adhesive: Recommended by hanger manufacturer. Product with demonstrated capability to bond insulation hanger securely to substrates indicated without damaging insulation, hangers, and substrates. 4. Insulation-Retaining Washers: Self-locking washers formed from inch-thick, aluminum sheet, with beveled edge sized as required to hold insulation securely in place but not less than 1-1/2 inches in diameter. a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: 1) AGM Industries, Inc.; RC ) GEMCO; R ) Midwest Fasteners, Inc.; WA ) Nelson Stud Welding; Speed Clips. 10/26/15 ET 109/109A (IU# )

368 Vector Consulting, LLC SECTION PAGE 6 DUCT INSULATION b. Protect ends with capped self-locking washers incorporating a spring steel insert to ensure permanent retention of cap in exposed locations. 5. Nonmetal Insulation-Retaining Washers: Self-locking washers formed from inch-thick nylon sheet, with beveled edge sized as required to hold insulation securely in place but not less than 1-1/2 inches in diameter. a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1) GEMCO. 2) Midwest Fasteners, Inc. C. Staples: Outward-clinching insulation staples, nominal 3/4-inch-wide, stainless steel or Monel. D. Wire: inch soft-annealed, stainless steel. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. C & F Wire. 2.9 CORNER ANGLES A. Aluminum Corner Angles: inch thick, minimum 1-by-1 inch, aluminum according to ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003, 3005, 3105, or 5005; Temper H-14. B. Stainless-Steel Corner Angles: inch thick, minimum 1-by-1 inch, stainless steel according to ASTM A 167 or ASTM A 240/A 240M, Type 304 or Type 316. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of insulation application. 1. Verify that systems to be insulated have been tested and are free of defects. 2. Verify that surfaces to be insulated are clean and dry. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Surface Preparation: Clean and dry surfaces to receive insulation. Remove materials that will adversely affect insulation application. 3.3 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A. Install insulation materials, accessories, and finishes with smooth, straight, and even surfaces; free of voids throughout the length of ducts and fittings. 10/26/15 ET 109/109A (IU# )

369 Vector Consulting, LLC SECTION PAGE 7 DUCT INSULATION B. Install insulation materials, vapor barriers or retarders, jackets, and thicknesses required for each item of duct system as specified in insulation system schedules. C. Install accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the service. Install accessories that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jacket in either wet or dry state. D. Install insulation with longitudinal seams at top and bottom of horizontal runs. E. Install multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams staggered. F. Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing. G. Install insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints with adhesive recommended by insulation material manufacturer. H. Install insulation with least number of joints practical. I. Where vapor barrier is indicated, seal joints, seams, and penetrations in insulation at hangers, supports, anchors, and other projections with vapor-barrier mastic. 1. Install insulation continuously through hangers and around anchor attachments. 2. For insulation application where vapor barriers are indicated, extend insulation on anchor legs from point of attachment to supported item to point of attachment to structure. Taper and seal ends at attachment to structure with vapor-barrier mastic. 3. Install insert materials and install insulation to tightly join the insert. Seal insulation to insulation inserts with adhesive or sealing compound recommended by insulation material manufacturer. J. Apply adhesives, mastics, and sealants at manufacturer's recommended coverage rate and wet and dry film thicknesses. K. Install insulation with factory-applied jackets as follows: 1. Draw jacket tight and smooth. 2. Cover circumferential joints with 3-inch-wide strips, of same material as insulation jacket. Secure strips with adhesive and outward clinching staples along both edges of strip, spaced 4 inches o.c. 3. Overlap jacket longitudinal seams at least 1-1/2 inches. Clean and dry surface to receive selfsealing lap. Staple laps with outward clinching staples along edge at 4 inches o.c. a. For below ambient services, apply vapor-barrier mastic over staples. 4. Cover joints and seams with tape, according to insulation material manufacturer's written instructions, to maintain vapor seal. 5. Where vapor barriers are indicated, apply vapor-barrier mastic on seams and joints and at ends adjacent to duct flanges and fittings. L. Cut insulation in a manner to avoid compressing insulation more than 75 percent of its nominal thickness. M. Finish installation with systems at operating conditions. Repair joint separations and cracking due to thermal movement. N. Repair damaged insulation facings by applying same facing material over damaged areas. Extend patches at least 4 inches beyond damaged areas. Adhere, staple, and seal patches similar to butt joints. 10/26/15 ET 109/109A (IU# )

370 Vector Consulting, LLC SECTION PAGE 8 DUCT INSULATION 3.4 PENETRATIONS A. Insulation Installation at Roof Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through roof penetrations. 1. Seal penetrations with flashing sealant. 2. For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation above roof surface and seal with joint sealant. For applications requiring indoor and outdoor insulation, install insulation for outdoor applications tightly joined to indoor insulation ends. Seal joint with joint sealant. 3. Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside roof flashing at least 2 inches below top of roof flashing. 4. Seal jacket to roof flashing with flashing sealant. B. Insulation Installation at Aboveground Exterior Wall Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through wall penetrations. 1. Seal penetrations with flashing sealant. 2. For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation inside wall surface and seal with joint sealant. For applications requiring indoor and outdoor insulation, install insulation for outdoor applications tightly joined to indoor insulation ends. Seal joint with joint sealant. 3. Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside wall flashing and overlap wall flashing at least 2 inches. 4. Seal jacket to wall flashing with flashing sealant. C. Insulation Installation at Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations (That Are Not Fire Rated): Install insulation continuously through walls and partitions. D. Insulation Installation at Fire-Rated Wall and Partition Penetrations: Terminate insulation at fire damper sleeves for fire-rated wall and partition penetrations. Externally insulate damper sleeves to match adjacent insulation and overlap duct insulation at least 2 inches. 1. Comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping" for firestopping and fire-resistive joint sealers. E. Insulation Installation at Floor Penetrations: 1. Duct: For penetrations through fire-rated assemblies, terminate insulation at fire damper sleeves and externally insulate damper sleeve beyond floor to match adjacent duct insulation. Overlap damper sleeve and duct insulation at least 2 inches. 2. Seal penetrations through fire-rated assemblies. Comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping." 3.5 INSTALLATION OF MINERAL-FIBER INSULATION A. Blanket Insulation Installation on Ducts and Plenums: Secure with adhesive and insulation pins. 1. Apply adhesives according to manufacturer's recommended coverage rates per unit area. 2. Apply adhesive to entire circumference of ducts and to all surfaces of fittings and transitions. 3. Install either capacitor-discharge-weld pins and speed washers or cupped-head, capacitordischarge-weld pins on sides and bottom of horizontal ducts and sides of vertical ducts as follows: a. On duct sides with dimensions 18 inches and smaller, place pins along longitudinal centerline of duct. Space 3 inches maximum from insulation end joints, and 16 inches o.c. b. On duct sides with dimensions larger than 18 inches, place pins 16 inches o.c. each way, and 3 inches maximum from insulation joints. Install additional pins to hold insulation tightly against surface at cross bracing. 10/26/15 ET 109/109A (IU# )

371 Vector Consulting, LLC SECTION PAGE 9 DUCT INSULATION c. Pins may be omitted from top surface of horizontal, rectangular ducts and plenums. d. Do not overcompress insulation during installation. e. Impale insulation over pins and attach speed washers. f. Cut excess portion of pins extending beyond speed washers or bend parallel with insulation surface. Cover exposed pins and washers with tape matching insulation facing. 4. For ducts and plenums with surface temperatures below ambient, install a continuous unbroken vapor barrier. Create a facing lap for longitudinal seams and end joints with insulation by removing 2 inches from one edge and one end of insulation segment. Secure laps to adjacent insulation section with 1/2-inch outward-clinching staples, 1 inch o.c. Install vapor barrier consisting of factory- or field-applied jacket, adhesive, vapor-barrier mastic, and sealant at joints, seams, and protrusions. a. Repair punctures, tears, and penetrations with tape or mastic to maintain vapor-barrier seal. b. Install vapor stops for ductwork and plenums operating below 50 deg F at 18-foot intervals. Vapor stops shall consist of vapor-barrier mastic applied in a Z-shaped pattern over insulation face, along butt end of insulation, and over the surface. Cover insulation face and surface to be insulated a width equal to two times the insulation thickness, but not less than 3 inches. 5. Overlap unfaced blankets a minimum of 2 inches on longitudinal seams and end joints. At end joints, secure with steel bands spaced a maximum of 18 inches o.c. 6. Install insulation on rectangular duct elbows and transitions with a full insulation section for each surface. Install insulation on round and flat-oval duct elbows with individually mitered gores cut to fit the elbow. 7. Insulate duct stiffeners, hangers, and flanges that protrude beyond insulation surface with 6-inch wide strips of same material used to insulate duct. Secure on alternating sides of stiffener, hanger, and flange with pins spaced 6 inches o.c. 3.6 FIELD-APPLIED JACKET INSTALLATION A. Where FSK jackets are indicated, install as follows: 1. Draw jacket material smooth and tight. 2. Install lap or joint strips with same material as jacket. 3. Secure jacket to insulation with manufacturer's recommended adhesive. 4. Install jacket with 1-1/2-inch laps at longitudinal seams and 3-inch-wide joint strips at end joints. 5. Seal openings, punctures, and breaks in vapor-retarder jackets and exposed insulation with vaporbarrier mastic. 3.7 DUCT INSULATION SCHEDULE, GENERAL A. Plenums and Ducts Requiring Insulation: 1. Indoor, supply air. 2. Indoor, mixed air. 3. Indoor, outdoor air. B. Items Not Insulated: 1. Fibrous-glass ducts. 2. Metal ducts with duct liner of sufficient thickness to comply with energy code and ASHRAE/IESNA /26/15 ET 109/109A (IU# )

372 Vector Consulting, LLC SECTION PAGE 10 DUCT INSULATION 3. Factory-insulated flexible ducts. 4. Factory-insulated plenums and casings. 5. Flexible connectors. 6. Vibration-control devices. 7. Factory-insulated access panels and doors. 3.8 INDOOR DUCT AND PLENUM INSULATION SCHEDULE A. Supply-air and mixed-air duct insulation shall be the following: 1. Mineral-Fiber Blanket: 1-1/2 inches thick and 0.75-lb/cu. ft. nominal density with factory-applied FSK jacket. B. Outdoor-air duct insulation shall be the following: 1. Mineral-Fiber Blanket: 2 inches thick and 0.75-lb/cu. ft. nominal density with factory-applied FSK jacket. END OF SECTION /26/15 ET 109/109A (IU# )

373 Vector Consulting, LLC SECTION PAGE 1 HVAC PIPING INSULATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes insulating the following HVAC piping systems: 1. Condensate drain piping, indoors. 2. Chilled-water piping, indoors. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 23 Section "Duct Insulation." 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include thermal conductivity, water-vapor permeance thickness, and jackets (both factory and field applied if any). 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Packaging: Insulation material containers shall be marked by manufacturer with appropriate ASTM standard designation, type and grade, and maximum use temperature. 1.5 COORDINATION A. Coordinate sizes and locations of supports, hangers, and insulation shields specified in Division 23 Section "Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment." B. Coordinate clearance requirements with piping Installer for piping insulation application. Before preparing piping Shop Drawings, establish and maintain clearance requirements for installation of insulation and field-applied jackets and finishes and for space required for maintenance. 1.6 SCHEDULING A. Schedule insulation application after pressure testing systems. Insulation application may begin on segments that have satisfactory test results. B. Complete installation and concealment of plastic materials as rapidly as possible in each area of construction. 10/26/15 ET 109/109A (IU# )

374 Vector Consulting, LLC SECTION PAGE 2 HVAC PIPING INSULATION PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 INSULATION MATERIALS A. Comply with requirements in "Piping Insulation Schedule, General," "Indoor Piping Insulation Schedule," "Outdoor, Aboveground Piping Insulation Schedule," and "Outdoor, Underground Piping Insulation Schedule" articles for where insulating materials shall be applied. B. Products shall not contain asbestos, lead, mercury, or mercury compounds. C. Products that come in contact with stainless steel shall have a leachable chloride content of less than 50 ppm when tested according to ASTM C 871. D. Insulation materials for use on austenitic stainless steel shall be qualified as acceptable according to ASTM C 795. E. Foam insulation materials shall not use CFC or HCFC blowing agents in the manufacturing process. F. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation: 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Fibrex Insulations Inc.; Coreplus b. Johns Manville; Micro-Lok. c. Knauf Insulation; 1000-Degree Pipe Insulation. d. Manson Insulation Inc.; Alley-K. e. Owens Corning; Fiberglas Pipe Insulation. 2. Type I, 850 deg F Materials: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C 547, Type I, Grade A, with factory-applied ASJ. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article. 2.2 INSULATING CEMENTS A. Mineral-Fiber Insulating Cement: Comply with ASTM C Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Ramco Insulation, Inc.; Super-Stik. 2.3 ADHESIVES A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates and for bonding insulation to itself and to surfaces to be insulated unless otherwise indicated. B. Mineral-Fiber Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Childers Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller Company; CP-127. b. Eagle Bridges - Marathon Industries; /26/15 ET 109/109A (IU# )

375 Vector Consulting, LLC SECTION PAGE 3 HVAC PIPING INSULATION c. Foster Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller Company; 85-60/ d. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; For indoor applications, adhesive shall have a VOC content of 80 g/l or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). C. ASJ Adhesive, and FSK and PVDC Jacket Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A for bonding insulation jacket lap seams and joints. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Childers Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller Company; CP-82. b. Eagle Bridges - Marathon Industries; 225. c. Foster Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller Company; d. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; For indoor applications, adhesive shall have a VOC content of 50 g/l or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). 2.4 MASTICS A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates; comply with MIL-PRF-19565C, Type II. 1. For indoor applications, use mastics that have a VOC content of 50 g/l or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). B. Vapor-Barrier Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor use on below-ambient services. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Foster Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller Company; 30-80/ b. Vimasco Corporation; Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM E 96/E 96M, Procedure B, perm at 43-mil dry film thickness. 3. Service Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 180 deg F. 4. Solids Content: ASTM D 1644, 58 percent by volume and 70 percent by weight. 5. Color: White. 2.5 LAGGING ADHESIVES A. Description: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class I, Grade A and shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates. 1. For indoor applications, use lagging adhesives that have a VOC content of 50 g/l or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). 2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Childers Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller Company; CP-50 AHV2. 10/26/15 ET 109/109A (IU# )

376 Vector Consulting, LLC SECTION PAGE 4 HVAC PIPING INSULATION b. Foster Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller Company; c. Vimasco Corporation; 713 and Fire-resistant, water-based lagging adhesive and coating for use indoors to adhere fire-resistant lagging cloths over pipe insulation. 4. Service Temperature Range: 0 to plus 180 deg F. 5. Color: White. 2.6 SEALANTS A. ASJ Flashing Sealants, and Vinyl, PVDC, and PVC Jacket Flashing Sealants: 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Childers Brand, Specialty Construction Brands, Inc., a business of H. B. Fuller Company; CP Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates. 3. Fire- and water-resistant, flexible, elastomeric sealant. 4. Service Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 250 deg F. 5. Color: White. 6. For indoor applications, sealants shall have a VOC content of 420 g/l or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). 2.7 FACTORY-APPLIED JACKETS A. Insulation system schedules indicate factory-applied jackets on various applications. When factoryapplied jackets are indicated, comply with the following: 1. ASJ: White, kraft-paper, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with aluminum-foil backing; complying with ASTM C 1136, Type I. 2. ASJ-SSL: ASJ with self-sealing, pressure-sensitive, acrylic-based adhesive covered by a removable protective strip; complying with ASTM C 1136, Type I. 3. FSK Jacket: Aluminum-foil, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with kraft-paper backing; complying with ASTM C 1136, Type II. 4. FSP Jacket: Aluminum-foil, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with polyethylene backing; complying with ASTM C 1136, Type II. 2.8 TAPES A. ASJ Tape: White vapor-retarder tape matching factory-applied jacket with acrylic adhesive, complying with ASTM C Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. ABI, Ideal Tape Division; 428 AWF ASJ. b. Avery Dennison Corporation, Specialty Tapes Division; Fasson c. Compac Corporation; 104 and 105. d. Venture Tape; 1540 CW Plus, 1542 CW Plus, and 1542 CW Plus/SQ. 2. Width: 3 inches. 3. Thickness: 11.5 mils. 10/26/15 ET 109/109A (IU# )

377 Vector Consulting, LLC SECTION PAGE 5 HVAC PIPING INSULATION 4. Adhesion: 90 ounces force/inch in width. 5. Elongation: 2 percent. 6. Tensile Strength: 40 lbf/inch in width. 7. ASJ Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of ASJ tape. 2.9 SECUREMENTS A. Bands: 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. ITW Insulation Systems; Gerrard Strapping and Seals. b. RPR Products, Inc.; Insul-Mate Strapping, Seals, and Springs. 2. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 167 or ASTM A 240/A 240M, Type 304 or Type 316; inch thick, 1/2-inch wide with wing seal or closed seal. 3. Aluminum: ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003, 3005, 3105, or 5005; Temper H-14, inch thick, 1/2-inch wide with wing seal or closed seal. B. Staples: Outward-clinching insulation staples, nominal 3/4-inch wide, stainless steel or Monel. C. Wire: inch soft-annealed, stainless steel. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. C & F Wire. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of insulation application. 1. Verify that systems to be insulated have been tested and are free of defects. 2. Verify that surfaces to be insulated are clean and dry. 3. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Surface Preparation: Clean and dry surfaces to receive insulation. Remove materials that will adversely affect insulation application. 3.3 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A. Install insulation materials, accessories, and finishes with smooth, straight, and even surfaces; free of voids throughout the length of piping including fittings, valves, and specialties. B. Install insulation materials, forms, vapor barriers or retarders, jackets, and thicknesses required for each item of pipe system as specified in insulation system schedules. 10/26/15 ET 109/109A (IU# )

378 Vector Consulting, LLC SECTION PAGE 6 HVAC PIPING INSULATION C. Install accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the service. Install accessories that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jacket in either wet or dry state. D. Install insulation with longitudinal seams at top and bottom of horizontal runs. E. Install multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams staggered. F. Do not weld brackets, clips, or other attachment devices to piping, fittings, and specialties. G. Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing. H. Install insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints with adhesive recommended by insulation material manufacturer. I. Install insulation with least number of joints practical. J. Where vapor barrier is indicated, seal joints, seams, and penetrations in insulation at hangers, supports, anchors, and other projections with vapor-barrier mastic. 1. Install insulation continuously through hangers and around anchor attachments. 2. For insulation application where vapor barriers are indicated, extend insulation on anchor legs from point of attachment to supported item to point of attachment to structure. Taper and seal ends at attachment to structure with vapor-barrier mastic. 3. Install insert materials and install insulation to tightly join the insert. Seal insulation to insulation inserts with adhesive or sealing compound recommended by insulation material manufacturer. 4. Cover inserts with jacket material matching adjacent pipe insulation. Install shields over jacket, arranged to protect jacket from tear or puncture by hanger, support, and shield. K. Apply adhesives, mastics, and sealants at manufacturer's recommended coverage rate and wet and dry film thicknesses. L. Install insulation with factory-applied jackets as follows: 1. Draw jacket tight and smooth. 2. Cover circumferential joints with 3-inch-wide strips, of same material as insulation jacket. Secure strips with adhesive and outward clinching staples along both edges of strip, spaced 4 inches o.c. 3. Overlap jacket longitudinal seams at least 1-1/2 inches. Install insulation with longitudinal seams at bottom of pipe. Clean and dry surface to receive self-sealing lap. Staple laps with outward clinching staples along edge at 4 inches o.c. a. For below-ambient services, apply vapor-barrier mastic over staples. 4. Cover joints and seams with tape, according to insulation material manufacturer's written instructions, to maintain vapor seal. 5. Where vapor barriers are indicated, apply vapor-barrier mastic on seams and joints and at ends adjacent to pipe flanges and fittings. M. Cut insulation in a manner to avoid compressing insulation more than 75 percent of its nominal thickness. N. Finish installation with systems at operating conditions. Repair joint separations and cracking due to thermal movement. O. Repair damaged insulation facings by applying same facing material over damaged areas. Extend patches at least 4 inches beyond damaged areas. Adhere, staple, and seal patches similar to butt joints. 10/26/15 ET 109/109A (IU# )

379 Vector Consulting, LLC SECTION PAGE 7 HVAC PIPING INSULATION P. For above-ambient services, do not install insulation to the following: 1. Vibration-control devices. 2. Testing agency labels and stamps. 3. Nameplates and data plates. 4. Manholes. 5. Handholes. 6. Cleanouts. 3.4 PENETRATIONS A. Insulation Installation at Roof Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through roof penetrations. 1. Seal penetrations with flashing sealant. 2. For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation above roof surface and seal with joint sealant. For applications requiring indoor and outdoor insulation, install insulation for outdoor applications tightly joined to indoor insulation ends. Seal joint with joint sealant. 3. Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside roof flashing at least 2 inches below top of roof flashing. 4. Seal jacket to roof flashing with flashing sealant. B. Insulation Installation at Underground Exterior Wall Penetrations: Terminate insulation flush with sleeve seal. Seal terminations with flashing sealant. C. Insulation Installation at Aboveground Exterior Wall Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through wall penetrations. 1. Seal penetrations with flashing sealant. 2. For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation inside wall surface and seal with joint sealant. For applications requiring indoor and outdoor insulation, install insulation for outdoor applications tightly joined to indoor insulation ends. Seal joint with joint sealant. 3. Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside wall flashing and overlap wall flashing at least 2 inches. 4. Seal jacket to wall flashing with flashing sealant. D. Insulation Installation at Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations (That Are Not Fire Rated): Install insulation continuously through walls and partitions. E. Insulation Installation at Fire-Rated Wall and Partition Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through penetrations of fire-rated walls and partitions. 1. Comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping" for firestopping and fire-resistive joint sealers. F. Insulation Installation at Floor Penetrations: 1. Pipe: Install insulation continuously through floor penetrations. 2. Seal penetrations through fire-rated assemblies. Comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping." 3.5 GENERAL PIPE INSULATION INSTALLATION A. Requirements in this article generally apply to all insulation materials except where more specific requirements are specified in various pipe insulation material installation articles. 10/26/15 ET 109/109A (IU# )

380 Vector Consulting, LLC SECTION PAGE 8 HVAC PIPING INSULATION B. Insulation Installation on Fittings, Valves, Strainers, Flanges, and Unions: 1. Install insulation over fittings, valves, strainers, flanges, unions, and other specialties with continuous thermal and vapor-retarder integrity unless otherwise indicated. 2. Insulate pipe elbows using preformed fitting insulation or mitered fittings made from same material and density as adjacent pipe insulation. Each piece shall be butted tightly against adjoining piece and bonded with adhesive. Fill joints, seams, voids, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement finished to a smooth, hard, and uniform contour that is uniform with adjoining pipe insulation. 3. Insulate tee fittings with preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same material and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Cut sectional pipe insulation to fit. Butt each section closely to the next and hold in place with tie wire. Bond pieces with adhesive. 4. Insulate valves using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same material, density, and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker. For valves, insulate up to and including the bonnets, valve stuffing-box studs, bolts, and nuts. Fill joints, seams, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement. 5. Insulate strainers using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same material, density, and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker. Fill joints, seams, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement. Insulate strainers so strainer basket flange or plug can be easily removed and replaced without damaging the insulation and jacket. Provide a removable reusable insulation cover. For below-ambient services, provide a design that maintains vapor barrier. 6. Insulate flanges and unions using a section of oversized preformed pipe insulation. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker. 7. Cover segmented insulated surfaces with a layer of finishing cement and coat with a mastic. Install vapor-barrier mastic for below-ambient services and a breather mastic for above-ambient services. Reinforce the mastic with fabric-reinforcing mesh. Trowel the mastic to a smooth and well-shaped contour. 8. For services not specified to receive a field-applied jacket except for flexible elastomeric and polyolefin, install fitted PVC cover over elbows, tees, strainers, valves, flanges, and unions. Terminate ends with PVC end caps. Tape PVC covers to adjoining insulation facing using PVC tape. 9. Stencil or label the outside insulation jacket of each union with the word "union." Match size and color of pipe labels. C. Insulate instrument connections for thermometers, pressure gages, pressure temperature taps, test connections, flow meters, sensors, switches, and transmitters on insulated pipes. Shape insulation at these connections by tapering it to and around the connection with insulating cement and finish with finishing cement, mastic, and flashing sealant. D. Install removable insulation covers at locations indicated. Installation shall conform to the following: 1. Make removable flange and union insulation from sectional pipe insulation of same thickness as that on adjoining pipe. Install same insulation jacket as adjoining pipe insulation. 2. When flange and union covers are made from sectional pipe insulation, extend insulation from flanges or union long at least two times the insulation thickness over adjacent pipe insulation on each side of flange or union. Secure flange cover in place with stainless-steel or aluminum bands. Select band material compatible with insulation and jacket. 3. Construct removable valve insulation covers in same manner as for flanges, except divide the two-part section on the vertical center line of valve body. 4. When covers are made from block insulation, make two halves, each consisting of mitered blocks wired to stainless-steel fabric. Secure this wire frame, with its attached insulation, to flanges with tie wire. Extend insulation at least 2 inches over adjacent pipe insulation on each side of valve. Fill space between flange or union cover and pipe insulation with insulating cement. 10/26/15 ET 109/109A (IU# )

381 Vector Consulting, LLC SECTION PAGE 9 HVAC PIPING INSULATION Finish cover assembly with insulating cement applied in two coats. After first coat is dry, apply and trowel second coat to a smooth finish. 5. Unless a PVC jacket is indicated in field-applied jacket schedules, finish exposed surfaces with a metal jacket. 3.6 INSTALLATION OF MINERAL-FIBER INSULATION A. Insulation Installation on Straight Pipes and Tubes: 1. Secure each layer of preformed pipe insulation to pipe with wire or bands and tighten bands without deforming insulation materials. 2. Where vapor barriers are indicated, seal longitudinal seams, end joints, and protrusions with vapor-barrier mastic and joint sealant. 3. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on above-ambient surfaces, secure laps with outwardclinched staples at 6 inches o.c. 4. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on below-ambient surfaces, do not staple longitudinal tabs. Instead, secure tabs with additional adhesive as recommended by insulation material manufacturer and seal with vapor-barrier mastic and flashing sealant. B. Insulation Installation on Pipe Flanges: 1. Install preformed pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange. 2. Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and bolts, plus twice the thickness of pipe insulation. 3. Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference of adjacent straight pipe segments with mineral-fiber blanket insulation. 4. Install jacket material with manufacturer's recommended adhesive, overlap seams at least 1 inch, and seal joints with flashing sealant. C. Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows: 1. Install preformed sections of same material as straight segments of pipe insulation when available. 2. When preformed insulation elbows and fittings are not available, install mitered sections of pipe insulation, to a thickness equal to adjoining pipe insulation. Secure insulation materials with wire or bands. D. Insulation Installation on Valves and Pipe Specialties: 1. Install preformed sections of same material as straight segments of pipe insulation when available. 2. When preformed sections are not available, install mitered sections of pipe insulation to valve body. 3. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without disturbing insulation. 4. Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application. 3.7 PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE, GENERAL A. Acceptable preformed pipe and tubular insulation materials and thicknesses are identified for each piping system and pipe size range. If more than one material is listed for a piping system, selection from materials listed is Contractor's option. 10/26/15 ET 109/109A (IU# )

382 Vector Consulting, LLC SECTION PAGE 10 HVAC PIPING INSULATION 3.8 INDOOR PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE A. Condensate and Equipment Drain Water below 60 Deg F: 1. All Pipe Sizes: Insulation shall be the following: B. Chilled Water: a. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation, Type I: 1/2-inch thick with factory-applied ASJ. 1. NPS 2 and Smaller: Insulation shall be the following: a. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe, Type I: 1-inch thick with factory-applied ASJ. END OF SECTION /26/15 ET 109/109A (IU# )

383 Vector Consulting, LLC SECTION PAGE 1 HVAC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL INFORMATION A. The Mechanical Contractor will directly purchase all of the required control components as described in the bid documents from Johnson Controls. The Mechanical Contractor will contract directly with the Control Installation Contractor (CIC) to install the temperature controls. The CIC shall install the controls per the direction of JCI. B. During the bidding process, the Control Installation Contractor (CIC) shall address all questions relative to the controls installation, attention Tom Kelley with JCI. C. The CIC shall furnish, install, and terminate all necessary wiring, conduit, junction boxes, hangers, and any other installation components not specifically called out by the documents but required for complete installation and operation of the temperature controls to achieve university standards and the design intent. All controls to be installed and adjusted by trained mechanics in the full time employ of the CIC. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section Testing, Adjusting and Balancing. B. Division 26 - Electrical Work. C. Standard Specifications and Codes: In addition to the requirements shown or specified, comply with the following applicable standard specifications, codes or ordinances. 1. NFPA - National Fire Protection Association. 2. UL - Underwriter s Laboratories. 3. IMC - Indiana Mechanical Code. 4. Rules and Regulations of the Indiana Department of Fire Prevention and Safety. 5. University Standards. D. Include all items of labor and material required to comply with such standards, codes or ordinances in accordance with the contract documents. Where quantities, sizes, or other requirements indicated on the drawings or herein specified are in excess of the standard or code requirements, the specification and drawings shall govern. 1.3 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Sequence work to ensure installation of components is complimentary to installation of similar components in other systems. B. Coordinate work with other Contractors and subcontractors to ensure system is completed and commissioned by the Date of Substantial Completion. C. Coordinate installation of system components with installation of mechanical systems equipment such as air handling units and air terminal units. 10/26/15 ET 109/109A (IU# )

384 Vector Consulting, LLC SECTION PAGE 2 HVAC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS PART 2 - QUALIFICATION 2.1 CIC CONTRACTOR QUALIFICATIONS A. Licensed contractor with at least ten years of working experience in the installation of Building Automation Systems. B. Demonstrated specific experience shall include cabling systems and pathways of electrical and telecommunications systems. C. Demonstrated expertise in the installation functional checkout, point to point, verification, calibration, troubleshooting and startup of Building Automation Systems. D. In addition to the technical capabilities described herein, demonstrate a production capability to plan, control and integrate manpower and other resources necessary for successful contract completion. E. CIC shall have received installation training from the selected Controls Supplier (Johnson Control or Siemens Building Technology). F. CIC shall be listed on the bid form on bid day by the General Contractor (unified bid) or the Mechanical Contractor (multiple prime bid). G. CIC shall have at least five years documented experience in the installation of commercial DDC controls. Indiana University may ask to verify the qualifications and experience for all field installation technicians assigned to the project prior to the approval of the Controls Installation Contractor. H. CIC shall submit a statement acknowledging agreement with the applicable design guideline covering the installation of controls. Those design guidelines are found at: 1. I. CIC shall attend a one hour familiarization session immediately following the project preconstruction meeting. 2.2 CONDUIT A. Adhere to current NEC and Local Codes. B. Control conduits will be considered secondary to other trades and must heed right of way when there are conflicts. C. All control wiring conduit is EMT, 3/4" minimum size, and shall be installed in a craftsman like manner, parallel to the building structure. All connections, fittings, supports, etc. shall be tight and secure. 1. Mechanical areas: All wiring in conduit EMT. 2. Space sensors: All wiring in conduit in wall construction EMT. 3. Accessible ceilings: Plenum rated cable bundled neatly, run, and mechanically attached to and parallel with the building structure. Use of existing cable tray is acceptable with prior approval. 4. Non-accessible ceilings: All wiring in conduit EMT. 5. Shaft spaces: All wiring in conduit EMT, 1" minimum size. 6. Pass through building structure walls in plenum above ceiling spaces shall utilize a sleeve of EMT conduit, 12" in length, with end steel compression box end fittings or plastic/rubber grommets and fire stopped if the wall is fire rated. 7. Flexible metal conduit (FMC) may be utilized when approved in instances where sensors are to be located in existing walls. 10/26/15 ET 109/109A (IU# )

385 Vector Consulting, LLC SECTION PAGE 3 HVAC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS D. All EMT connections shall utilize steel compression fittings up to 1-1/2" conduit. Above 1-1/2" may utilize steel set screw fittings. 1. All non-terminated, non-connected, open ends of conduit must utilize either a plastic/rubber grommet or box connector. E. All conduits shall be supported directly from or to structural members. Additional support shall be provided at junction and pull boxes. 1. Conduits shall be supported by trapeze hangers or pipe straps and shall have their support spaced not to exceed 10' on center, or a minimum of one support per piece of conduit. With approval, it is acceptable to use other electrical trapeze. 2. All junction boxes must have a minimum of two anchors per box. Boxes larger than 8" x 8" shall have a minimum of four anchors per box. 3. All conduits shall be run as close to the ceiling if possible. Make all conduit drops at point of connection. Do not run conduit across walls below 8' in mechanical spaces. 4. Conduits serving air handler units shall be run either along the top of the unit along unit structural members or above the unit supported by U-channel. Drops for devices shall be run on the structural members of each unit, and shall not cross or attach to the panels. Conduit must be seismically isolated from the structure via FMC/LFMC. 5. All boxes shall utilize all normally provided mechanical fasteners to secure their covers. 6. All conduits and junction box covers shall be labeled "Temperature Controls" with a minimum of 1/2" lettering. Labels shall be placed on every box cover, every 20' on center and within 6" on each side of each wall or structural penetration. 7. A maximum of 20" of FMC may be used to connect any control device to a junction box. Use FMC to isolate all components that have the potential for vibration. 8. FMC must be secured with an appropriate sized FMC one hole clamp if used inside equipment, such as air handling units. 9. Liquid tight FMC must be utilized on all final connections in moist/damp locations and in all locations exposed to the weather. 10. Power and low voltage wiring shall not be run in the same conduit. 11. Electrical wiring shall not be run in the same conduit with poly tubing. 12. Where more than one panel is mounted together, utilize square duct wire way, 4" x 4" minimum, to connect all panels. Provide one extra 1" EMT conduit from each panel to square duct wire way for future expansion. 2.3 LOW VOLTAGE CABLE A. Adhere to current NEC and local codes. B. Splicing of cables is not permitted. All connections shall be point to point. 1. If splicing is completely unavoidable, utilize an appropriately sized junction box with terminal blocks to make the connections. Wire nuts are not acceptable. C. Johnson Controls: 1. The following wiring shall be used: Metasys Application Sensor Wiring Terminal Unit Valves & Actuators Communication 24v Power Trunk Cable 2C #18 Twisted/Shielded Plenum 3C #18 Twisted/Shielded Plenum 3C #18 Twisted/Shielded Plenum 2C #14 Twisted/Shielded Plenum 10/26/15 ET 109/109A (IU# )

386 Vector Consulting, LLC SECTION PAGE 4 HVAC INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS 2.4 LINE VOLTAGE CABLE A. All 120VAC wiring shall be minimum solid copper, 12 THHN, 600-volt insulation. B. Panel 120VAC power circuit shall be dedicated for building automation system components only. Power shall be run from emergency circuit panels, if emergency power is available in the building. Confirm responsibility for panel 120VAC. C. External control devices powered via 120VAC from the control panel shall utilize a knife switch, of fuse switch to isolate those devices from the power to the controller. The switch shall be installed in the control panel in such a way as to allow power to be easily disconnected from each control device individually without removing power to the panel completely. 2.5 WALL SENSOR DETAIL A. See plans for wall sensor installation detail. PART 3 - TESTING 3.1 ON-SITE TESTING A. Provide Owner-approved operation and acceptance testing of the complete system. The following shall witness the performance test: 1. The Controls Installation Contractor. 2. The Controls Vendor (JCI). 3. The Owner. 4. Consulting Engineer. B. Field Test: When installation of the system is complete, all systems shall be tested to their sequence of operation including all safety circuits. END OF SECTION /26/15 ET 109/109A (IU# )

387 Vector Consulting, LLC SECTION PAGE 1 HYDRONIC PIPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes pipe and fitting materials, joining methods, special-duty valves, and specialties for the following: 1. Chilled-water piping. 2. Condensate drain piping. B. See Division 23 Section "Hydronic Pumps" for pumps, motors, and accessories for hydronic piping. 1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Hydronic piping components and installation shall be capable of withstanding the following minimum working pressure and temperature: 1. Chilled-Water Piping: 125 psig at 150 deg F. 2. Condensate Drain Piping: 150 deg F. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of the following: 1. Valves. Include flow and pressure drop curves based on manufacturer's testing for calibratedorifice balancing valves and automatic flow-control valves. 2. Air control devices. 3. Chemical treatment. 4. Hydronic specialties. B. Operation and maintenance data. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. ASME Compliance: Comply with ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping," for materials, products, and installation. Safety valves and pressure vessels shall bear the appropriate ASME label. Fabricate and stamp air separators and expansion tanks to comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII, Division 1. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS A. Drawn-Temper Copper Tubing: ASTM B 88, Type L. B. Annealed-Temper Copper Tubing: ASTM B 88, Type K. C. DWV Copper Tubing: ASTM B 306, Type DWV. 10/26/15 ET 109/109A (IU# )

388 Vector Consulting, LLC SECTION PAGE 2 HYDRONIC PIPING D. Wrought-Copper Fittings: ASME B Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Anvil International, Inc. b. Victaulic Company of America. c. Approved equal. E. Wrought-Copper Unions: ASME B JOINING MATERIALS A. Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: Suitable for chemical and thermal conditions of piping system contents. 1. ASME B16.21, nonmetallic, flat, asbestos free, 1/8-inch maximum thickness unless thickness or specific material is indicated. a. Full-Face Type: For flat-face, Class 125, cast-iron and cast-bronze flanges. b. Narrow-Face Type: For raised-face, Class 250, cast-iron and steel flanges. B. Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel, unless otherwise indicated. C. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloys. Include water-flushable flux according to ASTM B 813. D. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8, BCuP Series, copper-phosphorus alloys for joining copper with copper; or BAg-1, silver alloy for joining copper with bronze or steel. E. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12/D10.12M for welding materials appropriate for wall thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded. F. Gasket Material: Thickness, material, and type suitable for fluid to be handled and working temperatures and pressures. 2.3 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS A. Description: Combination fitting of copper-alloy and ferrous materials with threaded, solder-joint, plain, or weld-neck end connections that match piping system materials. B. Insulating Material: Suitable for system fluid, pressure, and temperature. C. Dielectric Unions: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Capitol Manufacturing Company. b. Central Plastics Company. c. Hart Industries International, Inc. d. Watts Regulator Co.; a division of Watts Water Technologies, Inc. e. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; AquaSpec Commercial Products Division. 10/26/15 ET 109/109A (IU# )

389 Vector Consulting, LLC SECTION PAGE 3 HYDRONIC PIPING 3. Factory-fabricated union assembly, for 250-psig minimum working pressure at 180 deg F. D. Dielectric Couplings: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Calpico, Inc. b. Lochinvar Corporation. 3. Galvanized-steel coupling with inert and noncorrosive thermoplastic lining; threaded ends; and 300-psig minimum working pressure at 225 deg F. 2.4 VALVES A. Gate, Globe, Check, Ball, and Butterfly Valves: Comply with requirements specified in Division 15 Section "Valves." 2.5 AIR CONTROL DEVICES A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Amtrol, Inc. 2. Armstrong Pumps, Inc. 3. Bell & Gossett Domestic Pump; a division of ITT Industries. 4. Taco. B. Manual Air Vents: 1. Body: Bronze. 2. Internal Parts: Nonferrous. 3. Operator: Screwdriver or thumbscrew. 4. Inlet Connection: NPS 1/2. 5. Discharge Connection: NPS 1/8. 6. CWP Rating: 150 psig. 7. Maximum Operating Temperature: 225 deg F. C. Automatic Air Vents: 1. Body: Bronze or cast iron. 2. Internal Parts: Nonferrous. 3. Operator: Noncorrosive metal float. 4. Inlet Connection: NPS 1/2. 5. Discharge Connection: NPS 1/4. 6. CWP Rating: 150 psig. 7. Maximum Operating Temperature: 240 deg F. 10/26/15 ET 109/109A (IU# )

390 Vector Consulting, LLC SECTION PAGE 4 HYDRONIC PIPING 2.6 HYDRONIC PIPING SPECIALTIES A. Y-Pattern Strainers: 1. Body: ASTM A 126, Class B, cast iron with bolted cover and bottom drain connection. 2. End Connections: Threaded ends for NPS 2 and smaller; flanged ends for NPS 2-1/2 and larger. 3. Strainer Screen: 60-mesh startup strainer, and perforated stainless-steel basket with 50 percent free area. 4. CWP Rating: 125 psig. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PIPING APPLICATIONS A. Chilled Water piping, aboveground, NPS 2 and smaller: 1. Type L, drawn-temper copper tubing, wrought-copper fittings, and soldered or brazed joints. B. Condensate-Drain Piping: Type DWV or L, drawn-temper copper tubing, wrought-copper fittings, and soldered joints. C. Air-Vent Piping: 1. Inlet: Same as service where installed with metal-to-plastic transition fittings for plastic piping systems according to the piping manufacturer's written instructions. 2. Outlet: Type K, annealed-temper copper tubing with soldered or flared joints. 3.2 VALVE APPLICATIONS A. Install shutoff-duty valves at each branch connection to supply mains, and at supply connection to each piece of equipment. B. Install valves at each branch connection to return main. C. Install calibrated-orifice, balancing valves in the return pipe of each heating or cooling terminal. D. Install check valves at each pump discharge and elsewhere as required to control flow direction. E. Install safety valves at hot-water generators and elsewhere as required by ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code. Install drip-pan elbow on safety-valve outlet and pipe without valves to the outdoors; and pipe drain to nearest floor drain or as indicated on Drawings. Comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII, Division 1, for installation requirements. F. Install pressure-reducing valves at makeup-water connection to regulate system fill pressure. 3.3 PIPING INSTALLATIONS A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping systems. Indicate piping locations and arrangements if such were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings. 10/26/15 ET 109/109A (IU# )

391 Vector Consulting, LLC SECTION PAGE 5 HYDRONIC PIPING B. Install piping in concealed locations, unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas. C. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise. D. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal. E. Install piping to permit valve servicing. F. Install piping at indicated slopes. G. Install piping free of sags and bends. H. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections. I. Install piping to allow application of insulation. J. Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating pressure. K. Install groups of pipes parallel to each other, spaced to permit applying insulation and servicing of valves. L. Install drains, consisting of a tee fitting, NPS 3/4 ball valve, and short NPS 3/4 threaded nipple with cap, at low points in piping system mains and elsewhere as required for system drainage. M. Install piping at a uniform grade of 0.2 percent upward in direction of flow. N. Reduce pipe sizes using eccentric reducer fitting installed with level side up. O. Install branch connections to mains using mechanically formed tee fittings in main pipe, with the branch connected to the bottom of the main pipe. For up-feed risers, connect the branch to the top of the main pipe. P. Install valves according to Division 23 Section "Valves." Q. Install unions in piping, NPS 2 and smaller, adjacent to valves, at final connections of equipment, and elsewhere as indicated. R. Install flanges in piping, NPS 2-1/2 and larger, at final connections of equipment and elsewhere as indicated. S. Install strainers on inlet side of each control valve, pressure-reducing valve, solenoid valve, in-line pump, and elsewhere as indicated. Install NPS 3/4 nipple and ball valve in blowdown connection of strainers NPS 2 and larger. Match size of strainer blowoff connection for strainers smaller than NPS 2. T. Identify piping as specified in Division 23 Section "Mechanical Identification." 3.4 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Hanger, support, and anchor devices are specified in Division 23 Section "Hangers and Supports." Comply with the following requirements for maximum spacing of supports. B. Install the following pipe attachments: 1. Adjustable steel clevis hangers for individual horizontal piping less than 20 feet long. 10/26/15 ET 109/109A (IU# )

392 Vector Consulting, LLC SECTION PAGE 6 HYDRONIC PIPING 2. Adjustable roller hangers and spring hangers for individual horizontal piping 20 feet or longer. 3. Pipe Roller: MSS SP-58, Type 44 for multiple horizontal piping 20 feet or longer, supported on a trapeze. 4. Spring hangers to support vertical runs. 5. Provide copper-clad hangers and supports for hangers and supports in direct contact with copper pipe. 6. On plastic pipe, install pads or cushions on bearing surfaces to prevent hanger from scratching pipe. C. Install hangers for steel piping with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod sizes: 1. NPS 3/4: Maximum span, 7 feet; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch. 2. NPS 1: Maximum span, 7 feet; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch. 3. NPS 1-1/2: Maximum span, 9 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 4. NPS 2: Maximum span, 10 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 5. NPS 2-1/2: Maximum span, 11 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 6. NPS 3: Maximum span, 12 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 7. NPS 4: Maximum span, 14 feet; minimum rod size, 1/2 inch. 8. NPS 6: Maximum span, 17 feet; minimum rod size, 1/2 inch. 9. NPS 8: Maximum span, 19 feet; minimum rod size, 5/8 inch. 10. NPS 10: Maximum span, 20 feet; minimum rod size, 3/4 inch. 11. NPS 12: Maximum span, 23 feet; minimum rod size, 7/8 inch. 12. NPS 14: Maximum span, 25 feet; minimum rod size, 1 inch. 13. NPS 16: Maximum span, 27 feet; minimum rod size, 1 inch. 14. NPS 18: Maximum span, 28 feet; minimum rod size, 1-1/4 inches. 15. NPS 20: Maximum span, 30 feet; minimum rod size, 1-1/4 inches. D. Install hangers for drawn-temper copper piping with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod sizes: 1. NPS 3/4: Maximum span, 5 feet; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch. 2. NPS 1: Maximum span, 6 feet; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch. 3. NPS 1-1/2: Maximum span, 8 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 4. NPS 2: Maximum span, 8 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 5. NPS 2-1/2: Maximum span, 9 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 6. NPS 3: Maximum span, 10 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. E. Support vertical runs at roof, at each floor, and at 10-foot intervals between floors. 3.5 PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTION A. Join pipe and fittings according to the following requirements and Division 15 Sections specifying piping systems. B. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe. C. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before assembly. D. Soldered Joints: Apply ASTM B 813, water-flushable flux, unless otherwise indicated, to tube end. Construct joints according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook," using lead-free solder alloy complying with ASTM B 32. E. Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS's "Brazing Handbook," "Pipe and Tube" Chapter, using copper-phosphorus brazing filler metal complying with AWS A /26/15 ET 109/109A (IU# )

393 Vector Consulting, LLC SECTION PAGE 7 HYDRONIC PIPING F. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows: 1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dry seal threading is specified. 2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds. G. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, and thickness for service application. Install gasket concentrically positioned. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads. 3.6 HYDRONIC SPECIALTIES INSTALLATION A. Install manual air vents at high points in piping, at heat-transfer coils, and elsewhere as required for system air venting. B. Install piping from boiler air outlet, air separator, or air purger to expansion tank with a 2 percent upward slope toward tank. C. Install in-line air separators in pump suction. Install drain valve on air separators NPS 2 and larger. D. Install bypass chemical feeders in each hydronic system where indicated, in upright position with top of funnel not more than 48 inches above the floor. Install feeder in minimum NPS 3/4 bypass line, from main with full-size, full-port, ball valve in the main between bypass connections. Install NPS 3/4 pipe from chemical feeder drain, to nearest equipment drain and include a full-size, full-port, ball valve. 3.7 TERMINAL EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS A. Sizes for supply and return piping connections shall be the same as or larger than equipment connections. B. Install control valves in accessible locations close to connected equipment. C. Install ports for pressure gages and thermometers at coil inlet and outlet connections according to Division 23 Section "Meters and Gages." 3.8 CLEANING AND FILLING PROCEDURE / CHEMICAL TREATMENT A. Mechanical Contractor shall coordinate cleaning and filling operation with General Contractor. Mechanical Contractor shall give min. 48 hours notice to Engineer before cleaning and flushing procedure. B. Fill building piping system with fresh water and add liquid alkaline compound with emulsifying agents and detergents to remove grease and petroleum products from piping. Drain and repeat cleaning procedure again. Engineer must approve water sample taken from cleansing solution. After engineer has approved the cleaning of the entire building heating loop, drain, clean strainer screens, and refill with fresh water and/or appropriate glycol solution. C. Add initial chemical treatment and maintain water quality in ranges noted above for the first year of operation. 10/26/15 ET 109/109A (IU# )

394 Vector Consulting, LLC SECTION PAGE 8 HYDRONIC PIPING 3.9 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Prepare hydronic piping according to ASME B31.9 and as follows: 1. Leave joints, including welds, uninsulated and exposed for examination during test. 2. Provide temporary restraints for expansion joints that cannot sustain reactions due to test pressure. If temporary restraints are impractical, isolate expansion joints from testing. 3. Flush hydronic piping systems with clean water; then remove and clean or replace strainer screens (see above procedure). 4. Isolate equipment from piping. If a valve is used to isolate equipment, its closure shall be capable of sealing against test pressure without damage to valve. Install blinds in flanged joints to isolate equipment. 5. Install safety valve, set at a pressure no more than one-third higher than test pressure, to protect against damage by expanding liquid or other source of overpressure during test. B. Perform the following tests on hydronic piping: 1. Use ambient temperature water as a testing medium unless there is risk of damage due to freezing. Another liquid that is safe for workers and compatible with piping may be used. 2. While filling system, use vents installed at high points of system to release air. Use drains installed at low points for complete draining of test liquid. 3. Isolate expansion tanks and determine that hydronic system is full of water. 4. Subject piping system to hydrostatic test pressure that is not less than 1.5 times the system's working pressure. Test pressure shall not exceed maximum pressure for any vessel, pump, valve, or other component in system under test. Verify that stress due to pressure at bottom of vertical runs does not exceed 90 percent of specified minimum yield strength or 1.7 times "SE" value in Appendix A in ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping." 5. After hydrostatic test pressure has been applied for at least 10 minutes, examine piping, joints, and connections for leakage. Eliminate leaks by tightening, repairing, or replacing components, and repeat hydrostatic test until there are no leaks. 6. Prepare written report of testing. C. Perform the following before operating the system: 1. Open manual valves fully. 2. Inspect pumps for proper rotation. 3. Set makeup pressure-reducing valves for required system pressure. 4. Inspect air vents at high points of system and determine if all are installed and operating freely (automatic type), or bleed air completely (manual type). 5. Set temperature controls so all coils are calling for full flow. 6. Inspect and set operating temperatures of hydronic equipment, such as boilers, chillers, cooling towers, to specified values. 7. Verify lubrication of motors and bearings. END OF SECTION /26/15 ET 109/109A (IU# )

395 Vector Consulting, LLC SECTION PAGE 1 METAL DUCTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Single-wall rectangular ducts and fittings. 2. Single-wall round ducts and fittings. 3. Sheet metal materials. 4. Sealants and gaskets. 5. Hangers and supports. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 23 Section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC" for testing, adjusting, and balancing requirements for metal ducts. 2. Division 23 Section "Air Duct Accessories" for dampers, sound-control devices, duct-mounting access doors and panels, turning vanes, and flexible ducts. 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Delegated Duct Design: Duct construction, including sheet metal thicknesses, seam and joint construction, reinforcements, and hangers and supports, shall comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" and performance requirements and design criteria indicated in "Duct Schedule" Article. B. Structural Performance: Duct hangers and supports shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and stresses within limits and under conditions described in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" C. Airstream Surfaces: Surfaces in contact with the airstream shall comply with requirements in ASHRAE ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of the following products: 1. Liners and adhesives. 2. Sealants and gaskets. B. Delegated-Design Submittal: 1. Sheet metal thicknesses. 2. Joint and seam construction and sealing. 3. Reinforcement details and spacing. 10/26/15 ET 109/109A (IU# )

396 Vector Consulting, LLC SECTION PAGE 2 METAL DUCTS 4. Materials, fabrication, assembly, and spacing of hangers and supports. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SINGLE-WALL RECTANGULAR DUCTS AND FITTINGS A. General Fabrication Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" based on indicated static-pressure class unless otherwise indicated. B. Transverse Joints: Select joint types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 2-1, "Rectangular Duct/Transverse Joints," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible." C. Longitudinal Seams: Select seam types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 2-2, "Rectangular Duct/Longitudinal Seams," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible." D. Elbows, Transitions, Offsets, Branch Connections, and Other Duct Construction: Select types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Chapter 4, "Fittings and Other Construction," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible." 2.2 SINGLE-WALL ROUND DUCTS AND FITTINGS A. General Fabrication Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Chapter 3, "Round, Oval, and Flexible Duct," based on indicated static-pressure class unless otherwise indicated. B. Transverse Joints: Select joint types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-1, "Round Duct Transverse Joints," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible." C. Longitudinal Seams: Select seam types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-2, "Round Duct Longitudinal Seams," for staticpressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible." D. Tees and Laterals: Select types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-5, "90 Degree Tees and Laterals," and Figure 3-6, "Conical Tees," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible." 2.3 SHEET METAL MATERIALS A. General Material Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for acceptable materials, material thicknesses, and duct construction methods unless otherwise indicated. Sheet metal materials shall be free of pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains, discolorations, and other imperfections. 10/26/15 ET 109/109A (IU# )

397 Vector Consulting, LLC SECTION PAGE 3 METAL DUCTS B. Galvanized Sheet Steel: Comply with ASTM A 653/A 653M. 1. Galvanized Coating Designation: G Finishes for Surfaces Exposed to View: Mill phosphatized. C. Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and galvanized. 1. Where black- and galvanized-steel shapes and plates are used to reinforce aluminum ducts, isolate the different metals with butyl rubber, neoprene, or EPDM gasket materials. D. Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 1/4-inch minimum diameter for lengths 36 inches or less; 3/8-inch minimum diameter for lengths longer than 36 inches. 2.4 SEALANT AND GASKETS A. General Sealant and Gasket Requirements: Surface-burning characteristics for sealants and gaskets shall be a maximum flame-spread index of 25 and a maximum smoke-developed index of 50 when tested according to UL 723; certified by an NRTL. B. Water-Based Joint and Seam Sealant: 1. Application Method: Brush on. 2. Solids Content: Minimum 65 percent. 3. Shore A Hardness: Minimum Water resistant. 5. Mold and mildew resistant. 6. VOC: Maximum 75 g/l (less water). 7. Maximum Static-Pressure Class: 10-inch wg, positive and negative. 8. Service: Indoor or outdoor. 9. Substrate: Compatible with galvanized sheet steel (both PVC coated and bare), stainless steel, or aluminum sheets. C. Flanged Joint Sealant: Comply with ASTM C General: Single-component, acid-curing, silicone, elastomeric. 2. Type: S. 3. Grade: NS. 4. Class: Use: O. 6. For indoor applications, sealant shall have a VOC content of 250 g/l or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). D. Flange Gaskets: Butyl rubber, neoprene, or EPDM polymer with polyisobutylene plasticizer. E. Round Duct Joint O-Ring Seals: 1. Seal shall provide maximum leakage class of 3 cfm/100 sq. ft. at 1-inch wg and shall be rated for 10-inch wg static-pressure class, positive or negative. 2. EPDM O-ring to seal in concave bead in coupling or fitting spigot. 3. Double-lipped, EPDM O-ring seal, mechanically fastened to factory-fabricated couplings and fitting spigots. 10/26/15 ET 109/109A (IU# )

398 Vector Consulting, LLC SECTION PAGE 4 METAL DUCTS 2.5 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Hanger Rods for Noncorrosive Environments: Cadmium-plated steel rods and nuts. B. Hanger Rods for Corrosive Environments: Electrogalvanized, all-thread rods or galvanized rods with threads painted with zinc-chromate primer after installation. C. Strap and Rod Sizes: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Table 5-1, "Rectangular Duct Hangers Minimum Size," and Table 5-2, "Minimum Hanger Sizes for Round Duct." D. Steel Cables for Galvanized-Steel Ducts: Galvanized steel complying with ASTM A 603. E. Steel Cables for Stainless-Steel Ducts: Stainless steel complying with ASTM A 492. F. Steel Cable End Connections: Cadmium-plated steel assemblies with brackets, swivel, and bolts designed for duct hanger service; with an automatic-locking and clamping device. G. Duct Attachments: Sheet metal screws, blind rivets, or self-tapping metal screws; compatible with duct materials. H. Trapeze and Riser Supports: 1. Supports for Galvanized-Steel Ducts: Galvanized-steel shapes and plates. 2. Supports for Stainless-Steel Ducts: Stainless-steel shapes and plates. 3. Supports for Aluminum Ducts: Aluminum or galvanized steel coated with zinc chromate. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 DUCT INSTALLATION A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of duct system. Indicated duct locations, configurations, and arrangements were used to size ducts and calculate friction loss for air-handling equipment sizing and for other design considerations. Install duct systems as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Shop Drawings and Coordination Drawings. B. Install ducts according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" unless otherwise indicated. C. Install round ducts in maximum practical lengths. D. Install ducts with fewest possible joints. E. Install factory- or shop-fabricated fittings for changes in direction, size, and shape and for branch connections. F. Unless otherwise indicated, install ducts vertically and horizontally, and parallel and perpendicular to building lines. G. Install ducts close to walls, overhead construction, columns, and other structural and permanent enclosure elements of building. H. Install ducts with a clearance of 1 inch, plus allowance for insulation thickness. 10/26/15 ET 109/109A (IU# )

399 Vector Consulting, LLC SECTION PAGE 5 METAL DUCTS I. Route ducts to avoid passing through transformer vaults and electrical equipment rooms and enclosures. J. Where ducts pass through non-fire-rated interior partitions and exterior walls and are exposed to view, cover the opening between the partition and duct or duct insulation with sheet metal flanges of same metal thickness as the duct. Overlap openings on four sides by at least 1-1/2 inches. K. Where ducts pass through fire-rated interior partitions and exterior walls, install fire dampers. Comply with requirements in Division 23 Section "Air Duct Accessories" for fire and smoke dampers. L. Protect duct interiors from moisture, construction debris and dust, and other foreign materials. Comply with SMACNA's "IAQ Guidelines for Occupied Buildings Under Construction," Appendix G, "Duct Cleanliness for New Construction Guidelines." 3.2 INSTALLATION OF EXPOSED DUCTWORK A. Protect ducts exposed in finished spaces from being dented, scratched, or damaged. B. Trim duct sealants flush with metal. Create a smooth and uniform exposed bead. Do not use two-part tape sealing system. C. Grind welds to provide smooth surface free of burrs, sharp edges, and weld splatter. When welding stainless steel with a No. 3 or 4 finish, grind the welds flush, polish the exposed welds, and treat the welds to remove discoloration caused by welding. D. Maintain consistency, symmetry, and uniformity in the arrangement and fabrication of fittings, hangers and supports, duct accessories, and air outlets. E. Repair or replace damaged sections and finished work that does not comply with these requirements. 3.3 DUCT SEALING A. Seal ducts for duct static-pressure, seal classes, and leakage classes specified in "Duct Schedule" Article according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible." B. Seal ducts to the following seal classes according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible": 1. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible." 3.4 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION A. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Chapter 5, "Hangers and Supports." B. Building Attachments: Concrete inserts, powder-actuated fasteners, or structural-steel fasteners appropriate for construction materials to which hangers are being attached. 1. Where practical, install concrete inserts before placing concrete. 2. Install powder-actuated concrete fasteners after concrete is placed and completely cured. 3. Use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for standard-weight aggregate concretes or for slabs more than 4 inches thick. 4. Do not use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for lightweight-aggregate concretes or for slabs less than 4 inches thick. 5. Do not use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for seismic restraints. 10/26/15 ET 109/109A (IU# )

400 Vector Consulting, LLC SECTION PAGE 6 METAL DUCTS C. Hanger Spacing: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Table 5-1, "Rectangular Duct Hangers Minimum Size," and Table 5-2, "Minimum Hanger Sizes for Round Duct," for maximum hanger spacing; install hangers and supports within 24 inches of each elbow and within 48 inches of each branch intersection. D. Hangers Exposed to View: Threaded rod and angle or channel supports. E. Support vertical ducts with steel angles or channel secured to the sides of the duct with welds, bolts, sheet metal screws, or blind rivets; support at each floor and at a maximum intervals of 16 feet. F. Install upper attachments to structures. Select and size upper attachments with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used. 3.5 CONNECTIONS A. Make connections to equipment with flexible connectors complying with Division 23 Section "Air Duct Accessories." B. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for branch, outlet and inlet, and terminal unit connections. 3.6 PAINTING A. Paint interior of metal ducts that are visible through registers and grilles and that do not have duct liner. Apply one coat of flat, black, latex paint over a compatible galvanized-steel primer. Paint materials and application requirements are specified in Division 09 painting Sections. 3.7 START UP A. Air Balance: Comply with requirements in Division 23 Section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC." 3.8 DUCT SCHEDULE A. Fabricate ducts with galvanized sheet steel except as otherwise indicated and as follows: B. Supply Ducts: 1. Ducts Connected to Fan Coil Units and Terminal Units: a. Pressure Class: Positive 2-inch wg. C. Return Ducts: 1. Ducts Connected to Fan Coil Units: a. Pressure Class: Positive or negative 2-inch wg. D. Outdoor-Air Ducts: 1. Ducts Connected to Fan Coil Units: 10/26/15 ET 109/109A (IU# )

401 Vector Consulting, LLC SECTION PAGE 7 METAL DUCTS a. Pressure Class: Positive or negative 2-inch wg. E. Elbow Configuration: 1. Rectangular Duct: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 4-2, "Rectangular Elbows." a. Velocity 1000 fpm or Lower: 1) Radius Type RE 1 with minimum 0.5 radius-to-diameter ratio. 2) Mitered Type RE 4 without vanes. b. Velocity 1000 to 1500 fpm: 1) Radius Type RE 1 with minimum 1.0 radius-to-diameter ratio. 2) Radius Type RE 3 with minimum 0.5 radius-to-diameter ratio and two vanes. 3) Mitered Type RE 2 with vanes complying with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 4-3, "Vanes and Vane Runners," and Figure 4-4, "Vane Support in Elbows." c. Velocity 1500 fpm or Higher: 1) Radius Type RE 1 with minimum 1.5 radius-to-diameter ratio. 2) Radius Type RE 3 with minimum 1.0 radius-to-diameter ratio and two vanes. 3) Mitered Type RE 2 with vanes complying with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 4-3, "Vanes and Vane Runners," and Figure 4-4, "Vane Support in Elbows." 2. Round Duct: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-4, "Round Duct Elbows." a. Minimum Radius-to-Diameter Ratio and Elbow Segments: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Table 3-1, "Mitered Elbows." Elbows with less than 90-degree change of direction have proportionately fewer segments. F. Branch Configuration: 1) Velocity 1000 fpm or Lower: 0.5 radius-to-diameter ratio and three segments for 90-degree elbow. 2) Velocity 1000 to 1500 fpm: 1.0 radius-to-diameter ratio and four segments for 90- degree elbow. 3) Velocity 1500 fpm or Higher: 1.5 radius-to-diameter ratio and five segments for 90-degree elbow. 1. Rectangular Duct: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 4-6, "Branch Connection." a. Rectangular Main to Rectangular Branch: 45-degree entry. b. Rectangular Main to Round Branch: Spin in. 2. Round and Flat Oval: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-5, "90 Degree Tees and Laterals," and Figure 3-6, "Conical Tees." Saddle taps are permitted in existing duct. a. Velocity 1000 fpm or Lower: 90-degree tap. b. Velocity 1000 or Higher: Conical tap. 10/26/15 ET 109/109A (IU# )

402 Vector Consulting, LLC SECTION PAGE 8 METAL DUCTS END OF SECTION /26/15 ET 109/109A (IU# )

403 Vector Consulting, LLC SECTION PAGE 1 AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Volume Dampers. 2. Fire Dampers. 3. Turning Vanes. 4. Duct-Mounting Access Doors. 5. Flexible Connectors. 6. Flexible Ducts. 7. Duct Accessory Hardware. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For the following: 1. Volume Dampers. 2. Fire Dampers. 3. Turning Vanes. 4. Duct-Mounting Access Doors. 5. Flexible Connectors. 6. Flexible Ducts. B. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection. 1. Special fittings. 2. Manual-volume damper installations. 3. Fire-damper, smoke-damper, and combination fire- and smoke-damper installations, including sleeves and duct-mounting access doors. 4. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with NFPA 90A, "Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems," and NFPA 90B, "Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems." PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the manufacturers specified. 10/26/15 ET 109/109A (IU# )

404 Vector Consulting, LLC SECTION PAGE 2 AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 2.2 SHEET METAL MATERIALS A. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible" for acceptable materials, material thicknesses, and duct construction methods, unless otherwise indicated. B. Galvanized Sheet Steel: Lock-forming quality; complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M and having G Series coating designation; ducts shall have mill-phosphatized finish for surfaces exposed to view. C. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 480/A 480M. D. Aluminum Sheets: ASTM B 209, alloy 3003, temper H14; with mill finish for concealed ducts and standard, 1-side bright finish for exposed ducts. E. Extruded Aluminum: ASTM B 221, alloy 6063, temper T6. F. Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: Galvanized-steel reinforcement where installed on galvanized sheet metal ducts; compatible materials for aluminum and stainless-steel ducts. G. Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 1/4-inch minimum diameter for lengths 36 inches or less; 3/8-inch minimum diameter for lengths longer than 36 inches. 2.3 VOLUME DAMPERS A. Manufacturers: 1. Air Balance, Inc. 2. American Warming and Ventilating. 3. Flexmaster U.S.A., Inc. 4. McGill AirFlow Corporation. 5. METALAIRE, Inc. 6. Nailor Industries Inc. 7. Penn Ventilation Company, Inc. 8. Ruskin Company. 9. Vent Products Company, Inc. B. General Description: Factory fabricated, with required hardware and accessories. Stiffen damper blades for stability. Include locking device to hold single-blade dampers in a fixed position without vibration. Close duct penetrations for damper components to seal duct consistent with pressure class. C. Standard Volume Dampers: Multiple- or single-blade, parallel- or opposed-blade design as indicated, standard leakage rating, and suitable for horizontal or vertical applications. 1. Steel Frames: Hat-shaped, galvanized sheet steel channels, minimum of inch thick, with mitered and welded corners; frames with flanges where indicated for attaching to walls and flangeless frames where indicated for installing in ducts. 2. Roll-Formed Steel Blades: inch-thick, galvanized sheet steel. 3. Blade Axles: Galvanized steel. 4. Tie Bars and Brackets: Galvanized steel. 2.4 FIRE DAMPERS A. Manufacturers: 1. Air Balance, Inc. 2. CESCO Products. 10/26/15 ET 109/109A (IU# )

405 Vector Consulting, LLC SECTION PAGE 3 AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 3. Greenheck. 4. McGill AirFlow Corporation. 5. METALAIRE, Inc. 6. Nailor Industries Inc. 7. Penn Ventilation Company, Inc. 8. Prefco Products, Inc. 9. Ruskin Company. 10. Vent Products Company, Inc. 11. Ward Industries, Inc. B. Fire dampers shall be labeled according to UL 555. C. Frame: Curtain type with blades outside airstream; fabricated with roll-formed, inch-thick galvanized steel; with mitered and interlocking corners. D. Mounting Sleeve: Factory- or field-installed, galvanized sheet steel. 1. Minimum Thickness: or inch thick as indicated and of length to suit application. 2. Exceptions: Omit sleeve where damper frame width permits direct attachment of perimeter mounting angles on each side of wall or floor, and thickness of damper frame complies with sleeve requirements. E. Mounting Orientation: Vertical or horizontal as indicated. F. Blades: Roll-formed, interlocking, inch-thick, galvanized sheet steel. In place of interlocking blades, use full-length, inch-thick, galvanized-steel blade connectors. G. Horizontal Dampers: Include blade lock and stainless-steel closure spring. H. Fusible Links: Replaceable, 165 deg F rated. 2.5 TURNING VANES A. Fabricate to comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible" for vanes and vane runners. Vane runners shall automatically align vanes. B. Manufactured Turning Vanes: Fabricate 1-1/2-inch-wide, single-vane, curved blades of galvanized sheet steel set 3/4 inch o.c.; support with bars perpendicular to blades set 2 inches o.c.; and set into vane runners suitable for duct mounting. 1. Manufacturers: a. Ductmate Industries, Inc. b. Duro Dyne Corp. c. METALAIRE, Inc. d. Ward Industries, Inc. 2.6 DUCT-MOUNTING ACCESS DOORS A. General Description: Fabricate doors airtight and suitable for duct pressure class. B. Door: Double wall, duct mounting, and rectangular; fabricated of galvanized sheet metal with insulation fill and thickness as indicated for duct pressure class. Include vision panel where indicated. Include 1- by-1-inch butt or piano hinge and cam latches. 10/26/15 ET 109/109A (IU# )

406 Vector Consulting, LLC SECTION PAGE 4 AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 2.7 FLEXIBLE DUCTS A. Manufacturers: 1. Flexmaster U.S.A., Inc. 2. Hart & Cooley, Inc. 3. McGill AirFlow Corporation. B. Insulated-Duct Connectors: UL 181, Class 1, 2-ply vinyl film supported by helically wound, spring-steel wire; fibrous-glass insulation. 1. Pressure Rating: 10-inch wg positive and 1.0-inch wg negative. 2. Maximum Air Velocity: 4000 fpm. 3. Temperature Range: Minus 10 to plus 160 deg F. C. Flexible Duct Clamps: Nylon strap, in sizes 3 through 18 inches to suit duct size. 2.8 DUCT ACCESSORY HARDWARE A. Instrument Test Holes: Cast iron or cast aluminum to suit duct material, including screw cap and gasket. Size to allow insertion of pitot tube and other testing instruments and of length to suit duct insulation thickness. B. Adhesives: High strength, quick setting, neoprene based, waterproof, and resistant to gasoline and grease. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION A. Install duct accessories according to applicable details in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible" for metal ducts and in NAIMA AH116, "Fibrous Glass Duct Construction Standards," for fibrous-glass ducts. B. Provide duct accessories of materials suited to duct materials; use galvanized-steel accessories in galvanized-steel and fibrous-glass ducts, stainless-steel accessories in stainless-steel ducts, and aluminum accessories in aluminum ducts. C. Install volume dampers in ducts with liner; avoid damage to and erosion of duct liner. D. Provide balancing dampers at points on supply, return, and exhaust systems where branches lead from larger ducts as required for air balancing. Install at a minimum of two duct widths from branch takeoff. E. Provide test holes at fan inlets and outlets and elsewhere as indicated. F. Install fire and smoke dampers, with fusible links, according to manufacturer's UL-approved written instructions. G. Install duct access doors to allow for inspecting, adjusting, and maintaining accessories and terminal units as follows: 1. On both sides of duct coils. 2. Downstream from volume dampers and equipment. 10/26/15 ET 109/109A (IU# )

407 Vector Consulting, LLC SECTION PAGE 5 AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 3. Adjacent to fire or smoke dampers, providing access to reset or reinstall fusible links. 4. To interior of ducts for cleaning; before and after each change in direction, at maximum 50-foot spacing. 5. On sides of ducts where adequate clearance is available. H. Install the following sizes for duct-mounting, rectangular access doors: 1. One-Hand or Inspection Access: 8 by 5 inches. 2. Two-Hand Access: 12 by 6 inches. 3. Head and Hand Access: 18 by 10 inches. 4. Head and Shoulders Access: 21 by 14 inches. 5. Body Access: 25 by 14 inches. 6. Body Plus Ladder Access: 25 by 17 inches. I. Install the following sizes for duct-mounting, round access doors: 1. One-Hand or Inspection Access: 8 inches in diameter. 2. Two-Hand Access: 10 inches in diameter. 3. Head and Hand Access: 12 inches in diameter. 4. Head and Shoulders Access: 18 inches in diameter. 5. Body Access: 24 inches in diameter. J. Label access doors according to Division 15 Section "Mechanical Identification." K. Install flexible connectors immediately adjacent to equipment in ducts associated with fans and motorized equipment supported by vibration isolators. L. Connect diffusers or light troffer boots to low pressure ducts directly or with maximum 60-inch lengths of flexible duct clamped or strapped in place. M. Connect flexible ducts to metal ducts with draw bands. N. Install duct test holes where indicated and required for testing and balancing purposes. 3.2 ADJUSTING A. Adjust duct accessories for proper settings. B. Adjust fire and smoke dampers for proper action. C. Final positioning of manual-volume dampers is specified in Division 23 Section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing." END OF SECTION /26/15 ET 109/109A (IU# )

408 .

409 Vector Consulting, LLC SECTION PAGE 1 DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Adjustable face grilles. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated, include the following: 1. Data Sheet: Indicate materials of construction, finish, and mounting details; and performance data including throw and drop, static-pressure drop, and noise ratings. 2. Diffuser, Register, and Grille Schedule: Indicate drawing designation, room location, quantity, model number, size, and accessories furnished. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 REGISTERS AND GRILLES A. Adjustable Bar Register: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Krueger. b. METALAIRE, Inc. c. Nailor Industries Inc. d. Price Industries. e. Titus. 2. Material: Steel. 3. Finish: Baked enamel, white or as noted on plans. 2.2 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Verification of Performance: Rate diffusers, registers, and grilles according to ASHRAE 70, "Method of Testing for Rating the Performance of Air Outlets and Inlets." PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install diffusers, registers, and grilles level and plumb. 10/26/15 ET 109/109A (IU# )

410 Vector Consulting, LLC SECTION PAGE 2 DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES B. Ceiling-Mounted Outlets and Inlets: Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts, fittings, and accessories. Air outlet and inlet locations have been indicated to achieve design requirements for air volume, noise criteria, airflow pattern, throw, and pressure drop. Make final locations where indicated, as much as practical. For units installed in lay-in ceiling panels, locate units in the center of panel. Where architectural features or other items conflict with installation, notify Architect for a determination of final location. C. Install diffusers, registers, and grilles with airtight connections to ducts and to allow service and maintenance of dampers, air extractors, and fire dampers. 3.2 ADJUSTING A. After installation, adjust diffusers, registers, and grilles to air patterns indicated, or as directed, before starting air balancing. END OF SECTION /26/15 ET 109/109A (IU# )

411 Vector Consulting, LLC SECTION PAGE 1 FAN COIL UNITS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes fan-coil units and accessories. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, furnished specialties, and accessories. B. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection. 1. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring. C. Field quality-control test reports. D. Operation and maintenance data. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the manufacturers specified. 2. Standard fan coil units a. Trane. b. Carrier. c. International. d. Rittling. 2.2 FAN-COIL UNITS A. Description: Factory-packaged and -tested units rated according to ARI 440, ASHRAE 33, and UL B. Coil Section Insulation: 1/2-inch thick, coated glass fiber complying with ASTM C 1071 and attached with adhesive complying with ASTM C Fire-Hazard Classification: Insulation and adhesive shall have a combined maximum flamespread index of 25 and smoke-developed index of 50 when tested according to ASTM E /26/15 ET 109/109A (IU# )

412 Vector Consulting, LLC SECTION PAGE 2 FAN COIL UNITS C. Main and Auxiliary Drain Pans: Stainless steel formed to slope from all directions to the drain connection as required by ASHRAE 62. D. Chassis: Galvanized steel where exposed to moisture. E. Cabinet: Minimum 18 Ga Steel with baked-enamel finish as noted on drawings. F. Filters: Minimum arrestance according to ASHRAE 52.1, and a minimum efficiency reporting value (MERV) according to ASHRAE Pleated Cotton-Polyester Media: 90 percent arrestance and 7 MERV. G. Hydronic Coils: Copper tube, with mechanically bonded aluminum fins spaced no closer than 0.1 inch, rated for a minimum working pressure of 200 psig and a maximum entering-water temperature of 220 deg F. Include manual air vent and drain valve. H. Direct-Driven Fans: Double width, forward curved, centrifugal; with permanently lubricated, multispeed motor resiliently mounted in the fan inlet. Aluminum or painted-steel wheels, and painted-steel or galvanized-steel fan scrolls. I. Control devices and operational sequences are specified in Division 23 Sections "HVAC Instrumentation and Controls" and "Sequence of Operation." J. Electrical Connection: Factory wire motors and controls for a single electrical connection. Provide factory controls transformer and factory mounting of controls by others as noted on drawings. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install fan-coil units to comply with NFPA 90A. B. Verify locations of thermostats and other exposed control sensors with Drawings and room details before installation. C. Install new filters in each fan-coil unit within two weeks after Substantial Completion. Provide one extra set of filters for owner. D. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 23 Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. Specific connection requirements are as follows: 1. Install piping adjacent to machine to allow service and maintenance. 2. Connect condensate drain to indirect waste. a. Install condensate trap of adequate depth to seal against the pressure of fan. Install cleanouts in piping at changes of direction. E. Connect supply and return ducts to fan-coil units with flexible duct connectors specified in Division 23 Section "Duct Accessories." Comply with safety requirements in UL 1995 for duct connections. 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports: 10/26/15 ET 109/109A (IU# )

413 Vector Consulting, LLC SECTION PAGE 3 FAN COIL UNITS 1. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper motor rotation and unit operation. 2. Operate electric heating elements through each stage to verify proper operation and electrical connections. 3. Test and adjust controls and safety devices. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. B. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above. END OF SECTION /26/15 ET 109/109A (IU# )

414 .

415 Vector Consulting, LLC SECTION PAGE 1 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Electrical equipment coordination and installation. 2. Sleeves for raceways and cables. 3. Sleeve seals. 4. Common electrical installation requirements. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. ATS: Acceptance Testing Specifications. B. EPDM: Ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer rubber. C. NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene rubber. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical components, devices and accessories shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. B. All installations shall comply with NFPA 70. C. Include in the work, as a part of the Bid Proposal all labor, materials, services, apparatus as required to complete the intended work shown on the drawings. All equipment and systems shall be complete and operational. D. Work for project must be performed in accordance with Federal, State and Local laws, ordinances, Codes, Rules and Regulations pertaining to the work shown. 1.6 COORDINATION A. Coordinate arrangement, mounting, and support of electrical equipment: 1. To allow maximum possible headroom unless specific mounting heights that reduce headroom are indicated. 10/26/15 ET 109/109A (IU# )

416 Vector Consulting, LLC SECTION PAGE 2 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 2. To provide for ease of disconnecting the equipment with minimum interference to other installations. 3. To allow right of way for piping and conduit installed at required slope. 4. So connecting raceways, cables, wireways, and busways will be clear of obstructions and of the working and access space of other equipment. 5. To allow for maximum space for maintenance access. B. Coordinate installation of required supporting devices and set sleeves in cast-in-place concrete, masonry walls, and other structural components as they are constructed. C. Coordinate location of access panels and doors for electrical items that are behind finished surfaces or otherwise concealed. Access doors and panels are specified in Division 8 Section "Access Doors and Frames." D. Coordinate electrical testing of electrical, mechanical, and architectural items, so equipment and systems that are functionally interdependent are tested to demonstrate successful interoperability. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the manufacturers specified. 2.2 SLEEVES FOR RACEWAYS AND CABLES A. Steel Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized steel, plain ends. B. Sleeves for Rectangular Openings: Galvanized sheet steel with minimum inch thickness as indicated and of length to suit application. C. Coordinate sleeve selection and application with selection and application of firestopping specified in Division 7 Section "Through-Penetration Firestop Systems." Division 26 contractor shall provide all firestopping in accordance with division 7 requirements. 2.3 SLEEVE SEALS A. Description: Modular sealing device, designed for field assembly, to fill annular space between sleeve and raceway or cable. 1. Manufacturers: a. Advance Products & Systems, Inc. b. Calpico, Inc. c. Metraflex Co. d. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc. 2. Sealing Elements: interlocking links shaped to fit surface of cable or conduit. Include type and number required for material and size of raceway or cable. 10/26/15 ET 109/109A (IU# )

417 Vector Consulting, LLC SECTION PAGE 3 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 3. Pressure Plates: Stainless steel. Include two for each sealing element. 4. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Stainless steel of length required to secure pressure plates to sealing elements. Include one for each sealing element. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 COMMON REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION A. Comply with NECA 1 and NEC. B. Measure indicated mounting heights to bottom of unit for suspended items and to center of unit for wall-mounting items. C. Headroom Maintenance: If mounting heights or other location criteria are not indicated, arrange and install components and equipment to provide maximum possible headroom consistent with these requirements. D. Equipment: Install to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of components of both electrical equipment and other nearby installations. Connect in such a way as to facilitate future disconnecting with minimum interference with other items in the vicinity. E. Right of Way: Give to raceways and piping systems installed at a required slope. 3.2 SLEEVE INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS A. Electrical penetrations occur when raceways, cables, wireways, cable trays, or busways penetrate concrete slabs, concrete or masonry walls, or fire-rated floor and wall assemblies. B. Coordinate sleeve selection and application with selection and application of firestopping specified in Division 7 Section "Through-Penetration Firestop Systems." C. Concrete Slabs and Walls: Install sleeves for penetrations unless core-drilled holes or formed openings are used. Install sleeves during erection of slabs and walls. D. Use pipe sleeves unless penetration arrangement requires rectangular sleeved opening. E. Rectangular Sleeve Minimum Metal Thickness: 1. For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter less than 50 inches and no side greater than 16 inches, thickness shall be inch. 2. For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter equal to, or greater than, 50 inches and 1 or more sides equal to, or greater than, 16 inches, thickness shall be inch. F. Fire-Rated Assemblies: Install sleeves for penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies unless openings compatible with firestop system used are fabricated during construction of floor or wall. G. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces of walls. H. Extend sleeves installed in floors 2 inches above finished floor level. I. Size pipe sleeves to provide 1/4-inch annular clear space between sleeve and raceway or cable unless sleeve seal is to be installed. 10/26/15 ET 109/109A (IU# )

418 Vector Consulting, LLC SECTION PAGE 4 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS J. Seal space outside of sleeves with grout for penetrations of concrete and masonry and with approved joint compound for gypsum board assemblies. K. Interior Penetrations of Non-Fire-Rated Walls and Floors: Seal annular space between sleeve and raceway or cable, using joint sealant appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint. Refer to Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for materials and installation. L. Fire-Rated-Assembly Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors at raceway and cable penetrations. Install sleeves and seal raceway and cable penetration sleeves with firestop materials. Comply with Division 7 Section "Through-Penetration Firestop Systems." Division 26 contractor shall be responsible for all firestopping associated with his work. M. Roof-Penetration Sleeves: Seal penetration of individual raceways and cables with flexible boot-type flashing units applied in coordination with roofing work. N. Aboveground, Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Seal penetrations using sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals. O. Underground, Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Install cast-iron "wall pipes" for sleeves. Size sleeves to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between raceway or cable and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals. 3.3 SLEEVE-SEAL INSTALLATION A. Install to seal underground, exterior wall penetrations. B. Use type and number of sealing elements recommended by manufacturer for raceway or cable material and size. Position raceway or cable in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between raceway or cable and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal. 3.4 FIRESTOPPING A. Apply firestopping to electrical penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies to restore original fire-resistance rating of assembly. Firestopping materials and installation requirements are specified in Division 7 Section "Through-Penetration Firestop Systems." 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspect installed sleeve and sleeve-seal installations and associated firestopping for damage and faulty work. END OF SECTION /26/15 ET 109/109A (IU# )

419 Vector Consulting, LLC SECTION PAGE 1 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Provide demolition required for the removal of systems and equipment made obsolete by this project and as determined by the Architect/Engineer or Owner. 2. Non-destructive removal of systems, materials and equipment for reuse or salvage as shown on the drawings or requested by the Owner. 3. Removal of debris from site and legal disposal of same. 4. Removal of all abandoned or obsolete exposed materials and equipment for a clean and finished installation. 5. All hazardous material shall be disposed of according to all applicable state and federal codes and standards. 1.3 CONDITIONS A. Coordination: It shall be expected that the contractor understands that adjacent areas need to remain in operation and that services to these areas need to be maintained. A schedule will be worked out prior to beginning work and as many criteria for operation as possible will be explained. Contractor cooperation shall be expected in all conditions. 1. Certain areas of the building must remain operational during different phases of construction. The contractor shall provide temporary services to all devices, lighting, equipment, systems, etc in these areas. 2. The Contractor shall provide material and labor necessary to maintain operation to all equipment required above and other equipment as required by the Owner including temporary power, temporary emergency generator and other services. B. Phasing: 1. Prior to commencing demolition in any area of the work, notify the owner five working days in advance to insure that no adjacent occupied areas will be disturbed. The Owner shall identify all systems equipment and wiring that must remain. Do not perform any demolition without coordination with the Owner. 2. Demolition phasing must be approved by the Owner prior to commencement of operations. 3. Removal of debris and construction traffic will be limited to specific areas. Confirm all operations with Owner prior to commencement of work. C. Codes: In addition to complying with all pertinent codes and regulations, comply with the requirements of those insurance carriers providing coverage for this work. D. Burning: On site burning will not be permitted. 10/26/15 ET 109/109A (IU# )

420 Vector Consulting, LLC SECTION PAGE 2 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS E. Adjacent Materials: 1. During the execution of the work, primary consideration shall be given to protecting from damage the structure, furnishings, finishes and the like which are not specifically indicated to be remove and disposed. 2. Provide and maintain temporary partitions or dust barriers adequate to keep dirt, dust, noise and other particles from being transferred to adjacent areas. 3. Existing items or surfaces to remain which are damaged as a result of this work shall be refinished, repaired, or replaced to the satisfaction of the Owner at no additional cost. F. Transit Services: 1. Locate and identify electrical services passing through affected areas and serving areas outside the work limits. 2. Services to areas outside work limits shall be maintained uninterrupted unless specifically authorized otherwise in writing by the Owner. When transient services must be interrupted, provide temporary services for areas outside the work limits. 3. Provide additional conduit and wire as required to relocate any existing services to make way for new installations required or to maintain services to areas outside the work area. PART 2 - PRODUCTS NOT APPLICABLE PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 DEMOLITION A. Site Inspection: 1. The Contract Documents do not propose to show all systems, materials, or equipment existing on the project that will require demolition. 2. Before commencing work of this section, verify with the Owner all systems, materials, and equipment to be removed and those to be preserved. B. Scheduling: 1. Schedule all work in a careful manner with all necessary considerations for public and adjacent areas. 2. Avoid interference with the use of adjacent areas and passage to and from these areas. 3. Prior to commencing demolition in any area, notify the Owner five working days in advance. C. Abandoned Materials and Equipment: Items so indicated on the contract documents to be removed and not indicated or specified to be saved or retained shall be demolished, removed, demounted, or disconnected in the best possible manner to ensure that no damage will result to other adjacent items or surfaces to remain. D. Salvage: 1. During removal of items so indicated, caution shall be used to eliminate damage to any equipment having salvage value. 2. All reusable salvage material shall remain the property of the Owner and be retained for his inspection. Only items so inspected and rejected by the Owner shall be disposed of by the contractor. All other such items shall be turned over and deposited as directed by the owner. The 10/26/15 ET 109/109A (IU# )

421 Vector Consulting, LLC SECTION PAGE 3 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS owner will designate those items to be salvaged. All other items shall be disposed of by the contractor. E. Disposal and Clean-Up: 1. Areas in which demolition and salvage work is being done shall be cleaned daily. 2. Dirt, dust, debris, unsalvageable and unusable items and like shall be totally removed from the project site daily. 3. Refuse shall be allowed to block or otherwise impair circulation in corridors, stairs, sidewalks or other traffic areas. 4. Fluorescent lamps and ballasts shall be treated as hazardous waste and disposed of in accordance with all state regulations. 5. The existing medium voltage transformers contain PCB s. Refer to the drawings for disposal information. END OF SECTION /26/15 ET 109/109A (IU# )

422 .

423 Vector Consulting, LLC SECTION PAGE 1 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes building wires and cables and associated connectors, splices, and terminations for wiring systems rated 600 V and less. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Qualification Data: For testing agency. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. B. Comply with NFPA 70. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES A. Manufacturers: 1. American Insulated Wire Corp.; a Leviton Company. 2. General Cable Corporation. 3. Senator Wire & Cable Company. 4. Southwire Company. B. Refer to Part 3 "Conductor and Insulation Applications" Article for insulation type, cable construction, and ratings. C. Conductor Material: Copper complying with NEMA WC 5; solid conductor for No. 10 AWG and smaller, stranded for No. 8 AWG and larger. D. Conductor Insulation Types: Type THHN-THWN, XHHW complying with NEMA WC 5. 10/26/15 ET 109/109A (IU# )

424 Vector Consulting, LLC SECTION PAGE 2 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 2.2 CONNECTORS AND SPLICES A. Manufacturers: 1. AMP Incorporated/Tyco International. 2. Hubbell/Anderson. 3. O-Z/Gedney; EGS Electrical Group LLC. 4. 3M Company; Electrical Products Division. B. Description: Factory-fabricated connectors and splices of size, ampacity rating, material, type, and class for application and service indicated. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 CONDUCTOR AND INSULATION APPLICATIONS A. Service Entrance: Type XHHW, single conductors in raceway. B. Unconcealed Feeders: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway. C. Feeders Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, and Partitions: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway. D. Feeders Concealed in Concrete, below Slabs-on-Grade, and in Crawlspaces: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway. E. Branch Circuits Concealed above Ceilings and in Walls, and Partitions: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway. F. Branch Circuits Concealed in Concrete and below Slabs-on-Grade: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway. G. Fire Alarm Circuits: All wire and cabling to be FPL rated. Initiating loops and control/monitoring circuits shall be stranded, copper, shielded, 16 AWG twisted pair cable. Notification appliance circuits and 24 VDC power circuits shall be 14 AWG solid copper conductor. Where terminals on approved equipment will not accommodate 14 AWG conductors, appropriate terminal lugs shall be used. All cabling shall be in conduit. H. Class 1 Control Circuits: Type THHN-THWN, in raceway. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Conceal cables in finished walls, ceilings, and floors, unless otherwise indicated. B. Use manufacturer-approved pulling compound or lubricant where necessary; compound used must not deteriorate conductor or insulation. Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended maximum pulling tensions and sidewall pressure values. C. Use pulling means, including fish tape, cable, rope, and basket-weave wire/cable grips, that will not damage cables or raceway. D. Support cables according to Division 26 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods." 10/26/15 ET 109/109A (IU# )

425 Vector Consulting, LLC SECTION PAGE 3 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES E. Seal around cables penetrating fire-rated elements according to Division 7 Section "Through-Penetration Firestop Systems." F. Identify and color-code conductors and cables according to Division 26 Section Electrical Identification." G. All power cables shall be installed in conduit. 3.3 CONNECTIONS A. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B. B. Make splices and taps that are compatible with conductor material and that possess equivalent or better mechanical strength and insulation ratings than unspliced conductors. No splices shall be allowed in homeruns unless approved by owner. C. Wiring at Outlets: Install conductor at each outlet, with at least 12 inches of slack. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing: Perform the following field quality-control testing: 1. After installing conductors and cables and before electrical circuitry has been energized, megger test for compliance with requirements. END OF SECTION /26/15 ET 109/109A (IU# )

426 .

427 Vector Consulting, LLC SECTION PAGE 1 GROUNDING AND BONDING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY 1. This Section includes methods and materials for grounding systems. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Other Informational Submittals: Plans showing dimensioned as-built locations of grounding features specified in Part 3 "Field Quality Control" Article, including the following: 1. Grounding arrangements and connections for separately derived systems. 2. Grounding for sensitive electronic equipment. C. Qualification Data: For testing agency and testing agency's field supervisor. D. Field quality-control test reports. E. Operation and Maintenance Data: For grounding to include the following in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals: 1. Instructions for periodic testing and inspection of grounding features at ground rings, grounding connections for separately derived systems based on NFPA 70B a. Tests shall be to determine if ground resistance or impedance values remain within specified maximums, and instructions shall recommend corrective action if they do not. b. Include recommended testing intervals. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. B. Comply with UL 467 for grounding and bonding materials and equipment. 10/26/15 ET 109/109A (IU# )

428 Vector Consulting, LLC SECTION PAGE 2 GROUNDING AND BONDING PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 CONDUCTORS A. Insulated Conductors: Copper wire or cable insulated for 600 V unless otherwise required by applicable Code or authorities having jurisdiction. B. Bare Copper Conductors: 1. Solid Conductors: ASTM B Stranded Conductors: ASTM B Tinned Conductors: ASTM B 33. C. Grounding Bus: Rectangular bars of annealed copper, 1/4 by 2 inches in cross section, unless otherwise indicated; with insulators. 2.2 CONNECTORS A. Listed and labeled by a nationally recognized testing laboratory acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for applications in which used, and for specific types, sizes, and combinations of conductors and other items connected. B. Bolted Connectors for Conductors and Pipes: Copper or copper alloy, bolted pressure-type, with at least two bolts. 1. Pipe Connectors: Clamp type, sized for pipe. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 APPLICATIONS A. Conductors: Install solid conductor for No. 10 AWG and smaller, and stranded conductors for No. 8 AWG and larger, unless otherwise indicated. B. Conductor Terminations and Connections: 1. Pipe and Equipment Grounding Conductor Terminations: Bolted connectors. 3.2 EQUIPMENT GROUNDING A. Install insulated equipment grounding conductors with all feeders and branch circuits. B. Install insulated equipment grounding conductors with the following items, in addition to those required by NFPA 70: 1. Feeders and branch circuits. 2. Lighting circuits. 3. Receptacle circuits. 4. Flexible raceway runs. 5. Metal-clad cable runs. 10/26/15 ET 109/109A (IU# )

429 Vector Consulting, LLC SECTION PAGE 3 GROUNDING AND BONDING 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Grounding Conductors: Route along shortest and straightest paths possible, unless otherwise indicated or required by Code. Avoid obstructing access or placing conductors where they may be subjected to strain, impact, or damage. B. Bonding Straps and Jumpers: Install in locations accessible for inspection and maintenance, except where routed through short lengths of conduit. 1. Bonding to Structure: Bond straps directly to basic structure, taking care not to penetrate any adjacent parts. 2. Bonding to Equipment Mounted on Vibration Isolation Hangers and Supports: Install so vibration is not transmitted to rigidly mounted equipment. END OF SECTION /26/15 ET 109/109A (IU# )

430 .

431 Vector Consulting, LLC SECTION PAGE 1 ELECTRICAL SUPPORTS AND RESTRAINTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Hangers and supports for electrical equipment and systems. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. EMT: Electrical metallic tubing. B. IBC: International Building Code. C. IMC: Intermediate metal conduit. D. NBC: National Building Code. E. OSHPD: Office of Statewide Health Planning and Development. F. RMC: Rigid metal conduit. G. SBC: Standard Building Code. H. IBC: International Building Code. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel." PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the manufacturers specified. 10/26/15 ET 109/109A (IU# )

432 Vector Consulting, LLC SECTION PAGE 2 ELECTRICAL SUPPORTS AND RESTRAINTS 2.2 SUPPORT, ANCHORAGE, AND ATTACHMENT COMPONENTS A. Rated Strength: Adequate in tension, shear, and pullout force to resist maximum loads calculated or imposed under this Project, with a minimum structural safety factor of five times the applied force. B. Steel Slotted Support Systems: Comply with MFMA-3, factory-fabricated components for field assembly. 1. Manufacturers: a. Cooper B-Line; a division of Cooper Industries. b. ERICO International Corporation. c. Allied Support Systems; Power-Strut Unit. d. GS Metals Corp. e. Michigan Hanger Co., Inc.; O-Strut Div. f. National Pipe Hanger Corp. g. Thomas & Betts Corporation. h. Unistrut; Tyco International, Ltd. i. Wesanco, Inc. 2. Finishes: a. Metallic Coatings: Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and applied according to MFMA-3. b. Nonmetallic Coatings: Manufacturer's standard PVC, polyurethane, or polyester coating applied according to MFMA-3. c. Painted Coatings: Manufacturer's standard painted coating applied according to MFMA Channel Dimensions: Selected for structural loading and applicable seismic forces. C. Nonmetallic Slotted Support Systems: Structural-grade, factory-formed, glass-fiber-resin channels and angles with 9/16-inch-diameter holes at a maximum of 8 inches o.c., in at least 1 surface. 1. Manufacturers: a. Allied Support Systems; Aickinstrut Unit. b. Cooper B-Line; a division of Cooper Industries. c. Fabco Plastics Wholesale Limited. d. Seasafe, Inc. 2. Fittings and Accessories: Products of channel and angle manufacturer and designed for use with those items. 3. Fitting and Accessory Materials: Same as channels and angles. 4. Rated Strength: Selected to suit structural loading and applicable seismic forces. D. Raceway and Cable Supports: As described in NECA 1. E. Conduit and Cable Support Devices: Steel hangers, clamps, and associated fittings, designed for types and sizes of raceway or cable to be supported. F. Support for Conductors in Vertical Conduit: Factory-fabricated assembly consisting of threaded body and insulating wedging plug or plugs for non-armored electrical conductors or cables in riser conduits. Plugs shall have number, size, and shape of conductor gripping pieces as required to suit individual conductors or cables supported. Body shall be malleable iron. G. Structural Steel for Fabricated Supports and Restraints: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and galvanized. 10/26/15 ET 109/109A (IU# )

433 Vector Consulting, LLC SECTION PAGE 3 ELECTRICAL SUPPORTS AND RESTRAINTS H. Mounting, Anchoring, and Attachment Components: Items for fastening electrical items or their supports to building surfaces include the following: 1. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Threaded-steel stud, for use in hardened portland cement concrete, steel, or wood, with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used. a. Manufacturers: 1) Hilti, Inc. 2) ITW Construction Products. 3) MKT Fastening, LLC. 4) Simpson Strong-Tie Co. Inc. 2. Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type, zinc-coated steel, for use in hardened portland cement concrete with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials in which used. a. Manufacturers: 1) Cooper B-Line; a division of Cooper Industries. 2) Empire Tool and Manufacturing Co., Inc 3) Hilti, Inc. 4) ITW Construction Products. 5) MKT Fastening, LLC. 6) Powers Fasteners. 3. Concrete Inserts: Steel or malleable-iron slotted-support-system units similar to MSS Type 18; complying with MFMA-3 or MSS SP Clamps for Attachment to Steel Structural Elements: MSS SP-58, type suitable for attached structural element. 5. Through Bolts: Structural type, hex head, high strength. Comply with ASTM A Toggle Bolts: All-steel springhead type. 7. Hanger Rods: Threaded steel. 2.3 FABRICATED METAL EQUIPMENT SUPPORT ASSEMBLIES A. Description: Welded or bolted, structural-steel shapes, shop or field fabricated to fit dimensions of supported equipment. B. Materials: Comply with requirements in Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications" for steel shapes and plates. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 APPLICATION A. Comply with NECA 1 for application of hangers and supports for electrical equipment and systems, except if requirements in this Section are stricter. B. Maximum Support Spacing and Minimum Hanger Rod Size for Raceway: Space supports for EMT, IMC, and RMC as required by NFPA 70. Minimum rod size shall be 1/4 inch in diameter. 10/26/15 ET 109/109A (IU# )

434 Vector Consulting, LLC SECTION PAGE 4 ELECTRICAL SUPPORTS AND RESTRAINTS C. Multiple Raceways or Cables: Install trapeze-type supports fabricated with steel slotted or other support system, sized so capacity can be increased by at least 50 percent in future without exceeding specified design load limits. 1. Secure raceways and cables to trapeze member with clamps approved for application by an agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Secure raceways and cables to these supports with single-bolt conduit clamps using spring friction action for retention in support channel. D. Spring-steel clamps designed for supporting single conduits without bolts may be used for 1-1/2-inch and smaller raceways serving branch circuits and communication systems above suspended ceilings and for fastening raceways to trapeze supports. 3.2 SUPPORT INSTALLATION A. Comply with NECA 1 for installation requirements, except as specified in this Article. B. Raceway Support Methods: In addition to methods described in NECA 1, EMT, IMC, and RMC may be supported by openings through structure members, as permitted in NFPA 70. C. Strength of Support Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of components so strength will be adequate to carry present and future static within specified loading limits. Minimum static design load used for strength determination shall be weight of supported components plus 200 lb. D. Mounting and Anchorage of Surface-Mounted Equipment and Components: Anchor and fasten electrical items and their supports to building structural elements by the following methods unless otherwise indicated by code: 1. To Wood: Fasten with lag screws or through bolts. 2. To New Concrete: Bolt to concrete inserts. 3. To Masonry: Approved toggle-type bolts on hollow masonry units and expansion anchor fasteners on solid masonry units. 4. To Existing Concrete: Expansion anchor fasteners. 5. Instead of expansion anchors, powder-actuated driven threaded studs provided with lock washers and nuts may be used in existing standard-weight concrete 4 inches thick or greater. Do not use for anchorage to lightweight-aggregate concrete or for slabs less than 4 inches thick. 6. To Steel: Beam clamps (MSS Type 19, 21, 23, 25, or 27) complying with MSS SP To Light Steel: Sheet metal screws. 8. Items Mounted on Hollow Walls and Nonstructural Building Surfaces: Mount cabinets, panelboards, disconnect switches, control enclosures, pull and junction boxes, transformers, and other devices on slotted-channel racks attached to substrate by means that meet seismic-restraint strength and anchorage requirements. E. Drill holes for expansion anchors in concrete at locations and to depths that avoid reinforcing bars. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF FABRICATED METAL SUPPORTS A. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation to support and anchor electrical materials and equipment. B. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M. END OF SECTION /26/15 ET 109/109A (IU# )

435 Vector Consulting, LLC SECTION PAGE 1 RACEWAYS AND BOXES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes raceways, fittings, boxes, enclosures, and cabinets for electrical wiring. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 7 Section "Through-Penetration Firestop Systems" for firestopping materials and installation at penetrations through walls, ceilings, and other fire-rated elements. 2. Division 26 Section "Wiring Devices" for devices installed in boxes and for floor-box service fittings. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. EMT: Electrical metallic tubing. B. ENT: Electrical nonmetallic tubing. C. FMC: Flexible metal conduit. D. IMC: Intermediate metal conduit. E. LFMC: Liquidtight flexible metal conduit. F. LFNC: Liquidtight flexible nonmetallic conduit. G. RNC: Rigid nonmetallic conduit. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details of components for raceways, fittings, boxes, enclosures, and cabinets. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. B. Comply with NFPA /26/15 ET 109/109A (IU# )

436 Vector Consulting, LLC SECTION PAGE 2 RACEWAYS AND BOXES 1.6 COORDINATION A. Coordinate layout and installation of raceways, boxes, enclosures, cabinets, and suspension system with other construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, fire-suppression system, and partition assemblies. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 METAL CONDUIT AND TUBING A. Manufacturers: 1. Grinnell Co./Tyco International; Allied Tube and Conduit Div. 2. LTV Steel Tubular Products Company. 3. O-Z Gedney; Unit of General Signal. 4. Wheatland Tube Co. B. Rigid Steel Conduit: ANSI C80.1. C. Aluminum Rigid Conduit: ANSI C80.5. D. IMC: ANSI C80.6. E. Rigid and IMC conduit fittings: 1. Fittings shall be threaded, corrosion resistant, malleable iron conduit bodies for GRC and IMC conduit. 2. No cast or indent type couplings shall be used. 3. No threadless fittings will be allowed. F. EMT and Fittings: ANSI C Fittings: steel compression type for EMT 2" and smaller; steel set-screw type for EMT larger than 2". 2. No cast or indent type couplings shall be used. G. FMC: Aluminum. H. LFMC: Flexible steel conduit with PVC jacket. I. Fittings: NEMA FB 1; compatible with conduit and tubing materials. 2.2 NONMETALLIC CONDUIT AND TUBING A. Manufacturers: 1. American International. 2. Anamet Electrical, Inc.; Anaconda Metal Hose. 3. Arnco Corp. 4. Cantex Inc. 5. Certainteed Corp.; Pipe & Plastics Group. 6. Condux International. 7. ElecSYS, Inc. 10/26/15 ET 109/109A (IU# )

437 Vector Consulting, LLC SECTION PAGE 3 RACEWAYS AND BOXES 8. Electri-Flex Co. 9. Lamson & Sessions; Carlon Electrical Products. 10. Manhattan/CDT/Cole-Flex. 11. RACO; Division of Hubbell, Inc. 12. Spiralduct, Inc./AFC Cable Systems, Inc. 13. Thomas & Betts Corporation. B. ENT: NEMA TC 13. C. RNC: NEMA TC 2, Schedule 40 and Schedule 80 PVC. D. ENT and RNC Fittings: NEMA TC 3; match to conduit or tubing type and material. E. LFNC: UL METAL WIREWAYS A. Manufacturers: 1. Hoffman. 2. Square D. B. Material and Construction: Sheet metal sized and shaped as indicated, NEMA 1 or 3R as required. C. Fittings and Accessories: Include couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints, adapters, hold-down straps, end caps, and other fittings to match and mate with wireways as required for complete system. D. Select features, unless otherwise indicated, as required to complete wiring system and to comply with NFPA 70. E. Wireway Covers: Hinged type. F. Finish: Manufacturer's standard enamel finish. 2.4 BOXES, ENCLOSURES, AND CABINETS A. Manufacturers: 1. Cooper Crouse-Hinds; Div. of Cooper Industries, Inc. 2. Emerson/General Signal; Appleton Electric Company. 3. Erickson Electrical Equipment Co. 4. Hoffman. 5. Hubbell, Inc.; Killark Electric Manufacturing Co. 6. O-Z/Gedney; Unit of General Signal. 7. RACO; Division of Hubbell, Inc. 8. Robroy Industries, Inc.; Enclosure Division. 9. Scott Fetzer Co.; Adalet-PLM Division. 10. Spring City Electrical Manufacturing Co. 11. Thomas & Betts Corporation. 12. Walker Systems, Inc.; Wiremold Company (The). 13. Woodhead, Daniel Company; Woodhead Industries, Inc. Subsidiary. B. Sheet Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: NEMA OS 1. 10/26/15 ET 109/109A (IU# )

438 Vector Consulting, LLC SECTION PAGE 4 RACEWAYS AND BOXES C. Cast-Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: NEMA FB 1, Type FD, with gasketed cover. D. Floor Boxes: See drawings. E. Small Sheet Metal Pull and Junction Boxes: NEMA OS 1. F. Cast-Metal Pull and Junction Boxes: NEMA FB 1, cast aluminum with gasketed cover. G. Hinged-Cover Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1, with continuous hinge cover and flush latch. 1. Metal Enclosures: Steel, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel. 2. Nonmetallic Enclosures: Plastic, finished inside with radio-frequency-resistant paint. H. Cabinets: NEMA 250, Type 1, galvanized steel box with removable interior panel and removable front, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel. Hinged door in front cover with flush latch and concealed hinge. Key latch to match panelboards. Include metal barriers to separate wiring of different systems and voltage and include accessory feet where required for freestanding equipment. 2.5 FACTORY FINISHES A. Finish: For raceway, enclosure, or cabinet components, provide manufacturer's standard paint applied to factory-assembled surface raceways, enclosures, and cabinets before shipping. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 RACEWAY APPLICATION A. Indoors: 1. Exposed: IMC. 2. Electrical Feeders: IMC/RGS. 3. Mechanical and Electrical Rooms: IMC/RGS. a. Temperature control conduits shall be EMT. 4. Concealed: a. 2 trade size and larger: IMC. b. 1-1/2 and smaller: EMT. 5. Boxes and Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1. B. Minimum Raceway Size: 3/4-inch trade size. C. Raceway Fittings: Compatible with raceways and suitable for use and location. 1. PVC Externally Coated, Rigid Steel Conduits: Use only fittings approved for use with that material. Patch all nicks and scrapes in PVC coating after installing conduits. D. Terminations: 1. Where raceways are terminated with locknuts and bushings, align raceways to enter squarely and install locknuts with dished part against box. Use two locknuts, one inside and one outside box. 10/26/15 ET 109/109A (IU# )

439 Vector Consulting, LLC SECTION PAGE 5 RACEWAYS AND BOXES 2. Where raceways are terminated with threaded hubs, screw raceways or fittings tightly into hub so end bears against wire protection shoulder. Where chase nipples are used, align raceways so coupling is square to box; tighten chase nipple so no threads are exposed. E. Install pull wires in empty raceways. Use polypropylene or monofilament plastic line with not less than 200-lb. tensile strength. Leave at least 12 inches of slack at each end of pull wire. F. Telephone and Signal System Raceways, 2-inch Trade Size and Smaller: In addition to above requirements, install raceways in maximum lengths of 100 feet and with a maximum of two 90-degree bends or equivalent. Separate lengths with pull or junction boxes where necessary to comply with these requirements. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Keep raceways at least 6 inches away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hot-water pipes. Install horizontal raceway runs above water and steam piping. B. Complete raceway installation before starting conductor installation. C. Support raceways as specified in Division 26 Section "Electrical Supports." D. Install temporary closures to prevent foreign matter from entering raceways. E. Protect stub-ups from damage where conduits rise through floor slabs. Arrange so curved portions of bends are not visible above the finished slab. F. Make bends and offsets so ID is not reduced. Keep legs of bends in the same plane and keep straight legs of offsets parallel, unless otherwise indicated. G. Conceal conduit and EMT within finished walls, ceilings, and floors, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Install concealed raceways with a minimum of bends in the shortest practical distance, considering type of building construction and obstructions, unless otherwise indicated. H. Install exposed raceways parallel or at right angles to nearby surfaces or structural members and follow surface contours as much as possible. 1. Run parallel or banked raceways together on common supports. 2. Make parallel bends in parallel or banked runs. Use factory elbows only where elbows can be installed parallel; otherwise, provide field bends for parallel raceways. I. Join raceways with fittings designed and approved for that purpose and make joints tight. 1. Use insulating bushings to protect conductors. J. Tighten set screws of threadless fittings with suitable tools. K. Terminations: 1. Where raceways are terminated with locknuts and bushings, align raceways to enter squarely and install locknuts with dished part against box. Use two locknuts, one inside and one outside box. 2. Where raceways are terminated with threaded hubs, screw raceways or fittings tightly into hub so end bears against wire protection shoulder. Where chase nipples are used, align raceways so coupling is square to box; tighten chase nipple so no threads are exposed. 10/26/15 ET 109/109A (IU# )

440 Vector Consulting, LLC SECTION PAGE 6 RACEWAYS AND BOXES L. Pull boxes: Conduit shall be installed with NO MORE THAN the equivalent of (3) 90 degree bends in any conduit run. Pull boxes, properly sized to the latest requirements of the NEC, shall be installed if more than the equivalent of (3) 90 degree bends are needed in a conduit run. The location of the box shall be such that if eliminates a 90 degree bend in the conduit run. M. Install pull wires in empty raceways. Use polypropylene or monofilament plastic line with not less than 200-lb tensile strength. Leave at least 12 inches of slack at each end of pull wire. N. Install raceway sealing fittings at suitable, approved, and accessible locations and fill them with UL-listed sealing compound. For concealed raceways, install each fitting in a flush steel box with a blank cover plate having a finish similar to that of adjacent plates or surfaces. Install raceway sealing fittings at the following points: 1. Where conduits pass from warm to cold locations, such as boundaries of refrigerated spaces. 2. Where otherwise required by NFPA 70. O. Flexible Connections: Use maximum of 72 inches of flexible conduit for recessed and semi-recessed lighting fixtures; for equipment subject to vibration, noise transmission, or movement; and for all motors. Use LFMC in damp or wet locations. Install separate ground conductor across flexible connections. P. Surface Raceways: Install a separate, green, ground conductor in raceways from junction box supplying raceways to receptacle or fixture ground terminals. Q. Install hinged-cover enclosures and cabinets plumb. Support at each corner. 3.3 PROTECTION A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure coatings, finishes, and cabinets are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. 1. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended by manufacturer. 2. Repair damage to PVC or paint finishes with matching touchup coating recommended by manufacturer. 3.4 CLEANING A. After completing installation of exposed, factory-finished raceways and boxes, inspect exposed finishes and repair damaged finishes. END OF SECTION /26/15 ET 109/109A (IU# )

441 Vector Consulting, LLC SECTION PAGE 1 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Identification for raceway. 2. Identification for conductors and communication and control cable. 3. Warning labels and signs. 4. Instruction signs. 5. Equipment identification labels. 6. Miscellaneous identification products. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with ANSI A13.1 and ANSI C2. B. Comply with NFPA 70. C. Comply with 29 CFR COORDINATION A. Coordinate identification names, abbreviations, colors, and other features with requirements in the Contract Documents, Shop Drawings, manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and the Operation and Maintenance Manual, and with those required by codes, standards, and 29 CFR Use consistent designations throughout Project. B. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting of surfaces where devices are to be applied. C. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with location of access panels and doors. D. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 RACEWAY IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS A. Comply with ANSI A13.1 for minimum size of letters for legend and for minimum length of color field for each raceway and cable size. 10/26/15 ET 109/109A (IU# )

442 Vector Consulting, LLC SECTION PAGE 2 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION B. Color for Printed Legend: 1. Power Circuits: Black letters on a white field. 2. Legend: Indicate system or service and voltage, if applicable. 3. Self-Adhesive Vinyl Labels: Pre-printed, flexible label laminated with a clear, weather- and chemical-resistant coating and matching wraparound adhesive tape for securing ends of legend label. 4. Self-Adhesive Vinyl Tape: Colored, heavy duty, waterproof, fade resistant; 2 inches wide; compounded for outdoor use. 2.2 CONDUCTOR AND COMMUNICATION- AND CONTROL-CABLE IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS A. Color-Coding Conductor Tape: Colored, self-adhesive vinyl tape not less than 3-mils thick by 1- to 2- inches wide. B. Marker Tapes: Vinyl or vinyl-cloth, self-adhesive wraparound type, with circuit identification legend machine printed by thermal transfer or equivalent process. 2.3 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION A. Engraved, Laminated Acrylic or Melamine Label: Punched or drilled for screw mounting. B. White letters on a dark-gray background. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch. 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS A. Cable Ties: Fungus-inert, self-extinguishing, 1-piece, self-locking, Type 6/6 nylon cable ties. 1. Minimum Width: 3/16 inch. 2. Tensile Strength: 50 lb, minimum. 3. Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 185 deg F. 4. Color: Black, except where used for color-coding. 5. Fasteners for Labels and Signs: Self-tapping, stainless-steel screws or stainless-steel machine screws with nuts and flat and lock washers. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 APPLICATION A. Conduit: Identify all conduit with black on white for power and temperature control, painted red for fire alarm. B. Junction Boxes: Identify all junction box covers indicating the panel and circuit contained in the box. Use permanent maker for this identification, except painted red for fire alarm. C. Power-Circuit Conductor Identification: For conductors No. 1/0 AWG and larger pull and junction boxes use color-coding conductor tape. Identify source and circuit number of each set of conductors. For single conductor cables, identify phase in addition to the above. 10/26/15 ET 109/109A (IU# )

443 Vector Consulting, LLC SECTION PAGE 3 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION D. Branch-Circuit Conductor Identification: All branch circuit conductors shall be color coded and have circuit number labels at each end. E. Conductors to Be Extended in the Future: Attach write-on tags to conductors and list source and circuit number. F. Auxiliary Electrical Systems Conductor Identification: Identify field-installed alarm, control, signal, sound, intercommunications, voice, and data connections. 1. Identify conductors, cables, and terminals in enclosures and at junctions, terminals, and pull points. Identify by system and circuit designation. Temp control shall be labeled with black on white and fire alarm shall be red. 2. Use system of marker tape designations that is uniform and consistent with system used by manufacturer for factory-installed connections. 3. Coordinate identification with Project Drawings, manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and Operation and Maintenance Manual. 4. Equipment Identification Labels: On each unit of equipment, install unique designation label that is consistent with wiring diagrams, schedules, and Operation and Maintenance Manual. Apply labels to disconnect switches and protection equipment, central or master units, control panels, control stations, terminal cabinets, and racks of each system. Systems include power, lighting, control, communication, signal, monitoring, and alarm systems unless equipment is provided with its own identification. 5. Labeling Instructions: a. Indoor Equipment: Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label. Unless otherwise indicated, provide a single line of text with 1/2-inch-high letters on 1-1/2-inch-high label; where 2 lines of text are required, use labels 2 inches high. b. Elevated Components: Increase sizes of labels and letters to those appropriate for viewing from the floor. 6. Equipment to Be Labeled: a. Access doors and panels for concealed electrical items. 7. Receptacle and Switch Plates: a. Label receptacle and switch plates with black on clear labels with panel/circuit number. 8. Telecom Plates: a. Label telecom plates with black on clear labels with telecom ID as directed by UITS. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Verify identity of each item before installing identification products. B. Location: Install identification materials and devices at locations for most convenient viewing without interference with operation and maintenance of equipment. C. Apply identification devices to surfaces that require finish after completing finish work. D. Self-Adhesive Identification Products: Clean surfaces before application, using materials and methods recommended by manufacturer of identification device. 10/26/15 ET 109/109A (IU# )

444 Vector Consulting, LLC SECTION PAGE 4 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION E. Attach nonadhesive signs and plastic labels with screws and auxiliary hardware appropriate to the location and substrate. F. System Identification Color Banding for Raceways and Cables: Each color band shall completely encircle cable or conduit. Place adjacent bands of two-color markings in contact, side by side. Locate bands at changes in direction, at penetrations of walls and floors, at 50-foot maximum intervals in straight runs, and at 25-foot maximum intervals in congested areas. G. Color-Coding for Phase Identification, 600 V and Less: Use the colors listed below for ungrounded service, feeder, and branch-circuit conductors. 1. Colors for 208/120-V Circuits: a. Phase A: Black. b. Phase B: Red. c. Phase C: Blue. d. Neutral: White. e. Ground: Green. 2. Colors for 480/277-V Circuits: a. Phase A: Brown. b. Phase B: Orange. c. Phase C: Yellow. d. Neutral: Gray. e. Ground: Green. H. Field-Applied, Color-Coding Conductor Tape: Apply in half-lapped turns for a minimum distance of 6 inches from terminal points and in boxes where splices or taps are made. Apply last two turns of tape with no tension to prevent possible unwinding. Locate bands to avoid obscuring factory cable markings. END OF SECTION /26/15 ET 109/109A (IU# )

445 Vector Consulting, LLC SECTION PAGE 1 WIRING DEVICES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Single and duplex receptacles, ground-fault circuit interrupters, integral surge suppression units, and isolated-ground receptacles. 2. Single- and double-pole snap switches and dimmer switches. 3. Device wall plates. 4. Pin and sleeve connectors and receptacles. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. EMI: Electromagnetic interference. B. GFCI: Ground-fault circuit interrupter. C. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride. D. RFI: Radio-frequency interference. E. TVSS: Transient voltage surge suppressor. F. UTP: Unshielded twisted pair. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: List of legends and description of materials and process used for premarking wall plates. C. Samples: One for each type of device and wall plate specified, in each color specified. D. Field quality-control test reports. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of wiring device through one source from a single manufacturer. B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. 10/26/15 ET 109/109A (IU# )

446 Vector Consulting, LLC SECTION PAGE 2 WIRING DEVICES C. Comply with NFPA 70. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Wiring Devices: a. Eagle Electric Manufacturing Co., Inc. b. Hubbell Incorporated; Wiring Device-Kellems. c. Leviton Mfg. Company Inc. d. Pass & Seymour/Legrand; Wiring Devices Div. 2.2 RECEPTACLES A. Straight-Blade-Type Receptacles: Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6, DSCC W-C-596G, and UL 498, rated 20A, 125 VAC, one-piece brass backstrap and single point grounding type. B. Straight-Blade and Locking Receptacles: Extra heavy duty grade. C. GFCI Receptacles: Straight blade, feed through type, Heavy-Duty grade, with integral NEMA WD 6, Configuration 5-20R duplex receptacle; complying with UL 498 and UL 943 rated 20A, 125 VAC. Design units for installation in a 2-3/4-inch-deep outlet box without an adapter. 2.3 SWITCHES A. Single- and Double-Pole Switches: Comply with DSCC W-C-896F and UL 20, rated 20A, 120/277 VAC. B. Snap Switches: Heavy Duty grade, quiet type, rated 20A, 277/120 VAC. C. Dimmer Switches: Modular, full-wave, solid-state units with integral, quiet on/off switches and audible frequency and EMI/RFI filters. 1. Control: Continuously adjustable slider; with single-pole or three-way switching to suit connections. 2. Incandescent Lamp Dimmers: Modular, 2000va, 120 V, 60 Hz with continuously adjustable slider; single pole with soft tap or other quiet switch; EMI/RFI filter to eliminate interference; and 5-inch wire connecting leads. 3. Fluorescent Lamp Dimmer Switches: Modular; compatible with dimmer ballasts; trim potentiometer to adjust low-end dimming; dimmer-ballast combination capable of consistent dimming with low end not greater than 20 percent of full brightness. 2.4 WALL PLATES A. Single and combination types to match corresponding wiring devices. 1. Plate-Securing Screws: Metal with head color to match plate finish. 2. Material for Finished Spaces: Brushed stainless steel (302/204), satin smooth finish. 10/26/15 ET 109/109A (IU# )

447 Vector Consulting, LLC SECTION PAGE 3 WIRING DEVICES 3. Material for Wet Locations: High impact polycarbonate type in-use cover, and listed and labeled for use in "wet locations" similar to Raco Rayntite II series. 2.5 FINISHES A. Color: 1. Wiring Devices: Gray devices, unless otherwise indicated or required by NFPA 70. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install devices and assemblies level, plumb, and square with building lines. B. Install wall dimmers to achieve indicated rating after derating for ganging according to manufacturer's written instructions. C. Install unshared neutral conductors on line and load side of dimmers according to manufacturers' written instructions. D. Arrangement of Devices: Unless otherwise indicated, mount flush, with long dimension vertical, and with grounding terminal of receptacles on bottom. Group adjacent switches under single, multigang wall plates. E. Remove wall plates and protect devices and assemblies during painting. F. Adjust locations of floor service outlets and service poles to suit arrangement of partitions and furnishings. 3.2 IDENTIFICATION A. Comply with Division 26 Section "Electrical Identification." 1. Receptacles: Identify panelboard and circuit number from which served. Use self adhesive machine printing with black lettering on face of plate, and durable wire markers or tags inside outlet boxes. 3.3 CONNECTIONS A. Ground equipment according to Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding." B. Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section "Conductors and Cables." C. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B. 10/26/15 ET 109/109A (IU# )

448 Vector Consulting, LLC SECTION PAGE 4 WIRING DEVICES 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports: 1. After installing wiring devices and after electrical circuitry has been energized, test for proper polarity, ground continuity, and compliance with requirements. 2. Test GFCI operation with both local and remote fault simulations according to manufacturer's written instructions. B. Remove malfunctioning units, replace with new units, and retest as specified above. END OF SECTION /26/15 ET 109/109A (IU# )

449 DIVISION 27 COMMUNICATIONS COMMUNICATIONS SCOPE OF WORK 1. This specification covers the furnishing and installation of materials for telecommunications system structured cabling, complete and in operating condition as indicated on drawings and/or as described herein The telecommunication systems herein specified provides for Information outlets and other low voltage signaling functions (such as for energy management and security systems) through twisted pair, fiber optic, and coaxial cable The system shall provide acceptable outlets for any telecommunication device, which requires connection to other devices, networks or information services serving general university needs. 2. Products shall be as listed in this document or as directed by the Owner. 3. Installation procedures shall be in accordance with industry acceptable practices, product manufacturer s recommendations, federal, state and local codes and standards, and shall include demolition and removal of materials as required to support the work. 4. This section includes tools, materials, equipment and labor necessary to complete a turnkey installation, including but not limited to the following items, which will be supplied by contractor unless otherwise noted by the University: 4.1. Cable trays, hangers, and mounting hardware 4.2. Conduit 4.3. Connecting blocks 4.4. Cross connect cable 4.5. Cross connect rings or spools 4.6. Equipment racks, mounting hardware and wire management 4.7. Labels for cables and receptacles 4.8. Modular station receptacles 4.9. Mounting brackets Painted Fire Retardant plywood backboards Riser cable Station blocks Station cables Velcro Tie wraps, bushings, and miscellaneous REFERENCES APPLICABLE CODES and STANDARDS Telecommunication design shall comply with Federal and State codes, regulations, and standards with variances adopted as standards by Indiana University and the State of Indiana. Applicable state and national standards include the latest editions of: 07/30/2014 gls Section 27 Page 1

450 1. ANSI/NFPA 70 National Electrical Code with Indiana Amendments, latest edition 2. BICSI CO-OSP Customer Owned Outside Plant Manual 3. BICSI 12th th Edition Telecommunications Distribution Methods Manual 4. BICSI 4 th Edition Customer Owned Outside Plant Design Reference Manual 5. TIA Standard TIA Color Marking of Thermoplastic Wire 6. FCC Rules and Regulations 7. Indiana Administrative Code, Title 675, Article 22, Indiana Fire Prevention Codes 8. Joint Commission Accreditation of Hospitals Code 9. J-STD-607-A Commercial Building Grounding (Earthing) and Bonding Requirements for Telecommunications 10. National Electrical Safety Code 11. NFPA 101: Life Safety Code 12. REA Standards for Engineering, Construction, and Installation 13. TIA Measurement of Optical Power Loss of Installed Single-Mode Fiber Cable Plant OFSTP TIA B Optical Power Loss Measurements for Installed Multimode Fiber Cable Plant OFSTP TIA 568-C Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling 16. TIA 569-C Commercial Building Standard for Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces 17. TIA 598-C - Optical Fiber Cable Color Coding 18. TIA Standard ANSI/TIA-607-B - Commercial Building Grounding and Bonding Requirements for Telecommunications 19. TIA 604 Standards on Fiber Optic Connector Intermateability 20. TIA 606-B Administration Standard for Commercial Telecommunications Infrastructure 21. TIA 758-B Customer Owned Outside Plant Telecommunications Cabling Standard 22. TIA Telecommunication Systems Bulletin TSB67 - Transmission Performance Specifications for Field Testing of Unshielded Twisted-Pair Cabling Systems 23. TSB-140 Additional Guidelines for Field Testing Length, Loss and Polarity of Optical Fiber Cabling Systems 24. IU Telecom Design Guidelines, at DEFINITIONS 1. OUTSIDE PLANT: Transmission facilities used in the distribution of voice, data, or video from point where it leaves one building and enters another, including copper, coax, fiber optics, and microwave. 2. ENTRANCE CABLE: The outside plant cable(s) that enter the building from the campus outside plant communication distribution network. 3. MAIN BUILDING TELECOMMUNICATION EQUIPMENT ROOM (IDF-1): The main telecommunication room located where the outside plant cabling and backbone cabling (risers) are interconnected This room may also serve as a floor telecommunication equipment room (IDF-2) Telecommunications equipment rooms shall not house systems other than telecom systems; servers, security system monitors, fire alarm monitors, building IP camera monitoring systems, audio systems, mechanical systems conduit and components, plumbing systems conduit and components, HVAC ducting and components, electrical and other systems requiring access by non-uits personnel must be located in other spaces. 4. FLOOR TELECOMMUNICATION EQUIPMENT ROOM (IDF-2): A telecommunication equipment 07/30/2014 gls Section 27 Page 2

451 room normally proved on every floor of the building Floor equipment rooms must best spaced such that the length of any horizontal cable run shall not exceed 295 feet, wire length, termination to termination. 5. BACKBONE CABLE (Riser): Cabling from the Building Telecommunication Equipment Room (IDF-1) to each Floor Telecommunication Equipment Room, including copper, coax, and fiber optics cabling. 6. STATION OUTLET BOX: The standard outlet box for telecommunications terminations shall be a double gang 5 x5 x2-7/8 minimum depth box, with mud ring sizes as required. 7. INFORMATION OUTLET: An assembly of interface ports for copper (data), coaxial (campus television), and fiber terminations (data); variations of arrangements are describe elsewhere in this document EXECUTION QUALITY ASSURANCE 1. Contractor s management team shall have demonstrated compliance with all applicable Indiana University UITS installation requirements as a prime contractor or subcontractor on no less than three (3) Indiana University projects The University may, at its discretion, require the names, previous project list, and references for the Contractor s management team and field personnel assigned to this project prior to the start of the work The University maintains the right to ask for replacement of management or field staff at any time during the project. 2. All cabling shall meet ANSI/TIA Termination and testing of the telecommunication cabling shall be performed by qualified telecommunication installer with at least 5 years experience that can assure the installation and testing parameters are met Experience with Category 6e installation is required Certification in training for Category 6A is required for Cat 6A jobs; experience in Category 6A installation is preferred Vendors and contractors shall have on staff a Building Industry Consulting Service International (BICSI) Registered Communications Distribution Designer (RCDD) The Vendor shall provide the name and stamp number of the RCDD assigned to this project to the appropriate UITS representative The RCDD shall approve construction design and upon completion of installation, certify compliance with the standards and installation practices as specified by this document. 4. Prior to commencing the work of this section, the contractor shall convene a meeting with Construction Manager, University Information Technology Services representative, and Engineering Services representative The meeting will cover Project Specifications, Addendum, Change orders, IDF layouts, labeling, and other project work, documents and site conditions System testing procedures and requirements shall be confirmed at this time Test report forms and schedules shall be provided for University review Inspection milestones will be set and notifications scheduled Meeting minutes will be distributed and will include agreements, action items and responsible party(s), for this meeting and for future meetings when required. 07/30/2014 gls Section 27 Page 3

452 5. Store materials and equipment in dry, environmentally controlled space. Do not install equipment and materials until spaces are enclosed, watertight, and dry. Protect equipment from dust and other airborne materials. 6. Contractor s regular job progress meetings with the Construction Manager and other university representatives shall include a University Information Technology Services telecommunications representative. 7. University Inspection: Indiana University will provide advising as requested The Office of University Information Technology Services may inspect the job as it progresses Prior to final acceptance of the work, the Contractor shall make arrangements with the appropriate authorized University personnel to inspect the construction areas, both to ensure satisfactory completion of the work and to ensure complete cleanup and restoration of areas affected by the work Temporary protection, coverings, and structures shall be removed at or before time of inspection Examine areas and conditions with the Installer present for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting the performance of telecommunication transmission media Areas such as ceilings, which will be enclosed permanently (ie, drywall) or accessible (ie, lay-in ceilings), and which contain telecommunications cabling, must be inspected by the appropriate University UITS representative before enclosure; if not, enclosing materials will be removed and replaced for inspection at no extra cost to the University Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the appropriate University personnel SUBMITTALS 1. Submit shop drawings and/or manufacturer's product data for telecommunications equipment, including termination equipment, copper cables, fiber optic cables, cable routing devices, and associated equipment and materials Include cut sheets with rated capacities, operating characteristics, electrical characteristics and other measurements and descriptions which describe these items in detail. 2. Submit manufacturer's test reports and test data for each of the fiber optic cables installed The test reports must clearly identify which fiber corresponds with the respective test measurement data so that the results can be verified prior to installation of the cable. 3. Submit a schedule of material and an installation schedule based on the construction schedule and construction phasing, to the Architect/Engineer, within three (3) weeks after contract award. 4. Submit qualifications data for material installers, supervisors, and the project RCDD (Registered Communications Distribution Designer). 5. Submit completed cable records, including floor plans, riser diagrams, manhole diagrams, footages on any cable other than horizontal cabling, and jack id's by location. 6. Submit test reports to the Owner's Representative for approval Include in the test reports the test data taken and converted values Prior to submittal for approval, have test reports signed by authorized witnesses present at tests Submit electronic final copies of approved test reports in tester native format to the Owner's representative No services shall be installed until verified reports are submitted, reviewed, and found to be acceptable by the appropriate University Information Telecommunication Services (UITS) representative. 07/30/2014 gls Section 27 Page 4

453 DELIVERY, STORAGE and HANDLING 1. Deliver wire and cable properly packaged in factory-fabricated type containers, or wound on NEMAspecified type wire and cable reels. 2. Store wire and cable in clean dry space in original containers, following manufacturer s storage guidelines. Protect products from weather, damaging fumes, construction debris and traffic. 3. Handle wire and cable carefully to avoid abrading, puncturing, kinking, and tearing wire and cable insulation and sheathing. Ensure that dielectric resistance and characteristic impedance integrity of transmission media are maintained SEQUENCING and SCHEDULING 1. Coordinate with installation of wires/cables, electrical boxes and fittings, cable trays, and raceways. 2. Sequence installation of optical-fiber cabling systems with other work to minimize possibility of damage during construction. 3. Interruptions to existing voice, data and video systems should be avoided where at all possible If it becomes necessary to interrupt voice and/or data network services, then such interruptions must be approved by and scheduled with UITS Change Management Approval is gained by submitting an MOP (Method of Procedure) to the UITS project contact person, containing the following information: Detailed account(s) of the work to be performed Proposed outage time(s) Estimated service restoral time(s) A contingency plan in case the work takes longer than anticipated, or doesn t go as scheduled Change Management meetings are held on Wednesday of each week The MOP should be submitted to the UITS project contact person no later than 4:00 pm on the Tuesday of the week in which the work is to be performed Outages and associated work should be performed outside of peak hours, such as on weekends, or after 5:00 pm and before 7:00 am during the week Actual time(s) first should be approved by the parties affected by the outage(s) No outages may be scheduled during the first two weeks of a fall or spring semester, during which time there is a Change Freeze period Approval from UITS Change Management must be granted before any scheduled outages can be performed If the outage is disapproved, then an updated MOP will need to be resubmitted on the following Tuesday, to be reviewed the following day Contractors are solely responsible for: making all necessary access arrangements in ample time before the work begins notifying the affected parties of the scheduled outage(s) notifying [email protected] 3.6. Interruptions to video systems should be coordinated with the IU Building Systems division at 07/30/2014 gls Section 27 Page 5

454 and reported to 4. When new IDF s are constructed as part of the project, communications work must be completed, tested and accepted four (4) weeks in advance of the substantial completion date, to ensure that necessary communications circuits will be available for required building systems such as elevator phones, environmental systems monitoring and security systems This includes all IDF associated electrical, HVAC, and door lock systems, as well as riser and outside plant copper and fiber cables, as necessary to allow the permanent installation of voice grade circuits and data network equipment GENERAL INSTALLATION 1. No cable shall be installed in any facilities other than those intended for that use Gas pipe and water pipes must not be used for conduit under any circumstances. 2. Install telecommunication transmission media as indicated, in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions, in compliance with applicable requirements of NEC, and in accordance with recognized industry practices. 3. CMP (Plenum) type cable will be used for all telecommunications cables. 4. Coordinate transmission media installation work, as necessary to properly interface installation of media with other work. 5. Do not install compressed, kinked, scored, deformed or abraded cable, or allow such damage to occur Damaged materials shall be removed from the job site immediately. 6. Use extreme care in handling, fishing, and pulling-in transmission media to avoid damage to conductors, shielding and jacketing/cladding Use pulling means including fish tape, cable, rope, and basket weave wire/cable grips, which will not damage media or raceway If power equipment is used to pull cable, the pull speed must not exceed 30 meters per minute Use water based lubricant approved by the cable manufacturer to ensure manufacturer s pulling tensions are not exceeded Compound used must not deteriorate conductor or insulation Cable bending radii must not be exceeded Pulling methods must not cause cable to twist Cables pulled through pull boxes shall be hand assisted to prevent the cable from being crushed, kinked, or scraped. 7. Provide pull strings in telecommunication conduit. 7.1 To facilitate future cable installations, install a nylon pull cord in each conduit simultaneously with the pull-in of cable. 8. Pull conductors simultaneously where more than one is being installed in same raceway. 10. Splices in building media runs are NOT permitted Building wiring must be continuous and undamaged from outlet to connecting block or connecting block to connecting block. 11. Terminations shall be made with the manufacturer's stated tools and in accordance with manufacturer's 07/30/2014 gls Section 27 Page 6

455 instructions and guidelines. 12. Tighten connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, in accordance with manufacturer s published torque-tightening values. Where manufacturer s torque requirements are not indicated, tighten connectors and terminals to comply with tightening torque specified in UL Std. 13. When necessary within IDFs, horizontal Station cables shall be secured with Velcro tie wraps. Both Fiber and Copper Entrance and riser cable shall be secured with standard tie wraps. Observe the manufacturer s recommendations for distances between tie wraps and tightening tension from tie wraps and as specified in ANSI/TIA Outside of IDFs, horizontal cabling, entrance cables, and riser cables must be installed within industry standard pathways, such as cable tray, J hooks, and conduit. 14. Cables shall be permanently identified at each end with an industry approved label. 15. All wall penetrations for telecommunications cabling must be sleeved, with bushings at each end, and firestopped with removable/reusable material which has a minimum 2 hour rating, or in accordance with other architectural details, unless otherwise noted Cables must not be installed through unsleeved holes drilled through walls Comply with Division 07 requirements for Firestopping Comply with TIA 569 on Firestopping Comply with UL1479 or ASTM E814, and label with the UL1479 or ASTM E814 reference number TESTING and DOCUMENTATION 1. General 1.1. Acceptance testing shall be completed and documentation provided to the University as soon as possible in order to permit the installation of networking equipment necessary to bring the building online for security and equipment monitoring systems. 2. Testing 2.1. Acceptance testing by the University shall not occur until all work in the telecommunication closet area is completed, including but not limited to mounting and installation of fiber OSP and riser cables, backboards, terminating boxes and cabinets, and grounding blocks, and termination of fiber riser cables, copper backbone cables, station wires, or any other work necessary for the completion of the installation The University shall have the right to schedule acceptance testing at its convenience A University representative, at the option of the University, shall be present during testing Such acceptance testing shall in no way reduce the Contractors' obligations regarding restoration, cleanup, or warranty Contractor shall perform tests necessary prior to acceptance testing to ensure that the installed cables will pass acceptance testing performed in conjunction with University representatives Contractor shall be responsible for performing, tracking, and recording the results of tests Contractor shall be responsible for providing equipment and materials necessary for as long a period of time as necessary to complete testing to the satisfaction of the University. 07/30/2014 gls Section 27 Page 7

456 2.8. Test record forms shall be agreed to by the University prior to the commencement of acceptance testing. 3. Documentation 3.1. Provide record plant documentation, including jack type (Information outlet), jack location, circuit length, fiber riser cable lengths, and copper backbone cable lengths and any other information deemed to be useful Additionally, provide a list of all existing jacks removed during project demolition phase(s) The documentation format(s) will be agreed upon between the campus telecommunication coordinator and the contractor Provide all documentation in electronic format If it is agreed to use proprietary software to provide testing results, the contractor will be required to furnish licensed system software to run it unless the University already has a licensed version of the contractor s software RECORD DRAWINGS 1. Provide updated drawings of telecommunications systems in CAD format. 2. As a minimum, the data provided must include the following elements, where applicable: 2.1. Inside Plant Cable routing Riser and OSP cable, pair (count), locations, and final cable lengths Supporting structures Terminal locations and IDs Telecommunications Room and terminal details Conduit and cable tray routing, elevations installed at and section lengths Pull box locations, elevations installed at and sizes Information Outlet locations, label ID s, types, and serving Telecommunications Room For each change reflected on the Record Drawings, the Change Order Request number shall be shown Outside Plant (provide on an accurate and scaled site plan) Location of underground routes, indicating type (conduit, direct buried, etc.) and quantities Location of manholes and handholes Deviations from minimum depth requirements XYZ coordinates from permanent landmarks Footages of conduit between maintenance holes Crossings of other utilities uncovered, including type and size of utility WARRANTY 1. The warranty on labor and material installed by the Contractor shall be in effect for Five (5) years from the date of acceptance of the work. 2. Contractor shall repair, adjust, and/or replace, whichever the University determines to be in Its best interests, any defective equipment, materials, or workmanship, as well as such parts of the work damaged or destroyed by such defect, during warranty period, at the Contractor's sole cost and expense. 07/30/2014 gls Section 27 Page 8

457 3. In the event that any of the equipment specified, supplied, and/or installed as part of the work should fail to produce capacities or meet design specification as published or warranted by the manufacturer of the equipment involved or as specified in this document, the Contractor shall, in conjunction with the equipment manufacturer, remove and replace such equipment with equipment that will meet requirements without additional cost to the University. 4. In the event that the Contractor does not affect repair within seven (7) days from the date of notification of such defect, the University may secure repair services from other sources and charge the Contractor for such costs without voiding the warranty. 5. Guarantees of material, equipment, and workmanship running in favor of the Contractor shall be transferred and assigned to the University on completion of the work and acceptance of said work by the University COMMON WORK RESULTS RELATED SECTIONS Section Common Work Result for Electrical Section Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables Section Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems Section Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems Section Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems Section Cable Trays for Electrical Systems GROUNDING and BONDING 1. The Building Telecommunication Equipment Room (IDF-1) shall have a Telecomm Main Grounding Bus Bar (TMGB) that is in compliance with J-STD-607, with minimum dimensions of ¼-inch thick and 4 inches wide, length as required to support current needs and future growth The Ground Bus Bar shall be mounted with stand-off insulators that comply with UL 891 for use in switchboards, 600V, made of Lexan or PVC impulse tested at 5000V Mount the Ground Bus Bar with a minimum of 2 inches of clearance behind the bar Provide a solid or stranded copper wire building earth ground bonded to the electric power ground from the Grounding bus bar in the Building Telecommunication Equipment Room (IDF-1) Connections to the TMGB shall be made with exothermic welding or two-hole compression lugs with a two-crimp minimum The busbar shall be cleaned and have antioxidant applied before attaching grounding conductors The TMGB shall be bonded to any electrical panelboards that occupy the same room using a minimum #6 AWG copper conductor with a maximum length of 13 feet All ungrounded telecommunications racks and metallic raceways in the same room as the TMGB shall be bonded to the TMGB The TMGB shall be bonded the building ground system ground or building structural steel The TMGB shall be grounded to the Floor Telecommunication Equipment Rooms (IDF-2 s) Telecommunications Grounding Bus bars (TGBs), forming the Telecommunications Bonding Backbone (TBB) with copper ground wire solid or stranded, insulated or uninsulated, according to length, as detailed in J-STD-607, shown below: 07/30/2014 gls Section 27 Page 9

458 WIRE LENGTH WIRE SIZE (AWG) <4 m / < 13 ft m / ft m / ft m / ft m / ft m / ft 1/ m / ft 2/0 > 20 m / > 66 ft 3/ The TMGB shall be bonded to the Alternating Current Electrical Ground (ACEG) with a copper ground wire of not smaller gauge than that used for the TBB. 2. Each Floor Telecommunication Equipment Room (IDF-2) shall be equipped with a Telecommunications Grounding Bus bar (TGB that is in compliance with J-STD-607, with minimum dimensions of ¼-inch thick and 2 inches wide, length as required to support current needs and future growth All ground wires shall be continuous and un-spliced between Equipment Room grounding bus bars Locate grounding bus bars to minimize ground wire lengths; location shall be coordinated with University Information Technology Services representative and University electrical engineer The TGB shall be bonded to any electrical panelboards that occupy the same room using a minimum #6 AWG copper conductor with a maximum length of 13 feet All ungrounded telecommunications racks and metallic raceways in the same room as the TMGB shall be bonded to the TGB. 3. In high rise buildings with multiple Telecommunications Rooms per floor, the top floor TGB s and every 3 rd floor TGB s shall be bonded together with the same size grounding conductor used in the grounding riser system (TBB). 4. Telecommunications cables with metallic sheath members shall be bonded together at splices with a #6 solid or stranded copper ground wire and bonded to the TMGB or TGB Cable sheaths shall be grounded to a tested and proven earth ground within 50 feet of entering any building with an independent #6 solid or stranded copper ground wire or other electrically equivalent method as approved by the University. 5. Test reports shall include the results of ground testing performed according the electrical system ground testing requirements. 6. Telecommunications equipment racks shall have a grounding bus bar connected to the TMGB or TGB PATHWAYS 1. Separation from EMI sources: 1.1. Open cables and cables in nonmetallic raceways and unshielded power: Electrical less than 2 kva 5 inch minimum Electrical 2 to 5 kva 12 inch minimum Electrical greater than 5 kva 24 inch minimum 1.2. Cables in grounded metallic raceways and unshielded power: Electrical less than 2 kva 2-1/2 inch minimum Electrical 2 to 5 kva 6 inch minimum Electrical greater than 5 kva 12 inch minimum 07/30/2014 gls Section 27 Page 10

459 1.3. Cables in grounded metallic raceways and shielded power: Electrical less than 2 kva 1 inch minimum Electrical 2 to 5 kva 3 inch minimum Electrical greater than 5 kva 6 inch minimum 1.4. Cables and electrical motors and transformers 5 kva or larger 48 inches 1.5. Cables and fluorescent fixtures 5 inches HANGERS and SUPPORTS 1. Hanger and supports must be NRTL (Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratories) labeled for support of Category 6A cabling. 2. J-hooks shall be installed where no provisions for cabling runways. 3. J-hooks shall be installed per ANSI/TIA 569 Commercial Building Standards for Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces CONDUITS and BACKBOXES 1. Station conduit: shall be installed from each station outlet box to the cable tray, clamped to the cable tray and terminated with bushing, size per table or as noted on drawings. Standard Trade Size Conduit Workstations / Horizontal distribution conduit shall be installed from junction box joining each station conduit box to the floor telecommunications equipment room, size per table or as noted on drawings. Trade Size Workstations Conduit & (Station Cables) 1 1 (2) 1-1/4 2 (4) 1-1/2 3 (6) 2 5 (10) 2-1/2 9 (18) 3 13 (26) 3-1/2 18 (36) 4 23 (46) 3. Junction boxes shall be sized according to NEC , NEC , Article 770, and to accommodate bending radiuses as discussed in NEC and related TIA documents In any case, all methods employed for the installation of interior communication cables should not subject the cables to a bend radius less than the following minimums: Copper riser communication cables, bending radius not smaller than 8 times the cable diameter. 07/30/2014 gls Section 27 Page 11

460 Copper station communication cables: In conduit, bending radius not smaller than three (3) inches, or 8 times the cable diameter, whichever is greater In furniture, where the cable is not subject to high pulling tensions, bending radius not smaller than 4 times the cable diameter Fiber optic cables, during pulling operations, should not exceed a bending radius smaller than 20 times the cable diameter, or as recommended by the cable manufacturer; after pull is complete, the final cable bend radius should not exceed 10 times the cable diameter. 4. Conduits for interior grade telecommunication cables, such as riser rated and horizontal station cables, may be placed in a slab-on-grade, but must never be placed below the slab for any reason. Likewise, horizontal station cables must not be placed in conduit which is exposed to outside weather conditions. Inside building rated cables are not designed to withstand the moisture and condensation which can occur in underground and exterior conduits, which will render the cable(s) unusable in a short period of time. Although such conduits may be placed in the slab as a last result, whenever possible conduits should be placed above slab, but never below CABLE TRAYS 1. Horizontal distribution: Cable trays are to be installed as low as possible above the finished ceiling A clearance of 18" shall be maintained above the trays º turns shall be made by two (2) 45º turns Cable trays shall not be installed using center point mounts. 2. Telecommunication Rooms (IDFs): 12 wide Ladder Type runways are to circle the IDF room at a minimum 7 height Cable tray systems shall be installed so that installed cables will transition to the ladder rack runway without damage to or strain on the cables Ladder rack also shall be installed perpendicular to and secured to the outward end of the equipment rack(s). (See diagrams) 2.3. Additional ladder rack shall be used where necessary to stabilize equipment racks in the room or as needed to provide reasonable and shortest distance routing of cables. 3. Refer to Division SURFACE RACEWAYS 1. Cabling must not be subjected to sharp or binding edges. 2. Surface raceways must be large enough to accommodate all intended telecommunications cables as well as allow for 30% growth. 3. Such raceways and pathways shall installed to support horizontal cabling in accordance with the requirements of ANSI/TIA-569-C. 4. Refer to Division UNDERGROUND DUCTS and RACEWAYS 1. Manholes shall be precast concrete 12x6x7 A-hole or J-hole type with sump hole. 07/30/2014 gls Section 27 Page 12

461 1.1. Manhole covers and frames shall have 32 diameter clear opening with heavy duty cast iron lids with penta-head bolts and labeled Communications Manholes shall have all racking hardware and pulling irons installed Beginning from center of side wall, racking shall be installed 24 OC Manholes shall be fitted with a manufacturer s recommended iron ladder. 2. Ducts shall be Schedule 40 PVC, 4 ID nominal trade size, unless noted otherwise. 3. Duct Installation 3.1. Ducts shall be installed with a minimum of 30 of cover Ducts shall be installed a minimum of 12 from electrical conduits Duct shall be installed with as much separation from steam lines as is practical Ducts shall be separated and held in place with duct spacers at intervals of no more than 8 feet Corners and bends of duct runs shall be installed with long radius sweeps, encased in concrete Ducts shall be installed with a minimum of 3 of fall per 100 toward maintenance holes and away from buildings Ducts shall be surrounded by a minimum of 3 on all sides with flowable backfill 3.8. Ducts shall then be capped with a minimum 3 concrete no less than the width of the backfilled trench Color top of concrete cap by using Orange chalk dust while still wet An orange magnetically detectable warning tape shall be installed above the top of the ductbank, 18 below ground level Where possible, ducts shall be terminated into precast cutout locations Duct shall NOT penetrate manholes in the collars, in the middle of side walls, or at locations blocked by existing cables in the case of existing manholes Duct penetration should NOT extend beyond the manhole walls Duct penetration locations should allow for easy racking of cables around manhole walls Ducts penetrating manholes, precast handholes, and building entrance wall penetrations which do not land in a pull box, must be terminated flush to the wall(s) using bell ends, illustrated below Building entrance ducts which penetrate the floor must extend high enough up for installation of a bushing to protect the cable sheath from the edges of the conduits, but not much higher in order to allow for routing of cables leaving the conduits Duct shall be sealed around their outer edges with hydraulic cement to prevent leakage into manholes Unused ducts shall be plugged at both ends using compression type fittings Seal maintenance hole penetrations using hydraulic cement NOTE: Innerduct is no longer used in outside plant communications ducts on Indiana University campuses. 07/30/2014 gls Section 27 Page 13

462 4. Installed Duct Preparation 4.1. Pull round wood or steel test mandrel of recommended size through each duct from both directions to remove obstructions Pass a wire brush mandrel and/or a rubber duct swab of appropriate size through each duct until all foreign materials and water are removed Ducts shall be provided with Greenlee, Muletape, or equal continuous measuring tape in each duct Install a locate wire in one duct of each conduit run and terminate on collar of manholes for easy access Unused ducts shall be plugged using compression type fittings 5. Handholes shall be 4x4x4 precast concrete with sump hole Ducts shall be Schedule 40 PVC as described above, or ducts suitable for directional boring IDENTIFICATION 1. Comply with Section Otherwise, identify system components according to TIA 606-A. 07/30/2014 gls Section 27 Page 14

463 SCHEDULES for COMMUNICATIONS See GROUNDING Grounding Bus Bar Comply with J-STD-607-B See HANGERS Horizontal Cable Hangers Horizontal Cable Hangers Horizontal Cable Hangers Horizontal Cable Hangers Panduit J-Pro Series (preferred) Panduit J-Mod series Erico Caddy CAT J-Hook: Cat32 Erico Caddy CableCat Wide Base Cable Support Clips See CONDUITS and BACKBOXES Refer to following section on Information Outlets, referencing See See CABLE TRAY Cable Tray through building IDF) Comply with NEMA VE 2 and TIA-569 cable tray (Not in or cable basket 12 or larger as needed See UNDERGROUND DUCTS and RACEWAYS Manholes Manhole Ducts Handholes Handhole ducts Duct fittings (either) Duct plugs (either) 12x6x7 A-hole or J-hole type with sump hole with manufacturer s racking hardware, pulling irons, and manufacturer s iron ladder 4 nominal trade size Schedule 40 PVC. 4x4x4 precast concrete with sump hole Schedule 40 PVC, or ducts suitable for directional boring Bell type fittings Compression type fittings /30/2014 gls Section 27 Page 15

464 See EQUIPMENT RACKS 7 x19 Equipment Rack Wire Management Horizontal Wire Management Intermediate 12 Wire Management Hinged Door 12 Wire Management End Panel Tie bracket Panduit CMR19x84 Panduit WMPH2E Panduit Patchrunner PEV12 Panduit PED12 Panduit PREP Equipment Cabinet (for small buildings) Cooper B-Line VLWM2425PB (use must be pre-approved) Plexiglas door, Black See TERMINATIONS Copper backbone Termination Block Panduit Pan-Punch 110 Category 5e system Horizontal Copper Cabling Patch Panel Panduit CPPLA24WBLY Voice Patch Panel Panduit VP24382TV25Y with RJ21 connector Patch Panel Jack Modules: For 6e station wire For 6A station wire Panduit CJ688TGYL TX6 PLUS, yellow Panduit CJ6X88TGVL TX6 PLUS, Violet, Cat 6A 1U Fiber Cabinet (requires prior UITS approval) 2U Fiber Cabinet (requires prior UITS approval) 4U Fiber Cabinet, XFM (standard / preferred) AFL FM BE 3-slot rack mount patch panel, black, empty AFL FM BE 6-slot rack mount patch panel, black, empty AFL FM BE 12-slot rack mount patch panel, black, empty 12-fiber LC Cassette, 50 um Multimode AFL FM B, Black LGX118, Standard Grade 24-fiber LC Cassette, 50 um Multimode AFL FM B, Black LGX118, Standard Grade 12 fiber Singlemode Riser Cables AFL FM B XFM Optical Cassette, 12-LC/APC, SM, Black, Aligned Keyway Adapter 24 fiber Singlemode Riser Cables AFL FM B XFM Optical Cassette, 24-LC/APC, SM, Black, Aligned Keyway Adapter Adapter, AFL Cassettes in Corning shelf AFL FM adapter plate Adapter plate, 6 Duplex LC SM couplers AFL C215993, loaded with Singlemode LC couplers Adapter plate, 6 Duplex SC SM couplers AFL C220853, loaded with Singlemode SC couplers /30/2014 gls Section 27 Page 16

465 See CABLE MANAGEMENT and LADDER RACK Ladder Rack (in IDF ) Chatsworth * (12 or wider, as required) *associated parts, as required See BACKBONE COPPER (Riser) Category 3 Copper Backbone Cable Category 3 Copper Backbone Cable Category 3 Copper Backbone Cable Category 3 Copper Backbone Cable Category 3 Copper Backbone Cable Riser Cable to Patch Panel Tie Cable OFS Type CMP, #24 AWG, twisted pair, solid copper Category 3, suitable for placement in a plenum Belden Corporation equivalent General Cable, Guardian Products, equivalent Mohawk Wire and Cable Corporation equivalent Commscope, General Instrument, equivalent Type CMP 25-pair amphenol style cable, #24 AWG twisted pair, solid copper Category See BACKBONE FIBER AFL 12 fiber 50 micron Multimode OM4 Riser Cables, MTP/MTP FTF-FTF-PL-012R-C-0020-PE-METHOD B Cable, pulling eye one end only, 20 meters FTF-FTF-PL-012R-C-0030-PE-METHOD B Cable, pulling eye one end only, 30 meters FTF-FTF-PL-012R-C-0040-PE-METHOD B Cable, pulling eye one end only, 40 meters FTF-FTF-PL-012R-C-0050-PE-METHOD B Cable, pulling eye one end only, 50 meters FTF-FTF-PL-012R-C-0060-PE-METHOD B Cable, pulling eye one end only, 60 meters FTF-FTF-PL-012R-C-0070-PE-METHOD B Cable, pulling eye one end only, 70 meters FTF-FTF-PL-012R-C-0080-PE-METHOD B Cable, pulling eye one end only, 80 meters FTF-FTF-PL-012R-C-0090-PE-METHOD B Cable, pulling eye one end only, 90 meters FTF-FTF-PL-012R-C-0100-PE-METHOD B Cable, pulling eye one end only, 100 meters FTF-FTF-PL-012R-C-0110-PE-METHOD B Cable, pulling eye one end only, 110 meters FTF-FTF-PL-012R-C-0120-PE-METHOD B Cable, pulling eye one end only, 120 meters FTF-FTF-PL-012R-C-0130-PE-METHOD B Cable, pulling eye one end only, 130 meters AFL 12 fiber Singlemode Riser Cables, MTP/MTP (Data Center Only) ATF-ATF-PL-012R-Q-0020-PE-METHOD B Cable, pulling eye one end only, 20 meters ATF-ATF-PL-012R-Q-0030-PE-METHOD B Cable, pulling eye one end only, 30 meters ATF-ATF-PL-012R-Q-0040-PE-METHOD B Cable, pulling eye one end only, 40 meters ATF-ATF-PL-012R-Q-0050-PE-METHOD B Cable, pulling eye one end only, 50 meters ATF-ATF-PL-012R-Q-0060-PE-METHOD B Cable, pulling eye one end only, 60 meters ATF-ATF-PL-012R-Q-0070-PE-METHOD B Cable, pulling eye one end only, 70 meters ATF-ATF-PL-012R-Q-0080-PE-METHOD B Cable, pulling eye one end only, 80 meters ATF-ATF-PL-012R-Q-0090-PE-METHOD B Cable, pulling eye one end only, 90 meters ATF-ATF-PL-012R-Q-0100-PE-METHOD B Cable, pulling eye one end only, 100 meters ATF-ATF-PL-012R-Q-0110-PE-METHOD B Cable, pulling eye one end only, 110 meters 07/30/2014 gls Section 27 Page 17

466 ATF-ATF-PL-012R-Q-0120-PE-METHOD B ATF-ATF-PL-012R-Q-0130-PE-METHOD B Cable, pulling eye one end only, 120 meters Cable, pulling eye one end only, 130 meters See BACKBONE COAX CATV Coaxial Backbone Cable CATV Coaxial Backbone Cable CATV Amplifier CATV Coupler CATV Coupler CATV Coupler Directional Tap, 4 port Directional Tap, 8 port 3-way Splitter CommScope Video Series CATVP RG11, Plenum Rated or Belden or General Cable equivalent CommScope 2287K, RG11, Plenum Rated or Belden or General Cable equivalent ACI Communications, Inc. MFTJ1/42PC419-1 with North American cord set Tru-Spec TVC Scientific Atlanta Blonder Tongue SRT-4A, Mhz Blonder Tongue SRT-8A, Mhz Blonder Tongue SXRS-3, Mhz See HORIZONTAL COPPER CABLING For Category 6e jobs: Horizontal Station Cable, 6e Plenum Horizontal Station Cable, 6e Plenum Horizontal Station Cable, 6e Plenum Horizontal Station Cable, 6ePlenum Horizontal Station Cable, 6ePlenum Berk-Tek LanMark 2000 # , Yellow Belden Data Twist 4800, Yellow General Cable GenSPEED 6000, Yellow Mohawk M57415 GigaLAN station wire, Yellow Superior Essex NextGain Cat6eX station wire, Yellow For Category 6A jobs: Horizontal Station Cable, 6A Plenum Superior Essex 10 Gain XP 6A Plenum P/N 6H-272-7A Purple,.275 inches, bend radius 1.20 inches Horizontal Station Cable, 6A Plenum General Genspeed 10MTP6A Plenum P/N Horizontal Station Cable, 6A Plenum Purple,.292 inches, bend radius 1.25 inches Mohawk GigaLan10 6A Plenum P/N HT54298 Purple,.295 inches, bend radius 1.25 inches Horizontal Station Cable, 6A Plenum Bertek LANmark-XTP 6A Plenum P/N Violet /30/2014 gls Section 27 Page 18

467 See HORIZONTAL COAXIAL CABLING RG-6 Coaxial Cable, Plenum CommScope 2227V RG-6 Quad-shield Plenum, or Belden or General Instrument equivalent See INFORMATION OUTLET Standard Information Outlet, Single Gang face 5 Square Electrical Box. RANDL T Square x 2-7/8 Deep Telecommunications Outlet Box Mud Ring (5/8 drywall) Faceplate Jack module: Cat 6e Cat 6A Blank module. RANDL D-51G058 5 Square x One Gang Extension Ring Panduit CFPE4IWY Executive Series, 4-port, off-white faceplate Panduit CJ688TGYL Mini-Com TX-6+ module, Yellow Panduit CJ6X88TGVL TX6 PLUS, Violet Panduit CMBIW-X Mini-Com blank module insert, off-white Standard Information Outlet, Double Gang face Double Gang Electrical Box. RANDL T Square x 2-7/8 Deep Telecommunications Outlet Box Mud Ring (5/8 drywall) RANDL L-52G058 5 Square x Double Gang Extension Ring Faceplate Panduit CFPE10IW-2GY Executive Series, 4-port, off-white Jack module: Cat 6e Panduit CJ688TGYL Mini-Com TX-6+ module, Yellow Cat 6A Panduit CJ6X88TGVL TX6 PLUS, Violet Blank module Panduit CMBIW-X Mini-Com blank module insert, off-white Standard Information Outlet, Double Gang face, with Video 5 Square Electrical Box. RANDL T Square x 2-7/8 Deep Telecommunications Outlet Box Mud Ring (5/8 drywall) Ring Faceplate. RANDL L-52G058 5 Square x Double Gang Extension Panduit CFPE10IW-2GY Executive Series, 4-port, off-white Jack module: Cat 6e Panduit CJ688TGYL Mini-Com TX-6+ module, Yellow Cat 6A Panduit CJ6X88TGVL TX6 PLUS, Violet Blank module Panduit CMBIW-X Mini-Com blank module insert, off-white F-connector. Panduit CMFIW 75-ohm F-connector module, off-white See HORIZONTAL COAXIAL CABLING 07/30/2014 gls Section 27 Page 19

468 Wall Phone Outlet Single Gang Electrical Box. Mud Ring (5/8 drywall) Wall Plate 5 x5 minimum 2-7/8 deep single gang box RANDL D-51G058 5 Square x One Gang Extension Ring Panduit KWP6PY stainless steel plate with Category 6 Keystone module (see also below for Security Phone Wall Plate) Wireless Access Point Outlet (WAP), Single Gang face 5 Square Electrical Box. RANDL T Square x 2-7/8 Deep Telecommunications Outlet Box Mud Ring (5/8 drywall) Faceplate Jack module: Cat 6e Cat 6A RANDL D-51G058 5 Square x One Gang Extension Ring Panduit CFPL2IW-LY Executive Series, 2-port, off-white faceplate Panduit CJ688TGYL Mini-Com TX-6+ module, Yellow Panduit CJ6X88TGVL TX6 PLUS, Violet Biscuit Jack Interior Wall Security Phone Wall Phone Plate Wall Phone Set Hubbell P630S Cortelco Trendline VOE-21F Top of mounted set must be below 48 aff, therefore the installed top of the Wall Phone Plate should not be higher than 45 aff COMMISSIONING STRUCTURED CABLING EQUIPMENT ROOM FITTINGS WALLS 1. All walls shall be covered with 4' x 8' x 3/4" plywood, mounted 0'-6" above the finished floor with the 8'- 0" dimension vertical Backboards shall either be painted with two (2) coats of fire retardant paint on all sides, or fireretardant treated and painted Backboard paint color shall be a light gray / off-white. 07/30/2014 gls Section 27 Page 20

469 ENTRANCE PROTECTION 1. Entrance cable protection shall be provided by the installer of outside plant cables, typically IU, in accordance with all applicable codes and standards CABINETS, RACKS, FRAMES and ENCLOSURES 1. Equipment Racks 1.1. The equipment rack shall be installed in the Telecommunication Equipment Rooms (IDFs) according to layout and communication media requirements 1.2. Telecommunication Equipment Room (IDF) layouts shall be coordinated with the appropriate University Information Technology Services representative 1.3. The rack shall be anchored to the floor and braced overhead with ladder racking and grounded to the ground bus bar location in the IDF with a #6 solid or stranded ground wire. 2. Wire management 2.1. Vertical: Open ends of racks shall have 12 vertical wire management with hinged doors Between multiple racks use 12 vertical wire managers and hinged doors Horizontal: On the top and bottom of each rack, install one horizontal wire manager with covers. 07/30/2014 gls Section 27 Page 21

470 TERMINATION BLOCKS and PATCH PANELS 1. Copper Equipment 1.1. Unshielded Twisted Pair Riser Amphenol style cables shall be terminated on 110 type blocks with 110A wiring blocks Terminal blocks shall be located so as to be easily cross-connected to feeder pair and the voice cable stations and plugged into the analog voice patch panel Horizontal Cabling Patch Panels Use Panduit modular 6 port face plate angled patch panels filled with yellow TX-6+ modules Use a Panduit voice patch panel installed in the rack for analog voice with a 50 pin, 25 pair female amphenol connector All patch panels, termination panels, and cable managers should be installed so that their fronts, and the front of the networking equipment later provided by owner, shall be visible from the telecommunications room open doorway. 2. Fiber Equipment 2.1. Use cable clamps, breakout kits, mounting bracket(s) and other miscellaneous hardware as necessary to complete a proper installation Breakout kits will be required to terminate all loose tube 250 micron fibers (outdoor rated cables) NOT needed for 900 micron fiber. 3. Coaxial Equipment 3.1. Amplifiers, couplers, directional taps, splitters, and associated parts shall be mounted on the telecommunication room plywood covered walls as noted on the prints and in following illustration. 07/30/2014 gls Section 27 Page 22

471 CABLE MANAGEMENT and LADDER RACK 1. A 12" ladder rack shall be installed from the top of and perpendicular to the equipment rack(s) to 4' x 8' wall mounted plywood board, as needed to stabilize equipment racks, and according to room layout and field conditions EQUIPMENT RACK LAYOUTS 07/30/2014 gls Section 27 Page 23

472 07/30/2014 gls Section 27 Page 24

473 EQUIPMENT ROOM LAYOUT 07/30/2014 gls Section 27 Page 25

474 07/30/2014 gls Section 27 Page 26

475 TRANSMISSION MEDIA 1. General: Provide telecommunication transmission media of manufacturer's standard materials, as indicated by published product information; designed and constructed as recommended by manufacturer, for a complete installation, and for applications indicated. Except as otherwise indicated, provide copper conductors with conductivity of not less than 98% at 20ºC (68ºF). 2. Cable Labeling: The National Electrical Code (NEC) requirements dictate that telecommunication cables used within a building are classified as to their use and smoke and flame requirements. Underwriters Laboratories (UL) provides certification that a cable meets the NEC requirements. 3. All cables shall be clearly marked with the proper NEC classification as follows: RISER CABLES. CABLE TYPE NEC CLASSIFICATION CODES Fiber Optic OFNP, OFNR Copper UTP CMR & CMP, Category 3 Coaxial CL2R & CL2P, CATVR & CATVP HORIZONTAL CABLES. CABLE TYPE NEC CLASSIFICATION CODES Fiber Optic OFN, OFNR & OFNP Copper UTP CMG, CMR & CMP, Category 6e/A Coaxial CL2, CL2R & CL2P BACKBONE CABLING COPPER BACKBONE CABLING 1. Terminating blocks mounted to the wall. 2. Copper backbone cables shall be extended to the equipment rack with 25 pair male amphenol style cables, terminated at the wall on 110 blocks on one end, with the amphenol end plugged into the analog voice patch panels. 3. Cable pairs and 25-pair binder groups shall be cut down in standard color code order. 4. UTP riser cable will have cable ID and pair count clearly marked on building equipment room and punch down blocks Copper backbone cabling will be labeled in both the building telecommunications equipment room and the floor telecommunications equipment rooms Cable ID s will be building number + an underscore + an incremental two digit cable number For example, the cable to IDF-2 would be 023_01, while the cable to IDF-3 would be 023_ Counts shall start from the lowest IDF number and increment with IDF numbers For example, the cable to IDF-2 would count 023_01, 1-50, while the cable to IDF-3 would count 023_02, All labeling must be approved by the appropriate IU UITS personnel. 07/30/2014 gls Section 27 Page 27

476 Testing of Copper Backbone Cabling 1. Perform visual inspection to ensure that all cables are terminated on the punch down block in proper color code order. 2. Test all pairs for continuity and tip and ring polarity. 3. Test results shall meet or exceed the appropriate tests requirements as specified in the ANSI/TIA-568 specifications. 4. Bad pairs shall be limited to a maximum of 1% of the total number of pairs, and with a maximum of two (2) bad pairs per binder group. 5. Test results shall be posted to ProjectDox, ed to the appropriate UITS resprentative (depending on whether it is AV or telecom test results) in a timely fashion, and stored on a CD and delivered to the University Information Technology Services representative upon request. 6. Test results shall be verified by the designated University personnel as part of the inspection and acceptance procedure OPTICAL FIBER BACKBONE CABLING 1. Installation 1.1. Install FO cables and devices in accordance with industry standards and manufactures written instructions Install FO cable without damage to fibers, cladding, or jacket Ensure that media manufactures recommended pulling tensions are not exceeded Do not bend cables to smaller radii than minimums recommended by manufacturer Use a pulling means, including fish tape, rope, and basket-weave grips, that will not damage media or raceway. Install FO cable simultaneously where more than one cable is being installed in the same raceway Use pulling lubricant where necessary; compound used must not deteriorate cable materials. Do not use soap NO splices are allowed. Cable runs to be continuous Provide grounding connections for FO cable and other system components as required by specifications and applicable codes and regulations, according to manufacturer s written instructions Provide termination of cables Use AFL fiber optic connectors on singlemode cables Use preterminated MTP/MPO connectors on 50 micron multimode cables with pre-connectorized modules with and AFL cabinets Fiber optic cable will have cable ID and strand count clearly marked on the fiber cabinet in the IDF. 07/30/2014 gls Section 27 Page 28

477 Testing of Fiber Cables 1. General 1.1. It will be the contractor's responsibility to provide the test equipment necessary and document the campus telecommunication coordinator the test equipment available for testing and the last date of certification Cables will have SC (OSP) or LC (riser) connectors installed on singlemode cables prior to testing The tests shall be performed on inter-building and riser fiber cables Testing equipment: Continuity tester Visible fault detector Power meter and light source OTDR (Optical Time Domain Reflectometer) Appropriate types of fiber jumpers Equipment for two testers to communicate Fluke DSP 4000 or equivalent Other equipment as approved by designated University personnel and as required to complete the testing to the satisfaction of the University 1.4. Prior to usage, test equipment and components in accordance with manufactures published test procedures All fibers will be tested bi-directionally per TIA and TIA method A Bi-directional attenuation figures in decibel (db) will be documented Before testing, verify with the University Information Technologies representative if raw or referenced readings are preferred All strands shall test good and meet current ANSI/TIA-568 specifications. Dark fibers and excessive attenuation due to breaks, bends, bad splices, defective connectors and bad installation practices will not be accepted and must be corrected Replacement fiber cables shall be subject to tests and criteria as described in this document All fiber cables shall have NO bad fibers. Fiber cables tested to have bad fibers, and determined to be non-repairable by practices acceptable to the University, shall be replaced at no additional cost to the University Any and all measures taken to correct unacceptable test results will be recorded, along with loss measurements taken before and after corrective measures Documentation will include cable ID, from and to points, strand ID, bi-directional attenuation figures in db, per TIA Method A Use of an OTDR may require that a "launch reel" be used to overcome the OTDR's dead zone, if needed for fault location if the bi-directional tests fail Fiber jumpers used with the OTDR, light source and power meter must be of the same size and type of the fiber being tested. 07/30/2014 gls Section 27 Page 29

478 1.14. Fiber jumpers used with the light source and power meters shall be zeroed out by attaching the jumper from the light source via a coupler to the jumper from the power meter This reading noted, will become the reference level to obtain a true attenuation reading (some power meters can be zeroed to allow reading the attenuation level direct) TIA and TIA Method A-2 should be used to zero OLTS. 2. Loss Budgets 2.1. Average splice loss shall not exceed 0.35 db attenuation for multi-mode, 0.25 db attenuation for single mode, measured from both directions No individual splice, multimode or single mode, shall exceed 0.50 db attenuation, measured from both directions No termination shall exceed 0.40 db attenuation for multi mode, 0.30 db attenuation for single mode. d. No single mode OSP fiber shall exceed db attenuation per foot at 1550 nm. (0.25 db attenuation per kilometer at 1550 nm) Acceptable maximum allowable attenuation per spliced and terminated fiber will be determined by the following formula: MAX = (S*MS) + (E*ME) +(F*MF) Where S = number of splices in fiber between end termination points MS = db maximum average allowable attenuation per splice E = number of endpoint terminations (namely, 2) ME = db maximum allowable attenuation per endpoint termination F = number of feet of fiber from endpoint termination to endpoint termination MF = maximum allowable fiber attenuation per foot of fiber Manufacturer s specifications (converted from db/km by formula (db per km / )) 3. Riser Fiber Cable Testing 3.1. Test multimode riser fiber at 850 nm and 1300 nm in both directions Test singlemode riser fiber at 1310 nm and 1550 nm in both directions is to be used No multimode riser fiber shall exceed db attenuation per foot at 1300 nm, 400 Mhz bandwidth. (0.70 db attenuation per kilometer at 1300 nm, 400 Mhz bandwidth). 4. Entrance / Outside Plant Fiber Cable Testing 4.1. Test entrance fiber with an OLTS per TIA method A-2, Option Test with an optical time domain reflectometer (OTDR) if needed per Option ORL should be -30 db or higher Test singlemode entrance fiber at 1310 nm and Test cable segments for faulty connectors and terminations, and for the integrity of the cable and its component parts Replace malfunctioning of damaged items with new materials, then retest until satisfactory performance is achieved. Test cable in both directions using the wavelengths described above. 07/30/2014 gls Section 27 Page 30

479 COAXIAL BACKBONE CABLING 1. Design Specifications for Campus Cable Distribution System Cable specifications Cable must be 100% shielded Cable testing Cable must be 100% sweep tested and certified System frequency response 50 MHz - 1 GHz (Forward) 5 MHz - 42 MHz (Reverse) System tilt 10 dbmv MAXIMUM Maximum system level +40 dbmv at visual carrier, aural carrier shall be 10 to dbmv in respect to visual carrier Signal leakage Maximum signal leakage from the system shall not exceed -40 dbmv at CATV channel 'A' ( MHz), and shall not exceed -53 dbmv at CATV channel 'W' ( MHz) Spurious output Spurious output of modulators/processors shall not exceed -70 dbmv System carrier to noise Shall exceed -54 dbmv at last tap System operating range System shall perform as specified at temperatures 120ºF between 32ºF Hum to Noise System hum and noise shall exceed -50 dbmv at all points Field rate sync division 5% maximum (FCC requirement) Cross modulation -70 dbmv on fully loaded system K-factor 2% or better Adjacent carriers Adjacent channel carriers shall be within 2 dbmv Receive outlet level +6 dbmv, +4 dbmv -3 dbmv Return outlet level +10 dbmv, +15 dbmv -0 dbmv at the "head-end" equipment with signal injected by modulator (+60 dbmv, +0 dbmv -45 dbmv adjustable) located in technology equipment. 2. Labeling of all coaxial cables will have the building equipment room and floor equipment room ends clearly marked with the cable ID number. 3. Testing of coaxial cables 3.1. Cables will have connectors installed on ends prior to testing Cable must be 100% sweep tested and CERTIFIED to meet with CATV standards Frequency response from 50 MHz to 1 GHz will be measured and shall indicate no greater than 7 dbmv system tilt Attenuation will be measured end to end using 150 MHz as a test signal and attenuation will be documented in dbmv Documentation will include cable ID, from and to points, frequency response, attenuation figures and as built information. 07/30/2014 gls Section 27 Page 31

480 HORIZONTAL CABLING COPPER HORIZONTAL CABLING 1. Before the installation of Horizontal Cabling will be allowed to begin, the telecommunications subcontractor must provide a mock-up of the labeling and wiring to a sample face-plate and patch panel The mock-ups must be reviewed by an appropriate representative of UITS and approved prior to performing any final wiring required by the project documents. 2. Installation of Horizontal Copper Cabling pair UTP cables should withstand 25 foot-pounds of pulling pressure. This number shall be verified by the wire manufacturer Maximum cable length is limited to 90 meters (295 feet) from the jack to the patch panels Comply with ANSI/TIA-569 standard regarding the requirements and recommendations for separation of copper telecommunication cabling from sources of electromagnetic interference The Contractor shall replace any damaged cable at no expense to the University. No repair will be allowed on damaged cables Cabling shall be terminated at the station jack and at the equipment room as indicated in ANSI/TIA- 568, wiring configuration T568A The modular faceplate at the user end shall be equipped with inserts for communication services as indicated on plans Station cable in the IDF shall be terminated on Category 6e or Category 6A (as appropriate) patch panels located in the equipment racks The minimum bend radius of Category 6e/A UTP cable shall not be smaller the manufacturer s recommended minimum at any time during installation or after completion, and shall not cause the cable jacket to buckle Route cables from the back of the patch panel through its coupler openings and loosely attach them to the wire manager with velcro cable ties, leaving enough slack for re-termination at a future date Remove only as much jacketing as needed to terminate properly to the connecting hardware, keeping the amount of jacketing removed to an absolute minimum Do not untwist pairs more than 0.5 inches Visually inspect cable pairs for bare wire and other defects before terminating wires Once all of the cables have been terminated, dress the cable slack behind the panel with velcro tie wraps tightened to a snug but not compressing fit Telecommunication cabling for elevator emergency phones shall be provided as follows: Cabling for the elevator telephone to the elevator control room is by the elevator installer Cabling from the elevator control room to the telecommunication equipment room is by the electrical contractor Jack must be mounted adjacent to, but outside of the elevator electrical panel The electrical contractor shall notify campus personnel of the elevator service date This notification for request of services shall be provided no fewer than 21 days prior to service. 3. Testing of Horizontal Copper Cabling 3.1. Perform visual inspection to ensure that all cables are terminated on the eight position station jacks on both ends in proper color code order All station cables attached between information outlets and floor equipment room patch panels will be link tested with a cable analyzer to ensure compliance with current ANSI/TIA All pairs shall test good and meet Category 6e or 6A parameters for the respective type of cable. 07/30/2014 gls Section 27 Page 32

481 Open, split, miss-terminated pairs, deviations from the manufacturer's installation specifications, defective connections and bad installation practices will not be accepted and must be corrected Test 100% of station wire in both directions with a certified handheld tester appropriate for the type of station wire installed (6e or 6A), such as the Fluke OmniScanner or the Fluke DSP 4000 and other test equipment as necessary to assure proper termination sequences, continuity, and Category 6e/A compliance. Station wire shall have NO bad pairs When all station wire is determined to be acceptable, University Information Technology Services will spot test the plant using a certified handheld tester, such as the Fluke OmniScanner or Fluke DSP Test results shall meet or exceed the appropriate tests requirements as specified in the ANSI/TIA-568 specifications The approved handheld tester will have the capability to be programmed with current Category 6e/A requirements as specified in ANSI/TIA-568 standards Documentation will include cable ID (same as jack ID) to be marked on the punch down blocks and patch panels in the telecommunication closet, station jack ID to be marked on the station jack and results of the testing done with the cable analyzer Analyzer documentation test result must be provided in the native format such as *.flw (not PDF) of the testing equipment used Results must be labeled using the information outlet labeling scheme for the project Test results shall be stored on a CD and delivered to the University Information Technology Services representative, or transmitted electronically to both the appropriate UITS representative and to the appropriate University Architect s Office representative Test results shall be verified by the designated University personnel as part of the inspection and acceptance procedure. 4. Submission of test results 4.1. In order to facilitate quicker turn-around for ordering and activating new information outlets in the building, the Telecommunications Subcontractor shall submit partial jack lists that are tested and approved rather than submitting the lists and test results of the entire building The details of how the partial lists are created will be determined in the field through coordination between the Telecommunications Subcontractor and the UITS Technical Staff As an example, test results could be submitted by IDF as work in an IDF is completed Special care must be taken to assure that telecommunications outlets for Fire Alarm systems and Elevator, which will be required for state inspections, be installed, tested and verified with sufficient lead times to meet the project construction and occupancy schedule OPTICAL FIBER HORIZONTAL CABLING Not Applicable COAXIAL HORIZONTAL CABLING 1. All coaxial cables will have the building equipment room and floor equipment room ends clearly marked with the cable ID number. 2. Testing of coaxial horizontal cables 2.1. Cables will have connectors installed on ends prior to testing Cable must be 100% sweep tested and CERTIFIED to meet with CATV standards Frequency response from 50 MHz to 1 GHz will be measured and shall indicate no greater than 7 dbmv system tilt. 07/30/2014 gls Section 27 Page 33

482 2.4. Attenuation will be measured end to end using 150 MHz as a test signal and attenuation will be documented in dbmv Documentation will include cable ID, from and to points, frequency response, attenuation figures and as built information FACEPLATES AND CONNECTORS 1. Termination equipment 1.1. All station cables in the IDF shall be terminated on rack mounted patch panels. 2. Information Outlet Rough-In 2.1. Standard Information Outlets (single gang or double gang) shall be located at the same height as 120 volt AC outlets (normally 18" above finished floor) Wall mounted telephones require a double gang box with a single gang plaster ring, positioned 40" A.F.F. to the center of the outlet box Information Outlets above counter tops should be installed so that the center of the outlet box will be a minimum of 12" above the counter top A counter top with a splash back may require different outlet box locations Wall mounted telephones require a special wall telephone jack that provides mounting lugs for the telephone and an eight position jack No Information Outlet will be installed such that workstations or devices served from it cannot be reasonably reached by a 16 ft cord. 3. Labeling of Horizontal Copper Cabling 3.1. The telecommunications contractor s onsite representative(s) shall schedule a meeting with the UITS representative through the IU Project Manager prior to the permanent labeling of Information Outlets and IDF patch panels Information Outlet receptacles, cables, and terminations shall be labeled with a standard identification tag at both the Information Outlet and on the jackfields in the IDF/Wire Closet Tags shall be preprinted or computer printed with indelible water proof ink and mechanically secured in a permanent fashion; for example, such as using an appropriate label maker with 3/8 tape Handwritten labels are NOT acceptable Labels shall be mounted in a manner which permits easy access and viewing The station cable serving each receptacle must be labeled at the room receptacle and the IDF rack Information Outlet receptacles in rooms are to be labeled -A through -ZZ in each room beginning with the first receptacle to the left of the main entrance to the room and continuing clockwise around the room All labeling will be done in all capital letters For example, a jack labeled 246A-A would be because: Room 246A is the room number The Information Outlet designation is A (first receptacle in room from the left of the door) 07/30/2014 gls Section 27 Page 34

483 Station cables from a given room shall be terminated in sequential order, i.e. 246A-A, 246A-B, 246A-C, 246A-D, etc. If double letters are needed, the progression would be AA, -AB, AC, -AZ, -BA, -BB, etc Information Outlets for special purposes shall have a unique identifier listed with the jack ID The identifier shall be inserted into the Outlet ID, between the room number and the Outlet designator as indicated in following drawings Identifiers are listed below: Building Automation "100+BA-A" Fire Panel "100+FP-A" Wireless Access Point (WAP) "100+WD-A" (Wireless Data) 3.5. ALL LABELING SHALL BE COORDINATED WITH AND APPROVED BY AN APPROPRIATE UITS REPRESENTATIVE Schedule a meeting with the UITS representative through the IU Project Manager prior to the permanent labeling of Information Outlets and IDF patch panels. 07/30/2014 gls Section 27 Page 35

484 07/30/2014 gls Section 27 Page 36

485 07/30/2014 gls Section 27 Page 37

486 DATA COMMUNICATIONS User End Equipment and IDF Network Equipment provided by IU VOICE COMMUNICATIONS User End Equipment provided by IU AUDIO-VIDEO COMMUNICATIONS User End Equipment and A/V Closet Equipment provided by IU DISTRIBUTED COMMUNICATIONS and MONITORING SYSTEMS WIRELESS TRANSCEIVERS Equipment provided by IU 07/30/2014 gls Section 27 Page 38

487 Vector Consulting, LLC SECTION PAGE 1 FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE OF WORK A. Add or relocate devices as required during renovation to provide a complete fire alarm system of the Class B electrically supervised, addressable, closed circuit, Code 3, low voltage type as herein described and as indicated on the Drawings. B. Contractor shall provide necessary conduit, cabling, back boxes and miscellaneous parts as required for a complete and operational system, whether or not such parts are specifically enumerated herein. C. All fire alarm devices shall be provided and installed by contractor. Contact owner for brand and model number information for pricing (Joe Phelps, ). D. Owner shall provide all software configuration and modifications as necessary for a complete and operational system as described in the Contract Documents. E. The Owner shall perform final connection, system programming, starting and testing. F. The renovation installation is to conform to the most recent edition of NFPA-72 and the Indiana Electrical Code (IEC) with particular attention to Article 760. G. The installed system renovation and integrated system operations shall conform to the guidelines of Underwriter s Laboratories, Inc. (UL) and Factory Mutual (FM). H. Job specific items shall be handled on a case by case basis. 1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The requirements of the General Conditions of the Contract, Notice to Bidders and General Requirements apply to the work specified in this section as though bound herein. B. The Fire Alarm System shall be properly integrated with related work specified elsewhere. 1.3 APPLICABLE STANDARDS: The following standards shall apply to the work of this section and are adopted by reference as though bound herein. A. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 1. NFPA No. 70 National Electrical Code (current edition for the State of Indiana Amendments). 2. NFPA No. 72 National Fire Alarm Code (latest Edition). 3. NFPA No. 170 Fire Safety Symbols (latest Edition). B. Underwriter s Laboratories (UL): 1. UL No. 50 Enclosures for Electrical Equipment. 2. UL No. 268 Smoke Detectors for Fire Protective Signaling Systems. 3. UL No. 864 Control Units for Fire Protective Signaling Systems. 4. UL No. 268A Smoke Detectors for Duct Application. 5. UL No. 521 Heat Detectors for Fire Protective Signaling Systems. 10/26/15 ET 109/109A (IU# )

488 Vector Consulting, LLC SECTION PAGE 2 FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS 7. UL No. 464 Audible Signal Appliances. 8. UL No Signaling Devices for the Hearing Impaired. 9. UL No. 38 Manually Actuated Signaling Boxes. 10. UL No. 346 Waterflow Indicators for Fire Protective Signaling Systems. 11. UL No Power Supplies for Fire Protective Signaling Systems. C. Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA). D. Factory Mutual (FM): Reference Loss Prevention Data Sheets and the Approval Guide. E. Current Edition of Indiana State Building Code and Indiana Fire Code. F. Current Indiana Mechanical Code. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. EQUIPMENT: 1. Fire alarm devices shall be furnished by the Owner. 2. Approved Fire Alarm Cable Manufacturers: a. Belden Wire & Cable Company P.O. Box 1980 Richmond, IN (765) b. Carol Cable, Co. 4-T Tesseneer Dr. Highland Heights, KY (606) c. West Penn Wire 2833 West Chestnut Street Washington, PA (412) d. Other manufacturers as approved by IUPUI Fire Protection Services. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Submit descriptive literature and shop drawings to Architect/Engineer per Architectural Plans. Complete descriptive literature on each item of equipment proposed for use on the project with index to all equipment. B. Shop Drawings shall include the following data: 1. Floor plans to scale showing equipment and interconnecting raceway and wiring. 2. Rough in and installation details. 3. System riser diagram showing devices, cabinets, junction boxes, cables and conduit sizes. Initiating circuits shall be noted. 4. Accessories provided. C. Upon Completion of Final Testing and Acceptance, submit the required record documents in accordance with section /26/15 ET 109/109A (IU# )

489 Vector Consulting, LLC SECTION PAGE 3 FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS 1.6 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. General: 1. In building renovation area provide a complete Fire Alarm System as described herein and as shown on the plans to be wired, connected, and left in first class operating condition. Including equipment provided and installed by Owner such as manual pull stations, automatic fire detectors, audible devices, visual strobe light units, addressable interface modules, duct detectors with remote indicators. 2. Contractor shall provide conduit, wiring, outlet boxes, junction boxes, and other necessary material for a complete operating system. 3. The system is to be a microprocessor based, multiplexed, 24 volt DC system, Code 3 with horn silencing and strobe continuous, electronically supervised, point location annunciated, closed circuit, Class B wired, capable of identifying which individual device initiated alarm or trouble. The system provides fire and sprinkler piping alarm and trouble signaling to the campus central monitoring station in central attendant services or University Police dispatch that is staffed all the time. B. Wiring System Materials Provided by Electrical Contractor: 1. Wiring shall be installed in EMT conduit when concealed in walls, above ceilings and in furred spaces. IMC shall be used where conduit is exposed and/or in moist locations and exposed to weather. Junction and back boxes to be water proof where INC is used. Threaded fittings shall be used with IMC, and steel compression fittings shall be used with EMT. 2. All wire and cabling to be FPL rated. Initiating loops and control/monitoring circuits shall be copper, 16 AWG twisted pair cable. Notification appliance circuits and 24 VDC power circuits shall be copper, 14 AWG twisted pair solid copper conductors. Where terminals on approved equipment will not accommodate 14 AWG conductors, appropriate terminal lugs shall be used. 3. Terminations and splices shall be made in junction boxes, appropriately sized per NEC, and the junction box location shall be indicated on record documents. Terminations and splices shall be labeled with circuit and device number. 4. Junction boxes shall have red painted covers, labeled as FA and have visual label identifying circuiting. 5. Power limited circuit conductors and their installation shall meet all applicable requirements of NEC Article 760. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. All equipment added to existing system shall be provided and installed by Owner. B. All equipment and components shall be installed in strict compliance with manufacturers recommendations. Consult the manufacturer s installation manuals for all wiring diagrams, schematics, physical equipment sizes, etc., before beginning system installation. C. Consideration shall be given to the environment in which the equipment will be installed. Devices shall be appropriately specified to function in cold, wet or high humidity areas. Weatherproof enclosures, additional heating or cooling shall be provided as required. Panels shall not be installed in rooms containing high voltage switches or electrical switchgear. D. Affix to all panel doors, labels that identify power panel and breaker number. Engraved, Laminated Acrylic or Melamine Label. Black letters on a white background for utility power; white letters on a red background for standby power. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch (10 mm). 10/26/15 ET 109/109A (IU# )

490 Vector Consulting, LLC SECTION PAGE 4 FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS 2.2 INITIATING DEVICES A. Section 2.01 C shall apply. B. All initiation devices shall be labeled with each device s digital address. Labels shall be made with Brother label maker. Labels shall have 1/2- inch letters with the following color scheme: Black letters on a white background. Labels shall be provided and installed by Owner. C. Manual Pull Station: 1. Addressable Pull Stations (Manual Fire Alarm Boxes): Addressable pull stations shall contain electronics that communicate the station s status (alarm, normal) to the control panel over two wires which also provide power to the pull station. The address shall be set on each station. The stations shall be manufactured from high impact red Lexan. Lettering shall be raised and painted white. The station shall mechanically latch upon operation and remain so until manually reset. Pull stations shall be single action. 2. Mount label at top of pull station. D. Ceiling Smoke Detector: 1. Smoke Detector: a. Smoke detector heads shall be photoelectric type utilizing 2-wire loop interface with the fire alarm control panel (FACP). The detector head shall be a separate unit from the base housing. Unit shall have a unique address set on the head or on the base. b. Reporting of an alarm condition to the FACP shall occur when a preset quantity of smoke enters the unit. Each sensor base shall contain an LED to indicate status. Sensors that do not provide a visible indication of an abnormal condition at the sensor location shall not be acceptable. c. A mesh insect screen to reduce possibility of false alarms shall protect detector chamber. d. Detectors shall meet the guidelines of NFPA 72 and shall have a nominal coverage area of 900 square feet. Units shall be designed to operate in ambient temperatures of -10 degrees C to 50 degrees C. The sensors shall be listed to UL Standard 268 and shall be documented as compatible with the control equipment to which they are connected. The sensors shall be listed for ceiling-mount applications. Detectors must be removable by twisting and dropping from base with no tools or release mechanics. e. Provide quantity of smoke detectors as indicated on the Contract Drawings. 2. Standard Base: E. Duct Detectors: a. Detector base shall accommodate plug-in smoke or thermal detector head. Base shall be designed for surface mounting and shall have rear-mounted wiring terminals. Provide quantity of bases as necessary for smoke detector heads. Detector bases shall be labeled on two sides with 1/2-inch labels so that persons traversing corridors or spaces searching for the device can see labels. Label shall have digital address on it. 1. Duct detectors shall be photoelectric, addressable type; mount directly to ductwork and air-handler plenums; provide and install proper sample tubes as required; alarm and normal indicators lights. Location must be accessible by IOSHA approved means. 2. Duct detector housing and remote indicator shall be labeled with 3/4-inch labels so that labels can be seen by traversing spaces searching for the device. Label shall have digital address on it. 10/26/15 ET 109/109A (IU# )

491 Vector Consulting, LLC SECTION PAGE 5 FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS F. Heat Detectors: 1. Hermetically sealed, non-destructed device; rated 135 degree F (except where indicated on Contract Documents as 200 degree F); not affected by barometric pressure; manual reset; provide remote indicator lamps to indicate alarm condition; addressable type; 24 VDC operation; interchangeable base with photoelectric detectors; plug-in unit to twist/lock base; NO and NC auxiliary contacts. 2. In spaces where addressable heat detectors are not compatible with the environment, nonaddressable heat detectors of the type and rating specified in the contract documents/drawings shall be installed and interfaced with compatible addressable interface devices which are located in a suitable environment. 3. Detector bases shall be labeled on two sides with 1/2-inch labels so that persons traversing corridors or spaces searching for the device can see labels. Label shall have digital address on it. G. Linear Beam Detectors: 1. Linear beam detectors shall consist of a light transmitter which emits an invisible modulated infrared beam and light receiver which evaluates various beam conditions; field programmable sensitivity level; built-in LED to indicate alarm condition; approximately 4-second alarm delay; automatic digital compensation circuit; nominally 7-inch high x 4.5-inch wide x 2.75-inch deep units; supervision module in base where required by system to identify the specific detector. 2. Detector bases shall be labeled on two sides with 1/2-inch labels so that persons traversing corridors or spaces searching for the device can see labels. Label shall have digital address on it. H. Flame Detectors: 1. Ultraviolet flame detector shall be Geiger-Muller ionization tube employing a photo cathode with fused quartz or silica envelope; respond only to 1.7 to 2.9 micron light peaking at 2.1 micron corresponding to the emission of gaseous fires and other flames; immune to normal ambient light, incandescent or fluorescent lighting; controlled cone of vision; 24 VDC operation; response time to 12-inch diameter gasoline fire 6 seconds maximum at 30 feet, 3 seconds at 22 feet or less; supervision module in base where required by system to identify the specific detector. 2. Detector bases shall be labeled on two sides with 1/2-inch labels so that persons traversing corridors or spaces searching for the device can see labels. Label shall have digital address on it. I. Sprinkler System Initiating Devices: 1. Sprinkler system initiating devices are to be furnished and installed by the fire protection system piping trades in accordance with Division 15 of the specifications. Sprinkler system initiating devices include, but are not limited to PIV, OS&Y, and butterfly valve tamper switches, flow switches, air pressure monitoring switches and fire pump supervisory switches. 2. Sprinkler system initiating devices shall be connected to compatible addressable interface devices that are connected to the fire alarm system. 2.3 ADDRESSABLE INTERFACE DEVICE A. All addressable interface devices shall be labeled with each device s digital address. Labels shall be made with Brother label maker. Labels shall be 1/2-inch minimum in width with the following color scheme: Red devices shall have red letters on a white background; devices of other colors shall have black letters on a white background. Labels shall be provided by Owner. B. Addressable interface devices shall be used for monitoring of sprinkler water flow, valve tamper and sprinkler supervisory switches. These shall be monitored individually. No gang monitoring shall be acceptable. 10/26/15 ET 109/109A (IU# )

492 Vector Consulting, LLC SECTION PAGE 6 FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS C. Addressable interface devices shall monitor all nonaddressable initiating devices specified in contract document/drawings. D. Addressable interface devices should be used to interface with electromagnetic door holders. Addressable interface devices shall be used to interface the fire alarm system with elevator controls for fire service recall. Addressable interface devices shall be provided wherever there are duct detectors provided and the associated air handling equipment is controlled by the building energy system. E. Addressable interface devices shall be provided for all devices where not previously specified so that all non-addressable equipment required will function as a complete and operational addressable system. 2.4 NOTIFICATION APPLIANCES A. Refer to Section 1.04 A.6 for equipment model numbers. Section 2.01 C shall apply. B. Horn/Strobe Unit: VDC, ADA compliant, strobe and horn unit mounted on common faceplate. Strobe unit shall have an output of candelas appropriate for the area of installation, in accordance with UL 1971 and ADA. Horn unit to have a minimum output of 90 dba as measured in an anechoic chamber at 10 feet. Strobe assembly to have clear lens supported by red escutcheon having the word FIRE in white lettering. Strobe shall be synchronized type to flash in time with other strobe units. Provide quantity of horn/strobe units as indicated in the Contract Documents. Horns shall have ability to be silenced while strobe continues to operate. C. Strobe Unit: VDC, ADA compliant strobe unit. Strobe unit shall have an output of candelas appropriate for the area of installation, as in accordance with UL 1971 and ADA. Strobe assembly to have clear lens supported by red escutcheon having the word FIRE in white lettering. Strobe shall be synchronized type to flash in time with other strobe units. Provide quantity of strobe units as indicated in the Contract Documents. 2.5 MISCELLANEOUS DEVICES A. All miscellaneous devices shall be labeled with each device s digital address. Labels shall be made with Brother label maker. Labels shall be 1/2-inch minimum width with the following color scheme: Black letters on a white background. Labels shall be provided by Owner. B. Door Hold-Open Devices: 1. Provided by Contractor. Hold-open devices shall be electromagnet type with semi-flush hardware to be furnished and installed by general trades in accordance with Division 8 of the specifications. Devices shall be rated 120V and powered by a circuit separate from the fire alarm circuits. A relay shall be used to release the door upon receiving a signal from the fire alarm panel. The relay requires a deep 4 inch square box, flush mounted to the wall within 2 feet of the doors being held open. Separate conduit to be used for 120V power and the data circuit. 120V power to enter the box on the lower right-hand corner. Data to the relay to enter the box on the upper left-hand corner. C. Relays: 1. Provided by Owner. Relay usage shall be coordinated with IUPUI design team and Fire Protection Services. 10/26/15 ET 109/109A (IU# )

493 Vector Consulting, LLC SECTION PAGE 7 FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS D. End of Line Devices: 1. Provided by Owner. End-of-line devices shall be of the type specified by the manufacturer of the fire alarm control panel. 2.6 CABLE, RACEWAY AND ENCLOSURES A. Cabling shall have a UL FPL listing. B. Initiating Device Cable: 1. Cable shall have a UL FPL listing and be so labeled on cable jacket. Size of conductors, number of conductors and overall cable composition shall be in accordance with fire alarm system manufacturer s recommendations. Cable shall be 16 AWG twisted pair. Wire insulation color shall be consistent for all initiating circuits. 2. Cable to be as manufactured by: a. Belden. b. West Penn. c. or approved equal. C. Notification Appliance Cable: 1. Cable shall have a UL FPL listing and be so labeled on cable jacket. Cable shall have #14 AWG solid copper twisted pair conductors. Wire insulation color shall be consistent for all notification circuits but different from other alarm circuits. D. Conductors shall be permanently identified at all connections and junctions so as to quickly identify actual circuits in the field. Digital address loop numbers shall be used as identifying numbers. Identification shall also be included in long runs. Labels shall be Brady wire wrap or Panduit Pan Mark for windows, PROG-WIN2, heat shrink. Information shall be typed or printed, not hand written. E. Raceway: 1. Install fire alarm system cabling and wiring in metal conduit or, in finished spaces, aluminum wireway: a. Use EMT conduit when concealed in walls, above ceilings and in furred spaces. Steel compression fittings shall be used. b. Use IMC conduit in mechanical rooms, tunnels and areas subject to high moisture. Threaded fittings shall be used. c. Use liquid tight flexible metal conduit where conditions of installation, operation or maintenance require flexibility or protection from liquids, vapors or solids. d. In areas where a temperature difference could exist between the raceway and device box (i.e., cold rooms, or indoor/outdoor installations), the conduit shall have a waterproof sealant plug to minimize moisture. e. In finished areas where conduit cannot be concealed, aluminum wireway, such as Wiremold, may be used. Wireway shall transition to metal conduit above the ceiling or within the wall. 2. Fire alarm system wiring shall be installed in complete metallic raceway system separate from power, lighting and communication. 3. Connections to valve monitors, flow switches, and equipment sensors shall utilize jacketed flexible metal conduit. 4. Floors and fire/smoke partition penetrations shall be sleeved and sealed with UL classified materials. 10/26/15 ET 109/109A (IU# )

494 Vector Consulting, LLC SECTION PAGE 8 FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS 5. Provide separate raceway for initiating device circuit and notification device circuit wiring as required by specific manufacturer. F. Enclosures: 1. JUNCTION BOXES: Fire alarm junction boxes shall be painted red enamel. Provide each box with suitable number of terminals and of proper size to hold wiring. Label inside cover of boxes with circuits being served. Label outside cover FA with 1-inch label. Junction box label provided by Contractor. Size of junction box to be a minimum of 4 x Miscellaneous equipment such as monitor and control modules, end-of-line devices, etc., shall be installed in an orderly fashion in a NEMA enclosure suitable to the environment and location of the equipment. Weatherproof boxes shall be utilized where necessary to prevent moisture inside the enclosure. The enclosure shall be hinged with a screw-cover. In finished areas these enclosures shall be flush mounted with room surfaces. In unfinished areas these enclosures may be surface mounted. Enclosures shall be installed 70 inches above finished floor at the top of the box. 3. Enclosures shall be sized in accordance with NEC Section PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Prior to commencing the work of this section, the Contractor shall convene a meeting with Indiana University Construction Management, Indiana University Engineering Services, and the Architect/ Engineer for the purpose of reviewing all contract documents including plans, specifications, and addenda. Review shall include procedures for change orders and other project documents. Site and building survey shall be made to review contract requirements. System testing procedures and requirements shall be confirmed at this time. Inspection milestones shall be set and notifications scheduled. 1. Installation shall be in accordance with the NEC, NFPA 72, and NEMA s Standard of Installation, local and state codes, as shown. 2. All conduit, junction boxes, conduit supports and hangers shall be concealed in finished areas and may be exposed in unfinished areas. Fire alarm devices shall have a protective covering installed prior to the system programming and test period. If construction is ongoing during this period, measures shall be taken to protect any fire alarm device from contamination and physical damage. 3. Wiring of the fire alarm system is work included in this section, but is not specifically detailed on drawings. Complete wiring in accordance with manufacturer s requirements. 4. Fire alarm system wiring shall be installed in a complete metallic raceway system separate from power, lighting, and communication systems. 5. All fire detection and alarm system devices, control panels and remote annunciators shall be flush mounted when located in finished areas and may be surface mounted when located in unfinished areas. 6. Provide the system in accordance with the plans and specifications, applicable codes and the manufacturer s recommendations. Wiring shall be installed in strict compliance with the provisions of IEC Article 760 A and C, Power-Limited Fire Protective Signaling Circuits, or if required, may be reclassified non-power limited and wired in accordance with IEC Article 760 A and D. 7. Upon completion, and prior to final testing, the contractor shall certify that work has been installed in accordance with the code provisions, and that the manufacturer s requirements for warranty support have been met by providing a Record of Completion as outlined in NFPA 72, 1-7.2, to the Owner and General Contractor. 8. Installation of equipment and devices that pertain to other work in the contract shall be closely coordinated with the appropriate subcontractors. 10/26/15 ET 109/109A (IU# )

495 Vector Consulting, LLC SECTION PAGE 9 FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS 9. The Contractor shall clean dirt and debris from the inside and the outside of the fire alarm equipment after completion of installation. 10. Where new devices are indicated to be located where there are existing devices, wall finishes shall be cut, patched, and finished to match adjacent wall finishes, as needed. Coordinate work of this Contract with other Contracts that impact, or are impacted by the work of this Contract. This includes mounting locations, conduit runs, etc. 3.2 INSTALLATION OF INITIATING DEVICES: A. Manual pull stations, unless otherwise indicated, shall be mounted semi-flush in recessed back boxes with operating handles 48 inches to center above finished floor. B. Smoke Detectors: 1. Install detectors indicated to be ceiling mounted not less than 4 inches from a side wall to the near edge. Center ceiling mounted detectors in corridors and spaces as much as possible. Install detectors no closer than 5 feet from air registers. 2. Install detectors in ceiling of finished ceiling areas on properly supported octagon boxes; in areas having no finished ceiling, install detector at or near the overhead deck level; center detectors in ceiling modules. 3. Where a smoke detector is installed within a room, above a ceiling, or otherwise not within view of the corridor; a remote LED status indicator is located on the corridor ceiling immediately outside of the room, or below the smoke detector location. LED indicator provided by Owner. 4. Smoke detector heads shall be accessible for replacement by person standing on floor directly below detector using a solo no climb kit, without the need for a ladder or scaffolding. 5. Where a smoke detector is installed on ceiling tile, center the detector on the tile. 6. Thermal detectors shall be installed a sufficient distance from heat producing equipment to avoid a false alarm. C. Duct Smoke Detector: 1. Where possible, install duct detectors on the air handler unit prior to any humidification equipment in the air stream. Coordinate location with FPS. 2. Install detector housing so that detector head is removable for maintenance without disassembling any of the ductwork or other equipment. 3. Provide IOSHA approved access for servicing of these detectors. 4. Coordinate location and mounting of duct detectors with mechanical trades. Locate sufficient distance from humidification equipment to avoid false alarm. Where only one detector is required, the duct detector shall be installed on the supply side of the air handler. 5. Detector shall be installed per manufacturer s recommendations and UL listing D. Sprinkler System Initiating Devices: 1. Provide conduit, wiring, connections, and appropriate initiation and signal circuits as needed to interface properly with sprinkler system initiating devices as listed in section 2.2 G. 2. Sprinkler system initiating devices shall be installed in locations that are environmentally suitable or shall be protected or listed for use in the hostile environment. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF NOTIFICATION DEVICES: A. Audible notification appliances shall be installed in a deep 4 square box at 80 inches above the finished floor (to bottom of device) or 6 inches below the ceiling (to top of device); whichever is lower in accordance with ADA. Install operating mechanism concealed behind a grille. Combine audible and visible appliances at the same location into a single unit. 10/26/15 ET 109/109A (IU# )

496 Vector Consulting, LLC SECTION PAGE 10 FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS B. Visual notification appliances shall be installed in a deep 4 square box at 80 inches above the finished floor to bottom of device, or 6 inches below the ceiling to top of device, whichever is lower. C. T tapping of notification appliance device conductors to notification appliance circuit conductors shall NOT be accepted. 3.4 ADDRESSABLE INTERFACE AND MISCELLANEOUS DEVICES: A. Provide conduit, wiring, connections, and appropriate initiation and signal circuits as needed to interface properly with addressable interface devices and any other devices required for a complete and operable system as described in the construction documents. B. Miscellaneous equipment such as monitor and control modules, end-of-line devices, etc., shall be installed in UL listed enclosures. In finished areas these enclosures shall be flush mounted with room surfaces. In unfinished areas these enclosures may be surface mounted. Refer to section 2.5 G. for device enclosures. 3.5 SOFTWARE PROGRAMMING: A. The Owner shall perform all system software modifications, upgrades or changes as applicable program changes are applicable for renovation project. 3.6 FINAL TESTING AND ACCEPTANCE: A. Prior to final acceptance of the fire alarm system, the Owner shall test every device and function, including each pull station, each sensing or detection device, each notification appliance, each door release, and each air handling unit shutdown. The completed fire alarm system shall be fully tested in accordance with NFPA-72. B. Personnel required at acceptance testing include: Electrical contractor, sprinkler installer with installation paperwork (Contractors Material & Test Certificate) unless already provided; Owner s representative and/or building representative; design consultant (at Construction Manager s discretion) and Campus Fire Protection Services. When applicable the fire suppression equipment installer and the door or emergency equipment installer shall be present. C. At the scheduled time for acceptance testing, the contractor shall provide updated project drawings indicating locations of the fire alarm devices and a one line diagram of the fire alarm system. Upon arrival at the site, Fire Protection Services will verify that documentation is complete and that necessary personnel are present. Random devices will be selected by FPS and the Fire Alarm Contractor to be smoke tested. Sprinkler devices, fire doors, elevators and other equipment connected to the fire alarm system will be tested. Alarm audible devices will be tested. The fire alarm contractor will give any pertinent instruction pertaining to the alarm system that they feel is necessary. D. If the final acceptance testing does not reveal any code or installation issues, FPS will sign the Record of Completion. E. If the completed system fails to meet the acceptance of the IUPUI Fire Protection Services, the Owner s representative, and Architect/Engineer, punch list items will be given in written form (electronic) to the University Architect s Office via the Construction Manager. FPS will not sign the Record of Completion at that time. The fire alarm contractor shall then: 1. Provide materials and labor required to correct deficiencies for their portion of the work. 2. Materials and labor necessary to meet requirements of the Contract Documents shall be provided at no additional cost to the Owner. 10/26/15 ET 109/109A (IU# )

497 Vector Consulting, LLC SECTION PAGE 11 FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS 3. Arrange for re-testing of the system in the presence of the Owner s representative and Architect/ Engineer after the deficiencies have been corrected. 3.7 WARRANTY: A. Contractor shall warrant the completed new fire alarm system wiring and equipment provided by contractor to be free from inherent mechanical and electrical defects in materials and installation for a period of two (2) years from the date of Final Acceptance. 3.8 RECORD DOCUMENTS: A. Three (3) copies of each document package submitted. B. Provide documents within 14 days of final completion of fire alarm system work. C. Submit three copies of the following documents in drawing format as full size (24 x 36 ) printed drawings and two CD s with electronic AutoCAD Release 2007 files. 1. Scale floor plan drawings shall indicate changes and additions in device locations, circuiting, routing of conductors, and location of any splices. Drawings shall also include schematic of panels indicating all panel components, terminals, and identification of circuits corresponding to plans. Devices and equipment to be labeled with tag numbers and other identifiers. END OF SECTION /26/15 ET 109/109A (IU# )

498

499

500 .